Mercedes Actros User Manual

OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Actros/Arocs
Name: OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Product: 963
Language: ENG
Internet Further information about Mercedes-Benz vehicles and Daimler Truck AG is available online at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-trucks.com
Operating instructions and supplements for your vehicle as well as Custom Tailored Trucks special conversions (CTT) are
available online at:
https://manuals.daimlertruck.com/truckownermanuals/home
Editors You are welcome to forward any queries or suggestions you may have regarding these operating instructions to the
Documentation team at the following address:
[email protected]
© Daimler Truck AG Do not reprint, translate, or duplicate, in full or in part, without the written permission of Daimler
Truck AG.
Copy deadline: 06.03.2024
Vehicle manufacturer Daimler Truck AG
Fasanenweg 10
70771 Leinfelden-Echterdingen
Germany
Item number: A9605840267
Preface for right-hand drive vehicles differ accord- For reasons of clarity, merely the mascu-
ingly. line form is frequently used. All gender
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz identities are, of course, always implied.
Trucks
Always keep these documents in the
Before you drive off for the first time, vehicle. If you sell the vehicle, always pass
read these operating instructions care- Daimler Truck°AG is continuously improv- on all documents to the new owner.
fully and familiarise yourself with your ing its vehicles.
vehicle. Please adhere to the informa- Vehicle data and verifications for body
Daimler Truck°AG therefore reserves the manufacturers can be found in the “Con-
tion and warning notes in these operating right to introduce changes in the following
instructions for your own safety, and to firmations” chapter.
areas:
ensure a longer operating life for your Daimler Truck AG
vehicle. Disregarding them may lead to ● Design
vehicle damage or personal injury. ● Equipment
● Technical features
The standard equipment and product
description of your vehicle may vary, and Therefore the descriptions and illustra-
depends on the following factors: tions provided may occasionally differ
from your own vehicle.
● Model The following documents are integral
● Order parts of the vehicle:
● National version
● Availability ● Operating instructions
● Service booklet
The illustrations in these operating in- ● Equipment‐dependent supplementary
structions show a left-hand drive vehicle. instructions
The locations of vehicle parts and controls
Table of contents
Document organisation . . . . . . . 1 Diagnostics connection . . . . . . . . . 8

At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Use and meaning of symbols . . . . . . 1 Notes on changes to the engine
output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Useful information . . . . . . . . . . 1
Factual and environmental Qualified specialist workshop . . . . . 9 Overhead control panel . . . . . . . . 18
information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Warning notices . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Vehicle registration . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Symbols and structuring aids . . . . 1 Classic cockpit displays . . . . . . 20
Correct use of the vehicle . . . . . . 10
Classic Cockpit warning/indicator
Information on the REACH lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Switch panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Environmental protection . . . . . . . . 2 EU and EFTA countries only: . . . 10
Switch panels in the cockpit . . . 23
Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts . . . . . 2 Notes for persons with electronic Bunk switch panel . . . . . . . . . 29
medical aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Information about attachments, Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . 30
add-on equipment, installations, and Liability for material defects . . . . . 11
conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Combination switch and
Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 multifunction lever . . . . . . . . . . 32
Information on body/equipment
mounting directives . . . . . . . . . 3 Data processing in the
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Occupant safety . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operator's Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Information on service
providers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Data protection information . . . 14 Protection provided by the
Declarations of Conformity and restraint system . . . . . . . . . . 34
National Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Limitations of the protection
Electromagnetic compatibility . . . 6 provided by the restraint
Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG I
Table of contents
Operational readiness of the Travelling safely with children in the Unlocking and locking the central
restraint system . . . . . . . . . . 35 vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Restraint system malfunction . . . 35 Always observe when children are Operating the convenience central
Function of the restraint system in travelling in the vehicle . . . . . . 41 locking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
the event of an accident . . . . . . 35 Be diligent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
The generic term child restraint Cab lock anti-intrusion protec-
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Protection provided by the seat Observe laws and regulations . . . 41
belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) . . . . 51
Detecting risks, avoiding Notes on ATA . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Limitations of the protection dangers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
provided by the seat belt . . . . . 37 Switching ATA on/off . . . . . . . 52
Securing the child restraint
Fastening and adjusting the seat system with the seat belt on the
belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Replacing the key battery . . . . . . 54
co-driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . 39 Problems with the locking
Function of the seat belt warning Notes on pets in the vehicle . . . . . 45 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
for the driver and co-driver . . . . 39
Getting in and out . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Opening and closing . . . . . . . . 46
Side windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Airbag installation location . . . . 39 Electronic key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Protection provided by the Opening and closing the side
Overview of electronic keys . . . . 46 windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Using the emergency key
Limitations of the protection Resetting the side windows . . . . 57
element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
provided by the airbag . . . . . . . 40 Deactivating the function of the
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Carry out lamp check with the
key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
II Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG
Table of contents
Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Notes on seat/daybed MirrorCam system . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Operating the sliding sunroof and combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Notes on the MirrorCam
the pop-up roof . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Folding the top bunk system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Opening and closing the roof up/down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Function of the MirrorCam
hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 To pull out or push in bottom system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Opening and closing the circular bunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Operating the MirrorCam
roof hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 SoloStar Concept . . . . . . . . . . . 77 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Retracting/extending the roller Adjusting the field of vision . . . . 88
sunblind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Using the front passenger's seat
and folding table . . . . . . . . . . 77 Overview of display situations in
the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Folding the bunk down/up . . . . 78
Driver cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Bunks in the M-cab . . . . . . . . . . 80
Notes on the seats . . . . . . . . . . 65 Lamp check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Overview of bunks in the M
cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Light switch overview . . . . . . . 93
Operating the seat . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Bottom standard Switching dipped beam on/
Bunks and daybeds in the L cab . . . 71 bunk/upholstered stowage space off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Overview of bunks and . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Switch daytime running lights on/
daybeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Use bottom standard bunk off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Information on the ladder . . . . . 71 (partitioned) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Switching automatic driving lights
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Folding the top bunk Adjusting the multifunction steering
up/down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Switch front and rear fog light on/
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Folding the bottom bunk
up/down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Cornering light function . . . . . . 96
Adjusts the outside mirrors . . . . 83 How Adaptive Highbeam Assist
works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Activate/deactivate the mirror
heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Combination switch . . . . . . . . 98
Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG III

Table of contents
Switch the illuminated Mercedes Good visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Folding the folding table in/out
star on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Using the windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Switch the rotating beacon wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 Notes on cup/bottle
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Using the windscreen washer holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Switch position lamps on roof system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Couple/uncouple the
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Switch the windscreen heater compressed-air connection in
Activate/deactivate additional on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
headlamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Notes on winter operation . . . . 118 Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Switch interior lighting on/off . . . . 101 Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Notes on the audio device
(radio) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Using the battery disconnect
switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Operate audio devices (radio)
Notes on changing a bulb . . . . . 103 with the bed/bunk switch
Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Overview of sockets . . . . . . . . 119 panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Replacing front bulbs . . . . . . . 105 Use 12 V voltage converter . . . . 121 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Replacing rear bulbs . . . . . . . . 111 Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Using the notebook holder . . . . 130
Replacing interior lighting Using the cigarette lighter . . . . . 121
bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . 132
Activate/deactivate the smoke
Changing additional bulbs . . . . . 112 detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Notes on climate control . . . . . . . 132
Partially masking headlights – left- Stowage spaces and stowage
hand/right-hand traffic . . . . . . . . 114 compartments . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Overview of air conditioning system
Notes on the cosmetic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
IV Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG
Table of contents
Cooling with air dehumidifica- Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Engine diagnosis indicator lamp:
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Notes on air vents . . . . . . . . . 139 BlueTec® 6 vehicles: . . . . . . . 147
Notes on cooling with air Adjusting the air vents . . . . . . . 140 System check after a
dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . 133 malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Switching cooling with air de- BlueTec® 6 exhaust gas after-
humidification (air-conditioning On-board computer and treatment status display . . . . . . 149
system) on/off . . . . . . . . . . . 134 displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . . 150
Setting the temperature . . . . . . . 134 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Notes on/overview of the on-
Notes on the instrument board computer . . . . . . . . . . 150
Setting the air distribution/ cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Operating the on-board
Notes on the rev counter . . . . . 141 computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Demisting/defrosting the Notes on the AdBlue® Overview of areas on the
windscreen and windows . . . . . . . 135 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Switching air-recirculation mode Notes on the fuel display . . . . . 143 Overview of menus on the on-
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Overview of time and outside board computer . . . . . . . . . . 152
temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Trip data menu . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Switch residual heat utilisation on/ Odometer overview . . . . . . . . 144 Driving mode menu . . . . . . . . 154
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Engine diagnosis indicator lamp: Audio and communications
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Vehicles without BlueTec® menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
exhaust gas aftertreatment . . . . 145 Operation and maintenance
Notes on auxiliary heating . . . . . 136
Engine diagnosis indicator menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Forced switch-off . . . . . . . . . . 137 lamp: BlueTec® 4 vehicles and Monitoring information
Switch immediate heating mode BlueTec® 5 vehicles: . . . . . . . 146 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Setting the switch-on time . . . . 138
Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG V
Table of contents
Overview of warning/indicator Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

lamps in the status area . . . . . . . 168 AUX mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Switching the multimedia system
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . 168 USB mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Playback options . . . . . . . . . . 180 Switch sound on or off . . . . . . . 189
Notes on MP3 mode . . . . . . . . 180 Adjusting the volume . . . . . . . 189
Radio with USB port and Displaying and selecting quick-
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Bluetooth® mode . . . . . . . . . . . 181 access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Notes on Bluetooth®
Notes on operating safety . . . . . . 171 operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Activates or deactivates the Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Frequency ranges . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Bluetooth® function . . . . . . . . 182 Setting screen brightness . . . . . 191
Overview of the control panel . . . . 173 Pairing mobile phones . . . . . . . 182 Date and time settings . . . . . . 191
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Accepting and ending a call . . . . 184 Setting the system language . . . 191
Sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Playing back MP3 files . . . . . . . 184 Resetting to factory settings . . . 191
Setting the playing time Operating Bluetooth® functions Bluetooth® connection . . . . . . 191
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 via the multi-function steering
wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Voice control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Starting voice control . . . . . . . 193
Pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Function of the RDS (radio data Saying voice commands . . . . . . 194
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Ending voice control . . . . . . . . 194
Multimedia radio Touch . . . . . 187
Switching RDS on or off . . . . . . 175
Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Switching on the radio . . . . . . . 175 Overview and operation . . . . . . . . 187
Storing radio stations . . . . . . . 175 Information about on Bluetooth®
Overview of Multimedia Radio telephony . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Setting the traffic information Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Telephone menu overview . . . . . 195
Operating the display . . . . . . . 189
Telephone operation . . . . . . . . 195
VI Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG
Table of contents
Radio mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Overview of the card reader for the Start the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 210
Overview of radio menu . . . . . . 196 Truck Data Center . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Notes on automatic engine
Setting radio options . . . . . . . . 197 speed increase . . . . . . . . . . . 212
LED indicator lamp display . . . . . . 201
Storing radio stations . . . . . . . 197 Safety checks . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Reading out the Fleetboard Notes on pulling away . . . . . . . 215
Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 DriverCard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Notes on stopping and switching
Overview of media menu . . . . . 198 Sending messages . . . . . . . . . . 202 off the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Stopping and switching off the
MirrorLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Connectivity services . . . . . . . . . 203 engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Information on MirrorLink™ . . . . 198 Mercedes-Benz Uptime . . . . . . 203 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Connecting a mobile phone via Mercedes-Benz Truck App
MirrorLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Notes on the brake system . . . . 217
Calling up MirrorLink™ apps . . . 199 Fleetboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Checking the compressed-air
brake system for leaks . . . . . . 218
Apple CarPlay® . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Notes on the trailer/semitrailer
Information about Apple Driving mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
CarPlay® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Driver assistance/driving safety sys- ABS (anti-lock braking
Connecting an iPhone® via tems and your responsibility . . . . . 204 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Apple CarPlay® . . . . . . . . . . 199 Function of BAS (Brake Assist
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Truck Data Center . . . . . . . . . 201 Notes on preparing for a Electronic parking brake . . . . . 221
journey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Electric independent trailer
Information about Truck Data Preparing for a journey . . . . . . 205 brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Applying and releasing the hold-
Information on retrofitting
Information on the card reader for the alcohol tester with ing brake on the front axle . . . . 225
the Truck Data Center . . . . . . . . 201 immobiliser . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Frequent-stop brake . . . . . . . . 226
Notes on the ignition lock . . . . . 207
Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG VII

Table of contents
Using the hill holder . . . . . . . . 227 Automatic transmission . . . . . . . . 242 Notes on hydraulic auxiliary
Using the HOLD function . . . . . 229 Overview of push-button drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Continuous brake . . . . . . . . . 230 gearshift and gear display . . . . . 242 Switch hydraulic auxiliary drive
Changing drive programs . . . . . 243 on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Manual transmission . . . . . . . . . 231 Checking the oil level of the
Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Notes on the manual hydraulic auxiliary drive . . . . . . 257
transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Cleaning the radiator/fan of the
hydraulic auxiliary drive . . . . . . 258
Automated manual transmis- Notes on axle and wheel
sion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Using the turbo retarder
Function of the multifunction clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . 258
lever and the gear display . . . . . 232 Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Using hydromove . . . . . . . . . . 246
Multifunction lever . . . . . . . . . 232 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Using manoeuvring mode . . . . . 247
Gear display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Proximity Control Assist . . . . . . 263
Function of ASR (anti-slip
Drive programs and drive control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 PPC (Predictive Powertrain
functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233 Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Deactivating and activating
Notes on pulling away and ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Frontguard Assist . . . . . . . . . 274
stopping (automated manual
transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Function of Stability Control Active Brake Assist 6 . . . . . . . 276
Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249 Traffic Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . 287
Pulling away and stopping the
vehicle (automated manual Deactivating and activating Lane Keeping Assist . . . . . . . . 290
transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Stability Control Assist . . . . . . 249
Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . 293
Driving in the automatic drive Using differential locks . . . . . . 250
Sideguard Assist 2/Active
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Engaging/disengaging front axle Sideguard Assist 2 . . . . . . . . . 294
Driving using the manual drive transfer case . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Trailer Stability Assist . . . . . . . 304
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Switching the off-road gear
transfer case on and off . . . . . . 254
VIII Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG

Table of contents
Level control system . . . . . . . . . 304 Additional axles . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Reverse warning device . . . . . . 332
Notes on level control . . . . . . . 304 Notes on starting-off aid . . . . . . 313 Using the reverse gear lock on
Activating and deactivating the Switching starting-off aid waste collection vehicles . . . . . 333
level control operating unit . . . . 305 on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Notes on the warning tone . . . . 333
Raising or lowering the chassis Raising/lowering the trailing axle Refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
with the operating unit . . . . . . 306 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Raising or lowering the chassis Using steerable additional Fuel and AdBlue® tank . . . . . . 334
with the button on the axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . 307 AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Raising or lowering the chassis Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
with the on-board computer . . . 308 General driving tips . . . . . . . . 316 Trailers/semitrailers . . . . . . . . . 342
Storing/opening the chassis Using an underride guard . . . . . 317 Notes on the trailer and fifth-
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 Road paver mode . . . . . . . . . . 318 wheel coupling . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Setting the driving level . . . . . . 309 Off-road driving . . . . . . . . . . . 320 Coupling and uncoupling . . . . . 344
Loading and unloading the Economical and environmentally Detaching semitrailers and
vehicle when the vehicle is aware driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 uncoupling trailers . . . . . . . . . 348
switched off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Cables and compressed-air
Notes on the diesel particulate
Special functions of the level filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
control system . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Semitrailer tractor hydraulic
Activating and deactivating
Using road paver mode . . . . . . 311 regeneration lockout of the system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
Using raised driving level diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . 329 Activating ramp approach
(vehicles for transportation of Starting manual regeneration of aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
bulk cargo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312 the diesel particulate filter . . . . 330
Using manoeuvring level . . . . . 312 Wind deflector . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Fuel consumption . . . . . . . . . 331
Adjusting the wind deflector . . . 360
Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . 331
Wind deflector diagrams . . . . . 361
Limiting speed . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG IX
Table of contents
Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Refilling the windscreen washer

Maintenance and care . . . . . . 381 system/headlamp cleaning
Winter driving . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 Cleaning and care . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Cleaning the cyclone dust pre-
Parts for operation at low Notes on cleaning the separator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Cleaning the coarse filter for
Notes on the use of a heating and climate control . . . . 398
Working mode . . . . . . . . . . . 371 high-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . 383 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . 398
Notes on the use of automatic Checking the engine oil and
Power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 car washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Power take-off function . . . . . . 371 Notes on cleaning the Oil level, automatic transmis-
Activating/deactivating the exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 sion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
power take-off . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Using steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Notes on the major
Preselecting working speed . . . . 374 Cleaning the sensors . . . . . . . 389 assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Setting the idle/working Notes on washing the Checking the anti-corrosion
speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374 engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Switch emergency operation Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
mode of the engine-driven power Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
take-off (NMV) on/off . . . . . . . 376 Notes on the maintenance
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Tipper mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 Open/close maintenance
How tipper mode works . . . . . . 378 flap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Retracting/extending the Overview of maintenance points
tipper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 under the maintenance flap . . . . 393
Check the coolant level . . . . . . 394
Checking hydraulic fluid level of
the clutch operation system . . . 395
X Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG
Table of contents
Flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Jump-starting, tow-starting and

Breakdown assistance . . . . . . 413 towing away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Preparing for a wheel
Function of telediagnostics . . . . . . 413 change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Performing a jump start . . . . . . 448
Temporary spare wheel Notes on tow-starting/towing
Vehicle tool kits . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Opening/closing the tool kit Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . 431 Manoeuvring and tow-starting/
compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Removing and fitting a Trilex® towing away . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Overview of vehicle tool kits and wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Spring-loaded brake . . . . . . . . 454
emergency equipment . . . . . . . 414 Removing and fitting a Trilex®
Using the jack, pump lever and rim with tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . 457
chock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Electrical fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 Operating and road safety . . . . . . 457
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Remove the main fuse carrier General notes on wheels and
Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Problems when tilting the Fuse assignment diagram . . . . . 440 Notes on replacing tyres and
cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420 Checking safety fuses and the retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . 457
automatic circuit breaker . . . . . 446 Notes on wheels with tyre
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Information on the compressed-air pressure sensors . . . . . . . . . . 458
Starting or switching off the
vehicle with the cab tilted . . . . . 421 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Notes on sound changes or
Draining and bleeding the fuel undesired handling characterist-
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 ics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Locking the air regulation
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Notes on regularly inspecting
wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Rectifying problems starting the
engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG XI
Table of contents
Determining tyre pressure . . . . . . 461 Notes on fuel grade . . . . . . . . 486

Information on diesel fuel in Display messages . . . . . . . . . 496
Tyre pressure table for single accordance with EN 590 . . . . . 487
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462 Notes on display messages . . . . . 496
Information about alternative
Tyre pressure table for twin diesel fuels in accordance with BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat-
tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467 DIN EN 15940 . . . . . . . . . . . 490 ment/diesel particulate filter . . . . 497
Notes on AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . 490
Trailers/semitrailers . . . . . . . . . 501
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Operating data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Lighting system . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Engine identification plate . . . . . . 473 Compressed-air system . . . . . . 492
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Operating fluids and mainten-
Vehicle identification plate/axle ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Wheel nut tightening Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Vehicle identification plate and
Vehicle Identification Number torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Compressed-air system . . . . . . . . 514
(VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Spring-loaded brake cylinder
Vehicle identification plate . . . . 473 release torque/release Electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Radio regulations . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Level control system . . . . . . . . 494 Driving systems . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Wireless vehicle compon- Compressed-air reservoir . . . . . . . 494 Transmission and clutch . . . . . . . 534
ents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Information on the compressed- Engine and cooling . . . . . . . . . . 539
Operating fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 air reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Notes on operating fluids . . . . . 482 Compressed-air reservoir Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
identification plate . . . . . . . . . 495
Notes on engine oils . . . . . . . . 482 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Transmission oils . . . . . . . . . . 484
Notes on coolant . . . . . . . . . . 485 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Notes on refrigerant . . . . . . . . 486
XII Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG

Document organisation
Use and meaning of symbols
Use and meaning of symbols Factual and environmental informa- Symbols and structuring aids
Safety instructions and other important tion Text identifiers
information are specially marked with Identification of damage hazards, possible
symbols. consequences, and instructions for avoid- Instructions
In addition to the notes listed in the con- ance. Messages on the display of the
Display
tent, the safety and accident prevention instrument cluster
regulations of the professional associ- Material damage Expected system response after an
ations must also be observed. action
Environmental damage Unexpected system response after
Generally, even when using instructions, an action
it is assumed that the user information List in any order
is intended only for individuals who, due Warning notices
to their education, experience, and train- Further information on a topic
Identification of hazards, possible con-
ing, are qualified to perform the required Highest menu level to be selected in
sequences, and instructions for avoid- the multimedia system
tasks.
ance. Corresponding submenus to be
At the same time, these persons should selected in the multimedia system
be able to recognise and avoid hazards DANGER. Warns of danger to persons
that may occur during the performance of with possible consequences of
their activities. serious injury or death.
WARNING. Warns of danger to
persons with possible consequences
Useful information of injury.
Additional information is identified as
follows:
Note
Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG 1
General notes
Environmental protection
Environmental protection Note Note

Note A regularly serviced vehicle will con- Pollution of the environment due to
tribute to environmental protection. irresponsible disposal of high-voltage
Environmental damage due to oper-
▶ Always have maintenance work car- batteries
ating conditions and personal driving
style ried out at a qualified specialist work- A high-voltage battery contains environ-
shop. mentally hazardous substances.
The pollutant emission of the vehicle is
directly related to the way you operate ▶ Dispose of any defective high‐
Driving recommendations
the vehicle. voltage battery at a qualified
▶ Do not depress the accelerator pedal specialist workshop.
▶ Operate your vehicle in an environ- when starting the engine.
mentally responsible manner to help
protect the environment.
▶ Do not warm up the vehicle while
stationary. Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
▶ Please observe the following recom-
mendations on operating conditions
▶ Drive carefully and maintain a suitable
Note
distance from the vehicle in front.
and personal driving style. Environmental damage caused by
▶ Avoid frequent, sudden acceleration
not using recycled, reconditioned
Recommendations regarding operat- and braking.
components
ing conditions ▶ Change gear in good time and use
Daimler Truck°AG offers recycled and
each gear only up to ²/₃ of its maxim-
▶ Avoid driving short distances. reconditioned components and parts
um engine speed.
▶ Make sure that the tyre pressure is having the same quality as new parts.
correct.
▶ Switch the vehicle off during periods
The same entitlement from the implied
spent in traffic-related delays.
▶ Do not carry any unnecessary weight. warranty is valid as for new parts.
▶ Drive in a fuel-efficient manner. For a
▶ Adhere to the service intervals.
fuel-efficient driving style, drive in the ▶ Use recycled reconditioned com-
green rpm range. ponents and parts from Daimler
Truck°AG.
2 Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG
General notes
Information about attachments, add-on equipment, installations, and conversions
ently or officially approved by a technical Information about attachments, add-

Danger testing centre. on equipment, installations, and con-
Risk of accident if unapproved parts versions
Certain parts are only officially approved
are used
for installation or modification if they
If you use parts, tyres, wheels, or safety- Information on body/equipment
comply with legal requirements. All Mer-
critical accessories that have not been mounting directives
cedes‐Benz Genuine Parts meet the ap-
approved by Daimler Truck°AG, the proval requirements. The use of non‐ap- For safety reasons, have bodies produced
operating safety of the vehicle may be proved parts may invalidate the vehicle's and fitted in accordance with applicable
jeopardised. Safety-relevant systems, general operating permit. Mercedes‐Benz Trucks body/equipment
e.g. the brake system, may malfunction. mounting directives.
This is the case in the following situations:
▶ Only use Mercedes‐Benz Genuine ● The vehicle type is different from
These body/equipment mounting direct-
Parts or equivalent quality. ives ensure that the chassis and add‐on
that for which the vehicle's general
▶ Only use tyres, wheels and operating permit was granted.
equipment form one unit and that the
accessories that are approved for greatest possible level of operational and
● Other road users may be endangered. driving safety is achieved.
your vehicle model.
● The exhaust gas or noise levels are
Daimler Truck°AG tests Genuine Parts For safety reasons, Daimler Truck AG
adversely affected.
and conversion parts and accessories that recommends the following:
have been specifically approved for your
▶ Always specify the Vehicle Identi- ▶ Do not make any other modifications
fication Number (VIN) when order-
vehicle model for their reliability, safety, to the vehicle.
ing Mercedes-Benz Genuine Parts
and suitability. Despite ongoing market
( → Page 473).
▶ Obtain approval from Daimler
research, Daimler Truck°AG is unable to Truck AG in the event of deviations
assess other parts. Daimler Truck°AG from the approved body/equipment
therefore accepts no responsibility for mounting directives.
the use of such parts in Mercedes‐Benz
Acceptance tests performed by public test
trucks, even if they have been independ-
bodies or official approvals do not rule out
safety risks.
General notes
Operator's Manual
Observe the notes on genuine ▶ Always have conversions or modific- Information about the radiator
Mercedes‐Benz parts ( → Page 2). ations to the vehicle carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop. Even seemingly minor changes to the
You can find the Mercedes‐Benz Trucks vehicle such as attaching a radiator grille
body/equipment mounting directives Notes on cameras and sensors in winter operation are not permitted.
online:
If cameras, sensors and their detection The engine radiator must not be covered.
https://bb-portal.mercedes-benz- Thermo mats, insect screens or similar
ranges are covered or their covers are
trucks.com/de/GLOBAL should also not be used. Otherwise, the
damaged, sensors, cameras or driving and
You can also find information on PIN as- safety systems may malfunction or fail. values produced by the diagnostic system
signment and changing fuses there. will be distorted.
Observe the following notes on cameras
and sensors, especially distance sensors Depending on country‐specific laws and
Note and radar sensors: requirements, the recording of engine dia-
Further information can be obtained at a gnostics data may be legally mandated.
▶ Do not install attachments or ac-
qualified specialist workshop. These data must be reproducible and cor-
cessories in front of the camera or
rect at all times.
the sensor, e.g. bullbars or advert-
Danger ising.
Risk of accident and injury due to im- ▶ Cameras and sensors must not be Operator's Manual
proper vehicle conversions of modi- painted or covered, e.g. by stickers or
fications These operating instructions describe all
foils. possible models as well as the standard
Conversions or modifications to the ▶ The load or the load safety equipment and special equipment of your vehicle.
vehicle may cause systems or compon- must not protrude into the detection Note that your vehicle may not be fitted
ents to no longer function as intended range of the cameras and sensors. with all features described. This is also
and/or jeopardise the operating safety ▶ Have damage to the sensor cover or the case for safety‐relevant systems and
of the vehicle. in the area of the camera repaired functions. Therefore, the equipment on
immediately at a qualified specialist your vehicle may differ from that in some
workshop. descriptions and illustrations.
General notes
Operating safety
The original purchase agreement for your electronics if the two-way radios are
vehicle contains a list of all of the systems Danger manipulated or retrofitted incorrectly.
in your vehicle. Risk of accident or injury due to in-
This may jeopardise the operating safety
correct modifications to electronic
Contact an authorised Mercedes‐Benz of the vehicle.
component parts
Trucks Service Centre if you have any
Carrying out modifications to electronic ▶ Always have work on electrical and
questions about equipment or operation.
components, their software, or wiring, electronic devices carried out at a
The operating instructions and service may impair their function and/or the qualified specialist workshop.
booklet are important documents and function of other interconnected com- If you make any changes to the onboard
should be kept in the vehicle. ponents or safety-relevant systems. electronics, the general operating permit
This may jeopardise the operating safety is rendered invalid.
Operating safety of the vehicle.
▶ Do not tamper with the wiring and Danger
Danger Risk of fire due to flammable material
electronic component parts or their
Risk of accident due to malfunctions software. coming into contact with hot parts of
or system failure the exhaust system
▶ Always have work on electrical and
If you do not have the prescribed ser- electronic devices carried out at a Flammable material such as
vice/maintenance work or any required qualified specialist workshop. leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they
repairs carried out, this may result in come into contact with hot parts of the
malfunctions or system failures. exhaust system.
Note
▶ Always have the prescribed service System malfunctions due to tamper- ▶ When driving off‐road or on unpaved
and maintenance work, as well any ing with or improperly retrofitted ra- surfaces, check the underside of the
required repairs, carried out at a dio equipment vehicle at regular intervals.
qualified specialist workshop. Electromagnetic radiation from two-way ▶ In particular, remove any trapped
radios can interfere with the onboard parts of plants or other flammable
material.
General notes
Declarations of Conformity and National Notes
▶ If damage should occur, immediately If the underbody panelling is damaged, Jack

inform a qualified workshop. flammable materials, such as leaves,
grass or twigs could collect between EU and EFTA countries only:
Note the underbody and underbody panelling. Copy and translation of the original de-
Damage to the vehicle as a result of These materials could ignite if they come claration of conformity:
driving too fast and following impacts into contact with hot components of the
EG Konformitätserklärung 2006/42/EG
to the vehicle underbody or suspen- exhaust system.
Wir, WEBER-HYDRAULIK GMBH,
sion components ▶ If driving safety is impaired while Heilbronner Str. 30, 74363 Güglingen,
In the following situations, in particular, continuing your journey, pull over erklären, dass das Produkt
there is a risk of damage to the vehicle: and stop the vehicle as soon as pos- „Weber-Hydraulik-Unterstellheber“
● The vehicle bottoms out, e.g. on a high sible, while paying attention to road
and traffic conditions, and contact a Typen
kerb or unpaved surfaces.
qualified specialist workshop. ● A 5‐212
● The vehicle is driven too fast over an
▶ Have the vehicle checked and re- ● AD 5‐217
obstacle, e.g. a kerb, speed bumps, or a
paired as soon as possible at a qual- ● AD 10‐220
pothole.
ified specialist workshop. ● AD 12‐270
● A heavy object strikes the underbody ● ADX 10‐370
or suspension components.
Declarations of Conformity and Na- ● AH 25‐240
In situations such as these, damage ● ATN 10‐175
tional Notes
to the body, underbody, suspension ● ATPX 12‐190
components, wheels or tyres may not Electromagnetic compatibility
● ATPX 12‐230
be visible. Components damaged in The electromagnetic compatibility of the ● ATPX 16‐240
this way can unexpectedly fail or, in the vehicle components has been checked ● ATQ 12‐230
case of an accident, may not absorb the and certified according to the currently
resulting force as intended. valid version of Directive UN‐R°10. Belastung: 2.000 bis 100.000 kg
Serien Nr.: ab Baujahr 01/2010
General notes
Declarations of Conformity and National Notes
den einschlägigen grundlegenden Bevollmächtigter technische Dokumenta- ● ATGX

Sicherheits- und Gesundheitsanfor- tion, WEBER-HYDRAULIK GMBH ● ATPX
derungen der EG-Maschinenrichtlinie Heilbronner Straße 30, 74363 Güglingen ● ATQ
entspricht. ● AX
Diese EG-Konformitätserklärung verliert For the United Kingdom only: Belastung: 2.000 bis 100.000 kg
ihre Gültigkeit: Copy and translation of the original de- Serien Nr.: ab Baujahr 01/2022
● bei Veränderungen und Reparaturen claration of conformity:
durch nicht sachkundige Personen, den einschlägigen grundlegenden
UKCA Konformitätserklärung Sicherheits- und Gesundheitsanforder-
● wenn die Produkte nicht entsprechend
den in der Betriebsanleitung Wir, WEBER-HYDRAULIK GMBH, ungen der Supply of Machinery (Safety)
aufgezeigten bestimmungsgemäßen Heilbronner Str. 30, 74363 Güglingen, Regulation 2008 entspricht.
Einsatzfällen eingesetzt werden, erklären, dass das Produkt
Diese UKCA Konformitätserklärung verliert
● die regelmäßig durchzuführenden „Weber-Hydraulik-Unterstellheber“
ihre Gültigkeit:
Überprüfungen nicht ausgeführt wer- Typen ● bei Veränderungen und Reparaturen
den. ● A durch nicht sachkundige Personen,
Einschlägige EG-Richtlinien: ● AD ● wenn die Produkte nicht entsprechend
EG-Maschinenrichtlinie 2006/42/EG ● ADX der Betriebsanleitung eingesetzt wer-
● AH den,
Angewandte Normen: ISO 11530:1993
● AHX ● die regelmäßig durchzuführenden
EN ISO 12100:2010 Überprüfungen nicht ausgeführt wer-
● AL
Qualitätssicherung: ● AT den.
DIN EN ISO 9001:2000
● ATD Einschlägige UK-Richtlinien: Supply of
Güglingen, den 15.12.2021 ● ATDX Machinery / Regulations 2008
Unterzeichnet durch Geschäftsführer, ● ATG Angewandte Normen: ISO 11530:1993
WEBER-HYDRAULIK GmbH ● ATN BS EN ISO 12100:2010-12-31
General notes
Diagnostics connection
Safety of Machinery
Danger
General principles for design
Risk of accident due to connecting
Risk assassment and risk reduction devices to the diagnostics connection
Güglingen, den 01.02.2022 If you connect devices to the vehicle's
Unterzeichnet durch diagnostics connection, the operation
of vehicle systems and operating safety
Geschäftsführer (CEO), may be impaired.
WEBER-HYDRAULIK GmbH
▶ For safety reasons, we recommend
Bevollmächtigter technische Dokumenta-
that you only use and connect
tion
products approved by an authorised
WEBER-HYDRAULIK GMBH Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service
Heilbronner Straße 30, 74363 Güglingen Centre. The connection to and use of another
device at the diagnostics connection can
Note have the following consequences:
Diagnostics connection ● Malfunctions in the vehicle systems
Battery discharging from using
The diagnostics connection is a technical devices connected to the diagnostics ● Permanent damage to the vehicle
interface in the vehicle. It is used, for ex- connection components
ample, in the context of repair and main- Using devices at the diagnostics connec- In addition, connecting equipment to the
tenance work or for reading out vehicle tion drains the battery. diagnostics connection can lead to emis-
data by a specialist workshop. Diagnostic
▶ Check the state of charge of the sions monitoring information being re-
devices should therefore only be connec-
battery. set, for example. This may lead to the
ted at a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Charge the battery if the state of vehicle failing to meet the requirements
charge is low. of the next emissions inspection during
the main inspection.
General notes
Notes on changes to the engine output
Notes on changes to the engine out- this may constitute a punishable offence ● Repair work
put under national legislation. ● Modifications, installations and con-
Output increases can have the following versions
effects: ● Work on electronic components
Qualified specialist workshop
● Change in emission values Daimler Truck AG recommends that you
● Malfunctions Note use an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
● Consequential damage Damage to the engine electronics due Service Centre for this purpose.
to improper intervention
The operating safety of the vehicle is not
guaranteed in all situations. Intervening in the engine electronics
Vehicle registration
may damage vehicle parts and the
The following must be observed after an vehicle's general operating permit may Daimler Truck°AG may ask its author-
output increase: be invalidated. ised service centres to carry out technical
▶ Tyres, suspension, brake system and inspections on certain vehicles. Inspec-
▶ Only have the engine electronics tions improve the quality or safety of the
engine cooling system must be adap-
and the affected parts serviced at a vehicles.
ted to the increased engine power.
qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Have the vehicle recertified. Daimler Truck°AG can only inform you
▶ Report the change in output to the A qualified specialist workshop has the about vehicle checks if it has your regis-
insurer. necessary special skills, tools, and quali- tration data.
fications to carry out the necessary work
This will otherwise lead to the invalidation In the following cases your vehicle may
on the vehicle professionally. This particu-
of the vehicle’s general operating permit not be registered to you yet:
larly applies to work relating to safety.
and its insurance coverage. ● if your vehicle was not purchased at
Always have the following work on the an authorised specialist dealer.
If the vehicle is sold, the buyer must be vehicle carried out at a qualified specialist
informed of the changed engine power of ● if your vehicle has not yet been
workshop: examined at an authorised
the vehicle. If you do not inform the buyer,
● Work related to safety Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service
● Service and maintenance work Centre.
General notes
Correct use of the vehicle
▶ We recommend you register your Information on the REACH regulation Notes for persons with electronic
vehicle with an authorised Mercedes- medical aids
Benz Trucks Service Centre. EU and EFTA countries only:
In addition, there are components in-
▶ Inform Daimler Truck°AG as soon as The REACH regulation (Regulation (EC) no.
stalled in the vehicle that, regardless of
possible about any change in address 1907/2006, Article 33) includes the ob-
the operating status of the vehicle, can
or vehicle ownership. You can do ligation to provide information regarding
generate magnetic fields on a par with
this, for example, at a Mercedes-Benz Substances of Very High Concern (SVHC).
permanent magnets. These fields can be
Trucks Service Centre. Daimler Truck°AG acts in all conscience found, for example, in the area around
to avoid the use and application of these the multimedia or sound system or also
SVHCs and to enable the customer to in the area of the seats, depending on the
Correct use of the vehicle
handle these substances safely. Accord- vehicle equipment.
If you remove any warning stickers, you ing to supplier information and Daimler
or others could fail to recognise certain Truck°AG's internal product informa- For this reason, the following can occur
dangers. tion, there are SVHCs with more than in isolated cases, depending on the aids
▶ Leave warning labels in place. 0.1°percent by weight found in some ele- used:
ments of this vehicle. ● Medical aids malfunctioning
The following information in particular ● Adverse health effects
must be taken into account when using More detailed information can be found at
the vehicle: the following websites: Only have repairs and maintenance work
● The safety notes in this manual https://reach.daimlertruck.com/de in the area of the following components
● Technical data of the vehicle carried out by a qualified specialist work-
https://reach.daimlertruck.com/en shop:
● Traffic rules and regulations
● Vehicle components carrying live
● Laws and safety standards pertaining
voltage
to motor vehicles
● Transmission aerials
● Multimedia system and sound system
General notes
Liability for material defects
▶ Contact a qualified specialist work- Data storage You can find data protection information
shop if you have any questions. regarding how Daimler Truck AG collects
Data processing in the vehicle and uses personal data from the vehicle
Electronic control units under the ”Data protection information"
Liability for material defects heading ( → Page 14) in these operating
Electronic control units are fitted in your
instructions.
Note vehicle. Control units process data that
Damage to the vehicle arising from they receive from vehicle sensors, for ex-
ample, generate themselves or exchange Personal data
violation of these operating instruc-
tions with each other. Some control units are Every vehicle is identified by a unique
required for the safe operation of your vehicle identification number. Depending
Damage to the vehicle can arise from
vehicle, some assist you when driving on the country, this vehicle identification
violation of these operating instructions.
(such as driver assistance systems), while number can be used by, for example,
Such damage is not covered by the ma-
others enable convenience or infotain- governmental authorities to determine
terial defect liability warranty.
ment functions. the identity of the owner. There are other
▶ Follow the instructions in these The following provides you with general possibilities for using data collected from
operating instructions on proper the vehicle to identify the owner or driver,
information regarding data processing
operation of your vehicle as well as such as the licence plate number.
in the vehicle. Additional information re-
on possible vehicle damage.
garding exactly which data in your vehicle Therefore, data generated or processed
is collected, saved, and transmitted to by control units may be attributable to a
third parties, and for what purpose, can person or, under certain conditions, be-
be found in the information directly re- come attributable to a person. Depending
lated to the functional characteristics in on which vehicle data is available, it may
question in their respective operating in- be possible to make inferences about, for
structions. This information is also avail- example, your driving behaviour, your loc-
able online and, depending on the vehicle ation, your route or your use patterns.
equipment, digitally.
General notes
Data storage
Legal requirements regarding the This includes the following data, for ex- ● malfunctions or faults in important
disclosure of data ample: system components, such as lights or
If legally required to do so, manufactur- ● vehicle status information such as brakes
ers are, in individual cases, legally obliged the speed, longitudinal acceleration, ● system reactions in special driving
to provide governmental entities, upon lateral acceleration, number of wheel situations, such as airbag deployment
request and to the extent required, data revolutions, or the fastened seat belts or the intervention of stability control
stored by the manufacturer. For example, display systems
this may be the case during the investiga- ● ambient conditions, such as temper- ● Information on events leading to
tion of a criminal offence. ature, or data from the rain sensor or vehicle damage
distance sensor ● State of charge of the high‐voltage
Governmental entities are themselves, in
Generally, the use of these data is tem- battery, estimated range
individual cases and within the applicable
legal framework, authorised to read out porary; it will not be stored beyond the In certain cases, it may be required to
data from the vehicle. In the case of an period of operation and will only be pro- store data that would have otherwise
accident, information that could help cessed within the vehicle itself. Control been used only temporarily. This may
with an investigation can, therefore, be units, such as vehicle keys, often con- be the case if the vehicle has detected
read out from the airbag control unit, for tain data memories. Their use permits a malfunction, for example.
example. the temporary or permanent document- If you use services, such as repair ser-
ation of technical information about the vices and maintenance work, stored oper-
Operational data in the vehicle vehicle's operating state, component ational data as well as the vehicle identi-
loads, maintenance requirements, and fication number can be read out and used,
This is data regarding the operation of technical events or faults.
the vehicle, which has been processed by if necessary. They can be read out by ser-
control units. Depending on the technical equipment, vice network employees, such as work-
the following data is stored: shops and manufacturers, or third parties,
● operating status of system compon- such as breakdown services. The same
ents, such as fill levels, tyre pres- is true in the case of warranty claims and
sures, or battery statuses quality assurance measures.
General notes
Data storage
In general, the read‐out is performed via Convenience and infotainment func- ● Data on the use of Internet services
the legally prescribed port for the dia- tions This data for convenience and infotain-
gnostics connection in the vehicle. The
You can store convenience settings and ment functions may be saved locally
operational data that is read out docu-
individual settings in the vehicle and in the vehicle or they may be located
ments the technical states of the vehicle
change or reset them at any time. on a device that you have connected to
or individual components, and assist in
the vehicle, such as a smartphone, USB
the diagnosis of malfunctions as well as Depending on the vehicle equipment,
flash drive or an MP3 player. If you have
compliance with warranty obligations this includes the following settings, for
entered this data yourself, you can delete
and quality improvement. To that end, example:
it at any time.
this data, in particular information about ● Seat and steering wheel positions
component loads, technical events, mal- ● Suspension and climate control set- This data is transmitted from the vehicle
functions, and other faults, may be trans- tings to third parties only at your request. This
mitted along with the vehicle identific- applies, in particular, when you use online
● individual settings, such as interior
ation number to the manufacturer. Fur- services in accordance with the settings
lighting
thermore, the manufacturer is subject to that you have selected.
product liability. For this reason, the man- Depending on the selected equipment,
ufacturer also uses operational data from you can import data into vehicle infotain- Smartphone integration (e.g. Android
the vehicle, such as for recalls. This data ment functions yourself. Auto or Apple CarPlay®)
can also be used to examine the custom- Depending on the vehicle equipment, this If your vehicle is accordingly equipped,
er's warranty claims. includes the following data, for example: you can connect your smartphone or an-
Fault memories in the vehicle can be reset ● Multimedia data, such as music, films other mobile end device to the vehicle.
by a service outlet or, at your request, as or photos for playback in an integ- You can then control them by means of
part of repair or maintenance work. rated multimedia system the controls integrated in the vehicle. Im-
● Address book data for use in an in- ages and audio from the smartphone can
tegrated hands‐free system or an be output via the multimedia system. Cer-
integrated navigation system tain information is simultaneously trans-
● Entered navigation destinations ferred to your smartphone. Depending on
General notes
Data storage
the type of integration, this includes po- you have brought into the vehicle, for ex- Third party services
sition data, day/night mode, and other ample, a smartphone. Online functions
If you use online services from other pro-
general vehicle statuses. For more inform- can be used via the wireless network con-
viders (third parties), these services are
ation, please consult the vehicle/infotain- nection. This includes online services and
the responsibility of the provider in ques-
ment system operating instructions. applications/apps provided to you by the
tion and subject to that provider's data
This integration allows the use of selected manufacturer or by other providers.
protection conditions and terms of use.
smartphone apps, such as navigation or As a general rule, the manufacturer has
music player apps. There is no further Manufacturer's services no influence on the content exchanged.
interaction between the smartphone and Regarding the manufacturer's online ser- You can obtain information about the
the vehicle; in particular, vehicle data is vices, the individual functions are de- type, scope, and purpose of the collec-
not directly accessible. scribed by the manufacturer in a suitable tion, as well as the use of personal data
The type of additional data processing place, for example, in the operating in- as part of third‐party services from the
is determined by the provider of the app structions or on the manufacturer's web- respective service provider.
being used. Which settings you can make, site.
if any, depend on the specific app and the You can have services and functions,
operating system of your smartphone. some of which are subject to a fee, activ- Data protection information
ated or deactivated. This excludes legally Daimler Truck°AG offers various digital
prescribed functions and services, such as services for its vehicles and works re-
Information on service providers an emergency call system. lentlessly to further develop its products,
Wireless network connection At a workshop, for example, with the sup- services, and processes, improving their
If your vehicle has a wireless network con- port of a specialist and possibly for a fee, quality and adapting them to customers'
nection, it enables data to be exchanged you can have data read out which is only needs.
between your vehicle and additional sys- stored locally in the vehicle. Daimler Truck°AG processes vehicle data
tems. The wireless network connection for these purposes. While vehicle data
is made possible by the vehicle's own constitutes technical information, it can
transceiver or by a mobile end device that to a certain extent be traced back to the
General notes
Copyright
keeper or driver of a vehicle. For this reas- Copyright

on, it falls under the scope of data pro-
Information on licences for free and open‐
tection legislation. However, it can some-
source software used in your vehicle,
times identify the owner or driver of a
along with updates, is available online
vehicle and is therefore subject to data
at:
protection legislation.
https://manuals.daimlertruck.com/
Further information in accordance with
truckownermanuals/conformity
Art. 13 & 14 of the EU General Data
Protection Regulation on how Daimler
Truck°AG collects and uses personal data
for the aforementioned purposes can be
found online at:
https://www.mercedes-benz-
trucks.com/gdpr-vehicle-user
At a glance
Cockpit
Cockpit Item Description Page

1 Switch panel
2 Air vent (example) 139
3 Light switch 93
4 Instrument cluster 141
5 Multifunction steering wheel
6 Multifunction lever
7 Climate control operating 132
unit
8 Radio with USB port 173
Multimedia radio Touch 187
9 Cigarette lighter 121
Power socket (example) 119
A Sensors/camera driver 389
assistance systems
Overview (example using a left-hand drive vehicle)
B Drawer/stowage compart- 123
ment/stowage compart-
ment
C Folding table 127
D Power socket (example) 119
24 V
E USB port
F Stowage space/climbing 71
aid for the top berth
G Cup holder 128
At a glance
Cockpit
Item Description Page

H Main fuse carrier cover 439
I Ashtray
J Differential locks 250
Control knob
K Electronic parking brake 221
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) 304
Electric independent trailer
brake
L Horn (compressed-air/
signal horn)
M Adjusting the multifunction 82
steering wheel
N Switch panel
O Combination switch 98
P Ignition lock/start/stop 207
button
At a glance
Overhead control panel
Overhead control panel Item Description Page

1 Drawer/stowage compart- 123
ment
2 Smoke detector 122
3 Drawer/stowage compart- 123
ment
4 Switch panel
¦ Roller sunblind 64
Retract
§ Roller sunblind 64
Extend
Ú Illuminated Mercedes star 99
o Interior lighting 101
Driver's reading lamp
Overview (example using a left-hand drive vehicle) Í Interior lighting 101
Night lighting
c Interior lighting 101
Interior lamps
k Interior lighting 101
Automatic interior lighting
control
¸ Sliding sunroof/pop-up roof 58
Open
P Sliding sunroof/pop-up roof 58
Close
At a glance

5 DIN slots for:
Two-way radio (see separate
operating instructions)
Digital tachograph (see sep-
arate operating instructions)
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Item Description Page

1 Speedometer
Classic cockpit displays
2 On-board computer 151
3 Rev counter 141
4 AdBlue® level 142
(Vehicles with BlueTEC®
exhaust gas aftertreatment)
Supply pressure of brake
circuits (vehicles without
BlueTec® exhaust gas
aftertreatment)
5 Total distance and trip 144
distance
6 Clock and outside temper- 143
ature display
7 Fuel level 143
Instrument cluster (example)
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Classic Cockpit warning/indicator Item Description Page

lamps 1 Warning and indicator lamps
on the speedometer
; Engine diagnostics 145
º Cab tilt lock 416
¸ Level control/driving level 304
D Electric power steering/ 523
steerable additional axle
i Differential locks 250
W Rev counter 141
Instruction to brake at high
engine speeds
2 Turn signal indicators 99
3 Warning and indicator lamps
on the rev counter
¿ Hill holder 227
l Active Brake Assist 280
switched off
Á Stability Control Assist 249
Control intervention
ASR (acceleration skid 248
control system)
Control intervention
k Stability Control Assist 249
switched off
At a glance
Instrument cluster
Item Description Page Item Description Page

ASR (acceleration skid 248 Warning/indicator lamps in 168
control system) the status area
switched off
À ASR (acceleration skid 248
control system)
! ABS (anti-lock braking 219
system)
J Brake malfunction 213
ß Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) 304
function
4 Warning/indicator lamps on
the AdBlue® display
É Diesel particulate filter 328
Automatic regeneration
Â Diesel particulate filter 328
Malfunction
5 Warning/indicator lamps
below the on-board com-
puter
T Light switch 93
Parking lights
K Adaptive Highbeam Assist 96
Ã Continuous brake 230
X Turbo retarder clutch 245
! Parking brake
! Leading axle/trailing axle 314
At a glance
Switch panels
Switch panels Item Description Page

1 Driver's door switch panel
Switch panels in the cockpit
2 Switch panel
Driver cockpit
D Cargo liftgate (see separate
operating instructions)
i Work lamp (switched off
automatically when the
vehicle pulls away)
¥ Chassis 306
raising
¦ Chassis 306
lowering
é Additional headlamps 100
J 12 V voltage converter 121
3 Switch panel
Ó FleetBoard with driver card 201
Service Call
Ø Level control system 309
Driving level
Switch panels in the driver cockpit (example)
ê Level control system 312
raised driving level
¤ Level control system 307
STOP
þ Level control/manoeuvring 312
level
ë Road paver mode 311
At a glance
Switch panels

F Constant-rpm control 374 1 Manoeuvring mode 247
I Power take-off 371 à ASR (acceleration skid 248
control system)
J 12 V voltage converter 121
k Stability Control Assist 249
C Electro-hydraulic cab tilt 420
system £ Hazard warning light system
, ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm 51 i Differential locks 250
system)
â Leading axle/trailing axle 314
¨ ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm 52
system) å Starting-off aid 313
Panic alarm Õ Steerable additional axle 315
þ Battery disconnect switch 118 * Reverse warning device 332
q ABS (anti-lock braking 219 À Rotating beacon 100
system)
© Position marker lamp 100
â Automatic tyre chains
Roof
(see separate operating
instructions) F Hydraulic auxiliary drive 255
É Diesel particulate filter 330 è Windscreen heater 117
Starting regeneration
Ê Diesel particulate filter 329
Regeneration lockout
¿ Hill holder 227
x Frequent-stop brake 226
m Off-road gear transfer case 254
i Rocking-free function 239
í Crawler mode 238
At a glance
Switch panels
Door control units Item Description Page

d Door control unit for
driver's door
| MirrorCam system 87
Selects display, left
~ MirrorCam system 87
Selects display, right
Í MirrorCam system 87
Sets field of view
Î MirrorCam system 87
Activate/deactivate camera
heating
Ï MirrorCam system 87
Activate/deactivate auto-
matic field of view adjust-
ment/manoeuvring view
W Opens/closes the side 56
Vehicles with MirrorCam (example) windows
Driver door
activate
ç Unlocking and locking the 47
central locking system
unlock/lock
e Door control unit for
co-driver's door
p Interior lighting 101
Co-driver's reading lamp
At a glance
Switch panels

Interior lamps
windows
Front passenger door
ç Unlocking and locking the 47
unlock/lock
activate
At a glance
Switch panels
Door control units Item Description Page

d Door control unit for
driver's door
| Outside mirrors 83
Left
~ Outside mirrors 83
Right
Í Outside mirrors 83
setting
Î Mirror heater 84
Ï Outside mirrors 83
Manoeuvring function for
the co-driver's outside
mirror
windows
Ë Unlocking and locking the 47
Vehicles with outside mirrors (example)
lock
Ì Unlocking and locking the 47
unlock
e Door control unit for
co-driver's door
p Interior lighting 101
Co-driver's reading lamp
Interior lamps
At a glance
Switch panels

windows
Front passenger door
Ë Unlocking and locking the 47
lock
Ì Unlocking and locking the 47
unlock
At a glance
Switch panels
Bunk switch panel Item Description Page

1 Bed/berth switch panel
÷ Auxiliary heating 137
H Audio equipment 129
I Audio equipment 129
¸ Sliding sunroof/pop-up roof 58
Open
P Sliding sunroof/pop-up roof 58
Close
Ë Interior lighting 101
Ì Interior lighting 101
2 Switch panel
activate
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel Item Description Page

1 Left group of buttons on
the multifunction steering
wheel
On-board computer 151
Operation:
u Selecting the next main
menu/selecting next entry
in input window, increasing
or resetting value
t Selecting the previous main
menu/selecting previous
entry in input window or
reducing the value
r Next menu window/one
menu bar down in input
window
s Previous menu window/
Example: buttons on the multifunction steering wheel one menu bar up in input
window
9 Opening and closing input
window/acknowledging
display messages
Ú Saving/displaying favourite
menu window
W Audio/telephone/commu- 157
nication
Louder
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel

X Audio/telephone/commu- 157 Setting the specified
nication distance (Proximity Control
Quieter Assist)
6 Audio/telephone/commu- 157
2 Right-hand button group
nication
on the multifunction
steering wheel Making, accepting calls/
displaying telephone Tele-
Operating the driving
phone menu window
systems:
~ Audio/telephone/commu- 157
h Selecting cruise control 261
nication
Selecting Proximity Control 263 Ends/rejects a call
Assist
Ñ Switching on and setting
the current speed/speed
limit, adjust set speed/
speed limit
q Switching on and calling the
stored speed/speed limit,
reducing the set speed/
speed limit
È Selecting limiter 259
o Switch off Limiter/Cruise
control/Proximity Control
Assist
Ù Driving systems menu
window
Setting the speed tolerance
(cruise control/Proximity
Control Assist)
At a glance
Combination switch and multifunction lever
Combination switch and multifunc- Item Description Page

tion lever d Combination switch
1 High beam on (when dipped
beam is switched on)
High beam is automatically
controlled (when Adaptive
Main Beam Assist is
activated)
2 High beam off (when dipped
beam is switched on)
3 Headlamp flashing
4 Turn signal indicator, right
5 Turn signal indicator, left
6 Wiping with washer flu-
id/single wipe
7 Windscreen wipers
e Multifunction lever
8 Continuous brake
9 Automatic gearshift selec-
tion – direction of travel
selection
h Drive/driving forwards
i Neutral
k Reverse
At a glance
Combination switch and multifunction lever

A Drive program selection
o automatic drive
program A or manual drive
program M
B Automatic gearshift – manu-
al upshifting, automatic
drive program
Manual drive program
C Automatic gearshift – manu-
al downshifting, automatic
drive program
Manual drive program
Occupant safety
Restraint system
Restraint system and driver's airbags are not deployed in against objects penetrating the vehicle
every accident. from the outside. The risk of an injury
Protection provided by the restraint resulting from airbag deployment also
The seat belt system does not include a
system cannot be ruled out entirely.
seat belt tensioner if the vehicle does not
The restraint system comprises the fol- have a driver's airbag.
lowing components:
● Seat belt system For the restraint system to provide its full Limitations of the protection
protection, each occupant must observe provided by the restraint system
● Driver's airbag
the following:
In the event of an accident, the restraint ▶ Fasten seat belts correctly. Danger
system can reduce the forces to which Risk of injury or death due to modific-
▶ Be in an almost upright position with
the vehicle occupants are subjected. ations to the restraint system
their back against the seat backrest.
In addition, the driver's airbag and the ▶ Sit with feet resting on the floor Vehicle occupants may no longer be
seat belt tensioner of the driver's seat whenever possible. protected as intended if alterations are
help prevent the driver from coming into ▶ Always secure persons under 1.50 m made to the restraint system.
contact with parts of the vehicle interior in in height in an additional restraint ▶ Never alter the parts of the restraint
the event of an accident. system suitable for Mercedes-Benz system.
A seat belt can only provide the best level trucks. ▶ Never tamper with the wiring or any
of protection if it is worn correctly. electronic component parts or their
▶ Always observe the notes on
Vehicles with driver's airbag Depending adjusting the seats ( → Page 65) software.
on the detected accident situation, the and adjusting the steering wheel ▶ If it is necessary to adjust the vehicle
seat belt tensioner for the seat belt of the ( → Page 82). to accommodate a person with dis-
driver's seat and the driver's airbag sup- abilities, contact a qualified specialist
No system available today can completely
plement the protection offered by a cor- workshop.
eliminate injuries and fatalities in every
rectly worn seat belt. Seat belt tensioners
accident situation. In particular, the seat
belt and airbag generally do not protect
Occupant safety
Restraint system
Daimler Truck AG recommends contacting Factors which can only be seen and meas-
an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Danger ured after a collision has occurred do not
Service Centre. Risk of injury due to malfunctions in play a decisive role in the deployment of
the restraint system an airbag. nor do they provide an indica-
Components in the restraint system tion of airbag deployment.
Operational readiness of the restraint may be activated unintentionally or not
system The vehicle may be deformed significantly
deploy as intended in an accident. without any deployment of the airbag.
The functions of the restraint system
are checked during the self‐test when
▶ Have the restraint system checked This is the case if only parts which are
and repaired as soon as possible at relatively easily deformed are affected and
the vehicle is switched on. If the 6
a qualified specialist workshop. the rate of cab deceleration is not high.
restraint system warning lamp does not
Conversely, the airbag may be deployed
light up in the instrument cluster, the
even though the vehicle suffers only minor
components of the restraint system are Function of the restraint system in deformation. If very rigid vehicle parts
operational. the event of an accident such as longitudinal members are hit, for
Overview of warning/indicator lamps How the restraint system works depends example, the cab deceleration may be
( → Page 168). on the severity of the impact detected and high enough for this to happen.
the frontal impact anticipated. When a deployment situation is detec-
Restraint system malfunction The activation threshold for the compon- ted, the seat belt tensioner for the driver's
ents of the restraint system is determined seat belt and the driver's airbag are de-
If the restraint system warning lamp 6
by evaluating the cab deceleration. This ployed together.
lights up in the instrument cluster, this
evaluation is pre‐emptive in nature. The
means a malfunction has occurred in the
triggering/deployment process for the
restraint system.
seat belt tensioner and driver's airbag
should take place in good time at the start
of the collision.
Occupant safety
Seat belts
persons suffering from asthma or ▶ Always ensure that all vehicle occu-
Danger other pulmonary conditions. pants have their seat belts fastened
Risk of burns from hot airbag com- Provided it is safe to do so, leave the correctly and are sitting properly.
ponents vehicle promptly, or open the window ▶ Always Observe the notes on
The airbag parts are hot after an airbag in order to prevent any breathing adjusting the seats ( → Page 65)
has been deployed. difficulties from arising. and adjusting the steering wheel
▶ Do not touch the airbag parts. ( → Page 82).
▶ Have a deployed airbag replaced at Seat belts In order for the correctly worn seat belt to
a qualified specialist workshop as provide the intended level of protection,
soon as possible. Protection provided by the seat belt
each vehicle occupant must observe the
▶ Always fasten your seat belt correctly following information:
Daimler Truck AG recommends that you
before starting a journey.
have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe- ● The seat belt must not be twisted and
cialist workshop after an accident. Take A seat belt can only provide the best level
must fit tightly and snugly across the
this into account particularly if a seat belt of protection if it is worn correctly.
body.
tensioner or airbag was deployed.
● The seat belt must be routed across
If the seat belt tensioners or the driver's Danger the centre of the shoulder and as low
airbag are deployed, you will hear a bang, Risk of injury or death due to incor- down across the hips as possible.
and a small amount of powder may be rectly fastened seat belt ● The shoulder section of the seat belt
released: If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it should not touch your neck nor be
● The bang will not usually affect your cannot perform its intended protective routed under your arm or behind your
hearing. function. back.
● In general, the powder released is not In addition, an incorrectly fastened seat ● Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. a
hazardous to health but may cause belt can also cause injuries, for example, winter coat.
short‐term breathing difficulties to in the event of an accident, or when ● Press the lap belt as low as possible
braking or changing direction suddenly. into the hip crease and tighten the
Occupant safety
Seat belts
shoulder belt portion. Never route the ▶ To secure objects, luggage, or pay-
lap belt across your abdomen. load, always observe the instructions Danger
Pregnant women must also take par- on stowage spaces and stowage com- Risk of injury or death when addition-
ticular care with this. partments ( → Page 123). al restraint systems are not used for
● Never route the seat belt across persons with a smaller build
sharp, pointed, abrasive or fragile Persons under 1.50 m in height may not
Limitations of the protection be able to fasten their seat belt correctly
objects.
provided by the seat belt without a suitable additional restraint
● Only one person may use each seat
belt at any given time. system.
Danger
● Never secure objects with a seat belt Risk of injury or death due to incor- ▶ Always secure persons under
if the seat belt is being used by one rect seat position 1.50 m in height in a suitable
of the vehicle's occupants. It must additional restraint system.
The seat belt does not offer the intended
be ensured that no objects, such as
level of protection if you have not moved
pillows, are placed between a person Danger
the seat backrest to an almost vertical
and the seat.
position. Risk of injury or death due to dam-
● Your feet should always be placed aged or modified seat belts
on the ground. You should not, for In particular, you might slide underneath
the seat belt and injure yourself. Seat belts cannot provide protection in
example, put your feet on the dash-
the following situations:
board. Otherwise, when braking or in ▶ Adjust the seat properly before com-
the event of an accident, you could ● The seat belt is damaged, has been
mencing your journey.
slide underneath the seat belt. modified, is extremely dirty, bleached, or
▶ Always ensure that the seat back-
dyed.
▶ When transporting a child in rest is in an almost vertical position,
the vehicle, always observe the and that the shoulder belt is routed ● The seat belt buckle is damaged or
instructions and safety notes across the centre of your shoulder. extremely dirty.
on “Children in the vehicle”
( → Page 41).
Occupant safety
Seat belts
● Modifications have been made to the approved for the relevant type of vehicle
seat belt tensioner, seat belt anchorage, by Daimler Truck AG. Otherwise, your Note
or seat belt retractor. vehicle's general operating permit could Damage caused by trapping the seat
be invalidated. belt
Seat belts may sustain non-visible dam-
age in an accident, e.g. due to glass If an unused seat belt is not fully retrac-
splinters. Danger ted, it may become trapped in the door
Risk of injury or death from deployed or in the seat mechanism.
Modified or damaged seat belts could
tear or fail in the event of an accident, pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners ▶ Always ensure that an unused seat
for example. Pyrotechnic seat belt tensioners that belt is fully retracted.
have been deployed are no longer oper-
Modified belt tensioners may be de-
ational and are unable to perform their
ployed unintentionally or not function Fastening and adjusting the seat
intended protective function.
as intended. belts
▶ Therefore, have deployed pyrotech-
▶ Never modify the seat belt system, nic seat belt tensioners as soon as
If the seat belt is pulled out quickly or
for example the seat belt, seat belt sharply, the seat belt retractor locks.
possible replaced at a qualified spe-
buckle, seat belt tensioner, seat The belt strap cannot be pulled out any
cialist workshop.
belt anchorage, or the seat belt further.
retractor. Daimler Truck AG recommends that you
▶ Make sure that the seat belts are have the vehicle towed to a qualified spe- Note
not damaged, are not worn, and are cialist workshop after an accident. A seat belt can only provide the best
clean. level of protection if it is worn correctly.
▶ Always have the seat belts checked Observe the notes on fastening the seat
at a qualified specialist workshop as belt ( → Page 36).
soon as possible after an accident.
use seat belts that have been specifically
Occupant safety
Airbag
engaged. Information on operating Airbag

the seat ( → Page 67).
Airbag installation location
The installation location of the driver's
Releasing the seat belt airbag is identified by the AIRBAG label on
▶ Press the release button in the seat the steering wheel.
belt buckle and guide the seat belt When deployed, the driver's airbag can
back with the seat belt tongue. increase protection of the driver's head
and thorax.
Function of the seat belt warning for
the driver and co-driver Protection provided by the airbag
▶ Always engage the seat belt tongue The ü seat belt warning lamp in the Depending on the accident situation, an
2 of the seat belt into the seat belt instrument cluster is a reminder that all airbag can supplement a seat belt which
buckle 1 of the corresponding seat. vehicle occupants must wear their seat is worn correctly, thereby increasing pro-
belts correctly. tection.
Adjusting the seat belt height A warning tone may also sound.
▶ With the release knob depressed, Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Danger
adjust the belt sash guide 3 to the seat belt warning lamp ü extinguishes Risk of injury or death due to incor-
position appropriate to your body and the warning tone is switched off: rect seat position
size. ● The driver's seat belt is fastened. If you deviate from the correct seat posi-
Engage the belt sash guide ● The driver and co‐driver have tion, the airbag cannot perform its inten-
fastened their seat belts. ded protective function.
▶ Let go of release knob and make Every vehicle occupant must ensure the
sure that seat belt sash guide 3 has Overview of warning/indicator lamps
( → Page 168). following points:
Occupant safety
Airbag
● Fasten seat belts correctly. Pregnant ▶ Always place your feet on the floor. notes on a suitable place to fit ac-
women must take particular care to Do not, for example, place your feet cessories.
ensure that the lap belt never lies across on the dashboard. ▶ There are no heavy, sharp-edged
the abdomen. ▶ If children are travelling in the or fragile objects in the pockets of
● Observe the following notes. vehicle: Observe the additional notes your clothing. Stow such objects in a
( → Page 41). suitable place.
▶ Always ensure that there are no ▶ Always stow objects correctly and
objects located between the airbag securely.
and the vehicle occupant. Limitations of the protection
Objects in the vehicle interior could provided by the airbag
Every vehicle occupant must observe the jeopardise the correct functioning of
following notes to prevent risks due to the an airbag. Every vehicle occupant must Danger
airbag deploying: always ensure the following points: Risk of injury due to modifications to
▶ Adjust the seats properly before be- ▶ Make sure there are no people, anim- the cover of an airbag
ginning your journey. Move the driver- als, or objects between the driver and If you modify the cover of an airbag or
's seat as far back as possible. Always the driver's airbag. affix objects such as stickers to it, the
observe the notes on adjusting the
▶ There are no hard objects, e.g. coat airbag can no longer function as inten-
seats ( → Page 67) and adjusting the ded.
hangers, hanging on the grab handles
steering wheel ( → Page 82).
or coat hooks. ▶ Never modify the cover of an airbag.
▶ Hold the steering wheel by the rim
▶ Do not attach accessories such as
only. This allows the airbag to deploy ▶ Do not attach any objects to the
mobile navigation devices, mobile cover.
fully.
phones, or cup holders in the airbag's
▶ Always lean against the seat backrest deployment area, e.g. on the steering The installation location of an airbag
while driving. Do not lean forward. wheel or on the door. Always observe is identified by the AIRBAG label
You may otherwise be in the deploy- the accessory manufacturer's install- ( → Page 39).
ment area of the airbag. ation instructions, in particular the
Occupant safety
Travelling safely with children in the vehicle
Danger Be diligent The generic term child restraint sys-

Bear in mind that failing to take due care tem
Risk of injury due to deployed airbag
when securing a child in the child restraint The generic term child restraint system is
A deployed airbag no longer offers any
system may have serious consequences. used in these operating instructions.
protection.
You should always be consistent and care-
A child restraint system is, for example:
▶ Have the vehicle towed to a quali- fully secure a child before every journey.
fied specialist workshop in order to ● A baby car seat
▶ Infants and children must never travel ● A rearward‐facing child seat
have the deployed airbag replaced. sitting on the lap of a vehicle occu- ● A forward‐facing child seat
▶ Have deployed airbags replaced as pant.
● A child booster seat with a backrest
soon as possible. In order to better protect children of un- and seat belt guides
der 12 years of age or under 1.50 m in
The child restraint system must be appro-
Travelling safely with children in the height, Daimler Truck AG strongly recom-
priate to the age, weight, and size of the
vehicle mends observing the following:
child.
● Always secure the child in a child
Always observe when children are restraint system suitable for your
travelling in the vehicle Mercedes‐Benz truck. Observe laws and regulations
● The child restraint system must be ▶ Always observe the legal require-
Note
appropriate to the age, weight, and ments when using a child restraint
Be sure to observe the safety instruc- size of the child. system in the vehicle.
tions relevant to the situation. You will ● The vehicle seat must be suitable for
be able to identify possible risks and
▶ Ensure that the child restraint system
the child restraint system to be fitted. is approved in accordance with
avoid dangers when children are travel-
the valid test specifications and
ling in the vehicle ( → Page 42).
guidelines.
Occupant safety
Further information can be obtained at reduce the risk of injury to the cervical ▶ It is recommended to use child re-
a qualified specialist workshop. Daimler spine in an accident. straint systems recommended for
Truck AG recommends that you use an Mercedes-Benz Trucks whenever pos-
authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service Always secure child restraint sys- sible.
Centre for this purpose. tems correctly
Danger
Warning Risk of injury or death due to unse-
Detecting risks, avoiding dangers
Risk of injury or death due to an in- cured child restraint systems in the
Securing systems for child restraint correctly installed child restraint sys- vehicle
systems in the vehicle tem If the child restraint system is incorrectly
Only use the following fastening system The child cannot then be protected or fitted or not secured, it can become
for child restraint systems: restrained as intended. detached.
● the vehicle's seat belt system ▶ Always comply with the manufac- The child restraint system may
turer's installation instructions for be thrown around and hit vehicle
Advantages of a rearward-facing child the child restraint system and its occupants.
restraint system correct use. ▶ In addition, always be sure to cor-
Babies or infants should preferably travel ▶ Make sure that the entire base of rectly install any unused child re-
in a suitable rearward‐facing child re- the child restraint system always straint systems.
straint system. In this case, the child is rests on the seat cushion of seat. ▶ Always comply with the manufac-
seated in the opposite direction to the dir- ▶ Never place objects under or behind turer's installation instructions for
ection of travel and is facing backwards. the child restraint system, e.g. cush- the child restraint system.
Babies and infants have comparatively ions.
poorly developed neck muscles in relation ▶ Only use child restraint systems with ▶ Be sure to observe the installation
its intended genuine cover. and operating instructions provided
to the size and weight of their head. A
by the manufacturer of the child re-
rearward‐facing child restraint system can ▶ Always replace damaged covers
straint system being used as well as
with genuine covers.
Occupant safety
the vehicle-specific notes at all times: Only use child restraint systems Avoid direct sunlight
Securing the child restraint system which are not damaged
with the seat belt on the front passen- Danger
ger's seat ( → Page 44). Danger Risk of burns when the child seat is
▶ Observe the warning labels in the Risk of injury or death due to the use exposed to direct sunlight
vehicle interior and on the child re- of damaged child restraint systems If the child restraint system is exposed
straint system. Damaged child restraint systems, those to direct sunlight, its parts may heat up
subjected to stress during an accident considerably.
Do not make modifications to child or their securing systems may no longer Children could suffer burns from these
restraint systems provide protection as intended. parts, particularly from the metal parts
Danger It may not be possible to restrain the of the child restraint system.
child.
Risk of injury from modifications to ▶ Always ensure that the child re-
the child restraint system ▶ Replace damaged child restraint sys- straint system is not exposed to
The child restraint system can no longer tems or those subjected to stress direct sunlight.
function as intended. There will be an during an accident as soon as pos- ▶ Protect the child restraint system,
increased risk of injury! sible. e.g. with a blanket.
▶ Have the securing systems of child ▶ If the child restraint system was
▶ Never alter a child restraint system. restraint systems checked at a qual- exposed to direct sunlight, let it cool
▶ Only install accessories that the ified specialist workshop as soon as down before securing the child in it.
manufacturer of the child restraint possible before a child restraint sys- ▶ Never leave children unattended in
system has specifically approved for tem is installed again. the vehicle.
that child restraint system.
Daimler Truck AG recommends Daimler
Truck AG care products for cleaning child
restraint systems recommended for Mer-
cedes‐Benz trucks.
Occupant safety
Observe the following when stopping ▶ When leaving the vehicle, always
or parking take the key with you and lock the
vehicle.
Danger ▶ Keep the key out of the reach of
Risk of accident and injury due to children.
children left unattended in the
vehicle Danger
If you leave children unattended in the Danger to life due to exposure to
vehicle, some of the things that might extreme heat or cold in the vehicle
happen include: If persons - particularly children - are
● They may open doors, thereby endan- subjected to prolonged exposure to
gering other persons or road users. intense heat or cold, there is a risk of Example of an approval label
severe injury or even death! When fitting a belt-secured child re-
● They may get out and be struck by
oncoming traffic. ▶ Never leave persons, and partic- straint system on the co-driver's seat,
ularly children, unattended in the always observe the following:
● They may operate vehicle equipment
vehicle. O When using a child restraint system in
and become trapped.
the "Universal" category, ensure that it is
In addition, children could also set the approved for the vehicle seat.
vehicle in motion, for example, by: Securing the child restraint system O Observe the manufacturer's installation
with the seat belt on the co-driver's and operating instructions for the child
● Releasing the parking brake. restraint system used.
seat
● Changing the transmission position. Child restraint systems in the "Universal" O The backrest of a forward‐facing child
restraint system must, as far as possible,
● Starting the vehicle. category are marked with an orange ap- rest flat against the backrest of the co‐
▶ Never leave children unattended in proval label. driver's seat.
the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Notes on pets in the vehicle
O The child restraint system must not be

Note Notes on pets in the vehicle
put under strain between the roof and the
seat cushion and/or be fitted facing the The entire base of the child restraint Danger
wrong direction. Adjust the seat backrest system must always rest on the seat
angle as appropriate.
cushion of the co‐driver's seat. Risk of accident and injury due to
O The child restraint system must not be animals left unsecured or unattended
put under strain by the head restraint. ▶ Always make sure that the shoulder in the vehicle
Adjust the head restraints as appropriate. belt strap is correctly routed from If you leave animals unattended or un-
O Never place objects under or behind the the seat belt outlet of the vehicle to secured in the vehicle, they could press
child restraint system, e.g. cushions. the shoulder belt guide on the child buttons or switches, for example.
▶ Move the co-driver's seat as far back restraint system.
This can lead to animals, for example,
as possible. activating vehicle equipment and getting
▶ Fully retract the seat cushion length Note
trapped, or turning systems on or off and
adjustment. The shoulder belt strap must be thereby endangering other road users.
▶ Adjust the seat cushion angle in such routed forwards and downwards
from the seat belt outlet. Unsecured animals may also be thrown
a way that the front of the seat cush- about the vehicle in the event of an ac-
ion is in the topmost position and the ▶ If necessary, adjust the seat belt cident or sudden steering and braking
rear of the seat cushion in the lowest outlet and the co-driver's seat as manoeuvres and injure vehicle occu-
position. appropriate. pants in the process.
▶ Adjust the seat backrest to an almost
vertical position. ▶ Never leave animals in the vehicle
unattended.
▶ Fit the child restraint system.
▶ Always correctly secure animals
while driving, e.g. using a suitable
animal carrier.
Opening and closing
Electronic key
Electronic key Change the battery of the key

( → Page 54).
Overview of electronic keys
You require a key coded for the vehicle to
use the following functions: Using the emergency key element
● Switching on the vehicle Removing
● Starting the vehicle
● Shifting gears Key with remote control
Note
If a vehicle key is lost, obtaining a re-
placement is a time‐consuming process.
This can only be done through an au-
thorised Mercedes-Benz Trucks Service
Centre.
▶ Press release knob 1.
◁ Emergency key 2 is pushed out
Daimler Truck AG therefore recommends Key with remote control and lamp check
slightly.
that you always keep an easily access- Your vehicle is equipped with one of two ▶ Pull out emergency key 2 until it
ible replacement key with you for emer- keys. engages in the intermediate position.
gencies.
If the vehicle is equipped with lockable
If you lose a key, have it disabled at fuel tanks, you will receive additional keys Note
an authorised Mercedes-Benz Trucks for the lockable fuel tank caps. You can use the intermediate posi-
Service Centre. tion of emergency key 2 to attach
If the key's battery is low or almost dis-
charged, the instrument cluster will show the key to a key ring.
you a corresponding display message. ▶ Press release button 1 again and
fully remove emergency key 2.
Opening and closing
Unlocking and locking the central locking system
Inserting ◁ The indicator lamp of the key one after the other. This cycle is
lights up once briefly and once repeated three times.
▶ Press release knob 1. long.
▶ Insert emergency key 2 to the in- If you want to cancel the lamp check,
termediate position or fully until it ▶ To activate: Press any button on the press the button Æ again or release
engages. key. the parking brake.
or
Deactivating the function of the key ▶ Hold the key against the contact Unlocking and locking the central
point for emergency operation locking system
Vehicles with keyless start ( → Page 210). Unlock/lock the outer door lock us-
If you deactivate the function of the relev- ing the key
ant key, it is no longer possible to author-
Carry out lamp check with the key
ise driving with a keyless start. Activate Note
the function of the relevant key so that The lamp check assists you in making
your departure checks and helps you If you use the emergency key element
the function is available again as usual.
identify defective bulbs/LEDs. to unlock the door and ATA is primed
You can also deactivate the function of ( → Page 52), the alarm is triggered.
the key to reduce the energy consumption ▶ Apply the parking brake.
of the key if you do not use the vehicle or ▶ Press the Æ button on the key.
a key for an extended period of time. ◁ Low beam headlamps, marker
lights, tail lights, and licence plate
▶ To deactivate: Press and hold the lighting light up continuously. The
ß button of the key.
turn signal, main-beam, brake
▶ With ß button pressed, press the light, daytime running lights,
Ü button of the key twice in rapid reversing light, fog light, and
succession as soon as possible. the work lamp are switched on
Opening and closing
Unlocking and locking the central locking system
Note Central locking and unlocking

with the button (vehicles without
You can change the unlocking func-
MirrorCam system)
tion of the remote control so that
either both front doors or just the
driver's door is unlocked when you
press the Ü button. To switch
between the two unlocking func-
▶ Insert the key into the driver's tions, press and hold both remote
door lock (Code F9Y only) d control buttons simultaneously for
front-passenger door lock e into approximately six seconds. The
position 2. LED in the key flashes twice as
▶ To unlock: Turn the key to the 1 confirmation. If you have selected
position. the function that only unlocks the
◁ The door is unlocked. driver's door, you can unlock the
▶ To lock: Turn the key to the 3 posi- front‐passenger door by pressing
tion. the Ü button again. ▶ Close both doors.
◁ Both doors are locked. ▶ To lock: Press the ß button on ▶ Central locking: Press the button
the key. Ë.
Unlocking/locking using the remote ◁ Both doors are locked. ▶ Central unlocking: Press the button
control Ì.
▶ To release: Press the Ü button on ◁ The indicator lamp in the Ì
the key. button flashes briefly.
◁ The driver's door or both doors
are unlocked.
Opening and closing
Operating the convenience central locking system
Locking/unlocking centrally using make sure that no body parts are in

Note the closing area.
the button (vehicles with MirrorCam
system) Depending on the equipment, vehicles
can be locked automatically at speeds Warning
above 20 km/h. This function is not
Risk of becoming trapped when
adjustable.
opening and closing the sliding
There is a risk of being locked out in the sunroof/pop-up roof
following situations: Body parts may become trapped in the
● When tow‐starting the vehicle opening/closing area.
● When the vehicle is on the roller dy- ▶ When opening and closing, make
namometer sure that no one's limbs are in the
opening/closing area of the sliding
sunroof/pop‐up roof.
Operating the convenience central
▶ If someone is trapped, release the
locking system
button immediately or press the top
▶ Close both doors. of the button in order to stop the
Danger
▶ Central locking: Press the button closing process.
ç. Risk of becoming trapped due to lack
▶ Central unlocking: Press the button of attention during convenience clos-
Danger
ç. ing
Risk of becoming trapped when clos-
When the convenience closing feature
◁ The indicator lamp in the ç ing the side window
is operating, parts of the body could
button flashes briefly. Body parts may become trapped in the
become trapped in the closing area of
the side window and the sliding sunroof. closing area when closing a side win-
dow.
▶ During convenience closing, mon-
itor the entire closing process, and
Opening and closing
Operating the convenience central locking system
▶ During the closing process, make or Convenience opening

sure that no body parts are in the ▶ Vehicles with ATA: Press the ß
closing area. ▶ Insert the integrated key in position
button on the key. 2 in the door lock, then turn it to
▶ If someone is trapped, release the ◁ All turn signal lamps flash three
button as soon as possible, or press position 1 and hold it there.
times. The doors are locked. The
the button in order to reopen the side windows and the sliding or
side window. sunroof/pop-up roof close. ▶ Press and hold the Ü button on
Convenience closing the key until the side windows and
Note the sliding sunroof/pop-up roof have
The roof hatch is not closed. reached the desired position.
◁ All turn signal lamps flash once.
If there is a risk of becoming trapped: The driver's door is unlocked.
▶ Turn the integrated key to position 1 The side windows and the sliding
immediately and hold it there until the sunroof/pop-up roof open.
side windows and the sliding sunroof
/pop-up roof open again. Note
▶ Insert the integrated key into posi- or The roof hatch is not closed.
tion 2 in the co-driver's door lock,
then turn it to position 3 and hold it ▶ Press and hold the Ü button on
there. the key until the side windows and
the sliding sunroof/pop-up roof open
or again.
▶ Vehicles without ATA: Press the key ◁ The driver's door is unlocked.
ß button for about two seconds.
Opening and closing
Cab lock anti-intrusion protection
Cab lock anti-intrusion protection Locking and unlocking the cab lock ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
anti-intrusion protection
Note Notes on ATA
The cab lock anti‐intrusion protection ATA monitors the following systems:
can only be locked/unlocked from the ● on the towing vehicle:
inside and is not part of the central lock- ■ the doors
ing system. ■ the outside flaps
Do not use the cab lock anti‐intrusion ■ the power supply
protection while the vehicle is in motion. ■ the cab tilt lock
Otherwise, in an emergency situation, it ■ the vehicle interior (can be deac-
Cab lock (example of locked driver's door)
could impede the efforts of emergency tivated)
responders attempting to rescue per-
▶ Close the doors. ■ the maintenance flap
sons from the cab. ▶ To lock: Press the securing knob 2 ■ the fuel tank
of the cab lock anti-intrusion protec- ● the box bodies (optional)
The cab lock anti‐intrusion protection is tion 1 and pull the additional door
used to prevent unauthorised entry into lock downwards. Vehicles used for transporting danger-
the cab, e.g. during rest times. ◁ The cab lock anti-intrusion pro- ous goods: If ATA is activated and the
tection encloses the grab handle power supply is interrupted using the bat-
3. tery disconnect switch ( → Page 118),
▶ To unlock: Press the cab lock anti- ATA triggers an alarm.
intrusion protection's securing knob Observe the following:
2 1. ● If ATA is activated, it confirms the
◁ The additional door lock is unlocking procedure by flashing all turn
locked. signal lamps three times. If the turn
signal lamps do not flash three times,
one or more components are not in
Opening and closing
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
the rest position. ATA cannot monitor ● The windows, the roof hatch, the
these components, e.g. outside flaps sliding roof and the pop‐up roof are Warning
that are open. closed. Risk of becoming trapped when
● Components that are moved to the ● The curtains are retracted. opening and closing the sliding
rest position within approximately ● The exterior flaps are closed. sunroof/pop-up roof
30 seconds of ATA being reset will be ● There are no loose objects in the cab, Body parts may become trapped in the
monitored. e.g. mascots or coat hangers. opening/closing area.
● If you subsequently close the outside ▶ When opening and closing, make
flaps and want to include them in the Switching on ATA with interior mo-
sure that no one's limbs are in the
monitoring, activate ATA again. tion sensor
opening/closing area of the sliding
sunroof/pop‐up roof.
ATA alarm Danger ▶ If someone is trapped, release the
If ATA triggers an alarm, the following Risk of becoming trapped when clos- button immediately or press the top
warnings are given: ing the side window of the button in order to stop the
● all turn signal lamps flash for approx- Body parts may become trapped in the closing process.
imately five minutes. closing area when closing a side win-
● the alarm siren sounds for approxim- dow.
ately 30 seconds. ▶ During the closing process, make
sure that no body parts are in the
Switching ATA on/off closing area.
▶ If someone is trapped, release the
Requirements button as soon as possible, or press
● The vehicle is switched off or the the button in order to reopen the
power supply is switched on. side window.
Opening and closing
Switching on ATA without interior Switching off ATA and cancelling the
motion sensor alarm
If there will be persons or animals remain- ▶ Press the Ü button on the key.
ing in the vehicle, activate ATA without
or
interior motion sensor.
▶ If the ATA was , activated with
▶ Briefly press the upper section of the the button, press the top of the but-
button ,.
ton again for longer than two seconds
◁ The indicator lamp on the button , (not applicable for the Nether-
will light up. The interior protec- lands).
tion remains deactivated for the
◁ All turn signal lamps flash once.
next locking procedure.
▶ Hold the integrated key in the driver’s ▶ Lock the vehicle with the integrated When you switch on the vehicle, the ATA
door lock in the lock position for ap- key or the remote control. is deactivated automatically.
proximately two seconds.
or Activating/deactivating the panic
▶ Then turn the integrated key back to
the basic position and remove it. ▶ Press , the top of the button for alarm
more than two seconds (not applic- You can use the ¨ button to trigger
or able for the Netherlands). the alarm in manual mode, e.g. in the
▶ Press the ß button on the key. ◁ The vehicle locks and all turn event of danger.
◁ All turn signal lamps flash three signal lamps flash three times.
▶ Activation: Press the lower section of
times and the indicator lamp in ◁ ATA is switched on. the button ¨.
the button , flashes. The
vehicle has been locked. Vehicles When you switch on the vehicle, the ATA ◁ The alarm is triggered and the
with convenience central locking is deactivated automatically. vehicle is locked.
system: Close the window and
the sliding/pop-up roof.
Opening and closing
Replacing the key battery
Vehicles with convenience central do not use the key any longer, and ▶ Remove the emergency key.
locking system: The windows and keep it out of the reach of children.
the sliding and pop-up roof close. ▶ If batteries are swallowed, seek
medical attention as soon as pos-
Note sible.
The roof hatch is not closed.
Note
▶ Deactivation: Press the lower sec-
tion of the button ¨. Environmental damage due to im-
proper disposal of batteries
◁ The alarm switches off. ▶ Press release button 2 down fully
Batteries contain pollutants. It and slide cover 1 in the direction of
Replacing the key battery is illegal to dispose of them with the the arrow.
household rubbish. ▶ Fold out cover 1 in the direction of
Danger the arrow and remove.
▶
Risk of fatal injuries due to swallow- Dispose of batteries in an en- ▶ Slide off battery compartment 3 and
ing batteries vironmentally responsible manner. take out the discharged battery.
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive Take discharged batteries to a qual- ▶ Insert the new battery into the battery
substances. Swallowing batteries may ified specialist workshop or to a col- compartment 3. Observe the posit-
cause severe internal burns and/or lection point for used batteries. ive pole marking in the battery com-
chemical burns to occur within two partment and on the battery when
Requirements doing this.
hours.
There is a risk of fatal injury! ● You will need a CR°2032‐type 3 V ▶ Slide in battery compartment 3.
button cell. ▶ Re-attach cover 1 and push it until it
▶ Keep batteries out of the reach of engages.
children. Daimler Truck°AG recommends that you
have the battery replaced at a qualified
▶ If the cover and/or battery com-
specialist workshop.
partment does not close securely,
Opening and closing
Problems with the locking system
Problems with the locking system Getting in and out ▶ When leaving the vehicle, always
take the key with you and lock the
When ATA is primed, there is no re- Danger vehicle.
sponse from the turn signal lamps. ▶ Keep the key out of the reach of
Risk of accident and injury due to
One of the monitored component parts children left unattended in the children.
has not been locked correctly. vehicle
▶ Deactivate ATA ( → Page 52). If you leave children unattended in the Danger
▶ Check that the monitored component vehicle, some of the things that might Risk of injury due to excessive load
parts are locked, e.g. happen include: on the grab handles
● They may open doors, thereby endan- If you apply your full body weight to
● Doors
gering other persons or road users. the grab handle or pull it abruptly, the
● Windows grab handle may be damaged or become
● Cab tilt lock ● They may get out and be struck by loose from its anchorage.
● Outside flaps on driver's and front oncoming traffic.
passenger's side ● They may operate vehicle equipment
▶ Use the grab handles only to stabil-
ise the seating position or to assist
● Maintenance flap and become trapped.
in getting in and out of the seat.
▶ Activate ATA ( → Page 52). In addition, children could also set the
▶ If there is no visual acknowledge- vehicle in motion, for example, by: Note
ment, have ATA checked at a qualified ● Releasing the parking brake. If children are being transported in the
● Changing the transmission position. vehicle, please observe the additional
notes/instructions ( → Page 41).
● Starting the vehicle.
To get in and out safely, you should al-
▶ Never leave children unattended in
ways use the steps and grab handles.
the vehicle.
They are the only elements designed to
bear such a load.
Opening and closing
Side windows
▶ Do not jump out of the cab. Side windows ▶ During the closing process, make
▶ Keep the steps, entrances, grab sure that no body parts are in the
handles, and your footwear free of Opening and closing the side win- closing area.
dirt and debris. dows ▶ If someone is trapped, release the
◁ This will improve the safety of Danger
button as soon as possible, or press
your footing. the button in order to reopen the
Risk of becoming trapped when open- side window.
ing a side window
When opening a side window, parts of Danger
the body could be drawn in or become
Risk of becoming trapped or fatally
trapped between the side window and
injured if reversing protection is not
window frame.
activated
▶ When opening the side window, If a side window is closed again as soon
make sure that nobody is touching as possible after it is locked, the side
▶ Use the easy entry and exit feature on the window. window will close with increased or max-
the suspension seat ( → Page 67). ▶ If someone becomes trapped, re- imum force. The reversing function will
▶ Use grab handles 1 and steps 2 lease the button as soon as pos- not be active and parts of the body could
when getting in and out. sible, or pull it in order to close the become trapped.
side window again.
▶ Make sure that no parts of the body
are in the closing area.
Danger
▶ To stop the closing procedure, re-
Risk of becoming trapped when clos- lease the button, or press the button
ing the side window again in order to open the side win-
Body parts may become trapped in the dow again.
closing area when closing a side win-
dow.
Opening and closing
Side windows
Requirements pull and hold the correspond-

Note ing W button, the window will
● The ignition lock is in the radio posi-
You can use the key to open the side close without the automatic re-
tion or the vehicle is switched on.
windows and, for vehicles with the con- versing function.
venience central locking system, to ▶ To interrupt convenience opera-
close them as well ( → Page 49). tion: Press or pull the corresponding
button W again.
▶ To open and close: Push or pull the
left- or right-hand button W until
the corresponding side window has Resetting the side windows
reached the desired position. Re‐adjust the side window after a voltage
▶ To use convenience opening: Briefly supply interruption or if a side window
push the left- or right-hand button does not close or open completely.
W past the point of resistance. ▶ The ignition lock is in the radio posi-
◁ The corresponding side window tion or the vehicle is switched on.
will open fully. ▶ Press the relevant W button until
▶ To use convenience closing (ve- the corresponding side window is
Note hicles with convenience central open.
After a malfunction or voltage drop, locking system): Briefly push the ▶ Press the relevant W button for
reset the side windows ( → Page 57). left- or right-hand button W past another second.
the point of resistance.
▶ Pull the relevant W button until the
◁ The corresponding side window corresponding side window is closed.
will close fully. If the side win-
▶ Pull the relevant W button for
dow is obstructed during closing,
another second.
the automatic reversing function
will halt its movement. If the side
window is obstructed and you
Opening and closing
Roof
Roof Opening the sliding sunroof and pop-

up roof
Operating the sliding sunroof and the
pop-up roof
Warning
Risk of becoming trapped when
opening and closing the sliding
sunroof/pop-up roof
Body parts may become trapped in the
opening/closing area.
▶ When opening and closing, make
sure that no one's limbs are in the ▶ Briefly press the upper section of the
opening/closing area of the sliding ¸ button.
sunroof/pop‐up roof. ◁ The sliding sunroof opens. The
▶ If someone is trapped, release the pop-up roof will open completely.
button immediately or press the top ▶ To stop the movement, press the
of the button in order to stop the ¸ or P button again.
closing process. ▶ With a sliding sunroof, press the top
of the ¸ button again and hold it
until the sliding sunroof has reached
the desired position.
Opening and closing
Roof
Closing the sliding sunroof and pop- ▶ Press and hold the P button until ▶ Press the handle 3 on the screen as
up roof the sliding sunroof has been com- far as it will go in the closing direc-
pletely closed for three seconds. tion.
▶ With a sliding sunroof, press and hold ▶ Press the handle 3 upwards and
the P button until the sliding sun- Opening the blackout screen and unhook the screen.
roof has reached the desired position. insect roller screen
▶ Guide the screen back to the opposite
or end of the roof frame and release the
▶ Briefly press the lower section of the handle 3.
P button.
Closing the blackout screen and in-
◁ The sliding sunroof or pop-up roof sect roller screen
will close completely.
▶ To stop the movement, press the ▶ Pull the handle 3 on the screen up
P or ¸ button. to the opposite end of the roof frame.
▶ Push the handle 3 down slightly at
In the event of a malfunction or when the the stop and release it.
battery has been disconnected, you can ◁ The screen is hooked in.
also close the sliding sunroof or pop‐up
roof manually. Closing the sliding sunroof manually
Reset the sliding sunroof after a malfunc- The pop‐up roof is fitted with a cover
tion or voltage supply interruption. frame and integrated insect screen. The Note
cover frame can be removed for cleaning The hexagon socket wrench for opening
Resetting the sliding sunroof purposes. the sliding sunroof is in the vehicle docu-
The sliding sunroof must be adjusted after The sliding sunroof is fitted with an insect ment wallet.
a power cut or jerky opening. roller screen 1 and a blackout screen
2. With a sliding sunroof, you can only
ever close one screen.
Opening and closing
Roof
Vehicles with a ClassicSpace or Com-

pactSpace cab
▶ Vehicles with ClassicSpace cabs: ▶ Attach a hexagon socket wrench

Remove the cover cap 1. 3 to the actuator motor through
▶ Vehicles with CompactSpace cabs: the opening provided and turn it to
Remove the cover 2. the right until the sliding sunroof is
completely closed.
▶ Vehicles with ClassicSpace cabs:
Replace the cover cap 1.
▶ Vehicles with CompactSpace cabs: Fit
the cover 2.
Opening and closing
Roof
Vehicles with a BigSpace, Stream- screen 2, and let it to hang in the and guide the screen back into the
Space or GigaSpace cab cab. end position.
▶ Insert the guide bar for blackout
screen 2 into the screen guides in
the roof frame, turn it so that it is par-
allel to the end position and guide
blackout screen 2 back into the end
position.
Closing the pop-up roof mechanically
Note
The flat‐blade screwdriver (4 mm blade
width) is in the vehicle tool kit.
▶ Pull out the blackout screen 2 to ▶ Where necessary, press the screens
the centre of the roof frame using the against the roof frame and insert the
handle. hexagon socket wrench 5 into the
▶ Turn guide bar 1 for the screen and actuator motor through opening 4.
remove it from the screen guides on ▶ Turn the hexagon socket wrench 5
both sides of the roof frame. to the right until the sliding sunroof is
▶ Carefully guide blackout screen 2 completely closed.
back until the screen stops and let it ▶ Insert the guide bar 1 for the in-
hang in the cab. sect roller screen 3 into the screen
▶ Remove insect roller screen 3 from guides in the roof frame, turn it so
the screen guide in the roof frame, that it is parallel to the end position
as previously described for blackout
Opening and closing
Roof
Vehicles with a ClassicSpace cab Opening and closing the roof hatch
You can open the roof hatch at one end

(front or back) or at both ends (front and
back).
▶ Insert the flat-blade screwdriver 4
into the actuator motor through the ▶ Push the roof hatch upwards at the
▶ Remove the cover cap from the open- opening 3 and turn it to the left handles 1 or pull it down.
ing 1. until the sliding sunroof is completely
▶ Insert the flat-blade screwdriver 2 closed. Opening and closing the circular roof
into the actuator motor through the
hatch
opening 1 and turn it to the left
until the sliding sunroof is completely Warning
closed.
Risk of injury due to unsecured roof
▶ Insert the cover cap into opening 1.
hatch
Vehicles with a BigSpace, Stream- The open roof hatch can close automat-
Space or GigaSpace cab ically in the event of an accident, braking
or a sudden change of direction. Body
▶ Remove the cover from the roof lin-
ing.
Opening and closing
Roof
parts may become trapped in the open- ◁ The roof hatch 4 will be pressed
ing/closing area. onto and secured on the support
buffers 3 on the roof.
▶ Always secure the open roof hatch.
Unlocking and opening Closing and locking
▶ Swing the lever 5 towards the roof
hatch 4 as far as it will go.
◁ The roof hatch 4 is unlocked
and lifts upwards.
▶ Move the roof hatch 4 to the right
over the roof opening as far as it will
go.
▶ Pull the two handles 1 and 2 ▶ Pull the roof hatch 4 downwards
downwards.
using both handles 1 and 2.
▶ Turn 1 handle to the left and 2
▶ Turn handle 1 to the right and
handle to the right.
handle 2 to the left.
◁ The roof hatch 4 will lift up.
▶ Push the roof hatch 4 to the left
over the support buffers 3 as far as
it will go.
▶ Swivel the lever 5 in the direction
of the arrow as far as it will go. Hold
the roof hatch with one hand so that
it does not swing back.
Opening and closing
Roof
Retracting/extending the roller sun- ◁ The roller sun blind will extend as ▶ If a referencing was interrupted:
blind far as the end position. Press the § button and then press
the ¦ button as soon as possible
Extending the roller sunblind or
afterwards.
▶ Press and hold the § button until ◁ The roller sun blind will be retrac-
the roller sun blind has reached the ted into the upper end position.
desired position.
Retracting the roller sun blind

▶ Tap the ¦ button briefly.
◁ The roller sun blind will retract as
far as the end position.
or
▶ Press and hold the ¦ button until
the roller sun blind has reached the
desired position.
In the following situations, the roller sun
blind will perform a referencing and be
completely retracted: Note
● If the power supply is interrupted, If an error has occurred and you
e.g. after a malfunction or a battery press a button, the roller sun blind
change. will carry out a referencing. The
● If the vehicle is exposed to an excess- roller sun blind will be retracted into
ive load, e.g. due to a pothole. the upper end position at a slower
speed than normal. The roller sun
▶ Tap the § button briefly. blind will now be ready for normal
operation.
Driver cockpit
Notes on the seats
Notes on the seats ▶ Make sure that no parts of the body

are in the seat's movement area Danger
Danger when adjusting the seat. Risk of accident due to the driver's
seat not being engaged
Risk of accident when making signi-
ficant adjustments while driving Danger The driver's seat may move unexpec-
Risk of injury or death due to incor- tedly while the vehicle is in motion.
You may lose control of the vehicle, in
particular in the following situations: rect seat position This could cause you to lose control of
The seat belt does not offer the intended the vehicle.
● If you adjust the driver's seat, the
head restraints, the steering wheel, or level of protection if you have not moved ▶ Always ensure that the driver's
the mirror while the vehicle is in motion. the seat backrest to an almost vertical seat is engaged before starting the
position. vehicle.
● If you fasten your seat belt while the
vehicle is in motion. In particular, you might slide underneath
the seat belt and injure yourself. Danger
▶ Before starting the vehicle: Adjust
the driver's seat, head restraints, ▶ Adjust the seat properly before com- Risk of becoming trapped due to in-
mencing your journey. sufficient space for the suspension
steering wheel, and mirror in partic-
ular, and fasten your seat belt. ▶ Always ensure that the seat back- seat
rest is in an almost vertical position, If there is insufficient space available,
and that the shoulder belt is routed the suspension seat may trap parts of
Danger
across the centre of your shoulder. the body between the steering wheel
Risk of becoming trapped when ad- and the suspension seat.
justing a seat
When you are adjusting a seat, you or a ▶ Make sure that there is sufficient
vehicle occupant may become trapped space for the suspension seat to
on the seat's guide rail, for example. move in.
▶ Fully lower the suspension seat
before getting out of the seat.
Driver cockpit
Notes on the seats
▶ Do not transport heavy loads on right. Do not drive with the seat back-
Danger the seats. Do not place any sharp rest tilted backwards.
Risk of becoming trapped when objects, such as knives, nails, or ▶ Ensure that your arms are slightly
pressing the bellows inwards tools, on the seats. Only use seats bent while gripping the steering
If you press the bellows of the suspen- for people if possible. wheel.
sion seat inwards, your hand could be- ▶ When using the seat heating, do ▶ Avoid seating positions that impede
come trapped. not cover the seats with insulating the proper alignment of the seat-
▶ Do not press the bellows inwards. materials, such as blankets, coats, belt. The shoulder section of the belt
bags, protective covers, child seats, must run across the centre of your
or booster seats. shoulder and fit snugly across your
Note
chest. The lap belt must always fit
Damage to the seats and the seat snugly and as low as possible on your
Note
heating due to fluids, pointed objects, pelvis, i.e. over the hip joints.
or insulating materials Damage to the seats from objects in
the cab ▶ Maintain a distance to the pedals that
To prevent damage to the seats and allows you to press them effectively.
the seat heating, observe the following Make sure that no objects block the
seats in the cab. Otherwise, the seats ▶ Make sure that you have the best
instructions:
may be damaged. possible view of the vehicle's im-
▶ Do not spill any fluids onto the mediate surroundings through the
seats. If something does get spilt ▶ Keep the area for adjusting the windscreen and the side windows, as
onto the seats, dry the seats as seats clear. well as the mirrors or the MirrorCam
quickly as possible. Your seat must be adjusted such that you displays. Adjust the seat height if ne-
▶ Do not switch on the seat heating if can fasten your seat belt correctly. When cessary.
the seat covers are wet or damp. Do doing so, observe the following: ▶ Also read the safety instructions on
not use the seat heating to dry the ▶ Move the seat backrest to an almost protection provided by the airbag
seats. vertical position and sit almost up- ( → Page 39) and on children in the
▶ Clean the seats as recommended; vehicle ( → Page 41).
see the "Cleaning and care" section.
Driver cockpit
Operating the seat
▶ If your vehicle is equipped with a Operating the seat ▶ Do not cover the seat, e.g. with a
suspended seat, always use the entry towel or seat cushion.
and exit aid when getting out. Danger ▶ If the co‐driver's seat is not occu-
To enable use of a suspension seat, Risk of accident when making signi- pied, switch off the seat heating and
your vehicle's compressed‐air system ficant adjustments while driving ventilation for the co‐driver's seat.
must have a reserve pressure of at least You may lose control of the vehicle, in
700 kPa (7 bar, 100 psi). particular in the following situations: Note
▶ Do not use the seat as a climbing aid, ● If you adjust the driver's seat, the Damage to the headrest and the
e.g. to help you get to the top berth. head restraints, the steering wheel, or lower bunk
the mirror while the vehicle is in motion. When adjusting the seat fore-and-aft
A seat with an integrated seat belt is a position, the headrest may hit the seat
safety‐critical component part and re- ● If you fasten your seat belt while the and damage both components.
straint system. vehicle is in motion.
▶ When adjusting the longitudinal
▶ Be sure to also read the safety ▶ Before starting the vehicle: Adjust direction of the seat, make sure that
instructions on "Occupant safety" the driver's seat, head restraints, the headrest of the lower bunk is
( → Page 34). steering wheel, and mirror in partic- fully lowered.
ular, and fasten your seat belt.
You can find information on cleaning
seats under "Cleaning and care" Note
( → Page 381). Note
Damage to the suspension seat
▶ Always have any work on seats car- Overheating of the seat heating
To prevent damage:
ried out at a qualified specialist work- The seat heating/ventilation does not
shop. automatically switch off in the event ▶ Ensure that the suspension seat can
of overheating. Observe the following, vibrate freely. In particular, ensure
otherwise the seat heating/ventilation that the locking mechanism for the
may be damaged: bed does not rub against the back of
the seat.
▶ Do not place objects on the seat.
Driver cockpit
Operating the seat
▶ Stow the locking mechanism for To adjust the neck cushion:

the bed in such a way, e.g. under
the mattress, that it does not rub ▶ Press and hold the buttons on the
against the back of the suspension rubber straps.
seat. ▶ Adjust neck cushion 3 to the posi-
tion appropriate for your height.
Standard/comfort/climatised static,
centre, and suspension seats To adjust the seat belt height:
▶ Observe the notes on "Seats" ▶ Press and hold the button on belt
( → Page 65). sash guide 4.
▶ When adjusting the seats, make sure ▶ Adjust belt sash guide 4 to the posi-
that there is sufficient clearance be- tion appropriate for your height.
hind the seat in particular.
To adjust the armrests:
To adjust the top part of the seat
backrest: ▶ Fold up seat armrests 5.
▶ Use the handwheel on the underside
▶ Pull lever 1 on the rear of the seat to adjust the angle of seat armrests
backrest up and hold it in place. 5.
▶ Tilt the top part of the seat backrest
into the desired position. To adjust the vibration damper:
To fold the seat backrest: ▶ Use lever 6 to adjust the vibration

damper in increments such that the
▶ Pull lever 2 up and fold the seat seat does not bottom out.
backrest forwards or back.
To adjust the seat cushion length:
▶ Pull lever 7 up and hold it in place.
Driver cockpit
Operating the seat
▶ Push the seat cushion back/forwards pressure to or taking your weight off To switch seat ventilation on:
until it is in the desired position. it.
▶ Turn blower regulator s D down-
Engage seat suspension lock: To adjust the seat backrest: wards from the g position.
▶ Pull lever 8 up. ▶ Lift your weight off the seat backrest. ◁ You can increase the airflow in
▶ Pull lever A up and hold it in place. three increments.
◁ The seat suspension engages and
will be locked. ▶ Move the seat backrest into the de- To switch seat ventilation off:
sired position by applying pressure to
To release the seat suspension lock: or taking your weight off it. ▶ Turn blower regulator s D all the
way to the top.
▶ Lower lever 8.
To adjust the seat height:
◁ The seat will be able to vibrate. To adjust the seat fore-and-aft posi-
▶ Pull lever B up or push it down by tion:
To use the easy entry and exit fea- one increment.
ture: ◁ The seat will be raised or lowered ▶ Pull lever E up and hold it in place.
▶ Press the button 9. by one increment. ▶ Push the seat back/forwards until it
is in the desired position.
◁ The seat will be lowered fully. To switch seat heating on: ▶ Release lever E.
▶ Press the button 9.
▶ Press the button C at the top (first ▶ Push the seat back or forwards until it
◁ The seat will return to the last engages audibly.
height set. heating level) or bottom (second heat-
ing level).
To set to the rest position:
To adjust the seat cushion angle:
To switch seat heating off: ▶ Pull lever E up and hold it in place.
▶ Push lever A down and hold it in
place. ▶ Push switch C into the centre posi- ▶ Push the seat back as far as it will go.
▶ Move the seat cushion or backrest tion. ▶ Lift lever F as well and push the seat
beyond the notch back into the rest
into the desired position by applying
position.
Driver cockpit
Operating the seat
▶ Release levers E and F. cushions in the seat backrest will Function seat
◁ By adjusting the seat fore-and-aft inflate and deflate in succession
position, you can slide the seat for roughly ten minutes.
forwards into the drive position
again and lock it in place there. Note
You can adjust the contour of the back-
rest (lumbar support) and the side con-
tours to provide support for your spine.
To adjust the seat backrest contour:

▶ Press the top or bottom section of
button K.
◁ This will make the upper seat
To activate/deactivate the massage backrest contour firmer or softer. ▶ Observe the notes on "Seats"
function: ▶ Press the top or bottom section of ( → Page 65).
button I.
◁ This will make the lower seat To adjust the armrests:
Note
You can prevent muscle tension using backrest contour firmer or softer. ▶ Fold up armrests 1.
the massage function. ▶ Press the button H. ▶ Use the handwheel on the underside
◁ This will make the side contours to adjust the angle of armrests 1.
▶ Press the button G. firmer.
◁ When the massage function is ▶ Press the button J. To adjust the seat backrest:
switched on, you will feel altern-
◁ This will make the side contours ▶ Lift your weight off the seat backrest.
ating upwards and downwards
waves in the lumbar area of the
softer. ▶ Pull lever 3 up and hold it in place.
seat backrest. The separate air
Driver cockpit
Bunks and daybeds in the L cab
▶ Move the seat backrest into the de- Information on the ladder
sired position by applying pressure to Note
or taking your weight off it. Damage to the bed and seats
When folding up and down, the bed can
To fold up the seat cushions: hit the seats and both components can
▶ Fold up seat cushions 2 until they be damaged.
engage. ▶ Fold the backrests of the driver's
and co‐driver's seats forwards or
To fold down the seat cushion:
move the seats further forwards.
▶ Push seat cushions 2 against the Use the area on the centre console as a
seat backrest and release. climbing aid for the upper bunk. Top bunk
▶ Fold down seat cushions 2.
Folding the top bunk up/down
Danger
Overview of bunks and daybeds
Risk of injury and death if the bunk is
The following bunks/daybeds can be used while the vehicle is in motion
installed in the L cab: If the vehicle occupant is on a bed while
● Wide/narrow top bunk ( → Page 71) the vehicle is in motion, it will not be
● Top bunk (car transporter with two possible to restrain them.
bunks) ( → Page 71)
● Top bunk, folding ( → Page 71)
▶ Only use the bed when the vehicle is
parked.
● Bottom bunk ( → Page 73)
If the vehicle is standing on an uphill or
● Seat/daybed combination
downhill slope, you can bring the upper
( → Page 75)
wide bunk into a horizontal position.
● SoloStar Concept ( → Page 77)
Driver cockpit
▶ Move or fold the backrests of the slide the holder 3 along the frame of Folding the top bunk down (car trans-
driver's and co-driver's seats for- the bunk. porter)
wards.
▶ If necessary, slide the driver's and co- Note
driver's seats an adequate distance It is also possible to unclip the hold-
forwards. er 3 at the bottom and clip it back
in at the other end of the bunk.
To fold down and adjust the inclina-
tion: ▶ Release the release buttons 2.
▶ Press and hold release buttons 2. ◁ The retaining straps 1 will auto-
matically engage and the bunk
▶ Swing the bunk downward. will be held at this angle.
To fold up:
▶ Swing the bunk upwards as far as it
goes. ▶ Move or fold the backrests of the
driver's and co-driver's seats for-
wards.
▶ If necessary, slide the driver's and co-
driver's seats an adequate distance
forwards.
▶ Raise the bunk slightly, hold it firmly,
and press the release buttons on both
seat belt buckles 2.
▶ Use the level indicator in the holder ▶ Pull seat belt tongues 1 2 out of
to level the 3 bed and adjust the both seat belt buckles.
inclination. To fully align the bunk, ▶ Swing the bunk downward.
Driver cockpit
To fold up top bunk (car transporter) bunk folds down and can be damaged or ▶ Fold up bunk and push it against the
damage other components. rear panel and hold.
▶ Swing bunk upwards and secure in ▶ On both wall brackets, press the rub-
place. ▶ Fold down the bunk before commen-
cing a journey. ber retainers onto 1 2 the cover
▶ Press seat belt tongues 1 of retain- one 1 after the other until the rub-
ing straps into seat belt buckles 2 Folding up ber retainer engages.
until they engage audibly.
Adjusting inclination of the bunk
Folding the bottom bunk up/down ▶ Pull on the loop 4 to raise the bunk
to a vertical position.
Note ▶ To change the angle, press the buckle
Damage to the bed and seats 3 upwards and move the daybed to
When folding up and down, the bed can the desired position.
hit the seats and both components can Folding down
be damaged.
▶ Push the bunk against the rear panel
▶ Fold the backrests of the driver's and hold.
▶ Push cover 2 back.
▶ Move or fold the backrests of the ▶ Unhook both rubber retainers 1
driver's and co-driver's seats for- from the wall brackets.
Note
wards. ▶ Swing the bunk downward.
Damage to bunk or other compon- ▶ If necessary, slide the driver's and co-
ents driver's seats an adequate distance
If the bunk is not folded down during forwards.
an accident, the rubber retainers may ▶ Fully lower the bunk’s adjustable
come loose from the wall brackets. The backrest.
Driver cockpit
Setting up the safety net Note

Damage to the adjustable backrest
Danger
and seats
Risk of injury and death if the bunk is If the adjustable backrest is folded up
used while the vehicle is in motion and you put the seat back, both com-
If the vehicle occupant is on a bed while ponents may be damaged.
the vehicle is in motion, it will not be
possible to restrain them. ▶ When resetting the seat, make
sure that the adjustable backrest
▶ Only use the bed when the vehicle is is lowered.
parked. ▶ Before folding up the adjustable
backrest, move the seat forwards or
Danger ▶ Before starting your journey, clip fold the seat backrest forwards.
Risk of injury when resting on the safety net 2 into rail 1 on the cab
bunk roof.
Note
A vehicle occupant may fall off the bunk Damage to the bunk or adjustable
and injure themselves. Note
backrest
When there is no one occupying the
▶ Always use the safety net when bottom bunk, stow the safety net If the adjustable backrest is folded up
resting on the bunk. under the bunk. Hook the snap‐hook and you place objects underneath it,
components may be damaged when you
▶ Only use bottom bunk with safety net into the loop provided on the
fold the adjustable backrest down.
during the journey. left‐hand edge of the safety net.
▶ Take note of the legal requirements ▶ Do not place any objects under-
for the country you are currently in Adjusting the backrest adjuster neath the folded‐up backrest.
before using the bunk. Vehicles with lower bunk (lowered) do not The backrest raiser may be loaded with a
have an adjustable backrest. maximum of 50 kg.
Driver cockpit
▶ Ensure that the swivelling area of

Danger the seat backrest is clear and that
Risk of injury when resting on the nobody is trapped.
bunk
A vehicle occupant may fall off the bunk Danger
and injure themselves. Risk of becoming trapped when fold-
▶ Always use the safety net when ing the seat backrest up and down
resting on the bunk. due to slamming down
▶ Pull back height adjuster up by loop
1 and engage. If you do not hold the seat backrest
Danger firmly when folding it up and down, it
▶ To lower to horizontal position: Lift
will slam down.
the adjustable backrest by the loop Risk of injury or death due to seat not
1 beyond the uppermost position being locked in place It may hit a vehicle occupant and trap
and lower it completely. The seating surface may move. body parts.
The seat belt cannot perform its inten- ▶ Always hold the seat backrest firmly
ded protective function. when folding it up and down.
Notes on seat/daybed combinations
▶ Before a trip, always ensure that the
Danger seating surface has been locked in Danger
Risk of injury and death if the bunk is the seat position. Risk of becoming trapped when
used while the vehicle is in motion pulling out the seat cushion
If the vehicle occupant is on a bed while Danger When you pull out the seat cushion, you
the vehicle is in motion, it will not be Risk of becoming trapped when fold- or other vehicle occupants may become
possible to restrain them. ing the seat backrest up and down trapped between the seat frame and the
seat cushion.
▶ Only use the bed when the vehicle is When folding the seat backrest up or
parked. down, you or other vehicle occupants
may become trapped.
Driver cockpit
▶ Make sure that no body parts are in Folding the top bunk up/down
the seat cushion's movement area
when you pull out the seat cushion. Folding the seat backrest up to the
reclined position
The safety net on the top bunk is not a
restraint system to enable the bunk to be
used while the vehicle is in motion.
The seat/bunk combination is not suit-
able for child restraint systems.
▶ Only install the child restraint system
on the front passenger seat.
▶ Observe the safety notes in the sec-
tion entitled “Children in the vehicle” ▶ Unhook the retaining straps 1 on
( → Page 41). the right and left of the seat backrest
2.
▶ Swivel the seat backrest 2 upwards.
▶ Swivel the seat backrest 2 into the
horizontal position and hold it there.
▶ Engage seat belt tongue 4 into belt
buckles 3 on the right and left.
Folding the seat backrest down to

the seat position
▶ Slightly 2 raise the seat backrest,
hold it in place and press the release
Driver cockpit
SoloStar Concept
buttons 5 of the belt buckles 3 on To pull out or push in bottom bunk SoloStar Concept
the right and left.
▶ Swivel the seat backrest 2 slightly Pull seat cushion out into the re- Using the front passenger's seat and
upwards. clined position: folding table
▶ Swivel the daybed down to the rear
Danger
wall.
Risk of injury from the open folding
▶ Hook the retaining straps 1 on the
table
right and left of the seat backrest2.
Vehicle occupants could bump into the
folding table and injure themselves.
▶ Close the folding table before each
journey.
Danger
Risk of injury from unsecured items
in the vehicle
▶ Pull seat cushion forward using the
If objects, luggage, or loads are not se-
loop 3.
cured or not secured sufficiently, they
▶ Hook brackets 2 into the catches could slip, tip over, or be thrown around
1. and thereby hit vehicle occupants.
To slide seat cushion into the seat There is a risk of injury, particularly in
position: the event of braking manoeuvres or
abrupt changes in direction!
▶ Lift seat cushion by the loop 3 and
slide it backwards. ▶ Always stow objects in such a way
that they cannot be thrown around.
Driver cockpit
SoloStar Concept
▶ Before the journey, secure objects, Adjusting the head restraint ▶ Place support 3 into recess 4 in
luggage, or loads against slipping or the side trim of the drawer container.
tipping over. ▶ Pull head restraint up or push it down
until it is at the desired height. Folding the folding table up
▶ Stow loose objects in the stowage
spaces and stowage compartments Removing the head restraint ▶ Fold folding table 2 up and hook
during the journey ( → Page 123). rubber mount 5 onto folding table
▶ Pull up firmly on the head restraint. 2.
Folding the folding table down ▶ Fold in support 3.
Folding the bunk down/up
Danger
Risk of injury and death if the bunk is
used while the vehicle is in motion
If the vehicle occupant is on a bed while
the vehicle is in motion, it will not be
possible to restrain them.
Front passenger's seat and folding
parked.
table
1 Corner seat
▶ Fold out support 3 on folding table
2 until it engages.
2 Folding table
▶ Unclip rubber mount 5 from folding
table 2.
▶ Fold down folding table 2.
Driver cockpit
SoloStar Concept
▶ Pull loop 3 on front passenger's seat

Note Note 1. The backrest on the front passen-
Damage to the bed and seats Damage to the bunk or adjustable ger's seat will now be unlocked.
When folding up and down, the bed can backrest ▶ Fold down the seat backrest.
hit the seats and both components can If the adjustable backrest is folded up
be damaged. and you place objects underneath it, Folding the bunk down
components may be damaged when you
▶ Fold the backrests of the driver's
fold the adjustable backrest down.
move the seats further forwards. ▶ Do not place any objects under-
neath the folded‐up backrest.
Note
Damage to the adjustable backrest
and seats
If the adjustable backrest is folded up
and you put the seat back, both com-
ponents may be damaged.
▶ When resetting the seat, make
sure that the adjustable backrest ▶ Take note of the legal requirements
is lowered. for the country you are currently in
▶ Before folding up the adjustable before using the bunk during the
backrest, move the seat forwards or journey.
fold the seat backrest forwards. ▶ If the bunk is used during the journey:
▶ Fold up folding table 2, clip the Setting up the safety net.
rubber mount to folding table 2 and
fold in the support.
Driver cockpit
Bunks in the M-cab
Note Bunks in the M-cab Note

You can find information on setting Overview of bunks in the M cab Damage to the bed and seats
up the safety net and adjusting the The following bunks may be fitted in the M When folding up and down, the bed can
head section in the section entitled cab: hit the seats and both components can
"Bottom bunk" ( → Page 73). ● Bottom standard bunk / upholstered be damaged.
▶ Push the bunk 4 against the rear stowage space ( → Page 80) ▶ Fold the backrests of the driver's
panel. ● Bottom standard bunk, partitioned and co‐driver's seats forwards or
▶ Press and hold catch 6. ( → Page 81) move the seats further forwards.
▶ Detach rubber mount 5 from the
wall bracket. Folding the berth down
Bottom standard bunk/upholstered
▶ Swing bunk 4 down. stowage space
Folding the bunk up
Danger
▶ Lower the head section of the bunk Risk of injury and death if the bunk is
all the way. used while the vehicle is in motion
▶ Fold up bunk 4 and push it against If the vehicle occupant is on a bed while
the rear panel. the vehicle is in motion, it will not be
▶ Push rubber mount 5 against catch possible to restrain them.
6 and clip it into the wall bracket.
▶ Fold the seat backrest back until it parked.
engages.
▶ Vehicles with standard bottom bunk:
Move or fold the backrests of the
Driver cockpit
Bunks in the M-cab
driver's and front passenger's seats Use bottom standard bunk (parti- Folding the berth down
forwards. tioned)
▶ If necessary, slide the driver's and co-
driver's seats an adequate distance Danger
forwards. Risk of injury and death if the bunk is
▶ Push the bed against the rear panel used while the vehicle is in motion
and hold. If the vehicle occupant is on a bed while
▶ Turn hook 1 90° and unhook it from the vehicle is in motion, it will not be
the wall brackets 2. possible to restrain them.
▶ Fold bunk downwards.
Fold the berth upwards parked.
▶ Fold up the berth and push it against Note
the rear panel and hold.
Damage to the bed and seats
▶ Push the bed against the rear panel
▶ Turn the hook 1 90° and attach it to and hold.
When folding up and down, the bed can
the wall brackets 2.
hit the seats and both components can
▶ Turn the hooks 1 90° and unhook
them from the wall brackets 2.
be damaged.
▶ Slide the locking slide 5 down.
▶ Fold the backrests of the driver's ◁ The front 4 and rear 3 berth
and co‐driver's seats forwards or parts are no longer locked.
▶ Fold bunk downwards.
▶ Press the hook 1 between the
halves of the cushion.
Driver cockpit
Adjusting the multifunction steering wheel
Fold the berth upwards steering wheel, and mirror in partic- ● After adjusting the steering wheel, the
ular, and fasten your seat belt. freedom of movement and steerability
▶ Fold up the berth and push it against should be checked.
the rear panel and hold. Danger
▶ Hook the hooks 1 into the wall
Risk of accident due to unlocked
brackets 2 and turn them 90°.
steering wheel
▶ Press the front berth section 4
If the steering wheel remains unlocked
against the rear berth section 3 until
while the vehicle is in motion, it may
the safety slide 5 engages.
adjust unexpectedly.
▶ Ensure that the steering wheel is
Adjusting the multifunction steering locked before every journey.
wheel ▶ Do not unlock the steering wheel
while the vehicle is in motion.
Danger
Risk of accident when making signi- Requirements
Steering column release in the driver's footwell
ficant adjustments while driving ● The vehicle is stationary. ▶ Step on the 1 button and hold
You may lose control of the vehicle, in ● The parking brake is applied. down.
particular in the following situations:
Observe the following when adjusting the ◁ The steering column is unlocked.
● If you adjust the driver's seat, the ▶ Adjust the multifunction steering
steering wheel:
head restraints, the steering wheel, or wheel height and angle.
the mirror while the vehicle is in motion. ● First, adjust the seat to the correct
position ( → Page 65). ▶ Remove your foot from button 1.
● If you fasten your seat belt while the ● The angle of the steering wheel must ◁ The steering column is locked.
vehicle is in motion. be set as low as possible.
▶ Before starting the vehicle: Adjust
the driver's seat, head restraints,
Driver cockpit
Outside mirrors
Outside mirrors ▶ You should therefore always as- side mirror on the front passenger's side
certain the actual distance of oth- can swivel outwards to allow you to see
Adjusts the outside mirrors er road users by looking over your the trailer/semitrailer while manoeuvring.
shoulder. If the outside mirror is in the manoeuvring
Danger position, it can be adjusted horizontally.
Risk of accident when making signi-
ficant adjustments while driving
▶ Switch on the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle, in
▶ To adjust the outside mirrors:
Press button | for the left out-
particular in the following situations:
side mirror or button ~ for the
● If you adjust the driver's seat, the right outside mirror.
head restraints, the steering wheel, or ◁ The indicator lamp on the button
the mirror while the vehicle is in motion. comes on.
● If you fasten your seat belt while the ▶ Push the Í button forwards or
vehicle is in motion. backwards and on the right or left, un-
▶ Before starting the vehicle: Adjust til the outside mirror is in the correct
the driver's seat, head restraints, position.
steering wheel, and mirror in partic- Driver's door switch panel ▶ To swivel the outside mirrors into
ular, and fasten your seat belt. 1 | Left outside mirror the manoeuvring position: Press
2 ~ Right outside mirror
the button Ï.
Danger 3 Í Adjust outside mirrors
◁ The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The front-passenger
Risk of accident if the distance is 4 Ï Manoeuvring position for the outside
outside mirror will swivel out-
misjudged when using the outside mirrors
wards into the manoeuvring posi-
mirror
Adjust the front bumper‐view mirror, kerb tion.
The outside mirrors reduce the size of
the image. The objects in view are in fact
view mirror,and wide‐angle mirror manu- ▶ To set the exterior mirrors to the
ally. In the manoeuvring position, the out- manoeuvring position: Push the
closer than they appear.
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
button Í on the right or left until Activate/deactivate the mirror heater are swivelled to the drive position again,
the outside mirror is in the correct the mirror heater will be reactivated.
position. The ramp mirror is not heated.
◁ The manoeuvring position that
was set is saved. If you press the
Ï button when next manoeuv- MirrorCam system
ring, the outside mirror will swivel Notes on the MirrorCam system
into the last manoeuvring posi-
tion selected. Danger
▶ To swivel the outside mirrors into Risk of accident due to malfunction
the drive position: Press the button or system failure of the MirrorCam
Ï. system
◁ The indicator lamp on the button In the following cases, the system must
will go out. The front-passenger ▶ Switch on the vehicle. be repaired before driving continues:
outside mirror will swivel back ▶ To switch on/off: Press the button
into the drive position that you ● complete failure of a display
Î.
have set. ● still images — despite moving objects
◁ When the indicator lamp on the
in front of the camera
button lights up, the mirror heater
is switched on. ● lagged visualisation of the traffic situ-
ation
Note ▶ Park the vehicle safely as soon as
If the mirror heater is switched on and possible.
the outside mirrors are swivelled to the ▶ Notify a qualified specialist work-
manoeuvring position, the mirror heater shop.
will be deactivated. If the outside mirrors
If only one of the two fields of vision in the
display fails, the journey can be continued
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
cautiously to the next workshop. Have the ● The temperature measured on the is dirty. Clean the camera lens if ne-
system repaired there. display is approximately 67°C or high- cessary.
er. ▶ Observe the notes on cleaning
In addition, a corresponding display mes- the MirrorCam camera in the
sage is shown in the instrument cluster. section "Cleaning the sensors"
( → Page 389).
The MirrorCam system display does not ▶ If the displayed image does not im-
have a separate heating function. prove as a result of this, have the sys-
In these cases the vehicle interior must be tem checked as soon as possible at a
heated up or cooled down until the display qualified specialist workshop.
shows an image.
Certain sunlight conditions (e.g., low sun)
If a display shows an unusual or faulty or light from another intense source can
image, the system must be checked as reduce the contrast of the display and
soon as possible at a qualified specialist cause glare. In such situations, objects in
The MirrorCam system display is divided workshop and, if necessary, be repaired. the display may be obscured or difficult to
by status display (blue line) 1 into areas This includes, for example, the following see.
2 and 3. display situations: ▶ In these cases, be particularly attent-
If status display 1 is not shown in the ● distorted images ive and adjust your driving behaviour
display, there is a system error. ● clearly noticeable pixel errors, column accordingly.
Depending on the temperature, no image or row failures Drivers must always wear the necessary
is shown in the display in the following ● no visible information, for example personal visual aids required for them to
situations: arrows when a field of view is moved drive a vehicle. Drivers with presbyopia
● The temperature measured on the when cornering ( → Page 91) (age‐related long‐sightedness) should, if
display is approximately ‐18°C or ● contrast or colour changes necessary, wear visual aids with multifocal
below. ▶ If a monitor displays a blurry or un- lenses to be sufficiently able to see traffic
clear image, check if the camera lens including via the displays.
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
▶ When cleaning the MirrorCam display, To ensure the camera is in the correct
observe the notes on cleaning the operating position, a sensor is fitted in the Note
interior ( → Page 381). camera arm. Depending on the temperature signals it
receives, the automatic control system
When the camera arm is folded forwards
can reverse manual activation or deac-
Function of the MirrorCam system or backwards by more than 4°, the symbol
tivation of the heating.
å appears in the display.
The MirrorCam system is used to replace
legally prescribed mirror systems on the
vehicle with electronic image detection Note
and display systems. It assists you in A fitted spring enables the camera arm
keeping an overview of your vehicle and to automatically return to the correct
its surroundings. operating position in the event of minor
deviations. In the event of larger devi-
The system is designed for forward travel
ations, it may be necessary to manually
in all speed ranges, for reversing and for
return the camera arm to the correct po-
vehicle standstill.
sition.
To optimise what is shown in the display,
The optical system of the camera is
a distinction is made between the follow-
equipped with a heating function, which
ing driving situations:
is automatically activated/deactivated
● Forward travel depending on the temperature
Display (example: left-hand side of the vehicle)
● Forward travel with left or right turn- The display is divided in two by a status
of the camera's sensor and the
ing display (blue line) 1.
outside temperature. This avoids the
● Reversing, including manoeuvring accumulation of snow and ice in the area The field of view shown in the upper sec-
The vehicle is equipped with one camera of the camera. tion of screen 2 corresponds to the main
and one display on each side. mirror; the field of view in the bottom sec-
Alternatively, press the button Î
tion 3 corresponds to the wide‐angle
to manually switch the heating on/off
mirror.
( → Page 87).
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
Operating the MirrorCam system Standby mode and automatic deactiv-

ation
Automatic activation of the
MirrorCam system In the following cases, the MirrorCam
system automatically switches to standby
The system is automatically activated
mode:
when the following occurs:
● two minutes after switching off the
● Unlocking/opening the door
vehicle
● Unlocking/opening the vehicle
● two minutes after the last time the
● Switching on the vehicle
button Ï was pressed with the
vehicle switched off
Note
Switching on the vehicle results in per- Note
Driver's side door control unit
manent activation.
1 | Selects display, left
Ten seconds before the system switches
Manual activation of the MirrorCam to standby mode, symbol Ø is shown
2 ~ Selects display, right
system in the display.
3 Í Sets field of view
▶ Press the button Ï. 4 Ï Activate/deactivate automatic field of In the following cases, the system that is
◁ Within seven seconds of automat- view/manoeuvring view in standby mode is reactivated:
ically or manually activating the 5 Ï Manually activate system ● The Ï button is pressed.
system, the field of view (basic 6 Î Activates/deactivates camera heating ● A door is opened.
setting) is available to the driver
in the display. Buttons 1, 2, 4, and 6 are equipped
with indicator lamps, which indicate the
status of the function. The function is
activated when the indicator lamp in the
button is lit.
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
For a more exact setting, it is recommen-

Note ded to place an object at the end of the Note
When the system is activated from vehicle on the ground and align the line The selected setting remains stored
standby mode, an image is available with it. even after the vehicle is switched off.
to the driver in the display within one This way, the end edge must be reset
Requirements:
second. only if the overall length changes, e.g.
● The symbol Õ is shown in the due to a different semitrailer/trailer or if
After five minutes in standby mode, the display. there is an overhanging load.
system is automatically deactivated. ● The vehicle speed is less than
10 km/h. Note
Adjusting the field of vision ● The automatic field of vision adjust-
The semitrailer/trailer back edge is hid-
ment function is not active.
Adjusting the back edge of the den when semitrailer tracking is active
semitrailer/trailer ▶ Press the Í button forwards or or if the field of view is manually set.
backwards to move the line 1 shown
in the display. Note
◁ The line in the display flashes. If manoeuvring view has been activated,
▶ Storing the setting: Press the Í the semitrailer/trailer back edge is dis-
button right or left. played elongated for better orientation.
◁ The line shown in the display
stops flashing. Manual field of vision adjustment
◁ The setting is stored for both The driver is able to move the field of view
After switching on the vehicle or changing sides. shown in the upper section of the display
the semitrailer/trailer, the adjustable up, down, left, or right.
distance line 1 shown in the display can ▶ Manually adjusting the field of
be moved to the end edge of the trailer/ view: Press the button | for the
semitrailer.
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
left-hand display, or the button ~ ◁ The indicator lamp on the re- Requirements:
for the right-hand display. spective button comes on. ● The system detects a driving situation
◁ The indicator lamp on the re- ▶ Press and hold the Ï button for in which it is useful to adjust the field
spective button comes on. approximately two seconds. of view.
▶ Using the Í button, move the field ◁ The field of vision is reset to the ● The semitrailer is correctly connected
of vision. basic setting. When the legally to the towing vehicle (signal transmis-
◁ If the field of vision shown in the prescribed field of vision is shown sion).
display deviates from the legally in the display again, the 0 or ● Automatic field of view adjustment
prescribed field of vision (basic 1 icon flashes in the display Ï is activated.
setting), the 2 or 3 icon is for five seconds and then goes
Automatic field of view adjustment only
shown in the display. out.
occurs in the upper section of the display.
Note Note Automatic field of view adjustment only

A manually set field of vision is occurs in the display of the inside side of
If the manoeuvring view is activ-
reset to the default setting by the bend.
ated, both fields of vision shown
in the display are moved. switching off the vehicle. The function detects cornering man-
oeuvres in which an adjusted field of view
Automatic field of view adjustment is useful.
Note
for forward travel (semitrailer track-
The distance lines are hidden ing) The influencing variables for the auto-
if the field of vision was set matic field of vision adjustment are as
manually ( → Page 91). The automatic field of view adjustment follows:
function for forward travel is only possible ● The swivel angle between the towing
▶ Reset field of vision to basic set- on tractor/semitrailer combinations.
ting: Press the button | for the vehicle and the trailer/semitrailer
left-hand display, or the button ~ ● The vehicle speed
for the right-hand display. ▶ Activating automatic field of view
adjustment: Press the Ï button.
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
◁ The function is activated when ◁ The symbol Ö (green ◁ The function is deactivated when
the indicator lamp in the Ï right/left arrows) is shown in the the indicator lamp in the Ï
button is on. display. button goes off.
The driver is shown an automatic field of ▶ Use the button Í to adjust the
field of vision shown to the left or to Manoeuvring view
vision adjustment by the symbol Ñ in
the display for the relevant side. the right. The manoeuvring view assists drivers
◁ When the Ò icon flashes in when manoeuvring by providing them with
Note the display, the setting is stored. a better overview of the vehicle and its
Automatic field of view adjust- surroundings.
If automatic field of vision adjustment ment continues to remain active.
is active, no distance lines are shown in When the manoeuvring view is activated,
the display ( → Page 91). the upper part of the display shows the
Note immediate vehicle surroundings, while the
During the automatic field of vision adjust- Manual field of vision adjustment lower part shows the more distant ones.
ment, an additional manual field of vision can be reset to the basic setting
adjustment is possible. This allows, for by pressing the Ï button for Note
example, the influence of different trail- approximately two seconds.
ers on the position of the trailer end to be Tractor/semitrailer combinations with
compensated for with active trailer track- attached semitrailer: When automatic
Note field of vision adjustment has been activ-
ing. When driving without a semitrailer, ated, the system automatically switches
▶ Press the button | for the left- it is necessary to deactivate the to manoeuvring view when reverse gear
hand display or the button ~ for automatic field of view adjustment is engaged.
the right-hand display. function.
◁ The indicator lamp on the re- ▶ Deactivating automatic field of
spective button will light up.
view adjustment: Press the Ï
button.
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
In addition, the driver has the option of

Note Note manually adjusting the brightness of the
Manual activation of manoeuvring view If manoeuvring view has been ac- display.
is only possible below a vehicle speed of tivated, the adjustable distance line
The brightness of the "instrument lighting"
10 km/h. is shown elongated in the display
must be set to perform a manual adjust-
for better orientation ( → Page 91).
▶ Activating manoeuvring view: Press The other distance lines are not dis-
ment.
the Ï button. ▶ In the on-board computer Settings
played if manoeuvring view has been
◁ If manoeuvring view has been activated. menu ä select menu item Lighting,
activated, the ø or ÷ icon Instrument panel ( → Page 165).
is shown in the display. ▶ Deactivate manoeuvring view Press
◁ The indicator lamp in the Ï the Ï button.
button also lights up. ◁ The indicator lamp in the button Overview of display situations in the
Ï goes out. display
Note There are some display options for the
If manoeuvring view has been ac- Note MirrorCam system which can be shown in
tivated, an additional up or down When a vehicle speed of 10 km/h the display to indicate driving conditions,
manual adjustment of the fields of is exceeded during forward travel, system errors, and active functions.
vision shown in the display is pos- the function is automatically deactiv-
sible. For this, observe the "Manual ated. Distance lines
field of vision adjustment" section. The distance lines are shown in the ba-
Adjusting the display brightness
sic setting of the field of view after the
The brightness of the display is controlled system start. These help you to better es-
automatically, depending on the bright- timate speeds and distances to objects
ness of the ambient light. (e.g. vehicles).
Driver cockpit
MirrorCam system
Note Note Overtaking assistant

The line display is in an area of the dis- The adjustable distance line 1 can
play where no legally required field of be set after switching on the vehicle
view is shown. or changing the semitrailer/trailer
( → Page 88).
Note
The distances in which the distance lines
2, 3 and 4 are displayed are not The overtaking assistant is an extended
adjustable and can vary depending on display of the distance lines. The function
the topography of the roads driven on. is intended to assist the driver when over-
taking on roads with several lanes in the
Trailer/semitrailer back edge and distance lines (example) In the following cases, the distance lines direction of travel.
Trailer/semitrailer back edge and dis- are hidden in the display:
Here, distance lines 2, 3 and 4 are
tance lines ● when semitrailer tracking is active extended outward accordingly.
1 Adjustable distance line ( → Page 88) ● when the field of view has been set
manually The display appears on the relevant side
2 Distance line when the turn signal indicator is activated
● when manoeuvring view has been
3 Distance line starting at vehicle speeds above 30 km/h.
activated (2, 3 and 4 only)
4 Distance line On the front passenger's side, the areas
between the lines are also marked in
colour.
Ten seconds after deactivating the turn
signal indicator, or if the vehicle falls be-
Driver cockpit
Exterior lighting
low a speed of 25 km/h, the guide lines (Green right/left arrows) Manual field of All the vehicle's exterior lighting is elec-
are hidden. Ö vision adjustment during active semitrailer tronically monitored. A malfunction in the
tracking possible exterior lighting is signalled to the driver
Explanation of the symbols in the Ù
System without calibration (consult via the indicator lamp b in the instru-
workshop)
display ment cluster.
å Camera outside the operating position
Symbols in the display ▶ Observe the notes in the display mes-
Manoeuvring view active (example, left
Sideguard Assist/Active Sideguard Assist ø sages in the instrument cluster.
side)
Û
warning ( → Page 274) ▶ Have a second person check the
Sideguard Assist/Active Sideguard Assist vehicle lighting.
Û Note
warning ( → Page 274)
Depending on the configuration, you may
Automatic semitrailer tracking for forward Several symbols may be shown in the
Ñ be able to check the lighting with the
travel active display simultaneously.
electronic vehicle key ( → Page 47).
Manual setting during active automatic
Ò semitrailer tracking (flashes when storing
Note
the new setting)
In addition to the symbols in the Light switch overview
Displayed for ten seconds before the
Ø MirrorCam display, the driver may be
system switches to standby mode
shown messages in the instrument Danger
Displayed after system start or after
changing the semitrailer/trailer cluster. Risk of accident if the exterior light-
Õ
Trailer/semitrailer end edge can be ing is covered by the side board
adjusted If you open the rear side board, the rear
2 The display does not show the legally Exterior lighting exterior lighting is covered.
3 required field of vision
Lamp check This could delay other road users in
0 The display now shows the legally The lamp check is only an aid. Respons- recognising the vehicle as an obstacle.
1 prescribed field of vision (basic setting)
ibility for the correct vehicle lighting in
▶ Secure the rear area of the vehicle
accordance with the legal requirements
according to the national require-
always rests with the driver.
ments, e.g. using a warning triangle.
Driver cockpit
Exterior lighting
A warning tone will sound in the following masked when you are driving in
cases: such countries ( → Page 114).
● You open the driver's door with the Vehicles with manual headlamp range
dipped beam switched on and the adjustment: When the dipped beam is
ignition lock in the radio position. engaged for the first time, or after the
● You open the driver's door with vehicle has been switched on or started,
the parking lights or dipped beam the instrument cluster will show the dis-
switched on and the ignition lock in play message Headl. range ctrl..
the g position.
If the illumination of the road is not suffi-
cient or oncoming traffic is being dazzled,
Switching dipped beam on/off the headlamp range must be adjusted.
Light switch (example)
▶ Turn the light switch to L. ▶ Change the setting shown using the
Light switch ◁ The low beam and the standing button u or t on the steering
1 c Automatic driving lights and daytime light will be switched on. The in- wheel.
running lights
dicator lamp T on the instru-
2 $ Lights off or daytime running lights ment cluster will come on. Note
3 T Standing and tail lights; licence plate When you are driving a laden
lighting; perimeter and side marker lights
Note vehicle, the illumination of the road
4 L Dipped beam must be 40 m to 100 m and the low
The dipped beam is asymmetrical.
5 N Fog light In countries in which traffic does beam must not dazzle oncoming
6 R Rear fog light not drive on the same side of the traffic.
road as in the country where the ▶ When the vehicle is unladen, select
You can operate the main beam and per- vehicle is registered, there is a risk
form headlamp flashing using the combin- level $.
of dazzling other drivers. Parts of
ation switch ( → Page 98). the headlamps must therefore be
Driver cockpit
Exterior lighting
Switching automatic driving lights matically depending on the light

Note conditions.
on/off
The headlamp range can also be ◁ If the dipped beam is switched
adjusted via the Lighting menu Danger on, the T indicator lamp on
window in the Settings menu ä the instrument cluster will switch
( → Page 165). Risk of accident when the dipped
beam is switched off in poor visibility on.
When the light switch is set to c, ◁ Vehicles with daytime running
Switch daytime running lights on/off the dipped beam may not be switched lights: If the low beam and
standing lights are automatically
▶ Start the vehicle. on automatically if there is fog, snow or
other causes of poor visibility such as switched off, the daytime running
▶ Turn the light switch to position $. lights will switch on.
◁ The daytime running lamps will be spray.
switched on. ▶ In such cases, turn the light switch Note
or to L.
If the vehicle is switched off manu-
▶ Turn the light switch to c. The automatic driving lights are only an ally or automatically ( → Page 207),
◁ If the low beam and standing aid. The responsibility for vehicle lighting the vehicle lighting switched on by
lights are automatically switched rests with the driver. the automatic driving lights will also
off, the daytime running lights will The light switch should be turned from be switched off. If necessary, switch
switch on. c to L immediately in the event the vehicle lighting on manually.
of darkness or fog. Otherwise, the driving
If the light switch is turned to L, the Note
light may be temporarily interrupted.
daytime running lights will automatically If the rain and light sensor is mal-
switch off. ▶ Switch on the vehicle.
functioning, the dipped beam and
▶ Turn the light switch to c. parking lamps will be switched on
◁ The low beam and standing lights automatically and stay on.
will be switched on or off auto-
Driver cockpit
Exterior lighting
Switch front and rear fog light on/off If the low beam is switched on, the cor- How Adaptive Highbeam Assist
nering light will improve the illumination of
▶ Turn the light switch to T or L. works
the carriageway in the turning direction.
▶ To switch fog lights on: Pull the light
If you engage reverse gear, both fog lights Danger
switch out to stage 5.
◁ The fog light and the fog light will switch on when you turn the steering Risk of accident despite Adaptive
indicator lamp N next to the wheel. Highbeam Assist
light switch will go on. The cornering light will switch on automat- Adaptive Highbeam Assist does not
▶ To switch front and rear fog lights ically in the following situations: recognise:
on: Pull the light switch out to stage ● You are travelling at a speed below ● Road users without lights, e.g. pedes-
6. around 25 km/h and are indicating trians
◁ The front and rear fog lights and or turning the multifunction steering ● Road users with poor lighting, e.g.
the indicator lamps for the front wheel. cyclists
N and rear fog lights R ● You are travelling between around
● Road users whose lighting is obstruc-
next to the light switch go on. 25 km/h and 40 km/h and turn the
ted, e.g. by a crash barrier
multifunction steering wheel.
Note ● Crossing road users
The cornering light may stay lit up for a
If the vehicle has a rear fog light short time but will be switched off auto- An overtaking vehicle will not be detec-
only, turn the light switch to L matically after a maximum of around ted by Adaptive Highbeam Assist until it
and pull it out to level 6. three seconds. is directly in front of your own vehicle.
On very rare occasions, Adaptive High-
beam Assist may fail to recognise other
Cornering light function
road users with their own lighting, or
Vehicles with front fog lights and LED may recognise them too late.
daytime running lamps:
In these or in similar situations, the auto-
matic main beam will therefore not be
Driver cockpit
Exterior lighting
deactivated, or will be activated never- When the system detects other road ● If the windscreen around the camera
theless. users, the high beam will automatically is obscured, e.g. due to a defective
be deactivated. This will prevent other windscreen wiper or a sticker.
▶ Always observe the road and traffic
conditions carefully and switch off
road users from being dazzled. ● If the carriageway is very narrow and
the high beam in good time. When the system no longer detects any winding.
other vehicle, it will reactivate the high ● If detachable parts, e.g. a snow
Depending on their illumination and the plough, restrict the camera's view of
beam.
road and traffic conditions, it is possible the lane markings.
to identify cyclists and crossing traffic, but The following influences may also lead to
● After a major change in load with the
this is not guaranteed. automatic activation/deactivation of the
vehicle switched on.
high beam:
▶ Monitor the traffic situation attent- ▶ Therefore, start the vehicle again
ively and manually switch off the high ● The light conditions
● Vehicle speed after a significant change in load, so
beam if necessary.
that Adaptive Main Beam Assist is
Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. System limits available without any restrictions.
Responsibility for correctly adjusting the
Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take ▶ Keep the windscreen around the cam-
vehicle's lighting to the prevailing light, era free of dirt, snow, or ice.
into account road, weather, or traffic con-
visibility, and traffic conditions always
ditions. ▶ Use the windscreen wipers, or
rests with the driver. clean the windscreen manually
The system may be impaired or may not wherever necessary. See the sections
Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam Assist
function in the following situations: entitled "Notes on external cleaning"
are equipped with a camera behind the
windscreen. ● If visibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, ( → Page 384) and "Cleaning
rain, fog, or heavy spray. sensors" ( → Page 389).
The system detects the following traffic ● If the windscreen in the area of the
situations: camera is dirty, misted up, or dam- If the system is malfunctioning, the main
● Illuminated vehicles travelling in front aged. beam will be switched off. The driver will
● Illuminated oncoming vehicles be notified of the malfunction by a dis-
Driver cockpit
Exterior lighting
play message displayed in the instrument Combination switch Vehicles with Adaptive Highbeam
cluster. Assist
Using the high beam and headlamp
▶ If necessary, switch on the high beam flashing The high beam can be controlled automat-
manually. ically.
Switching Adaptive Main Beam Assist ▶ Switch on Adaptive Highbeam Assist
on/off Ô ( → Page 96).
The function can be activated/deactiv- ▶ Switch on dipped beam L.
ated in the instrument cluster under the ▶ Press the combination lever in the
Settings menu ä, Assistance menu win- direction of arrow 1 and latch into
dow ( → Page 165). place.
If Adaptive Main Beam Assist is activated,
◁ The high beam will be switched
on/off automatically depending
the Ô indicator lamp in the instrument
on the situation .
cluster lights up.
◁ The indicator lamp Ô in the
If the indicator lamp Ô in the instru- instrument cluster comes on
ment cluster lights up, the Adaptive High- ▶ Switch on the vehicle. (when high beam is OFF).
beam Assist has automatically switched
Switching on high beam ◁ The indicator lamp Ô in the
on the high beam.
instrument cluster comes on
▶ Switch on dipped beam L. (when high beam is ON).
▶ Press the combination lever in the ▶ Headlamp flasher: Briefly pull the
direction of arrow 1 and latch into combination lever in the direction of
place. arrow 2.
◁ The indicator lamp K in the ◁ The indicator lamp K in the
instrument cluster comes on. instrument cluster and the high
beam will come on briefly.
Driver cockpit
Exterior lighting
Using the turn signal indicators ◁ The corresponding turn signal According to legal conditions, differences
lamps and indicator lamp . from the use of the illuminated Mercedes
or , in the instrument cluster star described here are possible in some
will flash five times. countries.
▶ To cancel the flash: Briefly tap the ▶ Observe the legal requirements for
combination lever in the opposite your current location.
direction.
▶ Activation: Press the Ú switch at
top.
Switch the illuminated Mercedes star ◁ The indicator lamp in the switch
on/off Ú comes on.
▶ Deactivation: Press the lower sec-
tion of the switch Ú.
◁ The indicator lamp in switch Ú
▶ To indicate: Push the combination goes off.
lever upwards to indicate right 1, or
downwards to indicate left 2 until it
engages.
◁ The corresponding turn signal
lamps and indicator lamp .
or , in the instrument cluster
will flash.
▶ To flash briefly: When you are over-
taking or changing lanes, briefly tap The illuminated Mercedes star on the
the combination lever in the desired maintenance flap is approved exclusively
direction to indicate right 1 or indic- for use on private land. Use on public
ate left 2. roads is prohibited.
Driver cockpit
Exterior lighting
Switch the rotating beacon on/off Switch position lamps on roof on/off Activate/deactivate additional head-
lamp
Note
Find out about the legal requirements for
the country in which you are currently
driving before using additional head-
lamps on public roads.
Rotating beacon button (example) Rotating roof position marker lamps (example)
▶ To switch on/off: Press the button ▶ To switch on/off: Press the Â

À. button above.
When driving the vehicle with a rotating When operating the vehicle using rotating
beacon, observe the legal requirements roof position marker lamps, observe the
in the country in which you are currently legal requirements for your current loca-
driving. tion.
If the required field of view is not clear ▶ To switch on/off: Press the é
due to being obstructed by trailers, bod- button above.
ies, or attachments, safeguard the vehicle ◁ When the additional headlamps
by using additional lights. are switched on, the indicator
lamp é in the button lights up.

Driver cockpit
Switch interior lighting on/off

Interior lamps
Switch panel above the windscreen (variant 2) Bed/bunk switch panel with reading lamp (example: bottom
bunk)
Interior lighting switch

Switch panel above the windscreen (variant 1) 1 Switches the driver's reading lamp on/off or
dims it
2 Switches the interior lamps on/off or dims
them
3 Switches automatic interior lighting control
on/off
4 Switches night lighting on/off
5 Switches on/off or dims the front
passenger's reading lamp
6 Switches off all interior lighting
Front passenger's door switch panel

▶ Activation: Briefly press the 2 but-
ton.

Driver cockpit
◁ The interior lamps will be ▶ Switch on/off with button: Press Bunk/daybed reading lamp
switched on but dimmed. the 3 button until a brief acoustic
▶ To dim: Press and hold the 2 but- signal sounds.
ton. ◁ When the driver's door or co-
◁ The brightness of the interior driver's door is opened and the
lamps is adjustable from 0 to interior lamps and entrance light-
100%. If you drive at above ing switch on automatically, auto-
30 km/h, the brightness will be matic control will be activated.
dimmed down automatically.
Driver's/front passenger's reading
▶ Switching off: Press button 2 again
lamp
briefly.
or
▶ Switching on/off: Briefly press but-
ton 1 for the driver's reading lamp
▶ Press the button 6 on the bed/bunk or button 5 for the front passenger's Bunk/daybed reading lamp (example)
switch panel reading lamp. ▶ Activation: Press the lower section of
◁ The interior lamps will go out. ▶ To dim: Press and hold 1 button for the reading lamp lens.
the driver's reading lamp or 5 but- ▶ Switching off: Press the upper sec-
Automatic interior lighting control
ton for the front passenger's reading tion of the reading lamp lens.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, lamp.
you have the following options for activat- Night lighting
ing/deactivating the function:
The night lighting provides non‐dazzle
● the menu window Lighting in the
ambient lighting while you are driving.
Settings menu ä ( → Page 165)
● Button 3 as described in the follow-
ing

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, ▶ Allow the component parts to cool

you have the following options for con- down before replacing the bulbs. Note
trolling the function: Daimler Truck AG recommends that you
● the menu window Lighting in the A bulb may explode in the following cases: also change the corresponding bulb in
Settings menu ä ( → Page 165) ● You touch the bulb when it is hot. the other headlamp when a bulb for the
● With button 4 as described in the ● You drop the bulb. low beam or high beam fails. Daimler
following ● You scratch the bulb. Truck AG recommends that you use
long‐life bulbs for this.
▶ Switch on/off with button: Press ▶ Do not use a light bulb that has been
the button 4. dropped or whose glass bulb is Danger
scratched.
Risk of fatal injury as a result of
▶ Protect bulbs from moisture during
Replacing bulbs touching the xenon lamp's electrical
operation and do not allow bulbs to
contacts
Notes on changing a bulb come into contact with liquids.
Xenon lamps are high-voltage compon-
Daimler Truck AG recommends that you Bulbs and lights are a major element in ents.
have the headlamp bulbs changed at a vehicle safety. Therefore, it is important
qualified specialist workshop. If you remove the cover of the xenon
to ensure that all light bulbs are always
lamp and touch its electrical contacts,
functioning. The lamp check can help
you might receive an electric shock.
Danger you when you are inspecting the bulbs
Risk of burns from hot component ( → Page 93). ▶ Do not touch the xenon lamp's com-
parts whilst replacing a bulb ponents or electrical contacts.
Bulbs, lamps, and plugs can become ▶ Always have any work on the xenon
very hot during operation. lamp carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
When replacing a bulb, you may burn
yourself on these component parts.

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
Bi‐xenon headlamps have a sticker with ▶ Vehicles with LED front headlamps: In Daytime running lights H21W 24 V
a high‐voltage symbol on the headlamp the event of a fault to the lamps, con- Dipped beam (halogen
housing. tact a qualified specialist workshop. H7 24 V
headlamps)
When changing lamps, the following Vehicles with rear LED lamp unit: The LED Turn signal light, side;
P21/5 W 24 V
points should also be noted: side marker light
module can only be replaced as a whole.
Fog light H11 24 V
▶ To prevent a short circuit, switch off ▶ If necessary, have the LED module re-
the lighting system and the vehicle Position lamp (halogen
placed at a qualified specialist work- W5W 24 V
headlamps)
before changing the bulb. shop.
Roof position marker
▶ Wear protective goggles and clean
The following bulbs should also only be re- lamps
R10W 24 V
gloves.
placed at a qualified specialist workshop:
▶ Always replace faulty bulbs with
● Bi‐xenon lamps
Rear bulbs
certified new bulbs with the correct Turn signal light, rear;
● Position lamp (bi‐xenon headlamps)
wattage and voltage. brake light; reversing P21W 24 V
● LED daytime running lamps
▶ New light bulbs should only be light; rear fog light
touched with a clean, lint-free cloth or ● LED perimeter lamp, front Rear light, number plate
R5W 24 V
similar material. Do not work with wet ● LED turn signal lamp lamp, position lamp
or oily fingers. ● Lamps for ambient lighting in the cab

Interior lighting bulbs
▶ Check the contacts for corrosion and ● LED interior lamps
Dome lamp: Interior
clean them if necessary. ● LED night light light
P18W 24 V
▶ Ensure that seals are seated correctly Dome lamp: Reading
R10W 24 V
and replace damaged seals. lamp
Bulbs
▶ If the new bulb does not come on, Dome lamp: Night
EBS‐R4 1.2W 24 V
consult a qualified specialist work- Front bulbs lighting
shop. Turn signal light, front PY21 W 24 V Bunk/berth reading
10W 24 V
lamp (luminescent tube)
High beam H1 24 V

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
Stowage compartment
W5W 5 W 24 V Replacing front bulbs
lighting under berth
Stowage compartment Swinging out headlamps (variant 1)
lighting above wind-
5W 24 V
screen (luminescent
tube)
Additional bulbs
Side marker lights LED module
▶ Unscrew the screws with grey wash-
Work lamp, top H11 24 V er 3. Do not turn the adjustment
Work lamp, bottom H3 24 V screws 4 of the headlamp. Other-
Rotating beacons H1 24 V
Cover next to headlamp wise, the headlamp will have to be
▶ Press on the cover next to the head- readjusted.
lamp at the location marked by an ▶ Swing the headlamp out in the direc-
arrow. tion of the arrow.
◁ The cover will fold out.
Note
Do not lean on the headlamp that
you have swung out.
▶ Unscrew screw 2.
▶ Tilt bumper section 1 outwards in
the direction of the arrow.

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
Swinging out headlamps (variant 2) Dipped beam and position lamp (halo-
gen headlamp)
▶ Unscrew the screws with grey wash-

Protective grille (example)
er 4. Do not turn the adjustment
screws 5 of the headlamp. Other-
▶ If the vehicle is fitted with protect-
wise, the headlamp will have to be
ive grilles in front of the headlamps,
readjusted.
loosen screws 1 and remove the
protective grille. ▶ Swing the headlamp out in the direc-
tion of the arrow.
Halogen headlamp variant 1
Note
Do not lean on the headlamp that
you have swung out.
▶ Push outer cover frame 2 down-
wards, tilt forwards in the direction of
the arrow and remove.

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
▶ Position lamp: Press on the side of

socket 4 and pull the socket out.
▶ Pull the bulb out of the socket.
Main beam
Halogen headlamp variant 2 Headlamp variant 2
▶ Observe the notes on changing a bulb ▶ Observe the notes on changing a bulb
( → Page 103). ( → Page 103).
▶ Swing out the headlamp (variant 1 or ▶ Swing out the headlamp (variant 1 or
variant 2). variant 2).
▶ Press clips 1 in the direction of the Headlamp variant 1 ▶ Turn cover 1 anticlockwise and
arrow. remove.
▶ Remove the cover 2. ▶ Remove the connector from bulb 2.
▶ Dipped beam: Remove the connector ▶ Disengage the safety spring.
from bulb 3. ▶ Remove the bulb 2.
▶ Disengage the safety spring. ▶ Insert the new bulb in the socket so
▶ Remove the bulb 3. that the base fits in the recess.
▶ Insert the new bulb in the socket so
that the base fits in the recess.

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
Daytime running lights Turn signal light
Headlamp variant 1
Headlamp variant 3
Headlamp variant 2
▶ Observe the notes on changing a bulb
( → Page 103).
▶ Swing out the headlamp (variant 1 or
variant 2).
▶ Turn cover 1 anticlockwise and
remove. Headlamp variant 2
▶ Gently turn the socket for bulb 2

anticlockwise and remove.
▶ Gently turn bulb anticlockwise and
remove.
▶ Insert the new bulb into the socket
and gently turn it clockwise.

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
Turn signal light, side; side marker Front fog light (variant 1)
light
Headlamp variant 3

( → Page 103).
▶ Swing out the headlamp (variant 1 or
variant 2).
▶ Gently turn socket 1 anticlockwise
Front fog lamp (example: Actros)
and remove.
Turn signal light and side marker light (example) ▶ Observe the notes on changing a bulb
remove. ▶ Observe the notes on changing a bulb ( → Page 103).
▶ Insert the new bulb into the socket ( → Page 103). ▶ Unscrew screw 4 of faceplate 3.
1 and gently turn it clockwise. ▶ Pull lamp 1 backwards d and un- ▶ Unclip faceplate 3 at the top and
clip at the front with a twisting motion bottom and remove.
e. ▶ Unscrew screws 2 of front fog lamp
▶ Gently turn bulb mount anticlockwise 1.
and remove. ▶ Pull front fog lamp 1 out slightly.
▶ Gently turn bulb anticlockwise and ▶ Remove the connector from the bulb
remove. for the front fog lamp 1.
▶ Insert the new bulb in the bulb mount ▶ Pull front fog lamp 1 out.
and gently turn it clockwise.

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
▶ Unscrew bulb anticlockwise from the illuminant changed at a qualified Roof position marker lamps
reflector. specialist workshop.
▶ Insert the new bulb and screw it into
the reflector in a clockwise direction. ▶ Observe the notes on changing a bulb
( → Page 103).
Front fog lamp (variant 2) ▶ Swing out the headlamp.
▶ Remove the connector from the bulb
1 for the front fog lamp.
▶ Unscrew bulb 1 anticlockwise from
reflector.
▶ Insert the new bulb and screw it into
the reflector in a clockwise direction.
Roof position marker lamps

( → Page 103).
▶ Unscrew screws 1.
Front fog lamp (example: front fog lamp with LED daytime ▶ Remove lens 2.
running lamp in the Arocs)
remove.
Note
▶ Insert the new bulb in the bulb mount
If front fog lamp 1 is removed with and gently turn it clockwise.
the LED daytime running lamp, do not
change the illuminant of the LED day-
time running lamp. If necessary, have

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
Replacing rear bulbs Replacing bulbs

Swinging the protective grille out of
the way
▶ Unclip the protective grille from the 6-chamber lamp unit, rear right (example)
clamps 1 and swing it upwards. Rear lamp unit

6-chamber lamp unit, rear left (example)
1 Screws
2 Clearance light/side marker light
3 Turn signal light
4 Brake light
5 Reversing light
6 Tail light
7 Rear fog light
The number plate lamp is behind the re-

flector unit.
Vehicles with rear LED lamp unit: The LED
module can only be replaced as a whole.

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
If necessary, have the LED module re- Bunk/daybed reading lamp Side marker lamps
placed at a qualified workshop.
( → Page 103).
▶ Unscrew screws 1.
▶ Remove the lens.
▶ Gently turn the bulb anti-clockwise
and remove it.
▶ Insert the new bulb and gently turn it
clockwise.
▶ Insert the lens.
▶ Screw in screws 1.
Bed/bunk reading lamp Side marker lamps (example)
Replacing interior lighting bulbs ▶ Push the lens out of the pivot hinge
using a screwdriver. Note
( → Page 103). ▶ Remove the bulb. Semitrailer truck: Fold the side trim
▶ Insert the new bulb. outwards before you change the side
▶ Attach the lens. marker lamp ( → Page 364).
▶ Press and firmly hold the retainer on

Changing additional bulbs cable connector 2 with a screw-
▶ Observe the notes on changing a bulb driver.
( → Page 103). ▶ Pull out cable connector 2.

Driver cockpit
Replacing bulbs
▶ Press retainers 1 on side marker Work lamp, bottom

lamp 3 together and hold them
firmly.
▶ Replace side marker lamp 3.
Work lamp, top
Bulb with cable connector (example)
▶ Turn bulb 2 with cable connector 3

up and remove it.
▶ Press the retainer on cable connector
3 together and hold it firmly.
▶ Pull out cable connector 3.
▶ Replace the bulb 2.
Work lamp (example)
▶ Loosen screws 1.
▶ Remove the reflector with frame.
Work lamp (example)
▶ Press safety buttons 1 and swing

the housing up.

Driver cockpit
Partially masking headlights – left-hand/right-hand traffic
Partially masking headlights – left- Measure at border crossing

hand/right-hand traffic Headlamp
Measure
type
Note LED head-
No action required
lamps
Damage to the headlamps when re-
moving the adhesive film Have the headlamps adjusted at a
Xenon qualified specialist workshop as close
If you use sharp or pointed objects to headlamps to the border as possible on both the
remove the adhesive film on the head- outward and return journeys.
lamps, you may damage them. Before crossing the border, mask
halogen headlamps as close to the
▶ Do not use sharp or pointed objects border as possible in accordance
to remove the adhesive film. with the following Daimler Truck°AG
▶ Pull out cable connector 2. ▶ When you are using the vehicle in
specifications.
Halogen Make adhesive strips using a
▶ Disengage the safety spring. other countries, observe the legal headlamps commercially available, opaque self‐
▶ Remove the bulb 3. requirements for the country you are adhesive foil, and mask the relevant
▶ Insert the new bulb in the socket so currently in. areas of the headlamp.
When making the return journey,
that the base fits in the recess. The responsibility for vehicle lighting rests remove the adhesive strips as close
with the driver. to the border as possible.
In countries that drive on the other side With the masked headlamps, the edge of
of the road to the country of registration, the carriageway will no longer be illumin-
measures are required so that oncoming ated as far or as high.
traffic is not dazzled, depending on the
headlamp installed.

Driver cockpit
Partially masking headlights – left-hand/right-hand traffic
Masking area for right-hand traffic vehicles when used Masking area for right-hand traffic vehicles when used Masking area for left-hand traffic vehicles when used
in countries with left-hand traffic (example: halogen in countries with left-hand traffic (example: halogen in countries with right-hand traffic (example: halogen
headlamps, variant 1) headlamps, variant 2) headlamps, variant 1)
Dimensions for masking the headlights

1 Right headlamp
2 Left headlamp
3 235 mm
4 210 mm
5 130 mm
6 80 mm
7 30 mm
A 140 mm
B 260 mm
C 175 mm

Driver cockpit
Good visibility
Good visibility particularly if the windscreen is dirty or

covered with ice.
Using the windscreen wipers
▶ Switch off the windscreen wipers
Note before parking the vehicle.
Damage to the windscreen on Worn or damaged wiper blades can cause
vehicles with a rain sensor smearing on the windscreen. This can
In dry weather, dirt or optical factors cause malfunctions in vehicles with a rain
may cause the windscreen wipers to sensor.
make unwanted wiping movements.
This may damage the wiper rubbers or
scratch the windscreen.
Masking area for left-hand traffic vehicles when used
in countries with right-hand traffic (example: halogen ▶ Switch off the windscreen wiper in
headlamps, variant 2)
dry weather.
Dimensions for masking the headlights
3 235 mm Note
4 210 mm Damage to the windscreen caused by
5 130 mm the windscreen wipers being activ-
6 80 mm ated when starting a new journey
7 30 mm
If the windscreen wipers are not
switched off before parking the vehicle,
8 Right headlamp
this may cause the windscreen wipers Wiper switch on the combination
9 Left headlamp switch
to make unwanted wiping movements
A 140 mm when starting a new journey. This may g Windscreen wipers off
B 260 mm damage the wiper blades or windscreen, Ä Slow intermittent wiping or wiping with
C 175 mm the rain sensor

Driver cockpit
Good visibility
Å Fast intermittent wiping or wiping with Using the windscreen washer system times with the dipped beam switched on,
the rain sensor the headlamps will also be cleaned once.
° Continuous wiping, slow
¯ Continuous wiping, fast
Switch the windscreen heater on/off
▶ Activation: Switch on the vehicle.
▶ Turn the wiper switch to the desired
position depending on the intensity of
the rain.
Vehicles with rain sensor: If the Ä
or Å setting is used, the appropriate
wipe frequency will be set depending on
the precipitation. In the position Å, the
Combination switch (example)
rain sensor is more sensitive than in the
position Ä, causing the windscreen ▶ Single wipe: Briefly press the î
wipers to wipe more frequently. If the button.
rain sensor fails, the windscreen wiper ▶ Wiping with washer fluid Press and
The windscreen heater is ready for op-
will automatically switch to the wiping hold the î button.
eration when the vehicle is started and
interval corresponding to the position of
Vehicles with headlamp cleaning switches off automatically after approx.
the switch.
system: If, once the vehicle has been 15 minutes.
switched on, the windscreen is wiped
with washer fluid for the first time with
▶ To switch on/off: Press the è
button above.
the dipped beam headlamps switched on,
the headlamps will also be cleaned. If you ◁ When the indicator lamp on the
wipe the windscreen with washer fluid ten button lights up, the windscreen
heater function is switched on.

Driver cockpit
Power supply
Notes on winter operation Power supply

Headlamps Using the battery disconnect switch
Note Danger
Damage to the headlamps when re- Risk of injury if the battery discon-
moving ice nect switch is operated while the
If you use an ice scraper to remove ice vehicle is in motion
and snow from the headlamp, you may If you interrupt the power supply with
scratch the plastic cover of the head- the battery disconnect switch, the en-
lamp. gine will automatically be switched off.
This causes safety-relevant functions to
▶ Use a de‐icer spray suitable for
be restricted or no longer be available
plastic covers.
and the compressed-air supply will fail.
Windscreen wipers In the event of a loss of pressure, the
spring-loaded parking brake may activ-
▶ At temperatures of approximately 5°C ate and therefore brake the vehicle in
to -5°C and during snowfall, direct the
an uncontrolled manner. You may lose
air to the windscreen (z or ¯
control of the vehicle.
position) using the air-distribution
control ( → Page 134). ▶ Only operate the battery disconnect
switch when the vehicle is stationary
You can also switch on the windscreen
and the parking brake is engaged.
heater. With these settings, the wiper
blades on the windscreen will be heated.
You can thereby prevent smearing or the Example: Battery disconnect switch
snow freezing on the wiper rubber.

Driver cockpit
Power supply
The voltage supply can be interrupted us- In a hazardous situation, the power supply Overview of sockets
ing the battery disconnect switches. This can be interrupted immediately with the
prevents short circuits that may generate battery disconnect switch.
sparks which might, in turn, cause a fire It takes up to ten seconds from the dis-
or an explosion. Vehicles for hazardous connecting procedure until the voltage
material transport are equipped with one supply is interrupted.
or two battery disconnect switches de-
pending on the ADR classification regard- If the voltage supply is interrupted by the
ing the interruption of the voltage supply. battery isolator switch when the anti‐theft
alarm system is primed, the anti‐theft
Only use the battery disconnect switches alarm is triggered.
when the vehicle is stationary, e.g. when
loading the vehicle in a hazardous goods Interrupting the voltage supply
area.
▶ Swing the þ cover 1 upwards.
▶ Observe the notes in the display mes- ▶ Pull out switch pin 2.
Example: sockets in the cockpit
sage in the on-board computer.

▶ Switch off the vehicle. or
In vehicles with a retarder, wait

▶ Swivel the switch 3 upwards.
approximately five seconds after ◁ All consumers other than the di-
switching off the vehicle before gital tachograph are disconnec-
interrupting the voltage supply using the ted from the batteries.
battery disconnect switch.
Reconnecting the power supply
If the auxiliary heating is switched on, wait
for the auxiliary heating run‐on phase to
▶ Press the cover þ 1 downwards
so that it audibly engages.
end.
Example: socket in the stowage compartment

Driver cockpit
Power supply
12 V sockets
You must not exceed the maximum per-
missible load of 180 W (15 A) on the 12 V
socket.
Vehicles with 12 V outlet for second-
ary consumers: If you would like to use
the 12 V socket, you must switch on the
Example: socket in the lower bunk
voltage converter.
Sockets
1 Cigarette lighter 5 A (max. 120 W) or 24 V 24 V sockets
socket 15 A (max. 360 W)
You can use each 24 V socket for ac-
Example: 24 V power socket 2 24 V socket 15 A (max. 360 W), electric
circuit 1 cessories up to max. 15 A (max. 360 W).
3 24 V socket 15 A (max. 360 W), electric The 24 V sockets are divided into two
circuit 2
electric circuits:
4 24 V socket 15 A (max. 360 W), electric
● Electric circuit 1: 24 V sockets 2
circuit°2 or 12 V socket 15 A (180 W)
and 5
5 24 V socket 15 A (max. 360 W), electric
circuit°1 ● Electric circuit 2: 24 V sockets 3,
6 24°V power socket 25°A (max.°600°W) 4, 9 and A
7 Adapter plug 24°V power socket If you are using multiple 24 V sockets
8 AUX socket of an electric circuit at the same time, a
9 24 V socket 15 A (max. 360 W), electric maximum total load of 360 W (15 A) must
circuit°2 not be exceeded.
Example: AUX socket/socket A 24 V socket 15 A (max. 360 W), electric
circuit°2

Driver cockpit
Practical tips
Vehicles without cigarette lighter: A If you need to connect other devices,

24 V socket 1 is installed in place of the contact a qualified workshop. Note
cigarette lighter. On vehicles without button, J
the 12 V voltage converter has a
Note permanent supply.
To use the 24 V socket, you must switch
on the vehicle. Practical tips
Using the cigarette lighter
24 V power socket
You can use 24 V power socket 6 for Danger
accessories up to max. 600 W (25 A) in- Risk of fire and injury from the hot
dependently of how the other sockets are cigarette lighter
used. For use of the 24 V power sock- You can burn yourself if you touch the
et 6, Daimler Truck°AG recommends hot heating element or the socket of the
having adapter plug 7 fitted to your ac- Vehicles with a 12 V connection point cigarette lighter.
cessory at a qualified specialist workshop. for secondary consumers:
Otherwise, safe usage cannot be guaran- Additionally, flammable materials can
teed. ▶ Switching on/off: Press the J ignite if the hot cigarette lighter falls
button above. or if, for example, children hold the hot
◁ When the indicator lamp in the cigarette lighter against objects.
Use 12 V voltage converter button J lights up, the 12 V ▶ Always hold the cigarette lighter by
The voltage converter supplies the 12 V sockets and the 12 V connection the knob.
socket and the 12 V connection point point for secondary consumers ▶ Always make sure that the cigarette
for auxiliary consumers, together at a are supplied with voltage. lighter is out of reach of children.
maximum of 15 A.
the vehicle.

Driver cockpit
Practical tips
Activate/deactivate the smoke de- ◁ While the smoke detector is dis-

tector abled, a brief tone will sound
roughly every 40°seconds and
Switch the alarm off/temporarily button 1 will flash every ten
disable the smoke detector seconds.
Checking that the smoke detector is

working properly
Danger
Risk of fatal injuries if the smoke
detector is out of order
▶ Switch on the vehicle. If the battery is empty or the smoke
▶ Push in the cigarette lighter. The smoke detector is located above the detector is faulty, it may not warn you.
◁ The cigarette lighter will pop out co‐driver's door or on the ceiling behind
▶ Check the smoke detector's opera-
automatically when the heating the driver.
tional readiness on a regular basis.
element is red-hot. The smoke detector will alert you if smoke ▶ Replace an empty battery as soon
▶ Use the handle to pull the cigarette is emitted in the cab. The alarm can also as possible.
lighter out of the socket. be triggered by particles such as those
found in cigarette smoke, dust, or exhaust The smoke detector should be tested for
The cigarette lighter should be charged functionality once a week.
fumes.
with a maximum of 5°A.
▶ Press the button 1. ▶ Press and hold button 1.
◁ The smoke detector will be ◁ If the smoke detector is working
disabled for approximately properly, the alarm will sound.
20°minutes and will then When the button is pressed, the
automatically switch on again.

Driver cockpit
Practical tips
smoke detector will be disabled Stowage spaces and stowage com- ▶ Close the lockable stowage spaces
for approximately 20°minutes. partments before starting a journey.
▽ If the battery is empty, a brief ▶ Stow and secure objects that are
tone will sound roughly every Notes on stowage spaces and com- heavy, hard, pointed, sharp‐edged,
40°seconds. partments fragile, or too large in the load com-
▶ Replace the battery as soon Danger
partment.
as possible to ensure the
function of the smoke detect- Risk of injury due to objects being Danger
or. stowed incorrectly
Risk of injury if the maximum permit-
If objects in the vehicle interior are
ted load is exceeded
Replacing the battery stowed incorrectly, they may slide or
Objects may be flung out of the stowage
The smoke detector is powered by a 9°V be thrown around and hit vehicle oc-
compartment. There is a risk of injury
block battery. cupants. In addition, cup holders, open
for vehicle occupants, particularly in
stowage spaces, and mobile phone re-
▶ Press release catch 2 and remove ceptacles will not always be able to re-
the event of sudden braking or abrupt
the smoke detector from the holder. changes in direction!
tain all objects that they contain in the
▶ Replace the battery. event of an accident. ▶ Always comply with the maximum
▶ Fit the smoke detector back into the There is a risk of injury, particularly in permitted load of the stowage com-
holder. partment.
the event of braking manoeuvres or
abrupt changes in direction!
Danger
▶ Always stow objects such that they
cannot be thrown around in such Risk of injury if the maximum permit-
situations. ted load is exceeded
▶ Always make sure that objects do Objects may be flung onto the road sur-
not protrude from stowage spaces, face.
luggage nets, or stowage nets.

Driver cockpit
Practical tips
▶ Always comply with the maximum Opening and closing stowage com- Drawer under the bunk
permitted load of the stowage compartments
partment.
▶ Always ensure that the stowage Drawers in the driver cockpit
compartment is locked before every
journey.
Maximum weights for storage com-
partments and drawers
Maximum
Storage compartment/drawer
weight ▶ Open/close: Pull handle 1 upwards
Stowage compartment above the and pull the drawer out or push it in
8 kg
windscreen with cover as far as it will go.
▶ Remove the insert and attach it to
Stowage compartments/cockpit
drawers
10 kg the left/right side of the drawer or
another drawer.
Stowage compartments/drawers in
25 kg
the centre under the berth
Stowage compartments/drawers on
the outside under the berth (including 50 kg
tool and accessories)
Storage tray and waste container

2 Stowage tray
3 Waste receptacle

Driver cockpit
Practical tips
▶ Open/close: Pull stowage tray 2 Refrigerator box Stowage compartments with outside
out into the desired position or push flaps
it in as far as it will go.
Waste receptacle
The drawer under the bunk can also be

equipped with a refrigerator box. You can access the stowage compart-
ments from inside via the stowage com-
▶ To open: Pull out the drawer in the
partment flaps under the bunk and from
▶ Use waste receptacle 3 only in posi- direction of the arrow as far as it will
outside via the outside flaps.
tions d or e. Otherwise, the waste go.
receptacle will not be secured and ▶ Use the handle to swing the lid up ▶ Fold up the bottom bunk and secure
may tip over during a journey. in the direction of the arrow until it it.
engages. ▶ To open a stowage compartment
▶ To close: Use the handle to swing the flap: Pull handle 1, swing stowage
lid down. compartment flap 2 upwards until
▶ Push the drawer in as far as it will go. the lock engages.
◁ The stowage compartment light-
There is a control knob in the refrigerator
ing will automatically switch on.
box that you can use to switch it on and
off.
▶ To close the stowage compartment
flap: Swing stowage compartment
flap 2 downwards until it engages in
the lock.

Driver cockpit
Practical tips
◁ The stowage compartment light- ◁ The outside flap of stowage com- Notes on the cosmetic mirror
ing will automatically switch off. partment 3 will be completely
unlocked. The stowage compart-
ment lighting will automatically
switch on.
▶ Swing the outside flap of stowage
compartment 3 forwards.
▶ Closing the outer flap: Close the
outside flap of stowage compartment
3 until you hear the lock engage.
◁ The stowage compartment light-
ing will automatically switch off.
The cosmetic mirror is attached to the

Outside stowage compartment flap left partition wall of the right stowage
3
compartment with snap‐in hooks. You
Outside stowage compartment flap
can remove the cosmetic mirror and set it
4 Release lever for outside stowage
compartment flap
up using the fold‐out stand or hang it up
in a suitable place using the hook.
▶ Opening the outside flap: Push
release lever 4 out.
◁ The outside flap of stowage com-
partment 3 will open as far as
the safety hook will allow.
▶ Push release lever 4 again.

Driver cockpit
Practical tips
Folding the folding table in/out Folding out the folding table
Danger
Risk of injury from the open folding
table
Vehicle occupants could bump into the
folding table and injure themselves.
▶ Close the folding table before each ▶ Swing cover 1 down.
journey. ▶ Fold out folding table half 4.
▶ Swing cover 2 down.
Danger ▶ Swing cover 1 up and hold it in
place.
Risk of injury if the maximum load for
the folding table is exceeded
The table panel may fold down suddenly.
▶ Never exceed the maximum permit-
ted load for the folding table.
▶ Load the folding table up to a maxim-
um of 15 kg.
▶ Once the folding table 3 is folded

together, swing it out as far as it will
go.

Driver cockpit
Practical tips
Notes on cup/bottle holders Couple/uncouple the compressed-air

connection in the cab
Danger
Risk of accident or injury when using Danger
the cup holder while driving Risk of injury due to swirling
The cup and bottle holders cannot be particles if compressed air is used for
used to secure containers while the cleaning
vehicle is in motion. The dispersed particles could get into
If you use cup or bottle holders while the your eyes, nose, mouth, or ears and
vehicle is in motion, containers may be cause irritation.
thrown around and liquid may be spilled. ▶ Always wear a respiratory protective
The vehicle occupants may come into mask, safety glasses, and hearing
contact with the liquid and if it is hot, protection when cleaning the cab
they could be scalded. You could be with compressed air.
distracted from traffic conditions, and
you may lose control of the vehicle. Cup holder/bottle holder Danger
▶ Only use the cup and bottle holder 1 Cup holder Risk of injury from use of the
when the vehicle is stationary. 2 Bottle holder compressed-air gun
▶ Only put suitable containers into the If you point the compressed-air gun at
cup or bottle holders. parts of your body or those of other
▶ Close the container, particularly if people, you could cause injury to eyes,
the liquid is hot. ears, or the skin, for example.
▶ Always direct the compressed‐air
gun away from your body.

Driver cockpit
Communication
▶ Never point the compressed‐air gun ▶ Uncoupling: Push the compressed- Operate audio devices (radio) with
at other people. air hose into compressed-air connec- the bed/bunk switch panel
tion 1 and remove.
Note
Damage to the air filter due to com- Communication
pressed air
To avoid damage: Notes on the audio device (radio)
If you have Mercedes-Benz Trucks audio
▶ Do not clean the air filter with a
equipment, you can operate your audio
compressed‐air gun.
equipment as follows:
▶ Replace dirty air filters.
● With the buttons on the multifunction
steering wheel in the Audio menu
window of the on‐board computer
( → Page 157)
● With the audio equipment button Bed/berth radio switching field
in the bunch/daybed switch panel H To switch the audio devices on, to
( → Page 129) increase the volume, to select the
next radio station, to select the next
track
I To switch the audio devices on/off,
to decrease the volume
▶ Activation: Briefly press the button

H or I.
▶ Coupling up: Push the compressed- ▶ Deactivation: Press and hold the
air hose into compressed-air connec- lower section of the button I.
tion 1 and engage.

Driver cockpit
Communication
▶ Increase the volume: Briefly press attention to road and traffic con- ● Fax machine
the upper section of the button H. ditions. Pay attention to the traffic
▶ Decrease the volume: Briefly press conditions.
Using the notebook holder
the lower section of the button I. ▶ Make the entries when the vehicle is
▶ Select the next station/track: stationary.
Press and hold the upper section of ▶ When operating the phone or any
the button H. other communication device, adhere
to the legal regulations of the country
you are currently in.
Telephone
The vehicle may be equipped with an
Notes on the telephone
integrated Bluetooth® hands‐free system. Upper side
Danger To charge the Bluetooth® mobile phone
in the vehicle, you will need a suitable
Risk of distraction by information mobile phone charger bracket. These are
systems and communications equip- available from retailers of Mercedes‐Benz
ment Trucks accessories.
If you operate information systems and
communications equipment integrated ▶ You can operate the mobile phone
in the vehicle when driving, you may be using the 6 and ~ buttons on
distracted from what is happening in the multifunction steering wheel.
Lower side
traffic. The Daimler Truck AG installation spe-
cifications must be observed if you sub-
▶ Only use the notebook holder 1
You may also lose control of the vehicle. when the vehicle is stationary.
sequently install one of the following com-
▶ Only operate this equipment when munication devices: Secure the notebook
the traffic situation permits.
● Mobile phone
▶ If this cannot be ensured, stop the ▶ Place the notebook holder 1 on
● Two‐way radio
vehicle as soon as possible, paying the steering wheel and attach it to

Driver cockpit
Communication
the upper guide 5 on the steering

wheel.
▶ Open the notebook and slide the
bottom part of the keyboard under
the elastic bands 3 and 4 as far as
the edge 2 the notebook holder 1.
◁ The upper elastic band 3 must
be guided in one of the recesses
6.
The notebook holder can be attached to
the following positions in the cab:
▶ Hook the notebook holder with the
upper guide 5 into an open stowage
space above the windscreen.
or
▶ Hook the laptop holder with the upper
guide 5 into a handle above the
doors.
or
▶ Hook the notebook holder with the
upper 5 and lower guides 7 into
the side wall stowage compartments
of the lower bed or the lower bunk.

Air conditioning
Notes on climate control
Notes on climate control The air‐conditioning system regulates the Overview of air conditioning system
temperature and air humidity in the cab. functions
Note The installed filter filters most of the dust
Damage to the air-conditioning sys- particles, pollen and unpleasant odours
tem due to rare use out of the incoming outside air or the re-
If the air-conditioning system is not used circulated air in air‐recirculation mode.
for an extended period of time, the refri- A clogged filter reduces the airflow in-
gerant compressor may be damaged. to the cab. Depending on the operating
conditions and environmental influences,
▶ Switch on the air‐conditioning sys- the interval for replacing the filter may be
tem for at least approx. ten minutes shorter than prescribed. Heating settings
once a month.
1 K Setting the airflow ( → Page 134)
Note 2 Ì Switch residual heat utilisation on/off
Note
Air the vehicle briefly in warm weather. ( → Page 135)
Using the air-conditioning system This will accelerate cooling and the re- 3 Setting the temperature ( → Page 134)
increases the fuel consumption quired temperature will be reached more z Defrosting the windscreen
Your fuel consumption will increase quickly. ( → Page 135)
if the air-conditioning system or the 4 ø Switch air‐recirculation mode on/off
automatic climate control is switched ( → Page 135)
on. 5 Setting the air distribution ( → Page 134)
▶ Only switch this function on if re- M z Defrost windscreen
quired. ( → Page 135)
The heating and air‐conditioning system

are operational only if the vehicle has
been started.

Air conditioning
Cooling with air dehumidification
9 ¿/Á Switch cooling or cooling with

air dehumidification on/off ( → Page 133)
Ì/Á Switch residual heat utilisation
on/off ( → Page 135)
A ø Switch air‐recirculation mode on/off
( → Page 135)
Some functions have an additional indicat-

or lamp. The function is switched on if the
Climate control settings Settings with auxiliary heating
indicator lamp is on.
1 K Setting the airflow ( → Page 134) 1 K Setting the airflow ( → Page 134)
2 ¿/Á Switch cooling or cooling with 2 Display
air dehumidification on/off ( → Page 133) Cooling with air dehumidification
3 ù Setting programmed times for:
Á Switch residual heat utilisation on/off Notes on cooling with air dehumidi-
y Auxiliary heating ( → Page 136)
( → Page 135)
fication
3 Setting the temperature ( → Page 134) ü Engine preheating ( → Page 137)
4 Setting the air distribution ( → Page 134)
The air‐conditioning system is only opera-
z Defrosting the windscreen tional if the vehicle has been started.
( → Page 135) 5 z Defrosting the windscreen
4 ø Switch air‐recirculation mode on/off ( → Page 135) In vehicles with an air‐conditioning sys-
( → Page 135) 6 y Switch auxiliary heating on/off tem, you can dehumidify and cool the in-
5 Setting the air distribution ( → Page 134) ( → Page 136) terior air to a set temperature in warm
7 s Increase temperature ( → Page 134) weather. Depending on the vehicle's
M z Defrost windscreen
( → Page 135) s Change settings for programmed equipment, the "Cooling with air dehu-
times ( → Page 138) midification" function can have one or two
8 r Reduce temperature ( → Page 134) steps.
r Change settings for programmed If the function has two steps, switch on
times ( → Page 138) the "Cooling" function first to cool the
interior air. If necessary, you can switch

Air conditioning
Setting the temperature
on the "Air dehumidification" function ◁ The indicator lamp in the button temperature or to the left to reduce it
as well. The interior air will then also be lights up red. ( → Page 132).
dehumidified and the windows and the
windscreen cannot mist up. Switching on cooling without air de- Vehicles with auxiliary heating
humidification (two stage)
The "Cooling" function consumes less fuel ▶ Press the s button to increase the
than the "Cooling with air dehumidifica- ▶ Press the button ¿ or Á. temperature or the r button to
tion" function. Switch the "Cooling with air ◁ The indicator lamp in the button reduce it ( → Page 132).
dehumidification" function on only when lights up green.
the windows/windscreen mist up.
Switching on cooling with air dehu- Setting the air distribution/airflow
If the function has one step, you can midification (two stage) Air distribution
switch on only the "Cooling with air de-
▶ Press the button ¿ or Á again. The symbols for air distribution have the
humidification" function.
following meanings:
◁ The indicator lamp in the button
Note lights up red. M Directs additional air towards the
z windscreen
Condensation may drip from the under- Deactivating
side of the vehicle when cooling mode is _ Directs additional air towards the
active. ▶ Press the button ¿ or Á. windscreen and throughout the cab
◁ When the indicator lamp in the O Directs additional air into the footwell
button goes out, the cooling func- P Directs air via the centre and side
Switching cooling with air dehumid- tions are switched off. vents only
ification (air-conditioning system)
on/off Heating/air-conditioning system
Setting the temperature
Switching on cooling with air dehu- ▶ Set air distribution control on the
midification (one stage) Vehicles without auxiliary heating heating/air-conditioning system
▶ Press the button ¿ or Á. ▶ Turn the temperature control 5 to the appropriate symbol
to the right to increase the ( → Page 132).

Air conditioning
Demisting/defrosting the windscreen and windows
Heating/air conditioning with auxili- ▶ Close the centre air vents ▶ Press the button ø.
ary heater ( → Page 140).
▶ Turn the adjustment wheel for the
▶ Set air distribution control on the side air vents fully outwards to the Switch residual heat utilisation on/
heating/air-conditioning system z position ( → Page 140). off
4 to the appropriate symbol In vehicles with residual heat utilisation,
( → Page 132). Heating/air conditioning with auxili- the residual heat from the engine
ary heater can be used to continue heating the
Airflow
▶ Press the button z. parked vehicle for up to approximately
▶ Set the airflow control K to the 90 minutes.
desired level ( → Page 132).
▶ Turn the adjustment wheel for the
side air vents fully outwards to the
z position ( → Page 140). Note
Demisting/defrosting the windscreen If residual heat utilisation is switched on,
and windows the auxiliary heating will automatically
Switching air-recirculation mode on/ be switched off ( → Page 136).
Select the following setting only for as off
long as it takes for the windscreen to be ▶ Press the Ì or Á button
clear again. Note ( → Page 132).
▶ Vehicles with windshield heater: When air‐recirculation mode is switched
▶ Set the temperature, airflow, air distri-
Switch on the windscreen heater bution and air vents according to your
on, the windows may mist up more
( → Page 117). needs.
quickly, especially in low outside tem-
peratures. Only briefly switch air‐recir- Residual heat utilisation will switch off
Heating/air-conditioning system culation mode on, e.g. when dust or un- automatically in the following situations:
▶ Set temperature control 3 to z pleasant odours are causing annoyance. ● The vehicle is started.
( → Page 132). ▶ Close the windows, roof hatch and ● After a maximum operating time of
▶ Set air distribution control 5 to M pop-up roof or sliding sunroof. 90 minutes (depending on the tem-
z.

Air conditioning
Auxiliary heating
perature set and the coolant temper- ensure an adequate supply of fresh due to exposure to heat and condensa-
ature). air. tion. These deposits can cause malfunc-
tions in the auxiliary heating.
Auxiliary heating
Danger ▶ Have the auxiliary heating checked
Risk of burns on the exhaust pipe and repaired at a qualified specialist
Notes on auxiliary heating when working on the auxiliary heat- workshop before you use it again.
ing ▶ Ensure that there is a sufficiently
Danger If the auxiliary heating was switched high level of fuel when the auxiliary
Risk of fatal injury due to poisonous on, you may suffer burns from the hot heating is in operation. If the indicator
exhaust gases exhaust pipe. lamp 6 lights up, do not use the
If the tailpipe is blocked or sufficient auxiliary heating.
▶ Let the exhaust pipe cool down be-
ventilation is not possible, poisonous
fore working on the auxiliary heat- ▶ Only operate the auxiliary heater with
exhaust gases such as carbon monoxide commercially available diesel fuel
ing.
may enter the vehicle. This is the case ( → Page 486).
in enclosed spaces or if the vehicle gets
stuck in snow, for example. Note The auxiliary heating operates independ-
Damage to the auxiliary heating ently of the engine and supplements the
▶ Always switch the stationary heater vehicle's heating. To support the heating
If the auxiliary heating is not used for
off in enclosed spaces without an air (booster heater function), you can also
an extended period of time, it may be
extraction system, e.g. in garages. switch on the auxiliary heating when the
damaged.
▶ Keep the tailpipe and the area vehicle is running and in low outside tem-
around the vehicle free from snow ▶ Switch on the auxiliary heating for peratures.
when the engine or the stationary at least approx. ten minutes once a
heater is running. month.
▶ Open a window on the side of the If you do not use the auxiliary heating for
vehicle facing away from the wind to an extended period, deposits may form
in the fuel system of the auxiliary heating

Air conditioning
Auxiliary heating
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, Forced switch-off blower will continue to run for a short
the following options are available for time after engine shutdown and then shut
controlling the auxiliary heating: Note off automatically.
● The operating unit of the Damage to the auxiliary heating due
heating/air‐conditioning system to a power supply interruption Switch immediate heating mode on/
( → Page 132) If the power supply is interrupted in off
● The bed/berth switch panel heating mode, the cooling-off period
If your vehicle is equipped with engine cannot be activated and the auxiliary
preheating, the auxiliary heating can also heating could be damaged as a result.
heat the coolant. Engine preheating there- ▶ Interrupt the power supply using
fore also protects the engine and saves the battery disconnect switch only
fuel. You can switch the auxiliary heat- in cases of danger in heating mode
ing on or off manually or define up to two and in the auxiliary heating cooling
switch‐on times. off period.
If you switch the auxiliary heating on In vehicles used to transport hazardous
manually or via the switch‐on times, re- goods, you must switch off the heater
sidual heat utilisation will be switched off before entering hazardous zones (e.g. re-
automatically ( → Page 135). fineries). Additional button on the bed/bunk switch panel
For safety reasons, you cannot set any ▶ Activating/deactivating: Press the
switch‐on times for these vehicles and button y on the operating unit for
can switch on engine preheating only with the heating/air-conditioning system.
the immediate heating mode.
or
If you switch off the vehicle or switch on
▶ Press the button ÷ on the bed/
a power take‐off, the heater will switch
bunk switch panel.
off automatically. The combustion‐air

Air conditioning
Auxiliary heating
▶ Set the temperature, airflow, air distri- Switch‐on times can be set for auxiliary
bution and air vents according to your Note heating (warming the cab) and engine
needs. When the engine preheating ü func- preheating (warming the coolant). If the
tion is switched on, the cab will automat- vehicle is equipped to transport hazardous
The auxiliary heating will switch off auto-
ically be heated as well. goods, no switch‐on times can be set.
matically after around eleven hours. The
auxiliary heating will continue to run for Select an option shown on the operating
around two minutes after it switches off. Setting the switch-on time unit display by pressing the s or r
button. The selected option will flash.
Switch engine preheating on/off Danger Confirm the selection by pressing the
In vehicles for transporting hazardous Risk of fatal injury when parking the ù button. When you are configuring
goods, you can switch engine preheating vehicle in unsuitable locations with settings, ensure that the set operating
on manually. a preselected switch-on time for the times do not clash.
auxiliary heating ▶ Switch on the vehicle.
Activating/deactivating ▶ Press the button ù on the
If you do not ensure that there is suf-
▶ Switch on immediate heating mode. ficient ventilation, poisonous exhaust operating unit for the heating/
▶ Press the ù button on the gases may accumulate. air-conditioning system.
operating unit of the heating/ If there are highly flammable substances ◁ The display will show the two
air-conditioning system to switch to or combustible materials in close prox- memory presets 1 and 2. The
engine preheating ü. imity, there is a risk of fire and explo- number of the selected memory
sion. preset will flash.
Engine preheating will switch off automat-
▶ Select the memory preset using the
ically with the auxiliary heating. ▶ If the vehicle is parked under these button s or r.
or similar conditions, always deactiv-
ate the preselected switch‐on times.
▶ Press the button ù.
◁ The display will show the selec-
tion of the auxiliary heating y

Air conditioning
Air vents
and engine preheating ü cli- ◁ The display will show the temper- The switch‐on time for engine preheating
mate control systems. ature, the timer symbol ù and can also be programmed while auxiliary
▶ Using the button sorr, select the selected memory preset. heating is on. The auxiliary heating will
auxiliary heating y or engine pre- ▶ Switch off the vehicle. continue to run after engine preheating is
heating ü. ◁ The auxiliary heating and/or switched on.
engine preheating will switch on Engine preheating and auxiliary heating
Note automatically at the set switch- will switch off automatically after around
If no symbol is selected, the cor- on times. When the indicator two hours. The auxiliary heating will con-
responding memory preset will be lamps on the button y on tinue to run for around two minutes after
deleted. the operating unit and on the it switches off.
additional button ÷ on the
▶ Press the button ù. bed or berth light up, the auxiliary
▶ Use the button s or r to set heating and/or engine preheating Air vents
the day of the week. is switched on. Notes on air vents
▶ Press the button ù. ▶ If you activate the switch-on time:
▶ Use the button s or r to set Open the centre and side air vents Danger
the hour. ( → Page 140). Risk of cold or hot burns due to being
▶ Press the button ù. ▶ Heating and air conditioning: Set air too close to the air vents
▶ Use the button s or r to set distribution control to O. Very hot or very cold air can flow from
the minutes. ▶ Heating and air conditioning: Set the the air vents.
▶ Press the button ù. airflow control to level 1.
◁ If the coolant temperature is suf- ▶ Make sure that all vehicle occupants
▶ Use the button s or r to set
always maintain a sufficient distance
the temperature. ficiently high, the cab will also be
from the air vents.
▶ Press the button ù. heated while engine preheating is
▶ If necessary, direct the airflow to
on.
another area of the vehicle interior.

Air conditioning
Air vents
Always keep all air vents and ventilation airflow according to the direction of Side air vents
grilles in the cab free so that the air can rotation.
flow into the cab unhindered.
or
▶ Move adjustment wheel°1 up or
Adjusting the air vents down according to the airflow direc-
Centre air vents tion.
▶ To close: Turn adjustment wheel°2
to the left as far as it will go.
Side air vent in driver cockpit (example)
▶ To open or to close: Turn adjustment

wheel°2 to the left to open, and to
position°10 to close the side air
vent°.
◁ Turning the adjustment wheel°2
Centre air vent in driver cockpit (example)
to the left beyond the detent
▶ To open: Turn adjustment wheel°2 position into position°z opens
Centre air vent in co-driver's area (example)
to position°I, or to the right as far as the demister vent°3.
it will go. ▶ To open or to close: Turn adjustment
▶ To set the airflow direction: Turn wheel°1 to position°I to open, and
adjustment wheel°2 to the right to position° 0 to close.
beyond the position°I and adjust the

On-board computer and displays
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster Danger

Notes on the instrument cluster Risk of accident if the instrument
cluster fails
Danger If the instrument cluster fails or malfunc-
Risk of distraction by information tions, you will not see any limitations to
systems and communications equip- the functioning of safety-relevant sys-
ment tems. This may impair operating safety.
Exemplary representation
If you operate information systems and
▶ Park the vehicle safely as soon as Rev counter
communications equipment integrated
possible and inform a qualified spe- 1
in the vehicle when driving, you may be Economical operating range (green)
cialist workshop.
distracted from what is happening in 2 Engine brake operating range (yellow)
traffic. When operating the instrument cluster, 3 Danger zone, danger of overrevving (red)
You may also lose control of the vehicle. adhere to the legal regulations of the
country you are currently in. If the indicator lamp W on the instru-
▶ Only operate this equipment when ment cluster lights up, the engine speed is
the traffic situation permits. high, e.g. when you shift down to a lower
▶ If this cannot be ensured, stop the Notes on the rev counter gear.
vehicle as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic con- Note ▶ Observe further information in the
Engine damage due to the maximum display messages.
ditions. Pay attention to the traffic
conditions. engine speed being exceeded ▶ Reduce the driving speed with the
service brake or shift up one gear.
▶ Make the entries when the vehicle is If the maximum permissible engine
stationary. speed is exceeded, a warning tone will ◁ The indicator lamp W in the
sound. instrument cluster goes out.
▶ Avoid driving in the red speed range
(danger zone).

Instrument cluster
General driving instructions for the rev ● When the vehicle is stationary, the en- Notes on the AdBlue® display
counter: gine is running and the transmission
● When driving, the rev counter should is in neutral, the engine will acceler-
be observed and the economical ate only slowly.
range 1 maintained.
In some situations, it may make sense Note
to operate the engine outside the Observe the information on an eco-
economical operating range, e.g. nomical driving style in the menu win-
on uphill gradients or when you are dow Eco-Support under the Driving
overtaking. mode menu D ( → Page 154). The
● Driving the vehicle within an econom- on‐board computer can help you to op- The AdBlue® gauge is only available in
ical operating range 1 brings about timise the way you drive and to develop vehicles with BlueTec® exhaust gas after-
low fuel consumption and reduced fuel‐saving driving habits. treatment.
wear. The AdBlue® reducing agent is required
● The engine speed range 2 should for reducing engine emission values.
be used in engine braking mode. The The MOT approval will be invalidated if
maximum engine braking effect is the vehicle is operated without AdBlue®.
produced just before red danger zone The legal consequence of this is that the
3. vehicle may no longer be operated on
● When driving downhill, make sure that public roads.
the engine speed does not enter the
You can display the range of your vehicle
red danger zone 3.
based on the current amount in the tank
● Idle speed will be set automatically using the Range menu window of the Trip
depending on the coolant temperat- data menu C ( → Page 153).
ure.
If the AdBlue® level has dropped to ap-
proximately 10% of the tank capacity, a

Instrument cluster
display message with the Ø symbol Notes on the fuel display Overview of time and outside temper-
will appear on the instrument cluster. ature
▶ Top up AdBlue® tank immediately
( → Page 339).
BlueTec® 4 vehicles and BlueTec® 5
vehicles: if you drive until the AdBlue®
tank is empty, engine output may be re-
duced.
BlueTec® 6 vehicles: If the AdBlue®
level drops to approx. 2.5 %, engine out- If the fuel level has dropped to approxim- Instrument cluster (example: Display on speedometer)
put may be reduced. ately 14%, the needle will enter the red re- You must pay special attention to road
serve area. The instrument cluster shows conditions when temperatures are around
If the AdBlue® tank has run dry, the event
a corresponding display message with the freezing point.
is recorded and signalled by the indicator
symbol 6. Note that the outside temperature display
lamp ; as an emissions‐related fault
when starting the vehicle ( → Page 147). You can display the range of your vehicle shows the measured air temperature and
In addition, speed may be limited to ap- based on the current amount in the tank not the road temperature.
proximately 20 km/h. using the Range menu window in the Trip There is a delay in displaying a change in
data menu C ( → Page 153) . outside temperature.
◁ The display on the speedometer
will show the time 1 and outside
temperature 2.

Instrument cluster
The menu window Truck info in the Trip in the menu window Menu of the Settings
data C menu also displays the time menu ä ( → Page 165). You can reset
and outside temperature ( → Page 153). the trip distance 2 in the menu window
You can change the time mode and Truck info of the Trip data menu C
the unit for temperature in the menu ( → Page 153).
window Menu of the Settings menu ä
( → Page 165).
Odometer overview
Instrument cluster (example: Display on rev counter)

◁ The display on the rev counter
shows the total distance 1 and
the trip distance 2.
The menu window Truck info in the Trip
data menu C also shows the total
distance and trip distance ( → Page 153).
You can change the unit of measurement

Instrument cluster
Engine diagnosis indicator lamp:

Vehicles without BlueTec® exhaust
gas aftertreatment
Warning/indicator lamp Possible causes/consequences and ▶ solutions
; If there are no malfunctions, the indicator lamp will light up briefly and then go out during the instrument cluster display
check after the vehicle is started.
Engine diagnostics warning
lamp

Instrument cluster
Engine diagnosis indicator

lamp: BlueTec® 4 vehicles and
BlueTec® 5 vehicles:
; If there are no malfunctions: The indicator lamp will light up briefly and then go out during the instrument cluster's display
check after the vehicle is started.
lamp
The indicator lamp is flashing. The instrument cluster will display a red display message.
AdBlue® has been used up or an emissions‐related malfunction has been detected.
; Engine output may be reduced.

▶ Follow the instructions in the display message.
Engine diagnostics warning ▶ Carefully drive to the nearest filling station and top up with AdBlue® ( → Page 341).
lamp or
▶ Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the malfunction rectified immediately.
Indicator lamp lights up.
; The BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment system is malfunctioning or has an emissions‐related fault.
The malfunction or fault may damage the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
Engine diagnostics warning ▶ If the instrument cluster shows a display message, observe it.
lamp ▶ Have the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Instrument cluster
Engine diagnosis indicator lamp:

BlueTec® 6 vehicles:
; The indicator lamp is flashing.

Once you have switched on the vehicle, the indicator lamp will indicate the system's status by means of a sequence of
Engine diagnostics warning flashes. If there are no malfunctions, the indicator lamp will go out after the vehicle is started ( → Page 149).
lamp
The indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after the vehicle is started.
; The BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment system is malfunctioning or has an emissions‐related fault. The malfunction or
fault may damage the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment system.
Engine diagnostics warning ▶ If the instrument cluster shows a display message, observe it.
lamp ▶ Have the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
Indicator lamp lights up. The instrument cluster shows a display message and the indicator lamp · in the status area
lights up.
An emissions‐related malfunction has been detected.
; ▶
▶
Follow the instructions in the display message.
Have the BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment system checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
If you do not follow the instructions in the display message, the engine output may be reduced as per the message dis-
lamp played:
● After approximately 10 hours, e.g., if a low‐grade diluted reducing agent is used or the metering is incorrect
● After approximately 36 hours, e.g., if the exhaust gas recirculation or the security system is faulty
In certain cases, engine output may be reduced even earlier.

Instrument cluster

The indicator lamp comes on. Engine output is reduced. The instrument cluster shows a display message and the indicator
lamp · in the status area lights up at the same time.
You have not rectified a detected emissions‐related malfunction.
▶ Follow the instructions in the display message.
; ▶ Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the malfunction rectified immediately.
If you do not follow the instructions in the display message, the speed may be limited as per the message displayed:
Engine diagnostics warning ● Approximately 20 hours after the first occurrence of a malfunction, e.g. if a low‐grade diluted reducing agent is used
lamp or the metering is incorrect
● Approximately 100 hours after the first occurrence of a malfunction, e.g. if the exhaust gas recirculation or the safety
system is faulty
In certain cases, speed may be limited even earlier.
The indicator lamp comes on. The speed is limited to approximately 20 km/h. The instrument cluster also displays the ·
indicator lamp in the status area.
AdBlue® has been used up or a detected emissions‐related malfunction has not been rectified.
; ▶
▶
Follow the instructions in the display message.
Carefully drive to the nearest filling station and top up with AdBlue® ( → Page 341)
lamp or
▶ Drive carefully to the nearest qualified workshop and have the malfunction rectified immediately.
▶ The MOT approval will be invalidated if you continue to use the vehicle.

Instrument cluster
System check after a malfunction ▶ To do so, carry out manual regener- In the third phase, the indicator lamp will
ation of the diesel particulate filter indicate whether any emissions‐relevant
BlueTec® 4 vehicles and BlueTec® 5 ( → Page 330). malfunctions have been detected.
vehicles:
If no malfunctions relevant to emissions
Once the AdBlue® tank has been refilled are identified, the indicator lamp will light
BlueTec® 6 exhaust gas aftertreat-
or the fault rectified, full engine output will up briefly and then go out for approxim-
ment status display
be restored. If the system check does not ately five seconds. This flashing sequence
detect any other faults, the ; indicator In BlueTec® 6 vehicles, the exhaust gas
will be repeated until the vehicle is star-
lamp will go out. It may take several jour- aftertreatment status is indicated for
ted.
neys to complete the system check. quick on‐site inspection by authorities.
If a malfunction relevant to emissions is
It is signalled by an indicator lamp ; in
BlueTec® 6 vehicles identified, the indicator lamp will flash
three successive phases. The signal lights
three times and then go out for approx-
Once the AdBlue® tank has been refilled up after you have switched on the vehicle
imately five seconds. This flashing se-
or the fault rectified, full engine output will and goes out when the vehicle starts.
quence will be repeated until the vehicle
be restored. If the system check does not The first phase is the instrument cluster is started. The indicator lamp will remain
detect any other faults, the ; indicator display check. The indicator lamp will lit for approximately 15 seconds after the
lamp will go out after the system status light up for approximately five seconds vehicle is started.
display. It may take several journeys to and then go out for approximately ten
complete the system check. In the following cases, the indicator lamp
seconds.
will light up and remain lit after the vehicle
If the reducing agent in the AdBlue® tank The second phase indicates the system is started:
is low quality or diluted, you must empty check status. The indicator lamp will ● A serious emissions‐related malfunc-
the tank and then refill it with AdBlue® in either light up again for five seconds or tion has been detected.
accordance with DIN 70070/ISO. You can flash for approximately five seconds. It
● An emissions‐related malfunction was
then initiate a system check. will then go out for around five seconds.
detected more than 200 hours ago
and is still present.

On-board computer
On-board computer country in which you are currently loc- 2 Button group
ated. Selecting the u next main menu/
Notes on/overview of the on-board selecting the next entry in input window,
computer increasing or resetting value
Selecting the t previous main menu/
Danger selecting previous entry in input window or
reducing the value
Risk of distraction by information r Next menu window/one menu bar
systems and communications equip- down in input window
ment s Previous menu window/one menu bar
If you operate information systems and up in input window
communications equipment integrated 9 Opening and closing input window/
acknowledging display messages
in the vehicle when driving, you may be
Ú Saving/displaying favourite menu window
distracted from what is happening in
traffic. The on‐board computer is operated using
You may also lose control of the vehicle. Exemplary representation the left‐hand button group on the multi-
On-board computer function steering wheel.
▶ Only operate this equipment when
the traffic situation permits. 1 Display The on-board computer will provide you
▶ If this cannot be ensured, stop the with the following information when you
vehicle as soon as possible, paying are driving:
attention to road and traffic con- ● Fuel consumption
ditions. Pay attention to the traffic ● Trip time
conditions. ● Operating statuses
▶ Make the entries when the vehicle is ● Maintenance due dates
stationary. ● Malfunctions
When operating the on‐board computer, ● Causes of malfunctions
observe the legal requirements for the ● Actions to be taken

On-board computer
Operating the on-board computer ▶ To open and close the input win- Overview of areas on the display
dows: When a menu window displays
the symbol 9, press the 9 button.
◁ The on-board computer will show
the last active menu window. If
▶ Selecting menu bars in the input
window: Press the button r or
a malfunction is detected, the
s.
on-board computer will display
the event in a display message ▶ Changing the value or selecting an
first. In addition to the display entry in the input window: Press
message, an indicator lamp may the u or t button.
light up in the status area. If there
are several events, the on-board Note
computer will show the display If a menu window is called up reg-
messages one by one according ularly, e.g. to check the engine oil
Areas on the display (example)
to significance. If further inform- level, save it using the Ú button.
ation on the fault is available, the
▶ To store a favourite menu: Open Register and title bar
display message shows the Û
the desired menu window and press The 1 tab shows you the main menus.
symbol. The information can be
and hold the Ú button for approxim- The active main menu is shown in white.
displayed with the u button.
ately two seconds. The 4 tab shows you the number of
▶ Acknowledge the display message by ◁ A tone will sound and the menu
pressing the 9 button. menu windows (submenus) and the win-
window will be saved. dow which is currently selected. The 5
▶ To scroll through the main menus: ▶ To display a favourite menu win- title bar shows the name of the active
Press the button u or t. dow: Briefly press the Ú button. menu window.
▶ Displaying further menu windows
in the main menu: Press the button Display area
r or s.
The on‐board computer will display a
menu window or display message in dis-

On-board computer
play area 2. A display message is dis- ● Proximity Control Assist: The É Overview of menus on the on-board
played automatically and contains a mes- symbol and the set speed, e.g. computer
sage or information about a malfunction. 85 km/h ( → Page 263)
In addition to the display message, an in- ● Limiter: The È symbol and Note
dicator lamp may light up in the status the set speed limit, e.g. 50 km/h The number and order of the menus
area 3. Acknowledging the display mes- ( → Page 259) depends on your vehicle's equipment
sage with the 9 button causes the dis- ● PPC (Predictive Powertrain Control): and the type of vehicle.
play message to disappear. An indicator The speed tolerances that were set
lamp that lights up in status area 3 will ( → Page 272) Trip data C ( → Page 153)
not go out after you acknowledge the dis- ● Truck info
The status of the driving system, e.g. on
play message. ● Tachograph
or off, is represented using colours.
Status area ● Since start
The status area 3 also contains an indic-
ator lamp panel. If there is a fault, warn- ● Range
For automatic transmissions, the status
ing or operating information, an indicator ● Since reset 1
area 3 shows the selected drive pro-
lamp will light up automatically. The indic- ● Since reset 2
gram, e.g. AEconomyand the gear display,
e.g. N1 ( → Page 232). ator lamp will light up in different colours Driving mode D ( → Page 154)
depending on the priority of the malfunc-
Depending on the selected driving sys- tion, warning or operating information. ● Speed
tem, the following information will be dis- The indicator lamp may also light up in ad- ● Eco-Support
played in the 3 status area: dition to a display message. ● Navigation
● Cruise control: The ¯ symbol ● Assistance
For an overview of the indicator lamps,
and the set speed, e.g. 85 km/h ● Video
see "Overview of indicator lamps in the
( → Page 261)
status area" ( → Page 168). Audio and communications E
● Lane Keeping Assist: the lane mark-
( → Page 157)
ings ( → Page 290)
● Alarm clock

On-board computer
● Telephone Trip data menu ▶ To reset the trip distance: Press the
● Audio button 9.
Truck info menu window ◁ The on-board computer shows a
Operation and maintenance â
( → Page 159) confirmation window.
▶ Use the r button to select the Yes
● Axles menu bar and confirm this with the
● Tyres u or 9 button.
● Level control
● Trailer Tachograph menu window
● Maintenance The Tachograph menu window is available
Monitoring information ã in vehicles with a digital tachograph.
( → Page 163) ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
to the trip data C.
● Reserve pressure
● Coolant
▶ To show driving and rest times:
Use the r or s button to scroll
● Engine Truck info menu window
to the menu window Tachograph.
● Events 1 Total distance
● Diagnosis Further information on the digital tacho-
2 Trip distance
graph can be found in the separate oper-
Settings ä ( → Page 165) 3 Time ating instructions.
4 Outside temperature
● Menu
From start/from reset 1/from reset 2
● Lighting ▶ To display the total distance, trip menu window
● Language distance, time and outside temper-
● Service products The Since start trip data contains values
ature: Use the u or t button
● Vehicle for driving and stationary periods from
to scroll to the trip data C.
the start of the trip. If you switch off the
● Assistance

On-board computer
vehicle for longer than four hours, the ▶ To reset the trip data: In menu win- (l/h). The marker above the bar
values will be automatically reset. dow Consumption, Times, or Speeds, display corresponds to the aver-
The Since reset 1 or Since reset 2 trip press the button u. age consumption Since start - all.
data contains values for driving and sta- ◁ The on-board computer shows a The menu window displays the
tionary periods from the last time the confirmation window. range up to 50 km. For lower val-
menu window was reset. ▶ Use the r button to select the Yes ues, the on-board computer will
menu bar and confirm this with the display <50 km.
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
u or 9 button.
to the trip data C.
▶ To show trip data: Use the r or Range menu window Driving mode menu
s button to scroll to the Since Speed menu window
start, Since reset 1, or Since reset 2 ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
menu window. to the trip data C. ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
▶ To show the ranges: Use the r to driving mode D.
The menu window will show the following
information, for example:
or s button to scroll to the menu ▶ To display the vehicle speed: Use
window Range. the r or s button to scroll to
● Distance travelled ◁ The menu window displays the the menu window Speed.
● Driving time approximate ranges of the fuel
● Average speed level 6 and the AdBlue® EcoSupport menu window
● Average fuel consumption levelØ. The on‐board computer records the driv-
▶ To display values for driving and ◁ In addition, the menu window ing style in eight categories, evaluates it,
stationary periods: Press the button shows the current fuel consump- and displays it in the Eco-Support menu
9. tion level as a bar display un- window. The on‐board computer can help
▶ Use the r or s button to scroll derneath the ranges. When the you to optimise your driving style and de-
to the Consumption, Times, or Speeds vehicle is stationary, the bar dis- velop fuel‐saving driving habits.
menu window. play will change and show the
The Eco-Support menu window identi-
stationary fuel consumption level
fies the driver by their tachograph driver

On-board computer
card and saves the evaluations of two The most economical process for re- stages in an anticipatory and incre-
drivers. If a third driver inserts his or her ducing kinetic energy is in the follow- mental manner.
driver card into the digital tachograph, the ing order: ● Shift: The on‐board computer evalu-
oldest evaluations will automatically be ■ Deceleration by coasting ates whether the gear shifting recom-
deleted. You can reset the evaluations at ■ Deceleration with the engine mendations on the on‐board com-
any time. All evaluations will then auto- brake or retarder puter are being followed and which
matically be deleted. ■ Deceleration with the service drive program is selected. If, for ex-
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll brake ample, you drive in the fuel‐efficient
to driving mode D. A economy shift program, you will re-
If you often reduce the vehicle speed ceive a positive evaluation.
▶ Use the r or s button to scroll by coasting, you will receive a positive
to the menu window Eco-Support. ● Use of acc. pedal: The on‐board com-
evaluation.
▶ Show ratings: Press the button 9. puter evaluates how you use the ac-
● Stop: The on‐board computer eval- celerator pedal and the kick‐down
◁ The menu window will show the uates the braking phases that result function. Gentle and constant use of
following categories:
in the vehicle coming to a standstill. the accelerator pedal will be evalu-
● Evenly: The on‐board computer eval- If you employ an anticipatory driving ated positively.
uates the steadiness of the vehicle style and thus prevent the vehicle ● Truck check: The on‐board computer
speed over an extended period of coming to a standstill, you will receive evaluates the following:
time. a positive evaluation. ■ The engine running time when the
● Roll/brake: The on‐board computer ● Speed: The on‐board computer evalu- vehicle is stationary
evaluates the braking phases that do ates excessively high vehicle speeds. If you leave the engine running
not result in the vehicle coming to a If you drive above approximately for approximately one minute for
standstill. It evaluates whether the 85 km/h, you will receive a negat- no discernible reason when the
vehicle will decelerate by rolling or ive evaluation. vehicle is stationary, you will re-
by application of the brakes (engine ● Use of cont.brake: The on‐board com- ceive a negative evaluation. If you
brake or retarder and service brake). puter evaluates how the continuous switch off the vehicle while in sta-
brake is used and activates the brake

On-board computer
tionary traffic, for example, you ▶ Reset evaluations: Press the button Observe the notes on the corresponding
will receive a positive evaluation. u. driver assistance/driving safety systems:
■ The tyre pressure (vehicles with a ◁ The on-board computer shows a ● Proximity Control Assist
tyre pressure monitoring system) confirmation window. ( → Page 263)
If the tyre pressures are too low ▶ Use the r button or select s ● Lane Keeping Assist ( → Page 290)
when you drive, you will receive a Yes and confirm this with the u or ● PPC ( → Page 270)
negative evaluation. 9 button. ● Traffic Sign Assist ( → Page 287)
■ The regeneration of the diesel ● Sideguard Assist/Active Sideguard
particulate filter Navigation menu window
Assist ( → Page 294)
If you do not carry out a sched- ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
uled regeneration of the diesel to driving mode D.
to driving mode D.
particulate filter, you will receive ▶ To display route guidance: Use the
▶ Use the r or s button to scroll
a negative evaluation. r or s button to scroll to the
to the menu window Assistance.
■ The maintenance of the air filter menu window Navigation.
If the air filter's maintenance due ◁ The menu window will show the Video menu window
date is passed, you will receive a following information:
negative evaluation. ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
● The destination, the street name to driving mode D.
▶ Press the r or s button to ● The direction of travel ▶ To show the camera image: Use the
select a category. ● The distance to the next change of r or s button to scroll to the
◁ In the corresponding category, direction menu window Video.
the menu window will display: ◁ The display on the instrument
Assistance menu window
● the average evaluation, e.g. Ø 25% cluster will show the camera
● a bar chart with the current evalu- The menu Assistance window shows in- image.
ation formation, warnings and statuses of cer- ▶ To adjust the brightness and con-
● a message on the current valuation tain driver assistance/driving safety sys- trast: Press the button 9.
tems.

On-board computer
▶ Select the bar display for brightness ● Wake‐up time for the alarm clock Telephone menu window
and contrast using the r or s ç
button.
▶ To set the alarm clock: Press the Danger
▶ Adjust the brightness and contrast of button 9. Risk of distraction from operating
the camera image using the u or
t button.
▶ Select the desired menu bar with the information systems and communica-
button r or s. tion equipment
▶ Change the value with the button If you operate mobile information sys-
Audio and communications menu u or t. tems and communication equipment
while driving, you may be distracted
Alarm clock menu window
Note from traffic conditions. You may also
If the vehicle is equipped with If you press and hold the u or lose control of the vehicle.
Mercedes‐Benz Trucks audio equipment, t button, the hours/minutes will ▶ Only operate this equipment when
the radio can be set as an alarm in alarm scroll quickly. the vehicle is stationary.
clock mode. If the alarm clock mode has
been set to Radio and the audio device ▶ To stop the alarm: Press the button
9. Note
is activated for the set wake‐up time, no
further signals will be issued. You can obtain information about suit-
Note able mobile phones and connecting mo-
▶ Display wake-up time: Use the u bile phones via Bluetooth® at an au-
or t button to scroll to audio and The wake‐up alarm will switch off
automatically after two minutes. thorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service
communications E.
Centre.
◁ The menu window Alarm clock
will show the following: ▶ Bluetooth® mobile phone: Connect
the mobile phone with the audio
● Day of the week and date equipment.
● Wake‐up time for the alarm clock ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
æ to audio and communications E.

On-board computer

to the menu window Telephone. Note
◁ The menu window will show the By pressing and holding the but-
provider name and the name of ton r or s, you can quickly
the connected Bluetooth® mobile scroll through the phone book or the
phone. missed calls list.
Note Note
If the button ; is pressed To call the number in the phone
briefly, the menu window Tele- book or a missed calls list, press
phone can be called up directly. the button ;. The menu window
will initially display details about the
▶ Display phone book/caller list: call. Pressing the button ; again (Sample illustration)
Press the button 9. will dial the phone number. Telephone switch on steering wheel
◁ The input window shows the Making, accepting calls/displaying
;
phone book (for example). telephone menu window
▶ Select the desired menu bar with the = Ends/rejects a call
r or s button. W Increases volume

▶ Use the u button to display the X Decreases volume
entries.
▶ Select a name or number with the
▶ Answering a call: Press the button
;.
button r or s.
◁ The on-board computer will show
the caller's number.
▶ To adjust the call volume: Increase
or reduce the volume during the call
using the W or X button.

On-board computer
▶ To reject or end a call: Press the ▶ To adjust the volume Press the
button =. Note W or X button on the multi-
When using MP3 files stored on function steering wheel.
Audio menu window, audio source, a USB device, you can navigate
track/station, MP3 browser through folders to select MP3 files
for playback. Operation and maintenance menu
The menu window Audio is available in
vehicles with Mercedes‐Benz Trucks audio Operating the MP3 browser Axles menu window
equipment. Displaying axle loads
▶ Open the menu window Audio.
▶ Switch on the audio device ▶ Press the button 9. Vehicles with air suspension: The vehicle
( → Page 173) ( → Page 187).
▶ Press the button r or s to may be equipped with an axle load dis-
select the MP3 browser menu bar. play. The axle load display is not calib-
to audio and communications E. rated, nor is it a system capable of being
▶ Opening the MP3 browser: Press
▶ Displaying the audio source and
the u or t button. calibrated. The measured data provides
track/station: Use the r or s only an approximate guide. The values
button to scroll to the Audio menu ▶ Changing MP3 files/folders: Press
cannot be used for official purposes.
window. the r or s button.
Load the vehicle uniformly to avoid in-
▶ To change the audio source or ▶ To select an MP3 file or open a accuracies in the measurement. When the
track/radio station: Press the but- folder: Press the button u. chassis is at driving level, the axle load
ton 9. ▶ To close current folder: Briefly press measuring system determines the axle
▶ Select the desired menu bar with the the button t. load from the pressure in the air suspen-
button r or s. ▶ To close MP3 browser: Press and sion bellows.
▶ hold the t button.
Change the selection by pressing the ▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface.
button u or t. In audio mode, the volume can be adjus- ▶ Apply the parking brake.
ted at any time. ▶ Set driving level ( → Page 309).
▶ Switch off the starting-off aid
( → Page 314).

On-board computer
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll ◁ The input window will show the ney, and when operating conditions
to Operation and maintenance â. axle loads. change (e.g., off‐road driving).
▶ Use the r or s button to scroll ▶ Select the desired axle with the r ▶ Adjust the tyre pressure as neces-
to the menu window Axles. or s button. sary.
◁ The menu window will show the ▶ Using the u or t button, cor-
vehicle's axles and the axle loads. rect the axle load according to the The tyre pressure monitoring system is
value shown by the single-axle load- a convenience system that offers the
Setting the axle load display following benefits:
measuring device.
You can adjust the axle load display if ● Assistance with regular tyre pressure
there is a notable difference between Tyres menu window monitoring
the axle load display and the weighbridge ● Automatic warning in the event of
results. Danger tyre pressure loss
▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface. Risk of accident due to insufficient or The tyre pressure monitoring system can
▶ Apply the parking brake. excessive tyre pressure provide reliable warnings only if the cor-
▶ Switch off the starting-off aid Tyres with too low or too high tyre rect specified pressure for the tyres has
( → Page 314). pressure can burst or wearexcessively been set on the on‐board computer.
▶ Set driving level ( → Page 309). and/or unevenly.
The tyre pressure monitoring system will
▶ Drive the vehicle onto a single-axle In addition, the handling as well as steer- detect an incorrect value if:
load-measuring device. ing and braking characteristics may be
● The vehicle is overloaded or incor-
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll severely impaired.
rectly loaded.
to Operation and maintenance â. ▶ Observe the recommended tyre ● The vehicle is fitted with wheels that
◁ The menu window will show the pressures and check the pressure have a different tyre size and the
axle loads and the overall axle of all tyres, including the spare, specified pressure on the on‐board
load. monthly, when the load changes, computer has not been corrected.
▶ Press the 9 button. before embarking on a longer jour- ● An incorrect specified pressure has
been set on the on‐board computer.

On-board computer
You are always responsible for setting the operation of the tyre pressure monitoring After tyre pressure sensors have been
correct tyre pressure. You should always system. replaced, the vehicle should remain sta-
have the correct, specified pressure on tionary for 15 minutes.
The on-board computer will display "- -" in-
the on‐board computer set at a qualified ▶ Afterwards, drive the vehicle at a
stead of the tyre pressure in the following
workshop. speed of more than 30 km/h for at
cases:
● A tyre pressure sensor is temporar- least ten minutes.
Note ily malfunctioning, e.g. due to radio Displaying the tyre pressure
Read the notes on tyre pressure in the transmitting equipment
section entitled "Regular checking of ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
● Values from the tyre pressure sensor
wheels and tyres" ( → Page 458). to Operation and maintenance â.
are not yet available
The tyre pressure monitoring system ▶ Wait a few minutes and/or move the to the menu window Tyres.
keeps a check on the pressures of all the
tyres of the towing vehicle both when the
vehicle out of the operating range of ◁ The menu window will display the
the radio transmitting equipment. tyre pressure for all the towing
vehicle is stationary and when it is in mo-
The tyre pressure values on the on‐board vehicle's tyres.
tion.
computer may differ from those measured ▶ Press the 9 button.
Note with a tyre pressure gauge. The tyre pres- ◁ Depending on the equipment,
sures shown by the on‐board computer the input window will show the
If the trailer is equipped with a tyre pres- refer to those measured at sea level. At following items of information:
sure monitoring system, the trailer tyres high altitudes, the tyre pressure values
will also be monitored and shown in the ● Battery status of the tyre pressure
indicated by a tyre pressure gauge will be
menu window Trailer. sensors for the tyres on this axle
higher than those shown by the on‐board
● Selected axle
If radio transmitting equipment (e.g. cord- computer. In this case, do not reduce the
less headphones, two‐way radios) is op- tyre pressure. ● Tyre pressures and temperatures for
erated inside the vehicle or in the vicinity the tyres on this axle
of the vehicle, this may interfere with the ● The specified pressure for the tyres
on this axle (at 20 °C)

On-board computer
● The specified pressure for each tyre ▶ Scroll to the next axle using the r If the axle loads must be displayed in the
depending on the tyre's temperature or s button. Trailer menu window, comply with the
following points:
Tyre pressure loss warning system
● Park the vehicle on a level surface.
If the tyre pressure in at least one tyre ● Apply the parking brake.
drops, the on‐board computer will display
the warning h in a display message. ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
A warning tone will also sound. Each tyre to Operation and maintenance â.
pressure value for which a loss of pres- ▶ Use the r or s button to scroll
sure has been determined will be high- to the menu window Trailer.
lighted in red or yellow. When there is ▶ Press the button 9.
a notable loss of tyre pressure, the tyre ◁ The display will show the first
pressure value will be shown in red. input window, e.g. Brake info.
Level control menu window
▶ Press the u or t button to
display the next input window.
Tyres menu window ▶ Observe the notes on level control ◁ The following information or in-
1 Axle ( → Page 304). put windows may be displayed,
2 Specified pressure ▶ Raise or lower the chassis using the depending on the equipment in-
on-board computer ( → Page 308). stalled:
Note Trailer/semitrailer menu window
When the tyre temperature differs, dif- Observe the notes on equipment and its
ferent specified pressures may be shown operation in the manufacturer's operating
for the tyres, e.g. due to exposure to instructions for the trailer/semitrailer.
sunlight.

On-board computer
Maintenance menu window firm that the work has been carried out ▶ To reset the maintenance due
professionally in the on‐board computer date: Press the r or s button
Note and in the service report. to display the desired maintenance
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll point.
Confirming maintenance work
to Operation and maintenance â. ◁ If a reset is possible, a confirm-
If confirmation is given without the ne- ation window will appear on the
cessary maintenance work being carried ▶ Use the r or s button to scroll
to the menu window Maintenance. on-board computer.
out on time, the vehicle or its major as-
▶ To display the maintenance point ▶ Press the button u.
semblies may be damaged and wear
may increase significantly. and date: Press the button 9. ▶ Use the button r to select the
◁ The input window will show, for menu bar Yes and confirm this with
▶ Only confirm maintenance work the u or 9 button.
example:
once it has been carried out.
● The maintenance point Engine
▶ If maintenance work has been con- Monitoring information menu
firmed in error or prematurely, have ● The maintenance due date
the maintenance work in question 09/23/2024 Reserve pressure menu window
performed immediately. ● The remaining distance 2,000 km
▶ To display the supply pressure:
The maintenance system calculates main- If it is not possible to predict the main- Use the u or t button to scroll
tenance due dates for the vehicle and its tenance due date, the input window will to the monitoring information ã.
major assemblies based on the vehicle's show, for example: ◁ The menu window will show the
operating conditions. A display message ● The maintenance point Engine reserve pressure of brake circuits
will automatically display maintenance ● The maintenance due date \ and ^ as a bar chart.
due dates for the first time 14 days before ▶ To display next maintenance point
they are due. Coolant menu window
and due date: Use the r or s
If the maintenance work is carried out at button to display the next mainten- ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Ser- ance point. to the monitoring information ã.
vice Centre, the Service Centre will con-

On-board computer
▶ To show the coolant temperature: The operating hours counter is not suit- Events. If the cause of the malfunction/
Use button r or s to scroll to able for measuring the driving hours of message has been rectified, the on‐board
the menu window.Coolant the driver. computer will no longer display the event.
If the coolant level is too low, the coolant ▶ Do not start the vehicle if menu win- ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
temperature display will not be conclus- dow Oil level low or Oil level too low to the monitoring information ã.
ive. are displayed. Immediately add the ▶ Use button r or s to scroll to
amount of oil shown ( → Page 400) the Events menu window.
Engine menu window and check the oil level again. ◁ The menu window will show the
You can check the engine's oil level and ◁ If menu window Oil level ok and number of events, for example.
operating hours in the menu window En- a quantity of oil is displayed, ▶ To show event: Press the button 9.
gine. Check the engine oil level before the engine oil level is sufficient. ▶ To show more events: Press the
the start of every journey. No information The amount of oil required to button r or s.
concerning the engine oil level will be dis- reach the maximum fill level is
played while you are driving. purely for your information. At the Diagnostics menu window
moment, you do not need to top
▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface.
up the oil.
Diagnostic data contains information
▶ Apply the parking brake.
▶ If the oil level display is not available,
that can help workshop staff during fault
▶ Switch off the vehicle. repeat the oil level check.
diagnosis, e.g. via remote diagnosis. The
▶ Switch on the vehicle but do not start ▶ If it is not possible to display the oil
Diagnosis menu window contains a list of
it. all the control units (systems) installed in
level after repeated attempts, have the vehicle, for example.
▶ Wait at least five minutes. the oil level display checked at a qual-
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll ified workshop. You can obtain further information from
to the monitoring information ã. an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
▶ Displaying the engine oil level and Events menu window Service Centre.
operating hours: Use button r or You can display saved malfunctions and ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
s to scroll to the menu window. messages displayed in menu window to the monitoring information ã.
Engine

On-board computer
▶ Use button r or s to scroll to ◁ The input window will display a ▶ Press the button 9.
the Diagnosis menu window. list of possible settings. ◁ The menu window will show the
▶ To display diagnostic data: Press ▶ Select the desired menu bar with the input window Headl. range ctrl..
the button 9. r or s button. ▶ Adjusting the headlamp range
◁ The input window will show a ▶ Change the setting by pressing the of the dipped beam: Change the
list of all control unit system u or t button. setting by pressing the u or t
abbreviations. button.
▶ Use the r or s button to se- Lighting menu window
lect a control unit. The following settings are possible in the Note
▶ Press the button u to display menu window Lighting: When you are driving a laden
further details regarding the control ● The headlamp range of the dipped vehicle, the illumination of the road
unit. beam must be 40 m to 100 m and the low
● The brightness of the instrument beam must not dazzle oncoming
lighting and the audio display when traffic. When the vehicle is unladen,
Settings menu select level g.
it is dark and the lights are switched
Menu window for the menu on ▶ To adjust the instrument lighting:
If settings are changed in the Settings ● The switch‐off delay time of the exter- Use the r or s button to se-
menu window Menu, these changes will ior lighting (surround lighting) lect Instrument panel.
have an impact on how the menu win- ● Switch automatic interior lighting ◁ If the light is switched off and
dows are displayed. control on/off night mode has not been detec-
● Activating/deactivating the night ted, the input window will show
lighting Day mode. It will then not be pos-
to settings ä.
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll sible to configure any settings.
▶ To set the units system: Press the
to settings ä. Otherwise, the input window will
button 9.
show the brightness of the in-
to the menu window Lighting.

On-board computer
strument lighting and the audio Surround lighting will be switched on for switch on when the dipped beam
display as a bar chart. the switch-off delay time set if: is activated.
▶ Change the setting by pressing the ● The vehicle is unlocked using the
u or t button. remote control. Language menu window
▶ To set the switch-off delay time for ● The low‐beam headlamps or standing Information on installing more languages
the exterior lighting: Use the r lights and the vehicle are switched off can be obtained from an authorised Mer-
or s button to select Delayed and a door is opened within around cedes‐Benz Trucks Service Centre.
switch-off ext. lighting. four minutes. ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
◁ The input window shows the ▶ To switch automatic interior light- to settings ä.
switch-off delay time set for the ing control on/off: Use the r or ▶ Use the r or s button to scroll
exterior lighting (surround light- s button to select Automatic in- to the menu window Language.
ing). terior light control. ▶ To set language: Press the button
▶ Change the setting by pressing the ▶ Press the button u or t to ac- 9.
u or t button. tivate or deactivate automatic control. ◁ The input window will display a
◁ If you set the switch-off delay ◁ The interior lights and the en- selection of languages.
time to 0 seconds, the surround trance lighting will switch on ▶ Select the desired language with
lighting is deactivated. automatically if automatic con- button r or s.
Vehicles with a rain and light sensor: trol is switched on and you open ▶ Change the setting with the button
a door. u.
Surround lighting will be switched on for
▶ To switches night lighting on/
the switch-off delay time set if: Operating fluids menu window
off Use the r or s button to
● The vehicle is unlocked with the re- select Nightlight.
mote control when it is dark. If the operating fluids data are changed
▶ Press the button u or t to ac- via the on‐board computer, the mainten-
● One of the vehicle's doors is opened tivate or deactivate the night lighting.
when it is dark. ance system will automatically adjust the
◁ If the Auto setting is selected, the maintenance due dates accordingly.
Vehicles without a rain and light sensor: night lighting will automatically

On-board computer
The data about the operating fluids added ▶ Press the button 9. Vehicle menu window
must be set. ◁ The input window shows the
For information about managing regener-
▶ Read the information in the "Operat- major assembly and operating
ation in the diesel particulate filter, read
ing fluids" section ( → Page 482). fluid property, e.g., Engine and Oil
grade and the currently operating the following sections:
fluid specification. ● Regeneration lockout ( → Page 329)
Note
▶ To select a major assembly: Using ● Starting manual regeneration
Increased wear due to mixing differ- ( → Page 330)
the button u or t, select a
ent grades of oil
major assembly with a corresponding For information about the drive functions
If engine oils of different quality grades
operating fluid property. of the automated manual transmission,
are mixed, the intervals for changes
of engine oil will be shorter than with You can select the following major assem- read the following sections:
engine oils of the same quality. blies with a corresponding operating fluid ● Rocking‐free function ( → Page 238)
property, for example: ● Crawler mode ( → Page 236)
▶ Only mix engine oils of different ● Hydromove (vehicles with turbo re-
● Engine fuel grade
quality grades in exceptional cases. tarder clutch) ( → Page 245)
● Engine oil viscosity
▶ Adjust the specification of the en-
gine oil to a lower quality level using ● Engine oil quality Setting Direction of traffic has an effect
the on‐board computer under En- ● Transmission oil quality on the Sideguard Assist/Active Sideguard
gine Oil grade. ● Rear axle oil quality Assist function. Read the notes on
Sideguard Assist/Active Sideguard Assist
Setting the operating fluids
▶ To set the operating fluid value: ( → Page 294).
Using the r or s button, select
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll an operating fluid value. ▶ Use the u or t button to scroll
to settings ä. ▶ Set the operating fluid value of the to ä Settings.
▶ Use the r or s button to operating fluid added using the u ▶ Use the r or s button to scroll
scroll to the menu window Service or t button. to the menu window Vehicle.
products.

Overview of warning/indicator lamps in the status area
▶ To switch the function on/off: ▶ Use the r or s button to scroll ▶ Always observe warning/indicator
Press the button 9. to the menu window Assistance. lamps and follow the appropriate
▶ Press the r or s button to ▶ To switch driving systems on/off: remedial measures.
select a function. Press the button 9.
▶ Switch on or off with the button u. ▶ Press the r or s button to
Overview
select a driving system.
Assistance menu window ▶ Switch on or off with the button u.
For information about the driving systems, ◁ If the menu item for a driving
read the following sections: system is greyed out, the driving
● Attention Assist ( → Page 293) system cannot be switched off for
● Lane Keeping Assist ( → Page 290) your vehicle.
● PPC (Predictive Powertrain Control)
( → Page 270) Overview of warning/indicator lamps
● PPC (Predictive Powertrain Control) in the status area
Interurban ( → Page 270)
● Adaptive Highbeam Assist Safety instructions
( → Page 96) If you ignore warning/indicator lamps,
● Traffic Sign Assist ( → Page 287) you cannot recognise failures and mal- Status area in the instrument cluster
● Frontguard Assist ( → Page 274) functions in components or systems. If there is a malfunction, warning, or oper-
● Active Brake Assist ( → Page 276) Driving/braking characteristics may be ating status information, a warning/indic-
affected and the reliability and road safety ator lamp will automatically light up in the
● Sideguard Assist/Active Sideguard
of your vehicle may be impaired. status area 1 of the on‐board computer.
Assist ( → Page 294)
▶ Have the vehicle checked and re- The warning/indicator lamp comes on in a
● EcoRoll mode ( → Page 236)
paired as soon as possible at a quali- different colour depending on the priority
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll fied specialist workshop. of the malfunction, warning, or operating
to ä Settings. status information. The warning/indicat-

or lamp may also light up in addition to a 4 Oil level too low Steerable additional axle malfunction
display message. Coolant temperature too high D
(leading/trailing axle, centred) or power
? steering malfunction; see corresponding
( → Page 540)
display message
Adaptive Highbeam Assist + Coolant level too low ( → Page 394)
Ô Steerable additional axle malfunction
( → Page 96)
Emissions‐related malfunction in the D or power steering malfunction, see
i Work lamps · BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment corresponding display message
% Preglow system or low AdBlue® supply Monitored fifth‐wheel coupling
¤
6 Restraint system ( → Page 35) # Energy‐saving mode active ( → Page 344)
# Battery charge level too low Monitored fifth‐wheel coupling
7 Seat belt warning ( → Page 39) £
( → Page 344)
Assistance systems faulty # Alternator faulty or undervoltage
X Monitored fifth‐wheel coupling malfunc-
( → Page 533) Service due date; see corresponding î
tion ( → Page 344)
¯
Lane Keeping Assist switched off display message
m Fifth‐wheel coupling; refill grease
( → Page 292) X Turbo retarder clutch ( → Page 245) ð reservoir (see separate operating
Frontguard Assist malfunction instructions)
R } Leading axle ( → Page 314)
( → Page 274) Cargo liftgate (see separate operating
The acoustic warning from Sideguard ¡ Trailing axle ( → Page 314) ¬
instructions)
Assist and the additional automat- å Moving‐off aid ( → Page 314) Ç Tipper operation
Q ic brake intervention from Active
Sideguard Assist have been deactiv- i Differential locks ( → Page 250) I Power take‐off ( → Page 371)
ated ( → Page 303) Steered additional axle centred Continuous brake malfunction
Õ y
Sideguard Assist or Active Sideguard ( → Page 315) ( → Page 230)
Assist are only available to a limited Steering angle disparity in steered Tyre pressure monitor warning mes-
Q {
extent (e.g. only available on one side) additional axle ( → Page 315) h sage, see corresponding display mes-
( → Page 274) sage ( → Page 543)
F Hydraulic auxiliary drive
Sideguard Assist or Active Sideguard Tyre pressure monitoring system
P m Off‐road gear transfer case
Assist unavailable ( → Page 274) ¨
( → Page 458)
Engine oil pressure too low; see Transmission oil temperature too high
5 Ù
( → Page 400) x Frequent‐stop brake ( → Page 226)
corresponding display message

ë HOLD function ( → Page 229)

ABS equipment ! additionally
shown with s, r or u for
!
towing vehicle and/or trailer/semitrail-
er ( → Page 217)
Trailer/semitrailer brake system mal-
Û
function ( → Page 218)
Brake pad wear # shown additionally
# with s for a towing vehicle, or shown
with r for trailer/semitrailer
Control intervention by Stability Con-
Á trol Assist in the trailer/semitrailer
( → Page 249)

Radio with USB port and Bluetooth®
Notes on operating safety
Notes on operating safety Operating temperature

The following temperature ranges must be
Danger
observed for the device:
Risk of distraction by information
systems and communications equip- ● Operating temperature: ‐20°C to
ment 70°C
If you operate information systems and ● Storage temperature: ‐40 °C to 85 °C
communications equipment integrated
Bluetooth® specification
in the vehicle when driving, you may be
distracted from what is happening in Properties of the Bluetooth® techno-
traffic. logy used:
You may also lose control of the vehicle. Bluetooth® version 2.0
▶ Only operate this equipment when Energy class Class 2
the traffic situation permits. Service Maximum +4 dBm

▶ If this cannot be ensured, stop the Frequency range 2402 to 2480 MHz
vehicle as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic con- The device is equipped with an internal
ditions. Pay attention to the traffic Bluetooth® antenna that is not accessible
conditions. from the outside.
▶ Make the entries when the vehicle is
stationary.
▶ When operating the multimedia sys-
tem, observe the legal requirements
for the country in which you are cur-
rently located.

Frequency ranges
Frequency ranges
Tuning steps for automatic station search func- Tuning steps for manual station search func-
Frequency band Frequency range
tion tion
Frequency range Europe
FM 87.5–108.0 MHz 100 kHz 100 kHz
MW 531 – 1620 kHz 9 kHz 9 kHz
LW 153 – 282 kHz 3 kHz 1 kHz
SW 5800 – 6250 kHz 5 kHz 5 kHz
Frequency range South America
FM 87.9–107.9 MHz 200 kHz 100 kHz
AM 530 – 1710 kHz 10 kHz 10 kHz

Overview of the control panel
Overview of the control panel Overview of the control panel

1 Selects a menu.
In USB mode: Toggle playback time display.
2 Selects the sound menu.
3 Microphone
4 Display
5 In radio mode: Switch RDS comfort functions
on/off.
6 ´·
In radio mode: Switch frequency bands.
In MP3 mode (USB): Change folder.
In AUX mode: Switch between FRONT and
REAR MAN.
Press w briefly: Answering a call.
Press and hold:
Switches on Bluetooth®.
Starts Bluetooth® search.
Start Bluetooth® pairing (Pairing/External).
Press = briefly: End/reject call.
Press and hold: Deactivate Bluetooth®.
7 Press briefly:
Mute audio source (Mute/Pause).
Ends the current traffic announcement.
Press and hold: In radio mode:
Switch RDS comfort functions on/off.

System settings
8 Selects an audio source.

Note Setting the bass
Press and hold: ASTORE
The audio equipment switches off auto- ▶ Open sound menu: Press the button
Mutes the current traffic announcement.
matically after approximately one hour u repeatedly until BASS and the
9 In radio mode:
when the ignition is switched off. current setting appear.
Press briefly: Start station search.
Press and hold: Manual station search
▶ Turn the control knob q until the
The audio equipment switches off auto- desired bass is set.
In USB mode: matically when the battery charge level
Press briefly: Skips to the next/previous
is low.
track. Adjusting the balance
Press and hold: Fast forward/return.
Note ▶ Open sound menu: Press the button
A AUX port u repeatedly until BAL and the
B USB port Depending on the vehicle's equipment, current setting appear.
some buttons may not be present or
C In radio mode:
have no function.
▶ Turn the control knob q until the
Press briefly: Select a station from the desired volume distribution is set.
station presets.
Press and hold: Store stations manually
In USB mode:
System settings Resetting sound settings
Button 3 (RND): Switches random playback Sound settings ▶ Open sound menu: Press the u
on/off or toggles. button repeatedly until RESET N ap-
Button 4 (RPT): Switches repeat track on/ Adjusting the treble pears.
off or toggles. ▶ Open sound menu: Press the button ▶ Turn the control knob clockwise q
D Press: Switches the audio device on or off. u repeatedly until TREB and the until RESET Y appears.
Turn: Adjusts the volume. current setting appear. ◁ The sound settings are reset after
In conjunction with a Bluetooth®‐capable ▶ Turn the control knob q until the about two seconds.
mobile phone, it is possible to use your desired level is set.
or
phone via the radio.
▶ Press and hold the u button.

Radio mode
Setting the playing time display ● Current programme is a regional pro- Switching on the radio
gramme (REG)
This function allows you to set whether ▶ Press the SRC button until Radio
the ELAPSED playback or the REMAIN ‐ing ● Alternative transmitter frequencies appears briefly in the display.
(AF)
playback is displayed. ◁ You will hear the last station
▶ To activate setting mode: Press With RDS switched on, the radio tries selected.
the t button until ELAPSED or to ensure optimum reception with the
REMAIN appears briefly in the display. assistance of alternative frequencies. In
doing so, regional programmes are taken Storing radio stations
▶ To change playing time display:
Turn the control knob q. into account. Storing stations manually
◁ You switch between the two set- In addition, the switching behaviour is You can save the station currently being
tings. also affected by environmental and re- listened to at any preset.
ception conditions and may, therefore, ▶ Press one of the buttons 1 to 6
change. until an acoustic signal sounds.
Radio mode
◁ The current station is stored in
Function of the RDS (radio data sys- Switching RDS on or off the corresponding preset posi-
tem) tion.
When the RDS function is active, the RDS
The radio stations can provide inaud- symbol can be seen in the display.
ible additional information in the FM‐fre- Save stations automatically
quency band with the radio data system. ▶ In radio mode press the RDS button.
◁ Depending on its current setting, You can automatically assign the six re-
The following information can be dis- the RDS function is switched on spective station presets of the selected
played, for example: or off. frequency band FM‐AS or AM‐AS with sta-
● Name of the radio station (PS) tions that can be received. The order of
● Transmitted traffic reports from the the stations is determined by the recep-
station (TP) tion quality.
● Current traffic announcement (TA)

Radio mode
Note Setting the traffic information service Note

Stations that have already been stored Switching traffic information service Even when the TP function is
manually in the FM‐AS or AM‐AS fre- priority (TP) on/off active, a call using the connected
quency band presets are lost with the When the TP function is switched on the Bluetooth® telephone is not
automatic station storage. display shows the TP symbol. interrupted. The traffic information
service priority is also not possible if
▶ Use the ´ or · button to se- If priority for the traffic information ser-
an external audio source has muted
lect the desired frequency band. vice is switched on, a traffic announce-
the audio device.
▶ Press and hold the SCR button. ment suppresses playback of another
◁ A-Store appears on the display. audio source for its duration. Playback Adjusting the volume of the traffic
The six stations with the volume is adjusted automatically. The announcement:
strongest reception are searched function is also possible with the mute
function active. ▶ During the traffic announcement, turn
for and stored automatically in
the control knob q clockwise or
the presets of the FM automatic Traffic information service priority is only anti-clockwise.
storage area (AFM) or AM possible if FM is selected and RDS is ac-
automatic storage area (AMW, tivated.
ALW or ASW). The station at Ending traffic announcements
▶ Press the button t. ▶ Press the SRC button during a traffic
memory preset 1 is played.
◁ The selected function TP ON announcement.
or TP OFF can be seen in the
Note The next traffic announcement will still be
display.
For the AM frequency ranges MW, heard.
▶ Turn the control knob q clockwise
LW and SW there is just one auto-
or anti-clockwise.
matic storage area. If you store sta-
tions again automatically, previously
◁ The current setting appears in the
display.
stored stations for another AM fre-
quency range can be overwritten.

Media
Media For equipment with an AUX input at Switching to AUX mode

the berth, the AUX input at the berth
AUX mode ▶ Press the SRC button until FRONT or
is assigned to the rear AUX port.
REAR-MAN appears in the display.
Functions of AUX mode An adapter cable from Mercedes‐Benz ▶ Use the ´ or · button
Trucks accessories is required for the rear to switch between FRONT and
Danger AUX port. REAR-MAN.
Risk of distraction when handling ◁ If no external audio equipment
External audio sources are played back as
data storage medium is connected at the front, the
follows:
If you handle a data storage device while display flashes.
● Using their own speakers
driving, you may be distracted from
traffic conditions. You may also lose ● Using the speakers of the audio
equipment Selecting options for the AUX port
control of the vehicle.
▶ Only handle a data storage medium The type of playback must be observed Note
when the vehicle is stationary. when connecting the external audio
The AUX connection is optimised for
devices.
The varying volumes of external audio external equipment that has an AUX
sources can mean that system messages output. If an external device with only
Note a headphone output is connected, the
(e.g. traffic announcements) are played at
Do not run the external audio equipment signal level of the external device may
a noticeably increased volume. You may
using a power supply unit that is connec- be too low to automatically activate the
need to deactivate the system messages
ted with the vehicles 12 V power supply. AUX port.
or adjust their volume manually.
This can audibly impair playback.
External audio sources are connected to The following options are available for the
the audio device as follows: rear AUX port:
● Via the front AUX‐IN socket ● XMUTE OFF
● Via the rear AUX connection When the external audio source activ-
ates the mute signal, the audio equip-

Media
ment switches to the rear AUX port. Connecting an external audio source ▶ Select the XMUTE ON playback op-
Playback then occurs through the to the rear AUX input tion ( → Page 177).
speakers of the audio equipment. The ◁ When the external audio source
REAR-EXT message is shown in the Connecting an external audio source activates the mute signal, the
display. You can adjust the volume (playback via the audio device speak- audio equipment is muted.
and the sound settings of the audio er)
equipment. Playback of the external audio source via
● XMUTE ON the speakers of the audio equipment can USB mode
When the external audio source activ- be switched manually or automatically. Information on USB mode
ates the mute signal, the audio equip- ▶ Switching manually: Connect the
ment is muted. The EXT MUTE mes- external audio source to the C1 plug Danger
sage is shown in the display. You will ( → Page 186). Risk of distraction when handling
only be able to operate a limited num- data storage medium
Playback can be switched manually
ber of the audio equipment's func- If you handle a data storage device while
( → Page 177).
tions. driving, you may be distracted from
▶ Automatic switching: Also connect
▶ Press the t button repeatedly the external audio source to the Mute
traffic conditions. You may also lose
until the XMUTE ON or XMUTE OFF control of the vehicle.
(C2) ( → Page 186).
message is shown in the display. ▶ Only handle a data storage medium
▶ Select the XMUTE OFF playback op-
▶ To change the selection: Turn the
tion ( → Page 177). when the vehicle is stationary.
control knob q.
Supported USB devices
Connecting an external audio source
(playback via its own speaker) You can connect USB devices to the audio
equipment.
▶ Connect the mute output of the ex-
ternal audio source with the C2 plug The connection is realised via a type‐A
( → Page 186). USB port in the function button row under
the cover.

Media
The following USB devices are supported: ● wma: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s) ◁ USB playback resumes from the
● USB flash drives (flash memory) The following special features of USB
point at which you last exited
● USB hard drives (starting/continuous USB mode.
devices must be observed:
current of max. 800 mA, separate ● No data other than music data may
external power supply equipment may be placed on the USB device to pre- Note
be necessary) with a size of: vent unnecessarily increasing the When a USB data storage medium is
■ 4.57 cm initialisation time. connected for the first time, the system
■ 6.35 cm ● Up to eight directory levels with up to first has to read the files. READING ap-
● Selected MP3 players 1000 tracks per directory are suppor- pears in the display.
ted. During USB playback, the display shows
Note ● USB extension cables should not be the current track number and the time
The audio equipment supports "USB used. These may impair functionality. elapsed or remaining.
Device Subclass 6" USB storage media.
For information on which USB device Note Note
subclass your device offers, please con- Files protected by DRM In extreme cases, it may take several
tact the device manufacturer. (Digital Rights Management) are not minutes to start certain functions, de-
supported by your audio equipment. pending on the external device and the
Note content of the medium.
A wide variety of USB devices is avail- Activating the USB socket
able. It cannot therefore be guaranteed ▶ The USB device is connected in the Note
that playback is possible with every USB correct position with the USB port. If your audio equipment cannot find a
device. ▶ Press the SRC button repeatedly USB device, the NO USB message is
Supported data formats until the USB symbol is shown in the shown. If your audio equipment cannot
display. find any music files, the DEV ERR mes-
The following data types are supported: sage is shown.
● mp3: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kbit/s)

Media
Playback options ▶ Play all tracks in the current folder ◁ RPT OFF appears briefly in the
in random order: Press the RND 3 display.
Selecting the playback folder button repeatedly until RND DIR ap- ◁ The RPT symbol disappears.
▶ Press the · or ´ button during pears in the display.
music playback. ▶ Play all tracks on the data medium
◁ The next or previous folder is in random order: Press the RND 3 Notes on MP3 mode
selected. button repeatedly until RND ALL ap- Information on supported file types
pears in the display.
Note ▶ To end random playback: Press the Danger
Notes on the MP3 function: RND 3 button repeatedly until RND Risk of distraction when handling
OFF appears in the display. data storage medium
Any folders without MP3 or WMA files
are automatically skipped.
◁ The RND display disappears. If you handle a data storage device while
▶ To repeat the current track: Press driving, you may be distracted from
All folders and subfolders are treated as the RPT 4 button repeatedly until traffic conditions. You may also lose
if they are located in sequence on the RPT TRK is shown in the display. control of the vehicle.
same level. By repeatedly pressing the ◁ The RPT display message appears
· or ´ button, you can access all ▶ Only handle a data storage medium
in the display.
subfolders. when the vehicle is stationary.
▶ To repeat all tracks in the current
folder: Press the RPT 4 button re- The equipment supports the following
Setting playback options peatedly until RPT DIR is shown in the types of MP3 file:
In MP3 mode, playback occurs in the display. ● Constant and variable data transfer
order in which the tracks were written ◁ The RPT display message appears rates from 32 kBit/s to 320kBit/s
to the data storage medium. Once all the in the display. ● Sampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz
tracks in a folder have been played, the ▶ To end track repeat: Press the RPT
tracks in the next folder are played. 4 button again.

Bluetooth® mode
The equipment supports the following Bluetooth® mode In conjunction with a Bluetooth®‐cap-
types of WMA file: able mobile phone, it is possible to use
● Constant data transfer rates from Notes on Bluetooth® operation Bluetooth® using the radio.
8 kBit/s to 384 kBit/s The following requirements must be met
Danger
● Sampling rates of 8 kHz to 48 kHz for the radio to find the mobile phone:
Risk of distraction from operating
The equipment does not support the fol- integrated communication equipment ● The mobile phone is close to the radio
lowing types of WMA file: while the vehicle is in motion in the vehicle.
● DRM (Digital Rights Management) If you operate information systems and ● The Bluetooth® function of the radio
encrypted files communications equipment integrated is engaged.
● variable data transfer rates in the vehicle when driving, you may be ● The mobile phone is ready to be
● WMA Pro distracted from what is happening in paired.
● 5.1 Surround traffic.
Note
You may also lose control of the vehicle.
Note The radio stores the pairing informa-
▶ Only operate this equipment when tion of up to six mobile phones so that
Only use tracks with a data transfer rate the traffic situation permits.
of at least 128kbit/s and a sampling they are automatically recognised and
▶ If this cannot be ensured, stop the connected. If another mobile phone is
rate of at least 44.1kHz. Lower rates
vehicle as soon as possible, paying paired, the radio overwrites pairing in-
may cause a noticeable deterioration in
attention to road and traffic con- formation of the mobile phone that has
quality.
ditions. Pay attention to the traffic not been connected for a long time.
conditions.
▶ Make the entries when the vehicle is
stationary.
In addition, the legal requirements for
the country you are currently in must be
observed.

Bluetooth® mode
▶ Switching off: Press and hold the searches for mobile phones
Note = button. that are in range for a specific
When connecting, the radio automatic- ◁ The display briefly shows BT OFF. time. At the end of the search,
ally loads the telephone book (maximum The connection to the mobile an acoustic signal sounds. If at
600 entries) and the list of the most re- phone is disconnected. least one mobile phone is found,
cently dialled telephone numbers. the display briefly shows BT LIST
Note and then the device name of the
Note mobile phone.
The Bluetooth® function remains active
Note on pairing mobile phones: until it is deactivated again. When the
radio is switched off, the Bluetooth® Note
Bluetooth® pairing: The mobile phone
search is started by the radio. connection is disconnected. When the If the radio cannot find any mo-
radio is switched on, the connection is bile phones, the display briefly
Bluetooth® external: The radio search is shows BT LIST EMPTY.
automatically established again.
started from the mobile phone.
▶ Select the desired mobile phone with
the ü or û button.
Pairing mobile phones
Activates or deactivates the ▶ Press and hold the ; button.
Bluetooth® function Pairing mobile phones using ▶ Using the number keys 4
▶ Activation: Press and hold the ; Bluetooth® pairing to 3 on the radio, enter an
button. The pairing process starts from the radio. easy-to-remember number up to six
◁ The display briefly shows BT ▶ Press the t button as often as figures in length (e.g. 1234).
ON. The Bluetooth® symbol ª necessary until the display shows BT The sequence of numbers begins with g.
flashes in the display. The radio PAIR or BT EXT. If you press the number key 1 to 6 on
automatically searches for mobile ▶ Start search for mobile phones: the radio more than once, numbers g to
phones that have already been Press and hold the ; button. v appear.
paired.
◁ The Bluetooth® symbol ª
flashes in the display. The radio

Bluetooth® mode
display Press and hold the t

Note button. Note
The number of digits to be entered de- The number of digits to be entered de-
pends on the respective mobile phone. Pairing mobile phones using pends on the respective mobile phone.
▶ Press and hold the ; button. Bluetooth® External ▶ Press and hold the ; button until
◁ The radio is ready to be paired The pairing process starts from the mobile an acoustic signal sounds.
with the mobile phone. phone. ◁ The radio is ready to be paired
▶ On the mobile phone, select the "MB ▶ Press the button t repeatedly with the mobile phone.
Bluetooth" Bluetooth® device name. until the display shows BT PAIR or BT ▶ Start the search for Bluetooth®
▶ Enter the previously selected number EXT. devices on the mobile phone. See
on the mobile phone. ▶ Turn the control knob q clockwise. the manufacturer’s operating
◁ The radio establishes a connec- ◁ The display shows BT EXT. instructions.
tion with the mobile phone. When ▶ To prepare radio for the search:
▶ On the mobile phone, select the "MB
the connection is established, the Bluetooth" Bluetooth® device name.
Press and hold button for ;.
display shows PAIR OK briefly. ▶ Enter the previously selected number
◁ The Bluetooth® symbol ª
▶ Confirm any queries using the mobile flashes in the display.
on the mobile phone.
phone. ◁ The radio establishes a connec-
▶ Using the number keys 4
◁ The telephone data is transferred to 3 on the radio, enter an
tion with the mobile phone. When
from the mobile phone to the ra- the connection is established, the
easy-to-remember number up to six
dio. Once the transfer is finished, display shows PAIR OK briefly.
figures in length (e.g. 1234).
the display shows the current au- ▶ Confirm any queries using the mobile
dio source and the Bluetooth® The sequence of numbers begins with g. phone.
symbol ª continuously. If you press the number key 1 to 6 on ◁ The telephone data is transferred
▶ Showing the name of the mobile the radio more than once, numbers g to from the mobile phone to the ra-
phone currently connected on the v appear. dio. Once the transfer is finished,
the display shows the current au-

Bluetooth® mode
dio source and the Bluetooth® Playing back MP3 files Calling up the telephone main menu
symbol ª continuously.
▶ Press the SRC button until the display ▶ Press the 9 button on the multifunc-
▶ Showing the name of the mobile shows BT Audio. tion steering wheel.
phone currently connected on the
◁ The radio is ready to playback the ▶ Use the button u or t to scroll
display Press and hold the t
mobile phone MP3 files. to audio and communications E.
button.
▶ Starting MP3 playback on the mobile ▶ Use the r or s button to scroll
phone. to the telephone menu window.
Accepting and ending a call ◁ The radio speakers playback the ◁ The menu window will show the
When there is an incoming call, a ringtone MP3 files. provider name and the name of
can be heard via the radio speakers. The ▶ Selecting a track: Briefly press the the connected Bluetooth® mobile
display briefly shows PHONE and then the button ü or û. phone.
telephone number of the caller, if this is ▶ Press the button 9.
transmitted. ◁ The on-board computer display
Operating Bluetooth® functions via
▶ Answering a call: Press the button shows the phone book main
the multi-function steering wheel
;. menu.
▶ If desired, adjust the volume using the Accepting and ending a call ▶ Exit menu: Press the 9 or t
control knobq. ▶ Answering a call: Press the ; button.
▶ Ending/rejecting a call: Press the button on the multifunction steering
button =. wheel. Conducting a call using the phone
◁ The radio plays the current audio ▶ If desired, adjust the volume using the book
source again. control knobq. ▶ Call up the phone book main menu.
▶ Ending/rejecting a call: Press the ▶ Press the button u.
button =. ▶ Select the person you wish to call
using the r or s button.

Bluetooth® mode
◁ The Phone book line is selected. ▶ Use the button u or t to scroll

Note ▶ Select the desired call list with the to audio and communications E.
Please note, when selecting the person r or s button. ▶ Use the r or s button to se-
you wish to call: ▶ Press the button u. lect the audio submenu.
Briefly press the r or s button: ▶ Select the desired telephone number ▶ Use the u or t button to se-
Names are clicked through individually in with the r or s button. lect the BT Audio menu.
the phone book. ▶ Press the button ;. ▶ Selecting a track: Press the r
Press and hold the r or s button. button on the multifunction steering
Jumps to the next or previous initial Updating the phone book wheel.
letter. ▶ Press the button u or t.
▶ Call up the phone book main menu.
▶ Press the button ;. ◁ The Phone book line is selected. ◁ The radio plays back the previous
or next track.
If several numbers are saved for the per- ▶ Select Load phone book using the
son you wish to call: r button.
Note
▶ Press the button u.
▶ Select the desired telephone number This function depends on the re-
with the r or s button.
▶ Press the button ;. spective mobile phone.
▶ Press the ; button again. ◁ Depending on the number of
phone book entries on the mobile
phone, this process can take
Conducting a call using the call lists several minutes.
You can conduct calls using one of the
following call lists: Playing back MP3 files
● Missed calls
▶ Start MP3 playback on the mobile
● Accepted calls phone.
● Numbers called ▶ Press the 9 button on the multifunc-
▶ Call up the phone book main menu. tion steering wheel.

Pin assignment
Pin assignment 7 Eth- 5 Not in use

ernet Not in use
6 Not in use
cable
8 Power GND PIN assignment slot C2
PIN assignment slot B (speaker) 7–11 Not in use
1 Not in use 12 ext. Mute/AUX, rear
2 Not in use PIN assignment slot C3

3 Front speaker R+ 13–20 Not assigned
4 Front speaker R‐
5 Front speaker L+ Pin assignment slot FAKRA (HF connect-
or)
6 Front speaker L‐
7 Eth-
Code B, white radio aerial (FM/AM)
ernet Not in use
Connection field on the rear side
cable
PIN assignment slot A (CAN and 8 Not in use
Power)
1 CAN‐HF‐GND PIN assignment slot C
2 CAN‐L 1–10 Not in use
3 CAN‐H
PIN assignment slot C1 (AUX)
4 Battery (24 V)
1 Rear AUX R+
5 Connected 12 V output (max. 150 mA)
2 Rear AUX L+
6 Not in use
3 Rear AUX GND
4 Rear AUX (shielding)

Multimedia radio Touch
Overview and operation

Overview of Multimedia Radio Touch
Danger
Risk of accident from operating mo-
bile communication equipment while
the vehicle is in motion
Mobile communication devices distract
the driver from traffic around them. This
can also cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
▶ As a driver, only operate mobile
communication devices when the
vehicle is stationary.
▶ As a vehicle occupant, only use
mobile communication devices in
the designated area, e.g. in the rear
passenger compartment.
The legal requirements for the country in
which you are currently driving must be
observed.
In conjunction with a Bluetooth‐capable
mobile phone, it is possible to use your
phone via the multimedia system.

Overview of Multimedia Radio Touch

1 Activate/deactivate.
2 Select the frequency band.
3 Open radio menu.
4 Time
5 Open telephone display.
6 Select and connect a Bluetooth® device.
7 Call up start page.
8 Activate voice control.
9 Calls up the settings.
A Select app.
B Call up MirrorLink™ or Apple CarPlay®.
C Call up favourites.
D Call up media menu.
E Selects a media source.
F Adjusts the volume.

Basic functions
Operating the display Confirm the selection Basic functions

Move view ▶ Touch the touch-sensitive surface Switching the multimedia system
with one finger until the pressure
▶ Touch the touch-sensitive surface on/off
point is reached.
with one finger. The multimedia system is automatically
▶ Swipe up, down, left or right. ◁ A menu item or an option is se- switched on and off together with the
lected.
◁ The selection in the display vehicle’s ignition. You can also switch the
moves in accordance with the multimedia system on and off in manual
direction of movement. Open menu mode.
▶ Touch and hold the touch-sensitive ▶ Manual activation: Briefly press the
This allows you to navigate through the surface with one finger until a menu
lists or menus. button Ü.
opens.
▶ Manual deactivation: Press and hold
Moving displays quickly the Ü button.
Enlarge view
▶ Use a finger to touch the ▶ Place two fingers slightly apart on the
touch-sensitive surface and swipe touch-sensitive surface. Switch sound on or off
quickly to the left or right. ▶ Briefly press the Ü button.
▶ Spread your fingers apart.
◁ The selection in the display ◁ The view is enlarged. ◁ The sound is switched on or off.
moves quickly in accordance with
the direction of movement.
Reduce view Adjusting the volume
In this way, you can navigate in the lists
▶ Place two fingers on the ▶ Press the volume control.
and menus or move the map.
touch-sensitive surface with a greater
◁ The volume display appears.
distance between them.
▶ Increase the volume: Swipe your
▶ Pull your fingers together.
finger up on the volume control.
◁ The view is reduced.

System settings
or System settings Selecting the equaliser setting

▶ Press the upper part of the volume Sound settings Various sound profiles can be selected in
control. the equaliser, e.g. Rock, Pop or Classical.
▶ Decrease the volume: Swipe your Adjusting treble and bass settings
▶ Press the button d in the desired
finger down on the volume control. You can select different sound settings for audio mode.
the individual audio sources.
or ▶ Select Sound settings.
▶ Press the button d in the desired ▶ Select Equaliser presets.
▶ Press the lower section of the volume audio mode.
control. ▶ Select the desired setting.
▶ Select Sound settings.
▶ Implement the desired settings for Setting speed-dependent volume
Displaying and selecting bass and treble. adjustment
quick-access ▶ Press the button d in audio mode.
Setting the balance and fader
▶ Select Sound settings.
You can select different sound settings for ▶ Select Speed-dependent volume ad-
the individual audio sources. justment.
With balance and fader, the surround ▶ Select the desired setting.
sound inside the vehicle can be moved
forwards or backwards and to the right or Adjusting the AUX volume
left.
▶ Press the button d in audio mode.
▶ Press the button Ñ. ▶ Press the button d in the desired ▶ Select Sound settings.
▶ Select f. audio mode. ▶ Select AUX level.
◁ The available quick-access op- ▶ Select Sound settings. ▶ Select the desired volume level.
tions 1 are displayed. ▶ Implement the desired settings for
▶ Select the desired quick-access op- balance and fader.
tion.

System settings
Activating/deactivating system ▶ Select the desired format. ▶ To cancel: Select No.

sounds ▶ Reset: Select Yes.
▶ Press the button d in audio mode. Selecting the time zone
▶ Select Sound settings. ▶ Press the d button in the start Bluetooth® connection
▶ Select System message sound. menu.
▶ Select time settings. Requirements for a Bluetooth® con-
◁ The tick O indicates the activ- nection
ated function. ▶ Select the time zone.
▶ Select the desired time zone. You can connect Bluetooth®‐compatible
mobile phones and other audio equipment
Setting screen brightness to the multimedia system.
The brightness for day and night mode Setting the system language
To do so, the following conditions must be
can be set separately. ▶ Press the button d in the main met:
menu.
▶ Press the d button in the start ● mobile phones must support Hands
menu. ▶ Select the language. Free Profile 1.0 or above
▶ Select Display. ◁ A list of available languages ap- ● the Bluetooth® device must be loc-
pears.
▶ Select Brightness. ated inside the vehicle in the vicinity
▶ Set the desired brightness.
▶ Select the desired language. of the multimedia system
● every Bluetooth® device must have
Resetting to factory settings its own Bluetooth® name, which you
Date and time settings can assign yourself
This function returns the multimedia sys-
Selecting the date and time format ● Bluetooth® must be activated on
tem settings to the factory settings. This
▶ On the home page, select the d both the multimedia system and on
will delete all personal settings.
button. the respective Bluetooth® device
▶ Press the button d in the main ● the Bluetooth® device must be visible
▶ Select time settings. menu. for the multimedia system
▶ Select date format or time format. ▶ Select Reset to factory settings.

System settings
● the Bluetooth® device must support Depending on the Bluetooth® device automatically connected to the
the audio profile A2DP used, a pairing code has to be entered multimedia system.
into the Bluetooth® device or a prompt
Notes on activating or deactivating confirmed on the Bluetooth® device for Note
Bluetooth® authorisation. You can authorise up to ten
Bluetooth® is activated as standard and The search has to be started from the Bluetooth® devices at the
cannot be deactivated. If Connect new Bluetooth® device. same time. If you have already
device is selected, the multimedia system authorised ten Bluetooth®
▶ Select 1. devices, one Bluetooth® device
is automatically visible for five minutes to
◁ A list appears with Bluetooth® must be deauthorised before a
other Bluetooth® devices.
devices that have already been new Bluetooth® device can be
authorised. authorised ( → Page 193).
Searching for and authorising a ▶ Select Add device.
Bluetooth® device
◁ The multimedia system is visible Connecting a Bluetooth® device
to other Bluetooth® devices for
An already authorised Bluetooth® device
five minutes.
can be connected to the multimedia sys-
▶ Start a search for other Bluetooth®
tem either manually or automatically.
devices on the Bluetooth® device
After switching on, the multimedia sys-
(see the manufacturer's operating
tem attempts to connect automatically to
instructions).
the last connected Bluetooth® device.
▶ Select the multimedia system on the
When connecting your Bluetooth® device Bluetooth® device.
with the multimedia system for the first ▶ Observe any messages on the
time, you must search for the Bluetooth® Bluetooth® device and on the
device and then authorise it. multimedia system.
◁ After authorisation, the
Bluetooth® device is

Voice control
Deauthorising a Bluetooth® device Voice control

Starting voice control
The voice control should not be used in an
emergency situation, as the sound of the
voice may change in stressful situations.
Note
▶ Manual connection: 1 must be Voice control is not available in all lan-
selected.
▶ Select 1. guages.
◁ A list appears with Bluetooth®
devices that have already been
◁ A list appears with Bluetooth®
devices that have already been Note
authorised.
authorised. Make sure that the voice output is clear
▶ Select the desired Bluetooth® device
from the list.
▶ 2 next to the Bluetooth® device to and loud enough so that the multimedia
be deauthorised. system can recognise your voice com-
◁ The Bluetooth® device is connec-
ted to the multimedia system.
◁ A prompt appears asking whether mand correctly.
the Bluetooth® device should be
deauthorised. Note
▶ To not deauthorise: Select No. Note that driving noises, e.g. due to
▶ To de-authorise: Select Yes. open side windows or other noises in
◁ The Bluetooth® device is deau- the driver’s cab, may interfere with voice
thorised and deleted from the control.
list of authorised Bluetooth®
devices.

Telephone
Note Note Ending voice control

The multimedia system can also recog- If voice control does not support the You can end voice control at any time.
nise a voice command if you use certain set system language, a corresponding ▶ Say the Cancel voice command.
terms with the same meaning or simil- message appears. Voice control cannot or
ar formulations, e.g. “Tune” instead of be activated.
“Radio”. Use the terms and phrases that ▶ Press the button ò.
are displayed on the screen or spoken
by the multimedia system. This ensures Saying voice commands
Telephone
that the multimedia system recognises ▶ Say a possible voice command.
the desired voice command. ◁ The multimedia system repeats Information about on Bluetooth®
the recognised voice command telephony
Note and executes the function. If
the multimedia system does not Danger
You cannot activate voice control during
an incoming call or an ongoing phone recognise the voice command, Risk of accident from operating mo-
call. the Please say a voice command bile communication equipment while
message appears. the vehicle is in motion
▶ Press the button £. ▶ Repeat the voice command or say Mobile communication devices distract
◁ The current audio source is another possible voice command. the driver from traffic around them. This
muted. A menu with the possible ◁ If the multimedia system does can also cause the driver to lose control
voice commands for the current not recognise the voice com- of the vehicle.
main function appears on the mand again, it offers you some
screen. A tone indicates that the ▶ As a driver, only operate mobile
voice commands from the current communication devices when the
voice control system is ready. menu or announces Cancel and vehicle is stationary.
ends voice control.
▶ As a vehicle occupant, only use
mobile communication devices in

Telephone
the designated area, e.g. in the rear 5 Call up keypad Notes on emergency number 112
passenger compartment.
An emergency call without entering a PIN
The legal requirements for the country in can only be made directly via the mobile
which you are currently driving must be Telephone operation phone.
observed. Notes on call disconnections when The emergency number 112 is public. Any
In conjunction with a Bluetooth‐capable the vehicle is in motion misuse is punishable by law.
mobile phone, it is possible to use your The following could be the cause of call
phone via the multimedia system. disconnection: Selecting the telephone number
● The GSM1 network coverage is insuffi- ▶ Call up the telephone display.
cient. ▶ Select the numeric keypad.
Telephone menu overview
● The vehicle has moved into a GSM ▶ Enter the telephone number.
cell with no free channels.
▶ Select calls.
● The SIM card used is not compatible
with the network available.
Calling a contact
● You are using a mobile phone with
"Twincard" and the mobile phone with ▶ Call up the telephone display.
the second SIM card is already logged ▶ Select the contacts.
on to the network. ▶ Select the desired contact.
Telephone menu 1
Global System for Mobile Communica-
1 Select an authorised Bluetooth® device or tion – D network Dialling phone numbers from a call
connect a new Bluetooth® device list
2 Call lists (dialled, answered and missed calls) ▶ Call up the telephone display.
3 Status bar (connected mobile phone, charge ▶ Select Calls.
level) ▶ Select the desired entry.
4 Call up contacts

Radio mode
Accepting a call SMS functions ▶ Select telephone settings.

▶ Select 6. If the function is switched on and a new ▶ Select the desired option.
text message is received, a corresponding ◁ The tick O indicates the activ-
message appears. ated option
Rejecting a call
▶ Select ~.
Radio mode
Functions during a call Overview of radio menu
SMS functions
1 Display the SMS.
2 Read out the SMS.
Functions available during a call Radio menu
3 Close the message.
1 Active call 1 Selecting the frequency band
4 Call the sender.
2 Call duration 2 Call up last media display
3 To accept another call or switch between 3 Call up last telephone display
active calls Selecting telephone options
4 Call up last app display
4 To display the keypad The following options are available:
5 To end the call ● Displaying incoming SMS messages 5 Calls up the list of stations
To transfer the call from the hands‐free

● Using the telephone ringtone 6 Set frequency manually
6 7
system to the mobile phone ▶ In telephone mode, press the button Start automatic station search
7 To switch the microphone on or off d. 8 Call up stored stations

Radio mode
Setting radio options ▶ In radio mode press the d button. Save stations automatically
The radio stations can provide inaudible ▶ Select radio settings. There is an automatic station memory for
additional information with the Radio Data ▶ Select the desired option. the AM, FM and DAB frequency bands
System (RDS). (AM‐AST, FM‐AST and DAB‐AST).
If the traffic reports (TA) function is Storing radio stations The Autostore (AST) function automatic-
switched on, the multimedia system ally assigns receivable radio stations to
Storing stations manually
switches to a traffic report station for the the six station presets of the AST ranges.
duration of a traffic report in the following The order of the radio stations is determ-
cases: ined by the reception quality.
● If a station without traffic information ▶ Set the desired frequency band.
is activated. ▶ Select AST.
● If another audio source is activated. ◁ The six radio stations with the
With RDS switched on, the radio tries strongest signal are sought and
to ensure optimum reception with the stored automatically.
assistance of alternative frequencies (AF). ▶ Set the desired frequency band.
Poor reception conditions can lead to un- ▶ Select the desired station.
desired and disruptive frequency changes. ▶ Select the desired preset 1 and
In that case, deactivate AF station track- press and hold.
ing. ◁ The station is stored in the selec-
ted preset.
The following options are available:
● Alternative frequency search
● Display radio text
● Regional programme
● Displaying traffic reports

Media
Media MirrorLink Note

Overview of media menu Information on MirrorLink™ Some applications are deactivated while
MirrorLink™ is a standard for the connec- driving.
tion between the multimedia system and
your mobile phone. MirrorLink™ allows
the content of the display of your mo- Connecting a mobile phone via Mir-
bile phone to be shown in the multimedia rorLink™
system. Audio content from your mobile Requirements
phone can also be played back in the mul-
● The mobile phone supports
timedia system.
Media menu MirrorLink™ version 1.1 and above.
MirrorLink™ is available for mobile ● A MirrorLink™ certified app is in-
1 Selects a media source. phones with the Android operating stalled on the mobile phone. An In-
2 Display of the current media source system. The availability of MirrorLink™ ternet connection is necessary for
3 Media information (artist/track/album) and MirrorLink™apps may vary depending regular updates.
4 Display of track list or media information on the country. The support of buttons in ● The full range of functions for Mir-
the vehicle depends on the mobile phone rorLink™ is only possible with an In-
5 Display of remaining time
and the available apps. ternet connection.
6 Start next track or fast forward.
The service provider is responsible for this ● The mobile phone is connected to the
7 Pause or start playback.
application and the services and content multimedia system using a suitable
8 Start previous track or fast rewind. connected to it. connecting cable.
9 Switch random playback on/off ● For the telephone functions, the
A Repeat track, list or album. mobile phone is connected via
B Display of the played time Bluetooth® with the multimedia
system.

Apple CarPlay®
▶ Activate MirrorLink™ on the mobile The availability of Apple CarPlay® may

phone (see the manufacturer's oper- Note vary according to the country.
ating instructions). Every manufacturer has a different
The service provider is responsible for this
▶ Connect the mobile phone via a suit- interpretation of the MirrorLink™
application and the services and content
able connecting cable to the USB protocol. Therefore, the behaviour
connected to it.
port. can also vary.
Note Connecting an iPhone® via Apple

Calling up MirrorLink™ apps
Better MirrorLink™ performance is CarPlay®
▶ Select MirrorLink™ on the homepage.
achieved if the multimedia system Requirements
◁ The available apps are shown on
and mobile phone are connected
the multimedia system display. ● Apple CarPlay® can be used with the
with the original USB connection
cable.
▶ Select the desired app. Apple® operating system version iOS
8.3 or above.
▶ Connect the mobile phone to the ● The full range of functions for Apple
multimedia system via Bluetooth® Apple CarPlay®
CarPlay® is only available with an
( → Page 192). Information about Apple CarPlay® Internet connection.
◁ MirrorLink™ starts automatically. Apple CarPlay® allows iPhone® functions ● The mobile phone is connected to the
Apps that have been certified for to be used via the multimedia system. multimedia system using a suitable
MirrorLink™ are displayed on the connecting cable.
multimedia system screen. Only Only one mobile phone at a time can be
one mobile phone at a time can connected via Apple CarPlay® to the ▶ Activate Apple CarPlay® on the mo-
be connected via MirrorLink™ to multimedia system. bile phone (see the manufacturer's
the multimedia system. While using Apple CarPlay®, various func- operating instructions).
tions of the multimedia system, e.g. the ▶ Connect the mobile phone via a suit-
telephony and Bluetooth® audio and able connecting cable to the USB
iPod® media sources are not available. port.

Apple CarPlay®
◁ Apple CarPlay® starts automatic-

ally.

Truck Data Center
Information about Truck Data Centre
Information about Truck Data Centre Overview of the card reader for the Note
The Truck Data Centre is the telematics Truck Data Center
If the Truck Data Center is not activated,
control unit of Daimler Truck AG. It en- the LED indicator lamp is not lit up.
ables the transmission of all data gener-
ated by the vehicle and driver. LED indicator lamp displays
In addition to the Truck Data Centre, a val- LED indicator lamp Meaning
id framework agreement with a respective The card reader for the
service booking is also required for use of Truck Data Center is
Flashes green starting.
digital services.
The process can last
Card reader several minutes.
Information on the card reader for 1 Status LED Flashes green until the
card reader for the The card reader for the
the Truck Data Center 2 Service Call button Truck Data Center has Truck Data Center is
The card reader for Truck Data Center 3 Event Call button booted up and then operational.
enables driver identification from the goes out.
4 Home Call button
Fleetboard DriverCard in the vehicle. The card reader for the
5 Card slot Truck Data Center has
Pressing the buttons on the right‐hand detected a fault and is
side of the front panel displays Fleetboard no longer operational.
Lights up continuously
Home and Event Call services. The Service LED indicator lamp display in red
Turn the vehicle off and
Call button can be used in conjunction then on again.
The status of the Truck Data Center com- If the problem persists:
with Mercedes‐Benz Uptime and provides
puter can be seen from the LED indicator Call Mercedes‐Benz
assistance for a responsive S24h call‐out. Trucks Support.
lamp beside the card slot.

Truck Data Center
Reading out the Fleetboard DriverCard
Reading out the Fleetboard Driver- 1 with your fingers. Otherwise, faults Sending messages
Card might occur when reading the memory
With the card reader for the Truck Data
chip 1.
Center, there are three different mes-
▶ Switch the ignition lock to the drive sages that you can send.
position. ▶ Switch the ignition lock to the drive
Before beginning the journey/trip: position.
▶ Insertion of the driver card: Insert
the Fleetboard driver card with the Note
lettering facing upwards and memory The Truck Data Centre computer is
chip 1 facing towards the card slot operational when the LED indicator
2 until it engages. lamp on the Fleetboard vehicle com-
puter permanently lights up green.
Note ▶ To send a Home or Event Call mes-
If the Fleetboard DriverCard is in- sage: Press the button Ñ or /
serted incorrectly, a warning tone on the card reader for the Truck Data
sounds five times in quick succes- Center.
sion. ◁ The card reader for the Truck
DriverCard Data Center generates the data
After the end of the journey/trip:
1 Fleetboard DriverCard memory chip which is to be sent; this may take
▶ Removal of the driver card: Pull a few seconds.
2 Card slot the Fleetboard DriverCard out of the ▶ Send a Service Call message/run
The Fleetboard DriverCard is used bracket. telediagnostics: Press the button
to uniquely identify the driver for F on the card reader for the Truck
driver‐related evaluation. Do not touch Data Center for approximately two
the contact surfaces of the memory chip seconds.

Truck Data Center
Connectivity services
◁ The LED indicator lamp flashes Mercedes-Benz Truck App Portal

orange: The card reader for the
You can obtain further information on the
Truck Data Center generates the
Mercedes‐Benz Truck App Portal website:
data which is to be sent; This may
take some time. Leave the igni- https://truck-app-portal.mercedes-benz-
tion switched on while the data trucks.com/#/customer
is being sent. The LED indicator Wi‐Fi must be switched on in order to use
lamp briefly flashes green when the Mercedes‐Benz Truck App portal.
the message has been success-
fully sent.
Fleetboard
If the LED indicator lamp briefly lights up
Further information can be obtained from
red, the message has not been sent:
https://www.fleetboard.com
▶ Change the vehicle location.
▶ Send the message again.
Connectivity services
Mercedes-Benz Uptime
Further information can be found under
http://www.uptime-info.mercedes-
benz.com
or an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
Service Centre.

Driving mode
Driver assistance/driving safety systems and your responsibility
Driver assistance/driving safety sys- If the sensor detection ranges are partially
or completely covered, deactivate the Danger
tems and your responsibility
following driver assistance and driving Risk of injury from unsecured items
Please bear in mind that the driver assist- in the vehicle
safety systems manually:
ance/driving safety systems described
here can only reduce the risk of accidents ● Active Brake Assist ( → Page 280) If objects, luggage, or loads are not se-
● Proximity Control Assist cured or not secured sufficiently, they
within system limits and the laws of phys-
( → Page 266) could slip, tip over, or be thrown around
ics.
● Lane Keeping Assist ( → Page 292) and thereby hit vehicle occupants.
Poor road and weather conditions as well
● Frontguard Assist ( → Page 274) There is a risk of injury, particularly in
as certain traffic situations can impair
the function of driver assistance/driving ● Sideguard Assist/Active Sideguard the event of braking manoeuvres or
safety systems. Assist ( → Page 294) abrupt changes in direction!
Driver assistance/driving safety systems ▶ Always stow objects in such a way

are only aids. They cannot replace your Driving that they cannot be thrown around.
awareness of your surroundings and do ▶ Before the journey, secure objects,
Notes on preparing for a journey luggage, or loads against slipping or
not relieve you of your responsibility un-
der road traffic laws. Please note that all electronic safety sys- tipping over.
tems in the vehicle merely serve to assist
Pay attention to the traffic conditions at you. They do not relieve you of the oblig- Danger
all times and intervene when necessary. ation to carry out a visual check of the Risk of accident due to objects in the
Vehicles with fittings for front attach- vehicle and the trailer/semitrailer before driver's footwell
ments (code C5O) starting a journey.
Objects in the driver's footwell may im-
It is possible that front attachments, e.g. pede pedal travel, or block a depressed
a temporarily fitted front mounting plate, pedal.
can partially or entirely cover the sensors' This compromises the operating and
detection range. road safety of the vehicle.

Driving mode
Driving
▶ Stow all objects in the vehicle se- Preparing for a journey ● Tyre tread depth
curely so that they cannot get into ● The wheels are fitted securely
the driver's footwell. Visual and functional inspection of
▶ Always ensure that there is suffi- the vehicle exterior
cient clearance for the pedals. The following checks must be performed
▶ Always install the floor mats se- on the towing vehicle and on the trailer or
curely and as specified. semitrailer before starting a journey:
▶ Do not use loose floor mats, and do ▶ Check the vehicle for leaks.
not place floor mats on top of one ▶ Make sure that the licence plate num-
another. ber, vehicle lighting, turn signals, and
brake lights are not dirty or damaged.
Danger
Danger of accident due to uneven Note
loading The lamp check of the electronic key Decoupling element between the engine and the exhaust
The driving characteristics, as well as helps you check the vehicle lighting pipe (example)
steering and braking characteristics, ( → Page 47). ▶ Check the decoupling element of
may be greatly impaired. the exhaust system 1 for visible
▶ Check that the outline markings of all
▶ Load the vehicle evenly. attachments and add-on equipment damage, e.g. cracks.
▶ Secure the load against sliding. are in good condition.
▶ Check the wheels and tyres Note
( → Page 458). The decoupling element is a part
subject to wear and must be
When doing so, observe the following: checked regularly.
● General condition Vehicles with BlueTec® 4, 5, 6:
● Visible damage and cracks The decoupling element must be
● Tyre pressure replaced immediately if there is

Driving mode
Driving
damage and/or leaks. Traces of rectly. Observe the separate operat- ▶ Check that the first-aid kit is usable
soot on the decoupling element ing instructions issued by the manu- at regular intervals. Note the use-by
signify leakage. facturer for the operation, care, and dates of the contents.
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is loaded maintenance of the fifth-wheel/trailer ▶ Have the fire extinguisher checked
coupling. Have all faults and dam- every one to two years.
correctly.
▶ Make sure that the dropside and
age rectified. If necessary, have the ▶ The fire extinguisher must be refilled
causes determined and rectified at a after each use.
exterior flaps are locked securely and
not damaged. When transporting emergency equipment,
▶ Fold/push in and lock the Check the emergency please observe the legal requirements of
folding/extendable steps before equipment/first-aid kit the country you are currently in.
driving.
▶ Move the folding underride guard to Checking the vehicle illumination
Note
the on-road position. system
You will find an overview of emergency
▶ Fit and secure the mudguard centre equipment and first‐aid kits in the ▶ Switch on the vehicle.
part when operating the vehicle "Breakdown assistance" section ◁ If a bulb on the towing vehicle
without a semitrailer. ( → Page 414). is faulty, the instrument cluster
▶ Fold down the mud flaps. shows the display messages
▶ In wintry conditions, remove accu-
▶ Check the following emergency equip- b and s for the towing
ment to make sure that it is access- vehicle.
mulations of snow and ice from the
ible, complete, and fully-functional.
towing vehicle and trailer/semitrailer ▶ Check the vehicle lighting, turn signal
( → Page 364). ● High visibility vest lamps, and brake lights on the towing
▶ Make sure that cables and ● Warning triangle vehicle and trailer/semitrailer with
compressed-air lines are connected ● Warning beacon the help of a second person.
properly ( → Page 349). ● First‐aid kit or
▶ Make sure that the fifth-wheel/trailer ● Fire extinguisher
coupling is locked and secured cor-

Driving mode
Driving
▶ Check the vehicle lighting using Information on retrofitting the alco-

the vehicle key lamp check Note
hol tester with immobiliser
( → Page 47). Information on operating the alcohol
The retrofit is prescribed as part of the tester has been specified in the vehicle's
▶ Replace the faulty bulbs General Safety Regulation and provides operating instructions.
( → Page 103). for a standardised interface in the cab,
which is intended for the connection of a
Checking levels of fuel and AdBlue® breathalyser from third‐party providers. Notes on the ignition lock
▶ Check the fuel and AdBlue® By retrofitting an alcohol tester, compan-
level shown on the fuel display ies can prevent the vehicle from being Danger
( → Page 143) and on the AdBlue® put into operation without a successful Risk of accident and injury due to
display ( → Page 142). breathalyser test being completed. children left unattended in the
▶ If necessary, refuel and top up with vehicle
AdBlue® ( → Page 341). Note If you leave children unattended in the
Country‐specific regulations may pre- vehicle, some of the things that might
Checking the engine oil level happen include:
scribe or permit a bypass switch for the
▶ Check the engine oil level before the alcohol tester. This can be used in an ● They may open doors, thereby endan-
start of every journey ( → Page 163). emergency to start the vehicle without gering other persons or road users.
carrying out a breathalyser test. ● They may get out and be struck by
Note oncoming traffic.
No information concerning the en- Note
gine oil level will be displayed while ● They may operate vehicle equipment
Further information on retrofitting an and become trapped.
you are driving. alcohol tester with immobiliser can
In addition, children could also set the
be obtained from an authorised Mer-
vehicle in motion, for example, by:
cedes‐Benz Trucks Service Centre.
● Releasing the parking brake.

Driving mode
Driving
● Changing the transmission position. ▶ For this reason alone, you should
● Starting the vehicle. never switch off the vehicle while
you are driving.
the vehicle. Danger
▶ When leaving the vehicle, always Risk of accident due to the key inad-
take the key with you and lock the
vertently turning in the ignition lock
vehicle.
If heavy or large objects are attached to
▶ Keep the key out of the reach of
the key, the key may inadvertently turn
children.
within the ignition lock.
Danger ▶ Do not attach large or heavy objects
Risk of accident when the vehicle is to the key. Ignition lock on the cockpit
switched off while driving ▶ Remove the key from a bulky bunch Ignition lock
If during an emergency you switch off of keys before inserting it into the g Insert/remove the vehicle key
the vehicle while you are driving, safety- ignition lock. 1 Steering wheel unlocked/radio position
relevant functions will be restricted or no Key positions of the mechanical igni- 2 Vehicle switched on/drive position
longer available. tion lock 3 Vehicle start/start position
This may affect the power steering sys-
tem and the brake force boosting, for ex- Vehicles with the ignition lock on the
ample. steering column: When you remove the
key in position g, the steering is locked.
You will then need to exert considerably
more power when steering and braking,
for example.
Ignition lock on the steering column

Driving mode
Driving
3 Start position – the vehicle is started. The power supply is switched off again
when one of the following conditions is
If you the press start/stop button 2 met:
when the brake is not depressed, the ig- ● You open the driver's or co‐driver's
nition lock will switch to the next switch door.
position. If you press the start/stop but- ● Press the button 2 twice.
ton in switch position 2, the ignition lock
will switch to switch position g. To switch on the vehicle, press the button
2 twice. When the vehicle is switched
If you press start/stop button 2 when on, the indicator lamps in the instrument
the vehicle is stationary and has been cluster light up.
started, the vehicle will switch off.
The vehicle is switched off again if one of
Electronic ignition lock (example) Radio position/power supply/drive the following conditions is met:
Switch positions of the electronic igni- position ● You do not start the vehicle within
tion lock Requirements 30 minutes.
Electronic ignition lock ● The key is in the vehicle. ● Press the button 2 once.
1 Key ● The key battery is charged.
2 Start/stop button To switch the ignition lock to the radio po- Note
sition, press the button 2 once without If the vehicle is switched off automatic-
The ignition lock has the following depressing the brake pedal. In the radio ally, vehicle lighting switched on by the
switch positions: position, the power supply is switched on automatic driving lights is also switched
g The vehicle is switched off. for some consumers. off.
1 Radio position – the power supply for
some consumers is switched on.
If necessary, switch the vehicle illumina-
tion system on manually ( → Page 95).
2 Drive position – the vehicle is switched
on.

Driving mode
Driving
Engine run-on be automatically started and stopped

Note by the body electronics. This is the case
In an emergency, you can switch off Danger regardless of whether or not the cab is
the vehicle while driving. To do this, Risk of accident due to the vehicle locked. This function ensures that the
press the button 2 for about three roll-starting unintentionally desired temperature is maintained when
seconds or press the button 2 three If you use the engine run-on function, the vehicle is stationary.
times within three seconds. Be sure to the vehicle may roll-start unintentionally If the vehicle is started by the body
observe the safety instructions at the if crawler mode is activated and the electronics, the transmission remains
beginning of this chapter. start-off gear is engaged. blocked. This means that the vehicle
Ignition run-on ▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. continues to be protected against theft.
The ignition run‐on function is only avail- ▶ Apply the parking brake.
able in combination with an electronic
The engine run‐on function is only avail- Start the vehicle
ignition lock.
able in combination with an electronic
The ignition run‐on function allows you ignition lock. Danger
to leave the vehicle switched on and Risk of fatal injuries due to exhaust
take the key out of the vehicle with you. The engine run‐on function allows you to
leave the engine running while the vehicle gases
This means you can leave and lock the
is stationary and take the key out of the Combustion engines emit poisonous
cab when the vehicle is switched on,
vehicle with you. This means you can exhaust gases, such as carbon monox-
for example. The ignition run‐on func-
lock the cab and operate power take‐offs ide. Breathing in these exhaust gases is
tion is limited to a maximum duration
or use the level control system in work hazardous to health and results in pois-
of 60 minutes. The ignition lock then
mode, for example. oning.
switches to position g and the vehicle
switches off. Automatic engine start/stop for refri- ▶ Do not leave the engine and, if in-
gerated vehicles (code E4E) stalled, the auxiliary heating, running
For refrigerated truck bodies which are in an enclosed space without suffi-
powered by the engine, the vehicle can cient ventilation.

Driving mode
Driving
▶ Press and hold the brake or apply the ted after 20 seconds and repeated after
parking brake. Note approximately one minute.
▶ Switch on the vehicle. The idle speed is increased at very low
After three starting procedures, take a
◁ The display check of the instru- outside temperatures or during diesel
break of about three minutes.
ment cluster starts. particulate filter regeneration.
Vehicles with an electronic ignition lock:
▶ Check the engine oil level
Note If the vehicle does not start and the Hold
( → Page 163).
key on contact point as described in the
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. On vehicles with engines OM 470 and
Operating Instructions display message
▶ Deactivate the power take-off OM 471, an increased operating noise
is displayed in the instrument cluster,
( → Page 372). occurs when the engine is cold and dur-
the vehicle can be started in emergency
▶ Switch off the cargo liftgate, see the ing manual regeneration of the diesel
mode.
separate operating instructions. particulate filter.
▶ Vehicles with engine preheating: In Start the vehicle in emergency opera-
outside temperatures below -20 °C, Note tion mode
preheat the engine before starting Depending on the equipment, the start- ▶ Hold the vehicle key to the right next
( → Page 136). ing procedure is automatically interrup- to the Start/Stop button and press
▶ Press and hold the start/stop button ted for the following vehicles: the Start/Stop button.
or turn the key to the start position in For vehicles with the OM 936 engine, ▶ If the vehicle starts up: Have the
the ignition lock. Do not depress the after approx. 60 seconds. vehicle key checked at a qualified
accelerator pedal while doing so. workshop.
For vehicles with OM 470, OM 471
and OM 473 engines, after approx. ▶ If the vehicle does not start: Consult a
40 seconds. qualified specialist workshop.
For vehicles with the OM 460 engine,
the starting procedure must be interrup-

Driving mode
Driving
Notes on automatic engine speed high operating temperature is necessary. The display message disappears after
increase If the operating temperature e.g. at very approximately 30 minutes.
low outside temperatures for a longer The automatic engine speed increase
Danger period of time, the engine speed is in- does not regenerate the diesel particulate
Risk of fire from hot exhaust system creased automatically. This leads to in- filter.
components creased operating noises.
The automatic engine speed increase BlueTec® 5 vehicles (with code M5S)
Flammable materials, such as leaves,
grass or twigs, may ignite. starts when the following conditions are If the display messageÂRotational
met: speed increase appears in the instrument
▶ Park the vehicle such that no flam-
mable materials can come into con- ● The vehicle is switched off with the cluster, the process is started.
tact with hot vehicle parts. engine running and the parking brake The engine speed is increased to approx-
applied.
▶ In particular, do not park on dry imately 1400 1/min for a maximum of
grassland or harvested grain fields. ● The operating temperature of the 60 minutes and the engine also works
catalytic converter was not reached against the engine brake.
within approximately five hours.
Note When the operating temperature of the
Damage due to hot exhaust gases If you release the parking brake or engage catalytic converter has been reached
During the automatic engine speed in- a gear, the process is cancelled. and the process is complete, the display
crease, very hot exhaust gases escape message disappears and the engine runs
BlueTec® 6 vehicles at idle speed again.
from the exhaust tailpipe.
If the display messageÂRotational If the operating temperature of the cata-
▶ Keep a minimum distance of one speed increase appears in the instrument
metre away from other objects, such lytic converter has not been reached after
cluster, the process is started. 60 minutes, the display message disap-
as parked vehicles.
This is performed at increased engine pears and the process restarts after a
In order to reduce deposits of unburned speeds. break of approximately four hours.
hydrocarbon (fuel) in the catalytic con-
verter of the exhaust system, a sufficiently

Driving mode
Driving
Safety checks ▶ Vehicles without BlueTec® exhaust ▶ Do not set the vehicle in motion or
gas after-treatment: Check the supply stop the vehicle as soon as possible,
Checking the supply pressure in the pressure on the display in the instru- paying attention to surrounding road
compressed-air brake system ment cluster. and traffic conditions. Pay attention
▶ With BlueTec® vehicles: In the in- to the traffic conditions.
Danger
strument cluster, open the Check ▶ Consult a qualified workshop imme-
Risk of accident due to leaking info menu ã, menu window Reserve diately to have the compressed‐air
compressed-air brake system pressure ( → Page 163) and check system repaired.
If a compressed-air brake system is the current supply pressure.
The supply pressure in the transmis-
leaking or there is insufficient reserve ▶ Observe the display messages and sion/clutch circuit is only replenished
pressure, it will not be possible to brake the indicator lamps in the status area after brake circuits 1 and 2. If the sup-
the vehicle. of the instrument cluster for the supply pressure in the transmission/clutch
▶ Only set the vehicle in motion if the ply pressure and the compressed-air circuit is too low, the instrument cluster
necessary reserve pressures are brake system. shows the display message9 Trans-
reached. mission/clutch reservoir pressure too
▶ In case of a loss of pressure while Checking supply pressure in the low.
driving, immediately stop the vehicle transmission/clutch circuit
▶ Start the vehicle and wait until the
safely. Pay attention to the traffic display message disappears.
conditions. Danger
▶ Consult a qualified specialist work- Risk of accident due to low supply
shop as soon as possible. pressure
In the event of pressure loss or if the
▶ Check the compressed-air brake
supply pressure in the transmission/
system for leaks ( → Page 218).
coupling circuit is too low, you will no
▶ Start the vehicle and wait until the longer be able to shift gear.
J warning lamp in the instrument
cluster goes out.

Driving mode
Driving
Check the function of the ▶ Press the ring 2 on the drain valve
compressed-air dryer 1 upwards and drain the condens-
ate.
Danger ▶ If a large amount of condensation
Risk of accident due to an excess- runs out, have the compressed-air
ively high condensation level brake system checked at a qualified
If the condensation level in the specialist workshop.
compressed-air reservoirs is too high, Vehicles with condensation monitor-
the braking effect may be reduced, or ing:
the compressed-air brake system may
fail. If it is detected that there are too few re-
generation phases, the instrument cluster
▶ Check the compressed‐air system Drain valve on the compressed-air reservoir
will show display message 8 Condens-
for condensation before starting a ▶ Start the vehicle. ation in compressed-air reservoir.
journey. ▶ Check the reservoir pressure in
▶ If the compressed‐air brake system the compressed-air brake system
Check the vehicle height
has an excessively high condensa- ( → Page 163).
tion level, have it checked at a qual- ▶ If the instrument cluster shows the Danger
ified specialist workshop as soon as red display message Brake supply
Risk of accident due to lowered or
possible. pressure in circuit 1 too low and/
raised chassis
or Brake supply pressure in circuit 2
too low: Leave the vehicle switched The braking and handling characteristics
on until the red display messages may be greatly impaired. The permitted
disappear. vehicle height may be exceeded.
◁ The compressed-air system is ▶ Set the driving level before you set
filled. off.
▶ Switch off the vehicle.

Driving mode
Driving
If the indicator lamp ¸ lights up in the away in the "Turbo retarder clutch"
instrument cluster, this means the chassis Note section ( → Page 245).
is not at driving level. Damage to the power steering due to ▶ If the drive wheels spin when pulling
overload
▶ Set driving level ( → Page 309). away, switch on the starting-off aid
◁ The indicator lamp ¸ in the If, for example, the wheels are touching ( → Page 314).
instrument cluster goes out.
a kerb, holding the steering at the stop ▶ Test the brakes when moving off. Pay
for too long or turning the steering wheel attention to the traffic situation.
too forcefully could cause the steering to ▶ If you notice a reduction in braking
Notes on pulling away be damaged or malfunction. power when testing the brakes, stop
▶ Do not hold the steering wheel in the vehicle as soon as possible while
Note paying attention to traffic conditions.
the fully turned position for longer
Engine damage due to low oil pres- than ten seconds. Have the braking system checked
sure ▶ Do not steer too forcefully if the and repaired at a qualified specialist
The engine needs a short time to build wheels are close to objects. workshop.
up the necessary oil pressure after start-
ing, especially if it is cold. There is a risk Vehicles with automated manual
of increased wear and engine damage if transmission and without turbo retarder Notes on stopping and switching off
the oil pressure is insufficient. clutch: The vehicle has a selectable the engine
crawler mode. When crawler mode is
▶ Before driving off or increasing the activated, the vehicle automatically crawls Danger
engine speed, let the engine run in forwards after the service brake has Risk of fire from hot exhaust system
neutral for a short time. been released, and continues to roll at components
▶ Avoid high engine speeds if the idle speed. You can find information on Flammable materials, such as leaves,
engine is cold. crawler mode in the "Automated manual grass or twigs, may ignite.
transmission" section ( → Page 232).
▶ Vehicles with turbo retarder clutch:
Observe the information on pulling

Driving mode
Driving
▶ Park the vehicle such that no flam- ● They may open doors, thereby endan-
mable materials can come into con- Danger gering other persons or road users.
tact with hot vehicle parts. Risk of accident when the vehicle is
● They may get out and be struck by
▶ In particular, do not park on dry switched off while driving
oncoming traffic.
grassland or harvested grain fields. If during an emergency you switch off
the vehicle while you are driving, safety- ● They may operate vehicle equipment
relevant functions will be restricted or no and become trapped.
Danger
longer available. In addition, children could also set the
Risk of accident on uphill or downhill
This may affect the power steering sys- vehicle in motion, for example, by:
slopes
The parking brake may not be sufficient tem and the brake force boosting, for ex- ● Releasing the parking brake.
to secure the vehicle on uphill and down- ample. ● Changing the transmission position.
hill slopes. You will then need to exert considerably ● Starting the vehicle.
A loaded vehicle or a vehicle with a trail- more power when steering and braking,
er/semitrailer may roll away. for example. ▶ Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
▶ In the check position, check wheth- ▶ For this reason alone, you should ▶ When leaving the vehicle, always
er the braking force of the parking never switch off the vehicle while take the key with you and lock the
brake alone is sufficient to hold the you are driving. vehicle.
complete vehicle. ▶ Keep the key out of the reach of
▶ Generally, secure the towing vehicle Danger children.
and trailer/semitrailer with the park- Risk of accident and injury due to
ing brake and, additionally, with children left unattended in the If children are being transported in the
chocks. vehicle vehicle, please observe the additional
notes/instructions ( → Page 41).
If you leave children unattended in the
vehicle, some of the things that might You can find information on crawler mode
happen include: in the "Automated manual transmission"
section ( → Page 236).

Driving mode
Brakes
Vehicles with automated manual trans- Stopping and switching off the en- Brakes
mission: gine
Notes on the brake system
After the vehicle has been halted with Stopping when crawler mode is activ- Always observe the information in
crawler mode activated, the vehicle be- ated the yellow or red display messages
gins to crawl again in the following cases:
To prevent the vehicle from roll‐starting ( → Page 496) shown in the instrument
● The transmission is not shifted to
when crawler mode is activated, observe cluster when there is a malfunction in the
neutral.
the following: brake system. In addition, an indicator
● The parking brake is not applied. lamp lights up in the status area of the
● The service brake is released again. ▶ Stop the vehicle. instrument cluster and a warning tone
▶ Apply the parking brake. may sound. Have the brake system
In the following situations, leave the sta-
tionary vehicle switched on for approx-
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. checked and repaired at a qualified
imately two additional minutes before specialist workshop.
Switching off the vehicle
switching it off: The vehicle is equipped with an electronic
● The vehicle has been driven for a pro- ▶ Turn the key back in the ignition lock
braking system (EBS) when it leaves the
longed period with the turbo retarder as far as it will go.
factory and can include the following func-
clutch in operation. or tions:
● The vehicle has been driven for a ▶ Press and release the start/stop ● ABS (anti‐lock braking system)
prolonged period in retarder mode. button. ● ASR (acceleration skid control sys-
● The coolant temperature is above ▶ Secure the vehicle against rolling tem)
approximately 100 °C. away; use chocks if necessary. ● ALB (automatic load‐dependent
● Full engine output has been used, e.g. brake)
while driving in mountainous terrain ● Hill holder
or during combined operation. ● BAS (Brake Assist System)

Driving mode
Brakes
Checking the compressed-air brake ▶ In the instrument cluster, open the

Note Reserve pressure menu window
system for leaks
Do not let anyone enter or exit the again.
Danger vehicle during the test. This avoids ▶ Depress the brake pedal and keep it
mistaking pressure loss from the air‐ in this position.
Risk of accident due to leaking
sprung cab suspension system, air‐ ▶ After a brief moment, read off the
compressed-air brake system
sprung seats or the level control system supply pressure.
If a compressed-air brake system is
for a leak. ▶ Read off the supply pressure once
leaking or there is insufficient reserve
pressure, it will not be possible to brake ▶ Stop the vehicle on a level surface. again after approximately one minute.
the vehicle. ▶ Apply the parking brake. If no significant loss of pressure is detec-
▶ Only set the vehicle in motion if the ▶ Use chocks to protect the vehicle ted in the menu window Reserve pressure
necessary reserve pressures are against rolling away. after that minute, the compressed‐air
reached. ▶ Release the parking brake. brake system is not leaking.
▶ In case of a loss of pressure while ▶ Switch on the vehicle. If a significant loss of pressure is detec-
driving, immediately stop the vehicle ▶ In the instrument cluster, call up the ted, the compressed‐air brake system is
safely. Pay attention to the traffic menu window Reserve pressure in leaking.
conditions. the Monitoring information ã menu
( → Page 163).
▶ If the compressed-air brake system is
▶ Consult a qualified specialist work- leaking, have it checked and repaired
shop as soon as possible. ▶ Start the vehicle and wait until the
at a qualified workshop.
display shows a supply pressure of at
least 11 bar.
▶ Switch off the vehicle. Notes on the trailer/semitrailer
◁ The parking brake is automatic- brake system
ally applied. The Û indicator lamp for the trailer/
▶ Switch on the vehicle. semitrailer brake system can light up in
▶ Release the parking brake again.

Driving mode
Brakes
two different colours in the status area of If the red indicator lamp Û lights up in ABS display check
the instrument cluster. the status area of the instrument cluster,
observe the following information: Danger
If the indicator lamp Û lights up in
the status area of the instrument cluster, ● The trailer's/semitrailer's brake Risk of skidding when ABS malfunc-
observe the following information: system has a fault or the trailer/ tions
semitrailer is automatically braked.
● The trailer's/semitrailer's brake sys- If ABS malfunctions, the wheels may
tem is malfunctioning. ● Driving/braking behaviour may lock during braking.
change.
● Driving/braking behaviour may ▶ Continue your journey carefully.
change. ● Also observe the notes in the separ-
ate operating instructions provided by ▶ Have the ABS checked at a qualified
● Also observe the notes in the separ- specialist workshop as soon as pos-
the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer.
ate operating instructions provided by sible.
the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer. ● Brake carefully and stop the vehicle,
paying attention to road and traffic
● Deactivate driver assistance systems The anti-lock protection function is not
conditions.
that intervene actively in the brake guaranteed in the following situations:
depending on the driving situation, as ● Apply the parking brake.
● After switching on the vehicle, the
the overall braking behaviour of your ● Notify a qualified specialist workshop.
indicator lamp ! is not displayed
vehicle can be significantly altered on in the status area of the instrument
slippery surfaces due to the existing ABS (anti-lock braking system) cluster.
fault. ● The vehicle has been switched on for
● Continue your journey carefully. Function of ABS three seconds and the indicator lamp
● Have the brake system checked at a ABS controls the brake pressure so that is still lit.
qualified specialist workshop as soon the wheels do not lock when braking. This ● The indicator lamp lights up after the
as possible. means that the vehicle can still be steered vehicle has pulled away.
while braking.

Driving mode
Brakes
Braking with anti-lock protection driver assistance systems can un- ▶ Connect the connecting cable to
expectedly intervene at any time to the ABS/BS socket or the ABS plug
Danger assist with braking. ( → Page 349).
Risk of accident due to brakes lock- If you want to drive the towing vehicle
ing Note without a semitrailer or with a semitrailer
When braking, the wheels of the trail- Even if Stability Control Assist is without ABS:
er/semitrailer may lock and the tract- activated, the wheels of the trailer or
▶ Insert the connecting cable into the
or/trailer combination may become un- semitrailer can still lock when braking.
empty socket.
stable if: ▶ If ABS intervenes: Continue to de-
● the trailer/semitrailer does not have press the brake pedal until the brak-
any ABS ing situation has passed. Function of BAS (Brake Assist Sys-
tem)
● the trailer/semitrailer ABS has failed ◁ When ABS is intervening, the
continuous brake is switched off.
● ABS has failed completely Danger
The indicator lamp Ã in the
As a result, you could lose control of the instrument cluster remains on. Risk of an accident caused by a mal-
function in BAS (Brake Assist System)
tractor/trailer combination and cause an ▶ If emergency braking is engaged:
accident. Vigorously depress the brake pedal. If BAS malfunctions, the braking dis-
tance may be longer in emergency brak-
▶ Always adapt your driving style to ◁ Under certain conditions, the haz-
ing situations.
the prevailing road and weather ard warning light system switches
conditions, and maintain a sufficient, on automatically. ▶ Depress the brake pedal with full
safe distance from other road users. force in emergency braking situ-
If you want to drive the towing vehicle
▶ Avoid maximum full‐stop braking, with a trailer or semitrailer with ABS or an
ations. ABS will prevent the wheels
apart from in an emergency situ- from locking.
electronic brake system:
ation. BAS supports you in emergency braking
▶ As you consider your driving style, situations. If you depress the brake pedal
always keep in mind that active

Driving mode
Brakes
quickly, BAS boosts the brake pressure ● They may operate vehicle equipment ▶ In the check position, check wheth-
and thus shortens the braking distance. and become trapped. er the braking force of the parking
▶ Keep the brake pedal firmly In addition, children could also set the brake alone is sufficient to hold the
depressed until the emergency vehicle in motion, for example, by: complete vehicle.
braking situation has passed. ▶ Generally, secure the towing vehicle
● Releasing the parking brake.
and trailer/semitrailer with the park-
The brakes will function as usual once you ● Changing the transmission position. ing brake and, additionally, with
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactiv- chocks.
● Starting the vehicle.
ated.
▶ Never leave children unattended in Danger
the vehicle.
Electronic parking brake ▶ When leaving the vehicle, always Risk of skidding and accident due to
take the key with you and lock the secondary braking with the parking
Notes on the electronic parking brake
vehicle. brake
Danger ▶ Keep the key out of the reach of If you brake the vehicle using the park-
children. ing brake, no ABS braking regulation
Risk of accident and injury due to
takes place. The wheels could lock.
children left unattended in the
There is an increased risk of skidding
vehicle Danger
and/or accident.
If you leave children unattended in the Risk of accident on uphill or downhill
vehicle, some of the things that might slopes ▶ Do not pull the parking brake lever
happen include: The parking brake may not be sufficient past the resistance point.
● They may open doors, thereby endan- to secure the vehicle on uphill and down- ▶ If the wheels lock, as soon as pos-
gering other persons or road users. hill slopes. sible move the parking brake lever
in the release direction to the point
● They may get out and be struck by A loaded vehicle or a vehicle with a trail- at which the wheels begin to turn
oncoming traffic. er/semitrailer may roll away. again.

Driving mode
Brakes
Using the electronic parking brake Depending on equipment, a lever version

with an electrically‐driven independent Note
trailer brake is possible. Only once the indicator lamp in
the ! button and the indicator
If the symbol à appears on the lever
lamp on the instrument cluster !
1:
light up does this indicate that the
▶ Observe the notes in the section on parking brake has been engaged
the electrically-driven independent correctly.
trailer brake ( → Page 224).
Releasing the electronic parking
Applying the electronic parking brake brake manually
manually Requirements:
Requirements: ● The vehicle is switched on.
Exemplary representation ● The vehicle is stationary. ● The pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2
Electronic parking brake ▶ Press the ! button. is adequate.
1 Lever ! for electronic parking brake
or
▶ Depress the brake pedal.
2 Button ! for electronic parking brake ▶ Press the ! button.
▶ Pull the lever 1 past the resistance ◁ The parking brake is released.
point.
◁ The indicator lamp in the !
Note ◁ The parking brake is applied. button and the ! indicator
If the vehicle is equipped with Trailer ◁ The indicator lamp of the ! lamp on the instrument cluster go
Stability Assist (TSA), the button ! is button and the ! indicator off.
next to the button ß for this function lamp on the instrument cluster
( → Page 304). light up continuously.

Driving mode
Brakes
Applying the electronic parking brake ◁ The HOLD function of the elec- ◁ The check position of the parking
automatically tronic brake system is activated. brake is activated.
◁ The ë indicator lamp is dis- ◁ The Performing check position
Requirements: played in the instrument cluster. display message appears in the
● The vehicle is stationary. ◁ The vehicle is held by the service instrument cluster.
● The vehicle is switched on. brake.
▶ Switch off the vehicle. ◁ The parking brake is released. Note
or
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal. During the test, the tractor/trail-
◁ The HOLD function of the elec- er combination is only held by the
▶ Open the driver's door. tronic brake system is deactiv- force exerted by the spring‐loaded
◁ The parking brake is automatic- ated. brake of the towing vehicle. The
ally applied. ◁ The vehicle starts moving. trailer or semitrailer brake is re-
◁ The indicator lamp of the ! ◁ The ë indicator lamp in the leased.
button and the ! indicator instrument cluster goes out.
lamp on the instrument cluster Secondary braking with electronic
light up continuously. Test the parking brake (check posi- parking brake
tion) Requirements:
Releasing of the electronic parking
Requirements: ● The parking brake is released.
brake automatically
● The pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2 ▶ Depending on the desired strength of
Requirements:
is adequate. the auxiliary braking, pull lever 1 no
● The vehicle is switched on.
● The parking brake is applied. further than the resistance point.
● The pressure in brake circuits 1 and 2
● The lever 1 is in the starting posi- ◁ The parking brake brakes the
is adequate.
tion. vehicle depending on the lever
● The doors are closed. position.
▶ Pull the lever 1 past the resistance
▶ Shift transmission from i to h or point and hold it there. ◁ If the pressure in the
k. spring-loaded actuator is less

Driving mode
Brakes
than 6.5 bar, the ! indicator ◁ The instrument cluster shows a

lamp lights up in the instrument corresponding display message Danger
cluster. after the vehicle is switched on Risk of accident due to incorrect use
again. of the anti-jackknife brake
Activating the workshop mode of the If you use the anti-jackknife brake im-
electronic parking brake If you drive faster than 30 km/h while
properly, e.g. as a replacement for the
workshop mode is activated, this mode
Requirements: continuous brake, the trailer/semitrailer
will deactivate.
● The vehicle is stationary. brake can overheat or lock. This means
● The parking brake is applied. that the vehicle is no longer safe for op-
Electric independent trailer brake eration or road use.
● The vehicle is switched off.
Notes on the electric anti-jackknife ▶ Only use the anti‐jackknife brake
If you activate workshop mode of the
brake briefly for adaptive braking.
electronic parking brake, all automatic
parking brake functions are deactivated. The anti‐jackknife brake can be used inde-
pendently of the service brake and park-
To avoid automatic application of the
ing brake of the towing vehicle. The anti‐
electronic parking brake when the vehicle
jackknife brake brakes the wheels on the
is being towed, activate workshop mode
trailer/semitrailer and, depending on the
and tow the vehicle with the front axle
configuration, the towing vehicle. Pull the
raised.
anti‐jackknife brake lever to perform brak-
▶ Switch on the vehicle, but do not start ing adjustments on downhill gradients.
it. This prevents the tractor/trailer combina-
▶ Press and hold the ! button. tion from jack‐knifing.
▶ Switch off the vehicle. ▶ If the anti-jackknife brake is not suffi-
◁ Workshop mode of the electronic cient, reduce speed using the service
parking brake is activated. brake or the retarder.

Driving mode
Brakes
Applying and releasing the holding Applying the holding brake

brake on the front axle
Danger
Risk of accident due to limited brake
force of the holding brake on the
front axle
The holding brake is not a parking brake.
The brake force at the front axle is avail-
able for a limited period only and only
when the vehicle has been started. The
Electric anti-jackknife brake lever vehicle may roll away.
▶ Additionally secure the vehicle with
Note chocks.
Switch for holding brake on the front axle (example)
Depending on configuration, a lever The holding brake on the front axle

variant of the electronic parking brake provides a safe support, e.g. for fire
with auxiliary brake function is available. engines when carrying out rescue
In this case, the symbol 1 is shown on operations using the winch. The holding
the ! lever. Read the information brake at the front axle can exclusively
in the section on the electronic parking be activated when the parking brake is
brake ( → Page 221). applied.
▶ Start the vehicle.
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral.

Driving mode
Brakes
Note Frequent-stop brake Danger

The supply pressure in brake cir- Notes on the frequent-stop brake Risk of accident due to the frequent-
cuit 2 must be above 7.5 bar. stop brake being applied in winter
Danger
▶ Press the Ï switch at top. If, in wintry road conditions, you brake
Risk of accident due to excessively with the frequent-stop brake applied, the
◁ The indicator lamp in the Ï
low brake pressure of the frequent- wheels may lock just before the vehicle
switch lights up.
stop brake stops. Even if you remove your foot from
If you use the frequent-stop brake to the brake pedal, the wheels will remain
Note
secure the vehicle to prevent it from locked.
If you switch off the vehicle when the rolling away, the brake pressure may be
holding brake is switched on or the This may cause the vehicle to skid or
too low. slide away, e.g. on uphill or downhill
parking brake is released, the holding
brake on the front axle is automatically This may cause the vehicle to roll away slopes.
even though the frequent-stop brake is
released. ▶ Never apply the frequent‐stop brake
applied.
in wintry road conditions.
Releasing the holding brake ▶ Never exit the driver's seat when the
▶ Press the Ï switch at the bottom. frequent‐stop brake is applied, and Danger
◁ The holding brake on the front be ready to brake. Risk of accident due to the frequent-
axle is released. The parking ▶ If the vehicle rolls away, also apply stop brake not being applied
brake remains applied. The in- the service brake. If you do not stop the vehicle with the
dicator lamp in Ï switch goes service brake, e.g. when coasting down,
off. the frequent-stop brake will not be ap-
plied. The vehicle may roll away.

Driving mode
Brakes
▶ In order to apply the frequent‐stop Applying and releasing the frequent- Using the hill holder
brake, always use the service brake stop brake
to brake the vehicle to a standstill. Danger
Deactivating
The frequent‐stop brake uses less com- Risk of accident due to the hill holder
pressed air than the parking brake. Use being activated in winter
the frequent‐stop brake if you frequently If you brake in wintry road conditions
pull away and stop for short periods of with the hill holder switched on, the
time, e.g. in refuse collection operation. wheels may lock shortly before stop-
The frequent‐stop brake does not replace ping. Even if you remove your foot from
the service brake or the parking brake. the brake pedal, the wheels will re-
You will find further information on stop- main locked. This may cause the vehicle
ping in the "Pulling away and stopping" to skid or slide away, e.g. on uphill or
section ( → Page 217). downhill slopes.
When the frequent‐stop brake is released, ▶ Do not activate the hill holder in
the x indicator lamp in the status area wintry road conditions.
goes out. Example: frequent-stop brake switch
If you switch the vehicle off while the ▶ Press the x switch at the bottom. Danger
frequent‐stop brake is applied, the fre- ◁ The indicator lamp x in the Risk of accident due to the hill holder
quent‐stop brake will remain applied. status area lights up. not being activated
Vehicles with automated manual If you do not stop the vehicle with the
Deactivation
transmission: When you engage the service brake, e.g. when coasting down,
frequent‐stop brake, crawler mode is ▶ Press the ¿/x switch up and the hill holder will not activate. The
deactivated automatically. You can find move to the centre position. vehicle may roll away.
information on crawler mode in the ◁ The indicator lamp x in the
"Automated manual transmission" section status area goes out.
( → Page 236).

Driving mode
Brakes
▶ In order activate the hill holder, If the hill holder is activated and you de- vehicle is then held by the parking brake.
always use the service brake to press the brake pedal when the vehicle is After the parking brake is released, the hill
brake the vehicle to a standstill. stationary, the indicator lamp ¿ lights holder is no longer active. If you depress
up in the instrument cluster. If you release the brake pedal, the hill holder remains
the brake pedal, the vehicle is held for active after the parking brake is released.
two seconds to facilitate controlled pulling If you depress the accelerator pedal and
away. the vehicle pulls away, the hill holder is
released automatically. The indicator lamp
Note ¿ goes out in the instrument cluster.
One second before the brake is released The hill holder remains active in forward
by the hill holder, a warning tone and reverse gear even after an interme-
sounds. diate stop or after the vehicle has been
switched off.
Vehicles with manual transmission: If
you do not depress the accelerator, clutch Vehicles with automated manual
or brake pedal when the vehicle is station- transmission: If crawler mode is active,
The hill holder assists you when pulling ary and the hill holder is active, a warning the hill holder is automatically released
away on uphill or downhill slopes. The hill tone sounds. The hill holder is released when the vehicle begins to creep forward
holder prevents the vehicle from rolling. and the ¿ indicator lamp in the instru- after the service brake has been released.
This facilitates controlled pulling away. ment cluster goes out. When you brake When crawler mode reaches its functional
▶ To switch on: Press the ¿ switch the vehicle to a standstill while the hill limits, it is automatically cancelled. The
at top. holder is activated, the hill holder is act- instrument cluster shows the display
ive and the ¿ indicator lamp in the message Crawler mode cancelled.
▶ Deactivation: Press the ¿ switch
instrument cluster lights up. If you then A warning tone will sound and the
at the bottom.
apply the parking brake, the hill holder is transmission control will disengage the
deactivated and the ¿ indicator lamp clutch. In this case, depress the brake
in the instrument cluster goes out. The pedal to bring the vehicle to a halt or

Driving mode
Brakes
depress the accelerator pedal to move off

again. Danger Note
Risk of accident due to the HOLD If, instead of the ë indicator lamp,
If you do not depress the brake pedal
function being activated when leav- the ¿ indicator lamp of the hill hold-
while the vehicle is stationary and the
ing the vehicle er is shown in the instrument cluster,
hill holder is activated, a warning tone
If the vehicle is only braked by the HOLD refer to the notes under "Hill holder"
sounds. The hill holder is deactivated and
function, it may roll away in the event ( → Page 227).
the indicator lamp ¿ on the instrument
cluster goes out. of a malfunction in the system or in the The HOLD function is not activated if the
power supply. The vehicle can also roll vehicle has been braked to a standstill by
away if the HOLD function is switched the distance control assistant.
Using the HOLD function off due to the accelerator pedal being
The HOLD function holds the vehicle in depressed, e.g. by a vehicle occupant. The HOLD function will deactivate and
the ë indicator lamp will go out in the
place without requiring you to continue ▶ Before exiting it, switch off the following circumstances:
applying the brakes, for example, when vehicle and use the parking brake
pulling away on a hillside or during peri- ● You depress the accelerator pedal
to secure it against rolling away.
ods spent in stationary traffic. with both the clutch and a gear en-
▶ To activate the HOLD function: gaged.
▶ Do not use the HOLD function when Depress the brake pedal and, after ● The electronic parking brake is ap-
off-road, on steep downhill or uphill a brief moment, quickly continue to plied.
slopes, or with slippery or loose sur- depress it. ● The vehicle is switched off.
faces. Under these conditions, the
◁ The ë display lights up in the ● A system error occurs.
HOLD function may not be able to
instrument cluster. ● The power supply is too low.
hold the vehicle.
▶ Release the brake pedal.
The HOLD function is only an aid. The
driver is always responsible for safe-
guarding the vehicle against unintentional
rolling away.

Driving mode
Brakes
▶ Always observe warning lamps and

Note Danger display messages and follow the
Vehicles with automated manual Risk of skidding and accident due rectification measures described.
transmission: After the HOLD function to malfunction of the retarder or re-
is deactivated, the activated crawler tarder controller You can make optimal use of the engine's
mode will not cause automatic creeping If the retarder or retarder controller mal- braking effect, particularly on long down-
( → Page 236). functions, the handling and braking char- hill slopes, if you observe the following
acteristics of the vehicle may change. points:
The vehicle may brake in an uncontrolled ● Activate the continuous brake.
Continuous brake
manner. ● Shift to a lower gear in good time.
Notes on the continuous brake
The wheels may lock and therefore lose Engine brake
Danger their grip.
▶ Observe the effective engine braking
Risk of accident and skidding when The vehicle may skid. range marked on the rev counter
driving on a slippery carriageway Vehicle acceleration while overtaking ( → Page 141).
If you activate the retarder or shift down may be lower than desired. At very low outside temperatures, the
a gear on a slippery carriageway in order Overtaking may take longer and may engine brake has limited or no effect after
to increase the engine's braking effect, need to be aborted. the vehicle has been started.
the drive wheels may lose their grip.
▶ Drive particularly carefully or stop Retarder
▶ To increase the braking effect of the the vehicle as soon as possible,
engine, never activate the retarder paying attention to surrounding road If the Ã indicator lamp flashes in the
and avoid shifting down to a lower and traffic conditions. instrument cluster, the retarder's braking
gear when driving on a slippery car- power is reduced.
▶ Have the retarder or retarder con-
riageway.
troller checked immediately at a ▶ Shift to a lower gear in good time to
qualified specialist workshop and increase the engine braking effect
repaired if necessary. and engine cooling.

Driving mode
Manual transmission
Activate/deactivate the continuous If the vehicle is switched on and the Ã paying attention to surrounding road
brake indicator lamp flashes in the instrument and traffic conditions. Pay attention
cluster, the multifunction lever is not in to the traffic conditions.
If the retarder is deactivated and the
indicator lamp Ã in the instrument
position g. ▶ Consult a qualified workshop imme-
cluster does not go out, the retarder is ▶ To switch on: Pull the multifunction diately to have the compressed‐air
damaged. lever to the desired brake stage. system repaired.
▶ Have the continuous brake checked ◁ The check lamp Ã in the in-
strument cluster lights up. Note
at a qualified specialist workshop.
▶ Switching off: Push the multifunction Damage to the transmission, engine
lever to position g. or clutch by selecting reverse gear
◁ The indicator lamp Ã in the Observe the following notes:
instrument cluster goes out. ▶ Do not drive at too low or too high
an engine speed.
Manual transmission ▶ Only engage reverse gear when the
engine is at idling speed and the
Notes on the manual transmission vehicle is stationary.
▶ During shift operations, make sure
Danger that the engine speed does not rise
Risk of accident due to low supply into the red danger zone of the rev
pressure counter.
Example: multifunction lever In the event of pressure loss or if the ▶ Release the gearshift lever once the
BlueTec® vehicles without a retarder are supply pressure in the transmission/ shift operation is over. Do not rest
equipped with three brake stages (1 – coupling circuit is too low, you will no your hand or arm on the gearshift
3 ) and vehicles without BlueTec® ex- longer be able to shift gear. lever.
haust gas aftertreatment have two brake
▶ Do not set the vehicle in motion or ▶ The maximum permissible engine
stages (1 – 2 ). speed has been exceeded if
stop the vehicle as soon as possible,

Driving mode
Automated manual transmission
the warning tone sounds when Automated manual transmission Mercedes PowerShift has eight, twelve or
downshifting. Do not shift to the 16 forward gears and two or four reverse
lower gear, but rather into a higher Function of the multifunction lever gears.
gear. Power‐assisted gearshifts and the gear display
The transmission control controls clutch
are switched off to protect the
Danger and transmission actuation during driving
transmission synchronisation. For
operation in the following cases, for ex-
this reason, more effort is needed Risk of accident due to low supply
ample:
for shifting. pressure
● when pulling away
In the event of pressure loss or if the
supply pressure in the transmission/ ● when manoeuvring
Note
coupling circuit is too low, you will no ● when changing gear
Damage to the transmission due to
longer be able to shift gear. ● when stopping
changing the shift range
If you change the shift range from the ▶ Do not set the vehicle in motion or
fast to the slow group at too high a stop the vehicle as soon as possible, Multifunction lever
speed, the transmission can be dam- paying attention to surrounding road
aged. The following speed limits must be and traffic conditions. Pay attention
observed when shifting: to the traffic conditions.
▶ When driving in the off‐road gear of ▶ Consult a qualified workshop imme-
the transfer case, do not drive faster diately to have the compressed‐air
than 20 km/h when shifting. system repaired.
▶ When driving in the on‐road gear or The vehicle has a selectable crawler
in vehicles without transfer cases, mode. When crawler mode is activated,
Multifunction lever operation
do not drive faster than 25 km/h. the vehicle automatically crawls forwards
after the service brake has been released, 1 Select direction of travel:
and continues to roll at idle speed. h Driving forwards ( → Page 239)
i Neutral ( → Page 239)

Driving mode
1 k Reverse Gear display E

Neutral position in EcoRoll
mode
2 Select drive program: ( → Page 235)
R1–R4 1st to 4th reverse gear
dAutomatic drive program with the
driving‐ and vehicle‐specific shift program A Automatic drive program
p Manual drive program A economy
3 ± Manual downshift, in A power
automatic ( → Page 241)/manual A fleet Automatic drive program
( → Page 242)drive program A offroad with drive‐specific and
4 q Manual upshift, in automatic A municip vehicle‐specific shift pro-
( → Page 241)/manual ( → Page 242) A economy+ gram
drive program A heavy
A fire–sv
M Manual drive program
Overview of gear display

1 Direction of travel and/or selected gear Drive programs and drive functions
2 Gear shifting recommendation (shift up°Z/
down°¬) or pre‐selected gear (flashing) Function of the automatic transmis-
3 Drive program sion and manual drive program
Automatic transmission
Possible displays (example):
1-16 1st to 16th gear
You can switch EcoRoll mode on and off
using the Assistance menu window and
N Neutral position
the crawler mode as a drive function using
N1 Slow splitter group the Vehicle menu window in the Settings
N2 Fast splitter group menu ä ( → Page 165).

Driving mode
For vehicles without a turbo retarder ● Waste collection vehicle mode — The economy shifting program has the
clutch and with the offroad shift program, municip following features:
you can switch the crawler mode specially ● Dynamic driving mode with optimum ● EcoRoll mode is always switched on.
designed for off‐road driving í on or acceleration during emergency and
● The adjustable speed in cruise control
off ( → Page 238) using the button. alarm responses by fire engines —
is limited to 85 km/h.
fire-sv
Automatic transmission with drive- The fleet shift program has the following
specific shift program In shift programs power, offroad, heavy
features:
and fire-sv, the automatic transmission
Depending on the type of transmission only shifts to the next gear at relatively ● EcoRoll mode is always switched on.
and programming, the shift program is high engine speeds. ● The maximum speed is limited to
designed for the following functions: around 85 km/h.
● Performance‐oriented, dynamic driv- The crawler mode configured for on‐road
driving is automatically switched off in ● The automatic drive program is al-
ing mode with relatively high engine ways active, except in gears one to
speeds — power the offroad shift program. For vehicles
without a turbo retarder clutch, you can six and in reverse gear.
● Fuel‐efficient driving mode — eco-
switch on the crawler mode specially The municip shift program has the follow-
nomy
designed for off‐road driving with the ing features:
● Performance‐oriented driving mode í button ( → Page 238).
on light off‐road terrain and on con- ● EcoRoll mode is deactivated.
struction sites with relatively high You can switch crawler mode on and off ● Crawler mode is deactivated.
engine speeds — offroad using the Vehicle menu window in the
● The clutch overload warning tone is
● Performance‐oriented, dynamic driv- Settings menu ä ( → Page 165).
deactivated.
ing mode with relatively high engine When you depress (kick down) and hold
speeds and a high gross combination The economy+ shift program has the
the accelerator pedal beyond the pres-
mass — heavy following features:
sure point in the heavy shift program, the
● Fleet mode — fleet transmission does not shift up automatic- ● EcoRoll mode is always switched on.
ally.

Driving mode
● The adjustable speed in cruise control Select the drive program programs, the last‐selected program is
is limited to 82 km/h. always active after the vehicle starts.
Manual drive program After the display check, the display shows
A or e.g. A economy and N or N 1.
In the manual drive program, you change
The drive program can be changed at any
gears yourself. The gearshift recommend-
time.
ation is shown on the display of the instru-
ment cluster. ▶ Activate the manual drive pro-
In particularly demanding driving situ- gram: Press and hold the o but-
ations, you should switch to the manu- ton 1.
al drive program. This will enable you to ◁ The display will show the manu-
avoid any undesired interruptions in tract- al drive program M, the selected
ive power that may occur with automatic gear, and a gearshift recommend-
gear shifts. For vehicles with the fleet shift program, ation.
the manual drive program can only be ac- ▶ To switch automatic on: Press the
tivated up to 6th gear (on 12‐speed trans- o button briefly 1.
missions). It is not possible to choose ◁ The display will show the auto-
between the shift programs. matic drive program A and the
selected and preselected gears.
After the vehicle is started, the
economy/economy+ drive program is ▶ Shift the automatic shift program:
always switched on. For vehicles with the Press the o button briefly 1.
fire–sv shift program, this is always the ◁ When the display shows A,
A fire–sv drive program. For vehicles with the standard shift program is
the fleet shift program, this is always the switched on. If, for example,
A fleet drive program. For vehicles with the display shows A economy
the offroad, municipalorheavy shift or A power, the drive-specific
shift program is switched on. If,

Driving mode
in the A power shift program, ● Cruise control or Proximity Control

the transmission control does Assist controls the speed. Note
not detect a higher power ● The limiter is active and the set limit When EcoRoll mode is switched on,
requirement for more than ten speed is exceeded. steering forces on the multifunction
minutes, the transmission control ● The gross combination weight is very steering wheel may be somewhat great-
will automatically shift to the high. er in certain driving situations, for ex-
more economical standard shift ample, on slightly curving downhill gradi-
program. In shift programs power, heavy, muni- ents. This does not endanger operational
cip, offroad and fire–sv, EcoRoll mode safety or road safety.
is always switched off and cannot be
Function of the EcoRoll mode and
switched on. In the standard drive pro- Crawler mode
crawler mode
gram A and in the other shift programs,
Crawler mode allows the vehicle to creep
EcoRoll mode EcoRoll mode is always switched on after
forwards automatically when the service
the vehicle is started.
EcoRoll mode enables a fuel‐saving driv- brake is released and to coast when the
ing style. If you do not depress the ac- You can switch EcoRoll mode on and off accelerator pedal is not depressed. You
celerator pedal while driving, the trans- in the standard drive program A via the can reduce the crawling speed by gently
mission control shifts to neutral position Assistance menu window in the Settings depressing the brake pedal. After creep-
depending on the driving situation. menu ä ( → Page 165). ing forwards, the vehicle will coast at idle
speed until you bring the vehicle to a halt
In the following cases, the transmission
Note using the service brake or until crawler
does not shift into neutral position or
You cannot switch off EcoRoll mode in mode is deactivated or cancelled.
shifts from neutral position back into a
suitable gear: the economy and fleet shift programs. Creeping forwards and coasting are pos-
● You depress the accelerator pedal. EcoRoll mode is active from a speed of sible in all pulling‐away gears. You can
● You depress the service brake pedal. approximately 35 km/h. manually change gear in traffic jams, for
example, to adjust the rolling speed to
● The continuous brake is activated.
that of the traffic.

Driving mode
Crawler mode is automatically deactivated When crawler mode reaches its functional The crawler mode configured for on‐road
in the following cases: limits, it is automatically cancelled in the driving is always switched off in the of-
● You shift the transmission to neutral following cases. froad shift program. You can switch the
position i for more than around two ● The vehicle does not start moving crawler mode specially configured for
seconds. due to an unexpectedly high driving off‐road driving on and off in all permiss-
● You activate the rocking‐free drive resistance, for example. ible pulling‐away gears using the í
function. ● The wheels are spinning on a slippery button ( → Page 238).
● The parking brake is applied. carriageway, for example. The crawler mode configured for on‐road
● Proximity Control Assist controls the ● The driving resistance when crawling driving is always switched on after the
speed. and coasting exceeds the functional vehicle is started in the standard drive
● The idle speed is above approx. limit. program A and in the other shift pro-
700 rpm. If crawler mode has been automatically grams.
● Active Brake Assist intervenes. cancelled, the instrument cluster will On all‐wheel drive vehicles, crawler mode
● There is a risk of the clutch being show the display message Crawler mode is always deactivated after the vehicle
overloaded. cancelled. A warning tone will sound and starts.
● A change of direction cannot be car- the transmission control will disengage Once crawler mode has been activated,
ried out. the clutch. In this case, depress the brake you can activate creeping forwards by
pedal to bring the vehicle to a halt or shifting into a start‐off gear with the ser-
When none of the conditions are present
depress the accelerator pedal to move vice brake depressed or by shifting into
any longer, crawler mode is reactivated by
off again. a start‐off gear and then depressing the
pulling away using the accelerator pedal
or shifting into a start‐off gear again with Crawler mode is designed for driving on accelerator pedal.
the service brake depressed. roads on vehicles without a driven front If you change over to the manual drive
axle. You can the switch crawler mode program, the current crawler mode will
adjusted for on‐road driving on and off via remain activated. After you change back
the Vehicle menu window in the Settings to the automatic drive program, the crawl-
menu ä ( → Page 165). er mode assigned to the drive and shift

Driving mode
program will be activated. It may not be ▶ To switch on: Press the lower sec- Crawler mode is automatically deactivated
available again until the accelerator pedal tion of the í button. in the following situations:
has been used for pulling away once more ◁ The indicator lamp in the button ● A gear above the permissible
or you have shifted into a start‐off gear í goes out. pulling‐away gears is selected.
with the service brake depressed. ▶ Depress the service brake and shift ● Neutral position is selected.
into a start-off gear. ● The parking brake is applied.
Switching crawler mode on and off ● The rocking‐free drive function is
or
(all-wheel drive vehicles) activated.
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal and
pull away.
Rocking-free function
◁ Crawler mode is activated.
Note
Note Damage to the dry clutch due to a
If crawler mode is not activated very high gross combination mass
within approx. 10–15 seconds Due to a very high gross combination
of pressing the button, the in- mass, the dry clutch can be overloaded
dicator lamp in the button í and damaged in rocking mode.
will light up again. Crawler mode
then remains deactivated. ▶ Do not use the rocking mode with a
very high gross combination mass.
▶ Switching off: Press the lower sec-
The crawler mode adapted specially tion of the í button again. You can use the rocking‐free function to
for off‐road driving and all‐wheel drive rock the vehicle out of a deep rut in all
◁ The indicator lamp on the í
vehicles is always deactivated once the permissible pulling‐away gears. After the
button will light up.
vehicle is started. The indicator lamp on rocking‐free function is switched on, the
the í button will light up. transmission control will automatically
switch to the manual drive program. When
you release the accelerator pedal while

Driving mode
rocking free, the dry clutch will suddenly Switch crawler mode on/off (all- the 12‐speed transmission and 1st‐8th
open and the vehicle will roll back. When wheel drive vehicles) gear with the 16‐speed transmission.
you depress the accelerator pedal again, If the clutch is under heavy strain, you can
the dry clutch will close immediately and only pull away in 1st gear. In the municip
the vehicle will pull away. and heavy shift programs, the highest
After engaging the start‐off gear, you can gear that can be used for pulling away is
switch the rocking‐free function on and 2nd gear ( → Page 534).
off via the Vehicle menu window in the
Settings menu ä ( → Page 165).
Pulling away and stopping the vehicle
In all‐wheel drive vehicles, switch the (automated manual transmission)
rocking‐free function on or off after en-
gaging the start‐off gear with the i Pulling away
button.
The rocking-free function will switch off
▶ Press the i button above.
automatically in the following cases:
◁ When the indicator lamp in
● You are driving above approximately
the i button lights up, the
8 km/h.
rocking-free drive function is
● You shift to a gear above the permiss- switched on.
ible pulling‐away gears.
● Vehicles with turbo retarder clutch:
The instrument cluster shows the Notes on pulling away and stopping
display message Clutch under heavy (automated manual transmission)
strain. Depending on the transmission, differ-
ent pulling‐away gears can be selected.
1st‐2nd gear can be selected with the
8‐speed transmission, 1st‐6th gear with

Driving mode
▶ Turn the direction switch to position selected gear appears on the Stopping
h (drive/forwards) 1. display, gear shifting is complete.
◁ In all drive programs, the trans- ▶ Depress the brake pedal.
or ◁ The transmission control will shift
mission control will shift to a suit-
able start-off gear depending on ▶ Vehicles with 12/16-speed trans- down according to the driving
the vehicle load, which can be mission: Pull the multifunction lever situation and to a suitable start-
changed manually. backwards and hold it there (to shift off gear shortly before it comes
up) 2 or push it forwards and hold it to a standstill. When the service
▶ Release the brake pedal or the park-
there (to shift down) 3. brake is released again after
ing brake and depress the accelerator
pedal. ◁ Vehicles with 12-speed transmis- stopping, the vehicle will crawl
sion: The transmission control forwards again.
◁ To achieve higher torque, the
will shift up or down to 1st, 3rd or
engine speed may increase to Selecting neutral position
6th gear. If the display shows 1, 3
approximately 1100 1/min when
or 6, gear shifting is complete. A warning tone will sound if the vehicle is
pulling away in first gear with the
accelerator pedal fully depressed. ◁ Vehicles with 16-speed transmis- stationary for about nine minutes with the
The engine speed is increased sion: The transmission control engine running and a gear selected. N will
automatically and as required for will shift up or down to 1st, 4th or flash on the display. After another minute,
pulling away. 8th gear. If the display shows 1, 4 the transmission control will automatically
or 8, gear shifting is complete. select neutral position.
Changing the start-off gear
▶ Pull the multifunction lever backwards Note
briefly (to shift up) 2 or push it for- When the service brake is released
wards briefly (to shift down) 3. after the first time the vehicle
◁ The transmission control shifts stops, the vehicle will begin to crawl
up or down one gear. When the ( → Page 236).

Driving mode
Driving in the automatic drive pro- Decelerating

gram
▶ Release the accelerator pedal.
Using kick-down ▶ Depress the brake pedal.
or
Note
▶ Activate the continuous brake.
In the economy and fleet shift pro-
grams, the kick‐down function is limited.
◁ The transmission control will
automatically shift down accord-
The kick‐down serves to accelerate the ing to the driving situation.
vehicle to the maximum extent.
Selecting a gear manually
If necessary, the pull‐away performance
can be increased using the kick‐down
During relatively long stops, e.g. at traffic
function, e.g. on relatively steep uphill
lights or before switching off the vehicle,
gradients. When pulling away in 1st gear,
shift the transmission to neutral position.
the kick‐down function delivers a higher
▶ Depress the brake pedal or apply the engine speed.
parking brake.
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal beyond
▶ Turn the direction switch to the i the point of resistance as far as it will
position (neutral) 1.
go.
◁ The transmission control will shift
to a lower gear if required.
▶ Ease off the accelerator pedal slightly
once the desired speed is reached.
Another gear can also be selected manu-
◁ The transmission control will shift ally. The automatic control functions are
up again.
not changed by doing this.

Driving mode
▶ Depending on the number of gears Driving using the manual drive pro- ◁ The transmission control will de-
to be shifted, briefly pull the multi- gram termine the suitable gear (target
function lever backwards (to shift up) gear) for the selected shift dir-
1 or briefly push it forwards (to shift ection depending on the vehicle
down) 2 a corresponding number of load. The transmission control
times. shifts up or down at least one
gear to a suitable gear.
or
▶ Pull the multifunction lever backwards
and hold it there (to shift up) 1 or Automatic transmission
push it forwards and hold it there (to Overview of push-button gearshift
shift down) 2. and gear display
◁ The transmission control will de-
termine the suitable gear (target Note
gear) for the selected shift dir- Damage to the automatic transmis-
ection depending on the vehicle ▶ Depending on the number of gears
to be shifted, briefly pull the multi- sion when rolling in neutral
load. The transmission control
function lever backwards (to shift up) If the automatic transmission is in neut-
shifts up or down at least one
1 or briefly push it forwards (to shift ral when the vehicle is rolling, this may
gear to a suitable gear.
down) 2 a corresponding number of lead to damage to the automatic trans-
times. mission.
or ▶ Do not allow the vehicle to roll in
neutral, especially when driving
▶ Pull the multifunction lever backwards downhill.
and hold it there (to shift up) 1 or
push it forwards and hold it there (to
▶ Follow the information on towing the
vehicle.
shift down) 2.

Driving mode
If the retarder (engine brake/retarder) is Push-button gearshift and gear dis- Fault messages for automatic trans-
active, the engine speed for downshifts play mission
will be higher than when the retarder is
not active. If the shift range or the currently engaged
gear is not shown on the 1 display, the
▶ Pay attention to the display messages display remains dark or implausible in-
on the automatic transmission control formation is output, this means there is an
panel and the display messages on operating fault in the automatic transmis-
the instrument cluster. These indicate sion.
special operating states and help to
prevent damage to the automatic If the Transmission faulty display message
transmission. appears on the instrument cluster, read
and obey the information and instructions.
Note
Information provided by the auto- Changing drive programs
matic transmission control unit has Push buttons The automatic transmission is equipped
a higher priority. with the Economy and Power drive pro-
1 Shift range and gear display
You can limit or extend the shift range at 2 MODE button
grams. The drive programs support the
any time. desired driving style.
3 Extend shift range &
4 Limit shift range *
The Economy drive program offers a
comfort‐oriented, fuel‐saving driving style
5 Driving position 7
and makes it easier to drive on slippery
6 Neutral position A road surfaces.
7 Reverse gear C
After the vehicle is started, the standard
Economy drive program will always be
active.

Driving mode
Operation
The Power drive program is designed for tended period of time may lead to en- Operation
driving with high performance require- gine damage.
ments or driving dynamics. Notes on axle and wheel loads
▶ If the shift range is limited, do not al-
For fire engines, the standard drive pro- low the engine speed to rise into the Note
gram is the Power drive program and this red danger zone of the rev counter.
Damage to vehicle parts if the per-
is always active after the vehicle is star-
ted.
▶ When driving on extreme uphill gradi- missible gross mass is exceeded
ents or long downhill gradients, lim- If the permissible gross vehicle weight,
▶ Changing the drive program: Press it the shift range in good time for the permissible axle load or the permiss-
and hold the 2 MODE button. high engine output or engine brak- ible wheel load are exceeded, the tyres,
◁ The display 1 shows the selec- ing power. chassis frame and axle may be dam-
ted drive program. If nothing is aged.
displayed, this means the stand- Manoeuvring and rocking free
Even if the permissible wheel load dif-
ard drive program is active. When manoeuvring in confined spaces: ference of 4% is exceeded, the tyres,
▶ use measured braking to regulate the chassis frame and axle may be dam-
Driving tips vehicle speed. aged.
Driving on uphill or downhill gradi-
▶ Accelerate slowly and evenly. ▶ Observe the permissible values for
ents gross mass, axle and wheel loads.
Note ▶ Observe the permissible difference
Note At low speed, you can change between between wheel loads of 4%.
the drive position h and the reverse
Risk of engine damage due to the
gear k without braking. This helps,
limiting speed being exceeded
for example, when manoeuvring quickly
If the shift range is limited, the engine
or rocking free in snow or slush.
speed may exceed the limiting speed.
Exceeding the limiting speed for an ex-

Driving mode
Operation
engine and transmission takes place via a If the display message and warning tone
Note fluid circuit and a dry clutch. still do not switch off:
Damage to vehicle parts if change-
If power is transmitted while driving with ▶ Have the turbo retarder clutch
able platforms/containers tip and roll
the dry clutch open, the oil temperature checked at a qualified specialist
off or are set down
in the turbo retarder clutch's circuit in- workshop.
The maximum permitted axle load creases depending on the load. If the oil
may be exceeded if changeable temperature is too high, the instrument Pulling away
platforms/containers tip and roll off or cluster shows a display message and a
are set down. The tyres, chassis frame warning tone sounds. Note
and axle may be damaged. In the automatic drive program, the
If the oil temperature of the turbo retarder
▶ Observe the permissible axle load. clutch is too high: transmission control determines the
▶ Do not exceed the value specified in ▶ Shift to a lower gear.
optimum start‐off gear and shift point.
the installation guidelines. The dry clutch opens or closes depend-
◁ The engine speed will increase ing on the driving resistance. As a res-
▶ Observe the information on attach- and the dry clutch will be closed. ult, the vehicle can be started off with
ments, bodies, installations and con-
If the display message and warning tone maximum torque at a low engine speed
versions ( → Page 3).
do not switch off: (approx. 1200 1/min). Only when man-
▶ While driving, regularly monitor the oeuvring mode is switched on does the
warning- and indicator lamps and the ▶ brake and stop the vehicle, taking
vehicle creep forwards automatically and
displays in the instrument cluster. into account the road and traffic con-
coast after the service brake has been
ditions.
released ( → Page 247).
Using the turbo retarder clutch ▶ Shift the transmission to neutral.
The turbo retarder clutch enables sens- ▶ Let the engine run for around one
itive and wear‐free moving off and man- minute at approximately 1200 1/min.
oeuvring at the lowest speeds and high
torque. Power transmission between the

Driving mode
Operation
● How quickly you depress the acceler- vehicle can be moved forwards or back-
Note ator pedal wards slowly and in a controlled manner
If the dry clutch is open when pulling simply by changing the accelerator pedal
away, the transmission does not change
▶ Apply the parking brake or engage the
position, e.g. on a downhill gradient. This
hill holder.
gear. is particularly advantageous when driv-
▶ Switch on the automatic drive pro- ing with a very high gross train weight,
▶ Please read the notes on the electron- gram .
ic parking brake ( → Page 221). as the gear does not need to be changed
◁ The transmission control determ- and the service brake does not have to be
ines a suitable start-off gear. pressed.
Level stretches
▶ Set the multifunction lever to h.
▶ Set the multifunction lever to h. ▶ Depress the accelerator pedal.
Driving down a steep gradient always
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal. takes place in a moving‐off gear against
◁ The indicator lamp X in the the desired direction of travel.
◁ The indicator lamp X in the instrument cluster will come on.
instrument cluster will come on. ◁ The turbo retarder clutch is filled The drive function is always switched on
◁ The turbo retarder clutch is filled and the vehicle pulls away. After after a vehicle start. The drive function
and the vehicle pulls away. After pulling away, the indicator lamp is only automatically deactivated in the
pulling away, the indicator lamp X in the instrument cluster offroad shift program.
X in the instrument cluster goes out and power is transmit- Activate or deactivate the hydromove
goes out and power is transmitted via the dry clutch. drive function via the Vehicle menu
ted via the dry clutch. window in the Settings menu ä
( → Page 165).
Uphill slopes Using hydromove
The pulling-away characteristics depend A low pre‐filling of the turbo retarder Driving down a slope forwards
on the following points: clutch makes the response time of the ▶ Stop the vehicle using the service
● Gradient of the road surface accelerator pedal more direct and reduces brake.
● Gross combination mass the rolling of the vehicle against the dir- ▶ Depress the brake pedal.
ection of travel when moving off. The

Driving mode
Operation
▶ If necessary, switch on the Hydro-

move drive function. Note
▶ Setk the multifunction lever to If you want to drive down a slope in
( → Page 232). reverse, set the multifunction lever to
▶ Driving downhill quickly: Release h.
the service brake. Do not depress the
accelerator pedal.
Using manoeuvring mode
◁ The vehicle rolls with minimal
For vehicles with a turbo retarder clutch,
deceleration.
manoeuvring mode allows you to man-
▶ Driving downhill slowly: Do not
oeuvre more precisely. You can also start
depress the accelerator pedal.
driving using manoeuvring mode. The
◁ The further the accelerator pedal starting power is higher in the power,
is depressed, the greater the ▶ Activation: Stop the vehicle and
heavy and offroad shift programs. In leave it switched on.
drive force against the direction manoeuvring mode, the vehicle pulls away
of travel. The vehicle rolls at a ▶ Depress the brake pedal.
as soon as you release the service brake
slower speed. ▶ Press the lower section of the button
— automatic forward crawling.
1.
Depending on the gross train weight, If manoeuvring mode is active, the trans-
the downhill gradient and the road sur-
◁ The indicator lamp on the 1
mission does not change gear automat- button will light up.
face you are driving on, you can stop the ically. Deactivate manoeuvring mode to
vehicle by depressing the accelerator ped- ◁ In manoeuvring mode, engine
continue driving. speed is limited to 1400 rpm and
al alone and drive back up the gradient
To prevent the turbo retarder clutch from the transmission changes to the
again.
overloading, manoeuvring mode is auto- manual drive program p.
matically deactivated depending on the ▶ Depending on the gross combination
load or after approximately nine minutes. weight, select a suitable start-off gear
for pulling away.

Driving mode
Operation
▶ Release the service brake. sible, however, to accelerate or deceler-

ate using cruise control.
Note When you switch on the vehicle, the in-
When manoeuvring mode is active, it is dicator lamp À or Á lights up in
only possible to change gears when the the instrument cluster and goes out again
vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal after approximately two seconds. ASR is
is depressed. activated.
▶ Deactivation: Press the lower sec- If the indicator lamp À or Á does
tion of the button 1 again. not go out, then ASR has a malfunction.
or ▶ Have the malfunction rectified at a
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal past
the pressure point to the stop (kick-
Note
down). Deactivating and activating ASR
◁ The indicator lamp in the button Vehicles with Stability Control Assist
1 goes out. Danger lack the à button. Traction control
(ASR function) is part of Stability Control
Risk of skidding if ASR is deactivated
Assist ( → Page 249). When Stability
If you deactivate ASR, ASR cannot carry
Function of ASR (anti-slip control) Control Assist is deactivated, traction
out vehicle stabilisation when pulling
If ASR intervenes, this has the following control is also deactivated.
away and accelerating.
effects:
● The indicator lamp À or Á ▶ ASR must only be deactivated in the It may be best to deactivate ASR in the
following situations. following situations:
flashes in the instrument cluster.
● when using snow chains
● Cruise control cannot be activated.
● when driving on roads with loose
If cruise control has already been activ- surfaces, e.g. gravel
ated, it will remain active. It is not pos-

Driving mode
Operation
▶ If the carriageway is slippery, engage Regardless of the vehicle load or road sur- Deactivating and activating Stability
the differential lock in an anticipatory face conditions, Stability Control Assist Control Assist
fashion ( → Page 250). can reduce the risk of the following situ-
▶ To switch on and off: Press the ations: Danger
button à. ● The tractor/semitrailer combination Risk of skidding and accident due to
◁ When the indicator lamp À or or drawbar combination skidding. deactivating Stability Control Assist
Á on the instrument cluster ● The tractor/semitrailer combination If you deactivate Stability Control Assist,
comes on, ASR is deactivated. or drawbar combination jack‐knifing. it cannot stabilise the vehicle.
● The tractor/semitrailer combination
or drawbar combination is at risk of ▶ Only deactivate Stability Control
Function of Stability Control Assist tipping. Assist in the following situations.
Stability Control Assist is operational at
speeds above approximately 20 km/h, Stability Control Assist stabilises a tract- Note
regardless of the operating status of the or/semitrailer combination or drawbar
When you start the vehicle, Stability
service brake or continuous brake. If Sta- combination with a maximum of two trail-
Control Assist is automatically activated.
bility Control Assist intervenes, the indic- ers or semitrailers using the following
ator lamp Á in the instrument cluster automatic control interventions:
It may be better to deactivate Stability
flashes. ● Engine output reduction Control Assist in the following situations:
● Targeted braking of individual wheels ● when driving on a loose surface
If the indicator lamp Á in the instru-
on the towing vehicle
ment cluster lights up continuously when ● when driving with snow chains
● Targeted braking of the trailer or
the vehicle is started, Stability Control ● when operating a snow plough
semitrailer
Assist has a fault. Have Stability Control
● Braking the entire tractor/semitrailer ASR is also deactivated.
Assist checked at a qualified specialist
workshop. combination or drawbar combination ▶ Switch on Stability Control Assist
When driving with more than two trailers as soon as the situations previously
or semitrailers, Stability Control Assist described are no longer present.
must be deactivated.

Driving mode
Operation
Note Using differential locks Note

If you drive with more than two trail- Danger Damage to the differential locks due
ers or semitrailers, you must deactivate to improper use
Risk of accident when the differential
Stability Control Assist. Otherwise, mal- The following points should be observed
lock is engaged
functions or faults might occur. when using differential locks to avoid
When driving off-road or driving with an
damage:
engaged differential lock in the automat-
ic drive program, the electronic man- ▶ Avoid spinning drive wheels on one
agement system may perform unwanted side, engage the differential locks in
gear changes. advance.
The vehicle may, for example, roll back- ▶ Do not engage the differential locks
wards on slopes. when the accelerator or brake pedal
is depressed.
▶ Always drive carefully and be ready ▶ Only engage the differential lock
to brake. when the vehicle is stationary or at
▶ Switch to the manual drive program. walking pace.
▶ Pull away slowly after engaging the
Danger differential lock.
Example: Stability Control Assist OFF button Risk of accident when the differential ▶ Do not drive on high‐grip carriage-
▶ Press the k button. lock is engaged on a firm surface way with engaged differential locks.
◁ If the indicator lamp k in If you engage differential locks on a ▶ Do not drive faster than 50 km/h
the instrument cluster comes firm and non-slip surface, you may lose with the differential locks engaged.
on, Stability Control Assist is control of the vehicle.
deactivated. ▶ Always disengage the differential
locks as soon as possible on a firm,
high‐traction surface.

Driving mode
Operation
Note
Vehicles with one differential lock have a
switch; vehicles with several differential
locks have a control knob.
If the inter‐axle lock is engaged when driv-
ing off‐road, an ABS control intervention
can lead to an interruption in the tractive
power in switch positions 1 or 2.
When the differential lock is engaged, the
display will show the associated status
Rear differential lock switch (example) Differential locks display (example) display v in yellow.
Differential locks If the v status display flashes, the dif-
g Differential lock off ferential lock is not yet engaged or dis-
1 Shift position and display of inter‐axle
engaged. The conditions for engaging or
1 lock, axle through drive disengaging have not been fulfilled, e.g.
2
due to differing wheel speeds. The differ-
Shift position and display of transverse
2 axle locks, rear axles ential lock will be engaged automatically
3
as soon as all engagement conditions are
Shift position and display of transverse
3 axle locks, front axles also engaged met.
▶ Engage the differential locks, e.g. on
slippery carriageway or off road, to
prevent drive wheels from spinning on
Differential lock control knob (example)
one side.

Driving mode
Operation
When a differential lock is engaged, the ◁ The instrument cluster will show ◁ The inter-axle locks in the inter-
shift range for upshifts is automatically a display message with the cur- axle or transfer case are en-
limited for vehicles with an automated rent status of the differential gaged.
manual transmission. During ABS brak- locks. ◁ The indicator lamp i in the
ing regulation, the inter‐axle locks and instrument cluster will come on.
Deactivation: Vehicles with one dif-
the engaging all‐wheel drive are deactiv- ◁ Vehicles with engageable all-
ated and the circle on the display flashes. ferential lock
wheel drive: The indicator lamp
When ABS braking regulation ceases, the ▶ Press the lower section of the button À comes on.
inter‐axle locks and the all‐wheel drive i. ▶ Turn the control knob of the differen-
will be engaged again. ◁ The indicator lamps in the i tial locks to position 2.
▶ Vehicles with automated manual button and instrument cluster go ◁ The transverse axle locks on the
transmission: In particularly chal- out. rear axles are engaged.
lenging driving conditions, select ◁ The instrument cluster will show ▶ Turn the control knob of the differen-
the manual drive program to avoid a display message with the cur- tial locks to position 3.
unwanted gear shifting operations rent status of the differential ◁ The transverse axle locks on the
and interruptions to tractive power locks. front axles are engaged.
( → Page 233).
Activation: Vehicles with several dif- ◁ The indicator lamp ! comes
To switch on: Vehicles with one differential locks on.
ferential lock
▶ Stop the vehicle. Note
▶ Press the i button above. The individual differential locks can be
◁ The indicator lamp on the button selected only one after the other.
i will light up. ▶ Stop the vehicle.
◁ The indicator lamp i in the ▶ Turn the control knob of the differen-
instrument cluster will come on. tial locks to position 1.

Driving mode
Operation
Deactivation: Vehicles with several ◁ The indicator lamp i in the Engaging/disengaging front axle
differential locks instrument cluster goes out. transfer case
◁ Vehicles with engageable all-
Note wheel drive: The indicator lamp
À goes out.
Vehicles with engageable all-wheel
drive (code G4E): If possible, disen- ▶ If the status display v flashes,
gage the inter‐axle locks while still on briefly change your speed, e.g. pull
a loose surface and not on a high‐grip away, brake or change the direction
carriageway. Otherwise, disengaging of travel. Do not continue driving;
the inter‐axle lock can lead to a pres- otherwise, the differential may be
sure surge and a noticeable jerk in the damaged.
cab. Different tyre diameters between ▶ If the v status display does not
the front and rear axles can also lead to go out when the inter-axle locks are
a noticeable pressure surge when the disengaged, stop the vehicle and
inter‐axle lock is disengaged. Avoid a reverse for a short distance. Differential lock control knob (example)
difference of more than 3 % between Control knob

If the differential lock is engaged and
the tyre diameters on the front and rear you are driving faster than 50 km/h, the g Differential lock off
axles. current setting of the differential lock is 1 Switch position for inter‐axle lock, axle
again shown in the display. through drive
▶ Turn the switch of the differential
Switch position for cross‐angle locks, rear
locks to position g. ▶ Disengage the differential locks or 2
axles additionally engaged
◁ When switching from position drive slower than 50 km/h. 3 Switch position for cross‐angle locks, front
3 to position 2: The indicator axles additionally engaged
lamp ! goes out.
◁ The differential locks are disen-
gaged. The differential lock indic-
ators on the display go out.

Driving mode
Operation
During ABS braking regulation, the

inter‐axle lock is disengaged, the front Note
axle is disengaged and the status display The 2 and 3 positions are the
v flashes. Once ABS has finished functions of the differential lock
intervening, the inter‐axle lock and the ( → Page 250).
front axle are engaged again.
Engaging the front axle transfer case Switching the off-road gear transfer
Display for engaging front axle (example) case on and off
When the front axle is not engaged, the ▶ Stop the vehicle.
display shows d. When the front axle is ▶ Turn the switch of the differential Note
engaged, the display shows e. locks to position 1. Damage to the retarder due to fast
◁ The front axle and the rear axles driving in off-road gear
If the status display v is flashing, the
are driven and the inter-axle lock The retarder may be damaged if the
front axle is not yet engaged/disengaged.
is engaged. There is no rotational vehicle speed is too high when the off-
The engagement or disengagement con- speed compensation between the road gear is selected.
ditions have not been met, e.g. different front axle and the rear axles.
wheel speeds. ▶ Do not exceed a road speed of
Disengaging the front axle transfer 50 km/h.
The transfer case inter‐axle lock is en-
case
gaged or disengaged and the front axle
is engaged or disengaged as soon as all ▶ Stop the vehicle.
engagement conditions have been met. ▶ Turn the switch of the differential
When the front axle is engaged, the shift locks to position g.
range for upshifts is automatically limited ◁ Only the rear axles are driven.
for vehicles with an automated manual The inter-axle lock is deactivated.
transmission.

Driving mode
Operation
control intervention can lead to an inter- ▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission:

ruption in the tractive power in switch Shift the transmission into neutral i.
positions 1 or 2. ▶ Press the button m.
▶ Vehicles with automated manual ◁ The off-road gear is disengaged
transmission: In particularly chal- when all engagement conditions
lenging driving conditions, select are met. When the on-road gear
the manual drive program to avoid is selected again, the m in-
unwanted gear shifting operations dicator in the instrument cluster
and interruptions to tractive power goes out.
( → Page 233).
Engaging the off-road gear Notes on hydraulic auxiliary drive

1 Off‐road gear button (example)
▶ Stop the vehicle. Danger
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. Risk of injury due to acceleration
▶ Vehicles with automatic transmission: forces when driving off-road
Shift the transmission into neutral i. You could be thrown out of your seat,
▶ Press the button m. for example.
◁ When all engagement conditions ▶ Always fasten your seat belt, includ-
are met, the off-road gear is en-
ing when driving off‐road.
gaged and the m symbol is
Display in the on-board computer (example) shown in the instrument cluster. ▶ Only switch on the hydraulic auxiliary
If the off‐road gear is selected on vehicles drive when driving off road.
Disengaging off-road gear
with an automated manual transmission, The Stability Control Assist and ASR
the shifting range is automatically lim- ▶ Stop the vehicle. (anti‐slip control) are deactivated during
ited to upshifting. If the inter‐axle lock is ▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. activation of the hydraulic auxiliary drive.
engaged when driving off‐road, an ABS

Driving mode
Operation
The following indicator lamps light up ● there is no fault that impairs safety or The hydraulic auxiliary drive is only en-
when the hydraulic auxiliary drive is act- function. gaged actively and as required when the
ive: following driving systems are switched off:
● Stability Control Assist k ● Cruise control ( → Page 261)
● ASR (acceleration skid control sys- ● Proximity Control Assist
tem) À or k ( → Page 263)
When you switch on the hydraulic auxiliary When the cruise control or Proximity Con-
drive, this has the following effects: trol Assist is switched on, the hydraulic
● Crawler mode is automatically deac- auxiliary drive switches to standby mode.
tivated ( → Page 236). ▶ Vehicles with a gross combination
● The rocking free drive function cannot weight greater than 40 t: In particu-
be switched on ( → Page 238). larly challenging driving conditions,
select the manual drive program to
avoid unwanted gear shifting oper-
Switch hydraulic auxiliary drive on/
ations and interruptions to tractive
off
power ( → Page 233).
Requirements
Deactivating
● The vehicle has been started.
● The vehicle speed is less than ▶ Press the button F.
60 km/h. ◁ If the indicator lamp in the but-
● the hydraulic fluid has reached oper- ton F flashes, the activation
ating temperature. 1 Hydraulic auxiliary drive button conditions (e.g. the hydraulic oil
● a gear is engaged. temperature) have not been met.
2 Indicator lamp for hydraulic auxiliary
● the rocking free drive function is drive (example)
switched off.

Driving mode
Operation
The hydraulic auxiliary drive is automat- The hydraulic auxiliary drive is automatic- Checking the oil level of the hydraulic
ically activated as soon as the following ally switched off in any one of the follow- auxiliary drive
activation conditions are met: ing cases:
● the service brake is released. ● the vehicle speed of 60 km/h is ex-
● The vehicle speed is less than ceeded.
15 km/h. ● the hydraulic oil temperature deviates
● the accelerator pedal is depressed. from the permissible operating tem-
perature.
If the activation conditions are met, the in-
dicator lamp in the button F lights up
and the indicator lamp F in the instru- ● there is a fault that impairs safety or
ment cluster lights up white. The hydraulic function.
auxiliary drive is in standby mode.
When the front axle is driven, the indicator
lamp F in the instrument cluster lights
Before starting the journey, the hydraulic
up blue.
system's oil level should be checked when
Deactivation cold at an oil temperature of approxim-
ately 20°C.
▶ Press the button F.
◁ The hydraulic auxiliary drive is ▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface
switched off. The indicator lamp and apply the parking brake.
in the button F and the indic- ▶ Switch off the vehicle.
ator lamp F in the instrument ▶ Turn the cap 1 anti-clockwise and
cluster go out. remove it.
▶ Pull out the oil dipstick, wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth and reinsert it.

Driving mode
Driving systems
▶ Pull out the oil dipstick again, check The reversing camera cannot replace a
the oil level and correct if necessary. Note safety officer or signaller. When manoeuv-
▶ Slide in the oil dipstick, put on the Observe the instructions for external ring or parking, always seek assistance
cap and tighten it as far as it will go. cleaning ( → Page 384). from a safety officer or signaller.
When reverse gear is engaged, the image
▶ Clean the radiator 1 and the blades
from the reversing camera is automatic-
Cleaning the radiator/fan of the hy- with a jet of compressed air, steam or
ally shown on the Multimedia Radio Touch
draulic auxiliary drive water. Guide the cleaning jet parallel
display. It is then not possible to change
to the radiator fins and against the
the display manually.
airflow direction.
▶ After cleaning, dry the air side of the If the display shows only a black, grey, or
radiator with compressed air. blue image instead of the image from the
reversing camera, the reversing camera
has a malfunction. In this case, have the
Driving systems reversing camera checked at a qualified
Reversing camera specialist workshop.
You can set the screen brightness in the
Reversing camera function
Multimedia Radio Touch ( → Page 191).
The reversing camera is only an aid. It
is not a substitute for your attention to System limits
Clean the radiator 1 and its fan regularly your surroundings. The responsibility for In the following situations, the reversing
to avoid malfunctions. safe manoeuvring and parking remains camera only has limited function, or does
with you. When manoeuvring and parking, not function at all:
make sure that there are no persons, an-
● The weather conditions are poor, e.g.
imals, or objects in the manoeuvring area.
heavy rain, snow, fog, storm, or spray.
You could otherwise endanger yourself
● The light conditions are poor, e.g. at
and others.
night, or there is glare.

Driving mode
Driving systems
● The surroundings are illuminated with q Activates and shows the stored speed
fluorescent light, e.g. fluorescent Note limitation, decreases the set speed
lamps or LED lighting. The display If the display's usability is significantly limitation
may flicker. restricted, e.g. in the event of pixel er- h Select cruise control/Proximity Control
rors, have it repaired or replaced. Assist ( → Page 263)
● The camera lens is covered, dirty
o Deactivating the limiter
or fogged up. Observe the notes
on cleaning the reversing camera The È symbol in the instrument cluster
Limiter
( → Page 389). shows the status of the limiter in colour:
● The camera or the rear of the vehicle Overview of the limiter
● Grey symbol: The limiter is selected,
is damaged. In this case, have the but not engaged.
camera, its position, and setting
● White symbol: The limiter is engaged
checked at a qualified specialist work-
and restricts the vehicle speed to the
shop.
limit speed you set.
Do not use the reversing camera in these
situations. You may injure others or col- Activating and deactivating the lim-
lide with objects when parking. iter
Select the limiter
Note
The contrast of the display may be im- The limiter restricts the vehicle speed to
paired by incident sunlight or other light the set limit speed. You can accelerate
sources, e.g. when you are driving out of the vehicle up to the limit speed using the
Limiter accelerator pedal. In order to keep the set
a garage. In these cases, be particularly
attentive. È Selecting limiter limit speed on downhill slopes, the limiter
Ñ Activates and sets the current speed automatically brakes the vehicle with the
limitation, increases the set speed continuous brake. If the set speed is ex-
limitation
ceeded, the È symbol will flash in the

Driving mode
Driving systems
instrument cluster. If you cannot switch Increasing or decreasing the limit ▶ When overtaking is complete, briefly
on the limiter, the instrument cluster speed release the accelerator pedal and
shows the display message – – – km/h depress it again.
in grey. You can change the settings of the limit ◁ The limiter again restricts the
speed while driving.
▶ Press the button È. vehicle speed to the set limit
◁ The instrument cluster shows the ▶ Activate the limiter. speed.
È symbol in grey. ▶ In 1 km/h increments: Press the
q or Ñ button briefly until Deactivation
Activation while driving the desired speed is displayed in the The limit speed remains stored if you
instrument cluster. deactivate the limiter.
▶ Select the limiter.
▶ Drive at the desired speed and briefly or ▶ Press the o button.
press the Ñ button. ▶ Press and hold the q or Ñ ◁ The instrument cluster shows the
◁ The limiter is activated and the button until the desired speed is dis- È symbol in grey.
current vehicle speed is stored as played in the instrument cluster. or
the limit speed.
Driving ▶ Using the h button, select cruise
or control or the Proximity Control As-
You can exceed the set limit speed, e.g.
▶ Briefly press the q button. when overtaking.
sist.
◁ The limiter is activated and ad- ◁ The instrument cluster shows the
opts the stored limit speed. The ▶ Briefly depress the accelerator ped- h or W symbols and the
instrument cluster shows the al beyond the pressure point (kick- set speed in grey.
È symbol and the set speed down).
limit in white. ◁ The set limit speed is still shown
and the È symbol flashes in
the instrument cluster.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Cruise control Do not use cruise control in the following Ñ Activate and adjust current speed/
situations: increase set speed
Overview of cruise control ● if the traffic conditions do not allow q Activate and call up set speed/reduce
you to drive at a constant speed (e.g. set speed
Danger È Selecting limiter
in heavy traffic or on winding roads)
Risk of accident due to unknown ● if the drive wheels could lose traction o Deactivates cruise control
stored speed on slippery roads, e.g., when braking
If you call up the stored speed and it dif- or accelerating The h symbol in the instrument cluster
fers from the current speed, the vehicle shows the status of cruise control by
● if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to
will accelerate or brake. colour:
fog, heavy rain or snow
If you do not know the stored speed, ● Grey symbol: Cruise control has been
the vehicle may accelerate or brake selected, but not activated.
unexpectedly. ● White symbol: Cruise control has
been activated and maintains the set
▶ Take the traffic situation into ac- speed.
count before calling up the stored
speed.
Activating and deactivating cruise
▶ If the stored speed is not known, control
store the desired speed again.
Selecting cruise control
Note Cruise control maintains the set vehicle
Engine damage due to excessively speed on your behalf. If the set speed
high engine speed is exceeded on downhill gradients by
If you drive in the overspeed range, you Cruise control more than the set speed tolerance, the
will damage the engine. h Select cruise control/Proximity Control continuous brake is applied automatically.
Assist
▶ Do not drive in the overspeed range. If you are driving slower than 15 km/h,
cruise control cannot be activated.

Driving mode
Driving systems
If you cannot switch on the cruise control, ◁ The instrument cluster displays why the vehicle speed and the set
the instrument cluster shows the display the h symbol and the set speed may differ slightly under certain
message – – – km/h in grey. speed in white. circumstances. This results in lower fuel
Cruise control is automatically deactiv- ▶ Release the accelerator pedal. consumption. In the A economy and A
ated in the following situations, if: ◁ In order to maintain the fleet drive programs, you can set the
set speed, cruise control speed to a maximum of 85 km/h. In the
● you are driving at less than 10 km/h.
automatically brakes or A economy + drive program, the speed
● you shift the transmission into neutral can be set to a maximum of 82 km/h. In
accelerates the vehicle.
for more than five seconds. the A economy and A economy + drive
If cruise control is deactivated automatic- Increasing and reducing the speed programs, you can exceed the set speed
ally, an acoustic signal sounds. When cruise control is active, you can by depressing the accelerator pedal, e.g.
▶ Press the button h repeatedly change the speed setting while driving. when overtaking.
until the instrument cluster displays ▶ To adjust in 0.5 km/h increments: You can use the continuous brake to de-
the symbol h in grey. Press q or Ñ button repeatedly celerate. Cruise control remains activated.
until the desired speed is shown in If you reset the continuous brake lever,
Activation while driving
the instrument cluster. but do not deactivate it, the vehicle will
▶ Select cruise control. only accelerate on downhill slopes up to
or
▶ Drive at the required speed and the set speed.
briefly press the Ñ button. ▶ To adjust in 5 km/h increments:
If the continuous brake is deactivated, the
◁ Cruise control is activated, and Press and hold the q or Ñ
vehicle will accelerate to the last stored
the current speed is set. button until the desired speed is dis-
speed.
played in the instrument cluster.
or If cruise control is decelerating the vehicle
Driving tips using the continuous brake and you simul-
▶ Briefly press the q button.
◁ Cruise control is activated and In the A economy and A fleet drive taneously depress the brake pedal, cruise
adopts the stored speed. programs, cruise control maintains the control remains activated.
set speed less forcefully. This explains

Driving mode
Driving systems
If the braking power from the continuous Overtaking ◁ The instrument cluster shows the
brake is insufficient: È symbol in grey.
It is possible to exceed the set speed, e.g.
▶ Shift down a gear and reduce your when overtaking. or
speed.
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal. ▶ Select Proximity Control Assist with
◁ If you shift down on a down- the h button.
hill slope without adjusting the ▶ Once the overtaking manoeuvre is
speed, cruise control sets an en- finished, release the accelerator pedal ◁ The instrument cluster displays
again. the W symbol and the set
gine speed lower than the en-
◁ Cruise control adjusts the speed in white. Proximity Control
gine overspeed. The set speed
vehicle's speed to the set speed. Assist is activated.
remains set and is automatically
re-established as soon as this is
Deactivation
possible in a higher gear. Proximity Control Assist
The speed remains stored if you deactiv-
The vehicle is braked by the continuous Overview of Proximity Control Assist
ate cruise control.
brake automatically in the following situ-
ations: ▶ Press the o button. Danger
● Cruise control is activated. or Risk of accident due to the Proximity
● The vehicle speed exceeds the set Control Assist's detection limitations
▶ When cruise control accelerates the
speed by more than the upper speed Proximity Control Assist does not react:
vehicle, depress the brake pedal.
tolerance.
◁ The instrument cluster shows the ● to pedestrians or animals
When the continuous brake is activated h symbol and the set speed in ● to oncoming vehicles or cross traffic
and you activate cruise control, the con- grey.
tinuous brake regulates the set speed on Proximity Control Assist is therefore
or unable to issue a warning or intervene
downhill slopes.
▶ Select the limiter with the È but- in these situations.
ton.

Driving mode
Driving systems
▶ Always carefully observe the traffic The system may be impaired or may not
conditions and be ready to brake at Danger function in the following situations:
all times. Risk of accident if Proximity Con- ● if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to
trol Assist does not decelerate suf- insufficient road illumination or due to
Note ficiently snow, rain, fog, or heavy spray
Proximity Control Assist reacts to Proximity Control Assist only brakes ● if there is glare, for example, from
obstacles on the carriageway, e.g. your vehicle with part of the maximum oncoming traffic, direct sunlight, or
stationary or parked vehicles that have possible braking power. If this deceler- reflections (e.g. if the road surface is
been detected by the camera and the ation is not sufficient, Proximity Control wet)
radar sensor only up to a speed of Assist will give you a visual warning. ● if the windscreen in the area of the
50 km/h. ▶ Apply the brakes yourself in these camera is dirty, misted up or dam-
situations, and try to take evasive aged
Danger action. ● If the windscreen around the camera
is obscured, e.g. due to a defective
Risk of accident due to Proximity ▶ Observe the notes on particular driv- windscreen wiper or a sticker
Control Assist's detection limitations ing situations under "Active Brake
● if the carriageway is very narrow and
Proximity Control Assist cannot always Assist" ( → Page 283).
clearly identify other road users and winding
Proximity Control Assist has been de- ● If the radar sensor is impaired due
complex traffic situations.
veloped for journeys on motorways and to interference from other radar
In these cases, Proximity Control Assist high‐speed major roads. The system is sources, such as strong radar
may unexpectedly accelerate or brake not intended for use in urban traffic, for reflections in car washes
the vehicle and intervene unexpectedly. example.
Proximity Control Assist may not detect
▶ Drive on carefully and be ready to Do not use Proximity Control Assist when narrow vehicles driving in front, e.g. mo-
brake, particularly if Proximity Con- towing or using the vehicle as a work torcycles or vehicles not travelling in line
trol Assist issues a warning. machine. with your vehicle.

Driving mode
Driving systems
The following driving situations in particu- Proximity Control Assist must not be used The W icon in the instrument cluster
lar should be noted: in the following cases: shows the Proximity Control Assist status
● Cornering, entering and exiting bends ● On slippery roads. The drive wheels by colour:
● Your own vehicle driving on a differ- may lose their grip when braking or ● Grey icon: Proximity Control Assist is
ent line or vehicles in front of you accelerating and the vehicle may skid. selected, but not activated.
driving on a different line ● when there is poor visibility, e.g. due ● White icon: Proximity Control Assist
● The loads of vehicles in front that to fog, heavy rain, or snow. is activated, but a vehicle in front has
protrude into the lane ● In cities and on country roads. not been detected.
● Other vehicles changing lane ● White icon and vehicle within the
If Proximity Control Assist no longer de-
● Vehicles turning off blue icon: Proximity Control Assist
tects a vehicle driving in front because it
● Overtaking is activated and a vehicle in front has
has turned off the road, for example, Prox-
● Winding stretches of road been detected.
imity Control Assist may accelerate to the
● Obstacles and stationary vehicles set (stored) speed. On a filter lane or a If a vehicle ahead has been detected, the
slip road, this speed may be too high. instrument cluster additionally displays
▶ Regularly clean the distance sensor
If the vehicle is equipped with PPC its driving speed and the distance to the
cover and the window in the camera’s
detected vehicle.
field of view ( → Page 389). (Predictive Powertrain Control)
( → Page 270), the distance to the vehicle
If the distance sensor cover or the wind- Note
in front can be increased when PPC is
screen in the camera's field of vision is
intervening, e.g. before lowering. This is The menu window Assistance in the
dirty or icy, its functionality may be im-
intended to help achieve an efficient Driving mode menu D ( → Page 154)
paired.
driving style. also shows the vehicle speed of the
▶ Deactivate Proximity Control Assist detected vehicle and the distance to
before leaving the driver's seat and the detected vehicle.
secure the vehicle using the parking
brake.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Activate and deactivate Proximity Proximity Control Assist brakes the ● if you are driving at under 5 km/h and
Control Assist vehicle with the continuous brake in the no vehicles are detected in front of
following situations: you.
Functions and activation conditions ● The vehicle exceeds the set speed, ● if you shift the transmission into neut-
Proximity Control Assist controls the including the set speed tolerance, e.g. ral for more than approximately five
speed and assists you in automatically on downhill slopes. seconds.
maintaining the distance from a vehicle ● A slower vehicle in front has been ● if you depress the brake pedal while
detected in front. If there is no vehicle detected. Proximity Control Assist accelerates
in front of you, Proximity Control Assist the vehicle.
When the continuous brake slows the
works like cruise control from a speed of
vehicle, the indicator lamp Ã in the ● if you select the reverse gear.
15 km/h. ● if the vehicle is stationary and you
instrument cluster lights up.
If a vehicle is detected in front, it will func- leave the driver's seat.
Proximity Control Assist may also brake
tion from a speed of 0 km/h. ● if the vehicle is stationary and you
the vehicle using the service brake in
open the driver's door.
order to maintain the specified distance.
Note ● if an implement is detected that im-
If the vehicle in front is no longer detec- pairs the function of the distance
The maximum adjustable speed depends ted, e.g. if it changes lane, your vehicle
on the selected drive program, as with sensor or the view of the multifunc-
will accelerate up to the set speed. tion camera.
cruise control ( → Page 233).
Proximity Control Assist cannot be activ- ● if there is a fault in the brake system/
If Proximity Control Assist detects a ated or is deactivated automatically in the electronic management system.
vehicle in front driving at a slower speed, following situations: ● if the distance sensor initialisation is
your vehicle is slowed and the specified
● if you are driving at under 15 km/h not yet complete.
distance selected by you is maintained.
on roads with downhill or uphill gradi- If Proximity Control Assist is deactivated
ents of over 10%. automatically, an acoustic signal sounds.

Driving mode
Driving systems
If you cannot switch on Proximity Control Select Proximity Control Assist If you switch from cruise control to Prox-
Assist, the instrument cluster shows the imity Control Assist and it was previously
display message – – ,– km/h in grey. on, the instrument cluster displays the
W symbol in white. Proximity Control
Proximity Control Assist remains activated
Assist is activated. The vehicle adapts its
in the following situations:
speed to that of the vehicle in front, but
● if you brake using the continuous
only up to the desired and set speed.
brake.
● if Proximity Control Assist deceler- Activation while driving
ates the vehicle using the continuous
At speeds below 15 km/h, you can only
brake or service brake and you simul-
activate Proximity Control Assist if a
taneously depress the brake pedal.
vehicle in front has been detected.
▶ Drive at a speed greater than
Proximity Control Assist 15 km/h.
▶ Select Proximity Control Assist.
h Select Proximity Control Assist/cruise
control ▶ Briefly press the Ñ button.
Ñ Activate and adjust current speed/ ◁ Proximity Control Assist is activ-
increase set speed ated and the current speed is set.
q Activate and call up set speed/reduce
set speed
or
È Selecting limiter ▶ Briefly press the q button.
o Deactivate Proximity Control Assist ◁ Proximity Control Assist is activ-
ated and the last stored speed is
▶ Press the é button repeatedly set. The instrument cluster dis-
until the instrument cluster displays plays the W symbol and the
the W symbol in grey. set speed in white.

Driving mode
Driving systems
▶ Release the accelerator pedal. If you switch off the vehicle when it is or
◁ The vehicle adapts its speed to stationary, the electronic parking brake is ▶ Press the button q.
that of the vehicle in front, but automatically set.
◁ The vehicle pulls away and adapts
only up to the desired and set its speed to that of the vehicle in
speed. Pulling away and stopping the vehicle
front, but only up to the desired
Moving off and set speed.
Activating when the vehicle is sta-
tionary The moving‐off function of Proximity Con- To move on in vehicles with a turbo re-
trol Assist provides assistance when driv- tarder clutch, you must depress the ac-
When the vehicle is stationary, you can ing in traffic jams. Your vehicle pulls away
only activate Proximity Control Assist if a celerator pedal permanently in order to
automatically after a standstill within two complete the moving‐on procedure.
vehicle in front has been detected. seconds if the vehicle in front drives on.
▶ Apply the electronic parking brake or In order for the vehicle to pull away auto-
Stopping
apply the service brake. matically, the following conditions must
▶ Select Proximity Control Assist. be fulfilled:
Danger
▶ Briefly press the q button. ● The vehicle in front of you must drive Risk of accident if the driver's seat is
◁ Proximity Control Assist is activ- on or already be more than 10 m vacated with Proximity Control Assist
ated and the last stored speed is away. active
set. The instrument cluster dis- ● The forward gear must be engaged. If the vehicle is only braked by Proximity
plays the W symbol and the Control Assist when you leave the driver-
● The continuous brake must be deac-
set speed in white. 's seat, it may roll away in the following
tivated.
▶ Release the electronic parking brake ● The electronic parking brake and the
situations:
or the service brake. service brake must be released. ● If there is a malfunction in the system
◁ Proximity Control Assist prevents or in the power supply
the vehicle from rolling away. ▶ To move on, briefly depress the accel-
erator pedal. ● If Proximity Control Assist is switched
off, e.g. by a vehicle occupant or from
outside the vehicle

Driving mode
Driving systems
● If the accelerator pedal is pressed, e.g. or

by a vehicle occupant ▶ To adjust in 5 km/h increments:
● If the button q is pressed, e.g. by a Press and hold button q or Ñ
vehicle occupant. until the desired speed is displayed
on the instrument cluster.
▶ Before the driver leaves the driver-
's seat, always switch off Proxim-
ity Control Assist and secure the Note
vehicle to prevent if from rolling By setting the speed tolerance, you
away. define by how much the set speed may
be exceeded ( → Page 272).
If Proximity Control Assist detects that the
vehicle in front has stopped, it will brake Setting a specified distance to the
your vehicle to a standstill. Depending on vehicle in front ▶ Press the Ù button repeatedly until
the specified distance set, your vehicle the ACC distance menu is displayed
will come to a standstill at a sufficient The specified distance for Proximity Con- in the instrument cluster.
distance behind the vehicle in front. trol Assist can be set to five levels. After a ▶ Press r or s button to reduce
vehicle start, the average target distance or to increase the specified distance.
Increasing or reducing the speed is automatically set.
◁ The bar display shows the spe-
You can only change the speed setting ▶ Make sure that you maintain the min- cified distance you have selected.
while driving. imum distance to the vehicle in front ▶ Press 9 button to exit the menu
as required by law. Adjust the spe- window.
▶ To adjust in 0.5 km/h increments: cified distance to the vehicle in front
Press q or Ñ button repeatedly or
if necessary.
until the desired speed is shown in
▶ Wait for approximately three seconds.
the instrument cluster.
◁ The setting is stored automatic-
ally.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Overtaking or PPC (Predictive Powertrain Control)

It is possible to exceed the set speed, e.g. ▶ Select the limiter with the h but- Notes on PPC (Predictive Powertrain
when overtaking: ton.
Control)
◁ The instrument cluster shows the
▶ Maintain a sufficient distance to the È symbol in grey.
vehicle in front. Danger
▶ Depress the accelerator pedal. or Risk of accident despite route-based
▶ Once the overtaking manoeuvre is ▶ Using the h button, select the speed adaptation
finished, release the accelerator pedal cruise control ( → Page 261). Route-based speed adaptation may be
again. ◁ The instrument cluster displays faulty or temporarily unavailable in the
◁ Proximity Control Assist adjusts the h symbol and the set following situations:
the speed to the set speed. speed in white. Cruise control ● if the driver does not follow the prede-
is activated. termined route
Deactivating
Observe the conditions that lead to auto- ● if the map data is not up to date or
The speed remains stored if you deactiv- matic deactivation of Proximity Control unavailable
ate Proximity Control Assist. Assist. ● in roadworks
▶ Press the o button. ● in poor weather and road conditions
or ● if the accelerator pedal is depressed
▶ When Proximity Control Assist accel- ● if there are electronically displayed
erates the vehicle, depress the brake speed limits
pedal.
◁ The instrument cluster shows the ▶ Adapt your speed to the traffic situ-
W symbol and the set speed in ation.
grey. The driver is always responsible for choos-
ing the right speed and observing other

Driving mode
Driving systems
road users. This applies in particular to You can activate and deactivate PPC in PPC is active when the following condi-
junctions, roundabouts, and traffic lights, the Settings menu ä, Assistance menu tions are met:
as route‐based speed adaptation does not window ( → Page 165). ● PPC has been activated in the Set-
brake the vehicle to a standstill. tings menu.
PPC Interurban
PPC is intended for use on motorways and ● Cruise control or Proximity Control
trunk roads. Do not use PPC within towns PPC Interurban uses map data to react to Assist is active.
and in heavy traffic. route events. By reducing power output in ● GPS signal is available.
good time prior to route events, coasting ● Map data is available.
PPC can be used to save fuel.
PPC is restricted in the following situ-
PPC uses topographical map data to op- The following route events are taken into ations:
timise fuel consumption and adjust per- account by PPC Interurban: ● The transmission is in the manual
formance according to driving conditions. ● PPC sets the cruise control speed in drive program.
PPC influences the gear selection and advance to suit the speed limit ahead. ● You step on the accelerator or brake
adjusts the speed in the cruise control The driver can subsequently adjust pedal.
( → Page 261) or Proximity Control Assist the cruise control speed. ● The continuous brake is active.
( → Page 263). ● PPC Interurban uses data on bends, ● Proximity Control Assist brakes the
roundabouts, traffic signs and junc- vehicle.
The following route events are taken into
tion situations to calculate a suitable
account by PPC: ● The power take‐off is engaged.
speed.
● Speed adaptation facilitates better ● Automatic speed adaptation is active.
utilisation of momentum on downhill You can activate and deactivate consider-
The status of PPC is displayed in the in-
gradients. ation of these route events independently
strument cluster as follows:
● On uphill gradients, the power output of each other in the instrument cluster via
the Settings menu ä, Assistance menu ● Grey symbol é: Cruise control is
is optimised and may be reduced
window ( → Page 165). deactivated.
before reaching the top of the hill.

Driving mode
Driving systems
● White symbol é without PPC dis- during the trip, this can result in a mal- Setting speed tolerances and factors
play: Cruise control is active but PPC function of PPC in certain situations. In
is unavailable or deactivated. this case, PPC must be deactivated. ▶ Press the button Ù on the multifunc-
● White symbol é with PPC display: tion steering wheel repeatedly until
PPC is activated and cruise control is the input window Cruise control is
Setting PPC (Predictive Powertrain
active. displayed in the instrument cluster.
Control)
● Green symbol é with PPC display: ▶ Use the r and s steering-
Activating/deactivating wheel buttons to change back and
PPC actively controls the speed and
gear selection in cruise control or forth between the setting options.
Proximity Control Assist. ▶ Use the t and u steering-
wheel buttons to set the speed tol-
System limits erances/speed factors.
Route‐based speed adjustment does not Setting the upper speed tolerance
take right‐of‐way regulations into account
in every situation. The driver is respons- ▶ Select menu item 1 to set the upper
ible for complying with road traffic regula- speed tolerance.
tions and driving at a suitable speed. ◁ The speed tolerance changes in
1 km/h increments from 2 km/h
In difficult conditions (e.g. unclear road
to 15 km/h.
conditions, narrow lanes, wet conditions,
snow or ice) or when driving with a trailer, The suggested value for the upper speed
the speed selected by the system may ▶ In the instrument cluster under the tolerance is at least 4 km/h. If the sug-
not always be suitable to the situation. In Settings menu ä, Assistance menu gested value is not confirmed by the
these situations the driver must intervene window, activate and deactivated the driver, the upper speed tolerance is set
accordingly. PPC ( → Page 165). to the factory setting (2 km/h).
If the gross vehicle weight is more than The higher you set the upper speed toler-
80 t and power take‐offs are operated ance, the greater the savings in fuel.

Driving mode
Driving systems
If cruise control is activated and the set up to -10 km/h. Factory setting is Resetting the settings
speed is 50 km/h or less, the upper -6 km/h.
speed tolerance is set to 2 km/h. ▶ Select menu item 6 to reset all the
The higher you set the lower speed toler- settings to the factory settings.
Setting momentum peaks ance, the greater the savings in fuel.
▶ To set momentum peaks, select menu Setting the cornering speed factor Notes on personalisation
item 2. With the "Personalisation" function, de-
▶ Select the 4 menu item to set the
◁ The speed tolerance changes in cornering speed factor.
pending on the driver card, the following
1 km/h increments from 1 km/h settings are saved automatically in the
◁ The speed factor changes in five vehicle:
to 4 km/h. levels. The factory setting is level
● Selected drive program
The suggested value for the momentum three.
PPC system settings (Predictive
peak is at least 2 km/h. If the suggested The higher the level set, the higher the Powertrain Control)
value is not confirmed by the driver, the vehicle speed when cornering.
momentum peak is set to the factory If the vehicle has been switched off for
setting (0 km/h). Setting deceleration before a route more than eight hours or the driver card
The higher you set the momentum peak, event has been changed, the settings are reset
to the minimum values in some situations
the greater the savings in fuel. ▶ Select the 5 menu item to set the (see the following table).
If cruise control is activated and the set start of deceleration.
speed is 50 km/h or less, the momentum ◁ The start of deceleration changes This is most likely to happen if the set-
peak is set to 0 km/h. in five levels. The factory setting tings selected by the driver have a neg-
is level three. ative impact on fuel consumption. If the
Setting the lower speed tolerance driver has selected settings which are
The higher the level is set, the earlier the more economical than the minimum value
▶ Select menu item 3 to set the lower vehicle starts deceleration before a route for fuel consumption in the following
speed tolerance. event. table, the settings will be maintained.
◁ The speed tolerance changes in
1 km/h increments from -1 km/h

Driving mode
Driving systems
Saved settings: If the driver does not confirm the value

Reset value for exten- settings shown, the default values will be
Setting
ded absence restored automatically.
Aeco-
Selected drive program
nomy/Aeconomy+1
Frontguard Assist
PPC Interurban on/off PPC Interurban on
PPC Auto Set Speed Notes on Frontguard Assist
PPC Auto Set Speed on
on/off Frontguard Assist can inform the driver
4 km/h, if lower value 2 Display in instrument cluster
Upper speed tolerance about pedestrians or cyclists who are
is set (example)
standing or moving in front of the vehicle
Downhill speed toler- 2 km/h, if lower value and warn the driver.
ance is set Persons in the monitoring range –
6 km/h, if lower value
Info
Lower speed tolerance
is set When detecting a pedestrian or cyclist
Level 3, if higher value within the sensors' monitoring range, the
Cornering speed factor
is set
system informs the driver by a display on
Coast before route Level 3, if lower value is the indicator lamp 4 in the instrument
event set
cluster.
1
In the Fire and Fleet drive programs, the reset
value is Fire or Fleet. When the vehicle is switched on, the dis-
1 Monitoring range (example) play is active from standstill up to a speed
Note on the “Upper speed tolerance” and of 15 km/h (forward travel).
“Lowering speed tolerance” settings: If
the value set by the driver deviates from Persons in the monitoring range –
the factory settings, the current setting warning
value is displayed when the vehicle is If the system detects a pedestrian or cyc-
started (pop‐up) and can be confirmed list within the sensors' monitoring range
by the driver. and classifies the situation as critical, it

Driving mode
Driving systems
warns the driver by displaying the red critical by the system in conjunction strong or disruptive radar reflections
indicator lamp 4 in the instrument with the vehicle speed. caused by crash barriers or other
cluster. An acoustic warning also sounds. infrastructure
System limits ● if the windscreen in the area of the
While the system issues an audible warn-
ing, the audio equipment installed at the camera is dirty, misted up or dam-
Warning aged
factory and the hands‐free system are
muted. Risk of accident due to limited detec- ● if the windscreen in the area of the
tion capability of Frontguard Assist camera is obscured, for example,
The warning is active when driving for-
Frontguard Assist cannot always clearly due to a faulty windscreen wiper or
wards from vehicle start‐up to a vehicle
identify objects and complex traffic situ- a sticker
speed of 15 km/h.
ations.
If the driver depresses the accelerator Frontguard Assist may not react correctly
In these cases, Frontguard Assist may in the following situations in particular:
pedal beyond the pressure point (kick‐
provide information without reason and/ ● if pedestrians or cyclists move into
down), the colour of the indicator lamp in
or not issue any warnings. the sensors' monitoring range quickly
the instrument cluster changes from red
to yellow and the acoustic warning goes ▶ Always carefully observe the traffic ● on bends with tight radii
out. conditions and be ready to brake at ● with pedestrians or cyclists, who are
all times. obscured by other objects
The indicator lamp in the instrument
● if the contour of a pedestrian does
cluster extinguishes in the following scen-
The system may be impaired or may not not stand out from the background
arios:
function in the following situations in ● if pedestrians or cyclists are no longer
● The detected pedestrian or cyclist is particular: detected as such, e.g. due to special
no longer within the monitoring range
● if the sensors are dirty, covered with clothing or other objects
of the sensors.
ice, or obscured, for example, due to ● where pedestrians or cyclists are in a
● The pedestrian or cyclist is no longer snow or heavy spray tunnel
detected by the sensors.
● if the radar sensors are impaired due
● The distance to the detected pedestri- to interference, for example, from
an or cyclist is no longer evaluated as

Driving mode
Driving systems
at very low vehicle speeds (e.g. when the Active Brake Assist 6
vehicle crawls), the system must not issue Note
a warning despite a critical situation. The info display in the instrument Notes on Active Brake Assist 6
cluster (indicator lamp 4) cannot be General notes
Automatic deactivation of Frontguard switched off.
Assist Active Brake Assist can have the following
▶ Deactivation: In the instrument effects:
If Frontguard Assist is malfunctioning cluster, under the settings menu ä,
or has been automatically deactivated ● Ideally avoid a collision with the
menu window Assistance, switch off
due to a device being used, the yellow vehicle in front.
the Frontguard Assist.
R indicator lamp in the instrument ● Reduce the danger of a collision with
◁ Frontguard Assist's visual and the vehicle in front or a stationary
cluster comes on. No information is then acoustic warning is switched off.
provided about objects in the monitor- obstacle in the path of your vehicle.
▶ Activation: In the instrument cluster,
● Reduce the consequences of a colli-
ing range and no warning is issued by under the settings menu ä, menu
Frontguard Assist. In the event of a mal- sion with the vehicle in front.
window Assistance, switch off the
function, have the system checked at a ● Drivers are able to react to pedestri-
Frontguard Assist.
qualified specialist workshop. ans and cyclists with partial braking
◁ Frontguard Assist's visual and and full‐stop braking.
acoustic warning is switched on.
Activating/deactivating Frontguard If Active Brake Assist detects the risk of a
Assist warning rear‐end collision, a warning tone sounds
When you start the vehicle, Frontguard and the instrument cluster shows the
Assist's visual and acoustic warning is indicator lamp N for vehicles or 4
automatically activated. for pedestrians or cyclists.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Active Brake Assist may be impaired or

may not function in the following situ- Note
ations in particular: Following delivery of the vehicle, over
● in snow, rain, fog or heavy spray the course of a certain distance, the
● if the carriageway is very narrow and Active Brake Assist sensors adjust auto-
winding matically. During this teach‐in process,
● if the radar sensors are impaired Active Brake Assist is not available or
due to interference from other radar available only to a limited extent.
1 Display in the instrument cluster sources, such as strong radar reflec-
(example: pedestrian) In some circumstances, particularly those
tions in car washes
listed below, Active Brake Assist does not
f you do not react to the visual and aud- ● if there is glare, e.g. from oncoming
react correctly:
ible warnings when a vehicle is detected traffic, direct sunlight, greatly varying
and the danger persists, partial braking ● to pedestrians or vehicles if they
light conditions, or reflections (e.g. if
intervention will be initiated. move quickly into the sensor detec-
the road surface is wet)
tion range
If a pedestrian/cyclist is detected, partial ● if the windscreen in the area of the
● on bends with tight radii
braking is initiated at the same time as camera is dirty, obscured, or dam-
aged, for example, due to a faulty ● if the load of the vehicle in front pro-
the visual and acoustic warning.
windscreen wiper or a sticker trudes into the lane in which you are
If you do not react to the partial brake ap- driving.
plication and the danger persists, Active ● at very low speeds (e.g., when the
vehicle is creeping) ● to pedestrians who are obscured by
Brake Assist automatically initiates emer- other objects
gency braking. ● to contours of a pedestrian, who does
System limits not stand out from the background
● if a pedestrian is no longer detected
Full system performance is not yet avail- as such, for example, due to special
able for a few seconds after switching on clothing or other objects
the vehicle or after driving off. ● to pedestrians in a tunnel

Driving mode
Driving systems
The Active Brake Assist can only react to The following vehicles in particular may
pedestrians up to a speed of 60 km/h. Danger not be detected by Active Brake Assist:
Risk of accident due to Active Brake ● narrow vehicles
Danger Assist's detection limitations ● motorcycles
Risk of accident due to Active Brake Active Brake Assist does not react: ● vehicles not travelling in line with your
Assist's limited detection capabilities ● to oncoming vehicles vehicle
Active Brake Assist cannot always ● to animals ▶ Please read the information on spe-
clearly identify objects and complex cial driving situations that may lead to
Active Brake Assist is therefore unable
traffic situations. system limitations ( → Page 283).
to issue a warning or intervene in these
In such cases, Active Brake Assist may: situations. Active Brake Assist may unexpectedly
● issue an unnecessary warning and ▶ Always carefully observe the traffic issue warnings or brake your vehicle in
brake the vehicle conditions and be ready to brake at the following situations in particular:
● possibly not issue a warning or inter- all times. ● in car washes
vene ● if there are stationary obstacles in-
Active Brake Assist is not a substitute Note side a tunnel
for you paying attention to your sur- Active Brake Assist can also react to ● on ferries
roundings and does not relieve you of pedestrians or cyclists who are coming ● in loading areas
your responsibility pertaining to road towards you or are moving at the edge ● at toll gates
traffic law, in particular in relation to of the road. ● in workshops
maintaining a safe distance, your speed, Critical driving situations are described
Active Brake Assist cannot override phys-
and braking in good time. as:
ical limits.
▶ Always pay careful attention to the ▶ Always adapt your driving style to the ● situations with an imminent collision
traffic situation. current road and weather conditions. with the vehicle in front
▶ Be prepared to brake or swerve if ● situations with imminent collision
necessary. with a pedestrian or cyclist

Driving mode
Driving systems
The following may lead to Active Brake ● By disengaging Active Brake emergency braking application initiated
Assist having no reaction in critical driving Assist (depending on equipment) by the system in critical driving situations.
situations: ( → Page 280). Only the visual warning remains in such
● Active Brake Assist has not recog- You can only suppress an emergency
cases.
nised the danger of the situation. braking application initiated by Active If both the driving situation assessed as
● Active Brake Assist is deactivated. Brake Assist as follows: critical and the suppressive measure con-
● Active Brake Assist has failed. ● By depressing the accelerator pedal tinue, a visual warning is issued and a
● Active Brake Assist is suppressed. beyond the point of resistance to the warning tone sounds. The visual warning
kick‐down position (depressing the and brief warning tone are issued until
Cancelling an Active Brake Assist the moment when the system would nor-
accelerator pedal beyond the point
brake application mally initiate the emergency braking ap-
of resistance without reaching the
Due to technical and physical system kick‐down position is not sufficient, plication, which has, however, been sup-
limits, Active Brake Assist may warn the as opposed to the suppression of pressed due to the suppression measures.
driver visually and acoustically, or may the warning tone or partial braking In this instance, Active Brake Assist does
initiate a partial or emergency braking application described above). not initiate a partial or emergency braking
intervention although no critical driving ● By disengaging Active Brake application.
situation is present. Assist (depending on equipment)
Notes on care
You can suppress a warning tone and/or ( → Page 280).
an emergency braking application initiated
▶ Clean the distance sensor covers and
Please note that all suppression meas-
the windscreen in the camera's field
by Active Brake Assist as follows: ures described above suppress warning
of view regularly ( → Page 389).
● By quickly depressing the accelerator tones and partial braking applications
pedal significantly beyond the current initiated by the system, also in critical If the distance sensor cover or the wind-
position, or beyond the point of resist- driving situations. Depressing the acceler- screen in the camera's field of vision is
ance (kick‐down). ator pedal beyond the point of resistance dirty or icy, its functionality may be im-
(kick‐down) or deactivating Active Brake paired.
Assist (if installed) also suppresses an

Driving mode
Driving systems
Deactivating and activating Active Note

Brake Assist
If the Active Brake Assist menu
Depending on the vehicle equipment, it is item is greyed out, Active Brake
possible to deactivate Active Brake Assist Assist cannot be deactivated in your
manually. vehicle.
When you start the vehicle, Active Brake
Assist is automatically activated. Note
If there is a malfunction in a system as- 15 minutes after manual deactiva-
sociated with Active Brake Assist, Active tion, Active Brake Assist is automat-
Brake Assist is automatically deactivated ically reactivated and the indicator
and the l indicator lamp in the instru- lamp lin the instrument cluster
ment cluster lights up. goes out.
When the cause of the malfunction If an implement is detected that im-
has been rectified, Active Brake Assist pairs the function of the distance
switches back on automatically, and the sensor or the view of the multifunc-
indicator lamp lin the instrument tion camera, the system is not auto-
cluster goes out. matically switched on again.
▶ Deactivation: In the instrument ▶ Activation: In the instrument cluster,

cluster, under the settings menu ä, under the settings menu ä, menu
menu window Assistance, switch off window Assistance, switch off the
the ActiveBrakeAssist 6. ActiveBrakeAssist 6.
◁ If Active Brake Assist has been ◁ Once Active Brake Assist has
deactivated, the indicator lamp been activated, the indicator
l comes on in the instrument lamp l in the instrument
cluster. cluster will go out.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Collision warning and emergency Collision warning and emergency brak-

braking ing
1 Collision warning
2 Partial braking
3 Emergency braking (maximum full‐stop
braking)
4 Emergency braking completed
Reaction to a vehicle (example)

Driving mode
Driving systems
Collision warning and emergency brak-

ing
1 Collision warning with simultaneous partial
braking
2 Emergency braking (maximum full‐stop
braking)
3 Emergency braking completed
If there is a risk of a collision with the

vehicle in front and Active Brake Assist
issues a warning, the audio device and
hands‐free system installed at the factory
are automatically muted.
Collision warning
Reaction to a pedestrian /cyclist (example) The indicator lamp N lights up in the
instrument cluster when a vehicle, ped-
estrian 4, or cyclist is detected. An
intermittent warning tone sounds.
Partial braking
The collision warning remains active. In
addition, Active Brake Assist slows the
vehicle with automatic partial braking.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Emergency braking ▶ Remove the vehicle from the danger Information on specific driving situ-
area as soon as possible while paying ations
If you do not react to the collision warn- attention to the traffic situation.
ings and partial brake application, Active ▶ Switch off the vehicle and use the Cornering, entering and exiting bends
Brake Assist automatically initiates emer- parking brake to secure it against
gency braking (maximum full‐stop brak- rolling away.
ing) within the system limitations.
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is in prop-
In addition, the Nor 4 indicator er working order, and that the load is
lamp lights up in the instrument cluster secured properly.
and a continuous warning tone sounds.
At speeds greater than 50 km/h, rapid
flashing of the hazard warning lights (e-
mergency braking flashing) is activated The ability of Active Brake Assist and
during braking to warn following traffic. the distance control assistant to detect
vehicles on bends is limited:
After emergency braking, the instrument
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity
cluster shows the grey display message
Control Assist may unexpectedly
È Emergency braking finished and the
issue warnings or brake your vehicle.
hazard warning light system is switched
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity
on automatically at the normal flashing
Control Assist cannot issue warn-
frequency.
ings/brake although there is a critical
After emergency braking to a standstill, driving situation.
the vehicle is secured by the HOLD func- ● The Proximity Control Assist may
tion to prevent it from rolling away. accelerate unexpectedly.
If an emergency braking manoeuvre has
been performed:

Driving mode
Driving systems
Vehicles not travelling in line with Other vehicles changing lane

your vehicle and stationary vehicles
The ability of Active Brake Assist and

the distance control assistant to detect
The ability of Active Brake Assist and the vehicles pulling into your lane without
The ability of Active Brake Assist and Proximity Control Assist to detect vehicles maintaining a safe distance is limited. The
the distance control assistant to detect pulling into your lane is limited. system can only react to vehicles within
vehicles not travelling in line with your
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity the detection range of the sensors.
vehicle or stationary vehicles is limited:
Control Assist may unexpectedly ● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity issue warnings or brake your vehicle.
Control Assist may unexpectedly Control Assist cannot issue warn-
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity ings/brake although there is a critical
issue warnings or brake your vehicle.
Control Assist cannot issue warn- driving situation.
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity ings/brake although there is a critical
Control Assist cannot issue warn- ● The Proximity Control Assist may
driving situation. accelerate unexpectedly.
ings/brake although there is a critical
● The Proximity Control Assist may
driving situation.
accelerate unexpectedly. ▶ Brake the vehicle.
● The Proximity Control Assist may ◁ The distance to the vehicle in
accelerate unexpectedly. front is increased.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Vehicles turning off Overtaking Winding stretches of road
The ability of Active Brake Assist and the When you are overtaking, Active Brake On winding stretches of road, Active
Proximity Control Assist to detect vehicles Assist and the Proximity Control Assist Brake Assist and the Proximity Control
turning off is limited: may in the following cases unexpectedly Assist cannot always detect which lane
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity issue warnings or brake your vehicle if the vehicle in front is driving in:
Control Assist may unexpectedly you: ● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity
issue warnings or brake your vehicle. ● drive too close to the vehicle in front Control Assist may unexpectedly
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity ● you are still in the lane of the vehicle issue warnings or brake your vehicle.
Control Assist cannot issue warn- in front ● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity
ings/brake although there is a critical Control Assist cannot issue warn-
driving situation. ings/brake although there is a critical
● The Proximity Control Assist may driving situation.
accelerate unexpectedly. ● The Proximity Control Assist may
accelerate unexpectedly.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Obstacles and stationary vehicles Vehicles parked at the roadside
Active Brake Assist can also unexpectedly

issue warnings and brake the vehicle if
Active Brake Assist and the Proximity Active Brake Assist and the Proximity
it detects stationary objects next to your
Control Assist may be too late detecting Control Assist may react to vehicles
lane. Examples of this are:
obstacles or stationary vehicles in front of parked at the roadside:
● Broken‐down vehicles
the detected vehicle: ● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity Control Assist may unexpectedly ● Road boundaries, e.g. roadside posts
Control Assist may unexpectedly issue warnings or brake your vehicle. ● Signs
issue warnings or brake your vehicle. ● The Proximity Control Assist may ● Bridges
● Active Brake Assist and the Proximity accelerate unexpectedly. ● Traffic islands
Control Assist cannot issue warn- ● Parked vehicles
ings/brake although there is a critical Stationary objects ● People
driving situation.
● The Proximity Control Assist may
accelerate unexpectedly.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Pedestrians and cyclists Traffic Sign Assist Traffic Sign Assist uses the map data
stored and can, in the following situations,
Function of Traffic Sign Assist update the display without having detec-
Traffic Sign Assist is only an aid. Always ted a traffic sign:
adjust your speed to suit the traffic situ- ● When changing lanes, for example,
ation. The driver is responsible for com- when entering or exiting a motorway
plying with traffic regulations at all times. ● When the map indicates an updated
maximum permissible speed
Active Brake Assist may also unexpec- Note

tedly issue a warning or brake for people In countries without map data, the func-
moving along the roadside on a bend. tion is restricted.
Beside the information in the map, legally
applicable limit speeds of the respective
country are taken into account.
Traffic signs with a restriction indicated by
an additional sign (e.g., in wet conditions)
are also detected by the camera. These
Traffic Sign Assist detects traffic signs will be taken into account in the display
with a multifunction camera 1. It assists for the speed limit or displayed separately
Active Brake Assist may also unexpec- if they cannot be allocated accordingly.
tedly issue a warning or brake in the event you by displaying detected speed limits
of oncoming cyclists on a bend. and overtaking restrictions and warning
signs in the instrument cluster.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Display in instrument cluster Speed limits on slip roads In certain situations, a warning tone or a
warning in the instrument cluster does not
sound.
No warning tone is issued in the following
cases:
● If the vehicle is slowed down by the
driver
● When the vehicle speed is less than
20 km/h
Display Traffic Sign Assistant (example)
Speed limits detected in the area of an
Displays In the following cases, no warning is is-
exit are displayed in the instrument
sued in the instrument cluster:
1 Maximum permissible speed cluster in the Driving mode D menu,
Speed or Assistance menu window with ● In the area of the tachograph control
2 Alternative maximum permissible speed,
overtaking restrictions, and warnings an arrow as an additional sign. The if there is no explicit speed limit
3 Additional sign with restriction additional symbol is displayed even if ● PPC Interurban is active
the actual traffic sign does not have an ( → Page 272)
The displays 2 and 3 are only shown additional symbol. ● If the warning function has been
only in the driving mode D menu win- switched off ( → Page 290)
dow Speed or Assistance. Warning when the maximum per-
missible speed is exceeded Warning when an overtaking man-
If more than two traffic signs are detected
oeuvre is detected in a no-overtaking
by the system, Traffic Sign Assist selects The system can warn you if you uninten- zone
the two most relevant traffic signs for the tionally exceed the maximum permiss-
display. ible speed. To do this, the system is- The system can give you a visual warning
sues a warning tone and the correspond- if you start an overtaking manoeuvre in
ing traffic sign in the instrument cluster a no‐overtaking zone. The corresponding
flashes red. traffic sign flashes red in the instrument
cluster.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Acoustic information when the max- 3 The warning tone for when the maximum ● In poor visibility conditions, such as
imum permissible speed is changed speed is exceeded is switched off. inadequate road illumination, rapidly
changing shadow conditions, rain,
The system can inform you by means snow, fog, or heavy spray.
Note
of an audible notification when a new ● In case of glare, for example, from
maximum permissible speed is detected. The display 3is shown for ten seconds
after the warning tone is switched off. oncoming traffic, direct sunlight, or
The function can be deactivated in the reflections.
instrument cluster ( → Page 290). ● If the windscreen in the area of the
System limits
camera is dirty, misted up or dam-
Display of system statuses The system may be impaired or may not aged.
In addition to the display of traffic signs function in the following situations: ● if the windscreen in the area of the
in the instrument cluster, the system also ● If the traffic signs are hard to see, camera is obscured, for example,
informs you of restrictions on individual for example, due to dirt, obstruction, due to a faulty windscreen wiper or
functions. snow, or inadequate lighting. a sticker.
● If the information in the digital road ● If there are no lane markings, or
map is incorrect or not up to date several unclear lane markings are
● When using a non‐ISO compliant present for one lane, for example,
trailer around roadworks.
● If the signs are ambiguous, such as ● After a major change in load with
traffic signs in construction zones, the vehicle switched on. Restart the
adjacent lanes, and entrances and vehicle after a major change in load.
exits.
Instruction labels for vehicles transporting
System states ● If there are dynamic signs, e.g. LED hazardous goods are not taken into ac-
1
displays. count by the system.
No applicable speed limit could be detected.
● If there are signs which do not meet
2 The system has been switched off or is Make sure that the windscreen is always
unavailable due to a malfunction. the official requirements.
kept clean and unobstructed in the area

Driving mode
Driving systems
of the camera ( → Page 389). Therefore,

Note Note
switch on the windscreen wiper to clean
the windscreen, for example, or remove If the system is unavailable due to a Information on which map version is
snow and ice from the windscreen. malfunction, the menu item is greyed installed in your vehicle can be found
out. in the Settings menu ä, Menu menu
window menu under Map version.
Activating/deactivating Traffic Sign
Assist Note
▶ In the instrument cluster under the When the vehicle is started, Traffic Sign Lane Keeping Assist
Settings menu ä, Assistance menu Assist's warning and display functions
are automatically activated. The acoustic Notes on Lane Keeping Assist
window, scroll to Traffic signs.
◁ The following functions are avail- information when the maximum permiss-
ible speed is changed remains in the last Danger
able:
selected setting. Risk of accident due to limited detec-
● Activating/deactivating
tion capability of Lane Keeping Assist
Traffic Sign Assist
Note Lane Keeping Assist cannot always
● Activating/deactivating
Daimler Truck AG offers an annual map clearly identify lane markings.
Traffic Sign Assist warnings
● Switching the acoustic in- update to ensure that the system func- In these cases, Lane Keeping Assist may
formation on or off when the tions as best as possible. The driver is therefore issue a warning unjustifiably or
maximum permissible speed responsible for keeping the map up to may not issue a warning at all.
date.
changes ▶ Always pay particular attention to
the traffic situation and keep within
the lane, especially if Active Lane
Keeping Assist alerts you.

Driving mode
Driving systems
The system may be impaired or may not ● if the lane markings change quickly, Overview
function in the following situations: e.g. lanes branch off, cross one an-
● if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to other, or merge
insufficient road illumination or due to ● if the carriageway is very narrow and
snow, rain, fog, or heavy spray winding
● if there is glare, for example, from ● if there are highly variable shade con-
oncoming traffic, direct sunlight, or ditions on the carriageway
reflections (e.g. if the road surface is ● when attachments, such as a
wet) snowplough, obstruct the view of the
● if the windscreen in the area of the lane markings through the camera
camera is dirty, misted up or dam- ● after a major change in load with the
aged vehicle switched on. Therefore, start
● If the windscreen around the camera the vehicle again after a significant
is obscured, e.g. due to a defective change in load for Lane Keeping As- Example: Lane Keeping Assist display
windscreen wiper or a sticker sist to be available without any re- The lane markings are also displayed
● If there are no lane markings, or there strictions in the menu window Assistance in
are several unclear lane markings for ▶ Keep the windscreen around the cam- the Driving mode menu window D
one lane, for example, in roadworks era free of dirt, snow, or ice. Use the ( → Page 154).
● if the lane markings are worn away, windscreen wipers, or clean the wind- The lane markings in the status area and
dark, or covered up, for example, by screen manually wherever neces- in the menu window Assistance of the
dirt or snow sary. Please note the information in instrument cluster display the status of
● If the distance to the vehicle in front "Notes on cleaning the vehicle ex- Lane Keeping Assist in colour:
is too small and the lane markings terior" ( → Page 384) and "Cleaning ● Black lane marking: Lane Keeping
thus cannot, therefore, be detected sensors" ( → Page 389). Assist is disengaged.
● Grey lane marking: Lane Keeping
Assist is engaged but is not ready

Driving mode
Driving systems
to issue warnings on the side of the ● The lane markings must be shown in The warnings are then suppressed for a
vehicle in question. white in the instrument cluster. certain time period.
● White lane marking: Lane Keeping When you drive over the lane marking Lane Keeping Assist will warn you when
Assist is engaged and ready to issue unintentionally, the following warnings are changing lane if a turn signal indicator
warnings on the side of the vehicle in issued: has been switched on for more than one
question. minute.
● The relevant lane marking is shown in
● Red lane marking: Lane Keeping As- red in the instrument cluster.
sist is engaged and is issuing a warn-
● The volume of the audio equipment or Deactivating/activating Lane Keeping
ing on the side of the vehicle in ques- Assist
hands‐free system is reduced and a
tion.
warning tone sounds from the speak- Depending on how the vehicle is
Functions and activation conditions er on the corresponding side of the equipped, it is possible to deactivate Lane
vehicle. Keeping Assist manually.
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area in
front of your vehicle with a camera that If the vehicle is not fully within the lane When you start the vehicle, Lane Keeping
is on the base of the windscreen. When markings after a warning has been issued, Assist is automatically activated.
Lane Keeping Assist is activated and it no further warnings are possible. ▶ Deactivation: In the instrument
detects lane markings on the carriageway, Lane Keeping Assist does not issue a cluster under the Settings menu ä,
it warns you that you may be leaving your warning in the following situations: Assistance menu window, switch the
lane unintentionally. Lane Keeping Assist ● You have switched on the turn signal Lane Keeping Assist off.
does not automatically keep the vehicle in indicator. ◁ The indicator lamp m in the
its lane. ● You clearly and actively steer, brake instrument cluster lights up when
The following conditions must be fulfilled or accelerate. Lane Keeping Assist is deactiv-
so that Lane Keeping Assist is ready to ● When a driving safety system inter- ated.
issue warnings: venes, e.g. Active Brake Assist or Sta- If the Lane Keeping Assist menu
● You are driving above approximately bility Control Assist. item is greyed out, Lane Keeping
60 km/h.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Assist cannot be deactivated in ● if there are often no lane markings, or windshield wipers or remove snow
your vehicle. multiple ambiguous lane markings for and ice from the windshield.
▶ Activation: In the instrument cluster a single lane, such as in construction
under the Settings menu ä, Assist- zones Overview
ance menu window, switch the Lane ● if the lane markings are worn away, Attention Assist helps you during long,
Keeping Assist on. dark, or covered up, for example, by monotonous journeys, e.g. on motorways
◁ Once Lane Keeping Assist has dirt or snow and trunk roads. Attention Assist is active
been activated, the indicator ● when experiencing frequent glare, at speeds above approximately 60 km/h.
lamp m in the instrument such as from oncoming traffic, direct If Attention Assist has detected typical
cluster will go out. sunlight, or reflections (e.g., on wet indications of fatigue or increasing lapses
roads) in concentration on the part of the driver,
● on winding roads it suggests taking a break. A warning is
Attention Assist
● if the distance to the vehicle in front shown by Attention Assist irrespective of
Notes on Attention Assist is too short so that the lane markings legally prescribed driving and rest periods
Attention Assist may be impaired or inop- often cannot be detected or digital tachograph functions.
erative in the following situations: ● if attachments obstruct the camera's
● if there is poor visibility, e.g. due to view of the lane markings Functions and activation conditions
insufficient road illumination or due to ● After a major change in load with Attention Assist assesses your level of fa-
snow, rain, fog, or heavy spray the vehicle switched on: Restart the tigue or lapses in concentration by taking
● if the windscreen in the area of the vehicle after a major change in the the following criteria into account:
camera is dirty, misted up or dam- load. ● Personal driving style, for example,
aged ▶ Make sure that the windscreen is lane keeping, steering behaviour
● If the windscreen around the camera always kept clean and unobstructed ● Driving conditions, for example, dura-
is obscured, e.g. due to a defective around the camera ( → Page 389). tion of the journey
windscreen wiper or a sticker Therefore, for example, turn on the

Driving mode
Driving systems
Attention Assist is restricted and a warn- Attention Assist resets the detection se- Active Sideguard Assist can also trigger
ing does not occur or is delayed in the quence. automatic braking and bring the vehicle to
following situations: a standstill if it detects a risk of collision
● If you are predominantly driving at Deactivating/activating Attention when the vehicle is turning within the
under 60 km/h Assist system limits. The following notes on
● If lane markings are not present or After starting the vehicle, Attention Assist Sideguard Assist also apply to Active
difficult to distinguish is always activated. Sideguard Assist. The additional functions
● On winding roads of Active Sideguard Assist are described
▶ In the instrument cluster under the separately in the following sections.
The following interventions occur if Atten- Settings menu ä, Assistance menu
tion Assist detects typical indicators of window, switch the Attention Assist If you are not familiar with the equipment
fatigue or increasing lapses in concentra- on and off ( → Page 165). level of your vehicle, you can check before
tion on the part of the driver: driving which system is in your vehicle
using the on‐board computer.
● A warning tone is issued.
Sideguard Assist 2/Active Sideguard
● The instrument cluster shows the You can recognise this by the designation
Assist 2 Sideguard Assist or Active Sideguard
display message Ô and Attention
Assist: take a break?. Function of Sideguard Assist in the instrument cluster under the ä
● Lane Keeping Assist is reactivated 2/Active Sideguard Assist 2 Settings menu in the Assistance menu
automatically. window.
General notes
▶ Take breaks regularly and in good Sideguard Assist can warn of the risk
time during longer journeys. of a side‐on collision, especially when
If you fail to take a break, Attention Assist turning or changing lanes. It contains
can only warn you again after at least 15 the functions of the legally prescribed
minutes. When you switch off the vehicle turning assistant (UN ECE R151, Blind
or the vehicle is stationary for some time, Spot Information System).

Driving mode
Driving systems
Sideguard Assist Info: The system de-

tects a relevant object in the monitoring
range. The warning display Û on the
corresponding side lights up.
Sideguard Assist Warning: The system
detects an increased risk of collision with
a relevant object in the monitoring range.
The warning display Û on the corres-
ponding side lights up. A warning tone will
also sound.
Warning display on the A-pillar on vehicles without Warning display in vehicles with MirrorCam system
Note
MirrorCam system (example) (example)
Both “Sideguard Assist Information”
The system monitors the area next to the and “Sideguard Assist Warning” display
towing vehicle and the trailer or semitrail- stages are referred to as warnings in
er on both sides with two radar sensors the following, as they can transition
each. The radar sensors are integrated in- directly into each other unless otherwise
to the mudguards and the corners of the described.
front bumper. Information from the front
When the vehicle is turning, Active
radar and the multifunction camera is also
Sideguard Assist can also react when
processed.
turning within the reaction zone by
The system supports you when turning automatically braking the vehicle to make
off and changing lanes with the warning it come to a standstill.
display Û in the A–pillar 1 or in the
The system is not active when reversing.
MirrorCam display 2.

Driving mode
Driving systems
In countries in which traffic drives on the

Note Note opposite side of the road to the country in
Trailers with an interface according to You can find information on whether which the vehicle is registered, it is there-
ISO 11992-2: Incorrectly set trailer in- your trailer or semitrailer includes an fore necessary to change the setting in
formation, such as length or number of interface ISO 11992-2 in the operating the instrument cluster under the Settings
axles, can lead to malfunctions relat- instructions provided by the trailer or menu ä, menu window Vehicle 5 Dir-
ing to the trailer or semitrailer. In such semitrailer manufacturer. ection of traffic.
cases, trailer monitoring may issue un-
Incorrect setting of the traffic direction
necessary warnings or no warnings at Note can lead to unauthorised system reac-
all. Trailer/semitrailer without electronic tions.
If you detect a trailer or semitrailer mal- brake system (EBS): Afterhitching up/
function, contact the trailer manufac- coupling up thetrailer/semitrailer, switch Note
turer. off the vehicle and restart it. Otherwise,
Vehicles with Sideguard Assist: The
trailer monitoring may be impaired or
traffic direction setting option is not
Note may not function.
available for specific countries.
Trailers without an interface according You can find information on whether
to ISO 11992-2: After coupling a trailer your trailer or semitrailer includes EBS
or semitrailer, it is necessary to perform in the operating instructions provided by
a number of cornering manoeuvres until the trailer or semitrailer manufacturer.
the system has adjusted to the new
trailer or semitrailer. Setting of the traffic direction
The sensitivity with regard to a Sideguard
Assist warning output and the reaction
zone relevant for a braking of Active
Sideguard Assist depends on the traffic
direction set in the vehicle.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Sideguard Assist warning range The width of the reaction zone that is rel-
Note evant to braking is determined dynamic-
Due to the size of the legal information ally according to the respective situation
area 2, a warning display Û may and is at most 2 m.
also appear for traffic following behind.
Note
The reaction zone Direction of traffic
Left-hand traffic is on the left side of the
vehicle when the setting is selected and
Overview (example using a left-hand drive vehicle) on the right side of the vehicle when the
The length of the warning area 1 de- setting Right-hand traffic is selected.
pends on the vehicle speed, but it always
covers at least the vehicle length detec-
ted by the system, including any trailer Proximity monitoring zone (example)
/semitrailer, if applicable. From a vehicle speed of approx.40 km/h,
The width of the warning range1 is equi- warnings of vehicles rapidly approaching
valent to approx. one lane. from behind are also given on the basis of
an approach monitoring zone 3.
The extended information area 2 results
from the legal requirement in accordance Relevant monitoring range for the
with UN ECE R 151 and is always located Reaction zone (example for right-hand traffic setting)
brake application of Active Sideguard
on the front passenger side. The length Assist (reaction zone) System limits
of this information‐only area 2 depends
on the vehicle speed and is a maximum of The length of the reaction zone which Full system performance is not yet avail-
37 m. is relevant for braking is based on the able for a few seconds after switching on
length of the towing vehicle detected by the vehicle or after driving off.
the system.

Driving mode
Driving systems
As a result of the system characteristics, If Sideguard Assist or Active Sideguard ● if the windscreen in the area of the
warnings may be issued in error when Assist is malfunctioning or has been auto- camera is dirty, misted up or dam-
driving close to crash barriers or simil- matically deactivated due to an implement aged
ar solid boundaries. In these situations, being used, the Q or P indicator ● If the windscreen around the camera
Active Sideguard Assist may initiate addi- lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. is obscured, for example, due to a de-
tional brake applications in error. In this case, sufficient warnings are not fective windscreen wiper or a sticker
Due to the nature of the system, the issued regarding objects in the monitoring ● When manoeuvring: Sideguard Assist
warning may be interrupted when driv- range, or no warning is issued at all, and is not a manoeuvring aid.
ing alongside long vehicles, e.g. HGVs. Active Sideguard Assist does not initiate ● If the traffic direction is set incor-
brake applications. In the event of a mal- rectly
Due to system limitations, during longer function, have the system checked at a
journeys near uniform road structures, qualified specialist workshop. The system may not fully identify the trail-
such as tunnel walls, sensor interfer- er in the following situations:
ence may occur. A corresponding dis- The system may be impaired or may not ● Shortly after reversing
play message will be shown in the instru- function in the following situations in
● Shortly after coupling or hitching up
ment cluster. ( → Page 532) If the fault no particular:
longer applies, the display message dis- ● in the case of dirty, icy, or covered In this case, the system may mistakenly
appears and the system will be available sensors, for example, by snow or issue a warning, or it may not issue a
again. heavy spray warning at all.
Depending on the situation and the trailer ● in very wide lanes In the following cases in particular, have
or semitrailer, the system may warn you ● if the carriageway is very narrow and the function of the radar sensors checked
too early or not at all. winding at a qualified specialist workshop:
● if the radar sensors are impaired ● After a severe impact
▶ Ensure that the covers of the radar due to interference, for example,
sensors are free from dirt, ice, or ● After damage to the sensors or their
from strong or unfavourable radar surroundings
slush ( → Page 389).
reflections caused by crash barriers
or other infrastructure

Driving mode
Driving systems
Otherwise, it can no longer be guaranteed

that Sideguard Assist will operate cor- Danger Danger
rectly. Risk of accident due to limited detec- Risk of collision despite Active
tion capability of Sideguard Assist or Sideguard Assist
In some circumstances and in the fol-
Active Sideguard Assist Active Sideguard Assist can brake your
lowing situations in particular, Sideguard
The system cannot always clearly identi- vehicle automatically, bringing it to a
Assist does not react correctly:
fy objects and complex traffic situations. standstill, if it detects a risk of collision.
● To pedestrians or cyclists, who are
In these cases, the system may: This automatic brake application cannot
obscured by other objects
always prevent a collision. If you do
● To pedestrians or cyclists, who sud- ● issue an unnecessary warning not also brake the vehicle yourself, a
denly change direction or speed ● not issue a warning collision can occur.
● To persons or vehicles moving very
quickly within the detection range of
Active Sideguard Assist may also: ▶ If there is a risk of collision, brake
the sensors ● break without due cause the vehicle yourself, and take evas-
● To stationary objects or objects mov- ive action if possible.
● may not break at all
ing at the same speed as your own ▶ Adapt your driving style to the
vehicle ▶ Drive on carefully and be ready to weather conditions when turning.
● When turning into multiple lanes
brake, particularly if the system ▶ Do not perform function tests in-
issues a warning. volving people, animals, or objects.
in the same general direction as
vehicles in the adjacent lane ▶ Always pay careful attention to the
traffic situation, and maintain a safe Active Sideguard Assist can only initiate
● during manoeuvres that involve
distance at the side of the vehicle. a brake application if all the following
pulling out
You can manually cancel an unjustified conditions are met:
brake application by Active Sideguard ● You are driving in a speed range typ-
Assist ( → Page 303). ical for the turning manoeuvre up to
approx. 20 km/h.

Driving mode
Driving systems
● You are performing a significant A brake application may not be initiated

steering movement in the direction of Note by Active Sideguard Assist despite previ-
the set traffic side. The system will only react to oncoming ous warning and the applicable collision
● The vehicle has travelled a distance of traffic if the system detects a pedestrian risk on the front passenger's side for the
at least 5 m after reversing or since or cyclist. following reasons in particular:
the last system intervention. The Active Sideguard Assist can also react ● Active Sideguard Assist's active brak-
● The Û warning display on the to objects moving along the roadside, ing function and the acoustic warning
A‐pillar or MirrorCam display lights such as when people are waiting at a are deactivated.
up. traffic light. ● There is a very low intrinsic speed, for
● A moving object or an object clas- example, when the vehicle is rolling.
A warning may not be issued despite the
sified as movable is detected in the ● There is a malfunction in the brake
risk of collision for the following reasons
reaction zone relevant for the brake system.
in particular:
intervention.
● The system has failed or there is a Sideguard Assist displays in the in-
● The direction of movement of your
malfunction. strument cluster
own vehicle and the object indicates
an imminent collision. ● The system has failed to detect the
In addition to the display on the A–pillar
danger of the situation.
and MirrorCam display, the warning dis-
● If the traffic direction is set incor- play Û is also shown in the Driving
Note
rectly. mode menu D, Assistance menu win-
An object is classified as movable in the
● The system's acoustic warning sys- dow.
following cases:
tem is switched off. The visual warn-
If it has been seen moving by a sensor at ing and information display remains
an earlier time and then stops active in this case.
If the multifunction camera detects a Active Sideguard Assist does not brake
stationary pedestrian or cyclist without prior warning.

Driving mode
Driving systems
Warning when turning
Status area in the instrument cluster (example)

1 Warning display in menu window As-
sistance The following indicator lamps can be
Example of turning right
2 displayed in the status area:
The indicator lamps in the status area of The system warns of a moving object or
Q Active Sideguard Assist's acoustic
the instrument cluster inform you of the warning and additional automatic
an object classified as moving in the side
current status of the system. brake application have been deactiv- monitoring zone up to a vehicle speed of
ated ( → Page 303). approx. 40 km/h.
Q The system is only available to a A moving object or an object classified as
limited extent (e.g. the system is
only available on one side due to moving is located in the monitoring range.
the failure of a sensor or automatic The Û warning display on the A–pillar
deactivation due to the use of an or MirrorCam display lights up.
implement).
In addition, the corresponding warning
P The system is unavailable due to a
malfunction or automatic deactivation indicator Û in the menu window As-
due to the use of an implement. sistance of the instrument cluster lights
up.

Driving mode
Driving systems
After a completed brake intervention by In addition, the corresponding warning

Active Sideguard Assist until the vehicle indicator Û in the menu window As-
comes to a standstill, the instrument sistance of the instrument cluster lights
cluster shows the T Braking ended up.
display message and the HOLD function
( → Page 229) is activated. Warning during lane change
Warning for vehicles approaching

Example of turning right
from behind
A moving object or an object classified
as moving is located in the monitoring
range. If you steer or indicate in the dir-
ection of turning, and the system detects
an increased risk of collision, the warn-
ing display Û in the A–pillar or in the Example of overtaking manoeuvre
MirrorCam Display flashes for approxim- The system warns of moving objects or
ately two seconds. A simultaneous warn- objects classified as moving in the neigh-
ing tone sounds. The red warning light Example bouring lane, regardless of the vehicle’s
then lights up continuously while there is As of a vehicle speed of approx. 40 km/h, own speed.
a risk of collision. the system warns of vehicles approaching A moving object or an object classified as
In addition, the warning display Û quickly from behind in the neighbouring moving is located in the monitoring range.
in the instrument cluster menu window lane. The Û warning display on the A–pillar
Assistance lights up. An object approaching quickly from be- or MirrorCam display lights up.
Additionally, Active Sideguard Assist can hind is located in the approach monitoring In addition, the corresponding warning
trigger a braking procedure following the zone. The Û warning display on the indicator Û in the menu window As-
red warning light and warning tone. A–pillar or MirrorCam display lights up. sistance of the instrument cluster lights
up.

Driving mode
Driving systems
matically deactivated due to an implement

Note being used, the Q or P indicator
If a warning of the same object is issued lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
several times while the light is flash- In this case, sufficient warnings are not
ing, only the visual system reaction is issued regarding objects in the monitoring
repeated. The acoustic warning tone is range, or no warning is issued at all, and
then suppressed. Active Sideguard Assist does not initiate
Example of overtaking manoeuvre
brake applications. In the event of a mal-
Interrupting the brake application of function, have the system checked at a
There is a vehicle in the danger zone when
Active Sideguard Assist 2 qualified specialist workshop.
changing lanes. If you indicate or steer in
the direction of the object and the system If Active Sideguard Assist initiates a brake ▶ Deactivation: In the instrument
identifies an increased risk of collision application in a non‐critical situation, you cluster, under the Settings menu ä,
(e.g. in the event of a critical approach), can interrupt it as follows: Assistance menu window , switch the
the Û warning display in the A–pillar or ▶ By quickly depressing the accelerator Sideguard Assist or Active Sideguard
MirrorCam display flashes for approxim- pedal significantly beyond the current off.
ately two seconds. A simultaneous warn- position, or beyond the point of resist- ◁ Active Sideguard Assist's warn-
ing tone sounds. The warning light then ance (kick-down). ing tone and additional brake
lights up continuously while there is a risk intervention are switched off. The
of collision. Switching Sideguard Assist 2's warn- indicator lamp Q in the instru-
ing tone and Active Sideguard Assist ment cluster lights up.
In addition, the warning display Û
in the instrument cluster menu window 2's additional brake application on ▶ Activation: In the instrument cluster,
Assistance lights up. and off under the Settings menu ä, As-
sistance menu window, switch the
When you start the vehicle, the system is
Sideguard Assist or Active Sideguard
automatically activated.
on.
If Sideguard Assist or Active Sideguard ◁ Active Sideguard Assist's warn-
Assist is malfunctioning or has been auto- ing tone and additional brake

Driving mode
Level control system
intervention are switched on. The flashing symbol ß in the instrument ▶ Press the button ß.
indicator lamp Q in the instru- cluster. ◁ The function is switched on when
ment cluster goes out. If the temperature of the trailer brake is the indicator lamp in the button is
too high, Trailer Stability Assist is auto- lit up.ß
Trailer Stability Assist matically deactivated.
If the system has been deactivated auto- Level control system
Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) function
matically, the indicator lamp of the ß
The Trailer Stability Assist function pre- button flashes and the instrument cluster Notes on level control
vents driving situations in which the tract- shows a corresponding display message.
or/trailer combination risks jackknifing Danger
due to an approaching trailer or semitrail- Risk of accident due to lowered or
Activate/deactivate Trailer Stability
er. raised chassis
Assist (TSA)
Driving situations of this kind may occur The braking and handling characteristics
in the following cases, for example: may be greatly impaired if the chassis
● when cornering in overrun mode frame is modified. You might also ex-
ceed the permitted vehicle height.
● when cornering on a slippery car-
riageway ▶ Set the driving level before you set
● when the continuous brake is active off.
To prevent critical situations, Trailer Sta-
Note
bility Assist stabilises the tractor/trailer
combination by means of brief brake ap- Damage to the vehicle due to driving
plications on the trailer or semitrailer. in a lowered drive position
Driving outside of driving levels 1 and
A brake application by Trailer Stability
2 can cause damage to the vehicle's
Assist is indicated to the driver by the TSA button on the lever of the electronic parking brake
(example) suspension.

Driving mode
▶ Only use driving levels 1 and 2 in When operating the vehicle without a Activating and deactivating the level
manoeuvring mode. vehicle body, make sure that the chassis control operating unit
▶ In driving mode, raise the chassis to is always fully raised. Otherwise, you
The operating unit is attached at the side
driving level. could damage the air suspension bellows
between the driver's seat and the door.
on the rear axle. Further information on
Observe the applicable legal requirements
the characteristics of possible add‐on
for each individual country for the per-
equipment can be found in the body/
missible vehicle height.
equipment mounting directives.
It is necessary to raise or lower the
Vehicles equipped with "driving level
chassis to pick up or set down swap
lowered" and/or with low profile tyres:
bodies or semitrailers. If you continue a
Avoid operating the vehicle with a lowered
journey after having changed the chassis
chassis. Driving with a lowered chassis in-
height, it is necessary to lower or raise the
creases wear and tear on the vehicle and
chassis to driving level.
reduces driving comfort.
If the indicator lamp ¸ in the instru-
Level control can be used when the
ment cluster lights up, the chassis is not
vehicle is stationary or while driving at up
at driving level or the level control is mal-
to approx. 30 m/h. Example shown on a fully air-sprung vehicle
functioning. Observe the additional in-
formation in the display message. Depending on the vehicle equipment, Level control system operating unit
When loading or unloading the vehicle there are the following options for oper- 1 Pre‐selection for raising or lowering the
ation of the level control system: front axle
when it is switched off, refer to the in- 2 Pre‐selection for raising or lowering the
formation in the "Loading and unloading ● the operating unit on the driver's seat
entire vehicle
the vehicle when the vehicle is switched ● the on‐board computer
3 Pre‐selection for setting the driving level
off" section ( → Page 310). ( → Page 308)
4 Pre‐selection for raising or lowering the
● the external operating unit on the
Vehicles with axle configurations 8x4/4 rear axle
vehicle body
and 8x2/4 with air‐sprung rear axle: 5 Buttons
● the buttons on the instrument panel

Driving mode
u To activate the operating unit, make ▶ Take the operating unit out of the or
a pre‐selection for the front axle, rear holder. ▶ The external control panel on the
axle, entire vehicle, or driving level
Activating the operating unit vehicle body and on the driver’s seat:
t To activate the operating unit, make
a pre‐selection for the front axle, rear Wait for approximately 60 seconds;
axle, entire vehicle, or driving level ▶ The exterior operating unit on the do not press any buttons.
r To activate the operating unit, lower the driver's seat: Press the u, t,
r, s, or T button briefly. or
chassis, set the driving level
s To activate the operating unit, raise the ▶ Drive at a speed above approximately
or
chassis, set the driving level 30 km/h.
T To activate the operating unit, end ▶ The external operating unit on the ◁ The operating unit is automatic-
raising or lowering operation vehicle body: Press and hold the ally deactivated.
û Short button press: Call up memory T button for approximately two
preset M1 or M2 for chassis height seconds.
Long button press: Save memory preset Raising or lowering the chassis with
M1 or M2 for chassis height the operating unit
Note
▶ Apply the parking brake. The external operating unit on the
Danger
▶ Switch on the vehicle. vehicle body can be activated and
Risk of entrapment from vehicle
◁ The level control automatically deactivated even if the key has been
lowering
adjusts the chassis frame to the removed.
When lowering the vehicle, other people
previously stored height.
Deactivating the operating unit may become trapped if their limbs are
▶ If the reservoir pressure in the
between the vehicle body and the tyres
compressed-air system is too low, ▶ The external operating unit on the
or underneath the vehicle.
leave the vehicle switched on. vehicle body: Press and hold the
◁ The compressed-air system is T button for approximately two ▶ Make sure no one is underneath the
charged. seconds. vehicle or in the immediate vicinity
of the wheel arches when you lower
the vehicle.

Driving mode
▶ Press the u or t button to Raising or lowering the chassis with

select front axle, entire vehicle, or the button on the instrument panel
rear axle.
◁ The LEDs for the selected pre- Danger
selection light up. Risk of entrapment from vehicle
▶ Press the r button to lower the lowering
chassis frame or the s button to When lowering the vehicle, other people
raise it. may become trapped if their limbs are
◁ If the chassis frame is not at driv- between the vehicle body and the tyres
ing level, the indicator lamp ï or underneath the vehicle.
in the instrument cluster will
come on. The instrument cluster ▶ Make sure no one is underneath the
also shows a display message vehicle or in the immediate vicinity ▶ Raising: Press the ¥ button
with = or ? and Set driv- of the wheel arches when you lower above.
ing level.. the vehicle. ◁ The chassis is raised as long as
▶ Press the T button to interrupt/end the button is pressed.
the raising or lowering operation. ▶ Lowering: Press the lower section of
the ¦ button.
◁ The chassis lowers as long as the
button is pressed.
If the chassis is not at driving level, the
indicator lamp ï in the instrument
cluster lights up and a yellow display mes-
sage with = or ? and Set driving
level. appears.

Driving mode
Raising or lowering the chassis with ◁ The indicator lamp 5 on the

the on-board computer instrument cluster will come on.
▶ To interrupt or end the raising or
Danger lowering operation: Press the button
Risk of entrapment from vehicle 9.
lowering
Setting the driving level
When lowering the vehicle, other people
may become trapped if their limbs are Example: level control input window ▶ Press the button u or t to
between the vehicle body and the tyres Level control input window select driving level preselection 3.
or underneath the vehicle. 1 Pre‐selection for raising or lowering the front
▶ Briefly press the r or s but-
ton.
▶ Make sure no one is underneath the axle
vehicle or in the immediate vicinity 2 Pre‐selection for raising or lowering the ◁ The chassis will automatically be
of the wheel arches when you lower
entire vehicle raised or lowered to the driving
the vehicle.
3 Pre‐selection for setting the driving level level.
4 Preselection for raising or lowering the rear ◁ When the chassis frame is at
The menu window Level control in the axle driving level, the indicator lamp
on‐board computer is available on 5 Memory preset M1 or M2 for chassis height ¸ in the instrument cluster
vehicles with air suspension. will go out.
▶ Use the u or t button to scroll Raising or lowering the chassis
to Operation and maintenance â. Storing the chassis height
▶ Press the u or t button to
▶ Use the r or s button to scroll select front axle 1, entire vehicle 2 ▶ Raise or lower the chassis to the
to the menu window Level control. or rear axle 4. desired height.
▶ Press the button 9. ▶ Press the r button to lower the ▶ Using the u or t button, select
◁ The instrument cluster displays chassis frame or the s button to memory preset M1 or M2 for chassis
the input window. raise it. height 5.

Driving mode
▶ Press and hold the r button for ◁ The current chassis height is ◁ The chassis will automatically be
approximately two seconds. stored under the corresponding raised or lowered to the driving
◁ The current height of the chassis û button. level. When the chassis frame is
is stored under the corresponding at driving level, the ï indicat-
memory preset M1 or M2. Calling up or lamp in the instrument cluster
▶ Briefly press the û button for will go out.
Calling up the chassis height memory preset M1 or M2. ▶ Press the T button to interrupt/end
▶ Using the u or t button, select ◁ The chassis will be the raising or lowering operation.
memory preset M1 or M2 for chassis raised/lowered automatically to
Using the button on the instrument
height 5. the stored height. The instrument
panel
▶ Call up the selected memory preset cluster shows a yellow display
with the s button. message with = or ? and
◁ The chassis will be Set driving level..
raised/lowered automatically to ▶ Press the T button to interrupt/end
the stored height. the raising or lowering operation.
Storing/opening the chassis height Setting the driving level

Storing Using the operating unit
▶ Raise/lower the chassis to the de- ▶ Press the button u or t to
sired height. select driving level pre-selection 3.
▶ Press the button û for memory ◁ The LEDs for driving level pre-
preset M1 or M2 for approximately selection 3 go on. Example: STOP and driving level button
two seconds. ▶ Briefly press the r or s but- ▶ Press the Ø button.

ton. ◁ The chassis will automatically be
raised or lowered to the driving

Driving mode
level. When the chassis frame is ▶ Leave the vehicle switched on until Special functions of the level control
at driving level, the ï indicat- the pressure regulator cuts out. system
or lamp in the instrument cluster ▶ Press and hold the T button on the
will go out. operating unit. Notes
▶ Press the ¤ button to
or
interrupt/end the raising or lowering Note
operation. ▶ Press and hold the ¤ button on Damage due to incorrect chassis
the instrument panel. height
▶ Switch off the vehicle. If you start working mode before the
Loading and unloading the vehicle ▶ Vehicles with mechanical ignition chassis frame has been lowered com-
when the vehicle is switched off lock: Remove the key from the igni- pletely, or if you raise the chassis frame
tion lock. to driving level before working mode has
Note
▶ Release the T button on the operat- ended, the vehicle may be damaged.
Damage to shock absorbers due to ing unit.
rebounding of the chassis ▶ Select the driving level as required
If swap bodies are removed, this may or and wait until the chassis has
result in damage to shock absorbers due ▶ Release the ¤ button on the in- reached the level that you have
to the sudden rebounding of the chassis. strument panel. selected.
▶ Fully lower the chassis before re- ◁ If there is sufficient reservoir Forced lowering
moving swap bodies. pressure in the compressed-air
system, the height of the chassis When you engage a power take‐off, the
Store a permanent chassis height for is kept constant for approxim- vehicle is completely lowered on all air‐
loading and unloading the vehicle. ately four to five hours. sprung axles. This increases the tipping
▶ Vehicles with trailing axle: Lower the stability of the vehicle.
trailing axle ( → Page 314).
▶ If required, raise/lower the chassis to
the desired height.

Driving mode
Residual air bellow pressure readjust- Automatic deactivation of the special Using road paver mode
ment functions using the button in the
Activating using the button on the
instrument panel
Depending on the equipment, it is pos- instrument panel
sible to readjust the residual air bellows Special functions are deactivated in the
pressure. following cases:
Vehicles with residual air bellows pres- ● The vehicle is switched off.
sure readjustment: if residual air bellows ● The T button on the operating unit is
pressure control is active, the air suspen- pressed.
sion pressure on each axle is constantly ● The ¤ button on the instrument
monitored and, if necessary, increased/ panel is pressed.
decreased until it matches a parameteris- ● The ë button on the instrument
able value. panel is pressed.
Vehicles without residual air bellows pres-
sure readjustment: The air suspension Note
pressure on the front axle is reduced until If the vehicle is switched on after an
Example: road paver mode button
it matches a parameterised value. The air automatic deactivation, the special func-
suspension valves are closed when the tions remain deactivated. A special func- Note
set value is reached. On the rear axle, the tion must, if necessary, be reactivated
Observe the notes on road paver mode
vehicle is lowered completely on all air‐ manually. Observe the bodybuilder's op-
( → Page 318).
sprung axles. The air suspension valves on erating instructions when doing this.
the rear axle subsequently remain open.
▶ Press the ë button above.
◁ The indicator lamp in the ë
button flashes and the function is
preselected.

Driving mode
▶ Engage the power take-off Using raised driving level (vehicles ▶ To lower the chassis frame to nor-
( → Page 372). for transportation of bulk cargo) mal driving level: Press the top ê
◁ The instrument cluster displays button again.
ë and a display message. The Using the button on the instrument ◁ The indicator lamp in the ê
function is activated when the panel button goes out.
indicator lamp in the ë button ◁ When the chassis is lowered to
is lit. the normal driving level, the ¸
indicator lamp in the instrument
Deactivating using the button on the cluster goes out.
instrument panel
▶ Press the T button on the operating
unit. Using manoeuvring level
or Using the button on the instrument

panel
▶ Press the ¤ button on the instru-
ment panel.
or
Raise the chassis while driving for im-
▶ Increase vehicle speed to over proved ride comfort.
10 km/h.
▶ Raising the chassis frame to raised
or
driving level: Press the ê button
▶ Switch off the vehicle. above.
◁ The display ë in the instru- ◁ The indicator lamp in the ê
ment cluster and the indicator button and the ¸ indicator
lamp in the button ë go out. lamp in the instrument cluster
light up.
Raised driving level and manoeuvring level button (example)

Driving mode
Additional axles
▶ Stop the vehicle. level, the indicator lamp ¸ in switched on. Using the starting-off aid
the instrument cluster goes out. over an extended period of time may
or
damage the rear axle and the wheels.
▶ Drive at walking pace. The instrument cluster shows a display
▶ Switching on manoeuvring level: message if the speed at manoeuvring ▶ Make sure that the starting‐off aid is
Press the lower section of the raised level is too high. only switched on for a short time.
driving level and manoeuvring level Manoeuvring level is deactivated automat- The starting‐off aid can also be fitted with
button. ically in the following cases: a limit speed or a time limit (reactivation
◁ The indicator lamp of the button ● The chassis is lowered or raised lockout).
þ and the indicator lamp manually. ▶ If the starting-off aid has no time
¸ in the instrument cluster ● Raised or normal driving level is set. limit, make sure that the starting-
light up. ● The button T on the control panel off aid is only switched on for a short
◁ The instrument cluster also dis- or the button ¤ on the instrument time.
plays the Shunting level active panel is pressed.
display message. The chassis The starting‐off aid with limit speed
lowers or rises to the manoeuv- switches itself off automatically at a
ring level. Additional axles speed above 30 km/h. The starting‐off
aid can only be switched on again at a
▶ Deactivating manoeuvring level: Notes on starting-off aid speed below 30 km/h.
Press the lower section of the button
þ again. Note The starting‐off aid with reactivation lock-
◁ The indicator lamp of the þ out switches itself off automatically after
Damage to tyres and axles due to
button and the display message 90 seconds. After 50 seconds, the start-
prolonged use of the starting-off aid
go out. The chassis lowers or ing‐off aid with reactivation lockout can
The starting-off aid is only intended for
rises to driving level. be switched on again.
short-term use if the vehicle's wheels
◁ When the chassis is raised or are spinning on a slippery carriage- The starting‐off aid without reactivation
lowered to the normal driving way. The axle load on the rear axle is lockout switches itself off automatically
increased when the starting-off aid is

Driving mode
Additional axles
after 120 seconds and can be switched or ( → Page 244) and on the vehicle identi-
on again immediately. ▶ Press the T button on the fication plate ( → Page 473).
operating unit of the level control In vehicles for large capacity transport,
Switching starting-off aid on/off ( → Page 305). the trailing axle can only have its load
◁ The å indicator lamp in the reduce, it cannot be raised.
status area of the instrument
Vehicles with steered trailing axle: When
cluster goes out.
the additional axle is raised, the wheels
steer in a straight‐ahead position. When
Raising/lowering the trailing axle the additional axle is lowered again, the
wheels steer again.
Note ▶ Start the vehicle.
Reducing rolling resistance by raising ▶ Wait until there is sufficient supply
the leading and trailing axle pressure in the compressed-air sys-
Raising the leading and trailing axles tem.
reduces rolling resistance. This reduces ▶ If the vehicle is empty or only partially
tyre wear and fuel consumption. laden, raise the leading/trailing axle
▶ Switching starting-off aid on: Press before pulling away.
the button å.
▶ Raise the leading/trailing axle if it is
not required. ▶ Vehicles with a rear loading crane
◁ As long as the starting-off aid is body: Before raising the leading/trail-
switched on, the å indicator ing axle, refer to the body manufac-
Note
lamp in the status area of the turer's operating instructions.
instrument cluster lights up. The leading/trailing axle is lowered
shortly before the permissible axle load
▶ When loading or unloading the
▶ Ending the starting-off aid manu- vehicle, lower the leading/trailing
ally: Press the ¤ button on the is reached. Observe the instructions
axle.
instrument panel. in the "Axle and wheel loads" section

Driving mode
Additional axles
If the trailing axle does not lower, the

! indicator lamp flashes continuously
when the vehicle has been switched on.
Once the key has been removed from
the ignition lock, the indicator lamp!
flashes for another ten minutes and then
goes out.
▶ If the trailing axle does not lower,
use chocks to prevent the vehicle
from rolling away and have it checked
immediately at a qualified specialist
workshop.
▶ Raising/lowering: Press the button ▶ Start the vehicle.
â. ▶ Press the Õ button above.
◁ When the leading/trailing axle Using steerable additional axle
◁ The steering of the additional
is being raised, the indicator To centre manually axle is centred. The wheels of the
lamp ¡(trailing axle) or} additional axle steer in a straight-
(leading axle) in the status area of Note ahead position. When the Õ
the instrument cluster lights up. indicator lamp lights up in the
Damage to the tyres of vehicles with
Vehicles with four air‐sprung axles: The steerable additional axle status area of the instrument
trailing axle is lowered automatically There is a risk of damaging the tyres cluster, the additional axle is
when the parking brake is applied. This if vehicles with steerable additional centred.
increases the braking effect. The indic- axles are manoeuvred on kerbs or pass
ator lamp ! in the instrument cluster To release the steering function
through narrow passages.
flashes for the short duration of the lower- ▶ Press the top Õ button again.
ing. ▶ In such cases, centre the steering of
the additional axle.

Driving mode
Driving tips
◁ When the Õ indicator lamp in axle co-steers again. The { You will then need to exert considerably
the status area of the instrument indicator lamp in the status area more power when steering and braking,
cluster goes out, the steering of the instrument cluster goes for example.
function of the additional axle is out. ▶ For this reason alone, you should
activated. The additional axle co-
or never switch off the vehicle while
steers again.
▶ Pull away slowly. you are driving.
If the steerable additional axle is dis-
◁ The additional axle co-steers
turbed or no longer steers, the instrument Danger
again. The { indicator lamp in
cluster displays a corresponding display Risk of accident on uphill or downhill
the status area of the instrument
message and the D indicator lamp in slopes
cluster goes out.
the status area of the instrument cluster
The parking brake may not be sufficient
lights up.
to secure the vehicle on uphill and down-
When the { indicator lamp of the in- Driving tips hill slopes.
strument cluster lights up grey in the General driving tips A loaded vehicle or a vehicle with a trail-
status area of the on‐board computer, the
er/semitrailer may roll away.
steering angle disparity between the fully Danger
locked front axle wheels and the steerable ▶ In the check position, check wheth-
Risk of accident when the vehicle is
additional axle is too great. For example, er the braking force of the parking
switched off while driving
the vehicle has been parked with its steer- brake alone is sufficient to hold the
If during an emergency you switch off complete vehicle.
ing on full lock. The steerable additional
the vehicle while you are driving, safety-
axle does not co‐steer. ▶ Generally, secure the towing vehicle
relevant functions will be restricted or no
▶ Turn the multifunction steering wheel and trailer/semitrailer with the park-
longer available.
to the left and right as far as it will go. ing brake and, additionally, with
This may affect the power steering sys- chocks.
◁ The steered additional axle is tem and the brake force boosting, for ex-
picked up when the steering ample.
wheel is turned. The additional

Driving mode
Driving tips
Using an underride guard Folding underride guard – tipper

vehicle with steel suspension
Danger
Risk of fatal injuries due to under-
ride guard being folded up while the
vehicle is in motion
A vehicle could become trapped under-
neath the chassis in the event of a rear-
end collision.
There is a risk of death for the occu-
pants of the vehicle colliding from be-
hind.
▶ To fold up: Push the left and right
▶ Fold the underride guard down and levers 2 in the direction of the arrow
lock it in place when driving on pub- and swing the underride guard 1
lic roads. Underride guard
upwards.
If a higher angle of approach/departure is
d Road position ◁ The underride guard 1 swings
required during off‐road driving: e Off‐road position/ road paver mode position up to the end stop with the sup-
port of the pneumatic springs and
▶ Fold up the underride guard. is held there magnetically.
▶ To fold down: Push the underride
guard 1 down with force to release
it from the retaining magnets.
◁ The underride guard swings down
and the levers 2 engage auto-
matically.

Driving mode
Driving tips
Folding underride guard – tipper r Road paver operation position Road paver mode
vehicle with air suspension
▶ Hold the underride guard 1 in place. Preparing road paver mode
▶ Swing both levers 2 into position
2.
◁ The underride guard 1 will be
released.
▶ Swing the underride guard 1 into
the desired position and hold it in
place.
▶ Swing both levers 2 into position 1 Example: mud flap, left-hand side of vehicle
and release the underride guard 1.
▶ Set the underride guard to the road
◁ The underride guard 1 is locked. paver mode position.
▶ Swing both mud flaps up over the
Note licence plate holder.
If you swing the underride guard 1 into ▶ Attach the rings 2 on the mud flaps
the road paver mode position r, leave to the hooks 1 on the licence plate
both levers 2 in position 2. holder.
Example: lever, left-hand side of the vehicle
Underride guard
d Off‐road position
e Road position

Driving mode
Driving tips
Notes on road paver mode ▶ Make sure that nobody is in the to be pushed forwards at the speed of the
space between the tyre and under- road finishing machine.
Tipper with steel suspension ride guard.
▶ Switch the level control to road paver
mode ( → Page 311).
Note
For most road pavers, the optimal road
Damage due to locked underride
paver roller position is preset. The road
guard in road paver mode
paver rollers should touch the approach
In road paver mode, the underride guard
plate roughly in the centre.
must be able to swing freely to avoid
damage to the vehicle frame and under- ▶ Do not use the parking brake when in
Tipper with steel suspension in road paver mode (overrun ride guard. overrun mode and only perform slight
mode) adaptive braking with the service
▶ Unlock the underride guard. brake.
▶ Do not use the parking brake when in
overrun mode and only perform slight The vehicle's level will be adjusted auto-
adaptive braking with the service matically. If the road paver rollers do
brake. not touch the centre of the approach
plate, a different driving level can be
Tipper with air suspension set before power take‐off is activated
( → Page 304).
Danger
Risk of entrapment between tyre and
Tipper with air suspension in road paver mode (overrun
underride guard mode)
If the underride guard is pushed against In road paver mode, the road paver
the tyre, persons in the space between presses rollers on the underride guard
the tyre and underride guard could be- against the tyres. This causes the vehicle
come trapped.

Driving mode
Driving tips
Off-road driving ▶ If damage should occur, immediately Driving off‐road demands special driving
inform a qualified workshop. skills and concentration. Furthermore,
Notes on driving off-road the driver has a particular duty of care
Note when driving off‐road and before rejoin-
Danger ing public roads again. Please make sure
Damage to the differential gear
Risk of injury due to acceleration you read this section thoroughly before
caused by drive wheels spinning on
forces when driving off-road attempting to drive the vehicle off‐road.
one side
You could be thrown out of your seat, Daimler Truck AG recommends that you
The differential may be damaged by
for example. practise driving off road over less de-
the different wheel speeds of the drive
▶ Always fasten your seat belt, includ- manding terrain. When driving on difficult
wheels.
ing when driving off‐road. terrain for the first time, ask an experi-
▶ Plan ahead when engaging the dif- enced off‐road driver to accompany and
ferential locks. advise you.
Danger
When driving off‐road, substances such Driving systems for driving off-road
Risk of fire due to flammable material
as dirt, sand, mud and water, at times
coming into contact with hot parts of
mixed with oil, may get into the brakes.
the exhaust system Note
This can lead to a reduced braking effect
Flammable material such as Damage to the differential due to
or to a total failure of the brakes, also due
leaves, grass or twigs may ignite if they unequal traction
to increased wear. The braking character-
come into contact with hot parts of the If the traction on all wheels is unequal,
istics change depending on the material
exhaust system. the differential may be damaged.
that has penetrated. Clean the brakes
▶ When driving off‐road or on unpaved after driving off‐road. If you then notice ▶ Only use the differential locks if
surfaces, check the underside of the reduced braking effect or hear grinding there is equal traction on all wheels.
vehicle at regular intervals. noises, have the brake system checked at
▶ In particular, remove any trapped a qualified workshop. Adjust your driving
parts of plants or other flammable style to the changed braking characterist-
material. ics.

Driving mode
Driving tips
The following driving systems and equip- Rules for driving off-road
ment help you to drive the vehicle off-road Note
safely: Before driving up or down extreme in- Danger
● Differential locks ( → Page 250) clines or slopes, top up the engine oil to
Risk of injury to hands when driving
● Transfer case ( → Page 253) the maximum level.
over obstacles
▶ Vehicle tool kit: Check that the jack If you drive over obstacles or drive into
Checklist before driving off-road is working ( → Page 414). track grooves, the steering wheel can
▶ Check the fuel and AdBlue® levels ▶ Make sure that a wheel spanner, move abruptly of its own accord.
( → Page 142) and top up if neces- wooden underlay for the jack, a ro-
▶ Hold the steering wheel firmly with
sary ( → Page 341). bust tow rope and a folding spade are
both hands at all times.
▶ Engine: Check the engine oil level carried in the vehicle.
▶ Always hold the steering wheel such
( → Page 163) and top up if neces- ▶ Wheels and tyres: Check the tyre
that your thumbs are on the outer
sary ( → Page 400). Before driving up tread depth ( → Page 458) and tyre
side of the steering wheel rim.
or down extreme inclines or slopes, pressure ( → Page 461).
▶ When driving over obstacles, be
top up the engine oil to the maximum ▶ Driver's seat: Block the horizontal
prepared to briefly use more force
level. suspension.
when steering, if necessary.
▶ Mud flaps: Fold the mud flaps up and
Note attach.
Danger
When driving up or down extreme in- ▶ Folding underride guard: Fold the
underride guard to the off-road posi- Risk of accident when the differential
clines or slopes, the 4 symbol may
tion ( → Page 317). lock is engaged
appear on the instrument cluster. The
When driving off-road or driving with an
engine operating safety is not put at risk
engaged differential lock in the automat-
if you have filled the engine oil to the
ic drive program, the electronic man-
maximum level before the journey.
agement system may perform unwanted
▶ Automatic transmission: Check the gear changes.
oil level and top up ( → Page 400).

Driving mode
Driving tips
The vehicle may, for example, roll back- Vehicles with level control: leave ● Vehicles with automated manual
wards on slopes. the chassis set to driving level transmission: Activate the
( → Page 309). Raise the chassis frame rocking‐free function to rock the
▶ Always drive carefully and be ready
only when necessary and always for a vehicle free from a deep rut.
to brake.
short time only, e.g. to drive over a steep ● always drive with a gear engaged and
▶ Switch to the manual drive program. crest. When you raise the chassis, traction do not switch off the vehicle while the
On uphill and downhill slopes, always fol- is impaired. vehicle is moving.
low the line of fall and avoid shifting gear. ● Drive slowly and smoothly. It may
Also observe the following points:
Drive up slopes without stopping until you often be necessary to drive at walking
● Securely stow away all loose objects.
are at the top of the hill. If your vehicle is pace.
unable to cope with the slope, stop the ● Securely fasten the load.
● Make sure that the wheels remain in
vehicle. Shift into reverse gear and allow ● Secure bulk material (e.g. sand or
contact with the ground.
the vehicle to slowly roll backwards. gravel) with wall extenders or covers
to prevent it slipping. ● Drive with extreme care across un-
Vehicles with automated manual known terrain where you can only see
● Secure add‐on equipment and im-
transmission: When crawler mode is for a short distance. As a precaution,
plements, such as tipper bodies or
engaged, the vehicle automatically crawls first get out of the vehicle and take a
loading cranes, against inadvertent
forwards after the service brake has been look at the route to be taken.
activation and movement. Observe
released, and continues to roll at idle ● Watch out for obstacles such as
the operating instructions given by
speed ( → Page 236). rocks, holes, tree stumps and ruts.
the body and equipment manufac-
Select the offroad shift program adapted turer. ● If possible, always drive over
for off‐road driving. This enables you to ● Close the side windows. obstacles with the wheels of one side
initiate the gear selection process manu- of the vehicle. This means damage to
● Disengage Stability Control Assist
ally, according to the driving conditions, the vehicle is avoided.
( → Page 249).
and to avoid interruptions in the tractive
● Engage the differential lock if the
power.
traction is insufficient ( → Page 250).

Driving mode
Driving tips
Driving on downhill slopes ▶ Depress the brake pedal if the en- ● Construction vehicles with
gine's braking effect is insufficient 315/80 R 22.5 tyres from 300 mm
Danger when driving downhill. up to maximum 500 mm
Risk of accident if the line of fall is ● Other road vehicles with
not followed on slopes Preparing for fording 315/80 R 22.5 tyres up to maximum
If you drive at a slant angle or turn on a A vehicle's fording capability depends 300 mm
slope, the vehicle may slide sideways, tip upon various factors, such as: ● Other road vehicles with oversized
over or overturn. ● the type of vehicle tyres, e.g. 12 R 24 or 14 R 20, up to
● the frame height of the chassis maximum 600 mm
▶ Always follow the line of fall when
you are driving up a slope (in a ● the tyres Permissible fording depths for fording
straight line upwards or downwards) with all-wheel drive vehicles:
The fording depths listed below are only
and do not turn. examples and are meant to provide an ● Without fording equipment, with
overview. They apply to slow fording at 13 R 22.5 tyres, up to maximum
Note a constant speed between 5 km/h and 700 mm
max. 10 km/h. ● With fording equipment, up to maxim-
Do not shift the transmission to neutral
um 1,200 mm
on downhill slopes. If in doubt, or in the case of special‐pur-
pose vehicles, consult an authorised Mer- On vehicles with fording equipment, a
▶ When driving the vehicle up or down
cedes‐Benz Trucks Service Centre before plate with the details of the vehicle‐specif-
a slope if it begins to tip over, steer
a possible fording. ic permissible fording depth can be found
the vehicle into the line of fall imme-
on the driver's door or on the cockpit.
diately. Only drive over embankments Permissible fording depths for vehicles in
and on slopes along the line of fall. road use without all-wheel drive:
▶ Only brake once the vehicle is on the ● Road vehicles with a low vehicle
line of fall. frame and 315/60 R 22.5 tyres, up
to maximum 200 mm

Driving mode
Driving tips
Note Driving through water Note

Fording as described here applies ex- Fording Pulling away in water is difficult due
clusively to off‐road and all‐wheel‐drive to the strong driving resistance and
vehicles. Note low traction.
Damage to vehicle parts due to bow ▶ If necessary, plan ahead and engage
Observe the following points while prepar- wave created at the front of the the differential locks ( → Page 250).
ing: vehicle ▶ Ensure that no bow wave forms while
● Determine and observe the maxim- Driving too fast into water can cause driving.
um permissible fording depth of the vehicle parts to be damaged by the res- ▶ Do not switch off the vehicle when it
vehicle. ulting bow wave created at the front of is standing in water.
● Determine the water depth and the the vehicle. ▶ If the vehicle cuts out while in the
characteristics of the surface condi-
tion under the water. As a precaution, ▶ Drive slowly into bodies of water. water, start it again immediately.
have a closer look on foot. ▶ Commence fording at walking pace in After fording
● Switch off the auxiliary heating shallow water.
▶ If the terrain characteristics permit,
( → Page 137). ▶ Adapt your driving style to the envir-
dry the brakes with short braking
● wait for the auxiliary heating run‐on onment.
manoeuvres.
phase to end ▶ Drive through the water at a constant
▶ Drive on or leave the vehicle switched
● Activate the regeneration lockout speed between 5 km/h and max.
on for a few minutes.
( → Page 329). 10 km/h.
◁ The engine compartment is dried.
▶ Do not declutch, change gear or stop
while driving.
▶ Once you have returned to a paved
surface, observe the checklist for
after off-road driving ( → Page 325).

Driving mode
Driving tips
Driving on sand ▶ Disengage the differential lock Information on cleaning after driving
( → Page 250). off-road or in roadworks
Loose sand is a particularly treacherous
surface for off‐road driving. ▶ Disengage the regeneration lockout Observe the notes on cleaning the exter-
( → Page 329). ior ( → Page 384) and notes on using a
▶ Drive quickly to overcome rolling ▶ Vehicles with automated manual
resistance. high‐pressure cleaner ( → Page 383).
transmission: Select a drive program
▶ Drive in the tyre tracks of vehicles for on-road driving ( → Page 233). Foreign bodies that have become trapped
ahead. can be expelled while the vehicle is in
▶ Test the brakes.
▶ Pay attention to the vehicle's ground ▶ Check the headlamps and tail lamps
motion, e.g. stones caught in the tyre
clearance in the case of deep treads or between the wheels (twin tyres).
for damage.
grooves. This could cause other road users to be
▶ Check for damage to the tyres. injured or vehicles to be damaged.
▶ Replace dented or damaged wheels.
Checklist after driving off-road Each time after driving off‐road or in road-
▶ Replace missing valve caps and valve
works, check the tyres for trapped foreign
extensions.
Note bodies and remove before driving on pub-
▶ Check and adjust the tyre pressure
lic roads. Dirt and mud on the tyres and
Damage caused by foreign objects,
( → Page 461).
e.g. stones, plant matter or twigs on the roadway reduce grip, particularly if
▶ Check the entire vehicle underside, the roadway is wet. This may cause your
Fuel lines, brake hoses, axle joints, brakes, steering, suspension and
drive shafts or other components on vehicle to start to skid. For this reason,
exhaust system for damage. always clean your vehicle carefully after
the vehicle can be damaged by trapped
▶ Check the engine oil level. every off‐road journey or trip in roadworks
foreign objects.
▶ Move the folding underride guard to and before journeys on public roads.
▶ Remove trapped foreign objects the on-road position ( → Page 317).
Clean the following vehicle parts:
immediately after driving off‐road. ▶ Fold down the mud flaps.
● Lighting system
▶ Engage the ASR ( → Page 248) ▶ Observe the notes on cleaning after
driving off-road or in roadworks. ● side windows and windscreen
or Stability Control Assist
● Outside mirrors
( → Page 249).

Driving mode
Driving tips
● Steps Economical and environmentally ● Operating conditions, e.g. operation

● Entrances aware driving on construction sites, long‐distance
● Grab handles or short‐distance driving
Vehicle version ● gross vehicle weight
● Wheels and tyres
● wheel well and wing The following components affect fuel ● Regeneration of the diesel particulate
● Steering consumption: filter
● Axles ● tyres, e.g. tyre pressure, tyre condi- When the vehicle is in new condition,
● Brakes tion, tyre size regeneration of the diesel particulate filter
● Spring elements ● body and cab version, e.g. open plat- is carried out more frequently than at later
form, box body, platform with cover stages in the vehicle's operating life, as a
● Chassis
● drive train, major assemblies and the result of the running‐in process.
● Licence plate
number of axles
● Engine Maintenance
● Ratio of the assembly units, e.g.
● Radiator
transmission and axle ratio Fuel consumption and major assembly
● Transmission
● Ancillary units, e.g. air‐condition- wear depend on regular maintenance.
● Oil cooler (transmission) ing system, auxiliary heating, power Regular maintenance of the vehicle in-
Observe the following points after opera- take‐offs creases road safety and lowers fuel con-
tion in mud, sand, water or after exposure sumption. Observe the maintenance in-
to similar dirty conditions: Operating conditions tervals. Always have maintenance work
● clean the brake discs, brake pads, The following operating conditions affect carried out at a qualified workshop.
wheels and axle joints and check fuel consumption:
them for damage. ● topography, e.g. driving on level Fuel type
● Lubricate the axle joints. routes or in mountainous terrain Use of lower fuel grades and/or non‐
● Lubricate the drive shaft. ● outside temperature and weather approved fuel additives will increase fuel
● Test the brakes while paying attention conditions consumption.
to the road and traffic conditions.

Driving mode
Driving tips
Ensure that you refuel with the appropri- ● load distribution, e.g. an even load Fuel-efficient driving style
ate fuel grade ( → Page 486). distribution not only increases driving
safety, but also tyre life Note
Driving resistance Observe the notes on the permissible
Using the air-conditioning system
The main forms of driving resistance are wheel‐ and axle loads ( → Page 244)
increases the fuel consumption
incline, rolling and aerodynamic resist- and the information on the vehicle
identification plate ( → Page 473). Your fuel consumption will increase
ance. Driving resistance changes depend-
if the air-conditioning system or the
ing on e.g. vehicle weight and vehicle ● road and weather conditions, e.g. wet
automatic climate control is switched
speed. Remember that driving resistance or soft carriageway (snow or rain)
on.
increases with vehicle speed. increase fuel consumption.
Rolling resistance Aerodynamics
▶ Only switch this function on if re-
quired.
Rolling resistance and therefore fuel con- Air turbulence increases aerodynamic
sumption are affected by the following drag and therefore fuel consumption. Air The menu window Eco-Support in the
factors: turbulences particularly occur around Driving mode menu D shows inform-
ation about your economical driving style
● tyre size and tyre type additionally installed accessories, e.g.
additional headlamps. ( → Page 154). The on‐board computer
● tyre pressure, e.g. correctly set tyre
helps you to optimise your driving style
pressure reduces fuel consumption Set the wind deflector to the correct and develop fuel‐saving driving habits.
Check the tyre pressure at regular height of the body/semitrailer.
intervals ( → Page 461). ( → Page 360) You can keep fuel consumption at low
● tyre type, e.g. summer or winter levels by adopting the following driving
With open loads, arrange the load so that
tyres, single or twin tyres style:
there are no gaps.
● tyre tread and tyre width, e.g. thick ● Leave PPC switched on
Cover the load with a tarpaulin and se- ( → Page 272).
tyre treads such as those on winter
curely lash down all tarpaulins on the ● Do not depress the accelerator when
tyres increase fuel consumption
tractor/trailer combination. starting the vehicle.
● Avoid frequent cold starts.

Driving mode
Driving tips
● Do not warm up the vehicle while Notes on the diesel particulate filter Activate regeneration lockout if regenera-
stationary. tion lasts longer than three hours during a
BlueTec® 6 vehicles are equipped with a
● Switch off the vehicle in stationary journey ( → Page 329).
diesel particulate filter.
traffic. If too many particles accumulate in the
● Avoid frequent and heavy accelera- diesel particulate filter, the Â indicator
Danger
tion. lamp in the instrument cluster will come
Risk of fire from hot exhaust system
● Avoid heavy braking by adopting an on. A display message prompts you to
components
anticipatory driving style. start manual regeneration ( → Page 330).
Flammable materials, such as leaves,
● Drive in an even and smooth manner. Manual regeneration lasts about 30
grass or twigs, may ignite.
● Use the cruise control ( → Page 261) minutes to 60 minutes.
and Proximity Control Assist ▶ Park the vehicle such that no flam-
( → Page 263) driving systems. mable materials can come into con- Note
● Maintain an economical engine tact with hot vehicle parts. If you drive the vehicle predominantly
speed (green area of the rev counter) ▶ In particular, do not park on dry over short distances or with low loads,
( → Page 141). grassland or harvested grain fields. the regeneration time may be consid-
● Avoid speed peaks. erably longer. This increases fuel con-
● Avoid frequent speed changes, in Note sumption and can negatively affect the
particular at high speeds. Damage due to hot exhaust gases exhaust system functionality.
● Whenever possible, drive using the Very hot exhaust gases emerge from the If you do not observe the display mes-
automatic drive program. tailpipe during automatic and manual sages, the engine output may be re-
● Shift gears according to require- regeneration. duced and it might be necessary to
ments. change the diesel particulate filter.
▶ Keep a minimum distance of one
● Avoid frequent gear changes. metre away from other objects, such
as parked vehicles.

Driving mode
Driving tips
Filter change ation will start again automatically. There- Activate regeneration lockout only for the
fore, avoid making interruptions to your duration of the hazard. When regenera-
Danger journey while the indicator lamp É is tion lockout is switched on, regeneration
on. is disabled even if the vehicle is started
Risk of poisoning from soot particles again. In this case, the instrument cluster
Touching and breathing in soot particles shows a grey display message Â Re-
Note
is hazardous to health. generation disabled.
The engine noise and the idle speed may
▶ Have the diesel particulate filter change during regeneration.
replaced at a qualified workshop. Note
Regeneration can be disabled via the
Automatic regeneration Activating and deactivating regenera- menu window Vehicle in the Settings
Automatic regeneration of the diesel par- tion lockout of the diesel particulate menu ä ( → Page 165). Regeneration
ticulate filter is performed when the green filter lockout is only activated or deactivated
indicator lamp É in the instrument Switch on the regeneration lockout to using the fire-sv shift program or the
cluster comes on. avoid increased exhaust gas temperatures Ê button on vehicles for transporting
when regenerating the diesel particulate hazardous materials.
Automatic regeneration is only performed
filter.
while driving.
Automatic regeneration only starts when This is necessary in the following cases,
all operating conditions have been met, for example:
for example, sufficiently high engine oil ● When driving into a danger zone.
and coolant temperature. If an operating ● When performing work with dry or
condition is no longer fulfilled while regen- flammable materials resulting in a
eration is in process, the indicator lamp heavy build‐up of dirt on the vehicle.
É will go out and the regeneration pro- Automatic and manual regeneration can-
cess will be aborted. Once all operating not start and a running regeneration is
conditions are fulfilled again, the regener- cancelled.

Driving mode
Driving tips
Starting manual regeneration of the Note

diesel particulate filter
Manual regeneration can be started via
the menu window Vehicle in the Settings
ä ( → Page 165) menu . Manual re-
generation is only started via the button
É in vehicles for transporting haz-
ardous materials or with the fire‐sv shift
program.
▶ Park the vehicle safely and leave it

switched on. While doing so, maintain
Vehicles with ADR classification or with the fire-sv shift a distance of at least a metre from
program
other vehicles, objects and all flam-
▶ Lock with button: Press the Ê mable materials.
Only vehicles with ADR classification or with the fire-sv shift
button on the instrument panel be- program ▶ Apply the parking brake.
low.
Manual regeneration can only be started ▶ Shift the transmission into neutral i.
◁ If the indicator lamp on the Ê
button comes on, regeneration is
under the following conditions: ▶ Take your foot off the accelerator
● If display messages have prompted to pedal.
disabled.
do so. ▶ Activate DPF Regeneration in the
● When regeneration lockout is not menu window Vehicle in the Settings
switched on. menu ä ( → Page 165).
● If an automatic regeneration has
or
already been triggered (the É in-
dicator lamp is on). ▶ Vehicles with ADR classification or
fire–sv shift program: Press button
É for about three seconds.

Driving mode
Driving tips
◁ The É indicator lamp on the After regeneration is cancelled, the engine ● Your driving style
instrument cluster will come on. speed will reduce to the idle speed.
For these reasons, it is not possible to
Manual regeneration will only start when provide precise information on fuel con-
the following conditions have been met: Note sumption for each individual vehicle.
● The engine oil and coolant temperat- If at low outside temperatures, the
Information and notes on how to keep fuel
ure is sufficiently high. on‐board computer prompts you to
consumption low can be found in the sec-
● The AdBlue® is not frozen. perform manual regeneration, start
tion on "Economic and environmentally
● The system is functioning error‐free. regeneration before parking the
aware driving" ( → Page 326).
vehicle. If the vehicle is parked without
performing regeneration, manual
Note Note
regeneration can only be started after
The engine speed is increased and the the vehicle warm‐up phase. Details about average fuel consumption
engine noise may change during regen- is displayed by the on‐board
eration. If AdBlue® is frozen and/or the vehicle
computer in the Trip data menu C
has been parked without regeneration,
When regeneration is complete, the É ( → Page 153).
manual regeneration can only start after
indicator lamp on the instrument cluster a thawing time of up to 60 minutes.
will go out and the engine speed will re- Oil consumption
duce to the idle speed.
Fuel consumption For an engine that has been run in, oil
Regeneration is cancelled automatically in consumption can amount to up to 0.2% of
the following cases: Fuel consumption depends on the follow-
the actual fuel consumption.
ing factors:
● The multifunction lever is in position The oil consumption may exceed this
h or k. ● The vehicle version
● The operating conditions value if you operate your vehicle under
● The parking brake is released. arduous operating conditions or if the
● Maintenance
● The regeneration lockout is switched mileage is high.
on. ● The fuel type in use
● Power take‐off is switched on. ● Driving resistance

Driving mode
Driving tips
Limiting speed Reverse warning device When you switch on the vehicle and en-
gage reverse gear, the reverse warning
Danger Notes on the reverse warning device device is activated and always set to loud.
Risk of the tractor/trailer combina- Danger
tion swaying due to increased speed Switch the reversing warning system
Risk of accident from persons or ob- on and off
You could lose control of the jects in the manoeuvring area
trailer/tractor combination.
Other road users may not hear or may
The tractor/trailer combination may ignore the warning tone issued by the
even tip over. reverse warning device. There is a risk of
▶ Do not attempt to stretch the tract- accident!
or/trailer combination by increasing ▶ Make sure that no persons or ob-
the speed. jects are within the manoeuvring
▶ Reduce the speed and do not range when manoeuvring.
counter‐steer. ▶ If necessary, a second person must
▶ Brake if necessary. assist you when manoeuvring.
On vehicles with a speed limit, the max- The reversing warning system is designed
imum speed of the vehicle is limited ac- to help you ensure the safety of other
cording to national legal requirements, road users. ▶ To switch the reversing warning
e.g. to approximately 90 km/h. The en- system on and off: press and hold
When using the reverse warning system
gine speed is automatically limited when the * button for more than two
described here, observe the legal require-
the top speed is reached. Take this into seconds.
ments for the country where you currently
account when overtaking. are.
◁ The reverse warning device is de-
activated regardless of whether
reverse gear is engaged. Vehicles
with automatic activation of the

Driving mode
Driving tips
hazard warning light system: If the running boards in the rear area are A warning tone will sound in the following
The hazard warning lights are loaded while reverse gear is engaged, cases:
switched on when the reverse a warning tone sounds and the vehicle ● The driver's door is opened with the
gear is engaged. switches off. dipped beam switched on and the
▶ Setting the reversing warning sys- If the vehicle has been switched off by the ignition lock in the radio position.
tem to quiet or loud: Briefly press reverse gear lock: ● The driver's door is opened with
the * button. the side lights switched on and the
◁ The indicator lamp in the * vehicle switched off.
button lights up if the reverse ● The seat belt of the driver's seat is
warning device has been muted. ▶ Shift the transmission to neutral.
not fastened.
If reverse gear has not been en- ▶ Restart the vehicle.
● The immobiliser is activated.
gaged, the muted setting remains ● The brake pedal is not depressed
active for around two minutes. Notes on the warning tone when the hill holder is activated and
After two minutes, the volume of the vehicle is stationary.
the reverse warning device will be Note ● The vehicle is switched on and
unmuted. stationary for approximately nine
Damage to the engine due to disreg-
arding the warning tone minutes with a gear selected.
Using the reverse gear lock on waste If a warning tone sounds and a red dis- ● Reverse gear is engaged.
collection vehicles play message shows the 5 symbol, ● The key is removed from the igni-
Waste collection vehicles only: the engine operating safety is jeopard- tion lock or the vehicle is switched
ised. off when the frequent‐stop brake is
If the running boards in the rear area are activated and the parking brake is re-
subjected to a load, the vehicle speed is ▶ Do not set the vehicle in motion, leased.
limited to a maximum of 30 km/h and the or park it up immediately, paying
● The maximum permissible engine
reverse gear lock is activated. The reverse attention to the road and traffic
speed is exceeded.
gear lock prevents reverse gear being conditions.
selected.

Driving mode
Refuelling
● The vehicle speed or engine speed is ● The tyre pressure monitoring system 2 AdBlue® tank
too high when making a gear change. displays a tyre pressure loss warning.
● The loading bay approach aid has de- ● The vehicle is being driven faster
tected that an obstacle is too close. than approximately 40 km/h with Fuel
● The hazard warning light system is the manoeuvring level activated.
Notes on fuels
activated automatically, e.g. with ● The instrument cluster or the
maximum full‐stop braking. on‐board computer is malfunctioning. Danger
● When various driving systems issue Important operating information,
Risk of poisoning/chemical burns
warnings. maintenance information, or warning
from fuels
and indicator lamps can no longer be
A warning tone sounds in addition to a Fuels are toxic and hazardous to health.
displayed.
display message in the instrument cluster
in the following cases:
▶ Do not swallow fuel or let it come
into contact with skin, eyes or cloth-
● The coolant level is too low or the Refuelling ing.
maximum permissible coolant tem-
perature of 112 °C is exceeded. This
Fuel and AdBlue® tank ▶ Do not inhale fuel vapours.
jeopardises the operating safety of ▶ Keep children away from fuels.
the engine. ▶ Keep doors and windows closed
● There is a risk of overloading the when refuelling.
clutch.
● Crawler mode has reached its oper- Danger
ating limits and is automatically can- Risk of poisoning/chemical burns
celled. from fuels
● The monitored fifth‐wheel coupling is Example illustration Fuels are toxic and hazardous to health.
not engaged or the semitrailer is no Fuel and AdBlue® tank If you or others come into contact with
longer detected. 1 Fuel tank fuel, observe the following:

Driving mode
Refuelling
▶ Immediately rinse fuel off your skin into the vehicle during the refuelling
with soap and water. Danger process.
▶ If the fuel comes into contact with Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
your eyes, immediately rinse them Fuels are highly flammable. Danger
thoroughly with clean water. Seek ▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and Risk of fire from fuel mixture
medical attention immediately. a formation of sparks must be If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the
▶ Seek medical attention immediately avoided. flash point of the fuel mixture is lower
if fuel has been ingested. Do not ▶ Make sure that fuels do not come than that of pure diesel fuel.
induce vomiting. into contact with the hot exhaust
▶ Immediately change out of clothing ▶ Do not refuel diesel engines with
system. petrol.
which has come into contact with ▶ Switch off the vehicle and the aux-
fuel. ▶ Do not mix petrol with diesel fuel.
iliary heating before working on the
fuel system. BlueTec® 6 vehicles:
Danger ▶ Always wear protective gloves.
Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
▶ Only refuel with commercially-
available sulphur-free fuel that
Fuels are highly flammable. Danger conforms to European standard
▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and Risk of fire and explosion due to elec- EN 590 as of 2010 up to a max.
a formation of sparks must be trostatic charge sulphur content by weight of 0.001%
avoided. Electrostatic charge may ignite fuel va- (10 ppm).
▶ Before refuelling, switch off the pours.
The following fuel types are not permitted:
vehicle and, if present, the auxiliary ▶ Before you open the fuel filler cap or ● Sulphurous fuel with a sulphur con-
heating. take hold of the pump nozzle, touch tent over 0.001% by weight
the metallic vehicle body. ● Marine diesel fuel
▶ To avoid a repeat build‐up of elec- ● Aviation turbine fuel
trostatic charge, do not get back ● Heating oils

Driving mode
Refuelling
● Biodiesel fuels in accordance with ● Marine diesel fuel ● OM 473: Sulphurous fuel with a sul-
DIN EN 14214 (FAME (fatty acid ● Aviation turbine fuel phur content above 0.1% by weight
methyl ester) and UCOME (used cook- ● Heating oils (1000 ppm)
ing oil methyl ester) ● Biodiesel fuel FAME (fatty acid methyl ● Marine diesel fuel
These fuel types cause irreversible dam- ester) > 7% vol. % ● Aviation turbine fuel
age to the engine and BlueTec® 6 ex- ● Biodiesel fuel UCOME (Used Cooking ● Heating oils
haust gas after‐treatment system and Oil Methyl Ester) ● Biodiesel fuel FAME (fatty acid methyl
significantly reduce the expected service ester) > 7% vol. %
life. Vehicles without BlueTec® exhaust ● Biodiesel fuel UCOME (Used Cooking
gas aftertreatment Oil Methyl Ester)
BlueTec® 4 vehicles and BlueTec® 5 ▶ Only refuel with commercially avail-
vehicles: able sulphur-free diesel fuel that con- Note
Diesel fuel must comply with European forms to European standard EN 590 Damage to the engine due to incor-
standard EN 590. This enables the en- as of 2010 or a comparable national rect fuel
gines to achieve both the specified per- fuel standard. The use of incorrect fuel may damage
formance and the emission levels legally This enables the engines to achieve both the engine and the fuel system. Even
prescribed by the Euro 4 or Euro 5 stand- the specified performance and the emis- small amounts of petrol may damage the
ards. sion levels legally prescribed by the Euro engine and the fuel system.
The use of fuels with a sulphur content 3 standard. ▶ Do not refuel with petrol.
over 0.005% by weight (50 ppm) reduces
The following fuel types are not permitted: ▶ If you have refuelled with incorrect
the life expectancy of the engine and
● OM 460: Sulphurous fuel with a sul- fuel, consult a qualified workshop.
exhaust system.
phur content greater than 0.2% by ▶ Have the fuel tank and fuel lines
The following fuel types are not permitted: weight (2000 ppm) drained completely.
● Sulphurous fuel with a sulphur con-
tent over 0.05% by weight

Driving mode
Refuelling
so that it hooks onto the rim of the

Note Note filler neck with one of its lugs.
Damage due to the mixing of fuel Environmental damage due to the ▶ If the passenger vehicle pump
additives improper handling of fuel nozzle is caught, loosen it by turning
If fuel additives are added to the diesel The improper handling of fuels presents or tilting the pump nozzle.
fuel or FAME fatty acid methyl ester, this hazards to people and the environment.
You can find further information on
may lead to malfunctions, catalytic con-
▶ Do not allow fuels to enter the fuel in the section "Operating fluids"
verter damage and/or engine damage.
sewage system, surface water, ( → Page 486).
▶ Do not mix fuel additives. groundwater or the soil.
Filling order
Note Note
Malfunctions in the fuel supply due to Damage to the flap in the filler neck
contaminated fuel caused by a pump nozzle for a pas-
Impurities may enter the fuel system senger vehicle
from drums or canisters when refuelling. If a pump nozzle for a passenger vehicle
This can cause malfunctions in the fuel is used, the flap in the filler neck can
supply and in the fuel system. be damaged. If the pump nozzle for a
passenger vehicle is inserted too deeply
▶ Before refuelling, filter the fuel if it is
into the filler neck, a lug may catch on
taken from drums or canisters.
the flap in the filler neck.
▶ Use dedicated truck pump nozzles
for refuelling.
▶ If a pump nozzle for a passenger On vehicles with an additional fuel tank,
vehicle must be used: Insert the you must observe the filling order. If the
nozzle only so far into the filler neck filling order is not adhered to, the fuel

Driving mode
Refuelling
display and the range in the instrument ● Vehicles with mechanical ignition ▶ Lock the fuel filler cap 1 with the
cluster will not be displayed correctly. lock: The key is removed from the mechanical key.
ignition lock.
▶ First, fill up the fuel tank 1 (main
tank) on the left-hand side of the Note
vehicle, directly behind the cab. Regularly check the fuel prefilter with
▶ When the main tank has been com- heated water separator for condensation
pletely filled, then fill up the additional ( → Page 422).
fuel tank 2 on the left-hand side of
the vehicle. Using the folding ladder (Arocs street
▶ Only when all tanks on the left-hand sweeper)
side of the vehicle have been com- Example: Fuel tank
pletely filled, fill the additional fuel ▶ Observe filling sequence
tank 3 on the right-hand side of the ( → Page 337).
vehicle.
▶ Clean fuel filler cap 1 to prevent
If the main tank has run dry, the instru- dirt from getting into the fuel when
ment cluster will show a corresponding unscrewing fuel filler cap 1.
display message Fully refuel the main tank ▶ Unlock filler cap 1 on fuel tank 2
first. with the mechanical key.
▶ Observe the fuel grade
Refuelling the vehicle ( → Page 486).
Requirements ▶ Completely insert the pump nozzle
● The vehicle is switched off. into the tank filler neck, hook in place
Folding ladder
● The parking brake is applied. and refuel.
1
● The auxiliary heating is switched off ▶ Replace fuel filler cap 1 on fuel tank Holder for nozzle
2 and tighten. 2 Grab handle

( → Page 137).

Driving mode
Refuelling
3 Folding ladder ▶ Pull the lock 4 out of the catch and AdBlue®
hold it.
▶ Fold out the ladder in the direction of Notes on AdBlue®
the arrow.
Note
▶ When the ladder is folded out, engage
the lock 4 in the catch. Damage to the BlueTec® exhaust gas
after-treatment system
▶ Press the detachable lock 5 into the
catch and engage it. The BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat-
ment can be damaged by diesel fuel,
Folding up and locking additives or impurities in AdBlue® as
well as by diluting AdBlue®.
▶ Press the locking button 6 of the
detachable lock 5 and pull out the To prevent damage:
lock. ▶ Ensure that no diesel fuel enters the
▶ Pull the lock 4 out of the catch and AdBlue® tank.
Folding ladder lock hold it. ▶ Always close the AdBlue® tank
4 Lock ▶ Fold up the ladder. correctly.
5 Removable lock ▶ Engage the lock 4 in the catch. ▶ Do not mix additives with AdBlue®.
6 Lock button ▶ Press the detachable lock 5 into the ▶ Do not dilute AdBlue®.
To refuel the vehicle, use the folding lad-
catch and engage it. ▶ Only use AdBlue® in accordance
with DIN 70070/ISO 22241.
der 3 and the grab handle 2. Only use
the folding ladder 3 when it is fully unfol-
ded and both locks are engaged.
▶ Press the locking button 6 of the
detachable lock 5 and pull out the
lock.

Driving mode
Refuelling
▶ Immediately rinse surfaces covered Prevent AdBlue® from coming into con-
Note in AdBlue® during refilling with tact with your skin, eyes or clothing and
Paintwork damage caused by Ad- water and remove the AdBlue® do not swallow it. Keep AdBlue® away
Blue® residue. from children.
If AdBlue® comes into contact with ▶ AdBlue® can also be removed with If you do come into contact with AdBlue®,
painted or aluminium surfaces when re- a damp cloth and cold water. observe the following:
fuelling, these surfaces may be attacked. ▶ If the AdBlue® has already crystal- ● Wash AdBlue® off skin immediately
▶ Immediately rinse the affected sur- lised, use a sponge and cold water with soap and water.
faces with plenty of water. to clean it up.
● If you get AdBlue® in your eyes, rinse
When you open the AdBlue® tank, small them immediately and thoroughly
Note amounts of ammonia vapour may escape. with clean water. Seek medical atten-
Damage caused by overfilling the tion immediately.
Ammonia vapours have a pungent smell
AdBlue® tank and are particularly irritating to the follow- ● If you swallowed AdBlue®, rinse your
If the AdBlue® tank is overfilled, it may ing body parts: mouth immediately with water and
be damaged at very low temperatures. drink plenty of water. Seek medical
● Skin
attention immediately.
▶ Do not overfill the AdBlue® tank. ● Mucous membranes
● Immediately change clothes that have
● Eyes
been soiled by AdBlue®.
Note The vapours may cause a burning sensa-
Contamination from crystallised Ad- AdBlue® is not topped up during main-
tion in the eyes, nose and throat as well
Blue® residues tenance work. Therefore, top up the tank
as irritation of the throat and watering
regularly during vehicle operation or, at
AdBlue® residues crystallise after some eyes.
the latest, after the first corresponding
time and can form a slippery surface. Do not inhale any escaping ammonia display message in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the extent and location vapours. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in
of the contamination, it may impair safe well‐ventilated areas.
footing, e.g. on steps.

Driving mode
Refuelling
You will find further information on Ad- Before refilling AdBlue®

Blue® in the "Operating fluids" section Note
( → Page 490). Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
cap of the AdBlue® tank can be locked
Top up AdBlue® for security reasons.
Requirements ▶ Clean cap 1 to prevent dirt from

● The vehicle is switched off. getting into the AdBlue® when un-
● The parking brake is applied. screwing the cap 1.
● The auxiliary heating is switched off Exemplary representation ▶ If applicable: Unlock cap 1 with the
( → Page 137). AdBlue® tank separate key.
● Vehicles with mechanical ignition 1
▶ Slowly turn cap 1 anti-clockwise and
Lid (blue)
lock: The key is removed from the remove.
2 AdBlue® tank
ignition lock. Top up AdBlue®
If the AdBlue® tank 2 still contains suffi-
cient AdBlue®, a pressure compensation
Note
may arise when unscrewing the cap 1.
This may cause AdBlue® to leak. There- Always top up with at least 10% of the
fore, unscrew cap 1 of the AdBlue® tank AdBlue® tank capacity. Topping up with
2 carefully. If AdBlue® spills out, imme- smaller amounts could result in malfunc-
diately wash the affected area with plenty tions.
of water. A special filler neck prevents the ▶ Completely insert the pump nozzle
AdBlue® tank 2 from being filled with into the tank filler neck, hook in place
diesel fuel by mistake. and refuel.
◁ The pump nozzle switches off
automatically.

Driving mode
Trailers/semitrailers
▶ Replace cap 1 and screw it on. the semitrailer truck and the semitrailer sufficient steerability of the towing
▶ If applicable: Lock cap 1 with the may be restricted, and you must adapt vehicle.
separate key. your driving style accordingly. Always re-
Minimum front axle loads for towing
move the mudguard centre parts before
vehicle
Note coupling up.
Comply with the following minimum front
For refill containers, ensure that there is axle loads for the towing vehicle:
a way to make a drip‐free connection to Note
the vehicle filler neck. Damage to the towing vehicle or the Front axle
Towing vehicle
load
trailer or semitrailer due to falling
below the minimum front axle load or 3‐axle vehicles 25 %
Trailers/semitrailers due to incorrect coupling up 2‐axle vehicles
To avoid damage: (trailer lighter or equal in weight to 30 %
Notes on the trailer and fifth-wheel the towing vehicle)
coupling ▶ Couple up a trailer or semitrailer 2‐axle vehicles
The trailer and fifth‐wheel coupling is one only to a suitable trailer or (trailer heavier than the towing 35 %
of the vehicle components with particular fifth‐wheel coupling. vehicle)
importance for road safety. Please com- ▶ Ensure that there is sufficient
ply with every detail of the manufacturer's clearance between the trailer and Note
operating, care and maintenance instruc- semitrailer and towing vehicle.
In vehicles with air suspension and axle
tions. ▶ If you drive the vehicle unladen, only load displays, the current axle loads can
If you fit a trailer coupling, observe the couple up an unladen trailer. be called up on the on‐board computer
body/equipment mounting directives. ▶ Do not exceed the permissible axle ( → Page 159).
If your semitrailer truck is equipped with loads.
▶ Comply with the minimum front If you drive with more than two trailers or
a coupling ramp or coupling aid, the in-
axle loads for the towing vehicle semitrailers, you must deactivate Stability
clination slope specified in ISO°1726
described below in order to ensure Control Assist. Otherwise, malfunctions or
cannot be guaranteed for all fifth‐wheel
faults can occur as a result.
leads. Note that the clearance between

Driving mode
Activating and deactivating Stability Con-

trol Assist ( → Page 249).
Articulation angles
When you are driving over depressions

or elevations, please be aware that the
articulation angle at the front 2 or rear
1 will change.
Note
If the tractor/trailer combination jack‐
knifes, the clearance between the tow-
ing vehicle and the trailer/semitrailer
will be reduced.
Articulation angles depend on the specific

towing vehicle and trailer or semitrailer.
They are affected by the following para-
meters:
● Wheelbase
● Body height
● Overhang

Driving mode
● Distance from the towing vehicle to Coupling and uncoupling

the trailer or semitrailer
Notes on coupling up
Swivel angle
Note on tractor/trailer synchronisa-
tion (vehicles without EBS)
Danger
Risk of accident if the swivel angle is Note
exceeded Towing vehicle and semitrailer (example) Increased brake pad wear without
Cables, compressed air lines, and hy- Pay attention to the swivel angle 3 dur- tractor/trailer synchronisation
draulic lines can rip off during extreme ing tight cornering. When a trailer or semitrailer is coupled
cornering. The trailer hitch and the draw-
The swivel angle is dependent on the up for the first time, tractor/trailer syn-
bar may get damaged too.
coupling system on the towing vehicle chronisation should be carried out. Oth-
This may cause you to lose control of the and trailer or semitrailer. erwise, increased brake pad wear may
vehicle or the trailer. occur.
▶ Always pay attention to the swivel ▶ Have tractor/trailer synchronisation
angle of the tractor/trailer combina- carried out at a qualified specialist
tion when cornering. workshop.
Towing vehicle and centre-axle trailer (example)

Driving mode
Use of trailers/semitrailers without Danger Note

EBS
Risk of accident due to damaged or Damage to the fifth-wheel kingpin
unlocked fifth-wheel coupling sensor
Note
You could lose the semitrailer. Observe the wear limits in the manu-
Afterhitching up atrailer/semitrailer facturer’s operating instructions for the
without EBS, switch off the vehicle and ▶ Always ensure that the fifth‐wheel
wear ring, locking hook, and fifth-wheel
restart it. Otherwise, the trailer monitor- coupling is undamaged and has
kingpin. The wear should not drop be-
ing function of Sideguard Assist/Active been locked after coupling up.
low the wear limits. Otherwise, the fifth-
Sideguard Assist may be impaired or wheel kingpin sensor may be damaged.
may not function ( → Page 294). Ensure this even if the following condi-
tions have been met: ▶ If a red display message is shown
Notes on the fifth-wheel coupling ● the vehicle is equipped with a mon- multiple times in the instrument
itored fifth‐wheel coupling. cluster with a coupled semitrailer
Danger ● The green indicator lamp ¤ in the and the vehicle switched on: Check
Risk of accident due to too much play status area of the instrument cluster the wear limits on the semitrailer
between the fifth-wheel kingpin and lights up. and on the monitored fifth‐wheel
the coupling plate coupling.
The semitrailer may break away from the Note
The monitored fifth-wheel coupling has
coupling plate. Damage to the fifth-wheel kingpin or
sensors that perform the following func-
You could lose the semitrailer as a res- the monitored fifth-wheel coupling
tions during the coupling/uncoupling
ult. The display message ¤ Check process or once the vehicle has been
semitrailer coupling: open if needed. is
▶ Follow the instructions of the shown in the instrument cluster during
switched on:
fifth‐wheel coupling manufacturer. ● monitoring of the semitrailer, the
coupling.
fifth‐wheel kingpin, and the clasp
▶ Check the locking mechanism on ● showing the status of the locking
the monitored fifth‐wheel coupling. mechanism of the monitored

Driving mode
fifth‐wheel coupling on the instrument Coupling up the tractor/semitrailer plate is 50 mm lower than the fifth-
cluster combination wheel coupling 1.
If malfunctions or errors occur during ▶ Vehicles with steel suspension:
Before attaching Use the landing gear to adjust the
coupling/uncoupling, the instrument
cluster will show a red display message semitrailer height such that the
( → Page 504). semitrailer plate is 50 mm lower than
the fifth-wheel coupling 1.
Indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster and their meaning Removing the mudguard centre parts
Lamp Meaning
The semitrailer is not coupled up.
£ The monitored fifth‐wheel coupling is
not engaged. For vehicles with a monitored fifth‐wheel
The semitrailer is not correctly coupling, the instructions on the
coupled up. The monitored fifth‐wheel coupling and uncoupling
¤ fifth‐wheel coupling is engaged; procedures in the manufacturer's
however, no semitrailer can be
detected. Operating Instructions must be observed.
The semitrailer is correctly coupled ▶ Use chocks to secure the semitrailer
up. Check that the monitored against rolling away.
¤
fifth‐wheel coupling is in good
condition and engaged correctly. ▶ Open the fifth-wheel coupling 1 with
The sensor on the fifth‐wheel coupling the lever 2; see the manufacturer's
î is faulty. Observe the further notes in operating instructions. Only remove the mudguard centre parts
the display messages. ▶ Semitrailer tractor with air suspen- 4 in the following cases:
sion: Raise or lower the chassis frame ● If the semitrailer makes the use of
( → Page 306) so that the semitrailer the mudguard centre parts 4 im-
possible.

Driving mode
● If the semitrailer's body covers the ▶ If the instrument cluster shows dis- Coupling a trailer
wheels. play message £ Driving level be-
When using the mudguard centre low coupling level while reversing: Prior to coupling up
parts 4, observe the legal require- Correct the semitrailer level again un-
ments for the country you are cur- til the instrument cluster shows the Danger
rently in. ï Coupling level reached display Risk of accident due to longitudinal
message. play of the trailer coupling
▶ Release the rubber retainers 3 of
the mudguard centre parts 4 on If there is too much longitudinal play at
Coupling up vehicles without a mon-
the left and right-hand sides of the the trailer coupling, you could lose the
itored fifth-wheel coupling
vehicle. trailer.
▶ Remove the mudguard centre parts
▶ Slowly reverse until the fifth-wheel ▶ Check whether there is longitudinal
coupling 1 closes.
4. play at the trailer coupling on a daily
After coupling up basis.
Coupling for vehicles with a mon- ▶ To do this, forcefully move the con-
itored fifth-wheel coupling: ▶ Stop the vehicle and apply the park- necting rod body of the trailer coup-
ing brake.
▶ Drive slowly under the semitrailer ling forwards and backwards.
plate. ▶ Secure fifth-wheel coupling 1 ▶ Have any longitudinal play rectified
against unauthorised operation
▶ Raise the vehicle level or lower the as soon as possible at a qualified
and check the locking mechanism specialist workshop.
semitrailer until the instrument
(see the manufacturer's Operating
cluster shows the display message The longitudinal play of the trailer coup-
Instructions).
ï Coupling level reached. ling cannot be checked on the coupling
▶ Slowly reverse until the fifth-wheel
▶ Retract the landing gear fully; see
the manufacturer's operating instruc- jaw.
coupling 1 closes.
tions.
◁ The ¤ indicator lamp on the ▶ Connect the cables and compressed-
instrument cluster lights up.
air lines ( → Page 349).

Driving mode
After coupling up ▶ Park the vehicle on a firm and level

surface.
▶ Ensure that check pin 1 of the trail- ▶ Apply the parking brake.
er coupling is completely retracted.
▶ Use chocks to secure the trailer or
See the manufacturer's operating in-
semitrailer against rolling away.
structions.
▶ Extend the landing gear on the
▶ Connect the cables and compressed-
semitrailer; see the manufacturer's
air lines ( → Page 349).
operating instructions.
▶ Set the trailer's tow bar support to
Detaching semitrailers and uncoup- the height of the trailer coupling;
ling trailers see the manufacturer's operating
instructions.
▶ Apply the parking brake and release Note ▶ Remove the cables and compressed-
the service brake on the trailer; see Damage to the chassis on vehicles air lines ( → Page 351).
the manufacturer's operating instruc- with air suspension ▶ Open the trailer or fifth-wheel coup-
tions. Vehicles with air suspension may spring ling; see the manufacturer's operating
▶ Use chocks to secure the trailer's out suddenly after unhitching the instructions.
rear wheels against rolling away. The semitrailer. ▶ Vehicles with a trailer: Drive forwards
unbraked front axle of the trailer must slowly.
still be able to turn. This can lead to damage to the vehicle
chassis and semitrailer. ▶ Vehicles with semitrailer: Drive for-
▶ Set the drawbar to the height of the ward a little until the fifth-wheel king-
trailer coupling; see the manufac- ▶ Before uncoupling, lower vehicles pin is free.
turer's operating instructions. with air suspension until there is a ▶ Semitrailer tractor with air
▶ Coupling up: Back up slowly until the gap between the semitrailer plate suspension: Lower chassis
trailer coupling locks. and the fifth‐wheel coupling. ( → Page 306) until there is a gap

Driving mode
between the semitrailer plate and the may kink, or may rub against other com-
fifth-wheel coupling. Danger ponents.
▶ Drive forwards fully. Risk of burning due to the cover of
▶ Keep the cables and compressed‐air
▶ Fit the mudguard centre parts. the silencer being hot
lines such that they yield slightly in
The cover of the silencer can get very
response to all movements without
hot when driving.
Cables and compressed-air lines tensioning, kinking, or rubbing e.g.
▶ Never step on the cover of the silen- when cornering.
Notes on cables and compressed-air cer.
lines
Be careful not to overload when operat-
Danger ing additional consumers on your trailer
or semitrailer. If you fit several reversing
Risk of falling when connecting/dis-
lamps on the trailer/semitrailer, for ex-
connecting the compressed-air lines
ample, the reversing lamps may fail as a
without climbing aids
result of overloading.
If you climb onto or down from the
vehicle in order to connect/disconnect
Connecting cables and compressed-
the cables and compressed-air lines, you
air lines
could:
● slip and/or fall. Note
● damage components, e.g. the battery Damage to cables and compressed
cover, and fall as a result. air lines due to insufficient clearance
● You may burn yourself on hot compon- If cables and compressed air lines do
ents. not have sufficient play when cornering,
damage may occur. The cables and com-
▶ Always use nonslip and stable climb- pressed air lines may be under tension,
ing aids, e.g. a suitable ladder.

Driving mode
▶ With dual coupling head: Swivel the

lever on the dual coupling head 6 Note
upwards and release. On trailers with a 12 V power sup-
▶ Without dual coupling head: Connect ply: Use the 12 V (13 pin) trailer
the brake line coupling head (yellow) socket 7.
1.
▶ Without dual coupling head: Connect Note
the supply line coupling head (red) Turn signal indicator monitoring
2. is also active when using LED tail
lamps. A system failure is indicated
Note by the lamps flashing at double the
frequency or by a display message
The shut‐off valves in the coupling
in the driver information system.
heads open automatically when the
connection is made. ▶ Semitrailer truck: Connect the ABS/
BS (5/7-pin) connecting cable plug
▶ Trailers with adjustable brake force
3 to the trailer.
regulator: Adjust the brake-pressure
regulator on the trailer after connect- ▶ Platform vehicle: Connect the con-
ing the compressed-air lines (see the necting cables of the trailer to the
trailer operating instructions). ABS/BS (5/7 pin) socket3.
▶ With dual coupling head: Push down ▶ Semitrailer truck: Connect the 24 V ▶ Semitrailer truck: If the semitrail-
and hold the lever on the dual coup- (15 pin) power supply plug 4 to the er truck is used with a semitrailer
ling head 6. trailer. without ABS, insert the plug of the
▶ connecting cable into the blank sock-
▶ With dual coupling head: Connect the Platform vehicle: Connect the trailer
et 5.
compressed-air lines. power supply to the 24 V (15 pin)
socket 4. ▶ Check the lighting systems, turn sig-
nal lamps, and brake lights on the

Driving mode
vehicle and on the trailer/semitrailer ▶ Apply the trailer/semitrailer parking

for correct function and cleanliness. Note brake. Observe the manufacturer's
▶ Check the operation of the indicator Malfunction due to dirty coupling operating instructions.
lamps for the towing vehicle and trail- heads ▶ With dual coupling head: Push down
er/semitrailer turn signal lamps in the If the covers of the coupling heads are and hold the lever on the dual coup-
instrument cluster. not closed after the compressed-air lines ling head 6.
▶ After pulling away, check are disconnected, the coupling heads ▶ With dual coupling head: Remove the
that the brake system on the may become dirty. This may cause the compressed-air lines.
trailer/semitrailer is functioning compressed-air system to malfunction. ▶ With dual coupling head: Swivel the
correctly, paying attention to the road ▶ After the compressed‐air lines are lever on the dual coupling head 6
and traffic conditions. disconnected, ensure that the cov- upwards and release.
ers are closed. ▶ Without dual coupling head: Discon-
Disconnecting cables and nect the reservoir line coupling head
compressed-air lines Note (red) 2.
Damage to the electrical system ◁ The brakes of the
Danger trailer/semitrailer are applied
If the cables are not inserted into the
Danger of accident due to incorrect empty sockets after they are disconnec- automatically.
removal of the coupling heads ted, water may enter the wiring harness. ▶ Without dual coupling head: Discon-
If you remove the coupling heads in the This may damage the electrical system. nect the brake line coupling head
wrong order, the trailer/semitrailer (yellow) 1.
brake will be released and the trail- ▶ After the cables have been discon- ▶ Semitrailer truck: Disconnect the 24
er/semitrailer may roll away. nected, insert the plugs into the
V (15-pin) plug 4 from the trailer.
empty sockets.
▶ Observe the correct sequence when ▶ Platform vehicle: Disconnect the
removing the coupling heads. ▶ Apply the parking brake of the towing power supply of the towing vehicle
vehicle. trailer at the 24°V (15 °pin) socket
4.

Driving mode
Note Semitrailer tractor hydraulic system Note

On trailers with a 12°V power sup- Notes and control elements of the Damage to the hydraulic system of
ply: Disconnect the power supply of semitrailer truck hydraulic system the tractor/semitrailer combination
the towing vehicle trailer from the Hydraulic fluids of different grades are
12°V (13°pin) socket 7. Danger rarely compatible even if their common
▶ Semitrailer truck: Disconnect the Risk of burns from hot hydraulic fluid base oil does mean that they are mis-
ABS/BS (5/7-pin) plug 3 from the The hydraulic system is highly pressur- cible. Blending always has an effect on
trailer. ised and the hydraulic fluid may be hot. the properties, characteristics and reac-
▶ Platform vehicle: Disconnect the con- Hydraulic fluid may spray out under high tions of the hydraulic fluid.
necting cable of the towing vehicle pressure. Blending different fluids could result in
trailer from the ABS/BS (5/7 pin) ▶ Always have work on the hydraulic damage to the hydraulic system of the
socket 3. system carried out at a qualified tractor/semitrailer combination.
▶ Semitrailer truck: If the semitrailer specialist workshop. ▶ The fluid in the trailer's hydraulic
tractor is driven without a 5 system must match the fluid in the
semitrailer, plug the connecting cable Danger tractor/semitrailer combination's
into the empty sockets. hydraulic system.
Risk of accident with the tipper body
▶ Check the operation and cleanliness
raised while driving
of the lighting system as well as that Note
of the turn signals and brake lights. If you pull away with the tipper body
raised, the vehicle could become Damage to the semitrailer tractor
caught on buildings, bridges or trees. hydraulic system and/or the trailer
hydraulic system
▶ Before you pull away, always make
sure that the tipper body is lowered Notes on operating the
and secured correctly. tractor/semitrailer combination
hydraulic system:

Driving mode
● The operating pressure of the hydraul- The hydraulic line connections have screw Controls
ic system of the tractor/semitrailer com- couplings of either 1 inch or DN 20.
bination must not exceed the maximum The tractor/semitrailer combination's hy-
permitted operating pressure of the trail- draulic system is filled at the factory with
er hydraulic system. a hydraulic fluid from H–LP (HLP–D 22)
● The hydraulic lines of the tipper ( → Page 358).
semitrailer must be connected.
Before operating a tipper semitrailer,
● Tthe low-speed splitter box must be observe the following information:
selected. ● The operating pressure of the hydraul-
ic system of the tractor/semitrailer Tipper body operating lever
Otherwise, the hydraulic system of the
tractor/semitrailer combination and/or combination does not exceed the 1 Lower tipper body
trailer could be damaged. maximum permitted operating pres- g STOP – stop the tipping or lowering
sure of the trailer hydraulic system. movement
▶ Observe the notes on operating the
● The hydraulic connections of both 2 Raise tipper body
tractor/semitrailer combination
hydraulic systems are compatible. 3 Operating lever with pull ring
hydraulic system.
● The trailer hydraulic system's hydraul-
When using the tractor/semitrailer com- ic fluid matches that of the hydraul-
bination's hydraulic system, only oper- ic system of the tractor/semitrailer
ate tipper semitrailers with a one or two combination.
line system. Their hydraulic system is op-
erated with a master valve in the cab.
The operating pressure of the tractor/
semitrailer combination's hydraulic sys-
tem can be switched between 170 bar
(low pressure) and 250 bar (high pres-
sure).

Driving mode
Connecting/disconnecting hydraulic (STOP) and the power take‐off is disen-

lines gaged. A few drops of hydraulic fluid may
escape when separating the hydraulic
connections. Observe the national work
safety and accident prevention regula-
tions as well as the environmental protec-
tion regulations.
If the tipper semitrailer is fitted with a
two‐line system, connect the pressure
line to connection 2 and the return line
Keep the hydraulic lines such that they to connection 1. If the return line is not
can manage all movements when corner- coupled or coupled incorrectly, it can res-
Tipper valve operating lever ing etc. without tensioning, buckling or ult in damage to the tipper semitrailer's
1 Operating position, low pressure (LP) 170 bar rubbing. Before connecting the hydraulic hydraulic system.
lines, make sure that their threaded coup- If the tipper semitrailer is fitted with a
2 Operating position, high pressure (HP)
250 bar lings are compatible with the sockets on one‐line system, connect the hydraulic
3 Operating lever
the towing vehicle. Do not use any tools line to connection 2 on your vehicle.
when connecting the hydraulic lines and Connection 1 for the return line remains
4 Tipper valve
do not climb on any part of the vehicle. free in this case.
Before coupling and decoupling the hy-
draulic lines, the tractor/semitrailer com- Connecting
bination's hydraulic system must be de- ▶ Make sure that the trailer hydraulic
pressurised and the trailer's tipper body system's operating pressure matches
should be fully lowered. The tractor/ that of the tractor/semitrailer com-
semitrailer combination's hydraulic sys- bination's hydraulic system. Select
tem is only depressurised if the operating the high or low pressure setting on
lever in the cab is in the centre position

Driving mode
the changeover unit for the operating ▶ Loosen and disconnect the hydraulic control lever, the faster the tipping
pressure ( → Page 349). lines on the connections. speed of the tipper body.
▶ Ensure that the operating lever in the ▶ Fasten the dust caps on the connec- ◁ The indicator lamp z lights up
cab is in the centre position (STOP) tions on the vehicle and the hydraulic in the display if the tipper body is
( → Page 349). lines. raised.
▶ Ensure that power take-off for the ▶ Correctly dispose of collected hy- or
hydraulic pump is disengaged draulic fluid.
( → Page 372). ▶ Pull the pull ring upwards and the
▶ Loosen dust caps from the connec- control lever in the cab back to the
Operating the hydraulic system
tions on the vehicle and from the hy- end position.
draulic lines. Tipping ◁ The control lever is engaged.
▶ Connect the hydraulic lines to the ▶ Engage the power take-off for the The tipper body will stop tipping
sockets and tighten them hand-tight. hydraulic pump ( → Page 372). automatically once the control
lever reaches the end position.
▶ Run a function check after connecting ◁ The chassis is lowered automat-
The indicator lamp z lights up
the hydraulic lines. ically. This increases tipping sta-
in the display if the tipper body is
bility. The display shows the Û
Disconnecting raised.
symbol for chassis below driving
▶ To stop the tipping movement, pull
▶ Ensure that the operating lever in the level.
the pull ring upwards and move the
cab is in the centre position (STOP) ▶ Ensure that the low-speed splitter
control lever in the cab to the centre
( → Page 349). group is selected.
position (STOP).
▶ Ensure that power take-off for the ▶ Pull up and hold the pull ring
hydraulic pump is disengaged on the control lever in the cab Lower tipper body
( → Page 372). ( → Page 352).
▶ ▶ When the control lever in the cab is
▶ Place a cloth or a suitable receptacle Gently pull the control lever back. To
engaged in the end position, pull the
under each connection to take up the stop the tipping movement, move the
pull ring upwards and move the con-
drops of hydraulic fluid. control lever into the centre position
(STOP). The further back you pull the

Driving mode
trol lever in the cab into the centre ● High‐pressure cleaning ( mediately at a qualified specialist work-
position (STOP). ( → Page 383) shop.
▶ Gently push the control lever for- When cleaning the vehicle exterior, ensure
wards. To stop the lowering move- Checking the hydraulic fluid level and
that you never aim the water jet directly topping up hydraulic fluid
ment, move the control lever into the at the breather filter cap of the hydraulic
centre position (STOP). fluid reservoir.
◁ The further forward you push the Note
control lever, the faster the speed Visual inspection Environmental damage caused by
of the tipper body lowering move- spilled oil during refilling
ment. When the tipper body is Note Spilled oil that enters the ground causes
fully lowered, the indicator lamp Service life of hydraulic hoses damage to the environment.
z goes out in the display.
Hydraulic hoses are marked with an ▶ When refilling, make sure that no oil
▶ Move the control lever in the cab into expiration date (six years after date of is spilled.
the centre position (STOP). manufacture).
▶ Deactivate the power take-off Note
( → Page 372). ▶ Make sure that hydraulic hoses are
replaced by a qualified specialist Damage to the hydraulic system
▶ Raise the chassis to driving level
workshop at the end of this operat- If you top up too much hydraulic fluid,
( → Page 306).
ing time at the latest, even if there is the expansion chamber in the hydraulic
no visible external damage. fluid reservoir is decreased. This can
Maintaining and caring for the hy- damage the hydraulic system.
draulic system Check the components of the tractor/
semitrailer combination's hydraulic sys- ▶ Never top up too much hydraulic
Cleaning tem, and in particular the hydraulic lines, fluid.
Observe the following notes: on a weekly basis for leaks, external dam- ▶ Have excess hydraulic fluid
● Cleaning the exterior ( → Page 384) age and operating lifespan. Have defect- siphoned off.
ive and leaking components repaired im- ▶ Only use hydraulic fluids that have
been tested and approved for the

Driving mode
tractor/semitrailer combination's ▶ Ensure that the operating lever in the Combination tank with fuel tank on
hydraulic system in accordance with cab is in the centre position (STOP). the left-hand side of the vehicle
the Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Specific- ▶ Ensure that power take-off for the
ations for Operating Fluids. Using hydraulic pump is disengaged
other hydraulic fluids or mixing oth- ( → Page 372).
er hydraulic fluids can damage the ◁ Only then is the hydraulic system
hydraulic system of the tractor/ of the tractor/semitrailer combin-
semitrailer combination. ation depressurised.
▶ Remove cap with integrated breather
filter 1.
▶ Unscrew and remove filter screen 2. Hydraulic combination tank
▶ Measure the gap between the hy- 4 Max. fill level
draulic fluid surface level and the 140 l for 128 l effective fluid quantity (usable
upper edge of the filler neck and de- volume)
termine the quantity of fluid used. 5 Distance
Approx. 2.3 l effective fluid loss for every 10
mm the surface level lowers
The hydraulic fluid reservoir 3 is either a
single tank on the right‐hand side of the
vehicle or combined with the fuel tank
on the left‐hand side of the vehicle as a
combination tank.
Check the hydraulic fluid level every day
and only when the vehicle is horizontal
and stationary.

Driving mode
Single tank on the right-hand side of the filter screen into the filler neck Operating data of the hydraulic sys-
the vehicle and then check the hydraulic fluid tem
level again.
▶ Screw filter screen 2 into the filler Hydraulic fluid quality
neck. The tractor/semitrailer combination's
▶ Place cap with integrated breather hydraulic system is filled at the factory
filter 1 on the filler neck and fasten with all‐season hydraulic fluid from Group
tightly. H–LP (HLP–D 22).
Only use approved hydraulic oil in
Replacing the hydraulic fluid reser- accordance with the Mercedes‐Benz
voir cap Trucks Specifications for Operating Fluids
Hydraulic single tank
Replace the hydraulic fluid reservoir cap ( → Page 482).
6 Max. fill level
226 l for 198 l effective fluid quantity (usable
every year. In more dusty conditions you
volume) must change the cap with integrated Hydraulic fluid reservoir
5 Distance breather filter even more regularly. Combination tank with fuel tank on the
101 mm left-hand side of the vehicle
Parking up the vehicle
7 Fill level
Tank Volume
156 l for 128 l effective fluid quantity (usable In addition to the special measures of the
volume) Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Specifications for Maximum tank content 140 ℓ
5 Distance Operating Fluids, a change of hydraulic Maximum effective fluid quantity
128 ℓ
258 mm fluid must be carried out. After a non‐op- (usable volume)
erational time of more than 24 months, a Non‐usable dead volume 12 ℓ
Approximately 4.5 l effective fluid loss for
change of hydraulic fluid must be carried
every 10–mm the surface level lowers
out before restarting operation.
▶ If necessary, top up with an author-
ised hydraulic fluid through filter
screen 2. Before topping up, screw

Driving mode
Single tank on the right-hand side of Pressure/delivery ▶ Make sure that no persons or ob-
Operating mode
the vehicle rate jects are within manoeuvring range
Tank Volume Max. permitted engine when manoeuvring.
speed
Maximum tank content 226 ℓ Maximum speed with
▶ To activate: Reversing.
Maximum effective fluid quantity low‐range splitter box. ◁ If the trailer or semitrailer is
198 ℓ 1100 rpm
(usable volume) Selecting the high‐range equipped with ramp approach
Tank content for 128 l effective splitter box is not permitted aid, the instrument cluster auto-
156 ℓ and can damage the
fluid quantity (usable volume) matically displays the function
hydraulic system.
Non‐usable dead volume 28 ℓ when reversing.
Hydraulic connections ◁ Depending on the ramp approach
Note aid, the distance from the trail-
The hydraulic line connections have screw er or semitrailer to the detec-
The hydraulic fluid reservoir single tank couplings of either 1 inch or DN 20. ted obstacle is also displayed,
is filled with 156 l of hydraulic fluid at e.g. 2.30 m.
the factory.
Activating ramp approach aid ◁ If the distance to the
Operating pressure and fluid output detected obstacle is less than
Pressure/delivery Danger approximately 1.80 m, the
Operating mode
rate trailer/semitrailer symbol lights
Risk of accident from persons or ob-
High pressure operation 250 bar up red in the instrument cluster.
jects in the manoeuvring area of the
Low pressure operation 170 bar ramp approach aid ◁ If the distance to the detected
obstacle is less than approx-
Average fluid output The ramp approach aid cannot detect
imately 0.70 m, a warning tone
At an engine speed of 120 ℓ/min people or moving obstacles.
1000 rpm and sufficient sounds.
quantity of effective fluid There is therefore still a risk of accident
despite the ramp approach aid being
activated.

Driving mode
Wind deflector
Wind deflector ▶ Have a second person help you. When adjusting the wind deflector, make
sure that you:
Adjusting the wind deflector ● Do not exceed the permissible vehicle
height (for international transport
Danger
4 m).
Risk of injury due to unsafe surface ● Observe the maximum headroom
when adjusting the wind deflector clearance of underpasses.
There are no working surfaces fitted ● Observe the legal requirements for
on the vehicle for adjusting the wind the country in which you are currently
deflector. driving.
▶ Use firm, non‐slip working surfaces,
such as a ladder. Note
▶ Do not stand on the roof. When measuring the clearances, park
the vehicle on a level surface. If in doubt,
Danger always select a higher setting of the
Risk of becoming trapped when ad- wind deflector.
justing the wind deflector
You could become trapped when you are ▶ Determine which diagram corres-
adjusting the wind deflector. ponds to your vehicle.
▶ Measure the distance S between the
▶ Therefore, make sure that there is rear door jamb and the body.
adequate clearance when you adjust Daimler Truck°AG recommends that you ▶ Measure the height difference H
the wind deflector. have the wind deflector adjusted at a between the door entry and the body.
▶ Do not place parts of your body qualified specialist workshop. ▶ Use the height difference H in the
between the wind deflector and the diagram to determine adjustment
cab. detent A.

Driving mode
Wind deflector
▶ Unscrew screws 1 on the M cab ClassicSpace 420 platform S cab ClassicSpace 600 platform
adjustment rails on both sides of the vehicle vehicle
vehicle.
▶ Using the measured adjustment de-
tent A, adjust the adjustment rails on
holder 2.
▶ Screw in screws 1.
Wind deflector diagrams

S cab ClassicSpace 420 platform
vehicle L cab ClassicSpace 420 platform M cab ClassicSpace 600 platform
vehicle vehicle

Driving mode
Wind deflector
L cab ClassicSpace 600 platform L cab StreamSpace 600 platform L cab Stream, Big + GigaSpace 765
vehicle vehicle LowDeck semitrailer tractor
L cab StreamSpace 420 platform L cab Stream + BigSpace 765 plat- S cab ClassicSpace 420 semitrailer
vehicle form vehicle truck

Driving mode
Wind deflector
M cab ClassicSpace 420 semitrailer S cab ClassicSpace 600 semitrailer L cab ClassicSpace 600 semitrailer
truck truck truck
L cab ClassicSpace 420 semitrailer M cab ClassicSpace 600 semitrailer L cab StreamSpace 420 semitrailer
truck truck truck

Driving mode
Winter operation
L cab StreamSpace 600 semitrailer L cab Stream, Big + GigaSpace 765 classification are always based on fresh
truck LowLiner semitrailer tractor oil. Engine oil ages while driving due
to soot and fuel residue. This impairs
the characteristics of the engine oil,
particularly at low outside temperatures.
▶ At outside temperatures of below
‐20°C, use engine oils of SAE classi-
fication 5W‐30 or 0W‐30.
▶ Use oils suitable for use throughout
the year.
L cab Stream + BigSpace 765
semitrailer tractor Winter operation
Winter driving
Preparing for a journey (winter opera-
tion)
Note
Engine damage due to incorrect SAE
classification (viscosity) of the engine
oil
If the SAE classification (viscosity) of
Side trim (example: Actros semitrailer truck)
the engine oil used is not suitable for
persistently low temperatures of below Remove snow and accumulations of ice
-20°C, this may damage the engine. on both sides of the vehicle between the
The temperature readings of the SAE side trim and the chassis.

Driving mode
Winter operation
▶ To release, pull levers 2 on the front ● If single grade engine oil is used, ▶ Do not use liquid or gaseous starting
and rear of the locks upwards. the oil is changed in good time aids to start the vehicle.
▶ Swing side trim 1 outwards. ( → Page 482).
● The windscreen washer system and Note
Note headlamp cleaning system contains Damage to the differential gear due
Keep the locks free of dirt and re- sufficient antifreeze ( → Page 396). to spinning drive wheels
place the lubricant on the locks from ● Suitable winter tyres are fitted. For vehicles without ASR (acceleration
time to time. ● Snow chains are carried in the skid control system), changing from
vehicle. a slippery to a high-grip road surface
▶ Remove snow and ice from between
side trim 1 and the chassis. with the drive wheels spinning at the
Note same time may cause damage to the
▶ Swing side trim 1 back and push the
In wintry conditions, the law may require differential gear.
pins on the brackets of side trim 1
into the locks as far as they will go. that winter tyres be fitted on the wheels ▶ Avoid spinning the drive wheels.
◁ The locks must engage audibly of the drive axle. Find out which winter
tyres are suitable for the intended use. Please observe the following instructions
and levers 2 must spring back on driving in winter:
to their original position. Observe the legal requirements for the
country you are currently in. ● in snow, slush and on icy roads, fit
▶ Pull on side trim 1 near the locks snow chains to the drive wheels in
to check that these are engaged cor- good time.
rectly. Notes on driving in winter
● adapt your driving style to the wintry
Before the start of the cold season make Danger road conditions.
sure: Risk of explosion due to liquid or ● If traction problems occur when driv-
● The coolant contains sufficient anti- gaseous starting substances ing with snow chains, disengage ASR
freeze protection ( → Page 485). Liquid or gaseous starting aids imme- ( → Page 248) or Stability Control As-
● The fuel used is suitable for winter diately react with fuel vapour and are sist ( → Page 249).
use ( → Page 486). highly flammable.

Driving mode
Winter operation
Snow chains Do not use twin chains on vehicles with

Note roll control. Only fit snow chains on the
Notes on snow chains Damage to the differential gear from exterior wheels.
snow chains
Danger Vehicles with electric power steering:
To avoid damage, Daimler Truck AG If you change the mechanical axle stops
Risk of accident due to tearing snow recommends: when using snow chains, for example,
chains
▶ Fitting snow chains on all drive have the electric power steering recalib-
If you drive too quickly with snow chains, rated by a qualified workshop.
wheels. For vehicles with a perman-
they may tear and injure other persons
ent all‐wheel drive, if snow chains Vehicles with ASR/Stability Control
and damage the vehicle.
are not fitted on all drive wheels, the Assist: If, when driving, traction problems
▶ Comply with the maximum permiss- inter‐axle lock must be activated. arise while snow chains are being used,
ible speed for operating the vehicle disengage ASR ( → Page 248) or Stability
The law may require that snow chains
with snow chains. Control Assist ( → Page 249).
be removed again as soon as possible
once the roadway is clear of snow. The
Note vehicle's driving and braking characterist-
Damage to the vehicle from snow ics will be adversely affected if you drive
chains on roadways that are clear of snow with
To avoid vehicle damage: snow chains fitted to the vehicle.
▶ Only use snow chains that are ap- The maximum permissible speed with
proved and recommended for Mer- snow chains fitted to the vehicle is
cedes‐Benz trucks. Contact a quali- 50 km/h.
fied specialist workshop if you have When using the snow chains described
any questions. here, observe the legal requirements for
the country you are currently in.

Driving mode
Winter operation
Checking the wheel clearance ▶ Start the vehicle.

▶ Turn the steering wheel towards the Note
co-driver side to the stop. At temperatures lower than the stated
cold‐start limits, engine starting may be
Note impaired despite taking the appropriate
With the steering on full lock, there measures.
must be a distance of at least
25 mm between the snow chain and Overview of special equipment of the
the drag link. cold climate package
The following special equipment improves
Note the starting capability of your vehicle at
Damage to the steering linkage from Parts for operation at low temperat- low outside temperatures:
snow chains ures ● Fuel preheating
If the distance between the snow chain Information regarding the cold-start ● Coolant preheater
and the steering linkage is less than limits ● Heated electronic air processing unit
25 mm, the snow chain may damage Without special equipment, your vehicle ● Auxiliary heating
the steering linkage. is capable of starting at temperatures of
▶ If this occurs, remove the snow as low as ‐20°C. When fitted with special Low-temperature operating fluids
chains again. equipment and given cold‐resistant oper- Have the vehicle converted to low‐tem-
▶ Have the steering geometry checked ating fluids, your vehicle can be started at perature operating fluids at a qualified
at a qualified specialist workshop. temperatures down to ‐32°C. specialist workshop.

▶ Fit the snow chains in accordance
with the fitting instructions of the
chain manufacturer.

Driving mode
Winter operation
Note Note Note

The recommended maintenance inter- The capacity of the batteries is ad- Damage to the engine due to the oil
vals are shorter if the vehicle is mainly versely affected by increasingly cold pressure being too low
operated at low temperatures. temperatures. If a warning tone sounds and the symbol
▶ Thaw frozen batteries before charging 5 appears in a red display message,
Before attempting a cold start them. the operational safety of the engine is at
risk.
Note
Starting the vehicle at low temperat- ▶ Do not set the vehicle in motion,
Damage to the batteries due to rapid ures or park it up immediately, paying
charging attention to the road and traffic
At very low temperatures, the battery Note conditions.
fluid of discharged batteries may freeze. Damage to the batteries during a cold ▶ Switch off all electrical consumers,
▶ Carry out rapid charging on cold start e.g. the radio and the blower.
batteries. Otherwise, the batteries Attempting to start the engine when a ▶ For vehicles with auxiliary heating
may be damaged. battery is cold or not fully charged can (auxiliary heating for the cab and
result in damage to the batteries. the engine), at outside temperatures
Special measures must be taken before a
cold start if the vehicle has been exposed ▶ If the battery voltage is too low below -20 °C: Preheat the engine with
to extremely low temperatures. when the vehicle is switched on the auxiliary heating before starting
or the # symbol appears in a ( → Page 136).
▶ Charge discharged batteries before
starting.
display message, do not start the ▶ At outside temperatures below -
vehicle. 30 °C and on vehicles with a coolant
preheater: Preheat the engine with
the coolant preheater for at least
90 minutes ( → Page 136).

Driving mode
Winter operation
▶ Pay attention to the outside ▶ If the supply pressure in the brake ● Avoid high loads at the start of your
temperature shown on the display system ( → Page 163) has dropped journey.
( → Page 143) and signs that the below 6 bar, fill up the compressed- ● Avoid short engine running times.
on-board electrical system voltage is air system ( → Page 446). This will ● Allow the vehicle to warm up for
low, e.g. a weak lighting system. ensure that the clutch is disengaged around 20 minutes, then increase
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. when you start the vehicle in vehicles the load.
▶ Deactivate the power take-off with a manual transmission. ● For technical reasons, the engine
( → Page 372). brake is only available from an oil
▶ Start the vehicle. Driving in low temperatures temperature of 15 °C at level 1.
Observe the following at outside temper- The full engine braking effect is only
If the vehicle does not start: atures below -20 °C: available across the entire engine
● Check the supply pressure in the speed range from an oil temperature
Note brake system before you set off of 60 °C.
The starting procedure is automatically ( → Page 163). Set off only when the ● The battery can only be charged at a
interrupted for vehicles with the follow- supply pressure is sufficient. certain rate per hour, regardless of
ing engine: ● Before you pull away, check that the the power output of the alternator.
Engine OM 936: after approximately power steering is functioning cor- The rate of charge is significantly
60 seconds rectly by turning the multifunction reduced by low outside temperatures.
steering wheel repeatedly to full left As a result, it can take significantly
Engine OM 470, OM 471 and OM 473:
and full right lock. longer to charge the battery in winter.
after approximately 40 seconds
The hydraulic operation of the steer-
▶ Switch off the vehicle. ing may be impaired in outside tem- Parking in low temperatures
▶ Repeat the starting procedure after peratures below ‐25 °C. If you park the vehicle in outside temper-
approximately one minute. ● Change gear early and avoid high atures below ‐30 °C, it may not be able to
▶ After three starting procedures, take engine speeds. start even with the cold climate package.
a break of about three minutes. Daimler Truck AG recommends that you

Driving mode
Winter operation
do not park the vehicle outdoors in out-

side temperatures below ‐30°C.
If you do park the vehicle in the open air
in very low temperatures, special meas-
ures are necessary:
▶ If required, back up the vehicle's light-
ing system using external lighting,
e.g. a warning lamp.
▶ Check the fuel level on the fuel dis-
play ( → Page 163).
▶ If the fuel level is in the reserve area,
top up the fuel tank ( → Page 334).
Note
If the vehicle is stationary for an exten-
ded period of time with a fuel level that
is too low, you may have to depressurise
the fuel system ( → Page 422).
Observe further instructions and informa-
tion concerning the batteries.

Working mode
Power take-off
Power take-off brake alone is sufficient to hold the of use, you must operate the engine and
complete vehicle. power take‐off at a certain engine speed
Power take-off function ▶ Generally, secure the towing vehicle (working speed).
and trailer/semitrailer with the park- Power take‐offs with rpm limitation: when
Danger
ing brake and, additionally, with the power take‐off is engaged, you cannot
Risk of accident due to the vehicle chocks. exceed the programmed working speed.
roll-starting unintentionally
If you use the engine run-on function, The engagement status of the power take-
Note
the vehicle may roll-start unintentionally off is displayed on the instrument cluster:
Vehicles with clutch pedal: Damage
if crawler mode is activated and the ● / Power take‐off disengaged
to the power take-off
start-off gear is engaged. ● 0 Power take‐off engaged
Switching the power take-off on or off
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. too soon after disengaging the clutch Vehicles with a power take-off on the
▶ Apply the parking brake. may damage the power take-off. engine: The power take‐off on the en-
gine cannot be selected. The auxiliary
▶ Wait ten seconds after disengaging
Danger assembly is directly connected to the
the clutch. Only then switch the
Risk of accident on uphill or downhill engine and is permanently driven. The
power take‐off on or off.
slopes working speed and body‐dependent func-
Observe the information on operating tions are controlled and selected by en-
The parking brake may not be sufficient
safety ( → Page 5). gaging the constant‐rpm control F
to secure the vehicle on uphill and down-
When you engage a power take‐off, the ( → Page 374).
hill slopes.
vehicle is completely lowered on all air‐ Vehicles with transmission-driven
A loaded vehicle or a vehicle with a trail-
sprung axles. This increases the tipping power take-off: When the power take‐off
er/semitrailer may roll away.
stability of the vehicle. is engaged, you can select all pulling‐away
▶ In the check position, check wheth- With the power take‐off, you can drive gears or reverse gear when stationary.
er the braking force of the parking auxiliary assemblies, for example, hydraul- Changes of direction are only permitted in
ic pumps. Depending on the conditions the selected gear. You must not change

Working mode
Power take-off
gears while driving. On vehicles with an Activating/deactivating the power

automated manual transmission, the Note
take-off
transmission automatically shifts to the The engine speed is increased and the
manual drive program M ( → Page 233) engine noise may change during regen- Activate power take-off
when the power take‐off is engaged. eration.
Vehicles with an engine-driven take-
off (NMV), without a clutch actuator Note
(code N4Y or N4Z): Pulling away is not If you have to leave the cab to oper-
possible with the power take‐off engaged. ate the power take‐off, observe the
You cannot operate the power take‐off notes on the diesel particulate filter
while driving. ( → Page 328).
Vehicles with an engine-driven power
take-off (NMV), with clutch actuator
(code N4X or N4W): When the power
take‐off is engaged, you can select all
pulling‐away gears or reverse gear when Example of PTO 1
stationary. You can select all gears while Power take-off switch
driving.
U Transmission power take‐off 1
If you have to leave the cab to operate
T Transmission power take‐off 2
the power take‐off, you can use the ig-
nition lock's engine run‐on function. The S Engine‐driven power take‐off 3 (NMV)
engine then continues to run and you can
The power take‐off must be load‐free
lock the doors of the cab with the key
when it is activated/deactivated. Observe
( → Page 207).
the body/equipment mounting directive.

Working mode
Power take-off
Observe the activation/deactivation or- ▶ To switch on (code N4W/N4X):

der when using the engine‐driven power First switch on the NMV and then the Note
take‐off (NMV). transmission power take-off. Automatic regeneration results in high
Failing to observe the activation/deactiva- ▶ Press the I switch at top. engine speeds at the transmission‐driv-
◁ If the power take-off is engaged, en power take‐off. If the power take‐off
tion sequence when using a transmission‐
the instrument cluster displays application is not designed for increased
or engine‐driven power take‐off (NMV)
the engagement status 0. The engine speed, wait for automatic re-
can lead to functional impairments. This
indicator lamp in the I switch generation and reactivate the power
includes longer activation/deactivation
lights up. take‐off.
times or a failure to engage/disengage
power take‐offs. ▶ Vehicles with manual transmission: Deactivate power take-off
The required power of the power take‐offs Release the clutch pedal when the
instrument cluster shows the power ▶ Observe the power take-off activa-
must not exceed the maximum engine tion/deactivation order as instructed.
output at the respective operating point. take-off is engaged.
▶ Leave the engine running at idle
▶ Stop the vehicle. When the parking brake is released, the speed.
▶ display message ! and Engage park-
Apply the parking brake. ▶ Vehicles with manual transmission:
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. ing brake. will appear in the instrument
Depress and hold down the clutch
cluster. If / flashes in the instrument
▶ Leave the engine running at idle pedal.
cluster, the electronic management sys-
speed.
tem does not recognise the vehicle's cur-
▶ To switch off (code N4Y/N4Z): First
▶ Vehicles with manual transmission: rent operating state.
switch off the transmission power
Depress and hold down the clutch take-off followed by the NMV.
pedal. ▶ Check whether all activation condi- ▶ To switch off (code N4W/N4X):
▶ To switch on (code N4Y/N4Z): First tions are fulfilled. First switch off the transmission
switch on the transmission power ▶ Activate the power take-off again. power take-off followed by the NMV.
take-off and then the NMV. ▶ If / flashes again in the instru- ▶ Press the bottom section of the I
ment cluster, visit a qualified work- switch.
shop.

Working mode
Power take-off
◁ When the power take-off is dis- ▶ To preselect a low working speed: Setting the idle/working speed
engaged, the instrument cluster Push the multifunction lever down
displays / and the indicator briefly.
lamp in the power take-off switch ◁ The slow splitter box is selected
I goes out. and the display shows N1.
▶ Vehicles with manual transmission:
Release the clutch pedal when the Vehicles with manual transmission
instrument cluster no longer shows You can preselect the working speed
the power take-off. using the splitter switch.
▶ To preselect a high working speed:
Preselecting working speed Pull the splitter switch up.
◁ The fast splitter box is selected.
Vehicles with automated manual
▶ To preselect a low working speed:
transmission After the vehicle is started, the idle speed
Push the splitter switch downwards.
You can preselect the working speed ◁ The slow splitter box is selected. is regulated automatically depending on
using the multifunction lever. the coolant temperature.
▶ Turn the direction of travel selector If auxiliary assemblies such as hydraul-
switch to position i. ic pumps are operated, the engine must
◁ The display shows N1 or N2 de- be running at a certain speed (working
pending on the previously selec- speed). The engine idling speed/working
ted splitter box. speed can be set via the on‐board com-
▶ To preselect a high working speed: puter.
Pull the multifunction lever up briefly.
◁ The fast splitter box is selected
and the display shows N2.

Working mode
Power take-off
Speed setting range or Constant-rpm control

Engine Adjustable engine idle speed ▶ Wait for approximately three seconds.
OM 470 The setting is stored automatically.
OM 471 approx. 500–800 rpm
OM 473
Switching off the engine speed set-
ting
OM 936 approx. 600–800 rpm
OM 460 approx. 560–800 rpm ▶ Press the Ù button repeatedly until
the Rotational speed input window is
The rpm range can differ for special bod- displayed on the instrument cluster.
ies. ▶ Press the button u.
▶ Engage the power take-off From a speed of about 20 km/h, the en-
( → Page 372). gine speed setting is automatically reset.
Switching on the engine speed set- When the constant‐rpm control is
ting and setting the engine speed switched on, the electronic management
▶ Press the Ù button on the multifunc- system regulates the programmed
tion steering wheel repeatedly until working speed of the power take‐off
the input windowRotational speed is independently of the load.
displayed on the instrument cluster.
▶ Press the s or r button to Note
increase or reduce the engine speed Regeneration is suppressed in
in increments by about 20 rpm. working speed mode. Switch off
▶ Press the 9 button to exit the input the constant‐rpm control after the
window. power take‐off has finished operating.
Otherwise regeneration cannot take
place. In vehicles with a power take‐off

Working mode
Power take-off
on the engine, other body‐dependent ▶ Carry out emergency engagement of

functions can be activated in addition to the engine‐driven power take‐off
keeping the constant‐rpm control. only with the vehicle stationary,
the parking brake applied and the
▶ Engage the transmission-driven engine switched off.
or engine-driven power take-off
( → Page 372).
▶ To switch on: Press the F switch
at top.
◁ The indicator lamp in the switch
lights up.
▶ Switching off: Press the F switch
Clutch actuator in vehicles with power take-off (code N4W/
at the bottom. N4X)
◁ The indicator lamp in the switch If the engine‐driven power take‐off (NM-
goes out. V) fails, a rigid connection of the power
transmission in the power take‐off can be
established or disconnected. When deac-
Switch emergency operation mode
tivating manually, ensure that the power
of the engine-driven power take-off
take‐off is load‐free (e.g. set pumps to
(NMV) on/off
zero delivery).
Danger
Risk of injury by turning output shaft
With the engine running, the output shaft
of the engine-driven power take-off is
able to turn.

Working mode
Power take-off
▶ Place the adapter on the shaft with ▶ Remove the cover cap 1 with a
Note the wrench in position 2. screwdriver and a hammer.
The adapter for the emergency gear- ▶ Turn the wrench to position 4. ▶ Place the adapter on the shaft with
shift during engine‐driven power take‐off ▶ Remove the wrench and the adapter. the wrench in position 2.
(NMV) can be found in the vehicle docu- ▶ Power take-off (code N4Y/N4Z):
▶ Attach the cover cap 1.
ment wallet. Turn the wrench to position 3.
Vehicles with power take‐off (code N4W/ ▶ Press the power take-off switch S or
N4X) can be identified by the external at the top.
clutch actuator. If there is a cover plate in ▶ Power take-off (code N4W/N4X):
◁ If the power take-off is engaged, If the power take-off was previously
this position, then the vehicle is equipped the instrument cluster displays
with the power take‐off (code N4Y/N4Z). activated automatically using the
the engagement status 0 switch, turn the wrench to position
▶ Observe the power sequencing when of the power take-off. Indicator 4.
using the engine-driven power take- lamp in switch S lights up.
off (NMV) ( → Page 372). or
Deactivating the power take-off
▶ Power take-off (code N4W/N4X):
Engaging power take-off manually manually
If the power take-off was previously
▶ Apply the parking brake. ▶ Switch on the vehicle. activated manually, turn the wrench
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. ▶ Apply the parking brake. to position 3.
▶ Switch off the vehicle. ▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. ▶ Remove the wrench and the adapter.
▶ Take the wrench, screwdriver and ▶ Press the power take-off switch S ▶ Attach the cover cap 1.
hammer out of the vehicle tool kit. at the bottom. ▶ Start the vehicle.
▶ Take the adapter out of the vehicle ▶ Switch off the vehicle. ◁ If the power take-off is disen-
document wallet. ▶ Take the adapter out of the vehicle gaged, the instrument cluster
▶ Remove the cover cap 1 with a document wallet. displays the engagement status
screwdriver and a hammer. ▶ Take the wrench, screwdriver and / of the power take-off. The
hammer out of the vehicle tool kit.

Working mode
Tipper mode
indicator lamp in switch S Sensor valve for tipper control Actuating valves for switching or
goes off. activating
Tipper mode
How tipper mode works
To activate the tipper body and other
functions, controls for pneumatic mas-
ter and actuating valves can be fitted on
the door side next to the driver's seat. If Tipper body operating lever
so, the door trim is adapted to provide ad- 1 Lower tipper body Switching trailer operation
equate space. The control knob and pull Activate tipper body on towing vehicle
g STOP – stop the tipping or lowering 1
switch can also be fitted in multiple ways movement 2 Activate tipper body on trailer
and in different combinations, depending 2 Raise tipper body Switching crane operation
on the function.
3 Operating lever with pull ring 1 Tipper function
The following functions are examples 2 Crane function
and are displayed on a sticker next to The operating lever 3 will engage in Activating rear wall claw‐type lock
the controls in the cab's doorway. For position 2. To move the operating lever 1 Unlock claw‐type locks
the actual function selected, observe the in or out of position 2, pull the pull ring
2 Lock claw‐type locks
tipper or body manufacturer's operating on the operating lever.
instructions. 3 Control knob

Working mode
Tipper mode
Actuating valve for on-board com- Retracting/extending the tipper ▶ When working on add‐on equipment
puter near the exhaust system, always
Before tipping keep a sufficient safe distance and
wear protective gloves.
Danger
▶ Observe the notes under "Using
Risk of accident if the exterior light- steps" ( → Page 386).
ing is covered by the side board
If you open the rear side board, the rear Note
exterior lighting is covered.
Damage to the chassis by lifting the
This could delay other road users in front wheels
On-board computer ( → Page 379) recognising the vehicle as an obstacle. If a container is picked up or set down,
On-board computer ▶ Secure the rear area of the vehicle the front wheels may lift.
1 Open dropside according to the national require- ▶ Only couple up or pick up
ments, e.g. using a warning triangle. swap‐body platforms or containers if
g STOP – stop movement
2 Close dropside the vehicle has been started.
Danger
3 Pull switch
Risk of burns caused by a hot ex- Note
haust system Damage to the vehicle due to excess-
The vehicle exhaust system can become ive axle loads
very hot. If the maximum permissible axle load is
▶ Use only the steps and grab handles exceeded platform-type swap bodies or
provided for this purpose. containers are tilted, rolled or deposited,
▶ Never climb over the exhaust sys- the vehicle may be damaged.
tem to reach from the cab to the The tyres, chassis frame and axle may
add‐on equipment. be damaged.

Working mode
Tipper mode
▶ Do not exceed the maximum per- Unless otherwise stated in the tipper instructions from the tipper manufac-
missible axle load specified in the manufacturer's operating instructions, turer.
body/equipment mounting direct- ensure that the low‐speed splitter box has
ives. been selected. Tipping
You must complete the connection ▶ Park the vehicle on a firm and level ▶ Make sure that nobody is in the tip-
between the subframe and the chassis surface. ping area.
in the crane area. This can be done with ▶ Apply the parking brake. ▶ Observe the tipper manufacturer's
either a crane mounting or another ▶ Check and secure the pins on the operating instructions.
adequate mounting. Comply with the tipper body; see the tipper manufac-
After tipping
body/equipment mounting directives. turer's separate operating instruc-
Tipper operation is not permitted if you do tions. The tipper body must be se- ▶ Close the side or ensure that the side
not complete the connection. Observe cured with the pins on the side to closes and locks in the case of auto-
the safety regulations and the separate which the load is to be tipped. The matic release/locking mechanisms.
operating instructions of the tipper pins have different shapes to prevent See the separate operating instruc-
manufacturer. confusion or diagonal insertion. tions from the tipper manufacturer.
When the dumper pump (power take‐off) ▶ Start the vehicle. ▶ Switch off the tipper pump (power
is engaged, you can select any pulling ▶ Switch on the tipper pump (power take-off) ( → Page 372).
away gear or reverse gear while station- take-off) ( → Page 372). ▶ Raise the chassis to driving level
ary. Changes of direction are only permit- ◁ The chassis is lowered automatic- ( → Page 309).
ted in the selected gear. Do not change ally. The display shows the Û ◁ The Û symbol for chassis
gears while driving. In vehicles with auto- symbol for chassis below driving below driving level will disappear
mated manual transmission, the trans- level. from the display.
mission will change automatically when ▶ Open the side or ensure that the
the tipper pump is switched to the manual side unlocks and opens in the case
drive program p. of automatic release/locking mech-
anisms. See the separate operating

Maintenance and care
Cleaning and care
Cleaning and care ● Ensure that the vehicle interior com-

Note pletely dries following cleaning.
Notes on cleaning the interior Environmental pollution caused by
environmentally irresponsible dispos- Seat belts
Danger al ● Clean with lukewarm and soapy wa-
Risk of injury due to plastic parts To prevent damage: ter.
coming loose after using solvent- ●
based care products
▶ Dispose of the cleaning materials Do not use chemical cleaning agents.
in an environmentally responsible ● Do not dry seat belts by heating them
The surfaces in the cockpit may become to over 80 °C or exposing them to
manner.
porous. Plastic parts may come loose direct sunlight.
when the airbag is deployed.
Note
▶ Do not use solvent‐based care Cold foam mattress cover
products or cleaning agents to clean only use care products that have been ● Wash at a maximum temperature of
the cockpit. approved for Mercedes‐Benz trucks. 30 °C.
These care products are available from Displays
Danger
an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
Risk of injury or fatal injuries from ● Switch off the display and let it cool
Service Centre.
bleached seat belts down.
Bleaching or dyeing seat belts can Observe the following points when wet ● Clean the surface carefully with a cot-
severely weaken them. cleaning the vehicle interior: ton or microfibre cloth and a display
● Never use a high‐pressure cleaner. care product (TFT‐LCD) recommen-
This can, for example, cause seat belts
● Make sure that no fluids can enter or ded for Mercedes‐Benz trucks.
to tear or fail in an accident.
remain in gaps and cavities. ● Do not use any other cleaning
▶ Never bleach or dye seat belts. ● Ensure that there is sufficient ventila- products.
tion when cleaning.

Cleaning and care
Plastic trims leather upholstery for Mercedes‐Benz Steering wheel and gearshift lever
Trucks.
● Clean with a damp microfibre cloth. ● Do not allow the leather to become ● Clean with a damp cloth and mild
● In case it is very dirty: Use cleaning too damp. soapy water.
agents that have been recommended ● Do not use the microfibre cloth. ● Wipe over again with a dry cloth.
for Mercedes‐Benz trucks.
● Do not clean the seat cushions and ● Do not use solvent‐based cleaning
● Do not use solvent‐based care backrests using steam cleaners or and care products.
products and cleaning agents. cleaning fluids. ● Do not allow fluids with sticky ingredi-
● Do not attach stickers, films or similar ents to come into contact with the
materials. Imitation leather seat covers steering wheel or the steering wheel
● Do not allow cosmetics, insect repel- ● Clean with a damp cloth and 1%
buttons.
lent or sun cream to come in contact soapy water. For leather upholstery:
with the plastic trim.
● Do not use the microfibre cloth. ● Use leather care agents that have
Trim elements ● Do not clean the seat cushions and been recommended for leather uphol-
backrests using steam cleaners or stery for Mercedes‐Benz Trucks.
● Clean with a microfibre cloth. cleaning fluids. ● Do not use the microfibre cloth.
● In case it is very dirty: Use cleaning
agents that have been recommended Cloth seat covers
for Mercedes‐Benz trucks.
● Clean with a damp microfibre cloth
● Do not use solvent‐based cleaning and 1% soap solution and allow to dry.
agents, polishes or waxes.
● Do not clean the seat cushions and
Genuine leather seat covers backrests using steam cleaners or
cleaning fluids.
● Clean with a damp cloth and then
wipe with a dry cloth.
● Leather care: Use leather care agents
that have been recommended for

Cleaning and care
Notes on the use of a high-pressure ▶ Do not use a high‐pressure cleaner Notes on the use of automatic car
cleaner in the vehicle interior under any washes
circumstances.
Danger Note
Risk of accident when using high- Note Damage when using an automatic car
pressure cleaners with round-spray Component damage due to the use of wash
nozzles a high-pressure cleaner If, when using an automatic car wash,
The water jet may cause invisible dam- The following vehicle components can the outside mirrors/camera arms are
age. be damaged through direct application folded out or the windscreen wipers are
Damaged components may fail unexpec- of a high-pressure cleaner: activated, they may be damaged.
tedly. Door gaps, air suspension bellows, brake Before using an automatic car wash:
hoses, balancing weights, electrical
▶ Do not use a high‐pressure cleaner ▶ Deactivate the windscreen wipers.
components, electrical connectors, and
with round‐spray nozzles.
seals.
▶ Vehicles with external mirrors: Fold
▶ Have damaged tyres or suspension in the outside mirrors.
components replaced as soon as ▶ Do not point the water jet at these ▶ Vehicles with MirrorCam: Fold in the
possible. components. camera arms.
When using high‐pressure cleaning, keep Make sure that the outside mirrors or
Note a minimum distance of about 30°‐°50 cm camera arms of the MirrorCam system
Damage due to the use of a high- between the high‐pressure nozzle and the are fully folded out again when you leave
pressure cleaner in the vehicle in- vehicle parts and use clean warm water the automatic car wash.
terior up to 50°C.
If the vehicle is very dirty, wash off excess
The volume of water generated under Keep the water jet moving constantly dirt before cleaning the vehicle in an auto-
pressure by the high-pressure cleaner while cleaning. matic car wash.
and the associated spray may cause
significant damage to the vehicle.

Cleaning and care
Note Danger Note

After using an automatic car wash, wipe Risk of fire due to flammable materi- Environmental damage due to im-
off the wax from the windscreen and the als or loaded goods coming into con- proper cleaning of the vehicle exteri-
wiper rubbers. This will prevent smear- tact with the exhaust system or
ing and reduce wiper noises caused by Flammable materials or flammable If you clean the vehicle exterior in a
residue on the windscreen. loaded goods may ignite on hot parts of washing bay that is not intended for this
the exhaust gas after-treatment. purpose, this could release polluting
operating fluids and cleaning agents into
Notes on cleaning the exterior ▶ Before every journey, check wheth-
the environment.
er flammable materials or loaded
Danger goods have accumulated in the area ▶ Find a suitable washing bay for
Risk of an accident due to reduced of and/or on parts of the exhaust cleaning the vehicle exterior.
braking effect after washing the gas aftertreatment system and use
vehicle suitable aids (e.g. compressed air) Note
The braking effect of the brakes is re- to remove them. Daimler Truck AG recommends that you
duced after washing the vehicle. only use care products that have been
Note approved for Mercedes‐Benz trucks.
▶ After the vehicle has been washed,
Environmental pollution caused by These care products are available from
brake carefully while paying atten-
environmentally irresponsible dispos- an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
tion to the traffic conditions until
al Service Centre.
the braking effect has been fully re-
stored. To prevent damage:
If you are cleaning higher parts of the
▶ Dispose of the cleaning materials vehicle, follow the instructions for the
in an environmentally responsible steps and grab handles ( → Page 386).
manner.
If you use a high‐pressure cleaner to
clean the vehicle, also observe the

Cleaning and care
"Notes on using a high‐pressure cleaner" Vehicles with chassis protection seal Radiator surface
( → Page 383). for Mercedes-Benz trucks
Paintwork Remove corrosion‐inducing substances Note
with water after every use. Engine overheating due to damaged
Note or dirty radiator fins
Check the anti‐corrosion protection be-
Paintwork damage caused by very fore and after snow‐clearing operations If the radiator fins are deformed or dirty,
stubborn or aggressive dirt and and touch it up as necessary. this may result in reduced engine cool-
debris ing. The engine may overheat.
To prevent damage to the chassis pro-
For example, the following types of dirt tection seal for Mercedes-Benz trucks, ▶ Observe the instructions for external
and debris may cause lasting damage to observe the following instructions when cleaning.
the paintwork: cleaning the vehicle: Only direct the compressed air, steam,
● Insect residues ● Do not use a high‐pressure cleaner. or water jet perpendicular to the radiator
● Bird excrement ● use a maximum water pressure of surface. Ensure that the radiator fins are
3 bar for cleaning. not damaged during cleaning.
● Flash rust
● clean the vehicle using water no hot- Have loss of coolant or damage checked
● Tree resins ter than 40°C. at a qualified workshop.
● Oils and greases ● Use a neutral cleaner in the mixing ra-
● Fuels tio specified by the manufacturer and
do not use alkaline or acidic products.
● Tar splashes
● Do not use any petrol‐based sub-
● Road salt residues stances, rapeseed oil, petrol, diesel
▶ These types of dirt or debris must be or other solvents.
removed as soon as possible.

Cleaning and care
BlueTec® exhaust gas ▶ Use cleaning agents that have been Using steps
after-treatment system recommended for Mercedes‐Benz
trucks. Danger
Note Clean the light‐alloy wheels regularly. Risk of injury from unlocked steps
Damage to the BlueTec® exhaust When the step is folded down, it may
Exterior lighting swing to the side when climbing into or
gas after-treatment system due to
improper cleaning down from the vehicle. This may cause
Cleaning the system while it is warm or Note you to slip and/or fall from the step.
spraying water directly into the exhaust Damage to the exterior lighting due ▶ Always lock the folded‐down step
pipe may damage the BlueTec® exhaust to improper cleaning before entering the vehicle.
gas after-treatment system. Using unsuitable cleaning agents and
cleaning cloths may scratch or damage
▶ Only clean the system when it is the plastic covers of the exterior lighting.
Danger
cold. Risk of injury if unsuitable climbing
▶ Do not direct the water jet into the ▶ Do not use corrosive or tools are used
exhaust pipe. solvent‐based cleaning agents. If you use openings in the bodywork or
▶ Clean the plastic covers with a wet attachments as steps, you may slip and/
Light-alloy wheels sponge and a mild cleaning agent. or fall.
You may also damage the vehicle and
Note
fall as a result.
Corrosion of the wheel nuts due to
the use of incorrect cleaning agents ▶ Always use nonslip and stable climb-
Using acidic or alkaline cleaning agents ing aids, e.g. a suitable ladder.
to clean light-alloy wheels may cause
corrosion to the wheel nuts or the safety
springs of the balance weights.

Cleaning and care
▶ Steps and grab handles from dirt and Small folding step, front
Danger debris (e.g. mud, clay, snow, ice).
Risk of burns caused by a hot ex- ◁ This will improve the safety of
haust system your footing.
The vehicle exhaust system can become
very hot. Steps, front
▶ Use only the steps and grab handles
provided for this purpose.
▶ Never climb over the exhaust sys-
Small folding step, front (example)
tem to reach from the cab to the
add‐on equipment. ▶ To fold down: Swing step 1 down
▶ When working on add‐on equipment as far as it will go.
near the exhaust system, always ▶ To fold up: Swing step 1 upwards
keep a sufficient safe distance and until it engages.
wear protective gloves.
Note
Damage due to driving with the step Example: Actros L-cab, steps and grab handles
folded down ▶ Tilt folding steps 3 forwards.
If you drive with the step folded down
When cleaning the vehicle, use steps 4
when driving off road, for example, it
and 3 grab handles 1.
may touch the carriageway and become
damaged. To access grab handles 1 more easily
and safely, use handle recesses 2.
▶ Fold up the front step before start-
ing a journey and lock it if neces-
sary.

Cleaning and care
Large folding step, front Side steps
Steps and grab handle (example: Arocs with upright exhaust

system)
Large folding step, front (example) Steps and grab handle (example: tipper vehicle)
To enter safely from the side:
▶ To fold down: Push step 2 slightly
upwards, pull retainer 1 and swivel
▶ Use grab handle 1 and steps 2.
step 2 downwards as far as it will
go.
▶ To fold up: Pull retainer 1 and
swing step 2 upwards until it
engages.
▶ Make sure that the retainer 1 has
engaged on both sides.

Cleaning and care
Steps for semitrailer trucks Cleaning the sensors

If you need to clean areas of the vehicle
which are high up:
▶ Use the steps and grab handles on
the vehicle ( → Page 386) or no-slip
and stable climbing aids.
Cleaning the MirrorCam system cam-

era
Steps and grab handle (example: Actros semitrailer truck

with side trim)
Steps and grab handle (example: Actros semitrailer truck ▶ Vehicles with side deflector: Fold the
without side trim)
side deflector 3 inwards.
▶ Vehicles with FNC cab: Close the
stowage compartment flap and pull
the lower edge of the side deflector Camera housing (example: left-hand side of the vehicle)
3. Keep the camera lenses clean and free

◁ The side deflector 3 swivels of snow or ice. Wet stubborn dirt on the
forwards. camera lenses with water. Then clean
the camera lenses using commercially
Use steps 2 and grab handle 1 when available glass cleaner and a damp cloth.
cleaning the vehicle.
Do not clean the camera lenses using a
dry cloth.

Cleaning and care
Accumulated snow and ice are removed

by the camera heating when the Note
MirrorCam system is activated. Note that it is only permissible to
replace the windscreen with a
▶ Regularly clean the camera of the windscreen approved by Daimler
MirrorCam system to prevent mal- Truck AG.
functions.
Clean the windscreen in the area of

the rain/light sensor and multifunc-
tion camera
Danger
Risk of becoming trapped if the wind- ▶ Regularly clean the windscreen in the
screen is being cleaned while the area of rain and light sensor 1 and
windscreen wipers are activated camera 2 to prevent malfunctions.
If the windscreen wipers begin to move
while you are cleaning the windscreen Note
or wiper blades, you could become If the windscreen is damaged in the
trapped. area of the rain and light sensor
▶ Always switch off the windscreen and the camera, the functionality
wipers and the vehicle before clean- of various driving assistance/driving
ing the windscreen or wiper blades. safety systems and the rain and light
sensor may be impaired. Have the
windscreen replaced at a qualified

Cleaning and care
Cleaning the reversing camera ▶ To prevent malfunctions, regularly Cleaning the Sideguard Assist/Active
clean the reversing camera. Sideguard Assist sensor
Cleaning the distance sensors
Sideguard Assist/Active Sideguard Assist sensor (example)
Distance sensors (example)

▶ Clean the sensor 1 regularly with
water, shampoo and a soft cloth to
▶ To prevent malfunctions, regularly
prevent malfunctions.
Reversing camera (example) clean the distance sensors 1.
Note
Note Notes on washing the engine
The position of the reversing camera
If the distance sensors are dirty, the
may vary depending on the body and Note
S Assistance system malfunc-
chassis frame.
tion. Distance sensors’ field of vision Damage and malfunctions caused by
Keep the camera lenses clean and free blocked display message appears in washing the engine
of snow or ice. Wet stubborn dirt on the the instrument cluster. To avoid damage to or malfunctions of
camera lenses with water. Then clean the engine:
the camera lenses using commercially
available glass cleaner and a damp cloth. ▶ When using high‐pressure or steam
Do not clean the camera lenses using a cleaners, do not point the water jet
dry cloth.

Maintenance
directly at electrical components repairs carried out, this may result in ▶ Do not leave the engine running
and the ends of electric cables. malfunctions or system failures. for longer than necessary while the
▶ Make sure that no water enters the ▶ Always have the prescribed service vehicle is stationary.
intake, vent and ventilation open- and maintenance work, as well any The maintenance system calculates main-
ings. required repairs, carried out at a tenance due dates for the vehicle and its
▶ Use preservative agents in the en- qualified specialist workshop. major assemblies based on the vehicle's
gine after having washed the engine. operating conditions.
▶ Protect the belt drive from preser- Note You must secure the vehicle on jack
vative agents.
Environmental pollution due to dis- stands of sufficient load capacity if work
Only use wax preservative agents for posal in an environmentally irre- is being carried out underneath the
engines in accordance with the Mer- sponsible manner vehicle.
cedes‐Benz Trucks Specifications for op- If you have to do some maintenance When working on the vehicle, comply with
erating fluids ( → Page 482). work yourself for operating reasons, fol- all safety regulations, such as the operat-
Observe the "Notes on using a low environmental protection require- ing instructions, regulations concerning
high‐pressure cleaner" ( → Page 383). ments while you do so. When dispos- hazardous materials, environmental pro-
ing of operating fluids, e.g. engine oil, tection measures, as well as work safety
you must comply with the legal require- and accident prevention regulations.
Maintenance ments. This also applies to all parts,
Do not clean the filter elements of the air
Notes on the maintenance system e.g. filters, that have been in contact
filter. Otherwise, the liability for material
with operating fluids.
defects will be invalidated and you may
Danger ▶ Dispose of empty containers, clean- damage the engine. Replace the air filter
Risk of accident due to malfunctions ing cloths, and care products in an inserts.
or system failure environmentally responsible man-
You can view the coming maintenance
If you do not have the prescribed ser- ner.
due dates calculated for the vehicle and
vice/maintenance work or any required ▶ Observe the instructions for care
products.

Maintenance
its major assemblies in the on‐board com- Maintenance dates are displayed for ▶ To release: Press release levers 2
puter ( → Page 159). the first time 14 days before they are on the left and right one after the
The display message for the mainten- due. other in the direction of the arrow.
ance due dates appears in the instrument ● ¯ Air filter, Maintenance due ▶ To open: Swing the maintenance flap
cluster for the first time 14 days before The maintenance date is due. 1 upwards.
they are due. ● ¯ Air filter, Maintenance due im- ▶ To close: Swing maintenance flap 1
mediately downwards until it engages audibly.
Note The maintenance due date has been
A qualified workshop can program the exceeded.
Overview of maintenance points un-
first message to appear between 0 to der the maintenance flap
30 days before the due date. Open/close maintenance flap
If you switch on the vehicle and a service
appointment is imminent or due, the ser-
vice appointment will appear in a grey
display message ( → Page 496).
If you miss a service appointment, the ser-
vice appointment will appear in a yellow
display message ( → Page 496).
Maintenance points
The maintenance system automatically 1 Coolant expansion reservoir with turquoise
notifies you of service appointments. cap ( → Page 394)
Examples of this are: 2 Hydraulic clutch operation system with
● ¯ Air filter, 12/08/2024, green cap ( → Page 395)
3000 km The release levers are below the lateral
3 Engine oil filler neck with black cap
( → Page 400)
panelling above the headlamps.

Maintenance
4 Washer fluid reservoir with black cap Requirements

( → Page 396)
● The vehicle is parked on a level sur-
face.
Check the coolant level ● The parking brake is applied.
Danger
Risk of scalding from hot coolant
You may be scalded if you open the cap.
▶ Allow the engine to cool down be-
fore you open the cap.
▶ When opening the cap, wear pro-
tective gloves and safety goggles. The coolant expansion reservoir may be
▶ Open the cap slowly to release pres- located below the maintenance flap or on
sure. the rear of the cab.
Vehicles with a retarder are equipped with
Note a coolant pressure regulator. The coolant
pressure regulator regulates and monitors
Engine damage as a result of the
the system pressure in the engine cooling
coolant level being too low
system.
Engine damage may occur if the vehicle
is operated with a coolant level that is If the yellow display message Coolant
too low. pressure regulation faulty appears on the
instrument cluster, check that the elec-
▶ Check the coolant level regularly trical connector 1 and hose connection
and top up the coolant if necessary. 2 are secure. The hose fitting 2 and
turquoise cap 3 must be leak‐free. If you

Maintenance
are unable to find any leaks, have the en- ▶ Vehicles with a coolant expansion ▶ Vehicles with a coolant expansion
gine cooling system checked at a qualified reservoir behind the cab: Screw on reservoir behind the cab: Slide cover
workshop. cover 4. 4 shut.
If the coolant level in the coolant expan-
sion reservoir is too low, the following Note
Checking hydraulic fluid level of the
display messages may be shown: On vehicles with coolant expansion
clutch operation system
● + ( → Page 496) reservoir behind the cab, make sure
● + ( → Page 496) your footing is secure when refilling Note
the coolant.
The coolant expansion reservoir can only Damage to the clutch operation sys-
be opened at a coolant temperature of
▶ Slowly turn turquoise cap 3 anti- tem due to filling with incorrect hy-
clockwise to release the overpres- draulic fluids
under 50°C. The coolant level can only
sure. To prevent damage:
be checked correctly when the coolant
▶ Continue turning turquoise cap 3
temperature is between 0°C and 25°C.
and remove it.
▶ Do not refill with hydraulic fluid of a
If the engine cooling system has to be different quality grade or brake fluid.
▶ Check the coolant level. The coolant
refilled, contact a qualified workshop. in the coolant expansion reservoir
Note
▶ Check the coolant temperature on the must reach to the edge of the filler
on-board computer ( → Page 163). neck. Damage to the clutch operation sys-
▶ Observe the notes on operating flu- ▶ If necessary, refill with a coolant ap- tem due to excessively low fluid level
ids ( → Page 482) and coolants proved for Mercedes-Benz trucks. The hydraulic system may be leaking
( → Page 485). ▶ Put on the turquoise cap 3 and if the fluid level in the hydraulic clutch
▶ Vehicles with a coolant expansion tighten it as far as it will go. operation system expansion reservoir is
reservoir below the maintenance ▶ Vehicles with a coolant expansion below the minimum mark.
flap: Open the maintenance flap reservoir below the maintenance flap: ▶ Have the hydraulic system checked
( → Page 393). Close the maintenance flap. at a qualified workshop.

Maintenance
Refilling the windscreen washer sys- Topping up the washer fluid

tem/headlamp cleaning system
Danger
Risk of fire and injury from wind-
screen washer concentrate
Windscreen washer concentrate is highly
flammable. It could ignite if it comes
into contact with hot engine component
parts or the exhaust system.
▶ Make sure that windscreen washer
The hydraulic fluid for the clutch operation concentrate is not spilled next to the
system must meet the specifications in filler opening.
the Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Specifications Depending on the vehicle version, the
for Operating Fluids. washer fluid reservoir for the windscreen
washer system and the headlamp clean-
It is not necessary to renew the hydraulic ing system can hold approx. 10 l or 15 l.
fluid in the hydraulic clutch operation
system. If the washer fluid level in the washer fluid
reservoir is too low, the instrument cluster
▶ Open the maintenance flap will display a grey message with the ¥
( → Page 393). symbol.
▶ Check the fluid level at the expan- Add a concentrated windscreen washer
sion reservoir. The fluid level must be concentrate to the washing water all year
between the max. 1 and min. 2 round in accordance with Mercedes‐Benz
markings. Trucks Specifications for Operating Fluids.
▶ Close the maintenance flap.

Maintenance
Adapt the mixing ratio to the outside tem- Cleaning the cyclone dust
perature. pre-separator
At temperatures above freezing, add a
windscreen washer concentrate for the Note
summer to prevent smearing. If there is Damage to the air filter due to tap-
a risk of frost, use a windscreen wash- ping, blowing or washing out
er concentrate for winter to prevent the Tapping, blowing or washing out the
washer fluid from freezing on the wind- filter medium may lead to structural
screen. changes and damage. in this case, the
▶ Observe the notes on operating fluids required separation efficiency of the
( → Page 482). filter element can no longer be guaran-
▶ Pre-mix the washer fluid to the cor- teed.
The cyclone dust pre‐separator is integ-
rect mixing ratio in a container. Increased wear and shortened service rated in the inlet duct and extends the
▶ Open the maintenance flap life of the engine is to be expected. service life of the air filter. When oper-
( → Page 393). the liability for material defects is inval- ating with a high dust load, empty the
▶ Unscrew and remove cap 1 from the idated. discharge valves 1 at least once a week
washer fluid reservoir. or daily if necessary. Have damaged dis-
▶ Do not clean the filter elements of
▶ Top up the washer fluid reservoir .
the air filter. charge valves 1 replaced by a qualified
▶ Replace cap 1 and screw it on.
▶ Replace the filter elements of the air
▶ Close the maintenance flap. filter. ▶ Stop the vehicle.
▶ Place a container under the discharge
valves 1.

Maintenance
▶ Press the discharge valves 1 togeth- ▶ Slide catch 2 on air intake duct 1
er. in direction &.
Cleaning the coarse filter for heating Replacing the wiper blades
and climate control
A combination or pollen filter is marked Danger
with the letter "C" or "P" on the top and Risk of injury due to unsuitable climb-
must not be cleaned. They must be re- ing aid
placed. When you use the steps and grab
A coarse filter is clearly marked with the handles at the front of the vehicle, you
letter "B" on the top and may only be may slip and/or fall.
tapped out or blown out. ▶ Open the maintenance flap ▶ Always use nonslip and stable climb-
When you are using compressed air to ( → Page 393). ing aids, e.g. a suitable ladder.
blow out the filter, keep a minimum dis- ▶ Slide catch 2 on air intake duct 1
tance of 20 cm between the compressed in direction %. Danger
air nozzle and the filter. Tap or blow out ▶ Remove air intake duct 1. Risk of becoming trapped if the wind-
the coarse filter carefully and only oppos- ▶ Pull the coarse filter out of the duct. screen wipers are switched on while
ite to the airflow direction indicated. The ▶ Tap out or blow out the coarse filter. wiper blades are being replaced
airflow direction is marked with arrows on ▶ Push the coarse filter into the duct. If the windscreen wipers begin to move
the top of the coarse filter. Pay attention to the airflow direc- while you are changing the wiper blades,
Careless or incorrect cleaning can dam- tion indicated by arrows on the upper you can be trapped by the wiper arm.
age the coarse filter. side. The arrows must point down- ▶ Always switch off the windscreen
wards. wipers and the vehicle before repla-
▶ Fit air intake duct 1. cing the wiper blades.

Maintenance
Otherwise, the windscreen will not be Fitting the wiper blades

Note wiped properly.
Damage to the maintenance flap or
windscreen by the wiper arm
▶ Fold wiper blade 1 and wiper arm
3 away from the windscreen.
To prevent damage:
▶ Remove hose 2 from the pipe jet.
▶ If a wiper arm is folded forwards, do
not open the maintenance flap.
▶ Do not fold the wiper arms against
the windscreen without the wiper
blades attached. ▶ Insert the new wiper blade into the
wiper arm in the direction of arrow
Removing the wiper blades 1.
▶ Slide catch 2 in the direction of ar-
▶ Push the wiper blade in the direction row 3 until it engages in the locking
of arrow 1 onto the wiper arm as far position.
as it will go. ▶ Make sure that the wiper blade is
▶ Slide catch 2 in the direction of ar- seated correctly.
row 3 until it engages in the removal ▶ Attach the hose to the pipe jet.
position. ▶ Fold the wiper arms back onto the
▶ Remove the wiper blade from the windscreen.
wiper arm in the direction of arrow
4.
Wiper blades are wear parts. Replace

the wiper blades at least once a year.

Maintenance
Checking the engine oil and topping Oil level, automatic transmission
up
Checking oil level of the automatic
Checking the oil level transmission
▶ Check the engine oil level on the on- Note
board computer ( → Page 163).
▶ Only use oils that are approved for Risk of damage to the transmission
the vehicle and meet the specified due to excessive transmission oil
SAE classifications ( → Page 482). temperature
If the Ù indicator lamp flashes or
Topping up the engine oil lights up while the vehicle is in motion,
the temperature of the transmission oil
Note Only refill the oil filling capacity displayed or the coolant is too high. This may be
Damage caused by topping up too on the instrument cluster when the 4 caused by the transmission oil level be-
much engine oil symbol appears in the menu window. ing too high or too low. If the transmis-
sion oil temperature is increased from
Excess engine oil can damage the engine ▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface. time to time, there is a risk of damage to
or catalytic converter. ▶ Apply the parking brake. the transmission.
▶ Have excess engine oil removed at a ▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Check the oil level of the automat-
qualified workshop. ▶ Open the maintenance flap
ic transmission as soon as pos-
( → Page 393).
sible after the Ù indicator lamp
▶ Unscrew and remove the cap 1. flashes or lights up.
▶ Top up the oil filling capacity dis-
played on the instrument cluster. Check the oil level only when the auto-
▶ Put on the cap 1 and screw it matic transmission is at normal operating
closed. temperature.

Maintenance
▶ Wait for approximately two minutes. Code Meaning

◁ After the waiting time, the display The subsequently displayed number
1 will automatically show a indicates the transmission oil quantity
code for the oil level or a fault that must be refilled, for example:
code. 01 = 1 l
The oil level in the transmission is too
oL HI
Ending oil level measurement high.
▶ Press any gear button. The subsequently displayed number

indicates the transmission oil quantity
◁ The oil level measurement is that must be drained or extracted, for
finished. The display 1 once example:
again shows the shift position on 01 = 1 l
the left and the selected gear on
▶ Park the vehicle on a level surface. the right. Possible fault codes during oil level
measurement:
▶ Apply the parking brake. ▶ Top up the transmission oil if neces-
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to sary. Code Meaning Remedy
neutral position. The engine speed
Leave the engine
▶ Start the vehicle and leave it running Overview of transmission oil level oL EL
is too low.
running at idle
speed.
at idle speed. fault codes
Leave the engine
▶ Press the 2 and 3 buttons simul- Codes for the oil level: oL EH
The engine speed
running at idle
taneously. is too high.
speed.
Code Meaning
▶ Press the button 2. The automatic
oL oK The oil level in the transmission is OK. Shift the automatic
◁ The oil level measurement will oL SN
transmission is
transmission to
The oil level in the transmission is too not in the neutral
start. During oil level measure- oL Lo position.
neutral position.
low.
ment, the display 1 will show
the codes from oL 08 to oL 01 in
sequence.

Maintenance
Code Meaning Remedy Notes on the major assemblies Checking the anti-corrosion protec-
Leave the engine tion
running until the Note
The oil temperature
oL TL transmission oil Note
is too low. Pollution of the environment due to
reaches operating
temperature. irresponsible disposal of operating Damage to the anti-corrosion protec-
Switch off the fluids tion due to salt residue
vehicle until the Incorrectly disposing of operating fluids Road salt is aggressive. Salt residue may
oil temperature in can cause considerable damage to the damage the anti-corrosion protection.
The oil temperature
oL TH the transmission
is too high. environment.
has dropped ▶ Wash the vehicle more frequently in
to operating ▶ Dispose of operating fluids in an en- winter to remove road salt residues.
temperature.
vironmentally responsible manner.
Stop the vehicle. The vehicle may be equipped
The vehicle is Operating fluids include: with a chassis protection seal for
oL SH Apply the parking
rolling.
brake. ● Fuels Mercedes‐Benz Trucks. The chassis
Check the oil ● Additives for exhaust gas after‐treat- protection seal for Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
level using the oil ment, e.g. AdBlue® is a transparent anti‐corrosion protection
The sensor for dipstick. wax with excellent protective properties.
oL FL the oil level is Have the malfunc-
● Lubricants
defective. tion checked at a ● Coolant All MercedesBenz Trucks cabs come
qualified specialist ● Air conditioning system refrigerants treated with a cavity preservative.
workshop.
Regularly check the major assemblies for ▶ Regularly check the vehicle for
leak tightness. If you notice loss of fluids, corrosion damage, particularly the
e.g. oil spots where the vehicle is parked, compressed-air and hydraulic lines
have the cause rectified immediately by a and electrical contact points (earth
qualified specialist workshop. contacts).
▶ Have any damage to the factory-
fitted, anti-corrosion protection re-

Maintenance
paired at a qualified specialist work- ▶ Do not lean over a battery.

shop. ▶ Keep children away from the bat- Note
▶ Vehicles without chassis protection tery. Environmental damage due to im-
seal for Mercedes-Benz trucks: As a ▶ In case of contact with battery acid, proper disposal of batteries
precaution, spray the underside of the immediately rinse the affected area Batteries contain pollutants. It
vehicle with a wax preservation agent thoroughly with plenty of clear wa-
for underbodies according to the ter and seek medical assistance is illegal to dispose of them with the
Mercedes-Benz Trucks Specifications promptly. household rubbish.
for operating fluids ( → Page 482). ▶ If you get battery acid in your eyes, ▶
Dispose of batteries in an en-
as soon as possible rinse them thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water. vironmentally responsible manner.
Battery Take discharged batteries to a qual-
Seek medical attention as soon as
Notes on the battery possible. ified specialist workshop or to a col-
lection point for used batteries.
Danger Note Observe the safety instructions and
Danger of chemical burns from bat- Damage to the on-board electrical protective measures when handling
tery acid system batteries caused by receiving the battery:
Battery acid is caustic. current directly Risk of explosion. Explosive
▶ Avoid contact with the skin, eyes, or Connecting consumers directly to the oxyhydrogen gas is produced when
battery poles causes the battery sensors batteries are being charged. Only
clothing. charge batteries in a well‐ventilated
▶ Do not inhale battery gases. to make an incorrect determination. This area.
▶ When carrying out maintenance causes uncontrolled battery discharge, Risk of explosion. Avoid creating
work on the battery, wear acid‐ and both on-board electrical system sparks! Avoid fire, open flames, and
resistant protective clothing, par- batteries may be discharged. do not smoke when handling the
battery.
ticularly safety glasses, protective ▶ Do not connect consumers directly
gloves, and aprons. to the battery terminals.

Maintenance
Battery acid is caustic. Wear acid‐ ber of electrical consumers that are results in an overall consumption of
resistant protective gloves! Splashes switched on and the duration used. approximately 60 Ah.
of acid on skin or clothing should ● The given rated capacity of the bat- ● Ideally, recharge the batteries regu-
be neutralised as soon as possible
using soapy water or acid neutraliser tery may be higher than the actual larly with an external charger, at least
and then rinsed with water. battery capacity. The battery capacity once per month.
Wear eye protection. When mixing depends on the following factors: ● To ensure the vehicle's starting abil-
water and acid, the liquid may splash ■ the age of the battery ity, observe the notes and instruc-
into your eyes. Rinse out any acid
that splashes into eyes as soon as
■ the outside temperature tions in the following display mes-
possible using clean water and seek ■ The engine speed sages:
medical attention without delay! ● Regardless of the power of the altern- ■ Energy-saving mode active
Keep out of the reach of children. ator, the battery can only be charged ■ Bat. charge level too low Start
Children are not able to evaluate the a certain amount per hour. The rate of engine
risk involved in handling batteries
and acid. charge is significantly reduced by low If energy‐saving mode is active, certain
Always observe the safety instruc-
outside temperatures. As a result, it consumers such as the cool box are
tions, protective measures, and can take significantly longer to charge switched off ( → Page 516). As a result,
procedures specified in these oper- the battery in winter. perishable goods may no longer be
ating instructions when handling the ● If the battery is used intensively when sufficiently cooled.
battery.
the vehicle is stationary, e.g. when
spending the night in the vehicle, the Observe the following notes to minimise
For safety reasons, Daimler Truck AG
battery may need to be recharged power consumption:
recommends that you only use batteries
that have been approved for your vehicle after a few days. ● Devices such as coffee makers, mi-
by Daimler Truck AG. Example: crowave ovens and kettles have an
If the refrigerator box consumes ap- extremely high electrical consumption
Observe the following points regarding for their usually brief length of time in
proximately 1 A per hour and remains
battery capacity and performance: use.
switched on over a weekend, this
● Battery capacity is limited and the ● Ideally, also charge mobile phones
operating time depends on the num- and notebooks whilst driving.

Maintenance
● If devices such as TVs, receivers Removing and fitting batteries

or voltage converters are not be-
ing used, disconnect them from the Battery box
on‐board electrical system.
If you park up your vehicle for longer than
three weeks, observe the notes on park-
ing up the vehicle ( → Page 412).
When storing batteries, comply with all
safety regulations, such as operating in-
structions, regulations concerning hazard-
ous materials, environmental protection ▶ To remove: Open catch 2 and re-
measures, as well as work safety and ac- move battery box cover 1 upwards.
cident prevention regulations. ▶ To fit: Replace battery box cover 1,
Observe the notes on care and mainten- hook in catch 2 and close.
ance of the battery ( → Page 408).
Arrangement of the batteries
The location of the batteries may vary
depending on the vehicle version. The bat-
teries may be fitted one beside the oth-
er or one on top of the other in the rear
area between the longitudinal members
of the chassis frame or on the side on the
chassis.

Maintenance
▶ Never place metal objects or tools may damage the battery sensor or bat-
on a battery. tery pole.
▶ When connecting and disconnect- ▶ Tighten the negative terminal of
ing the battery, always observe the the battery sensor with a tightening
sequence of battery terminals de- torque of 7 ±1 Nm.
scribed.
▶ When jump starting, always take Observe the safety instructions on hand-
care to connect only battery termin- ling batteries.
als of identical polarity. Before disconnecting and reconnecting
▶ During starting assistance, observe the batteries:
the sequence described for con- ▶ Semitrailer truck with batteries in the
necting and disconnecting the jump rear area: Uncouple the semitrailer
Disconnecting and reconnecting the leads. ( → Page 348).
batteries ▶ Do not connect or disconnect the ▶ Switch off the vehicle.
battery terminals with the engine ▶ Switch off all electrical consumers.
running.
Danger ▶ Remove the battery box cover.
Risk of explosion due to the ignition ▶ Disconnecting: Disconnect the neg-
Note ative terminal first, and then discon-
of hydrogen gas
If there is a short circuit or sparks are Damage to the battery sensor due to nect the positive terminal.
created, there is a danger of hydrogen a loose negative pole ▶ Connecting: Reconnect the positive
gas igniting when you charge the bat- For vehicles with a battery sensor, the terminal first, and then reconnect the
tery. negative terminal is part of the battery negative terminal. Do not interchange
sensor. If the negative terminal is not the battery clamps.
▶ Make sure that the POSITIVE ter- correctly secured to the battery's neg-
minal of a connected battery does ▶ Replace battery box cover.
ative pole, contact is not ensured. This
not come into contact with vehicle
parts.

Maintenance
Carry out the following tasks after an ▶ Pull out the upper battery and the
interruption to the power supply or after upper battery carrier.
reconnecting the batteries: ▶ Remove the screws 1 from the
▶ Reset the side window ( → Page 57) lower battery carrier.
and the sliding sunroof ( → Page 58). ▶ Pull out the lower battery carrier.
▶ Set the local time in the tachograph. ▶ Remove screw 2 from the lower
▶ Set the switch-on time for the auxili- securing frame 3.
ary heating system ( → Page 138). ▶ Remove the lower securing frame 3.
▶ Remove the lower battery and the
Removing and fitting batteries (one lower battery carrier.
above the other)
Installing
Note Removal ▶ Insert the lower battery carrier.
Damage to the battery carrier due to
▶ Remove the battery box cover. ▶ Place the battery onto the lower bat-
excessively high tightening torque tery carrier.
▶ Disconnect the negative terminal
If you tighten the screws of the battery
first, and then disconnect the positive ▶ Position the lower securing frame 3
carrier with excessively high tightening and screw in screw 2.
terminal.
torque, the screw connections may be ▶
damaged.
▶ Detach connecting cable between the Push in the lower battery carrier.
batteries. ▶ Screw screws 1 into the lower bat-
▶ Tighten the screws of the battery ▶ Remove screws 1 from the upper tery carrier.
carrier with a tightening torque battery carrier. ▶ Insert the upper battery carrier.
of 12 Nm. Do not use an impact ▶ Pull out the upper battery carrier. ▶ Place the battery onto the upper bat-
wrench. ▶ Remove screw 2 from the upper tery carrier.
securing frame 3. ▶ Position the upper securing frame 3
▶ Remove the securing frame 3. and screw in screw 2.
▶ Push in the upper battery carrier.

Maintenance
▶ Screw screws 1 into the upper bat- ▶ Reconnect the positive terminal first,
tery carrier. and then reconnect the negative ter-
▶ Reconnect connecting cable between minal.
the batteries. ▶ Replace battery box cover.
▶ Reconnect the positive terminal first,
and then reconnect the negative ter- Information on maintenance and care
minal. of the battery
▶ Replace battery box cover.
Parking the vehicle for an extended
Removal
Removing and installing batteries time period/vehicle downtimes and
(one beside the other) ▶ Remove the battery box cover. storage
▶ Disconnect the negative terminal
Note first, and then disconnect the positive Note
terminal. Battery discharging due to quiescent
Damage to the battery carrier due to
excessively high tightening torque ▶ Detach connecting cable between the current consumers
batteries. If the vehicle is idle for lengthy periods,
If you tighten the screws of the battery
carrier with excessively high tightening ▶ Remove screws 1 from brackets 2. the battery can be discharged by quies-
torque, the screw connections may be ▶ Remove both brackets 2. cent current consumers. This can dam-
damaged. ▶ Remove the batteries. age the battery.
▶ Tighten the screws of the battery Installing ▶ For idle times of over a week, dis-
carrier with a tightening torque connect the negative terminal on the
of 20 Nm. Do not use an impact ▶ Insert the batteries. battery.
wrench. ▶ Insert both brackets 2.
▶ Screw screws 1 into brackets 2.
▶ Reconnect connecting cable between
the batteries.

Maintenance
measures, as well as work safety and ac- Daimler Truck AG recommends the follow-
Note cident prevention regulations. ing when replacing the batteries:
Damage to the battery due to excess- ● Always replace both batteries.
ively low voltage Battery replacement and operating
● Use the same type of battery.
If the battery voltage falls below 12.1 V, life
If you use another type of battery,
the battery will be damaged and must be have the battery type set with a dia-
replaced. Note gnostic device by a qualified work-
▶ For idle times of over a month, re- Damage to the on-board electrical shop.
move the batteries. system batteries caused by receiving ● Use batteries of the same age.
current directly
▶ Dry the batteries and store them Do not combine old and new batter-
at temperatures between 0 °C and Connecting consumers directly to the ies.
30 °C. battery poles causes the battery sensors
to make an incorrect determination. This If the vehicle is equipped with an AGM
▶ Keep the battery voltage constant at battery (fleece battery), observe the fol-
causes uncontrolled battery discharge,
12.6 V. lowing notes:
and both on-board electrical system
Charge the battery when the no‐load batteries may be discharged. ● The batteries are maintenance‐free.
voltage is less than 12.6°V. This ensures ● They do not need topping up with
that the vehicle can always be started.
▶ Do not connect consumers directly distilled water.
to the battery terminals.
If you park up your vehicle for longer than Battery care
three weeks, observe the notes on park- Avoid the battery becoming fully dis-
ing up the vehicle ( → Page 412). charged. This can significantly reduce the
operating life of the battery. Note
When storing batteries, comply with all
Long battery service life can be achieved Battery discharge due to leakage
safety regulations, such as operating in-
by keeping the batteries adequately currents
structions, regulations concerning hazard-
charged. Dirty battery terminals and battery sur-
ous materials, environmental protection
faces cause leakage currents. This can
lead to the battery discharging.

Maintenance
▶ Keep the battery terminals and bat- Observe the following points on battery ● charging management for the altern-
tery surfaces clean and dry. care: ator
● Lightly grease the undersides of the ● the dipped beam (when the vehicle
Note battery terminals with acid‐resistant has not been started)
Damage to the battery housing due to grease. ● the vehicle (after 15 minutes if no
improper cleaning ● Only use commercially‐available diagnostic device is connected)
cleaning agents to clean the battery
If you use cleaning agents that contain ▶ Press the hazard warning lights
fuel, they will attack the battery housing. housing.
switch, the headlamp flasher, and
▶ Do not use cleaning agents that turn signal indicator simultaneously
Activating transport mode for at least three seconds within three
contain fuel.
Activate/deactivate seconds of switching the vehicle on.
Note ▶ To activate: Move the turn signal
Transport mode includes a deactivation indicator down.
Damage to the battery due to self- function for various electrical consumers
discharge when the vehicle is switched off, which
▶ To deactivate: Move the turn signal
indicator up.
If dirt penetrates the battery cell, the protects the batteries from discharging
self-discharge rate of the battery is in- when vehicles are parked up for longer Active transport mode will be shown as
creased and the battery can be dam- periods of time. a display message when the vehicle is
aged. In transport mode, all functions which are switched on again.
▶ Only clean the battery with the cell also deactivated in energy‐saving mode
caps screwed in. are deactivated. Note
The use of transport mode is stored in
Additionally, the following functions are
the vehicle along with the kilometre
deactivated in transport mode:
reading and the time of activation/de-
● the work lamps
activation.
● the cargo liftgate

Maintenance
Checking and charging the battery ▶ Always thaw a frozen battery before For new batteries, the charging current
charging it or providing starting must not exceed 10 % of the battery capa-
Checking the battery charge level assistance. city. A higher charging current can dam-
If the vehicle is used predominantly for age the battery.
If the warning and indicator lamps do
driving short distances or is parked up for not light up in the instrument cluster at Charge the batteries at an ambient tem-
a longer period of time, check the battery temperatures around or below freezing, perature over 0°C. The optimum ambient
charge level more often. it is highly probable that the discharged temperature is between 10 °C and 25 °C.
▶ Disconnect the batteries. battery has frozen. In this case, do not ▶ Remove the batteries.
▶ Measure the no-load voltage of the provide starting assistance or charge the ▶ Unscrew the battery cell caps.
battery. battery. ▶ Check the battery fluid level.
▶ If the no-load voltage of the battery is The service life of a battery that has been ▶ Charge the batteries separately.
over 12.6 V, reconnect the battery. thawed may be dramatically shortened. ▶ Connect and switch on the charger.
▶ If the no-load voltage of the battery The starting characteristics may be im- See the charger's operating instruc-
is under 12.6 V, charge the battery paired, especially at low temperatures. tions.
separately. ▶ When the batteries are charged:
Have a thawed battery checked at a quali-
fied workshop. Switch off the charger and screw the
Charging the battery
cell caps onto the batteries.
Use a commercially available charger
Danger
▶ Fit the batteries.
to charge the battery. Make sure that
Risk of explosion when the battery is the charging voltage is correct. Do not
Note
frozen charge new batteries with rapid charging.
With used batteries, the charging current After charging/replacing the batter-
A discharged battery can freeze at tem-
with rapid charging must not exceed 75% ies, the battery charge level calcu-
peratures near the freezing point.
of the battery capacity. Otherwise, the lated may not be correct. It takes
If you then provide starting assistance approximately three days while
battery will be damaged.
or charge the battery, battery gas may the vehicle is in operation for the
escape. teach‐in process to be completed.

Maintenance
The following display messages are ▶ Top up with distilled/de-ionised wa-

only correct once the teach‐in pro- ter.
cess has been completed: ▶ Refit the cell caps 2.
Energy-saving mode active ▶ Vehicles with batteries fitted one
Bat. charge level too low Start en- above the other: Fit the batteries.
gine ▶ Replace battery box cover.
Checking the battery fluid level
Notes on parking up the vehicle
Tap water reduces the electrical power of When parking up the vehicle,
the batteries. Only top up with distilled or special measures according to the
de‐ionised water. Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Specifications for
Do not use a metal funnel when topping Batteries in the chassis, one beside the other (example: Operating Fluids need to be taken.
semitrailer truck)
up. The metal funnel could cause a short You can obtain further information in the
circuit and the batteries may be damaged. Observe the safety instructions on hand-
notes on operating fluids ( → Page 482)
ling batteries.
or from an authorised Mercedes‐Benz
▶ Check the battery fluid level regularly, Trucks Service Centre.
as required by the vehicle operating
conditions, and at least once a year.
▶ Remove the battery box cover.
▶ Vehicles with batteries fitted one
above the other: Remove the bat-
teries.
▶ Unscrew the cell caps 2.
▶ Check the battery fluid level. The
battery fluid must reach marker bar
1 in each battery cell.

Breakdown assistance
Function of telediagnostics
Function of telediagnostics Note Opening the tool kit compartment

The Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service If you perform telediagnostics and do ▶ Press the release catch 1 on the
24h responder can call up detailed not notify Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Ser- outside in the recess.
technical information on your vehicle vice 24h, the data will be deleted after ◁ The outside flap 2 opens until
using telediagnostics. This allows 72 hours. stopped by the safety hook.
Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service 24h ▶ Press the release catch 1 again on
to identify the malfunction and quickly the outside in the recess.
provide you with assistance. Vehicle tool kits
◁ The outside flap 2 is fully un-
Telediagnostics is possible if you use an Opening/closing the tool kit compart- locked. The tool kit compartment
activated Truck Data Center in conjunc- ment lighting comes on automatically.
tion with the Uptime Fleetboard service ▶ Swing the outside flap 2 up fully
or have a Mercedes‐Benz Uptime service using the handle recess on the right.
contract. ◁ The prop engages.
The following data is transmitted to
Mercedes-Benz Trucks Service 24h: Closing the tool kit compartment
● Data necessary for vehicle identifica- ▶ Raise the outside flap 2 a little using
tion (e.g. vehicle identification num- the handle recess on the right.
ber/VIN) ▶ Push the prop upwards.
● Control unit diagnostic data (e.g. fault ▶ Swing the outside flap 2 down using
memory) the handle recess on the right until
● current vehicle location data you hear it engage in the lock.
● current total distance ◁ The tool kit compartment lighting
The tool kit compartment is at the side goes out automatically.
No data related to the driver, the route, or of the cab above the wheel arch and only
the load are transmitted. accessible from the outside.

Vehicle tool kits
Overview of vehicle tool kits and Vehicle tool kit and emergency equip- Com- Com- Com-
emergency equipment ment Cab
part- part- part-
ment ment ment
A B : ; =
● Spare bulbs ● Towing eye L cab without tool
● Fire extinguisher ● Spare wheel kit compartment
spacer A/B
● Tyre pressure and with SoloStar
gauge ● Vehicle tool kit Concept
● Tyre inflator hose ● Hand crank L cab without tool
A/B
● Support block ● Lamp with 10 m kit compartment
● Second warning cable M‐cab A B
triangle ● Assembly lever
● Pump lever Vehicles with ADR classification: The
● Jack fire extinguisher is located in the
stowage compartment 2 on the driver's
Distribution of the vehicle tool kit and
side. Open stowage compartment
The vehicle tool kit and emergency equip- emergency equipment for L cabs and
( → Page 124).
ment are divided into two packages: M cabs
Com- Com- Com- On vehicles with two fire extinguishers,
part- part- part- the second fire extinguisher may be in the
Cab
ment ment ment following storage locations, depending on
: ; = the vehicle version:
L cab with tool kit
B A ● in the stowage compartment 1 on
compartment
the front passenger's side
L cab with tool kit
compartment and B A
● in the tool kit compartment 3
SoloStar Concept ( → Page 413).
● In a protective box on the exterior of
the rear panel on the driver's side

Vehicle tool kits
On the L cab as car transporter with Using the jack, pump lever and chock Pump lever (two-part)
lowered bunk or seat/bunk combination,
the fire extinguisher and jack are behind Jack
Danger
the driver's seat. You are responsible for
stowing the tools yourself. Note Risk of injury due to incorrect as-
sembly of pump lever
In the S cab, the jack is on the B pillar Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
the jack has a maximum weight of During pumping, the lever can slide out
behind the passenger, and the vehicle of the guide.
tool kit is behind the driver's seat. For all 15.9 kg.
vehicles except those on the French mar- The maximum load capacity of the jack ▶ Make sure that the safety pin of
ket, the fire extinguisher is on the engine can be found on the sticker affixed to the pump lever is engaged in the
tunnel on the rear panel. For vehicles on the jack. specified bore.
the French market, the fire extinguisher
In the event of a fault, please contact a
is on the A pillar on the passenger side.
You are responsible for stowing the tools
yourself. Maintaining the jack
The following emergency equipment is ▶ After use: Clean all moving parts and
found in the stowage space in the driver's grease them again.
door: ▶ Every six months: Fully extend and
● First‐aid kit retract the reciprocating piston.
● Warning triangle Pump lever
● Warning beacon 1 Recess (jack)
● High visibility vest Jacking point (wheel spanner/cab tilting
2
pump)
3 Locking pin

Cab
Recess (for operating the spare wheel winch Removing the chock ▶ Pull the elastic strap over and beyond
4
and jack) retainer 1 and onto wheel chock 2.
5 Hole for locking pin
Clamping sleeve for inserting the hand crank
6
(spare wheel winch) Cab
Tilting the cab
Use the pump lever to operate the follow-
ing devices: Before tilting the cab
● Jack
● Wheel spanner Danger
● Spare wheel winch The storage location of the chocks may
Risk of injury when tilting the cab
vary depending on the vehicle version and
● Cab tilting pump The cab may abruptly fall into the end
equipment.
▶ To assemble the pump lever: Align position.
and insert locking pin 3 into hole 5
▶ Pull the elastic strap over retainer 1. There is a risk of injury to persons in the
of both pump lever parts. ▶ Press retainer 1 in the direction of area where the cab is tilted!
◁ Locking pin 3 will engage in the arrow and hold it there.
▶ Pull out wheel chock 2. ▶ Only tilt the cab if there is nobody in
hole 5. the tilting area.
▶ To disassemble the pump lever: ▶ Release retainer 1.
▶ Do not go under the cab area when
Push locking pin 3 and pull apart the the cab is being tilted.
Inserting the chock
pump lever.
▶ Press retainer 1 in the direction of
Danger
the arrow and hold it there.
▶ Insert wheel chock 2 into the brack- Risk of injury due to moving parts
et. Components in the engine compartment
▶ Release retainer 1. can continue to run or start unexpec-
tedly even when the vehicle is switched
off.

Cab
Observe the following before working in the maximum and the compressor
the engine compartment: switches off. Note
▶ Switch off the vehicle. If you need to open a door when
▶ Switch off the vehicle. the cab is tilted, do so carefully and
▶ Never touch the danger zones sur- ▶ When starting the vehicle after tip-
ping, switch on the vehicle but do not slowly until the door is fully open.
rounding moving components, e.g.
the rotation area of the fan. start it. ▶ Make sure the coupling pin of the
▶ Remove jewellery and watches. ▶ Switch off the auxiliary heating front coupling jaw is secure and
( → Page 136). that the coupling jaw is covered
▶ Keep items of clothing and hair
▶ Switch off the refrigerator box ( → Page 452).
away from moving parts.
( → Page 124). ▶ Use chocks to protect the vehicle
against rolling away.
Note Vehicles with ERA ‐GLONASS: If the sys-
Comply with the separate operating tem is active when the cab is tilted, an
instructions for the refrigerator box. automatic emergency call may result.
Do not switch the refrigerator box
Prior to tilting, activate the ERA‐GLONASS
on again for ten minutes after tilting
system's service mode. Information about
back the cab.
activating the service mode can be found
▶ Remove loose objects from the cab. in the "ERA‐GLONASS supplementary
Perform the following before tilting:
▶ Close the interior stowage compart- instructions".
▶ For safety reasons, keep the area in ments and the exterior tool kit com-
front of the cab clear. partment ( → Page 124).
▶ Apply the parking brake. ▶ Close the doors.
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral.
▶ For air-sprung cabs: allow the en-
gine to continue running until the
compressed-air system is filled to

Cab
Tilting the cab forwards (mechanical- ▶ Swing up the flap to the right of the Tilting the cab back into the drive
hydraulic cab tilt system) entrance. position (mechanical-hydraulic cab
▶ Swing the valve lever on the tilting tilt system)
pump into the tilting position 2.
▶ Fit the pump lever to the hexagon Danger
nut 3 on the tilting pump using the Risk of accident and injury if the cab
wheel spanner (vehicle tool kit). is not locked while the vehicle is in
▶ Move the pump lever up and down on motion
the tilting pump until the cab tilts to When the vehicle decelerates, the fol-
the forward end position. lowing risks, in particular, may arise:
◁ The cab will be unlocked auto-
matically. ● The cab may tilt forward.
▶ If there is noticeable resistance when ● You may lose control of the vehicle.
you operate the pump lever, check ● Persons in the cab could be thrown
Cab tilting pump on right (example) that the tilting position 2 has been forwards.
Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilt pump set correctly on valve lever on the
● Persons or objects in the range of
Drive position
tilting pump.
1 movement could be hit.
2 Tilting position
▶ If there is no noticeable resistance
when you operate the pump lever, Ensure the following before every jour-
3 Hexagon nut ney:
have the tilting hydraulics checked at
Do not step on the engine when the cab is a qualified specialist workshop. ▶ The cab is locked.
tilted. ▶ The cab is engaged in the drive po-
sition and the valve lever is in the
▶ Read the notes before tilting the cab.
drive position.
▶ Open the maintenance flap
( → Page 393).
▶ The indicator lamp goes out when

Cab
▶ Swing the valve lever on the tilting Tilting the cab forwards (electro-
pump into the drive position 1. hydraulic cab tilt system)
▶ Fit the pump lever to the hexagon
nut 3 on the tilting pump using the
wheel spanner.
▶ Move the pump lever up and down on
the tilting pump until the cab is tilted
back into the rear end position.
◁ The catch will engage audibly and
the cab will lock automatically.
▶ Swing the flap to the right of the en-
trance down until you hear it engage. Electro-hydraulic cab tilting pump
▶ Check whether the indicator lamp 1 Valve lever in drive position
º in the instrument cluster goes ▶ Read the notes before tilting the cab. 2 Valve lever in tilting position
out after you start the vehicle. ▶ Open the maintenance flap 3 Button
▶ If the indicator lamp º does not ( → Page 393).
go out, repeat the process and tilt the ▶ Press the button C. Do not step on the engine when the cab is
cab back again. tilted.
◁ The indicator lamp on the button
C lights up. The cab tilting ▶ Swing up the flap to the right of the
pump will be switched on. entrance.
▶ Check the direction of rotation of the
valve lever on the instruction sticker
in the entrance.
▶ Swing the valve lever on the cab tilt-
ing pump into the tilting position 2.

Cab
▶ Press and hold the 3 button until the ▶ The cab is locked. Problems when tilting the cab
cab has tilted into the forward end ▶ The cab is engaged in the drive po-
position. sition and the valve lever is in the Mechanical-hydraulic cab tilt system
◁ The cab has reached the forward drive position. The cab cannot be tilted.
end position when the noise of ▶ The indicator lamp goes out when
the pump becomes louder. Possible causes:
● The valve lever of the mechanical‐
Tilting the cab back into the drive ▶ Swing the valve lever on the cab tilt- hydraulic cab tilting pump is in the
position (electro-hydraulic cab tilt ing pump into the drive position 1. "Drive position" valve lever position.
system) ▶ Press and hold the 3 button until ● The tilting hydraulics are leaking or
the cab is tilted back into the rear end have failed.
Danger position.
▶ Turn the valve lever on the
Risk of accident and injury if the cab ◁ The cab will lock automatically. mechanical-hydraulic cab tilting pump
is not locked while the vehicle is in ▶ Swing the flap to the right of the en- to the "Tilting" valve lever position
motion trance down until you hear it engage. ( → Page 416).
When the vehicle decelerates, the fol- ▶ In the cab, press the lower section of ▶ Have the tilting hydraulics repaired at
lowing risks, in particular, may arise: the C button. a qualified specialist workshop.
● The cab may tilt forward. ◁ The indicator lamp on the button
C will go out.
● You may lose control of the vehicle. Electro-hydraulic cab tilt system
▶ Check whether the indicator lamp
● Persons in the cab could be thrown º on the instrument cluster goes The cab cannot be tilted.
forwards. out after you start the vehicle. Possible causes:
● Persons or objects in the range of ▶ If the indicator lamp º does not ● The cab tilt system is not switched
movement could be hit. go out, repeat the process and tilt the on.
cab back again. ● The fuse for the cab tilting pump has
Ensure the following before every jour-
ney: blown.

Engine
● The tilting hydraulics are leaking or ▶ Never touch the danger zones sur-
have failed. rounding moving components, e.g.
the rotation area of the fan.
▶ Press button C ( → Page 416) .
◁ The indicator lamp on the button ▶ Remove jewellery and watches.
C will light up. ▶ Keep items of clothing and hair
away from moving parts.
▶ Replace the fuse for the cab tilting
pump in module A1 on the main fuse
carrier ( → Page 439). Danger
▶ Have the tilting hydraulics repaired at Risk of burns from hot components in
a qualified specialist workshop. the engine compartment
Certain parts of the engine compartment
may be very hot.
Engine ▶ Tilt the cab forward ( → Page 416).
▶ Allow the engine to cool down and
Starting or switching off the vehicle only touch the components de- Start the vehicle
with the cab tilted scribed in the following.
▶ Press the external engine start/stop
Danger When working on public roads, observe button 1 until the vehicle starts.
the road and traffic conditions and secure
Risk of injury due to moving parts Starting the vehicle and increasing
the area where the vehicle is parked.
Components in the engine compartment the engine speed
can continue to run or start unexpec-
tedly even when the vehicle is switched
▶ Keep the external engine start/stop
1 pressed until the vehicle starts
off.
and the desired engine speed has
Observe the following before working in been reached.
the engine compartment: ◁ After approximately three
▶ Switch off the vehicle. seconds, the engine speed

Engine
increases. After external engine ▶ Ensure sufficient ventilation.

start/stop 1 has been released, ▶ Do not lean over a battery.
the engine will continue to run at
the speed currently set. Note
The engine speed can be increased up to Damage to the starter due to an ex-
the limiting speed. cessive number of starting proced-
ures
Switching off the vehicle If you overload the starter with too many ▶ Unscrew the fasteners 1.
▶ Press the external engine start/stop starting procedures, it may be damaged.
▶ Slide the cap 3 to one side and
1 again. ▶ Do not bleed the fuel system with remove the cover 2.
▶ Tilt the cab back into the drive posi- multiple starting procedures.
tion.
Bleeding the fuel system without the
fuel prefilter (OM 460)
Draining and bleeding the fuel sys-
tem ▶ Apply the parking brake.
Danger ▶ Shift the transmission to neutral.
Risk of explosion due to an explosive ▶ Tilt the cab forward ( → Page 416).
mixture of gas ▶ Unscrew the fuel tank fuel filler cap. If fuel pressure has been established at
An explosive mixture of gas may escape the main filter with the hand pump 1,
from the battery during the charging the vehicle must be started within about
process and when providing starting five seconds. Otherwise the fuel pressure
assistance. drops and the process must be repeated.
▶ Avoid fire, naked flames, sparks, and
smoking.

Engine
▶ Keep pressing the hand pump 1 at

the control unit 2 (about 100 times)
until the overflow valve audibly opens.
▶ Within about five seconds, press
the external engine start/stop
( → Page 421) and start the vehicle.
▶ If the vehicle starts up: Leave the
engine running at a higher engine
speed.
▶ If the vehicle does not start: Repeat
the procedure.
▶ Fit the cover.
▶ Tilt the cab back into the drive posi- ▶ Unscrew screws 1. If fuel pressure has been established at
tion ( → Page 416). ▶ Remove the cover 2. the main filter with the hand pump 3,
▶ Screw on the fuel tank fuel filler cap. the vehicle must be started within about
five seconds. Otherwise the fuel pressure
Bleeding the fuel system without the drops and the process must be repeated.
fuel prefilter (OM 470/471/473) ▶ Press the handle of the hand pump
▶ Apply the parking brake. 3 on the main filter until a notice-
▶ Switch on the vehicle. able resistance can be felt.
▶ Shift the transmission to neutral. ▶ Within about five seconds, press
▶ Tilt the cab forward ( → Page 416). the external engine start/stop
▶ Unscrew the fuel tank fuel filler cap. ( → Page 421) and start the vehicle.
▶ If the vehicle starts up: Leave the
engine running at a higher engine
speed.

Engine
▶ If the vehicle does not start: Repeat Bleeding the fuel system with the Draining the fuel prefilter (with hand
the procedure. fuel prefilter pump)
▶ Fit the cover 2.
If water has separated in the inspection
▶ Tilt the cab back into the drive posi- Note glass 4, drain the fuel prefilter 2 before
tion ( → Page 416). Environmental pollution due to dis- bleeding.
▶ Screw on the fuel tank fuel filler cap. posal in an environmentally irre-
Regularly drain the fuel prefilter 2.
Bleeding the fuel system without the sponsible manner
To prevent damage: ▶ Place a collecting pan under the drain
fuel prefilter (OM 936) screw 3.
▶ Start the vehicle but do not depress ▶ Dispose of the water/fuel mixture ▶ Unscrew the drain screw 3.
in an environmentally responsible
the accelerator pedal while doing so.
manner.
▶ Operate hand pump 1 and collect
the water/fuel mixture.
Note ▶ Close the drain screw 3.
The starting procedure will be auto-
matically interrupted after about Bleeding the fuel prefilter (with hand
60 seconds. pump)
▶ If the vehicle starts, depress the ac- ▶ Unscrew the fuel tank fuel filler cap.
celerator pedal several times. ▶ Place a collecting pan underneath the
◁ The fuel system bleeds com- fuel prefilter 2.
pletely. ▶ Unscrew the bleed screw 5.
▶ If the vehicle does not start, repeat ▶ Press the hand pump 1 repeatedly
the procedure. until the fuel comes out free of
bubbles at the bleed screw 5.
Fuel prefilter (example)
▶ Tighten the bleed screw 5.

Engine
cedures, take a break of about three

Note minutes. Note
If there was no fuel in the fuel tank, ▶ If the vehicle starts, depress the ac- Engine damage due to delayed drain-
press the hand pump 1 again until celerator pedal several times. age of the fuel filter
a noticeable resistance can be felt. ◁ The fuel system bleeds com- If the amount of water in the fuel is
For vehicles with the OM 460/470/ pletely. too high, it can lead to engine damage.
471/473 engine, also bleed at the ▶ Vehicles with OM°936: If the vehicle When the water separator is full, the in-
main filter with the hand pump. does not start, repeat the procedure. strument cluster shows a corresponding
▶ Screw on the fuel tank fuel filler cap. display message.
▶ Start the vehicle but do not depress Draining the fuel filter with water
▶ Drain the fuel filter immediately.
the accelerator pedal while doing so. separator on the engine (OM 470/
471/473)
Note
Note Environmental pollution due to dis-
Danger
The starting procedure is automat- posal in an environmentally irre-
ically interrupted for the following Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
sponsible manner
vehicles: Fuels are highly flammable.
To prevent damage:
OM 936 engine after about ▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and ▶ Dispose of the water/fuel mixture
60 seconds a formation of sparks must be
in an environmentally responsible
OM 470/471/473 engines after avoided.
manner.
about 40 seconds ▶ Switch off the vehicle and the sta-
▶ For vehicles with the OM 460 engine, tionary heater before working on the
the starting procedure must be inter- fuel system.
rupted after 20 seconds and, if ne- ▶ Always wear protective gloves.
cessary, repeated after approximately
one minute. After three starting pro-

Engine
▶ Open drain screw 1 until the wa- Open the upper and lower air regulation
ter/fuel mixture flows out of drain system and lock them before continuing
hose. to drive. Have the air regulation system
▶ Drain off the water/fuel mixture until repaired at a qualified specialist workshop
pure fuel escapes (approx. 0.5 litre). as quickly as possible.
▶ Close the drain screw 1.
Upper air regulation system
▶ Before starting the vehicle, bleed the
fuel system.
▶ Screw on the fuel tank fuel filler cap.
▶ Dispose of the collected water/fuel
mixture in an environmentally friendly
manner, e.g. at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Note
Have this maintenance work carried out
at a qualified workshop. Locking the air regulation system
The air regulation system controls the
▶ Park the vehicle in a safe location and air supply to the radiator. When the fins
secure it against rolling away. are open, a lot of air flows through the
▶ Switch off the auxiliary heating. radiator and the coolant is cooled to the
Actros example illustration
▶ Switch off the vehicle. maximum. When the fins are closed, less Upper air regulation system
▶ Tilt the cab forward ( → Page 416). of air flows through the radiator and the 1 Step
▶ Unscrew the fuel tank fuel filler cap. coolant heats up faster. 1 Unlocked
▶ Place a suitable collecting pan under If the air regulation system is malfunction- 2 Locked
the drain screw 1. ing and this is not due to foreign bodies/
dirt, you will have to manually open and ▶ Opening and locking: Stop the
lock the affected air regulation system. vehicle and apply the parking brake.

Engine
▶ Switch off the vehicle. ▶ Turn the locking screw 3 using the The vehicle does not start.
▶ Fold the step 1 next to the left-hand torx key (vehicle tool kit) by approx-
headlamp down. imately ¼ turn. The locking lever is Possible causes:
▶ To open the fins of the upper air regu- unscrewed and locks the lower air ● The hydraulic platform is switched on.
lation system, carefully fold one of the regulation system. The grey display message appears on
middle fins down. the instrument cluster with the s
symbol and Starter inhibitor active.
▶ Turn the lock of the upper air regula- Note
tion system clockwise to position 2. Turn the locking screw ¼ turn on ● There is a malfunction in the engine
both sides of the lower air regulation electronics.
Lower air regulation system system. ● The vehicle was parked in gear, for
example, the supply pressure in the
transmission/clutch circuit was ex-
Rectifying problems starting the en- hausted by operating the battery dis-
gine connect switch. For safety reasons,
The vehicle will not start at low out- starting the vehicle is prevented when
side temperatures. a gear is engaged.
Possible cause: ▶ Switch off the cargo liftgate, see the

separate operating instructions.
● The flow characteristics of the diesel
fuel are insufficient due to paraffin ▶ Switch off the vehicle before the next
separation. starting attempt.
▶ Fill up the compressed-air system us-
▶ Warm the entire fuel system, e.g. by ing an external source of compressed
▶ Opening and locking: To open the parking the vehicle in a heated area. air.
fins 2 of the lower air regulation sys- ▶ If the problem persists, have the ◁ The transmission control can
tem, carefully fold one of the middle cause rectified at a qualified special- reopen the coupling and shift
fins up. ist workshop.

Flat tyre
the transmission into neutral automatically readjusted or manu-

position. Danger ally raised or lowered.
▶ Repeat the starting attempt. Risk of injury due to the vehicle tip-
ping over Danger
On uphill and downhill slopes, the jack Risk of injury due to the use of a
Flat tyre may tip over with the vehicle raised. mount when changing a wheel
Preparing for a wheel change ▶ Never change wheels on uphill or If, when changing the outer wheel on
downhill slopes. twin tyres, you use a mount for driving
Danger ▶ Consult a qualified specialist work- with the inner wheel, the inner wheel
Risk of injury through incorrect posi- shop. will be under load. It will then not be
tioning of the jack possible to correctly press and tighten
If you do not position the jack correctly Danger the wheel against its contact surface.
at the appropriate jacking point of the As a result, you can lose a wheel while
Risk of injury due to the jack tipping
vehicle, the jack could tip with the driving.
over
vehicle raised.
If you park a vehicle with air suspension, ▶ Always use the jack when changing
▶ Only position the jack at the appro- the air suspension can remain active a wheel.
priate jacking point on the vehicle. for up to an hour, even if the vehicle is
The base of the jack must be posi- switched off. If you then raise the vehicle Danger
tioned vertically under the jacking using the jack, the air suspension will
point of the vehicle. attempt to even out the vehicle level. Risk of accident due to losing a wheel
Oiled, greased, or damaged wheel nut
The jack can tip over. or wheel bolt threads and conical spring
▶ Before raising the vehicle, press washers can cause the wheel nuts to
the Service button on the remote come loose.
control for the air suspension. This ▶ Never oil or grease the threads or
prevents the vehicle level from being conical spring washers.

Flat tyre
▶ If a thread or conical spring wash- ▶ Use the jack to raise the vehicle. Make sure that the jack is correctly
er is damaged, consult a qualified positioned on the jacking point before
Observe the following when changing a
specialist workshop as soon as pos- raising the vehicle.
wheel on the vehicle:
sible. ● The jack support point may differ on
● Only use wheel nuts that are ap-
▶ Have damaged wheel nuts, wheel
proved for the vehicle.
special bodies. Observe the body
bolts and conical spring washers manufacturer's operating instruc-
● The wheel nuts for steel and
replaced. tions.
light‐alloy wheels are different.
▶ Do not continue driving. ● Secure the vehicle before raising it
● The wheel nuts for light‐alloy wheels
to prevent it from rolling away, for
on the front and rear axles are differ-
Danger example, by applying the parking
ent.
Risk of injury when loosening a wheel brake and/or using chocks. Do not
● Wheels with a tyre pressure sensor release the parking brake while the
If you loosen a wheel which sits on the are furnished with a red ring. vehicle is raised.
wheel bolts under tension, it may drop
down or tip over. Observe the following notes when raising ● The surface on which the jack is
the vehicle: standing must be firm and level. The
▶ Only remove the last three wheel ● Make sure that the maximum load jack must be placed on an underlay if
nuts after making sure that the capacity for the jack is not exceeded. the ground surface is not firm.
wheel sits on the wheel bolts The maximum load capacity of the ● Make sure that the distance between
without tension. jack is stated on the adhesive label the underside of the wheel and the
affixed to the jack. ground does not exceed 30 mm. The
Note ● The jack is designed only to raise the vehicle could otherwise slip off the
Damage to the chassis caused by vehicle for a short time, e.g. while a jack or tip over.
raising the vehicle incorrectly wheel is being changed. It is not suit- ● Do not change a wheel on an uphill
For vehicles with a loading crane or able for raising the vehicle in order to or downhill slope. The vehicle could
cargo liftgate, do not raise the vehicle perform work under the vehicle. otherwise slip off the jack.
with the hydraulic support device. Other- ● Only position the jack at the appro-
wise, the chassis could be damaged. priate jacking point on the vehicle.

Flat tyre
● Do not place your hands or feet under ● 365/50 R 22.5 Removing the spare wheel
the raised vehicle. ● 375/50 R 22.5
● Do not lie under the raised vehicle. ● 385/55 R 22.5
● Make sure that nobody is in the ● 385/65 R 22.5
vehicle when it is raised.
Otherwise, the wheel or the spare wheel
● Do not start the vehicle when it is
holder could be damaged.
raised, and avoid otherwise jolting or
shaking it. The vehicle could other-
wise slip off the jack.
▶ Park the vehicle on a firm and level
surface.
▶ Use chocks to protect the vehicle
Example: spare wheel holder on the chassis
Spacer (from the vehicle tool kit) ▶ If necessary, remove the side trim or
Note Before securing the wheel to the spare side underride guard.
For further information on tyre pres-
wheel holder: ▶ Assemble the hand crank and
sure, see the "Wheels and tyres" section ▶ Guide the retaining plate with the the pump lever (vehicle tool kit)
( → Page 461). fastening bolts though the centre of ( → Page 415).
the wheel rim. ▶ Fit the pump lever and the hand crank
Spare wheel ▶ From the other side of the wheel, on spare wheel winch 1. Make sure
screw the three spacers from the that the clamping sleeve on spare
Always use spacers to secure wheels of
vehicle tool kit onto the fastening wheel winch 1 engages in the re-
the following sizes to the spare wheel
bolts. cesses on the pump lever.
holder:
● 355/50 R 22.5
▶ Turn spare wheel winch 1 until cable
2 is taut.

Flat tyre
▶ Unscrew nuts 3 from the fastening Steel-sprung front axle

bolts. Note
▶ Lower the spare wheel using spare Note that the distance covered with the
wheel winch 1 and completely un- temporary spare wheel holder 1 must
wind cable 2. not exceed 2500 km.
▶ Pull the spare wheel out to the side or
to the rear. Changing a wheel
▶ Remove the retaining plate with the
fastening bolts though the centre of Positioning the jack
the wheel rim. ▶ Flat tyre, left: Turn the steering
Spray nuts 3 regularly with wheel to the left as far it will go.
rust‐penetrating oil and remove rust and or
dirt.
▶ Flat tyre, right: Turn the steering
wheel to the right as far it will go.
▶ Position the jack under the jack sup-
port point beneath the spring seat
Temporary spare wheel holder directly in front of the front axle.
Note
Only use the support block from the
vehicle tool kit as a jack support.
Example

Flat tyre
Air-sprung front axle All-wheel drive front axle Steel-sprung rear axle
▶ Position the jack beneath the jack ▶ Position the jack under the jack sup- ▶ Position the jack under the jack sup-
support point on the air suspension port point beneath the front axle. port point on the axle tube.
support directly in front of the front
axle.

Flat tyre
Air-sprung rear axle Air-sprung leading axle Air-sprung trailing axle
▶ Position the jack under the axle tube,

between the mounting brackets.
▶ Position the jack under the jack sup- ▶ Position the jack under the jack sup-
port point on the air suspension support point on the air suspension sup-
port. port.

Flat tyre
Steered trailing axle Removing a wheel ▶ Remove wheel nut cover 1.

▶ Remove the remaining wheel nuts.
▶ Remove the wheel.
▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Unscrew the
wheel nuts of the inner wheel on the
connecting flange and remove the
connecting flange.
▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Remove
inner wheel.
Wheel nuts
Fitting a wheel
1 Loosen
2 Tighten Note
▶ Position the jack so that the jack ▶ Using the wheel spanner, loosen the Damage to the wheel nuts or wheel
plunger is centrally located under the wheel nut covers 1 and remove bolts due to the use of an impact
axle carrier. them. wrench
If you use an impact wrench to tighten
the wheel nuts or wheel bolts, you may
damage them.
▶ Do not use an impact wrench to
tighten the wheel nuts or wheel
bolts.
▶ Unscrew the wheel nuts that secure

wheel nut cover 1.

Flat tyre
Fitting a steel wheel Fitting a light-alloy wheel

▶ Vehicles with single tyres: Fit the
wheel in place and screw on two to
three wheel nuts.
▶ Vehicles with single tyres: Screw on
the remaining wheel nuts with the
wheel nut cover.
Wheel nuts ▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Fit both the
1
wheels and screw on all wheel nuts. Assembly sleeve for twin tyres (vehicles with light-alloy
For single tyres with light‐alloy wheels
2
▶ Tighten the wheel nuts in a crosswise wheels)
For twin tyres with light‐alloy wheels
pattern, observing the tightening ▶ Vehicles with single tyres: Fit the
3 Wheel nut identification for light‐alloy wheels torque while doing so ( → Page 493). wheel in place and screw on two to
4 With pressure plate (hub centring) for steel ▶ Fit the wheel nut covers, observing three wheel nuts.
wheels
the tightening torque while doing so ▶ Vehicles with single tyres: Screw on
5 With conical spring washer for steel wheels ( → Page 493). the remaining wheel nuts with the
▶ Check the tyre pressure wheel nut cover.
Before fitting a wheel ▶
( → Page 461). Vehicles with twin tyres: Place the
▶ Remove any rust and dirt from the ▶ The wheel nuts must be retightened assembly sleeve (vehicle tool kit) on
contact areas of the wheel hub, disc after driving 50 km. the wheel bolt before fitting the inner
wheel and wheel nuts. wheel.
▶ Lightly oil the friction contact sur- ▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Fit both the
faces between the pressure plate and wheels and screw on two or three
the wheel nut. wheel nuts.
▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Pull off the
mounting sleeve.

Flat tyre
▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Screw on the ▶ Check that the flange is properly Retightening the wheel nuts
remaining wheel nuts. centred. The wheel studs must be
▶ Tighten the wheel nuts in a crosswise in the centre of the bores in the con- Danger
pattern, observing the tightening necting flange.
Risk of accident due to incorrect
torque while doing so ( → Page 493). ▶ Screw on the remaining wheel nuts
tightening torque
▶ Fit the wheel nut covers, observing with the conical spring washers.
The wheels may come loose if the wheel
the tightening torque while doing so ▶ Tighten the wheel nuts in a crosswise
bolts or wheel nuts are not tightened to
( → Page 493). pattern, observing the tightening
the prescribed torque.
▶ Check the tyre pressure torque while doing so ( → Page 493).
( → Page 461). ▶ Fit the outer wheel and screw on ▶ Ensure that the wheel bolts or wheel
▶ The wheel nuts must be retightened two or three wheel nuts with conical nuts are tightened to the prescribed
after driving 50 km. spring washers. tightening torque.
▶ Check the wheel centring. The wheel ▶ If necessary, consult a qualified
Fitting twin tyres 14.00 R 20 studs must be located in the centres specialist workshop and do not
▶ Before fitting the inner tyre, check of the bores in the disk wheels. move the vehicle.
that all of the conical spring washers ▶ Screw on the remaining wheel nuts ▶ Observe the instructions and
are seated properly on the wheel with the conical spring washers. safety instructions on "Changing
studs. The round side of the conical ▶ Tighten the wheel nuts in a crosswise a wheel in the event of a flat tyre"
spring washers must face the outside. pattern, observing the tightening ( → Page 428).
▶ Fit the inner wheel. torque while doing so ( → Page 493). ▶ Observe the wheel nut tightening
▶ Check the wheel centring. The wheel ▶ Check the tyre pressure torques ( → Page 493).
studs must be located in the centres ( → Page 461). ▶ Have all wheels retightened after
of the bores in the disk wheels. ▶ Retighten the wheel nuts on the inner driving 50 km.
▶ Fit the connecting flange in place and wheel after driving 50 km, as well ▶ When using new or newly-painted
screw on two to three wheel nuts with as the wheel nuts of the outer wheel wheel rims, have the tightening
conical spring washers. after driving a further 50 km. torque of the wheel nuts checked

Flat tyre
again after driving approximately ▶ Remove the remaining wheel nuts. Removing and fitting a Trilex® rim
1000 to 5000 km. ▶ Remove the wheel. with tyre
▶ Retighten the wheel nuts in a cross-
wise pattern. Fitting a Trilex® wheel Removing a Trilex® rim with tyre
On light‐alloy wheels, the wheel nuts Before you fit the wheel, remove any rust
and dirt from the contact areas on the Danger
are not flush with the wheel studs when
following parts: Risk of injury due to tensioned clamp-
tightened.
● wheel hub ing plates
● disc wheel The clamping plates on the Trilex® rims
Removing and fitting a Trilex® wheel ● Wheel nuts are highly tensioned.
Removing a Trilex® wheel If you remove the nuts completely, the
▶ Place the wheel in position.
clamping plates may suddenly pop out of
▶ Screw on two opposing wheel nuts. the rim.
▶ Screw on the remaining wheel nuts
with the wheel nut cover 1. ▶ Once all the clamping plates are no
▶ Tighten the wheel nuts in a clock- longer under tension, unscrew and
wise pattern and in several stages, remove the nuts on the clamping
observing the tightening torque while plates.
doing so ( → Page 493). ▶ Unscrew the wheel nuts that secure
▶ The wheel nuts must be retightened wheel nut cover 1.
after 10 km and again after a further ▶ Remove wheel nut cover 1.
50 km.
▶ Unscrew the wheel nuts that secure

wheel nut cover 1.
▶ Remove wheel nut cover 1.

Flat tyre
Fitting a Trilex® rim with tyre
Danger
Risk of fire and accident due to ab-
raded tyre valves
Tyre valves in contact with the wheel
spider can be abraded, resulting in a loss
of tyre pressure.
This can
● damage or destroy the tyres.
Example: single tyres Example: twin tyres ● cause tyres to overheat and catch fire.
▶ Loosen nuts 2 on the clamping ● jeopardise road and traffic safety.
plates 3.
▶ Guide the tyre valve or valve exten-
▶ Position the assembly lever (from the
sion through the centre of the valve
vehicle tool kit) on recess 4 and
recess.
release clamping plates 3 with a
sharp pull.
Note
▶ Once all the clamping plates have
been loosened, remove nuts 2 on Damage to the wheel due to imbal-
clamping plates 3. ance
▶ Remove clamping plates 3. Tightening the nuts of the clamping
plates in a crosswise pattern would
▶ Remove the Trilex® rim with tyre.
stress the rim and cause the wheel to
become imbalanced.
▶ Tighten the nuts clockwise.

Electrical fuses
▶ Tighten the nuts to the specified ▶ Tighten nuts 2 slightly and make Electrical fuses
torque in several stages. sure that the rim is not under tension.
▶ Tighten nuts 2 on clamping plates Remove the main fuse carrier cover
Before you fit the wheel, remove any rust 3 in a clockwise direction in Notes
and dirt from the contact areas on the several stages, observing the
following parts: tightening torque whilst doing so Danger
● spoke heads ( → Page 493).
Risk of accident and injury caused by
● disc wheel ▶ Vehicles with single tyres: Screw overloaded lines
● nuts wheel nut cover 1 to the wheel us-
If you manipulate or bypass a faulty fuse
● clamping plates ing the appropriate wheel nuts.
or if you replace it with a fuse with a
▶ Vehicles with single tyres: Position ▶ Vehicles with single tyres: Tighten higher amperage, the electric lines may
the wheel nuts in a clockwise pat- be overloaded.
the Trilex® rim with tyres on the
tern and in several stages, observing
wheel spider. This may result in a fire.
the tightening torque while doing so
▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Position the
( → Page 493).
inner Trilex® rim with tyres on the ▶ Always replace faulty fuses with
wheel spider.
▶ Retighten the wheel nuts and nuts the specified new fuses having the
2 on the clamping plates 3 after correct amperage.
▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Position the
10 km and again after a further
spacer ring so that the valve on the Individual electric circuits are protected
100 km.
inner Trilex® rim fits in the recess. by safety fuses or automatic circuit break-
▶ Vehicles with twin tyres: Position the ers.
outer Trilex® rim with tyres so that Blown fuses or defective automatic circuit
the valve is opposite the valve on the breakers must be replaced with equival-
inner Trilex® rim. ent fuses with the fuse ratings recom-
▶ Position clamping plates 3 on the mended in the fuse assignment diagram.
bolts. Fuses with the same fuse rating are the
same colour.

Electrical fuses
You can obtain further information from Remove the control unit from the
an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks main fuse carrier
Service Centre.
To access the main fuse carrier, the ASAM
The fuse assignment diagram is on the control unit must first be unscrewed and
inside of the main fuse carrier cover. folded to the side.
If the newly inserted fuse also blows,
have the cause traced and rectified at a
qualified specialist workshop. ▶ Remove screws 2 and remove the
▶ If an electric circuit fails, switch off cover 1.
the consumer and the vehicle.
Remove the main fuse carrier cover Fuse assignment diagram
▶ Detach the control unit from hinges
2 and fold to the side.
◁ The main fuse carrier is now ac-
cessible.
Open the fuse box in the cab

Main fuse carrier
Other fuses are located on the side of the 1 Relays in module°A32
fuse box behind the cab.
2 Relays in module°A31
3 Fuses in module°A3
▶ Open fasteners 2 and remove the 4
Fuses, relays, and diodes in the PDM cabin
cover 1. module

Electrical fuses
Relays in module A32 No. Symbol Consumer Sym- Fuse

No. Consumer
bol rating
No. Symbol Consumer Hydraulic auxiliary drive
K6 F (HAD) control unit, termin- F6 e 24–V CB radio (A68) 5A
K1 z Windscreen heater
al 15, load relief relay 12–V CB radio (A68)
K2 z Windscreen heater 5A
D Cargo liftgate pre‐installation
Pre‐installation, additional Cab‐width windscreen
K3 \ Hydraulic auxiliary drive F7 z 25 A
headlight K7 F heater 2.3 m
(HAD) fan
Load relief relay, differential Cab‐width windscreen
K4 _ D Cargo liftgate 30 A
lock and transfer case heater 2.5 m
e Pre‐installation, additional
K8 \ MEILLER pre‐installa-
K5 CB radio with ERA‐GLONASS headlight F8 E 10 A
Å tion
K9 Õ LubeTronic 5Point
K6 Unassigned Hydraulic auxiliary
K10 Q Headlamp cleaning system F9 F drive (HAD) control 10 A
Relays in module A31 unit (A83)
Fuses in module A3 Hydraulic auxiliary
No. Symbol Consumer F10 F 15 A
Sym- Fuse drive (HAD) fan (M25)
K1 \ Work lamps No. Consumer
bol rating F11 t 12 V TCC Touch (A9) 15 A
Transfer case oil cooling Work lamps (E23/ 12 V radio (A9) pre‐
K2 i F1 U 10 A *
system X155/X200) 10 A
installation
12 V radio, terminal 15R F2 À Rotating beacon (S6) 10 A 12 V wireless smart-
*
K3 TCC touch with sound Ö phone connection 10 A
t 24 V sockets (X136/
system F3 L 15 A (A185)
X168/X199/X220)
Yellow position lamp (middle 12 V multimedia box
K4 k 24 V sockets (X136/ F12 Ø 10 A
of the roof) F4 L 15 A (X246)
X168/X199/X220)
K5 * 12 V radio, terminal 58 12 V Android Blackbox
Socket for torch 10 A
F5 V 10 A (A158)
TCC touch with ERA‐ (X149)
GLONASS Illuminated Mercedes
s 10 A
star (S44)

Electrical fuses
Sym- Fuse Sym- Fuse Sym- Fuse

No. Consumer No. Consumer No. Consumer
bol rating bol rating bol rating
Ù 12 V instrument F23 Unassigned Common telematics

F7 ã 10 A
F13 cluster display + head 10 A platform (A150)
Ú unit (A153/A154) Fuses in the PDM cabin module % Tachograph (P1) 10 A
F14 Û 12 V side radar 10 A Sym- Fuse
No. Consumer D Roller sunblind 10 A
12 V stationary air‐ bol rating
Instrument cluster
Ü conditioning system 10 A Exhaust gas aftertreat- F8 = 5A
F1 Ù 10 A (A1)
controller (A147) ment
Performance‐related
ADR England pre‐ Battery disconnect
þ 10 A 0 heavy vehicle fee 5A
F15 ¨ installation (X193/ 5A switch (A33) (LSVA)
X194)
ABS trailer power \ Winter service 5A
Transfer caseoil F2 8 socket, 7‐pin (X103), 10 A
F16 i 10 A
cooling (M24) 5‐pin (X103a) k Position marker lamps 5 A
Cab‐width windscreen 6 Airbag 5A
F17 z 25 A D Cargo liftgate 10 A
heater 2.3 m
F3 Unassigned ! Brake system (A10b) 5A
Cab‐width windscreen
30 A
heater 2.5 m F4 Unassigned 0 Toll Collect 5A
Non‐MB body elec- Transmission control Control and operating
F5 H 10 A ÷ 5A
F18 M trical system (S39/ 20 A (TCM) ‐ (A5) device heating (A12)
S40) Meiller tipper radio
Engine management E 5A
Semitrailer trailing â 10 A
â 20 A (A4), (OM460) ‐ (A4a) control (A82)
axle (S87)
Turbo retarder clutch Å ERA‐GLONASS 5A
F19 ß Video switch (A163) 10 A F6 J 10 A
(A69) Stowage compartment
F9 1 10 A
Headlamp cleaning $ Drive control (A3) 10 A lighting
F20 Q 15 A
system (M16/M17) Roof stowage com-
Hydraulically driven k 10 A
F21 Unassigned F axle (HAD)/CAN 10 A partment lighting
adapter box q Bunk lighting 10 A
F22 Unassigned

Electrical fuses

Remote voltage Front radar sensor \ Subwoofer (B94) 5A
ä 10 A
converter T1/termin- (A15b)
+ 10 A F24 + Voltage converter (T3) 15 A
al 15R for 12 V relay Fuel filter heating
radio F19 B 15 A F25 + Voltage converter (T2) 15 A
frame (R11)
o Refrigerator box 10 A Turbo retarder clutch Sliding sunroof motor
F20 J 20 A F26 æ 15 A
F10 Unassigned (A69) (M12)
Performance‐related Sliding sunroof motor
Fuel filter heating, æ 20 A
F11 B 15 A F21 0 fee for retrofitting 20 A (M12)
engine (R17)
heavy vehicle (LSVA) Auxiliary heating, CAN
F12 Unassigned , 20 A
Pre‐installation per- adapter box
F13 Ã Retarder (A11) 20 A formance‐related F27 L 12/24 Vsockets 15 A
0 20 A
heavy vehicle fee
F14 Unassigned Drive control CPC3
(LSVA) (via interface) F28 $ 20 A
Transmission control (A3), CPC5 (A3a)
F15 H 15 A Trailer socket, 15‐pin
(TCM) ‐ (A5) å 20 A Brake system (EBS) ‐
(X102) F29 ! 20 A
Body manufacturer, (A10b)
F16 6 Trailer socket 13
terminal 30 å 20 A F30 0 Toll Collect 10 A
(15)‐pin (X102a)
Body manufacturer, Performance‐related
F17 C Trailer socket, 15‐pin
terminal D+ å 20 A 0 fee for retrofitting 10 A
add. (X222)
Radiator shutters heavy vehicle (LSVA)
F18 Z 10 A Trailer socket 13
(A54) å 20 A ATA (anti‐theft alarm
(15)‐pin add. (X222a) ¨ 10 A
Front radar sensor system) (A6)
ä 10 A Trailer voltage con-
(A15a) b 20 A
verter % Tachograph (P1) 10 A
Front radar sensor
ä 10 A Electronic air pro- Common telematics
(A15a) F22 K 15 A
cessing unit (A18) platform (A150), Fleet
Front radar sensor F31 ã 10 A
ä 10 A F23 T Cab tilt pump 5A management system,
(A15a) BAT

Electrical fuses

Tyre pressure monitor- Signal acquisition Integrated Predictive
¨ 10 A
ing system, BAT F39 à module (A7), energy 20 A F49 è Powertrain Control 5A
Video radar decision supply (IPPC)
á 10 A
unit, BAT F40 t Radio/navigation (A9) 15 A D Roller sunblind 5A
Display mirror, driver's F41 Unassigned F50 ! Brake system (A10b) 10 A
F32 É 5A
side (A159)
Driver's door module F51 Ã Retarder (A11) 10 A
% Smart Tacho 5A F42 " 20 A
(A16)
Integrated Predictive
Å ERA‐GLONASS 5A Front passenger's è Powertrain Control 10 A
F43 # 20 A
door module (A17) (IPPC)
F33 Unassigned
Unassigned F52 U LubeTronic 10 A
Diagnostics connec-
F34 . 10 A
tion Electrical immobiliser Pre‐installation, trailer
F44 ç 5A ~ 10 A
Instrument cluster control unit (A156) coupling (Q9A)
F35 = 10 A
(A1) F45 % Smart Tacho 5A Video switch A163,
F53 ß 10 A
Heating (A12b)/ terminal 15
y 10 A F46 @ Driver's seat heating 15 A
heating (A12) Pre‐installation, re-
Front passenger's seat I 10 A
_ Amplification relay 10 A @ 15 A versing camera
heating
Steering‐wheel but- Video radar decision
F36 a 10 A F47 ? Cigarette lighter 5A á 10 A
tons (A19) or (A19a) unit
è Socket 15 A Unassigned
Parking brake lever
! 10 A F48 Central gateway (A2) 5A
(A157) F54 + Voltage converter T1 15 A
F37 Unassigned Steering wheel angle Extension module
D 5A F55 c 25 A
sensor (B66) cabin (XMC) (A22)
Transmission control
F38 H 15 A Mirror display, co‐
(TCM) ‐ (A5) È 5A F56 J Blower motor 25 A
driver's side (A160)
F57 è Power socket (X171) 25 A

Electrical fuses
Sym- Fuse Diodes in the PDM cabin module Sym- Fuse

No. Consumer No. Consumer
bol rating bol rating
No. Symbol Consumer
Non‐MB body electric- Electric stationary air‐
F58 M 20 A D1 Â Signal horn F3 25 A
al system (S38) conditioning system
Signal acquisition D2 D Cargo liftgate Electric stationary air‐
F4 25 A
F59 à module (A7), energy 40 A D3 Unassigned conditioning system
supply 2 BAT
D4 Unassigned F5 ALAC 25 A
Signal acquisition
Level/roll control
F60 à module (A7), energy 60 A 25 A
(CLCS) (A26)
supply 1 BAT Fuses in the PDM chassis module
(fuse box in the cab) Additional steering
F6 25 A
Relays in the PDM cabin module axle (ASA) (A34)
No. Symbol Consumer F7 Trailer ABS 25 A

F8 Trailer (X102) (X102a) 25 A
K1 A Terminal 15 relay
Additional trailer
K2 ^ Terminal°D+ relay
socket (X222a) (X222)
K3 O Trailer brake light 12–V trailer voltage
Energy‐saving mode 2 – bi‐ converter (A132)
K4 _
stable relay
K5 A Terminal 15R relay
Screw-in fuses
Plug fuses
A Sym- Fuse
K6 Terminal 15 relay No. Consumer
Sym- Fuse bol rating
No. Consumer
K7 A Terminal 15 relay bol rating
X1 PDM cabin (A8) 150 A
Energy‐saving mode°1 – bi‐ Electronic air pro-
K8 _ F1 15 A Electric stationary air‐
stable relay cessing unit (EAPU) X2 40 A
conditioning system
Electric stationary air‐
F2 25 A Exhaust gas aftertreat-
conditioning system X3 40 A
ment
X4 PDM cabin (A8) 40 A

Information on the compressed-air system
Sym- Fuse ▶ If the fuse wire has melted, replace ▶ Switch the consumers on and check
No. Consumer
bol rating the blown fuse with a spare fuse. that they are functioning correctly.
X5
Pre‐installation, kit-
80 A
▶ Switch the consumers on and check ▶ If the automatic circuit-breaker is
chenette or EE that they are functioning correctly. tripped again, have the electrical sys-
X6 RPS 40 A ▶ If the safety fuse blows again, have tem checked at a qualified specialist
APS 40 A the electrical system checked at a workshop.
X6a APS 3 40 A qualified workshop.
X7 Cab tilt pump 40 A Check and switch on an automatic Information on the compressed-air
X8 Unassigned circuit breaker system
X9 Unassigned
Note
X10 Unassigned
Damage to the compressed-air sys-
X11 Unassigned tem due to contaminated and humid
X12 Bodybuilder 300 A air
X13 PDM cabin (A8) 150 A The compressed air does not pass
X14 Battery with sensor through the compressed-air dryer if the
compressed-air system is filled via the
If an automatic circuit breaker is tripped, following connections:
Checking safety fuses and the auto- pin 3 moves to the OFF position 2. ● connection 28 on the electronic air
matic circuit breaker processing unit
▶ Pull the automatic circuit-breaker out
Checking and replacing a safety fuse of the module. ● the connections on the brake value
▶ Pull the fuse out of the module using ▶ Press pin 3 to ON position 1. sensor beneath the maintenance flap
the pliers and carry out a visual in- ▶ Insert the automatic circuit breaker If the reservoir pressure of the external
spection. again. compressed-air source is below 11 bar,

Information on the compressed-air system
it cannot be guaranteed that all the pres-

sure circuits will be filled.
Only fill pressure circuits with max.
12.5 bar.
Supply pressure that is too high, or con-
taminated and humid air from the ex-
ternal compressed-air source, can dam-
age components of the compressed-air
system.
▶ Fill the compressed‐air system using
a pressure between 11 bar and
12.5 bar. Fill the compressed‐air system via front If the compressed air system is filled via
▶ Fill the compressed‐air system with filler connections 1 on the brake value connection 28 2 on the electronic air
clean and dry air. sensor when the vehicle is switched off. treatment unit, the pressure circuit for the
This does not fill the pressure circuit of air suspension is also filled.
System‐dependent supply pressures can
the air suspension.
be found in the "Technical data" section
( → Page 492). Note
The electronic air treatment unit con-
tains the following components in a
single unit.
Component of the electronic air treatment

unit:
● Pressure regulator
● Compressed‐air dryer

Jump-starting, tow-starting and towing away
● Multicircuit protection valve Jump-starting, tow-starting and tow- The starting characteristics may be im-
● Pressure limiting valve ing away paired, especially at low temperatures.
● Control unit
Performing a jump start
● Electronic parking brake Danger
Check the following points before towing Danger Danger of chemical burns from bat-
away: tery acid
Risk of explosion when the battery is
● The spring brake actuators of Battery acid is caustic.
frozen
the parking brake are released A discharged battery can freeze at tem- ▶ Avoid contact with the skin, eyes, or
( → Page 455). peratures near the freezing point. clothing.
If the compressed‐air supply is insuffi- If you then provide starting assistance ▶ Do not inhale battery gases.
cient, release the spring‐loaded brake or charge the battery, battery gas may ▶ When carrying out maintenance
cylinders manually ( → Page 455). escape. work on the battery, wear acid‐
● Check whether workshop mode of the resistant protective clothing, par-
electronic parking brake is activated ▶ Always thaw a frozen battery before ticularly safety glasses, protective
( → Page 222). charging it or providing starting gloves, and aprons.
assistance.
▶ Do not lean over a battery.
If the warning and indicator lamps do ▶ Keep children away from the bat-
not light up in the instrument cluster at tery.
temperatures around or below freezing, ▶ In case of contact with battery acid,
it is highly probable that the discharged immediately rinse the affected area
battery has frozen. In this case, do not thoroughly with plenty of clear wa-
provide starting assistance or charge the ter and seek medical assistance
battery. promptly.
The service life of a battery that has been ▶ If you get battery acid in your eyes,
thawed may be dramatically shortened. as soon as possible rinse them thor-
oughly with plenty of clean water.

Seek medical attention as soon as the mains plug before giving starting Observe the safety instructions and pro-
possible. assistance. tective measures when handling the bat-
▶ Only accept starting assistance from tery ( → Page 403).
Danger vehicles with a 24 V system. After starting assistance, have the batter-
Risk of explosion due to an explosive ▶ Use jump leads protected from re- ies checked at a qualified workshop.
mixture of gas verse polarity with a cable cross
An explosive mixture of gas may escape section of 35 ‐ 50 mm² and insu- Vehicles without a jump-start con-
from the battery during the charging lated terminal clamps. nection point
process and when providing starting ▶ Empty batteries can freeze if the
assistance. outside temperature falls below
‐10°C. In this case, do not start the
▶ Avoid fire, naked flames, sparks, and vehicle. First, thaw out the battery.
smoking.
▶ Do not connect the negative ter-
▶ Ensure sufficient ventilation. minal clamp of the jump lead to the
▶ Do not lean over a battery. chassis. Vehicle parts may other-
wise be damaged.
Note
Requirements Connecting the jump lead
Damage to the battery or electronic
components due to improper starting ● Make sure that the vehicles are not ▶ Remove the battery box cover
assistance touching. ( → Page 405).
To prevent damage: ● The parking brake is applied. ▶ First connect the positive terminal
● clamp of the jump lead to the positive
▶ Do not use a rapid battery charger All electrical consumers are switched
terminal of the other vehicle's battery
for starting assistance. off.
and then to the positive terminal q
▶ When using a portable charger (bat- ● The vehicle is switched off.
of the starter battery.
teries with a mains adapter), remove
▶ First connect the negative terminal
clamp of the jump lead to the neg-

ative terminal of the other vehicle's Vehicles with a jump-start connec- ▶ First connect the negative terminal
battery and then to the negative ter- tion point clamp of the jump lead to the neg-
minal ± of the starter battery. ative terminal of the other vehicle's
▶ Leave the engine of the assisting battery.
vehicle running at an elevated engine ▶ Slide back the black protective cap
speed. with the other negative terminal
▶ Start the vehicle and leave it running clamp of the jump lead and connect
at idle speed. the negative terminal clamp to the ±
negative terminal.
Disconnecting the jump lead ▶ Leave the engine of the assisting
▶ First disconnect the negative terminal vehicle running at an elevated engine
clamps of the jump lead from the speed.
negative terminals. ▶ Start the vehicle and leave it running
▶ Disconnect the positive terminal at idle speed.
clamps of the jump lead from the pos-
Connecting the jump lead Disconnecting the jump lead
itive terminals.
▶ First connect the positive terminal ▶ First disconnect the negative terminal
clamp of the jump lead to the positive clamps of the jump lead from the
terminal of the other vehicle's bat- negative terminals.
tery. ◁ The black protective cap of the
▶ Slide back the red protective cap with jump-start connection point
the other positive terminal clamp springs back into its original posi-
of the jump lead and connect the tion.
positive terminal clamp to the q ▶ Disconnect the positive terminal
positive terminal. clamps of the jump lead from the pos-
itive terminals.

◁ The red protective cap of the The vehicle may break free.
jump-start connection point Danger
Risk of accident due to lack of
▶ Switch off the vehicle before towing
springs back into its original posi-
with the front axle raised.
tion. compressed-air supply
If the engine is not running, the power
steering system and the compressed-air Note
Notes on tow-starting/towing away supply will not work. They need consid- Damage to the vehicle due to incor-
erably more power for steering. In the rect towing
Danger If the vehicle is not switched on during
event of pressure loss, the spring-loaded
Risk of accident if the Active Brake brake cylinder of the parking brake may towing, the transmission, brakes and air
Assist is activated when towed away, activate and therefore brake the vehicle suspension may be damaged.
or when the vehicle is used as a util- in an uncontrolled manner.
ity vehicle
▶ Remove the drive shafts before
This could cause you to lose control of towing.
If, for example, the Active Brake Assist
is activated while you are using your
the vehicle. ▶ Charge the compressed‐air system
▶ Always use a tow bar. or release the spring‐loaded brake
vehicle as a utility vehicle or you are
cylinder manually.
towing, the vehicle may brake automat- ▶ Always ensure that compressed air
ically. is supplied, e.g. using an external ▶ While towing the vehicle away, con-
source of compressed air. stantly monitor the driving level.
The wheels may lose their grip.
▶ Always deactivate the Active Brake Danger Note
Assist in this or similar situations if Damage to attachments and bodies
Risk of accident when towing away
possible. when towing away
with the vehicle switched on
When towing away with the front axle Attachments and bodies can affect the
raised and the vehicle switched on, the vehicle height and width.
ASR may brake the wheels of the rear
axle in an uncontrolled manner.

If the vehicle is being transported on a switched on and the warning lamp D is ▶ If necessary, charge the compressed-
low loader, the permitted vehicle height not on in the instrument cluster. Tow‐start air system using an external source of
may be exceeded. the vehicle on a straight stretch of road. compressed air ( → Page 446).
▶ Pay attention to the headroom of ▶ If there is insufficient reservoir pres-
structures, e.g. of bridges. Note sure to release the parking brake,
release the spring-loaded brake cylin-
▶ Fold in the wind deflectors when Information on towing away and recover-
ing can be found on the Internet at: ders manually ( → Page 455).
towing away with the rear axle
raised. ▶ Before towing away, agree on a clear
https://www.mercedes-benz- signal with the towing vehicle driver.
Specialist knowledge beyond the scope trucks.com/ Adapt your driving style to the more
of these operating instructions is required You can obtain further information from difficult conditions.
for tow‐starting and towing the vehicle an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
away. Only have your vehicle tow‐started Service Centre. Coupling jaw
or towed away by a professional towing
and recovery company.
Only in exceptional cases, e.g. when leav- Manoeuvring and tow-starting/tow-
ing danger zones, should the vehicle be ing away
tow‐started or towed away with the pro- If the vehicle is being transported on a
peller shaft installed. low loader, the permitted vehicle height
may be exceeded. Pay attention to the
Only tow the vehicle with raised front
headroom of structures, e.g. of bridges.
axles.
Before towing the vehicle away, check
▶ Before towing, activate the
workshop mode of the parking brake
whether workshop mode of the parking
( → Page 222).
brake is activated ( → Page 222).
Vehicles with power steering: Only
tow‐start the vehicle if the vehicle is

▶ Using your thumb, push the safety

spring 3 with retaining pin upwards
to release the coupling pin 4.
▶ Turn the coupling pin 4 90° clock-
wise and pull it out upwards.
▶ Attach the tow bar.
▶ Insert the coupling pin 4 downwards
through the tow bar eyelet and turn it
90° anti-clockwise back to its original
position.
◁ The retaining pin engages aud-
ibly.
Use the front coupling jaw for manoeuv- ▶ Position the coupling pin cover 1
ring, tow‐starting and towing away. and clip it in place.
The coupling pin is prevented from rotat-
ing (e.g. when towing with a steel cable) Front towing eyes
If a towing eye 2 is not included in the
by a safety spring 3 secured with a re-
Danger vehicle tool kit, you can obtain it 2 from
taining pin.
an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
Risk of accident if unapproved towing
▶ Vehicles with a large angle of ap- service centre.
eyes are used
proach: Fold out the folding step.
The towing eyes may break. ▶ Press the area marked with an arrow
▶ Remove the coupling pin cover 1 on the cover 1 in order to open it.
forwards. The vehicle may fall out of the bracket
▶ Grasp the licence plate holder 2 at during towing. The towing eye 2 is screwed into the
the sides and swivel it downwards. front end of the frame head behind the
▶ For safety reasons, only use towing
cover 1. Make sure that the towing eye
eyes that are authorised and ap-
is completely screwed in. If the thread is
proved for raising your vehicle.

dirty, clean it before screwing the towing Rear towing coupling Spring-loaded brake
eye in.
Overview of the arrangement of the
The towing eyes are made from a special
spring-loaded brake cylinders
material with higher strength values. Only
use the original towing eyes.
If the vehicle is raised at the front for
towing away, you need a second towing
eye.
The person towing away the vehicle
should bring one with them, or you
can purchase one at an authorised
Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service Centre.
Vehicles with preinstallation for front-
Use the rear towing coupling for man-
mounted implements: The threaded hole
oeuvring, tow‐starting and towing away.
is not suitable for towing eyes. Do not
use towing eyes for tow‐starting and tow- ▶ Disengage the catch 2 on the coup- The arrangement of spring‐loaded brake
ing away. Use the front coupling jaw for ling pin 1. cylinders 1 on the front and/or rear axle
tow‐starting and towing away the vehicle. ▶ Remove the coupling pin 1. depends on the axle type.
▶ Attach the tow bar. Arrangement of spring-loaded brake
▶ Push the coupling pin 1 down cylinders on front axle(s)
through the eyelet of the tow bar. Axles 1 2
▶ Hook the catch 2 onto the coupling 4x2 x 5, 6
pin 1 again.
4x4 x5
6x2

Axles 1 2 Axles 1 2
6x2 DNA x5 8x4 ENA x x
6x2/2 x 8x4/4 x x
6x2/4 x 8x6/4 x x
6x4 x 5, 6
8x8/4 x x
6x6 x5
8x4 ENA x Manually releasing and moving the

8x4/4 x spring-loaded brake cylinder to the
8x6/4 x5 x
drive position
8x8/4 x5 x Note Spring-loaded brake cylinder with release screw and release
5
Special equipment indicator
Damage to the spring-loaded brake
6
In conjunction with disc brakes
cylinder
Arrangement of spring-loaded brake Using excessive torque when loosening
cylinders on rear axle(s) or tightening the release screw can dam-
age the spring-loaded brake cylinder.
Axles 1 2
4x2 x
▶ Loosen the release screw using a
maximum of 70 Nm.
4x4 x
▶ Tighten the release screw using a
6x2 x x maximum of 35 Nm. Spring-loaded brake cylinder with release screw
6x2/2 x ▶ Do not use an impact wrench to Spring-loaded brake cylinder

6x2/4 x loosen or tighten the release screw. 1 Spring‐loaded brake cylinder
6x4 x x 2 Release screw
6x6 x x 3 Drive position

4 Released position ▶ Charge the brake system until

the shut-off pressure is reached
If there is insufficient supply pressure ( → Page 492).
to release the parking brake, release all ▶ Use chocks to protect the vehicle
spring‐loaded brake cylinders manually in against rolling away.
the event of an emergency. ▶ Release the parking brake manually
The vehicles may be fitted with different ( → Page 222).
types of spring‐loaded brake cylinders ▶ Turn release screw 2 of spring-
depending on the axle, e.g. spring‐loaded loaded brake cylinder 1 clockwise
brake cylinders with a release screw or to the drive position 3.
with a release indicator. ▶ Tighten the release screw 2.
▶ Use chocks to protect the vehicle
▶ To release the spring-loaded brake
cylinder: Turn release screw 2 of
the spring-loaded brake cylinder 1
to the left until it stops in release
position 4.
Moving the spring-loaded brake cylin-

der to the drive position
Make sure to move all spring‐loaded
brake cylinders back into the drive posi-
tion.

Wheels and tyres
Operating and road safety
Operating and road safety A tyre dealer, a qualified specialist work- Notes on replacing tyres and
shop or an authorised Mercedes-Benz retreaded tyres
General notes on wheels and tyres Trucks Service Centre will be able to
Tyres are of particular importance to provide you with further information on Replacing tyres
the operating and road safety of the the following: If you are replacing the standard tyres of
vehicle. Check vehicle tyres regularly ● Tyre load‐bearing capacity (LI, Load your vehicle, use only the tyre and wheel
( → Page 458). Index) rim sizes approved for your vehicle model.
● Tyre speed rating A tyre dealer, a qualified specialist work-
Tyre load-bearing capacity, tyre
● Tyre age shop or an authorised Mercedes‐Benz
speed rating and tyre types
● Causes and consequences of tyre Trucks Service Centre will be able to
wear provide you with further information. After
Danger
● Measures to be taken in the event of replacing your tyres, carry with you the
Risk of injury through exceeding the tyre damage vehicle's type approval for the new tyre
specified tyre load-bearing capacity
● Types of tyre for specific regions, and wheel disk size as well as the man-
or the permissible speed rating
areas of operation or conditions of ufacturer's certificate showing that the
Exceeding the specified tyre vehicle use tyres may be used on the vehicle. Observe
load-bearing capacity may lead to tyre
● Interchangeability of tyres the legal requirements for the country
damage and the tyres bursting. you are currently in. An authorised Mer-
In particular, observe the permissible tyre
▶ Therefore, only use tyre types and cedes‐Benz Trucks Service Centre can
specifications for the country you are cur-
sizes approved for your vehicle mod- provide you with information on obtaining
rently in. These requirements may stipu-
el. a manufacturer's certificate.
late a specific tyre type for your vehicle.
▶ Observe the tyre load‐bearing capa- In addition, the use of specific tyre types After replacing your tyres, it may be ne-
city rating and speed rating required may be advisable for certain regions and cessary for adjustments to be made to
for your vehicle. areas of operation. the control units. If necessary, have these
adjustments carried out at a qualified spe-
cialist workshop.

Wheels and tyres
Notes on sound changes or undesired handling characteristics
Vehicles with power steering: If you mounting instructions and the notes on indicate that the wheels or tyres are dam-
change the mechanical axle stops, have the tyre pressure monitoring system un- aged. Reduce your speed if you suspect
the power steering taught‐in again at a der "Menu window tyre" ( → Page 159). that a tyre is defective. Stop the vehicle
qualified specialist workshop. A tyre dealer, a qualified workshop or an as soon as possible to check the wheels
authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service and tyres for damage. Concealed tyre
Retreaded tyres damage may also be causing the unusu-
Centre will be able to provide you with
Daimler Truck AG recommends that you further information. al handling characteristics. If you find
only use wheels and tyres that have been no signs of damage, have the tyres and
approved for Mercedes‐Benz trucks. Storage wheels checked at a qualified specialist
workshop.
Balancing tyres The battery of a tyre pressure sensor for
tyre pressure monitoring is activated auto-
Daimler Truck AG recommends that you matically when it is installed. The tyre Notes on regularly inspecting wheels
only use clip‐on and adhesive wheel bal- pressure sensor will then begin to trans- and tyres
ance weights that have been approved mit data periodically. If you store wheels Tyres are of particular importance to the
for Mercedes‐Benz trucks to balance the with installed tyre pressure sensors, the operating and road safety of the vehicle.
tyres. Adding balancing granulate, balan- service life of the tyre pressure sensor
cing beads, or balancing gel to the tyres battery during road use is reduced. There- Therefore, regularly check the following
can damage the inliner of the tyre. fore, tyre pressure sensors should only be points:
mounted a short time before the wheel is ● Tyre condition
used. ● Tyre age
Notes on wheels with tyre pressure
sensors ● Tyre tread
● Tyre pressure
Installation Notes on sound changes or undesired
handling characteristics
You can identify wheels with tyre pres-
While driving, pay attention to vibrations,
sure sensors by a red ring on the tyre
noises, and unusual handling character-
valve. When mounting a tyre, observe the
istics, e.g. pulling to one side. This may

Wheels and tyres
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
Tyre condition ● Foreign objects fourth digits refer to the year of manufac-
● Insufficient or excessive tyre pressure ture. For example, a tyre that is marked
Danger ● Weather conditions and environment- "3818" was manufactured in week 38 in
al factors 2018.
Risk of injury through damaged tyres
● Contact with oil, grease, fuel
Damaged tyres can cause tyre pressure Tyre tread
loss. Tyre age
▶ Check the tyres regularly for signs of Danger
damage, and replace any damaged Risk of aquaplaning due to insuffi-
tyres as soon as possible. cient tyre tread
Insufficient tyre tread will result in re-
Before starting your journey, check the duced tyre grip.
tyre condition for the following points: If the road surface is wet, the risk of
● External damage aquaplaning will increase, in particular
● Foreign objects in the tyre tread where the speed is not adapted to suit
● Foreign objects between the tyres (on Tyres age, even if they are used infre- the conditions.
vehicles with twin tyres) quently or not at all. Operating and road
safety diminish with the age of the tyres. ▶ You must regularly check the tyre
● Cracks or bulges
For this reason, tyres more than six years tread depth and the condition of the
● Uneven tread wear or excessive wear tyre tread over the entire width on
on one side old must be checked and, if necessary, re-
placed at a qualified specialist workshop. all tyres.
Tyre damage can be caused by the follow- This also applies to the spare wheel. The ▶ For safety reasons, replace your
ing: date of manufacture 1 provides informa- tyres before reaching the legally
● The operating conditions of the tion about the age of a tyre. The first and prescribed limit for the minimum
vehicle second digits refer to the week of man- tread depth.
● Tyre ageing ufacture, starting with "01" for the first
● Kerbs calendar week of the year. The third and

Wheels and tyres
Notes on regularly inspecting wheels and tyres
the vehicle, particularly on wet or snow‐ Tyre pressure that is too low can have the
Danger covered roads. A tyre has reached the following consequences:
Risk of aquaplaning due to insuffi- minimum tread depth when the tread ● Severe heating
cient tyre tread wear indicator (arrow) is flush with the ● Increased tyre wear
Depending on the depth of the water on tyre tread. ● Changed driving stability
the roadway, the vehicle may aquaplane. ● Increased fuel consumption
Tyre pressure
▶ Avoid ruts and brake carefully. Tyre pressure that is too high can have
▶ Change tyres if the tyre tread is Danger the following consequences:
insufficient. ● Increased braking distance
Risk of accident due to insufficient or
excessive tyre pressure ● Poorer tyre traction
Tyres with too low or too high tyre ● Increased tyre wear
pressure can burst or wearexcessively
and/or unevenly. Danger
In addition, the handling as well as steer- Risk of accident due to repeated
ing and braking characteristics may be pressure drop in the tyres
severely impaired. The wheels, valves or tyres could be
damaged.
▶ Observe the recommended tyre
Tyre wear indicator Too low a tyre pressure can lead to the
pressures and check the pressure
1 Example: Tyre tread wear indicator of all tyres, including the spare, tyres bursting.
monthly, when the load changes, ▶ Examine the tyres for foreign ob-
A specified minimum tread depth is a
before embarking on a longer jour- jects.
legal requirement for all tyres. Observe
ney, and when operating conditions
the legal requirements for the country ▶ Check whether the tyre has a punc-
change (e.g., off‐road driving).
you are currently in. The less tyre tread ture or the valve has a leak.
depth remaining, the poorer are the road
▶ Adjust the tyre pressure as neces-
sary.
adhesion and handling characteristics of

Wheels and tyres
Determining tyre pressure
▶ If you are unable to rectify the dam- Determining tyre pressure ▶ Select the tyre pressure table
age, contact a qualified specialist according to the tyre type (single
▶ Observe the notes in the "Tyre pres-
workshop. tyres ( → Page 462) or twin tyres
sure" section of "Regular checking of
( → Page 467)).
the wheels and tyres" ( → Page 458).
Danger ▶ Search tyre size 1 in the tyre pres-
Risk of injury from lowering the tyre Use the correct tyre pressures for each sure table.
pressure when the tyres are warm axle on the vehicle. ▶ Search load-bearing index 2 which
The temperature and pressure of the corresponds to the tyre type next
tyre increase when the vehicle is in mo- to the tyre size in the tyre pressure
tion. table.
Lowering the tyre pressure on warm
▶ Find the maximum permissible axle
load in the tyre pressure table and
tyres can cause the tyres to burst.
read off the tyre pressure.
▶ Do not lower the tyre pressure on
The tyre pressure changes by approxim-
warm tyres.
ately 30 to 40 kPa (0.3 to 0.4°bar/ 4.4 to
▶
Example: Tyre size and load-bearing index
Make sure you keep to the specified
5.8 psi) per 10°C change in air temperat-
tyre pressure. ▶ Read off tyre size 1 and load-bearing
ure. Bear this temperature‐related change
index 2 on the tyre.
The tyre pressures are specified according in tyre pressure in mind when checking
to E.T.R.T.O. standards and may deviate If the load index 2 comprises two num- tyre pressures indoors, where the tem-
from the manufacturer's specifications. bers, the first number before the "/" is for perature may be higher than the outside
Before starting your journey, determine single tyres and the second number, after temperature.
the specified tyre pressure and check the the "/", is for twin tyres.
Example:
tyre pressures while the tyres are cold ▶ Determine the permissible axle load ● The outside temperature is approxim-
( → Page 461). by checking the vehicle identification ately 0°C.
plate ( → Page 473). ● The room temperature is approxim-
ately 20°C.

Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure table for single tyres
● Set the tyre pressure approximately Tyres 12 R 20 Axle load Tyre pressure
60 to 80 kPa (0.6 to 0.8 bar/8.7 to Single tyres/load index 154 kg kPa bar psi
11.6 psi) higher than that prescribed
in the tyre pressure table. Axle load Tyre pressure 6300 425 4.25 62
kg kPa bar psi 6700 450 4.5 65
Note 6300 725 7.25 105 7100 500 5.0 72
For specific tasks, e.g. for winter ser- 6700 775 7.75 112 7500 525 5.25 76
vices, a maximum vehicle axle load rat- 7100 800 8.0 116 8000 575 5.75 83
ing for fitting approved attachments may
7500 850 8.5 123 9000 675 6.75 98
be increased. In such cases, the speed
of the vehicle is limited. The tyre pres- 9500 725 7.25 105
Tyres 14 R 20
sure will then deviate from the informa- Single tyres/load index 160
10000 750 7.5 109
tion in the following tyre pressure table.
It needs to be increased in accordance Axle load Tyre pressure
Tyres 365/85 R 20
with the E.T.R.T.O. standard and the in- Single tyres/load index 164
kg kPa bar psi
formation provided by the tyre manufac- Axle load Tyre pressure
6300 450 4.5 65
turer.
6700 475 4.75 69 kg kPa bar psi
7100 525 5.25 76 6300 450 4.5 65

7500 575 5.75 83 6700 475 4.75 69
Tyres 215/75 R 17.5
8000 600 6.0 87 7100 525 5.25 76
Single tyres/load index 135
9000 700 7.0 102 7500 575 5.75 83
Axle load Tyre pressure 8000 625 6.25 91
Tyres 14 R 20
kg kPa bar psi 9000 700 7.0 102
4300 850 8.5 123 9500 750 7.5 109

Wheels and tyres
Axle load Tyre pressure Axle load Tyre pressure Tyres 275/70 R 22.5
kg kPa bar psi kg kPa bar psi
10000 800 8.0 116 6700 750 7.5 109 Axle load Tyre pressure
7100 800 8.0 116 kg kPa bar psi
Tyres 11 R 22.5
7500 850 8.5 123 6300 825 8.25 120
6700 900 9.0 131
Axle load Tyre pressure Tyres 13 R 22.5
Single tyres/load index 156 Tyres 295/60 R 22.5
kg kPa bar psi
6300 850 8.5 123 Axle load Tyre pressure
kg kPa bar psi Axle load Tyre pressure
Tyres 12 R 22.5
6300 650 6.5 94 kg kPa bar psi
6700 725 7.25 105 6300 850 8.5 123
Axle load Tyre pressure
7100 775 7.75 112 6700 900 9.0 131
kg kPa bar psi
7500 825 8.25 120
6300 750 7.5 109 Tyres 295/80 R 22.5
8000 875 8.75 127
6700 800 8.0 116
7100 850 8.5 123
Tyres 275/70 R 22.5 Axle load Tyre pressure
kg kPa bar psi
Tyres 13 R 22.5
kg kPa bar psi 6700 800 8.0 116
6300 900 9.0 131
kg kPa bar psi Tyres 295/80 R 22.5
6300 700 7.0 102

Wheels and tyres
Axle load Tyre pressure Tyres 305/70 R 22.5 Axle load Tyre pressure
kg kPa bar psi
Single tyres/load index 152 kg kPa bar psi
6300 750 7.5 109 Axle load Tyre pressure 7100 850 8.5 123
6700 800 8.0 116 kg kPa bar psi 7500 900 9.0 131
7100 850 8.5 123 6300 775 7.75 112
Tyres 315/70 R 22.5
6700 850 8.5 123 Single tyres/load index 154
Tyres 295/80 R 22.5
Single tyres/load index 154 7100 900 9.0 131
Axle load Tyre pressure Tyres 315/60 R 22.5 kg kPa bar psi
kg kPa bar psi
6700 750 7.5 109 kg kPa bar psi 7100 850 8.5 123
7100 800 8.0 116 6300 775 7.75 112 7500 900 9.0 131
7500 850 8.5 123 6700 850 8.5 123
Tyres 315/70 R 22.5
7100 900 9.0 131 Single tyres/load index 156
Tyres 305/70 R 22.5
Single tyres/load index 150 Tyres 315/60 R 22.5 Axle load Tyre pressure
kg kPa bar psi Axle load Tyre pressure 6300 675 6.75 98
6300 800 8.0 116 kg kPa bar psi 6700 725 7.25 105
6700 850 8.5 123 6300 725 7.25 105 7100 775 7.75 112
6700 800 8.0 116 7500 850 8.5 123

Wheels and tyres
Axle load Tyre pressure Tyres 355/50 R 22.5 Axle load Tyre pressure
kg kPa bar psi
kg kPa bar psi 6700 600 6.0 87
Tyres 315/80 R 22.5
6300 725 7.25 105 7100 625 6.25 91
6700 800 8.0 116 7500 675 6.75 98
7100 850 8.5 123 8000 750 7.5 109
kg kPa bar psi
7500 900 9.0 131 9000 850 8.5 123
6300 675 6.75 98
9500 900 9.0 131
6700 725 7.25 105 Tyres 355/50 R 22.5
7100 775 7.75 112
Tyres 315/80 R 22.5
6300 675 6.75 98 kg kPa bar psi
6700 725 7.25 105 6300 675 6.75 98
7100 775 7.75 112 6700 725 7.25 105
kg kPa bar psi
7500 850 8.5 123 7100 775 7.75 112
6300 650 6.5 94
8000 900 9.0 131 7500 850 8.5 123
6700 700 7.0 102
8000 900 9.0 131
7100 750 7.5 109 Tyres 365/70 R 22.5
7500 800 8.0 116
8000 850 8.5 123

Wheels and tyres
Axle load Tyre pressure Axle load Tyre pressure Axle load Tyre pressure
kg kPa bar psi kg kPa bar psi kg kPa bar psi
6300 600 6.0 87 6300 600 6.0 87 8000 750 7.5 109
6700 650 6.5 94 6700 650 6.5 94 9000 850 8.5 123
7100 700 7.0 102 7100 700 7.0 102 9500 900 9.0 131
7500 750 7.5 109 7500 750 7.5 109
Tyres 385/65 R 22.5
8000 800 8.0 116 8000 800 8.0 116
Tyres 385/55 R 22.5 Tyres 385/65 R 22.5 Axle load Tyre pressure
Single tyres/load index 160 Single tyres/load index 160
kg kPa bar psi
Axle load Tyre pressure Axle load Tyre pressure 6300 525 5.25 76
kg kPa bar psi kg kPa bar psi 6700 550 5.5 80
6300 600 6.0 87 6300 600 6.0 87 7100 600 6.0 87
6700 625 6.25 91 6700 625 6.25 91 7500 625 6.25 91
7100 675 6.75 98 7100 675 6.75 98 8000 675 6.75 98
7500 725 7.25 105 7500 725 7.25 105 9000 800 8.0 116
8000 800 8.0 116 8000 800 8.0 116 9500 850 8.5 123
9000 900 9.0 131 9000 900 9.0 131 10000 900 9.0 131
Tyres 385/65 R 22.5 Tyres 385/65 R 22.5 Tyres 425/65 R 22.5

Single tyres/load index 158 Single tyres/load index 162 Single tyres/load index 165

Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure table for twin tyres
Axle load Tyre pressure Axle load Tyre pressure Tyre pressure table for twin tyres
kg kPa bar psi kg kPa bar psi Tyres 12 R 20
6300 525 5.25 76 6300 550 5.5 80 Twin tyres/load index 150
7100 600 6.0 87 7100 625 6.25 91 kg kPa bar psi
7500 625 6.25 91 7500 675 6.75 98
9500 550 5.5 80
8000 675 6.75 98 8000 725 7.25 105
10000 600 6.0 87
9000 750 7.5 109 9000 850 8.5 123
10500 625 6.25 91
9500 775 7.75 112
Tyres 325/95 R 24 11500 700 7.0 102
10000 825 8.25 120
Tyres 495/45 R 22.5 12300 775 7.75 112

kg kPa bar psi
13000 825 8.25 120
13400 850 8.5 123
kg kPa bar psi 6700 550 5.5 80
9500 725 7.25 105 7100 600 6.0 87 Tyres 14 R 20
10000 750 7.5 109 7500 625 6.25 91 Twin tyres/load index 157
11500 900 9.0 131 9000 800 8.0 116 kg kPa bar psi
9500 850 8.5 123
Tyres 12 R 24 9500 350 3.5 51
10500 400 4.0 58

Wheels and tyres
11500 450 4.5 65 13400 525 5.25 76 12000 800 8.0 116
12000 475 4.75 69 16000 650 6.5 94 12300 825 8.25 120
12300 475 4.75 69 12600 850 8.5 123
Tyres 11 R 22.5
12600 500 5.0 72
Twin tyres/load index 145 Tyres 12 R 22.5
13000 525 5.25 76
Twin tyres/load index 149
13400 550 5.5 80
16000 675 6.75 98
9500 675 6.75 98 kg kPa bar psi
Tyres 14 R 20 10000 725 7.25 105 9500 575 5.75 83
10500 750 7.5 109 10000 625 6.25 91
Axle load Tyre pressure 11500 850 8.5 123 10500 650 6.5 94
kg kPa bar psi 11500 725 7.25 105
Tyres 12 R 22.5
9500 350 3.5 51 12000 775 7.75 112
10000 375 3.75 54 12300 800 8.0 116
10500 375 3.75 54 12600 825 8.25 120
kg kPa bar psi
11500 425 4.25 62 13000 850 8.5 123
9500 600 6.0 87
12000 450 4.5 65
10000 650 6.5 94
Tyres 13 R 22.5
12300 475 4.75 69
10500 700 7.0 102
12600 475 4.75 69
11500 775 7.75 112
13000 500 5.0 72

Wheels and tyres
9500 575 5.75 83 12600 775 7.75 112 11500 900 9.0 131
10000 625 6.25 91 13000 825 8.25 120
Tyres 295/60 R 22.5
10500 650 6.5 94 13400 850 8.5 123
11500 725 7.25 105
Tyres 275/70 R 22.5 Axle load Tyre pressure
12000 775 7.75 112
kg kPa bar psi
12300 800 8.0 116
12600 825 8.25 120
kg kPa bar psi 10000 725 7.25 105
13000 850 8.5 123
9500 725 7.25 105 10500 775 7.75 112
13400 875 8.75 127
10000 750 7.5 109 11500 875 8.75 127
Tyres 13 R 22.5 10500 800 8.0 116 12000 900 9.0 131
11500 900 9.0 131
Tyres 295/60 R 22.5
Tyres 295/55 R 22.5 Twin tyres/load index 147
kg kPa bar psi
9500 550 5.5 80
Axle load Tyre pressure kg kPa bar psi
10000 600 6.0 87
kg kPa bar psi 9500 675 6.75 98
10500 625 6.25 91
9500 725 7.25 105 10000 700 7.0 102
11500 700 7.0 102
10000 750 7.5 109 10500 750 7.5 109
12000 725 7.25 105
10500 800 8.0 116 11500 850 8.5 123
12300 775 7.75 112

Wheels and tyres
12000 875 8.75 127 12000 800 8.0 116 9500 600 6.0 87
12300 900 9.0 131 12300 825 8.25 120 10000 650 6.5 94
12600 850 8.5 123 10500 700 7.0 102
Tyres 295/80 R 22.5
11500 775 7.75 112
Twin tyres/load index 145 Tyres 295/80 R 22.5
12000 800 8.0 116
12300 825 8.25 120
12600 850 8.5 123
9500 625 6.25 91 kg kPa bar psi
10000 675 6.75 98 9500 575 5.75 83
Tyres 305/70 R 22.5
10500 725 7.25 105 10000 625 6.25 91
11500 725 7.25 105 kg kPa bar psi
Tyres 295/80 R 22.5
12000 775 7.75 112 9500 600 6.0 87
12300 800 8.0 116 10000 625 6.25 91
12600 825 8.25 120 10500 675 6.75 98
kg kPa bar psi
13000 850 8.5 123 11500 750 7.5 109
9500 600 6.0 87
12000 800 8.0 116
10000 650 6.5 94
Tyres 305/70 R 22.5
12300 825 8.25 120
10500 700 7.0 102
12600 850 8.5 123
11500 775 7.75 112
13000 875 8.75 127

Wheels and tyres
13400 900 9.0 131 12300 875 8.75 127 9500 600 6.0 87
12600 900 9.0 131 10000 650 6.5 94
Tyres 315/45 R 22.5
10500 700 7.0 102
Twin tyres/load index 145 Tyres 315/60 R 22.5
11500 775 7.75 112
12000 800 8.0 116
12300 825 8.25 120
9500 725 7.25 105 kg kPa bar psi
12600 850 8.5 123
10000 750 7.5 109 9500 600 6.0 87
10500 800 8.0 116 10000 625 6.25 91
Tyres 315/70 R 22.5
11500 900 9.0 131 10500 675 6.75 98
Tyres 315/60 R 22.5
12000 775 7.75 112 kg kPa bar psi
12300 825 8.25 120 9500 600 6.0 87
12600 850 8.5 123 10000 625 6.25 91
kg kPa bar psi
13000 875 8.75 127 10500 675 6.75 98
9500 650 6.5 94
13400 900 9.0 131 11500 750 7.5 109
10000 675 6.75 98
12000 800 8.0 116
10500 725 7.25 105
Tyres 315/70 R 22.5
12300 825 8.25 120
11500 825 8.25 120
12600 850 8.5 123
12000 850 8.5 123
13000 875 8.75 127

Wheels and tyres
13400 900 9.0 131 9500 450 4.5 65 12300 550 5.5 80
10000 475 4.75 69 12600 550 5.5 80
Tyres 315/80 R 22.5
10500 500 5.0 72 13000 575 5.75 83
11500 575 5.75 83 13400 600 6.0 87
12000 600 6.0 87 16000 725 7.25 105
kg kPa bar psi
12300 625 6.25 91
9500 575 5.75 83
12600 625 6.25 91
10000 600 6.0 87
13000 675 6.75 98
10500 650 6.5 94
13400 675 6.75 98
11500 725 7.25 105
16000 850 8.5 123
12000 750 7.5 109
12300 775 7.75 112
Tyres 325/95 R 24
12600 800 8.0 116
13400 850 8.5 123 kg kPa bar psi
9500 375 3.75 54
Tyres 12 R 24
10000 425 4.25 62
10500 425 4.25 62
11500 500 5.0 72
12000 525 5.25 76

Technical data
Engine identification plate
Engine identification plate Vehicles for Gulf States: The Vehicle Iden-
Note tification Plate 1 is located in the door
In vehicles with the OM 460 engine, the frame on the driver's side.
engine type plate is located on the right
of the crankcase viewed in the direction
of travel, . Vehicle identification plate
Vehicle identification plate/axle

loads
Vehicle identification plate and
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
OM 471 engine (example)
The engine type plate 1 is located at the

rear left of the crankcase viewed in the
direction of travel.
The engine type plate 1 shows the fol- Example: Vehicle identification plate
lowing information: Information on the vehicle identifica-

● Manufacturer Example: Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) and vehicle tion plate
identification plate
● Engine type 1 Vehicle manufacturer
The vehicle identification plate 1 is loc-
● Engine model designation ated in the door frame on the co‐driver's 2 EU general operating permit number (only in
● Engine number side. The Vehicle Identification Number
certain countries)
3 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
(VIN) 2 is stamped on the longitudinal
frame member in the right wheel well.

Technical data
Radio regulations
4 Maximum permissible gross vehicle weight Radio regulations For Israel only
(kg)
Permissible gross vehicle combination Wireless vehicle components It is prohibited to make any change to a
weight (kg) vehicle-installed radio component that
Only for EU and EFTA countries and could affect the wireless specifications of
5 Permissible axle loads of axles°1 to 4 (kg)
countries that recognise the EU man- the device, including software changes,
6 Permissible load of axle group°T (kg) ufacturer's declaration of conformity replacement of the original antenna, or
7 Flue gas coefficient adding the option to connect the device to
8 Rear axle ratio an external antenna, without first obtain-
9 Basic headlamp setting ing approval from the Communica-tions
A Vehicle model or vehicle model designation The following note applies to all wireless Ministry, because of concern about wire-
components of the vehicle and the in- less interference.
You will find the technically permissible formation systems and communications
gross vehicle combination weight on the equipment integrated in the vehicle: For the United Kingdom only
vehicle identification plate or in the COC
documents. Note that, in ADR mode, the The manufacturers of the wireless com-
technically permissible gross vehicle components declare that all wireless compon-
bination weight is determined by the con- ents installed in the vehicle comply with The following note applies to all wireless
tinuous braking effect of the vehicle. You Directive 2014/53/EU. components of the vehicle and the in-
will find this value in your ADR certifica- The full text of the EU Declarations of formation systems and communications
tion. Conformity are available at the following equipment integrated in the vehicle:
If you require further assistance, consult internet address: The manufacturers of the radio compon-
an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks https://www.mercedes-benz- ents declare that all radio equipment in-
Service Centre. trucks.com/conformity stalled in the vehicle is in compliance with
the relevant statutory requirements. The
full texts of the declarations of conformity
are available at the following web address:

Technical data
Radio regulations
https://www.mercedes-benz- For Jamaica only For Thailand only:

trucks.com/conformity
All vehicle-installed radio components Telecommunications equipment in this
Importer have been Type Approved by SMA. vehicle is in compliance with the require-
Mercedes-Benz Trucks UK Limited ments of the National Broadcasting and
Delaware Drive, Tongwell For Russia only: Telecommunications Commission (NBTC).
Milton Keynes MK15 8BA Radar sensor ARS4‐A:
Großbritannien 1) The telecommunications equipment
Importer of Mercedes-Benz replace- and this device comply with the standard
ment parts or requirements of the National Broad-
casting and Telecommunications Commis-
Mercedes-Benz Parts Logistics
sion (NBTC).
Delaware Drive, Tongwell
Milton Keynes MK15 8BA 2) When in use, this two-way radio sys-
Großbritannien The manufacturers of the wireless com- tem emits electromagnetic radiation that
ponents installed in the vehicle hereby meets the health and safety standards of
For Brazil only declare that all wireless components the National Telecommunications Com-
installed in the vehicle comply with the mission (NTC).
technical regulations for two‐way radios.
You can obtain further information from Radio operating permits
an authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Ser- Information on radio approvals and radio
Information about radio equipment in the vice Centre. approval numbers is available at the fol-
vehicle:
lowing Internet address:
These systems are not protected against
https://www.mercedes-benz-
harmful interference and must not cause
trucks.com/conformity
interference in properly-approved sys-
tems.

Technical data
Radio regulations
Notes on the MirrorCam system

Observe the following when using radio
equipment in the vehicle:
The distance between the two‐way radio
aerial and the MirrorCam system camera
arm must be at least 85 cm.

Technical data
Radio regulations
Type of wireless application and spe-

cification in accordance with 2014/
53/EU
Note
Not all two‐way radio systems may be available in your vehicle. This depends on the equipment chosen or the national version.
Component Service Transmission frequency band Transmission output

Band 1
Band 3
Band 4
Band 5
Band 7
Band 8
Band 12
Band 14
Band 17
Telematics platform 4G
Band 18 0.25°W (Power Class°3)
(CTP3) LTE
Band 19
Band 20
Band 25
Band 26
Band 28
Band 39
Band 40
Band 41
Band 66

Technical data
Radio regulations

Band 1
3G
Band 5 0.3 W (Power Class 3)
UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA
Band 8
GSM 850 MHz
2G GSM/GPRS/EDGE 2 W (Power Class 4)
E–GSM 900 MHz
DCS 1800 MHz
1 W (Power Class 1)
PCS 1900 MHz
Telematics platform EDGE GSM 850 MHz
2G GSM/GPRS/EDGE
(CTP3) EDGE E–GSM 900 MHz
0,5 W (Power Class 3)
EDGE DCS 1800 MHz
EDGE PCS 1900 MHz
Wi‐Fi (IEEE802.11b) 2.4 GHz–band 50 mW
Wi‐Fi (IEEE802.11g/n/ax) 2.4 GHz–band 25 mW
Wi‐Fi (IEEE802.11a/n/ac/ax) 5 GHz–band 15 mW
Bluetooth® 2.4 GHz–band 5 mW
Band I 2100 MHz
4G Band III 1800 MHz
0.25°W (Power Class°3)
LTE Band V 850 MHz
Band VII 2600 MHz
Telematics platform Band I 2100 MHz
(CTP2019) 3G Band II 1900 MHz
0.25°W (Power Class°3)
UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA Band V 850 MHz
Band VIII 900 MHz
GSM 850 MHz
E–GSM 900 MHz

Technical data
Radio regulations

DCS 1800 MHz
PCS 1900 MHz
Telematics platform Wi‐Fi (IEEE802.11b) 2.4 GHz–band 50 mW
(CTP2019)
WIFI (IEEE802.11g/n) 2.4 GHz–band 25 mW
Bluetooth® 2.4 GHz–band 2.5 mW
Band I 2100 MHz
Band III 1800 MHz
Band VII 2600 MHz
4G
Band VIII 900 MHz 0.25°W (Power Class°3)
LTE
Band XX 800 MHz
Band XXVIII 700 MHz
Band XXXVIII 2600 MHz
Telematics platform
3G Band I 2100 MHz
(CTP2019 from 10/2022) 0.25°W (Power Class°3)
UMTS/HSDPA/HSUPA Band VIII 900 MHz
E–GSM 900 MHz
DCS 1800 MHz
Wi‐Fi (IEEE802.11b) 2.4 GHz–band 50 mW
WIFI (IEEE802.11g/n) 2.4 GHz–band 25 mW
Bluetooth® 2.4 GHz–band 2.5 mW
Radar sensor system
Vehicle‐interval radar 76 – 77 GHz–Band 3.16 W
(ARS3–A, ARS4–B, ARS4–A)
Radar sensor system
Lateral radar 76 – 77 GHz–Band 1W
(SRR2, model L2C0055TR)

Technical data
Radio regulations

Radar sensor system
Corner radar 76 – 77 GHz–Band 0.11 – 0.92 W
(CR5TPCC)
Radio
(Daimler TCC Touch*, Bluetooth® 2402 – 2480 MHz ≤ 2.5 mW (4 dBm)
1–DIN TCC MID*)
Electronic ignition lock
Short‐range wireless technologies 433 MHz–band 10 mW
(EIS, transmitter key)
Tyre pressure monitoring system
Short‐range wireless technologies 433 MHz–band 10 mW
(TPM)
1925–1975 MHz 25.6 dBm
Bluetooth®
2402 – 2480 MHz 5.5 dBm
1715 – 1780 MHz 25.6 dBm
2412 – 2484 MHz 18.5 dBm
WiFi
Android Black Box 5150–5350 MHz 17.5 dBm
(STG AP) 5470–5725 MHz 17.5 dBm
880–914 MHz 33 dBm
GPRS 900
885–910 MHz 25.5 dBm
837–857 MHz 25.5 dBm
GPRS 1800
1710–1785 MHz 30 dBm
5.725–5.875 GHz band < 25 mW
Instrument cluster WIFI 5 GHz
5.150–5.350 GHz band < 200 mW
(Connect5)
WIFI 2.4 GHz 2.400–2.4835 GHz band < 20 mW

Technical data
Radio regulations

Instrument cluster
Bluetooth® 2.400–2.4835 GHz band < 10 mW
(Connect5)
* 1‐DIN TCC LOW does not have Bluetooth® functionality.

Technical data
Operating fluids
Operating fluids You can obtain information about ap-

Note proved operating fluids and container
Notes on operating fluids Pollution of the environment due to designations from an authorised Mer-
irresponsible disposal of operating cedes‐Benz Trucks Service Centre or on-
Danger fluids line at:
Risk of injury from hazardous operat- Incorrectly disposing of operating fluids https://bevo.mercedes-benz-
ing fluids can cause considerable damage to the trucks.com/
Operating fluids may be poisonous and environment.
harmful to your health.
▶ Dispose of operating fluids in an en-
▶ Observe the text on the original Notes on engine oils
vironmentally responsible manner.
containers when using, storing, or
Note
disposing of operating fluids. Operating fluids include:
▶ Always store operating fluids in their ● Fuels Damage to the engine due to unau-
thorised engine oil quality
closed original containers. ● Lubricants
▶ To prevent damage:
Always keep operating fluids away ● Coolant
from children. ● Additives for exhaust gas after‐treat- ▶ Only use engine oils of a quality
ment, e.g. AdBlue® level that is approved for your
Note ● Windscreen washer fluid vehicle in accordance with
Damage to major assemblies caused ● Air conditioning system refrigerants the Mercedes‐Benz Trucks
by additives Specifications for Operating Fluids.
Only use products approved by Daimler
Using additives in approved operating Truck°AG. Damage caused by the use of
fluids can damage major assemblies. unsuitable operating fluids is not covered
▶ Do not mix additives with the oper- by the warranty.
ating fluids. Products approved by Daimler Truck AG
are clearly marked on the containers.

Technical data
Operating fluids
Oil change the average outside temperature ac-

cording to the season.
Note ▶ The SAE classification of the engine
oil does not match the ambient
Increased wear due to mixing differ-
temperature: Change the engine
ent grades of oil
oil in good time, especially before
If engine oils of different quality grades the onset of the cold season.
are mixed, the intervals for changes
Observe the notes on operating fluids of engine oil will be shorter than with Oil change intervals are dependent on the
( → Page 482). engine oils of the same quality. following factors:
The quality of the engine oil used is of ▶ Only mix engine oils of different ● The operating conditions of the
decisive importance for the engine's func- quality grades in exceptional cases. vehicle
tionality and service life. Daimler Truck AG ▶ Adjust the specification of the en- ● The quality of the engine oil used
continually approves engine oils based on gine oil to a lower quality level using ● The fuel type
demanding tests according to the latest the on‐board computer under En- ● The fuel grade
technological standards. gine Oil grade.
Engine oils, such as those awarded Note
228.71, 228.61 and 228.51 have a higher Note The oil change intervals are shortened
quality standard and have a favourable Engine damage due to the use of en- depending on the fuel type and fuel
effect on the following factors: gine oil with inadequate temperature grade (sulphur content).
● Oil change interval period properties
Select the SAE classification (viscosity) of
● Engine wear The engine oil used does not have ad-
the engine oil according to the outside
● Fuel consumption equate temperature properties. This can
temperature. For information on SAE
● Exhaust gas emissions lead to damage to the engine.
classes and ambient temperature ranges,
▶ Select the SAE classification (vis- please refer to the notes on operating
cosity) of the engine oil based on fluids ( → Page 482).

Technical data
Operating fluids
The maximum oil change interval is only Miscibility of engine oils Transmission oils
achieved with engine oils of a particularly
high quality grade. The on‐board com- If you mix engine oils, you reduce the General notes
puter automatically displays when the advantages of high‐quality engine oils.
next oil change is due. Engine oils are differentiated according to Note
the following points: Damage to the transmission from
Filling or topping up engine oil mineral-based transmission oil
● Engine oil brand
● Quality level (specification) The transmission may be damaged when
Note changing from a synthetic to a mineral-
● SAE classification (viscosity)
Damage caused by topping up too based transmission oil.
much engine oil If, in exceptional cases, the engine oil
filled with is not available, top up with ▶ Before you change the transmission
Excess engine oil can damage the engine
another engine oil approved for Mer- oil, check whether a mineral‐based
or catalytic converter.
cedes‐Benz Trucks. transmission oil is permitted. You
▶ Have excess engine oil removed at a can find information at an author-
qualified workshop. Setting the oil quality ised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks Service
Daimler Truck AG recommends that you When the instrument cluster displays the Centre.
only refill with engine oils of the same symbol 4 and you refill the displayed Observe the notes on operating fluids
quality grade and SAE classification as oil filling capacity, observe the following: ( → Page 482).
used the last time the oil was changed. ● If you top up or add a lower qual- The drive axles and the transmission are
Check the oil level in the on‐board com- ity engine oil, set the lower qual- filled with a high‐quality synthetic oil at
puter ( → Page 163) before you top up ity level on the on‐board computer the factory.
the engine oil ( → Page 400). ( → Page 165).
The planetary hub reduction axles are
● If you are topping up with engine oil
filled with mineral oil.
of a better quality, do not enter the
better quality level. Information on the usability of trans-
mission oils can be found in the Mer-

Technical data
Operating fluids
cedes‐Benz Trucks Specifications for Op- Observe the notes on operating fluids If you replace the coolant, make sure
erating Fluids. ( → Page 482). that the coolant contains 50 % corrosion
A coolant that ensures anti‐corrosion/ inhibitor/antifreeze. This corresponds to
Transmission oil quality antifreeze protection down to ‐37 °C.
antifreeze protection and other important
You can check the quality grade of the protective effects is added ex works. Do not exceed a concentration of 55%
transmission oil used on the on‐board (antifreeze protection down to a temper-
The coolant is a mixture of water and
computer ( → Page 165). ature of around ‐45°C ). Heat dissipation
corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent.
and antifreeze protection may otherwise
The corrosion inhibitor/antifreeze agent deteriorate.
Notes on coolant in the coolant has the following proper-
In the event of coolant loss, do not just
ties:
Danger refill with water, but also proportionally
● Heat dissipation
Risk of fire and injury from antifreeze with an approved corrosion inhibitor/
● Anti‐corrosion protection antifreeze agent.
agent
● Cavity seal (protection against pitting)
If antifreeze agent comes into contact The water used in coolant must meet
● Antifreeze protection
with hot component parts in the engine specific requirements, which are often
● Increases the boiling point
compartment, it may ignite. met by drinking water. Have the water
Leave the coolant in the engine cooling treated if the water quality is inadequate.
▶ Allow the engine to cool down be-
system all year round even in countries Mix the water and the corrosion inhibitor/
fore you top up the antifreeze agent.
with high outside temperatures. antifreeze agent together externally of the
▶ Make sure that no antifreeze agent
spills out next to the filler opening. Check the anti‐corrosion/antifreeze agent coolant circuit before filling.
▶ Thoroughly clean the antifreeze concentration in the coolant every six Avoid mixing different anti‐corrosion/
agent from component parts before months. antifreeze agents.
starting the vehicle. Only use approved corrosion inhibitor/
antifreeze agents.

Technical data
Operating fluids
Notes on refrigerant Refrigerant information label Notes on fuel grade

Your vehicle's climate control system is
filled with refrigerant R134a and contains Danger
fluorinated greenhouse gas. Risk of fire from fuel mixture
The warning label for the refrigerant type If you mix diesel fuel with petrol, the
used is located behind the maintenance flash point of the fuel mixture is lower
flap. than that of pure diesel fuel.
▶ Do not refuel diesel engines with
Note petrol.
Information on refrigerant information
Damage due to incorrect refrigerant ▶ Do not mix petrol with diesel fuel.
label
or refrigerant compressor oil Even small amounts of the wrong fuel
1 Symbols for hazards and service information
If the incorrect refrigerant or refrigerant could result in damage to the fuel system,
compressor oil (PAG oil) is used, this can 2 Refrigerant filling capacity
engine and exhaust gas aftertreatment
damage the climate control system. 3 CO equivalent of the refrigerant used system.
▶ Only use refrigerant R134a and 4 Applicable standards
the PAG oil approved by Daimler 5 PAG oil part number Note
Truck°AG for your vehicle. 6
GWP (global warming potential) of the Damage to the exhaust gas after-
▶ Do not mix the approved PAG oil refrigerant used treatment system for vehicles with
with another PAG oil. 7 Refrigerant type diesel particulate filters
Maintenance work, such as topping up the If you use diesel fuel with a sulphur con-
The symbols 1 indicate the following:
refrigerant or replacing components, must tent that is too high, the exhaust gas
● Possible dangers
be carried out only by a qualified special- aftertreatment system may be damaged.
● The performance of maintenance
ist workshop. All applicable regulations work at a qualified specialist work- ▶ In countries without sulphur‐free
and SAE standard J639 must be complied shop diesel fuel, refuel using only low‐
with.

Technical data
Operating fluids
sulphur diesel fuel with a sulphur Information on low outside temperat- Information on diesel fuel in accord-
content of less than 50 ppm. ures ance with EN 590
Note Refuel your vehicle with as much winter Notes

diesel fuel as possible at the beginning of
Refuel only with commercially available winter. Danger
vehicle diesel fuel that conforms to the
European standard EN 590 (or equival- Before switching to winter diesel fuel, the Risk of fire or explosion from fuel
ent national fuel standards). fuel tank must be as empty as possible. Fuels are highly flammable.
When first refuelling with winter diesel
fuel, only refuel using a small amount, e.g. ▶ Fire, naked flames, smoking and
to reserve level. The next time you refuel, a formation of sparks must be
you can fill the fuel tank normally again. avoided.
▶ Before refuelling, switch off the
Further information on fuel is available at vehicle and, if present, the auxiliary
the following locations: heating.
● Filling stations
● Qualified specialist workshops Note
Compatibility labels for all vehicles with a diesel engine
Malfunctions in the fuel supply due to
For diesel engines, you will find the com- contaminated fuel
patibility labels on the tensioning strap of Impurities may enter the fuel system
the fuel tank and on the fuel dispenser or from drums or canisters when refuelling.
on the pump nozzle of the filling station. This can cause malfunctions in the fuel
● B7: For diesel fuel with a maximum supply and in the fuel system.
of 7% fatty acid methyl ester FAME ▶ Before refuelling, filter the fuel if it is
(biodiesel fuel) by volume taken from drums or canisters.
● XTL: for paraffinic diesel fuel in ac-
cordance with DIN EN 15940

Technical data
Operating fluids
● Biodiesel fuels in accordance with ● Aviation turbine fuel

Note DIN EN 14214 (FAME (fatty acid ● Heating oils
Damage to the engine and the ex- methyl ester) and UCOME (used cook- ● Biodiesel fuel FAME (fatty acid methyl
haust system due to excessively high ing oil methyl ester) ester) > 7% by vol.
a sulphur content in the fuel ● Biodiesel fuel UCOME (Used Cooking
These fuel types cause irreversible dam-
Fuels can have different levels of sulphur Oil Methyl Ester)
age to the engine and BlueTec® 6 ex-
content. A high fuel sulphur content
haust gas after‐treatment, and signific-
accelerates the ageing process of the Vehicles without BlueTec® exhaust
antly reduce the expected service life.
engine oil and can damage the engine gas aftertreatment
and exhaust system. BlueTec® 4 vehicles and BlueTec® 5 Only refuel with commercially available
▶ Use fuels with a low sulphur con- vehicles: sulphur‐free diesel fuel that conforms to
tent. Diesel fuel must comply with European European standard EN 590 as of 2010 or
standard EN 590. This allows the engines a comparable national fuel standard.
BlueTec® 6 vehicles
to attain the specified output as well as This allows the engines to attain the spe-
Only refuel with commercially available the legally prescribed emission levels of cified output as well as the legally pre-
sulphur‐free diesel fuel that conforms to the Euro IV and Euro V standard. scribed emission levels of the Euro III
European standard EN 590, as of 2010, Using fuels with a sulphur content above standard.
with a max. sulphur content of 0.001 % by 0.005% by weight (50 ppm) will reduce
weight (10 ppm). The following fuel types are not permitted:
the life expectancy of the engine and ● OM 460: Sulphurous fuel with a sul-
The following fuel types are not permitted: exhaust system. phur content above 0.2% by weight
● Sulphurous fuel with a sulphur con- The following fuel types are not permitted: (2000 ppm)
tent over 0.001% by weight ● Sulphurous fuel with a sulphur con- ● OM 473: Sulphurous fuel with a sul-
● Marine diesel fuel tent greater than 0.05% by weight phur content above 0.1% by weight
● Aviation turbine fuel (500 ppm) (1000 ppm)
● Heating oils ● Marine diesel fuel ● Marine diesel fuel

Technical data
Operating fluids
● Aviation turbine fuel Specifications for Operating Fluids atures expected in the country where it is
● Heating oils ( → Page 482). on sale.
● Biodiesel fuel FAME (fatty acid methyl The vehicle can be equipped with a fuel
Diesel fuels at low temperatures
ester) > 7% by vol. preheating system. The fuel preheating
● Biodiesel fuel UCOME (Used Cooking system heats the fuel and thus improves
Oil Methyl Ester) Danger
its flow characteristics.
Risk of fire and explosion from ignit-
For vehicles without BlueTec® exhaust ing fuel Fuel additives
gas aftertreatment, the sulphur content
If parts of the fuel system heat up, fuel
of the fuel is set to the value customary
may escape and ignite. Depending on Note
in the country of delivery. If you fill up
the type of damage, fuel may only es- Damage due to the mixing of fuel
with diesel fuel with a different sulphur
cape when the engine is running. additives
content, set the new value for the sul-
phur content in the on‐board computer ▶ Do not heat up parts of the fuel If fuel additives are added to the diesel
( → Page 165). If you do not know the sul- system. fuel or FAME fatty acid methyl ester, this
phur content of the diesel fuel used, set ▶ Contact a qualified workshop to may lead to malfunctions, catalytic con-
the lower value for the sulphur content in have the fault rectified. verter damage and/or engine damage.
the on‐board computer.
At very low outside temperatures, paraffin ▶ Do not mix fuel additives.
Some countries have diesel fuels with may separate from the diesel fuel result-
a different sulphur content. Diesel fuels ing in inadequate flow characteristics. Note
with a lower sulphur content are sold in Damage to the fuel system due to de-
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
some countries under the designation terioration of the lubrication qualities
improved flow characteristics is available
"Euro diesel". of the diesel fuel
in the winter months.
You can find information about current Using petrol or petroleum will impair the
You can normally use winter diesel fuel
country‐specific sulphur content at an lubrication qualities of the diesel fuel.
without problems at the outside temper-
authorised Mercedes‐Benz Trucks service This can damage the fuel system.
centre or in the Mercedes‐Benz Trucks

Technical data
Operating fluids
▶ Do not mix petrol or kerosene with with DIN EN 15940 and in a mixture with AdBlue® is a non‐flammable, non‐toxic,
diesel fuel. conventional diesel fuels. colourless, odourless, water‐soluble li-
quid.
Information about alternative Notes on AdBlue® When you open the AdBlue® tank, small
diesel fuels in accordance with amounts of ammonia vapour may escape.
It may be improper or punishable in some
DIN EN 15940 Ammonia vapours have a pungent odour
countries to operate a vehicle that uses
and irritate the following body parts in
Observe the notes on operating fluids no AdBlue® or one that does not comply
particular:
( → Page 482). with the specifications of these operating
instructions. ● Skin
Alternative diesel fuels according to ● Mucous membranes
DIN EN 15940 can be produced from the ● Eyes
following resources: Note
● Hydrotreated vegetable oils (HVO) Paintwork damage caused by Ad- This can cause a burning sensation in the
● Biomass (BtL biomass to liquid) Blue® eyes, nose and throat as well as coughing
If AdBlue® comes into contact with and watering eyes.
● Natural gas (GtL gas to liquid)
● Coal (CtL coal to liquid) painted or aluminium surfaces when re- Do not inhale any escaping ammonia
fuelling, these surfaces may be attacked. vapours. Only fill the AdBlue® tank in
Alternative diesel fuels in accordance well‐ventilated areas.
with DIN EN 15940 can be used in the ▶ Immediately rinse the affected sur-
following engines: faces with plenty of water. AdBlue® must not come into contact with
● OM 470 If the AdBlue® tank is still filled with skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.
Keep AdBlue® away from children.
● OM 471 enough AdBlue®, pressure compens-
● OM 473 ation may occur when the tank cap is If you do come into contact with AdBlue®,
● OM 936 opened. This may cause AdBlue® to leak. observe the following:
Therefore, unscrew the tank cap of the ● Wash AdBlue® off skin immediately
You can operate your vehicle with pure AdBlue® tank with care. with soap and water.
alternative diesel fuels in accordance

Technical data
Operating fluids
● If you get AdBlue® in your eyes, rinse Additives, tap water haust gas after‐treatment system beyond
them immediately and thoroughly repair.
with clean water. Seek medical atten-
Note Only use tanks made of the following
tion immediately.
Damage caused by mixing additives materials for storing AdBlue®:
● If you swallowed AdBlue®, rinse your
with AdBlue® or from diluting Ad- ● Cr‐Ni steel according to DIN EN 10
mouth immediately with water and
Blue® 088‐1/2/3
drink plenty of water.
The BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat- ● MoCrNi steel according to DIN EN 10
Seek medical attention immediately.
ment can be destroyed by additives in 088‐1/2/3
● Immediately change clothes that have
AdBlue® and by the dilution of AdBlue®. ● Polypropylene
been soiled by AdBlue®.
▶ Only use AdBlue® in accordance ● Polyethylene
High outside temperatures with ISO 22241. Waste disposal
AdBlue® may decompose if it heats to ▶ Do not mix additives.
over 50°C over an extended period of ▶ Do not dilute AdBlue®. Note
time, e.g. due to direct sunlight. This cre-
Storage Environmental pollution caused by
ates ammonia vapour.
environmentally irresponsible dispos-
Tanks made of the following materials are al
Low outside temperatures not suitable for storing AdBlue®:
To prevent damage:
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of ap- ● Aluminium
proximately ‐11°C. The vehicle's AdBlue® ● Copper ▶ Dispose of AdBlue® in an environ-
supply system is equipped with a fully ● Copper alloys mentally responsible manner.
automatic heating system. Winter opera- ● Non‐alloy steel When disposing of AdBlue®, observe the
tion is therefore also ensured for temper- ● Galvanised steel legal requirements for the country you are
atures below ‐11 °C. currently in.
If AdBlue is stored in these types of con-
tainer, constituents of these metals may
dissolve and damage the BlueTec® ex-

Technical data
Operating data
Purity Operating data Engine

Compressed-air system Engine speeds OM 936 (7698 cm³)
Note Speed
Minimum pressure of the compressed-
Damage and malfunctions due to air system Idle speed ≈ 600 rpm
impurities in AdBlue®
Minimum pressures Pressure Around
Contamination of AdBlue® leads to Engine brake (operating
range) 1,000 rpm ...
increased emission values, catalytic Brake circuit 1 6.8 bar
3,000 rpm
converter damage, engine damage and Brake circuit 2 6.8 bar Around
malfunctions in the AdBlue® exhaust Speed range at maximum
Brake circuit 3 5.5 bar 1,200 rpm ...
engine torque
gas aftertreatment system. 1,600 rpm
Transmission circuit/
5.5 bar
▶ Do not refill the AdBlue® tank with clutch circuit Engine speed at maximum
≈ 1,800 rpm
engine output
pumped‐out AdBlue® . Spring‐loaded brake cyl-
6.8 bar
inder release pressure
▶ Avoid any impurities in AdBlue®. Engine speeds of OM 460 (12,816 cm³)
Ensure that AdBlue® is pure to avoid Supply pressures of compressed-air Speed
malfunctions in the BlueTec® exhaust system Around
gas aftertreatment. Idle speed
Supply pressures Pressure 560 rpm ... 800 rpm
If you pump AdBlue® out of the tank dur- Service brake 10.5 bar ... 13.6 bar Engine brake (operating
Around
ing a repair, for example, do not refill the Air suspension 10.5 bar ... 15.5 bar range) 1,500 rpm ...
tank with this same fluid. Otherwise the 2,500 rpm
External source of com- Engine speed at maximum
purity of the liquid is no longer guaran- pressed air (charging ≈ 1,600 rpm
11.0 bar ... 12.5 bar engine output
teed. the compressed‐air
system)
Remaining pressure
7.0 bar ... 8.7 bar
circuits

Technical data
Operating data
Engine speeds of OM 470 (10,667 cm³) Operating temperature Operating mode Temperature
and OM 471 (12,809 cm³) Maximum permissible
Operating temperature OM 936
Speed coolant temperature during ≤ 110 ℃
Operating mode Temperature operation
Around
Idle speed Around Automatically reduced
500 rpm ... 550 rpm Normal operation > 110 ℃
80 ℃ ... 100 ℃ engine output
Around
Engine brake (operating Maximum permissible
range) 1,000 rpm ...
2,300 rpm coolant temperature during ≤ 103 ℃
operation Tyre pressure
Speed range at maximum
≈ 1,100 rpm Automatically reduced
engine torque > 103 ℃ Tyres Pressure
engine output
Around Tyre pressure table for See the "Wheels and
Engine speed at maximum
engine output 1,600 rpm ... Operating temperature OM 460 single tyres tyres" section
1,800 rpm Tyre pressure table for See the "Wheels and
Operating mode Temperature
twin tyres tyres" section
Engine speeds of OM 473 (15569 cm³) Around
Normal operation Permissible difference
Speed 80 ℃ ... 95 ℃ in pressure between 20 kPa (0.2 bar/3 psi)
Maximum permissible tyres on an axle
Idle speed ≈ 500 rpm
coolant temperature during ≤ 110 ℃ Maximum permissible
Around operation 1000 kPa
Engine brake (operating air pressure for inflating
1,000 rpm ... (10.0 bar/145 psi)
range) Automatically reduced tyres
2,300 rpm > 105 ℃
engine output
Speed range at maximum
≈ 1,100 rpm
engine torque Operating temperature of OM 470, Wheel nut tightening torques
Engine speed at maximum OM 471, OM 473
engine output
≈ 1,600 rpm The tightening torques for the wheel
Operating mode Temperature nuts are identical for light‐alloy and steel
Around wheels.
Normal operation
85 ℃ ... 105 ℃

Technical data
Compressed-air reservoir
Wheel nut tightening torques Level control system b– For the purposes of identification, the
reservoir is marked with a factory no. and
Wheels Torque
Pressure the manufacturer of the reservoir, as well
Wheel nuts with pressure plate as the key operating data and the CE mark,
Fill the air suspension via
(hub centring) M22x1.5 for 20", see the identification plate or inscriptions
600 Nm connection 28 on the electronic ≤ 12.5 bar
22.5" and 24" rims, 10 hole directly on the wall of the reservoir.
air processing unit
mounting
c– The reservoir is manufactured with a
Wheel nuts with pressure plate "Declaration of conformity" in accordance
(hub centring) M18 x 1.5 with Article 12 of Directive 2009/105/EC.
400 Nm Compressed-air reservoir
for 17.5" wheel rims, 6‐hole
d– The reservoir is to be secured to the vehicle
mounting
Information on the compressed-air by tensioning straps (clamps).
Wheel nuts with conical spring If the reservoir is an aluminium reservoir,
washers
450 Nm reservoir
contact surfaces must be designed to
Connecting flange with twin tyres Information for the initial purchaser inhibit corrosion or mechanical damage.
450 Nm Tensioning straps are to be positioned in
14.00 R 20 and other users
such a way that they do not come into
Wheel nut covers 60 Nm
Supporting documentation in accord- contact with the base connecting seams;
ance with Directive 2009/105/EC of the the reservoir is not to be subjected to
any stress that would jeopardise operating
European Parliament and of the Coun- safety.
Spring-loaded brake cylinder release
cil and in accordance with the technical Coatings applied to aluminium reservoirs
torque/release pressure
standard EN 286‐2. must not contain lead, and the top coat of
Torque/ paint must only be applied over a suitable
Spring‐loaded brake cylinder Accompanying documentation
pressure primer coat. Steel threaded connections
a– The reservoir is only intended for use for aluminium reservoirs must have a
Release torque of the release
≤ 70 Nm in compressed‐air systems and auxiliary corrosion‐proof coating.
screw
equipment on motor vehicles and their – Aluminium reservoirs are only to be cleaned
Tightening torque of the release
≤ 35 Nm trailers, and is only to be used to hold using non‐alkaline cleaning agents.
screw
compressed air. – The interior of the reservoir must be visible
Release pressure (with external
≥ 6.5 bar through the threaded connections.
source of compressed air)

Technical data
Compressed-air reservoir
– The reservoir must be emptied at regular 2 MB part number

intervals to prevent the accumulation of
3 Maximum operating pressure (bar)
condensation (pull ring on drain valve at
the lowest point of the reservoir). 4 Year of construction
e– The reservoir requires no maintenance if 5 Testing establishment code number
item d is complied with.
6 Volume (litres)
f– No welding, heat treatment or other
operation relevant to safety is to be
performed on the pressure‐bearing walls of
the reservoir (casing, base, threaded rings).
g– The internal pressure of the reservoir may
exceed the maximum operating pressure
Ps by no more than 10% for a brief period.
Daimler Truck AG
Compressed-air reservoir identifica- Steel reservoir

tion plate 1 Manufacturer
2 MB part number
3 Maximum operating pressure (bar)
4 Testing establishment code number
5 Year of construction
6 Volume (litres)
Aluminium reservoir
1 Manufacturer

Display messages
Notes on display messages
Notes on display messages ● For a fault/message with low priority, Observe the instructions in the dis-
the instrument cluster will display a play message.
Safety instructions grey display message. Park the vehicle in a safe place as
If you ignore warning/indicator lamps or Observe the instructions in the dis- soon as possible and notify a qualified
display messages, you will not be able play message. specialist workshop.
to identify failures and malfunctions in Continuing the journey is possible. If further information on the malfunction/
components or systems. Driving/braking ● For a fault/message with medium message is available, the display message
characteristics may be affected and the priority, the instrument cluster will shows the Û symbol. You can display
reliability and road safety of your vehicle display a yellow display message. the information using the u button on
may be impaired. The instrument cluster will also dis- the multifunction steering wheel.
▶ Have the affected system checked play a yellow display message for
If you can acknowledge the display mes-
and repaired at a qualified specialist special operating statuses, e.g. if the
sage with the 9 button, the display mes-
workshop. tyre pressure is too low on one of the
sage will disappear. You can view the dis-
▶ Always pay attention to warning lights tyres.
play message again at a later point in time
and display messages, and follow the The instrument cluster will also dis- ( → Page 163). If, in addition to the dis-
appropriate remedial measures. play a yellow display message if main- play message, an indicator lamp lights up
tenance work due has not been per- in the status area, the indicator lamp will
Operating information, fault messages formed, for example.
and warnings will automatically be dis- remain on.
Observe the instructions in the dis-
played in a display message by the in-
play message.
strument cluster. As well as the display
● For a high‐priority fault, the instru-
message, an indicator lamp may light up
ment cluster will display a red dis-
in the status area ( → Page 168).
play message.
Depending on the priority of the event, the The instrument cluster will show a red
instrument cluster will display the display display message if the brake reservoir
message in different colours: pressure is low, for example.

Display messages
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreatment/diesel particulate filter
BlueTec® exhaust gas aftertreat-

ment/diesel particulate filter
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and ▶ solutions
Â An automatic engine speed increase reduces hydrocarbon deposits in the catalytic converter.
The message disappears automatically when the process is complete.
Vehicles with diesel particulate filter: This function is not a regeneration of the diesel particulate filter.
Rotational speed increase
Â Diesel particulate filter regeneration is disabled and the fill level of the diesel particulate filter is raised.
▶ In order to enable automatic regeneration of the diesel particulate filter, deactivate the regeneration lockout as soon
as possible ( → Page 329).
Regeneration disabled
Additional text Û: Requirements for manual regeneration have not been fulfilled. Please observe the Operating
Â Instructions.
Diesel particulate filter regeneration is not possible. At least one requirement has not been fulfilled.
Manual regeneration not ▶ Observe the activation conditions and requirements for manual regeneration of the diesel particulate filter
possible ( → Page 330).
Additional text Û: Please start regeneration Please observe the Operating Instructions
The Â indicator lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster. Regeneration of the diesel particulate filter is necessary.
Â Depending on the driving operation, do the following within the next four hours:
▶ Deactivate regeneration lockout and keep it in this state as long as you are driving on a motorway or overland, until
Diesel particulate filter: the indicator lampÂ goes out.
raised fill level
or
▶ Start manual regeneration ( → Page 330).

Display messages

Additional text Û: Start regeneration immediately Please observe the Operating Instructions
The Â indicator lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster. Regeneration of the diesel particulate filter is necessary.
Â Depending on the driving operation, do the following within the next 30 minutes:
▶ Deactivate regeneration lockout and keep it in this state as long as you are driving on a motorway or overland, until
the indicator lampÂ goes out.
Diesel particulate filter full
or
▶ Start manual regeneration ( → Page 330).
Additional text Û: Start regeneration immediately Please observe the Operating Instructions
Â Indicator lamp Â in the instrument cluster also flashes.

Regeneration of the diesel particulate filter is necessary immediately and it can be started for the last time manually.
Diesel particulate filter full ▶ Start manual regeneration straight away ( → Page 330). The diesel particulate filter may otherwise only be able to be
cleaned or replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Additional text Û: Stop vehicle. Consult service centre. Regeneration is no longer possible.
Â The Â indicator lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster.

The diesel particulate filter has reached its soot load limit. Engine performance will be reduced and manual regeneration will
no longer be possible.
Diesel particulate filter full
▶ Clean the diesel particulate filter as soon as possible or have it replaced.
Additional text Û: Please top up AdBlue.
The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 10%.
Ø ▶ Top up AdBlue® tank immediately ( → Page 341).
◁ Vehicles with BlueTec® 4/BlueTec® 5: Engine output may be reduced.
AdBlue reserve
◁ Vehicles with BlueTec® 6: Engine output may be reduced and speed may be limited to approximately 20
km/h.

Display messages

Vehicles with BlueTec® 6
Additional text Û: Please top up with AdBlue. Risk of reduction in engine power
Ø The · indicator lamp in the status area also lights up.

The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 7.5%.
AdBlue reserve ▶ Top up AdBlue® tank immediately ( → Page 341).
◁ Engine output may be reduced and speed may be limited to approximately 20 km/h.
Additional text Û: Please top up with AdBlue. Reduction in engine power after stopping
Ø The · indicator lamp in the status area also lights up.

The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 2.5%.
AdBlue very low ▶ Top up AdBlue® tank immediately ( → Page 341).
◁ Engine output will be reduced the next time the vehicle comes to a standstill and speed may be limited to ap-
proximately 20 km/h.
Ø The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 0%. Engine output will be reduced the next time the vehicle is started.
▶ Adapt your driving style accordingly.
AdBlue empty ▶ Top up AdBlue® tank immediately ( → Page 341).
Additional text Û: Please top up with AdBlue Risk of limit speed
The · indicator lamp in the status area also lights up.
Ø The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 0%. Engine output is reduced.
AdBlue empty
▶ Top up AdBlue® tank immediately ( → Page 341).
◁ Engine output will be reduced the next time the vehicle comes to a standstill and speed may be limited to ap-
proximately 20 km/h.

Display messages

ê The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 0%. Engine output is reduced.
Engine power reduced ▶ Top up AdBlue® tank immediately ( → Page 341).
Additional text Û: Please top up with AdBlue Risk of limit speed
· The · indicator lamp in the status area also lights up.

The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 2.5%. Engine output is reduced.
Engine power reduced ▶ Adapt your driving style accordingly.

◁ Otherwise, engine output may be reduced and speed may be limited to approximately 20 km/h.
· The · indicator lamp in the status area also lights up.

The AdBlue® level has dropped to approximately 0%. The speed is limited to approximately 20 km/h.
Speed restriction ▶ Adapt your driving style accordingly.

Display messages
ï In addition to the display message, the £ indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
The semitrailer has been detected during reversing. The fifth‐wheel coupling is unlocked
Coupling level reached ▶ Continue the coupling procedure by reversing slowly.

Additional text Û: Adapt your driving style.
The temperature of one of the drum/disk brakes on the trailer/semitrailer is too high. The drum/disk brake may overheat.
w Warning
Risk of accident due to high temperatures at the trailer/semitrailer brake
The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change. Observe the notes in the separate operating instructions
r provided by the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer.

▶ Continue your journey carefully.
Wheel brake overload ▶ Shift to a lower gear.
▶ Brake the vehicle with the continuous brake.
▶ Depress the brake pedal in addition only if the braking power of the continuous brake is not sufficient.
▶ Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

The tyre pressure is too low in at least one of the trailer/semitrailer tyres.
h Warning
Risk of accident due to insufficient or excessive tyre pressure in a trailer/semitrailer tyre
r The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change.

Also observe the notes in the separate Operating Instructions provided by the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer.
Check tyre pressure ▶ Stop the vehicle without steering or braking suddenly. Pay attention to the traffic conditions.
▶ Check the tyre pressure and correct it if required.
å The starting‐off aid on the trailer/semitrailer is switched on.
r ▶ Observe the separate Operating Instructions provided by the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer.
Starting-off aid active
ó The leading/trailing axle on the trailer/semitrailer has been raised.
r ▶ Observe the separate Operating Instructions provided by the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer.
Additional axle raised

Display messages

In addition to the display message, the indicator lamp ï in the instrument cluster also comes on.
The level control for the trailer/semitrailer is outside the driving level.
Warning
ñ Risk of accident due to an inappropriate trailer/semitrailer height

The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change.
Note trailer height.
Observe the maximum headroom clearance of underpasses. Observe the notes in the separate operating instructions
provided by the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer.
▶ Set the level control for the trailer/semitrailer to the driving level; see the separate operating instructions provided
by the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer.
b The turn signal light on the trailer/semitrailer is faulty.
r ▶ Replace the corresponding bulb; see the separate Operating Instructions issued by the trailer/semitrailer manufac-
turer.
Turn signal faulty (Example)

Display messages

In addition to the display message, the £ indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
If the instrument cluster displays the warning and a warning tone sounds, the fifth‐wheel kingpin was detected during
coupling/uncoupling and the monitored fifth‐wheel coupling is not locked.
Danger
£ Risk of accident due to damaged or unlocked fifth-wheel coupling

You could lose the semitrailer.
Open semitrailer coupling. ▶ Always ensure that the fifth‐wheel coupling is undamaged and has been locked after coupling up.
▶ When uncoupling: Continue with the process.
▶ When coupling: Check the locking mechanism on the monitored fifth-wheel coupling.
or
▶ Couple the semitrailer again.
In addition to the display message, the £ indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
If the instrument cluster shows the warning and a warning tone sounds, the semitrailer is no longer detected when reversing.
The monitored fifth‐wheel coupling is not yet engaged.
£ Danger
Driving level below coupling Risk of accident due to damaged or unlocked fifth-wheel coupling
level You could lose the semitrailer.
▶ Always ensure that the fifth‐wheel coupling is undamaged and has been locked after coupling up.
▶ Correct the semitrailer level until the instrument cluster shows the Coupling level reached display message.

Display messages

Additional text Û: Check semitrailer coupling: open if needed.
In addition to the display message, the ¤ indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
If the instrument cluster shows the warning and a warning tone sounds, the monitored fifth‐wheel coupling is locked and the
semitrailer is not detected.
¤ Danger
Check semitrailer coupling.
Risk of accident due to damaged or unlocked fifth-wheel coupling
In addition to the display message, the ¤ indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
If the instrument cluster shows the warning and a warning tone sounds, the monitored fifth‐wheel coupling is locked and the
semitrailer is not detected.
¤ Danger
Check semitrailer coupling. You could lose the semitrailer.
or
▶ Couple the semitrailer again.

Display messages

In addition to the display message, the î indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
The sensor on the fifth‐wheel coupling is faulty. The state of the monitored fifth‐wheel coupling has not been correctly
detected.
See the supplementary text Û regarding malfunction/remedy, e.g. Clean sensor
î Danger
Semitrailer coupling sensor
faulty
▶ Clean the sensor; see the manufacturer's Operating Instructions.

Display messages
Lighting system
Lighting system
All the vehicle's exterior lighting is electronically monitored. If the display message is displayed, a bulb has failed. The
display message contains information on the fault location and how to rectify the fault, e.g. Replace light bulb. Left dipped
beam faulty or Visit workshop. Left dipped beam faulty.
If the "Replace light bulb" display message is displayed:
b ▶ Replace the respective bulb ( → Page 103).

◁ If you do not switch off the lighting system before you change the bulb, you must reset the display message
afterwards. To do so, switch the relevant lighting or, if necessary, the vehicle off and on again.
s or
▶ Consult a qualified workshop in the case of LED lights and xenon bulbs.
If the "Consult a workshop" display message is displayed:
▶ Visit a qualified workshop.

Display messages
Operating fluids and maintenance
Operating fluids and maintenance

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir for the windscreen washer/headlight cleaning system has fallen to
¥ approximately one litre.

▶ Top up the washer fluid reservoir ( → Page 396).
¯ Additional text: 12/08/2020 3000 km (example)

A maintenance appointment is due.
▶ Schedule the service appointment at a qualified specialist workshop.
Air filter
¯ In addition to the display message, the ¯ indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
A maintenance appointment is due.
Air filter Maintenance due ▶ Have the maintenance work carried out at a qualified specialist workshop.
(Example)
¯ In addition to the display message, the ¯ indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
A maintenance due date has been significantly exceeded. This can result in damage to the vehicle and the major assemblies.
It may also result in increased wear.
Engine Maintenance due
immediately (Example) ▶ Have the maintenance work carried out immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
The main tank has run dry.
6 On vehicles with an additional fuel tank, you must observe the filling order, otherwise the fuel display does not correctly
show the current fuel level and the on‐board computer does not show the correct range.
Fully refuel the main tank ▶ First, completely fill up the main tank on the left-hand side of the vehicle ( → Page 338).
first ▶ Then fill up the additional fuel tank.
6 The fuel has dropped to the reserve level.

▶ Refuel the vehicle.

Display messages
Brakes
Brakes
Additional text Û: Visit workshop.
In addition, the J warning lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
The vehicle's brake system is malfunctioning.
J Danger
Driving and braking charac- Risk of an accident due to a brake system malfunction
teristics changed If the brake system is malfunctioning, braking characteristics may be impaired.
▶ Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Additional text Û: Active Brake Assist, Lane Keeping Assist, distance control and ATTENTION ASSIST faulty Please have
rectified at next maintenance
The vehicle's brake system is malfunctioning.
Full braking power may not be available.
J Warning
Increased brake force and
Risk of accident due to increased pedal travel
pedal travel
The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised.
▶ Carefully bring the vehicle to a standstill and park it safely.
▶ Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Brakes

In addition to the display message, the # indicator lamp lights up, supplemented by s in the status area.
The maintenance work due has not been performed.
The wear limits of the brake linings and/or brake disks have been exceeded.
¯ Danger
Risk of accident due to impaired braking power
Brakes, axle 1 Maintenance
When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be impaired.
due immediately (Example)
▶ Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
▶ Visit a qualified workshop.

Display messages
Brakes

The wiring for the trailer/semitrailer is interrupted or the maintenance work due has not been performed on the trailer/
semitrailer.
The wear limit of the brake linings and/or brake disks of the trailer/semitrailer have been exceeded.
Danger
# Risk of accident due to impaired braking power

When the brake pads have reached their wear limit, the braking power may be impaired.
r ▶
▶
Continue your journey carefully.
Have the brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
Brake pads completely worn

Note
Observe the notes in the separate operating instructions provided by the trailer/semitrailer manufacturer.
▶ Have the trailer/semitrailer wiring checked immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.
or
▶ Have the brake linings on the trailer/semitrailer replaced immediately at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Brakes

Additional text Û: Adapt your driving style.
The temperature of one of the disk brakes on the towing vehicle is too high.
w Warning
Risk of accident due to high disc brake temperatures
s The vehicle's driving and braking characteristics may change. The disk brake may overheat.
Braking effect limited ▶ Shift to a lower gear.
▶ Brake the vehicle with the continuous brake.
▶ Depress the brake pedal in addition only if the braking power of the continuous brake is not sufficient.
Proximity Control Assist has stopped the vehicle.
The parking brake was not applied and one of the following actions was performed:
● The driver left the driver's seat.
● The driver's door was opened.
! ● The vehicle was switched off.
Danger
Engage parking brake.
Risk of accident if the driver's seat is vacated with Proximity Control Assist active
The distance control assistant function is no longer keeping the vehicle stationary. The parked vehicle may roll away. You
may endanger yourself and others.

Display messages
Brakes

The parking brake has not been applied.
The vehicle was parked with a gear engaged and the parking brake released. After the engine has been switched off, the
transmission automatically shifts to neutral.
! Danger
Engage parking brake. Risk of accident due to the vehicle rolling away by itself
The parked vehicle may roll away. You may endanger yourself and others.
Vehicles with parameterisable special module (PSM): Parking brake not applied.
You did not apply the parking brake before switching on the power take‐off.
! Danger
Risk of accident due to the vehicle rolling away by itself
Engage parking brake.
The parked vehicle may roll away. You may endanger yourself and others.
▶ Apply the parking brake before switching on the power take‐off.

Display messages
Compressed-air system
8 The compressed‐air dryer is malfunctioning.

▶ Have the compressed-air dryer checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Condensation in
compressed-air reservoir
The reserve pressure in the transmission/clutch is too low.
Danger
9 Risk of accident due to low supply pressure

In the event of pressure loss or if the supply pressure in the transmission/coupling circuit is too low, you will no longer
be able to shift gear properly.
Transmission/clutch reser-
voir pressure too low ▶ Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
▶ Let the engine run until the display message goes out and the reserve pressure has reached an adequate level.
▶ If the malfunction occurs regularly, have the compressed‐air system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

The supply pressure in brake circuit 1 \ or 2 ^ is too low.
If the supply pressure in the spring‐loaded brake circuit and the trailer's brake circuit is too low, the display message shows
the J symbol.
Possible causes:
● Too much compressed air was used.
● There is a leak in the compressed‐air system.
\ Danger
Risk of accident due to leaking compressed-air brake system
Brake supply pressure in The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised.
circuit 1 too low (Example)
▶ Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
▶ Fill the compressed-air system by starting the drive system.
◁ The J warning lamp goes off and you can continue the journey.
▽ The J warning light does not go off.
▶ Check that the compressed air brake system is not leaking ( → Page 218).
▽ The J warning lamp does not go off, the compressed-air brake system has been checked for leaks.
▶ Have the compressed-air brake system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Electrical system
Electrical system
Additional text Û: Electrical consumers are switched off
In addition to the display message, the # indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
The engine is switched off and the battery charge level is low.
The following electrical consumers will automatically be deactivated:
● Audio device/subwoofer
● Cigarette lighter/refrigerator box
● 24 V sockets/12 V sockets
● 1st switch for non‐MB body (e.g. load compartment lamp)
● Stowage compartment lamp above the windscreen
● Reading lamps/night lighting/rear stowage compartment lighting/ambient living area light
# ●
●
●
Wireless charging (mobile phone)/USB charging function
12 V port for body manufacturers
Opening function of the sliding or tilting roof
Energy-saving mode active
● Heating for outside mirrors/heating for compressed‐air dryer/heating for berth
Note
The audio equipment can be switched on again manually after the automatic switch‐off.
The duration of actuation will be shortened for the following functions:
● Automatic activation of the interior lighting
● Switch‐off delay time of the exterior lighting
▶ If necessary, start the vehicle.
◁ When you start the vehicle, the electrical consumers will be available again.

Display messages
Electrical system

Additional text Û: Visit workshop Energy saving mode, battery charge level warning and alternator management
# unavailable
The measurement values for the battery charge level are not available. No warning will be issued for these in the event of a
critical battery charge level.
Battery charge level cannot
be detected ▶ If electrical consumers are switched on when the engine is switched off, be mindful of the electricity consumption.
▶ Have the electrical system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Additional text Û: Resetting the diesel particulate filter fill level was not successful Please have rectified at next
maintenance
In addition to the display message, three short warning tones will sound and the indicator lamp # in the status area will
# light up yellow.
The vehicle is switched off and the battery charge level is too low.
Bat. charge level too low ▶ Start the vehicle.

Start engine or
▶ Charge the battery ( → Page 403).
▶ Switch off electrical consumers that are not required, e.g. climate control.
Additional text Û: Stop vehicle. Switch off engine. Consult workshop
The voltage in the batteries is too high.
# Warning
Risk of accident due to altered voltage in the vehicle electrical system
The vehicle's driving characteristics may change. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised.
Overvoltage
▶ Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic conditions.

Display messages
Electrical system

Supplementary text while driving Û: Stop vehicle Driving charact. changed
Supplementary text if the vehicle is stationary Û: If possible, charge the battery If the fault persists, contact service
The indicator lamp # in the instrument cluster status area also lights up.
Warning
Risk of accident due to altered voltage in the vehicle electrical system
# The vehicle's driving characteristics may change. The operating and road safety of the vehicle is jeopardised.
Undervoltage ▶ Switch off the vehicle.
▶ Stop the vehicle.
▶ Charge the battery ( → Page 403).
If the malfunction persists:
Additional text Û: Discharging battery Stop vehicle Contact service
In addition to the display message, the # indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
The three‐phase alternator is faulty or the poly‐V‐belt has torn.
# Warning
Alternator faulty Risk of accident due to altered or missing charging voltage of the alternator
▶ Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages
Electrical system
I The CAN connection to the instrument cluster has failed.

The instrument cluster can no longer display important information for the operational and road safety of the vehicle.
Instrument cluster display
and controls faulty ▶ Have the instrument cluster checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Driving systems
Driving systems
Active Brake Assist has automatically triggered an emergency braking manoeuvre (maximum full‐stop braking) and the
emergency braking manoeuvre has been completed.
È ▶ Remove the vehicle from the danger zone as quickly as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions as you
do so.
Emergency braking finished ▶ Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
▶ Make sure that the vehicle is in proper working order and that the load is secured properly.
Additional text Û: Service required Frequent emergency braking
È Warning
Risk of accident due to malfunction of Active Drive Assist
If Active Brake Assist is not available, you will not receive any collision warnings. In critical situations, the vehicle will not
Active Brake Assist not
brake automatically.
available
▶ If necessary, use the service brake to brake the vehicle.
▶ Have the Active Brake Assist system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Driving systems

You are driving faster than approximately 20 km/h in manoeuvring level. If you drive faster than approximately 40 km/h, a
warning tone also sounds.
Warning
þ Risk of accident due to manoeuvring level

Deactivate shunting level. ▶ Adapt your driving style to the conditions when manoeuvring.
▶ Deactivate manoeuvring level ( → Page 312).
or
▶ Reduce the speed.
Attention Assist has detected tiredness or increasing lapses in concentration.
A warning tone will also sound.
Ô ▶ If necessary, take a break.
Attention Assist: take a

break? Note
Take regular and timely breaks during longer journeys.

Display messages
Driving systems

In addition, the Á warning lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
If the chassis is not at driving level while driving, Stability Control Assist is deactivated.
Õ Danger
Risk of accident due to incorrect driving level
ESP deactivated Set normal
level
▶ Set the driving level before you set off.
▶ Set driving level ( → Page 309).
In addition, the Á warning lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
Stability Control Assist is malfunctioning.
Õ Danger
Risk of skidding if ESP® has a fault
ESP not available
If ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® cannot perform vehicle stabilisation.
▶ Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Driving systems

Additional text Û: Do not steer when the vehicle is at a standstill. Steer carefully when the vehicle is moving at walking
pace. or Active Brake Assist, Lane Keeping Assist, distance control and ATTENTION ASSIST not available Please have
The power steering has detected a malfunction. The steering characteristics may change.
D Strong steering movements in manoeuvring mode can activate emergency operation of the steering.
▶ Stop the vehicle, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
Steering characteristics ▶ Switch off the vehicle.
changed
▶ Restart the vehicle.
If the error is displayed again or still displayed:
▶ Have the vehicle checked by a qualified specialist workshop.
Additional text Û: Active steering wheel return inoperative or Active Brake Assist, Lane Keeping Assist, distance control
and ATTENTION ASSIST not available Please have rectified at next maintenance
A fault has occurred in the steering control unit. The vehicle's driving characteristics may change. The steering wheel will
not return to the straight‐ahead position.
D Do not steer up to the steering stop, otherwise the steering may overheat.
Do not turn the steering ▶ Switch off the vehicle.
wheel to the stop

Display messages
Driving systems

The steered additional axle is malfunctioning and has been centred automatically. It is deactivated and no longer steers
actively.
▶ Drive on carefully and stop at the next opportunity. Adjust your driving style to the changed handling and steering
characteristics.
D ▶
▶
Stop the vehicle and switch it off.
Restart the vehicle after ten seconds.
Leading/trailing axle centred ◁ The display message will disappear.
◁ The steered additional axle is reactivated.
▽ The display message does not disappear.
▶ Have the steered additional axle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Driving systems

The steered additional axle is malfunctioning and is only steering passively. Stability Control Assist may also have been
deactivated as a result. If the Stability Control Assist has been switched off, the display message shows Á ESP not
available.
In extreme driving conditions, e.g. when braking suddenly on a slippery or uneven carriageway, the steerable additional
axle may deactivate itself. It will then only steer passively. In vehicles with a height‐adjustable trailing axle, it is no longer
possible to lower the additional axle while the vehicle is moving.
D Warning
Risk of accident due to temporary deactivation of Stability Control Assist
Steer. characteristics of If Stability Control Assist is deactivated due to a faulty steered additional axle, the vehicle's stability is decreased.
add. axle changed ▶ Drive on carefully and stop the vehicle safely at the next opportunity. Pay attention to the traffic conditions.
▶ Adjust your driving style to the changed driving and steering characteristics.
▶ Stop the vehicle and switch it off.
▶ Restart the vehicle after approximately ten seconds.
◁ The display message will disappear. The steered additional axle is reactivated.
If the display message does not disappear:
▶ Have the steered additional axle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Driving systems

Additional text Û: Stop vehicle. Switch off engine.
In addition, the D warning lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.
The steering gear has overheated.
D ▶
▶
Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Switch off the vehicle.
Power-steering assistance ▶ Let the steering gear cool down.
overheated ▶ Restart the vehicle.
When the display message re‐appears:
D In addition, the D warning lamp lights up on the instrument cluster.

The vehicle rolls without the engine running.
Power steering: function not ▶ Stop vehicle.
assured or

Display messages
Driving systems

Additional text Û: Stop vehicle Check hydraulic steering during shunting Consult service centre
Steering operates in emergency operation mode.
Warning
D Risk of accident due to failure of the hydraulic power steering

The hydraulic power steering has failed.
Power steering: function not
assured

Display messages
Driving systems

A fault has occurred in the electric power steering.
D Warning
Risk of accident due to failure of electric power steering
Power steering is not ensured continuously.
Power steering: function not
assured ▶ Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic conditions.
Additional text Û: Visit workshop Camera calibration faulty Lane Keeping Assist and Attention Assist unavailable
Ô Warning
Risk of accident due to impairments or unavailable driver assistance/driver safety systems
Lane Keeping Assist not
available (Example) Driver assistance/driving safety systems may have a fault or be temporarily unavailable.
▶ Drive on carefully.

Display messages
Driving systems

Additional text Û: Visit workshop Lane Keeping Assist and Attention Assist unavailable
Ô Warning
Lane Keeping Assist not
available Driver assistance/driving safety systems may have a fault or be temporarily unavailable.
Additional text Û: Visit workshop Lane Keeping Assist and Attention Assist unavailable
Ô Warning
Lane Keeping Assist faulty Driver assistance/driving safety systems may have a fault or be temporarily unavailable.
Additional text Û: Visit workshop Lane Keeping Assist, left speaker malfunctioning or Visit workshop Lane Keeping Assist,
right speaker malfunctioning
Warning
Ô Risk of accident due to faulty loudspeakers

The left or right speaker is malfunctioning.
Lane Keeping Assist faulty If a speaker is malfunctioning on one side, Lane Keeping Assist will issue a warning tone from the intact speaker,
regardless of the side. It is possible that in this situation, a warning tone may sound on the side opposite to the affected
side of the vehicle.
▶ Have Lane Keeping Assist checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Driving systems

Additional text Û: Reduce interior temperature
Multifunction camera temperature too high
If the display message appears while the vehicle is in motion:
The multifunction camera is malfunctioning.
In addition, the corresponding indicator lamps of malfunctioning driver assistance/driving safety systems in the instrument
cluster may light up.
Ô Warning
Assistance system mal- Risk of accident due to limited function of the multifunction camera
function. Front camera's Driver assistance/driving safety systems may have a fault or be temporarily unavailable.
temperature too high
▶ Have the multifunction camera checked at a qualified specialist workshop as soon as possible.
If the display message appears when the vehicle is parked:
▶ Reduce the interior temperature, e.g. by ventilating.
▶ Wait until the multifunction camera has cooled down and the display message disappears.

Display messages
Driving systems

Additional text Û: Clean windscreen
The visibility of the multifunction camera is reduced.
Possible causes:
● Dirt on windscreen in multifunction camera field of vision
● Heavy rain or fog
● The windscreen is steamed up on the inside: Under certain weather conditions, condensation may form on the inside
of the windscreen, especially during the winter months.
Ô Warning
Assistance system malfunc-
tion. Front camera's field of Driver assistance/driving safety systems may have a fault or be temporarily unavailable.
vision blocked ▶ Drive on carefully.
If the causes no longer apply, the driver assistance and driving safety systems are activated again. The corresponding
indicator lamps and the display message in the instrument cluster go out.
▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
▶ Clean the windscreen where the camera is located ( → Page 389).

Display messages
Driving systems

Additional text Û: Clean sensors
There is a distance sensor malfunction.
Possible causes:
● Sensor system dirty
● Heavy rainfall
● Longer journey next to uniform structures close to the carriageway, e.g. tunnel walls
Warning
S Risk of accident due to impairments or unavailable driver assistance/driver safety systems

Driver assistance/driving safety systems may have a fault or be temporarily unavailable.
Assistance system malfunc-
tion. Distance sensors’ field If the causes no longer apply, the driver assistance and driving safety systems are activated again. The corresponding
of vision blocked indicator lamps and the display message in the instrument cluster go out.
▶ Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
▶ Clean the covers of the distance sensors on the front bumper and the side mud guards with water ( → Page 389).
Note
Do not use any dry, rough or hard cloths and do not scrub or scratch.

Display messages
Driving systems

The S indicator lamp also lights up on the instrument cluster.
S Warning
Driver assistance/driving safety systems may have a fault or be temporarily unavailable.
Assistance systems faulty

Display messages
Transmission and clutch

Ô The clutch is under heavy load.

▶
▶
Pull away in first gear only.
Keep the process of pulling away or manoeuvring as brief as possible.
Clutch under heavy strain
The permissible operating temperature of the transmission or retarder has been reached. The temperature of the transmission
oil or coolant is excessive. This may be caused by an oil level in the transmission that is low or too high. If the oil
temperature in the transmission remains elevated, the transmission may be damaged.
Ô ▶
▶
Switch off the retarder.
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, taking into account the road and traffic conditions.
Transmission: oil temperat- ▶ Apply the parking brake and shift the automatic transmission to neutral position.
ure too high ▶ Leave the vehicle running at a speed of 1200 rpm to 1500 rpm for between two and three minutes.
▶ If the oil temperature does not drop, check the oil level in the automatic transmission. ( → Page 400)
▶ If the display message continues to be displayed, contact a qualified workshop and have the fault rectified.
Ô The permissible operating temperature of the clutch has been reached. Further load poses a risk of clutch damage.
▶
▶
Shift to a lower gear for manoeuvring or pulling away.
Keep the process of moving off or manoeuvring as brief as possible. Otherwise the clutch will be overloaded.
Clutch under heavy strain
1 You have pressed the switch 1for manoeuvring mode too quickly.
▶ Press the switch 1 again.
Press shunting switch for
longer

Display messages

If the display message disappears again, you have pressed the 1 manoeuvring mode switch for too long.
If the display message remains on, the switch is 1 defective.
1 If the display message disappears again:

▶ Press the switch 1 again.
Press shunting switch faster. If the display message remains on:
▶ Have the switch 1 checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Ú Note
Damage due to system malfunction
Transmission faulty Transmission fault. Continuing the journey is possible with restrictions.
▶ Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

Note
Automatic transmission has a malfunction. Continuing the journey is possible with restrictions.
▶ Have the automatic transmission checked by a qualified specialist workshop.
Depending on the fault, a specialist workshop can provide assistance so you can limp home by specifying fault codes. You
can display the fault codes either via the on‐board computer in the Diagnostics menu window ( → Page 163) or via the
push‐button gearshift of the automatic transmission ( → Page 400).
Ú ▶
▶
Stop the vehicle in accordance with the traffic conditions.
Apply the parking brake.
Transmission faulty (only
vehicles with automatic
transmission) ▶ Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position.
Display of fault codes via the push‐button gearshift:
▶ Simultaneously press the & and * buttons on the push-button gearshift twice.
◁ The push-button display shows the 5 digit fault codes one after the other.
▶ To display the next fault code, press the MODE button.
◁ A maximum of five fault codes can be stored.
▶ To exit the fault code display, press the & and * buttons of the automatic transmission at the same time.
or
▶ Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position.

Display messages

Ø Note
Clutch faulty Clutch fault. Continuing the journey is possible with restrictions.
▶ Have the clutch checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Danger
Risk of accident due to low supply pressure
The transmission no longer shifts. The supply pressure in the transmission/clutch circuit may be too low.
▶
Ø ▶
▶
Park the vehicle safely as soon as possible.
Apply the parking brake.
If the display message Transmission/clutch reservoir pressure too low appears: Let the engine run until there is
Clutch faulty
sufficient supply pressure in the transmission/clutch circuit again.
◁ The display message Transmission/clutch reservoir pressure too low will disappear.
▶ Restart the vehicle after approximately ten seconds.
▶ When the display message Clutch faulty Active Brake Assist, Lane Keeping Assist, distance control and ATTENTION
ASSIST faulty Please have rectified at next maintenance re-appears: Activate back-up mode.
▶ If it is not possible to activate back-up mode: Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages

Additional text: 180°C (example)
Ù The oil temperature in the turbo retarder clutch is too high.

▶ Shift to a lower gear.
Clutch plate oil temperature ◁ The engine speed will increase and the dry clutch will be closed.
Ö The oil temperature in the retarder is too high.

▶ Shift to a lower gear.
Retarder: oil temperature ◁ The engine speed and the engine braking effect will increase.
too high
ù You are driving faster than approximately 50 km/h with an off‐road gear engaged. The temperature in the retarder is too
high.
▶ If the off-road gear is engaged, drive at a low engine speed or engage on-road gear.
Off-road reduction gear

Display messages
Engine and cooling
Engine and cooling

The upper and/or lower air regulation system is malfunctioning, e.g. due to foreign objects blocking the engine radiator.
▶ Stop the vehicle and switch it off, paying attention to road and traffic conditions.
I ▶ Check the upper and lower air regulation system for foreign objects and dirt and remove the foreign objects or dirt as
necessary.
Radiator shutters inoperative If no foreign objects or dirt can be found or the display message is shown again:
(Example)
▶ Manually open the air regulation system and lock it in place ( → Page 426).
▶ Have the air regulation system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
I Additional text Û: Visit workshop.

The electronic drive control is malfunctioning.
Drive control faulty ▶ Observe the instructions in the display message.

Additional text Û: Empty water separator.
The washer fluid level in the water separator is too high.
ÿ ▶ Drain the fuel filter with water separator on the engine ( → Page 422).
If the vehicle is equipped with a fuel prefilter:
Water separator full
▶ Check whether the water has separated in the inspection glass and, if necessary, drain the fuel prefilter
( → Page 422).
One of the following systems is malfunctioning:
● Engine
ÿ ●
●
Engine cooling
Engine management
Engine faulty ● Fuel injection system
▶ Have the systems checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Engine and cooling
ÿ The poly‐V‐belt may be damaged or the tension of the poly‐V‐belt may not be sufficient.
▶ Have the poly-V-belt checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Engine cooling faulty
The coolant temperature is too high. Engine power output is automatically reduced.
? ▶
or
Shift to a lower gear.
Coolant temperature too

high
▶ Remove objects that could block the air supply to the radiator, e.g. paper that has blown onto the grille.
The coolant temperature is too high. Engine power output is automatically reduced.
? ▶
or
Shift to a lower gear.
Engine protection: engine

power reduced
▶ Remove objects that could block the air supply to the radiator, e.g. paper that has blown onto the grille.
? In addition to the display message, the ? indicator lamp in the status area lights up.
▶
▶
Coolant temperature too
high ▶ Apply the parking brake.
▶ Let the engine cooling system cool down.

Display messages
Engine and cooling

Additional text Û: Top up coolant.
+ The coolant level has dropped below the normal fill level. The yellow display message is shown when the engine is cold and
the vehicle is switched on.
▶ Top up coolant ( → Page 394).
Coolant level too low
▶ If the coolant level drops again, immediately have the cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
+ The electrical connector or the hose fitting on the coolant reserve tank is loose. The turquoise cap on the coolant expansion
reservoir is not tight.
▶ Check the electrical connector and the hose fitting on the coolant expansion reservoir .
Coolant pressure regulation
faulty ▶ If you detect any leakage, have the engine cooling system checked at a qualified specialist workshop.
Additional text Û: Top up coolant Coolant temperature not reliable
In addition to the display message, the + indicator lamp in the status area lights up. The coolant temperature display
cannot be relied upon for as long as the + indicator lamp is on.
+ The coolant level has dropped at least three litres below normal level. The engine's operating safety is at risk.
▶
▶
Coolant level too low
▶ Top up coolant ( → Page 394).
▶ Have the engine cooling system checked for leak tightness at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Engine and cooling

In addition to the display message, the 5 indicator lamp in the status area lights up. The oil pressure in the engine is too
low.
5 The engine's operating safety is at risk.

▶
▶
Engine oil pressure too low
▶ Check the oil level in the engine and refill engine oil ( → Page 400).
▶ Notify a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Tyres
Tyres
h Additional text Û: Replace tyre pressure sensor

In addition to the display message, the h indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The battery of the tyre
pressure sensor in the spare wheel is flat.
Spare wheel tyre pressure
sensor battery low ▶ Have the tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
h Additional text Û: Check and correct tyre pressure.

In addition to the display message, the h indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The tyre pressure in the spare wheel is too low.
Tyre pressure in spare wheel
too low ▶ Check the tyre pressure and correct it if required.
h Additional text Û: Spare wheel tyre pressure monitor failure

The tyre pressure monitor of the spare wheel is malfunctioning.
Tyre pressure monitor in
spare wheel faulty ▶ Have the tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Additional text Û: Check and correct tyre pressure.
h In addition to the display message, the h indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up.
The tyre pressure in one or more of the tyres is too low.
The Tyres menu window in the on‐board computer shows the affected tyres amber or red.
Tyre pressure too low

Display messages
Tyres

Additional text Û: Check and correct tyre pressure.
h The pressure in one or more tyres has increased significantly while driving.
The Tyres menu window in the on‐board computer shows the tyres concerned in colour.
Tyre pressure too high ▶ Stop the vehicle without steering or braking suddenly. Pay attention to the traffic conditions.
Additional text Û: Reduce speed drastically.
Danger
Risk of accident due to excessive tyre temperature
The temperature in one or more tyres has risen significantly while driving.
h ● The brakes may have overheated.

● The tyre pressure may be too low.
Reifentemperatur zu hoch
▶ Drive on slowly.
◁ The tyre temperature is lowered by the airflow.
▶ If the tyre temperature has fallen, have the tyres and brakes checked and the cause of the problem rectified at a
h Additional text Û: Replace tyre pressure sensor

In addition to the display message, the h indicator lamp in the instrument cluster lights up. The battery of a tyre pressure
sensor is flat.
Tyre pressure sensor battery
low ▶ Have the tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages
Tyres
h Additional text Û: Replace tyre pressure sensor or Failure, tyre pressure monitor for one/multiple tyre(s)
The tyre pressure sensor is malfunctioning on one of the tyres.
Tyre pressure sensor faulty ▶ Have the tyre pressure sensor replaced at a qualified specialist workshop.
Additional text Û : Failure, tyre pressure monitor for one/multiple tyre(s)
The tyre pressure monitoring system on one or more tyres has failed. No signal is received by one or more tyre pressure
sensors, e.g. due to a source of radio interference.
h ▶ Drive on.
◁ As soon as the cause is rectified, the tyre pressure monitor is reactivated and the tyre pressure level is displayed
Tyre pressure monitor faulty again.
▽ If the tyre monitoring is not automatically activated after a long journey:
▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked in a qualified specialist workshop.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
▶
h Drive on.
◁ As soon as the cause is rectified, the tyre pressure monitor is reactivated and the tyre pressure level is displayed
again.
Tyre pressure monitor faulty ▽ If the tyre pressure monitor does not activate automatically after a long journey:
▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked in a qualified specialist workshop.
The wheel detection on the tyre pressure monitor is malfunctioning.
h ▶ Drive the vehicle at a speed of over 30 km/h for at least ten minutes.
▽ If the display message continues to be displayed:
Wheel detection not possible ▶ Have the tyre pressure monitoring system checked by a qualified specialist workshop.
h Additional text Û: Lower additional axle.

The trailing axle is raised while the tyre pressure monitoring system is performing automatic wheel detection.
Wheel detection not possible ▶ Lower the trailing axle ( → Page 314).

Display messages
Tyres
h Additional text Û: Unlock differential

▶ The differential locks are activated. As a result, wheel detection is not possible on the locked axle.
Wheel detection not possible ▶ Disengage the differential locks ( → Page 250).
h In addition to the display message, the h indicator lamp in the instrument cluster flashes for 75 seconds and then lights
up permanently.
The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty.
Tyre pressure monitor
inoperative ▶ Visit a qualified workshop.

Display messages
Tyres

Additional text Û: Change tyre.
The tyre pressure has suddenly dropped in one or more tyres. A warning tone will also sound.
The Tyres menu window in the on‐board computer shows the affected wheel in red.
Warning
Risk of accident due to a faulty wheel/tyre
Driving with a faulty wheel/tyre can change the vehicle’s handling and braking characteristics.
▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, paying attention to road and traffic conditions, and avoiding abrupt steering
and braking manoeuvres. Pay attention to the traffic conditions.
h ▶ Replace a faulty wheel or tyre.

Concrete mixer vehicle with single tyres: The vehicle is designed in such a way that, in the event of a tyre failure on a
Flat tyre rear axle, the vehicle can continue to travel a short distance at reduced speed. This allows you to find a safe place to stop
the vehicle for the purposes of changing a wheel.
▶ Check the scale of the damage to the wheel (tyre and disc wheel).
▶ If the defective tyre constitutes a hazard to road users: Do not continue driving.
▶ Replace the wheel immediately ( → Page 431).
or
▶ If the defective tyre does not constitute a hazard to road users: Continue the journey to the next opportunity to
stop.
▶ Drive at a maximum speed of 40 km/h when driving straight ahead.
▶ Drive at a maximum speed of 15 km/h when cornering.

Display messages
Tyres

Additional text Û: Stop vehicle and release locked wheel
At least one wheel is blocked. A warning tone will also sound.
The Tyres menu window in the on‐board computer shows the affected wheel in red.
h Warning
Locked wheel Risk of accident due to brakes locking
Blocking one or more wheels can alter the vehicle's handling.
▶ Stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Pay attention to the traffic conditions.
▶ Check the affected wheel position and release the blocking if necessary.

Display messages
Key
Key
+ ▶ Use the replacement key.

Ersatzschlüssel benutzen
The key is currently not detected.
The key must be in the cab.
+ ▶ Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
If the key is still not detected:
Key not recognised
▶ Hold the key next to the Start/Stop button and start the vehicle.
The display message appears if you briefly press the Start/Stop button while driving. In an emergency situation, you can
switch off the vehicle while the vehicle is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/Stop button.
+ Danger
Risk of accident when the vehicle is switched off while driving
If you switch off the vehicle while driving, safety-relevant functions will be restricted or no longer available.
Press and hold EMERGENCY
OFF button for 3s You will then need to exert considerably more power when steering, for example.
▶ For this reason alone, you should never switch off the vehicle while you are driving.
▶ If you want to switch off the vehicle, press and hold the Start/Stop button for around three seconds.
+ Key detection is malfunctioning.

▶ Change the location of the key in the vehicle.
Hold key on contact point as
described in the Operating ▶ Hold the key to the right of the Start/Stop button and start the vehicle.
Instructions

Display messages
Key
+ You are using an incorrect key.

▶ Use the correct key.
Incorrect key
+ Additional text Û: Please visit a workshop and have the key replaced.
The key must be replaced.
Please replace key. ▶ Visit a qualified workshop.
+ The key's battery is flat.

▶ Replace the battery ( → Page 54).
Please replace ignition key
battery.
Unable to detect the key and it may no longer be in the vehicle.
+ If the key is no longer in the vehicle and you switch the vehicle off:
●
●
The vehicle can no longer be started
The vehicle cannot be centrally locked
Key not recognised
▶ Ensure that the key is in the vehicle.

Index
A Switch on and off (on-board Switching starting-off aid

computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
ABS (anti-lock braking system)
Braking with anti-lock protec- AdBlue® Additional headlamps . . . . . . . . . 100
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Add-on equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Display check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Adjustable backrest
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 High outside temperatures . . . . 490 Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Low outside temperatures . . . . . 490
Accepting a call (Multimedia Radio Adjusting the air vents . . . . . . . . 140
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339, 490
Adjusting the balance (radio with
Activating or deactivating Purity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 USB port and Bluetooth®) . . . . . . 174
Bluetooth® (multimedia radio refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Adjusting the bass (radio with
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Select the status indicator . . . . 149 USB port and Bluetooth®) . . . . . . 174
Active Brake Assist Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Adjusting the seat belt height . . . . 67
Collision warning . . . . . . . . . . . 281 System check after a malfunc- Adjusting the steering wheel . . . . . 82
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Adjusting the treble (radio with
deactivation/activation . . . . . . 280
Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 USB port and Bluetooth®) . . . . . . 174
Emergency braking . . . . . . . . . 281
Waste disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 Adjusting the volume
Additional axle Audio equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Active Sideguard Assist
Notes on starting-off aid . . . . . . 313 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Deactivate/activate warning
tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Raising/lowering the leading Telephone calls . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Deactivating and activating brake Air conditioning
intervention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303 Raising/lowering the trailing
axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314 Activating/deactivating residual
Function and notes . . . . . . . . . 294 heat utilisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Steerable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Interrupting the brake applica- Adjusting the air vents . . . . . . . 140
tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Index
Auxiliary heating . . . . . . . . . . . 136 Air regulation system Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Cleaning the coarse filter for Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . 426 ASR (acceleration skid control system)
heating and climate control . . . . 398 Airbag deactivation/activation . . . . . . 248
Defrosting the windows . . . . . . 135 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Function and notes . . . . . . . . . 248
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Assemblies
Notes on air vents . . . . . . . . . . 139 Installation location . . . . . . . . . . 39 Check for leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Notes on cooling with air Limited protection . . . . . . . . . . . 40
dehumidification . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Assistance systems
Protection provided . . . . . . . . . . 39
Overview of functions . . . . . . . . 132 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Airflow
Refrigerant filling capacity . . . . . 486 Adjusting (heating/
activation/deactivation . . . . . . . 52
air-conditioning system) . . . . . . 134
Setting the air distribution . . . . . 134 Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Setting the airflow . . . . . . . . . . 134 Air-recirculation mode Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Setting the temperature . . . . . . 134 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 135 Prior to start-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Switching air-conditioning system Alarm clock Problems (malfunction) . . . . . . . . 55
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Operating (on-board com- Switching on with interior motion
Switching air-recirculation mode puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Alcohol tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Switching on without interior
Switching cooling with air motion sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
dehumidification on/off . . . . . . 134 Animals
Vehicles for transport of hazardous
Pets in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Air distribution goods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Adjusting (heating/ anti-jackknife brake
Attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
air-conditioning system) . . . . . . 134 Function and notes . . . . . . . . . 224
Attention Assist
Apple CarPlay®
deactivation/activation . . . . . . 294
Connecting to iPhone® . . . . . . 199

Index
Function and notes . . . . . . . . . 293 Multifunction lever and gear Transmission oil level fault
Switch on and off (on-board display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Notes on stopping and pulling AUX input (radio with USB port and
Audio equipment away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Bluetooth®)
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Selecting options . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Operating (bunk switch pan- Rocking-free function . . . . . . . . 238
AUX mode (radio with USB port and
el) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Bluetooth®)
Operating (on-board com- Switch crawler mode on/off activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
External audio source . . . . . . . . 178
Setting the volume (steering Switching rocking free on/off
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
wheel buttons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
AUX socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Audio source (radio with USB port and Automatic driving lights
Bluetooth®) activation/deactivation . . . . . . . 95 Auxiliary heating
to the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Engine preheating . . . . . . 137…138
Automatic engine speed in-
crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Forced switch-off . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Automatic engine start/stop for Immediate heating mode . . . . . 137
Automatic and manual drive
refrigerated vehicles . . . . . . . . . . 207 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Setting the switch-on time . . . . 138
Drive program selection . . . . . . 235 Automatic transmission
Driving in the automatic drive Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . 400 Axle loads
program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243 Checking (on-board
EcoRoll mode and crawler Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Push-button gearshift and gear Notes on axle/wheel loads . . . . 244
Manual drive program . . . . . . . . 242 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 permissible axle loads . . . . . . . 473
Mercedes PowerShift . . . . . . . . 232

Index
Setting the display (on-board Bleeding the fuel system Calling up the telephone main
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 bleeding with the hand pump menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Axle reduction ratio . . . . . . . . . . 473 (with fuel prefilter) . . . . . . . . . . 422 Conducting a call using the call
Bleeding with the hand lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
B pump (without fuel prefilter Conducting a call using the phone
OM 460) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422 book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Battery Bleeding with the hand Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 pump (without fuel prefilter Pairing mobile phones using
Battery disconnect switch . . . . . 118 OM 470/471/473) . . . . . . . . . 422 External . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 Bleeding with the starter (without Pairing mobile phones using
Checking the charge level . . . . . 411 fuel prefilter OM 936) . . . . . . . . 422 pairing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Checking the fluid level . . . . . . . 411 Draining the fuel prefilter . . . . . 422 Playing back MP3 files . . . . . . . 184
deactivation/activation . . . . . . 405 BlueTec® exhaust gas after-treatment Playing back MP3 files us-
Disconnecting and connect- system ing the multifunction steering
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405 Automatic engine speed in- wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Energy-saving mode . . . . . . . . . 403 crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Updating the phone book . . . . . 185
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Select the status indicator . . . . 149 Bluetooth® telephony (Multime-
Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . 448 Bluetooth® mode (radio with USB dia Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . 410 port and Bluetooth®) Body/equipment mounting direct-
Battery disconnect switch . . . . . 118 Accepting/ending a call . . . . . . 184 ives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Bi-xenon headlamps Accepting/ending a call via Brake light
Notes on changing a bulb . . . . . 103 the multifunction steering Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Blackout screen activation/deactivation . . . . . . 182
Switch on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

Index
Brake system Chock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Turn signal light

Checking the compressed-air Flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 (headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
brake system for leaks . . . . . . . 218 Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Turn signal light (rear lamp
HOLD function . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Pump lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Start/switch off vehicle with cab Turn signal light (side) . . . . . . . 105
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 tilted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421 Work lamp (top) . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Trailers/semitrailers . . . . . . . . . 218 Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . 448 Bunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Brakes Tilting the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416 Bunks in the L cab
ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Vehicle does not start . . . . . . . . 427 At top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
ABS display check . . . . . . . . . . 219 Breakdown assistance Bottom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73, 77
Anti-lock protection . . . . . . . . . 220 Telediagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Car transporter on top . . . . . . . . 71
Arrangement of the spring-loaded Bulb change Folding the top bunk in and
brake cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Clearance light/side marker out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . 220 lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Ladder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Continuous brake . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Dipped beam (halogen head- Narrow on top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Frequent-stop brake . . . . . . . . . 226 lamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Hill holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Seat/daybed combinations . . . . . 75
Notes on the brake system . . . . 217 High beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Switch panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Releasing the spring-loaded brake Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Wide on top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Bunks in the M-cab
Braking assistance Overview of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 104 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
BAS (Brake Assist System) . . . . 220 Position lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Padded shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Breakdown Side marker lamps . . . . . . . . . . 112 split below . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Bleeding the fuel system . . . . . . 422 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Standard bunk, bottom . . . . . . . . 80

Index
C BlueTec® exhaust gas after- Problems (malfunction) . . . . . . . . 55

treatment system . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Problems with the locking sys-
Cab
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Electro-hydraulic tilting sys-
Chassis protection seal for Changing a bulb
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Mercedes-Benz trucks . . . . . . . 384 Brake light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Information about tilting . . . . . . 416
Cold foam mattress cover . . . . . 381 Daytime running lights . . . . . . . 105
Mechanical-hydraulic tilting
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Number plate lamp . . . . . . . . . 111
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 Rear fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Call disconnection while the Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
vehicle is in motion (multimedia Reversing light . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
High-pressure cleaner . . . . . . . 383 Tail light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Paintwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Work lamp (bottom) . . . . . . . . . 112
Calling a contact (Multimedia
Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Plastic trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Changing a wheel
Calling up MirrorLink™ apps Radiator surface . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Fitting a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
(Multimedia Radio Touch) . . . . . . 199 Seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Seat covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Camera Positioning the jack . . . . . . . . . 431
Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Cleaning (MirrorCam Removing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . 431
system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Removing the spare wheel . . . . 428
Cleaning (rain and light Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Retightening the wheel nuts . . . 431
sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Trim elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Chassis
Car wash (care) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383 Central locking system
raise/lower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Convenience central locking
Care Storing/opening the height . . . . 309
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
After driving off-road or on
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
construction sites . . . . . . . . . . 325
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . 383

Index
Chassis protection seal for Mercedes- Clutch/transmission circuit Supply pressures . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Benz trucks Checking supply pressure . . . . . 213 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Coarse filter for heating and Compressed-air system filler
Check the vehicle height . . . . . . . 214 climate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398 connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Child seat Cockpit Condensation in the compressed-
Basic instructions . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 air reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Notes on risks and dangers . . . . . 42 Switch panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Confirm the selection (Multimedia
Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
securing on the co-driver's Combination switch
seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Connecting a Bluetooth® device
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 (multimedia radio Touch) . . . . . . 192
Children Compressed-air brake system Connecting a mobile phone via
Avoiding dangers in the Checking for leaks . . . . . . . . . . 218 MirrorLink™ (multimedia radio
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Checking supply pressure . . . . . 213
Basic instructions . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Compressed-air connection Consumption
Chock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Cleaning the distance Compressed-air dryer
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Continuous brake
sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
activation/deactivation . . . . . . 231
Cleaning the exterior . . . . . . . . . 384 Compressed-air reservoir
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Clearance light/side marker lamp Identification plates . . . . . . . . . 495
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Convenience central locking sys-
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Clutch (hydraulics) Compressed-air system
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Fill with external air . . . . . . . . . 446
Filler connection . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Index
Coolant Data formats (radio with USB port and Sending . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Checking and topping up coolant Bluetooth®) Diagnostics connection . . . . . . . . . . 8
level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Dialling phone numbers from a call
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485 Data protection information list (multimedia radio Touch) . . . 195
Coolant temperature Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Diesel
Checking (on-board Data storage refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Data protection information . . . . 14 Diesel fuels
Switching off the engine . . . . . . 217 Electronic control units . . . . . . . . 11 Fuel additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Copyright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Service provider . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Daytime running lights Notes on quality . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Crawler mode activation/deactivation . . . . . . . 95 Diesel particulate filter
Drive functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Automatic regeneration . . . . . . 328
Switch on and off (on-board Deauthorising a Bluetooth® Disabling regeneration . . . . . . . 329
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 device (multimedia radio Filter change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
CRUISE CONTROL Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
activation/deactivation . . . . . . 261 Declaration of conformity Starting manual regenera-
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Electromagnetic compatibility . . . . 6 tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Jack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6…7 Differential locks
Cup holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Wireless vehicle compon- Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Cyclone dust pre-separator . . . . . 397 ents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 Using . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Diagnostic data Dipped beam
D Display (on-board activation/deactivation . . . . . . . 94
Data collection (vehicle) . . . . . . . . 11 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Index
Display Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Driver's airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Red . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 Driving level
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Yellow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496 raised (vehicles for transportation
Engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Displaying and selecting of bulk cargo, level control) . . . . 312
On-board computer . . . . . . . . . 150 quick-access (multimedia radio Driving modes
Outside temperature . . . . . . . . 143 Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Mercedes PowerShift . . . . . . . . 233
Setting the language (on-board Door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Driving safety systems
Door operating unit . . . . . . . . . 25, 27
Tank content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Doors
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Driving systems
Getting in and out . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Total distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Active Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . 280
Grab handles (getting in and out)
Trip distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Display (multimedia radio Touch) CRUISE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . 261
Steps (getting in/out) . . . . . . . . . 55
Confirm the selection . . . . . . . . 189 Frontguard Assist . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Drive functions
Enlarge view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Lane Keeping Assist . . . . . . . . . 290
Crawler mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Move view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Limiter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
EcoRoll mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Moving the view quickly . . . . . . 189 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Hydromove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Open menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 PPC (Predictive Powertrain
Manoeuvring mode . . . . . . . . . 247 Control) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Reduce view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Rocking-free function . . . . . . . . 238 Proximity Control Assist . . . . . . 263
Setting screen brightness . . . . . 191
Drive program selection Reversing camera . . . . . . . . . . 258
Display message Mercedes PowerShift . . . . . . . . 235 Specific driving situations . . . . . 283
Display (on-board Traffic Sign Assist . . . . . . . . . . 287
Driver assistance systems
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Trailer Stability Assist . . . . . . . . 304
Grey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Index
Driving time Energy-saving mode . . . . . . . . . . 403 Engine oil

Checking (on-board Engaging/ disengaging the front Application areas . . . . . . . . . . . 482
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Checking the oil level (en-
Driving tips Engine gine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . 328 Automatic engine speed in- Checking the oil level (on-board
Economical and environmentally crease . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
aware driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326 Displays operating hours (on- Consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
on loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Miscibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
on running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Oil consumption . . . . . . . . . . . 331 Oil change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Road paver mode . . . . . . . . . . . 319 Problems starting the en- Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
gine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 SAE classifications . . . . . . . . . . 482
E Setting oil quality (on-board Setting the quality (on-board
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
EcoRoll mode
Setting the idle speed . . . . . . . . 374 Setting the viscosity (on-board
Drive functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Setting the oil viscosity (on-board
Switch on and off (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Topping up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
start (emergency operation Engine output
Electromagnetic compatibility mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Notes on changes . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . 6 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Engine run-on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Electronic key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Engine speed
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . 414
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Emergency key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Engine electronics (notes) . . . . . . . . 9
Emergency number 112 (Multime- Engine identification plate . . . . . 473 Enlarging the view (Multimedia
dia Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Index
Environmental protection Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Fuel consumption

Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Folding table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 Economical driving style . . . . . . 326
Events Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Fording
Display (on-board Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323…324 fuel grade
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . 323…324 Diesel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Exterior lighting Free software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Functions during a call (multime-
Additional headlamps . . . . . . . . 100 dia radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Frequent-stop brake
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Fuses
Notes on changing a bulb . . . . . 103 Assignment diagram . . . . . . . . . 440
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Position marker lamps . . . . . . . 100 Check/switch on automatic
Rotating beacons . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Frontguard Assist circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Setting the switch-off delay time Deactivate/activate warning Checking/replacing a safety
(on-board computer) . . . . . . . . 165 tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276 fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Deactivating and activating Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
F warning tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Remove the main fuse carrier
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274 cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
First-aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Flue gas coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Fuel G
Fluid level
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 Gear shifting
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Hydraulic clutch actuation Activating and deactivating Ec-
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 oRoll mode (on-board com-
refuelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Fog light
Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Mercedes PowerShift . . . . . . . . 232
activation/deactivation . . . . . . . 96

Index
Switch crawler mode on and off Swinging the protective grille out Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
(on-board computer) . . . . . . . . 165 of the way . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Hydraulic clutch actuation system
Switch crawler mode on/off Headlight cleaning system Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
(button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Topping up fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Switch Hydromove on and Hydromove
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Heated windscreen . . . . . . . . . . . 117 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 165
Switch PPC on and off (on-board High beam usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
High visibility vest . . . . . . . . . . . 414 I
Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Highbeam Assist Idle speed
H Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Handling characteristics (unusu- Switch on and off (on-board Ignition lock
al) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Headlamp cleaning system High-pressure cleaner (care) . . . . 383 Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Hill holder Ignition run-on . . . . . . . . . .. . . . 207
Headlamp flashing . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 227 Immobiliser (alcohol tester) . . . . 207
Headlamp range . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Implied warranty (vehicle) .. . . . . 11
Headlamps Holding brake Installations . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .. 3
Basic setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Switch on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Instrument cluster
Mask (right-hand/left-hand Hydraulic auxiliary drive AdBlue® display . . . . . . . . . . . 142
traffic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Notes on winter operation . . . . . 118 Fuel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . 257
Overview of bulbs . . . . . . . . . . 104 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Cleaning the radiator/fan . . . . . 258
Swinging out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Index
Outside temperature display . . . 143 K Laptop holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

Overview of displays . . . . . . . . . . 20 Leading axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Key
Rev counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Leading/trailing axle (steer-
Carrying out a lamp check . . . . . . 47
Time display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 able) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Deactivating a function . . . . . . . . 47
Warning/indicator lamps over- Left-hand/right-hand traffic
Electronic key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Partially masking
Emergency key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Instrument lighting headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Adjusting (on-board Replacement key . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Level control system
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Check the vehicle height . . . . . . 214
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . 54
Inter-axle lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 with remote control . . . . . . . . . . 46 Forced lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Interior lighting Loading/unloading the vehicle
activation/deactivation . . . . . . 101 L when the vehicle is switched
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Automatic control (on-board Lamp check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46, 93
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Manoeuvring level . . . . . . . . . . 312
Lane Keeping Assist Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Night lighting (on-board com-
deactivation/activation . . . . . . 292 Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Displaying lane markings (on- Raise/lower the chassis with the
Notes on changing a bulb . . . . . 103
board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . 154 operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Function and notes . . . . . . . . . 290 raised driving level (vehicles for
Switch on and off (on-board transportation of bulk cargo) . . . 312
J computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Raising or lowering the
Jack Language chassis (on-board com-
Declaration of conformity . . . . 6…7 Adjusting (on-board puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307…308
Pump lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Residual air bellow pressure
Storage location . . . . . . . . . . . 414 readjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Index
Road paver mode . . . . . . . . . . . 311 Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Convenience central locking
Setting the driving level . . . . . . 309 Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Special functions . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Turn signal indicators . . . . . . . . . 99 Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Storing/opening the chassis Limiter Key with lamp check . . . . . . . . . 47
height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Problems with the locking sys-
Light switch tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Calling up a speed . . . . . . . . . . 259
M
Lighting system deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Interior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Main beam
Masking headlights (right-hand/ Passive mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 activation/deactivation . . . . . . . 98
left-hand traffic) . . . . . . . . . . . . 114 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Adaptive Highbeam Assist . . . . . . 96
Notes on changing a bulb . . . . . 103 selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Maintenance
Lights Setting the speed . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Adaptive Highbeam Assist . . . . . . 96 Storing a speed . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Checking the anti-corrosion
Automatic driving lights . . . . . . . 95 System limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Cornering light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Limiting speed Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Daytime running lights . . . . . . . . 95 Maximum speed . . . . . . . . . . . 332 Displaying maintenance due date
Dipped beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . 159
Locking system
Exterior lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Hydraulic clutch actuation
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm sys- system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Front and rear fog lights . . . . . . . 96 tem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51…52
Maintenance flap . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Headlamp flashing . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Cab lock anti-intrusion protec-
Maintenance points under the
Headlamp range adjuster (on- tion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
maintenance flap . . . . . . . . . . . 393
board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Central locking system . . . . . . . . 47
Maintenance system . . . . . . . . 392
High beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Index
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Media (Multimedia Radio Touch) Camera heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Maintenance flap Overview of media menu . . . . . . 198 Camera operating position . . . . . 86
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Medical aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Display situations in the dis-
play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Maintenance points . . . . . . . . . . 393 Mercedes PowerShift
Distance lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Malfunction Drive program selection . . . . . . 235
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Display (on-board Driving modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Important safety notes . . . . . . . . 84
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Important safety notes . . . . . . . 232
Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Manual drive program . . . . . . . . 242
Manoeuvring view . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Manoeuvring and tow-starting/towing Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
away Stopping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Operating unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Coupling jaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Switch crawler mode on/off
Select the status indicator . . . . . 86
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 (button) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Symbols in the display . . . . . . . . 91
Manoeuvring level Mercedes star
MirrorLink™ (Multimedia Radio
Level control system . . . . . . . . 312 Switch the lights on and off . . . . . 99
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Manoeuvring mode MirrorCam system Moving the view (Multimedia
usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Adjusting the back edge of the Moving the view quickly (multi-
Manual transmission semitrailer/trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 88 media radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Changing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Adjusting the display bright-
Important safety notes . . . . . . . 231 Multifunction lever
ness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Maximum permissible gross vehicle Adjusting the field of view
weight (manually/automatically) . . . . . . 88 Multifunction lever and gear display
Vehicle identification plate . . . . 473 Automatic semitrailer track- General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Multifunction lever . . . . . . . . . . 232

Index
Multifunction steering wheel Switch sound on or off (Multime- Off-road driving

Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 dia Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Adjusting the underride
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Switching on/off (multimedia guard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Checklist after driving off-
road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Activating or deactivating
N Checklist before driving off-
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Bluetooth® telephony . . . . . . . 194 Navigation
Cleaning after driving off-road or
Connecting a Bluetooth® Displaying route guidance (on-
on construction sites . . . . . . . . 325
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 board computer) . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Driving on downhill slopes . . . . . 323
Deauthorising a Bluetooth® Night lighting
device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193 Driving on sand . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Switch on and off (on-board
Displaying and selecting quick- Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Preparing for fording . . . . 323…324
Noise Rules for driving off-road . . . . . . 321
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Wheels/tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Requirements for a Bluetooth® Off-road gear
connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Notebook holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 254
Searching for and authorising a Number plate lamp Oil level
Bluetooth® device . . . . . . . . . . 192 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Checking (automatic transmis-
Multimedia system sion) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Overview of Multimedia Radio O
On-board computer
Touch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 Odometer Activating and deactivating Active
Radio with USB port and Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Sideguard Assist . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Activating and deactivating
Setting volume (multimedia radio Attention Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Index
Activating and deactivating Checking the rest time . . . . . . . 153 Menus (overview) . . . . . . . . . . . 152
crawler mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Diesel particulate filter, starts Monitoring information
Activating and deactivating regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
EcoRoll mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Diesel particulate filter; blocks Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Activating and deactivating Lane regeneration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Notes on display messages . . . . 496
Keeping Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Displaying diagnostic data . . . . . 163 Notes on events . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Adjusting headlamp range . . . . . 165 Displaying display Opening/resetting the trip
Adjusting the instrument light- messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
ing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Displaying economical driv- Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Alarm clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 ing style (Fleetboard EcoSup- Operating audio equipment . . . . 157
Areas on the display . . . . . . . . . 151 port) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Operating the level control
Audio and communications Displaying lane markings (Lane system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307…308
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Keeping Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Operating the telephone . . . . . . 157
Calling up/resetting the trip Displaying route guidance (navig- Operation and maintenance
computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 ation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Check the tyre pressure . . . . . . 159 Displaying the maintenance due Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Checking engine operating date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Displaying trailer/semitrailer
Setting the axle load display . . . 159
Checking supply pressure . . . . . 163 data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Setting the delayed switch-off
Checking the axle load . . . . . . . 159 Displaying vehicle speed . . . . . . 154
time of the exterior lighting . . . . 165
Checking the coolant temperat- Distance display (Proximity
Setting the display language . . . 165
ure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Control Assist) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setting the engine oil quality . . . 165
Checking the driving time . . . . . 153 Driving mode menu . . . . . . . . . 154
Setting the engine oil viscos-
Checking the oil level . . . . . . . . 163 Grey display message . . . . . . . . 496
ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Checking the range . . . . . . . . . 153 Instrument cluster . . . . . . . . . . 141

Index
Setting the rear axle oil qual- Yellow display message . . . . . . 496 Alternative diesel fuels in accord-
ity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 On-board computer (Classic Cockpit) ance with DIN EN 15940 . . . . . . 490
Setting the transmission oil Red display message . . . . . . . . 496 Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Setting the unit of measure- On-board computer (Multimedia
Fuel additive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
ment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Cockpit)
fuel grade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Setting the units . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Red display message . . . . . . . . 496
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
Setting video pop-up . . . . . . . . 165 On-board electronics Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Settings menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Engine electronics . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Transmission oils . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Showing camera images . . . . . . 154 Online services Operating hours
Switch automatic interior lighting Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Display (on-board
control on and off . . . . . . . . . . 165
Open Source Software . . . . . . . . . 15 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Switch Hydromove on and
Open the menu (Multimedia Radio Operating instructions (vehicle
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Switch night lighting on and
Open/close the roof hatch . . . . . . 62
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Operating safety
Opening/closing the circular roof
Switch rocking free on and Changes in engine output . . . . . . . 9
hatch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Declaration of conformity (electro-
Switching PPC on and off . . . . . 165 Operating data magnetic compatibility) . . . . . . . . 6
Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Declaration of conformity
Total distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Operating fluids (jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6…7
Trip data menu . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490 Declaration of conformity (wire-
Trip distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Adjusting (on-board less vehicle components) . . . . . 474
Tyre pressure loss warning computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Index
Operating temperature (coolant Parking brake Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

temperature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Arrangement of the spring-loaded Preselecting working speed . . . . 374
Operating unit brake cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Shifting information . . . . . . . . . 372
Level control system . . . . . . . . 305 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Switch on and off manually . . . . 376
Releasing the spring-loaded brake Transmission-driven . . . . . . . . . 371
Outside mirrors
cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Mirror heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 PPC
usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Parking up the vehicle setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Special measures . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Outside temperature PPC (Predictive Powertrain Control)
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Permissible axle loads Switch on and off (on-board
Vehicle identification plate . . . . 473 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Pets in the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Preparing for a journey
PIN assignment (radio with USB External visual and functional
Overview of the media menu port and Bluetooth®) . . . . . . . . . 186 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
(Multimedia Radio Touch) . . . . . . 198
Pop-up roof Internal visual and functional
Overview of the radio menu
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Overview of the telephone menu Position lamp
(Multimedia Radio Touch) . . . . . . 195 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Protective grille
Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Power take-off
P Rear lamp unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Paintwork Deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Proximity Control Assist
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384 Emergency operation mode . . . . 376 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 266
Engine-driven . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Index
Distance display (on-board activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Supported data formats . . . . . . 180

computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Adjusting the balance . . . . . . . . 174 Switch RDS on and off . . . . . . . 175
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Adjusting the treble . . . . . . . . . 174 Switch traffic information service
Pulling away Anti-theft protection . . . . . . . . . 171 priority on and off . . . . . . . . . . 176
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 Ending traffic announce- Switching to AUX mode . . . . . . 177
ments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Range
Pump lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
External audio source . . . . . . . . 178 Checking (on-board
Functions of AUX mode . . . . . . 177 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Q
Notes on USB mode . . . . . . . . . 178 REACH directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Qualified specialist workshop . . . . . 9
Operating safety . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Reading SMS (Multimedia Radio
Operating temperature . . . . . . . 171 Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
R
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Radio Rear axle
Pin assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Adjusting the volume . . . . . . . . 157 Setting oil quality (on-board
RDS (radio data system) . . . . . . 175 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Changing the audio source or Resetting sound settings . . . . . . 174
track/radio station . . . . . . . . . . 157 Rear axle ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Save stations automatically . . . . 175
General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Selecting AUX input options . . . 177 Rear fog light
Radio (Multimedia Radio Touch) Selecting playback options . . . . 180 activation/deactivation . . . . . . . 96
Overview of radio menu . . . . . . 196 Selecting the playback Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Save stations automatically . . . . 197 folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Reduce the view (Multimedia
Setting radio options . . . . . . . . 197 Setting the bass . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Storing stations manually . . . . . 197 Setting the playing time dis- Refrigerant (air-conditioning
Radio with USB port and Bluetooth® play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Activating the USB socket . . . . . 179 Storing stations manually . . . . . 175 Refrigerator box . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Index
Refuelling Residual heat utilisation Reversing camera

Filling order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 135 Displaying the camera image
Notes (AdBlue®) . . . . . . . . . . . 339 Rest time (on-board computer) . . . . . . . . 154
Notes (fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Checking (on-board Setting video pop-up . . . . . . . . 165
Using the folding ladder (Arocs computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Reversing light
street sweeper) . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Restraint system
Registration Basic instructions for children . . . 41 Right-hand/left-hand traffic
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Function in the event of an Partially masking
Rejecting a call (Multimedia Radio accident . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Road paver mode
Remote control Limited protection . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Level control system . . . . . . . . 311
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Unlock/lock the doors . . . . . . . . 47 Protection provided . . . . . . . . . . 34
Rocking-free function
Self-test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Replacement key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Drive functions . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Warning beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Replacing the battery (key) . . . . . . 54 Switch on and off (button) . . . . . 239
Requirements for a Bluetooth® Rev counter Switch on and off (on-board
connection (multimedia radio Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Reverse gear lock . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Roller sunblind
Reserve level display Reverse warning device Switch on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 332 Roof position marker lamps
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 100
Resetting to factory settings Replacing a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . 105
(multimedia radio Touch) . . . . . . 191
Rotating beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Index
Route guidance Seat belt Selecting the equaliser setting

Displaying (on-board com- Adjusting the height . . . . . . . . . . 38 (multimedia radio Touch) . . . . . . 190
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Selecting the playback folder
Fastening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 (radio with USB port and
S Limited protection . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Bluetooth®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
SAE classifications (engine Protection provided . . . . . . . . . . 36 Selecting the time zone (Multime-
oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 dia Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Safety net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Warning beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Selector lever
Searching for and authorising a Multifunction lever and gear
Seat belt tensioners
Bluetooth® device (multimedia display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 Sensors
Seat covers
Seat Cleaning (distance sensor) . . . . 389
Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Activate/deactivate the seat Cleaning (rain and light
ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Seat/daybed combinations sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Adjusting the seat belt height . . . 67 in the L-cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Cleaning (Sideguard Assist) . . . . 389
Correct driver's seat position . . . 65 Notes on seat/daybed combina- Service brake
in the SoloStar Concept . . . . . . . 77 tions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Select the telephone number
Setting screen brightness (multi-
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 (Multimedia Radio Touch) . . . . . . 195
media radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . 191
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Selecting playback options
Setting speed-dependent volume
Switching the seat heating (radio with USB port and
adjustment (multimedia radio
on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Bluetooth®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Use the entry/exit feature . . . . . 67 Selecting the date and time format
Setting the AUX volume (Multime-
dia Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Index
Setting the balance and fader Smoke detector Setting the balance and
(Multimedia Radio Touch) . . . . . . 190 Briefly deactivating . . . . . . . . . . 122 fader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Setting the driving Checking the function . . . . . . . 122 Sound settings (radio with USB port
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309 General notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 and Bluetooth®)
Setting the playing time dis- Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . 122 Adjusting the treble . . . . . . . . . 174
play (radio with USB port and Snow chains Resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Bluetooth®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Checking the wheel clear- Setting the bass . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Setting the system language ance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
(Multimedia Radio Touch) . . . . . . 191 Sockets Speed
Setting treble and base settings Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Displaying (on-board com-
SoloStar Concept puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Setting volume (multimedia radio
Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Folding the bunk down/up . . . . . 78 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Side marker lights Sound settings (multimedia radio Spring-loaded brake cylinder
Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Touch) Moving to the drive position . . . 455
Activating/deactivating system Releasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Side windows sounds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Important safety notes . . . . . . . . 56 Adjusting the AUX volume . . . . . 190
Open/close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56 Stability Control Assist
Adjusting treble and bass
resetting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 deactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Function and notes . . . . . . . . . 249
Sideguard Assist Selecting the equaliser set-
Function and notes . . . . . . . . . 294 ting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 Starting assistance . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Sliding sunroof Setting speed-dependent volume Starting-off aid
adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 314
Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Index
Status area Under the bunk . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Switching off

Warning/indicator lamps over- Waste receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 With outside flaps . . . . . . . . . . 124 Switching off the vehicle . . . . . . 217
Steps Supply pressure Switching system sounds on or
Getting in/out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Checking (on-board off (multimedia radio Touch) . . . . 191
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Switching the multimedia radio
Stopping Checking the compressed-air Touch on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215 brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 System settings (multimedia radio
Stopping the vehicle . . . . . . . . . 217 Checking transmission/clutch Touch)
circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Resetting to factory settings . . . 191
Storing a station (radio with USB port
and Bluetooth®) Surround lighting (on-board Selecting the date and time
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
SVHC (substances of very high Selecting the time zone . . . . . . 191
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
concern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Setting the system language . . . 191
Storing stations (Multimedia Radio
Switch panels
Touch)
Above the windscreen . . . . . . . . 18 T
Automatically . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Bunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Tail light
Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Cockpit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Replacing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Stowage spaces and stowage com- Combination switch . . . . . . . . . . 32
partments Technical data
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25, 27
Cosmetic mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 AdBlue® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Multifunction lever . . . . . . . . . . . 32
In the driver cockpit . . . . . . . . . 124 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . 30
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Compressed-air reservoir . . . . . 494
Refrigerator box . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Switch sound on or off (Multimedia Compressed-air reservoir identi-
Radio Touch) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 fication plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495

Index
Compressed-air system . . . . . . 492 Operating (on-board com- Temperature

Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Adjusting (heating/
Engine identification plate . . . . . 473 Setting the volume for calls . . . . 157 air-conditioning system) . . . . . . 134
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Telephone (multimedia radio Touch) Outside temperature display . . . 143
Level control system . . . . . . . . 494 Accepting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Time
Maximum permissible tyre Call disconnection while the Messages on the display . . . . . . 143
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 vehicle is in motion . . . . . . . . . 195 Tipper mode
Operating temperature (coolant Calling a contact . . . . . . . . . . . 195 After tipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
temperature) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Calling up MirrorLink™ apps . . . 199 Before tipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Permissible difference in tyre Connecting a mobile phone via
pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
MirrorLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Spring-loaded brake cylin- On-board computer . . . . . . . . . 378
Dialling phone numbers from a
der . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494 Rear panel claw-type lock . . . . . 378
call list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Transmission oils . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Emergency number 112 . . . . . . 195
Vehicle identification plate/axle Tipper control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Functions during a call . . . . . . . 196
loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Tipping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
MirrorLink™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Wheel nut tightening Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Tool kit compartment
torques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Opening/closing . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Reading SMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Telediagnostics Rejecting a call . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Vehicle tool kit and emergency
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 Selecting the telephone num- equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Sending data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413 ber . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Topping up the washer fluid . . . . 396
Telephone Telephone menu overview . . . . . 195 Total distance
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Index
Tow-starting/towing-away Connecting or disconnecting Transfer case

Coupling jaw . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 hydraulic lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Switch off-road gear on/off . . . . 254
Front towing eye . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Coupling a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Transmission
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451 Disconnecting cables and Multifunction lever . . . . . . . . . . 232
Rear towing coupling . . . . . . . . 452 compressed-air lines . . . . . . . . 351
Displaying data (on-board com- Transmission oil
Traffic information service (radio with Checking the oil level (automatic
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
USB port and Bluetooth®) transmission) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Maintaining and caring for the
Stopping an announcement . . . . 176 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Switch priority on and off . . . . . 176 Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Notes and control elements of
Traffic Sign Assist the semitrailer truck hydraulic Setting the quality (on-board
activation/deactivation . . . . . . 290 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Notes on cables and compressed- Transmission/clutch circuit
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 air lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349 Checking supply pressure . . . . . 213
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Notes on coupling/hitching
Transport mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Trailer Stability Assist Transverse axle lock . . . . . . . . . . 250
Notes on the trailer/fifth-wheel
activation/deactivation . . . . . . 304 Trilex® rim with tyre
coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Operating data of the hydraulic
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304 system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Trailers/semitrailers Operating the hydraulic sys- Trilex® wheel
Attaching a semitrailer . . . . . . . 346 tem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Fitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Connecting cables and Ramp approach aid . . . . . . . . . 359 Removing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
compressed-air lines . . . . . . . . 349 Uncouple/decouple . . . . . . . . . 348
Trailing axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Index
Trip computer Turn signal indicators Tyre pressure table for single
Open/reset (on-board com- activation/deactivation . . . . . . . 99 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Replacing bulbs Tyre pressure table for twin
Trip data (on-board (headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Turn signal light Tyre pressure monitoring system
Trip distance Replacing bulbs Wheels with tyre pressure
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 (headlamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Replacing bulbs (lateral) . . . . . . 105 Tyre pressure sensor . . . . . . . . . 458
Truck Data Center
Replacing rear bulbs (rear lamp Tyre pressure table
Fleetboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Single tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
LED indicator lamp . . . . . . . . . . 201 Tyre age . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Twin tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Mercedes-Benz Truck App Tyre labelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Tyre tread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Portal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Tyre pressure
Tyres
Mercedes-Benz Uptime . . . . . . . 203 Determining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Balancing (information) . . . . . . . 457
Overview of vehicle com- Displaying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
puter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Loss warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Checking clearance (when using
Sending a Service Call mes- Maximum permissible air pres- snow chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
sage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 sure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Turbo retarder clutch Monitoring (on-board com-
Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Hydromove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 puter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Determining the air pressure . . . 461
Manoeuvring mode . . . . . . . . . 247 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Pulling away . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Permissible difference in pres-
sure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Replacing tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Index
Retreaded tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 Using the folding ladder (Arocs SVHC (substances of very high
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366 street sweeper) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 concern) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .... . 10
Unusual handling characterist- tow-starting/towing-away . .... 452
ics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 V transporting . . . . . . . . . . .... 452
Vehicle Unlock/lock the doors . . . .... . 47
U activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Vehicle identification plate . . . . . 473
Underride guard Correct use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Vehicle tool kit and emergency
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Data collection . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 deactivating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Unit of measurement Diagnostics connection . . . . . . .. 8 Voice control system (Multimedia
Adjusting (on-board Does not start . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 Radio Touch)
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Emergency mode (start) . . . . . . 210 Ending voice control . . . . . . . . . 194
Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 4 Saying voice commands . . . . . . 194
Units
Forced lowering . . . . . . . . . . . . 310 Starting voice control . . . . . . . . 193
Adjusting (on-board
computer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Identification plate . . . . . . . . . . 473 Voltage converter . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Liability for material defects . . . . 11
Unlock/lock the doors
Medical aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 W
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Parking up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412 Warning beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Qualified specialist workshop . . .. 9 Warning tone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
USB mode (radio with USB port and REACH directive . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Bluetooth®) Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Registration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. 9
activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 Warning/indicator lamps
Start/switch off with cab
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
tilted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Status area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Index
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Special equipment for operation

Washing the engine . . . . . . . . . . 391 Windows at low temperatures . . . . . . . . . 367
Waste receptacle . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 Defrosting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Winter package
Weight Windscreen heater . . . . . . . . . . . 117 Starting the vehicle at low
Load distribution . . . . . . . . . . . 244 temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Windscreen washer system
Wheel loads Wiper blades
Notes on winter operation . . . . . 118
Notes on axle/wheel loads . . . . 244 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Wheel nuts Topping up fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . 396 Wireless vehicle components
For light-alloy disc wheels . . . . . 431 Declaration of conformity . . . . . 474
Windscreen wipers
For steel disc wheels . . . . . . . . 431 activation/deactivation . . . . . . 116 Work lamps
Retightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 Replacing the wiper blades . . . . 398 Changing bulbs (bottom) . . . . . . 112
Tightening torques . . . . . . . . . . 493 Changing bulbs (top) . . . . . . . . 112
Winter diesel fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Wheels Working mode
Winter operation
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 Setting the working speed . . . . . 374
Before the journey . . . . . . . . . . 364
Checking clearance (when using Working speed
Cold start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
snow chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Preselecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Cold-start limits . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Driving in low temperatures . . . . 369
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Low-temperature operating
Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Unusual handling characterist-
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
ics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Parking in low temperatures . . . 369
Wind deflector Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Mercedes Actros User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Actros User Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Actros User Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OPERATOR'S MANUAL

Document organisation . . . . . . . 1 Diagnostics connection . . . . . . . . . 8

Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Notes on seat/daybed MirrorCam system . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG III

Overview of warning/indicator Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG VII

VIII Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG

Winter operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Refilling the windscreen washer

Flat tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Jump-starting, tow-starting and

Determining tyre pressure . . . . . . 461 Notes on fuel grade . . . . . . . . 486

XII Actros/Arocs/06.2024 ENG

Environmental protection Note Note

ently or officially approved by a technical Information about attachments, add-

▶ If damage should occur, immediately If the underbody panelling is damaged, Jack

den einschlägigen grundlegenden Bevollmächtigter technische Dokumenta- ● ATGX

keeper or driver of a vehicle. For this reas- Copyright

Cockpit Item Description Page

Item Description Page

Overhead control panel Item Description Page

Item Description Page

Instrument cluster Item Description Page

Instrument cluster (example)

Classic Cockpit warning/indicator Item Description Page

Item Description Page Item Description Page

Switch panels Item Description Page

Item Description Page Item Description Page

Door control units Item Description Page

Item Description Page

Door control units Item Description Page

Item Description Page

Bunk switch panel Item Description Page

Multifunction steering wheel Item Description Page

Item Description Page Item Description Page

Combination switch and multifunc- Item Description Page

Item Description Page

engaged. Information on operating Airbag

Danger Be diligent The generic term child restraint sys-

O The child restraint system must not be

Electronic key Change the battery of the key

Note Central locking and unlocking

Locking/unlocking centrally using make sure that no body parts are in

▶ During the closing process, make or Convenience opening

Requirements pull and hold the correspond-

Roof Opening the sliding sunroof and pop-

Vehicles with a ClassicSpace or Com-

▶ Vehicles with ClassicSpace cabs: ▶ Attach a hexagon socket wrench

Closing the pop-up roof mechanically

You can open the roof hatch at one end

Retracting the roller sun blind

Notes on the seats ▶ Make sure that no parts of the body

▶ Stow the locking mechanism for To adjust the neck cushion:

To fold the seat backrest: ▶ Use lever 6 to adjust the vibration

To adjust the seat backrest contour:

Setting up the safety net Note

▶ Ensure that the swivelling area of

Folding the seat backrest down to

Folding the bunk down/up

▶ Pull loop 3 on front passenger's seat

Note Bunks in the M-cab Note

Operating the MirrorCam system Standby mode and automatic deactiv-